JP2019177117A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving game efficiency.SOLUTION: A game machine is configured so that, even when game balls slip and fall from a first guide path along rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, if the game balls slip and fall from the rolling surface B1321, the game balls are scooped up by a guide member B1510 of a second guide plate B1500, for mounting the game balls on a second guide path. The scooped game balls are guided to a second specific winning hole B1002 opened to a second detection sensor B1250, so that, relative to a structure in which, many game balls fallen from the guide path are directed to an outlet hole 66 as loose balls, change of game efficiency by a way of playing a game, can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 141

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  There is a gaming machine configured to prevent excessive balls (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2015-181572

  However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of gaming efficiency. The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can improve gaming efficiency.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a game area where game balls flow down, a first state that constitutes a guide route capable of guiding the game balls, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route. And a route construction means switchable between the first guidance route and a second guidance route different from the first guidance route as the guidance route. The first guide route includes an upper arrangement portion arranged on the upper side of the second guide route.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the entrance area includes a first entrance area and a second entrance area different from the first entrance area, The first guide route is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the first entrance area, and the second guide route is configured to be able to guide the game ball to the second entrance area, and the second guide route Comprises an upper arrangement part arranged above the first guide route.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route intersect each other in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, gaming efficiency can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the gaming efficiency can be improved regardless of which guide route the game ball flows down.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, the upper arrangement portion of one guide route can be arranged above the other guide route.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XIIa-XIIa line | wire of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XIIIa-XIIIa line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XIV-XIV line | wire of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device, (b) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device, and (c) is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device. It is a decomposition | disassembly back surface perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a displacement control apparatus. (A) is a rear view of a contact member, (b) is a front view of a guide member, (c) is a front view of an operation member. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the game board and operation | movement unit in the XXIa-XXIa line | wire of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board and a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a launch effect unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a launch effect unit. (A) is a side view of the 1st light irradiation apparatus in the arrow R direction view of FIG. 25, (b) is a side view of the 2nd light irradiation apparatus in the arrow L direction view of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and launch unit in the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a front exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an injection device. It is a back surface exploded perspective view of an injection device. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb of FIG. FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb of FIG. FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVc-XXXVc in FIG. (A) is a plan view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a side view of the transmission arm member and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb of FIG. FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member and the lid member taken along line XXXVIc-XXXVIc in FIG. (A) is a plan view of the front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. 28. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. (A) to (f) is a plan view of a linear motion member, a collision member, a contact member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. (A) to (e) are plan views of a linear motion member, a collision member, a contact member, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. (A) to (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member, the transmission arm member, and the lid member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. It is a top view of the injection device in the arrow XXXVIIa direction view of FIG. As the front transmission member and the rear transmission member rotate, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the arrangement of the columnar projection of the transmission arm member FIG. It is a front perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear perspective view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of an expansion / contraction unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of an expansion / contraction unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a production member. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a rotating plate. It is a side view of a rotating plate. (A) is a front perspective view of an expansion / contraction displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member and the shielding design member. (A) is a front perspective view of an expansion / contraction displacement member and a shielding design member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member and the shielding design member. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of a function board part. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit. It is a rear view of an enlargement / reduction unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of an effect member. It is a rear view of a production member. (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a). (A) is a rear view of the effect member, and (b) is a top view of the effect member as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. 75. It is a front perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a rear perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a front exploded perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a displacement rotation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a horizontal slide member. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the displacement rotation unit in the LXXXIII-LXXXIII line of FIG. It is a perspective view of a wiring arm member. It is a perspective view of the path | route formation member of a wiring guide member. (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). (A) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit along the line LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb in FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a center frame, a light guide plate effect means, and decoration means. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate effect means and the decoration means. It is a disassembled rear perspective view of the center frame, the light guide plate effect means and the decoration means. FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view of a game board and an operation unit taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. 2. It is the elements on larger scale of the 1st decoration member in the range XCVII of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the expansion / contraction unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of a rotating plate. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fourth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the protruding portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. According to the rotation of the front transmission member and the rear transmission member in the fifth embodiment, the output state of the detection sensor, the arrangement of the linear motion member, the arrangement of the collision member, the arrangement of the projecting portion of the contact member, and the circle of the transmission arm member It is the figure which showed the time change of arrangement | positioning of a columnar protrusion. It is sectional drawing of the game board and launch unit in 6th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the XXVII-XXVII line of FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a 7th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of the board | substrate box in 7th Embodiment. It is a back perspective view of a substrate box. (A) is a front view of a board | substrate box, (b) is a side view of a board | substrate box. It is a front perspective view of a box cover. It is a back perspective view of a box cover. (A) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 108, and (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover as viewed in the direction of arrow CXb in FIG. 109. (A) is a front perspective view of a box base, (b) is a rear perspective view of a box base. (A) is a front perspective view of the main controller, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the main controller. FIG. 113 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the main controller in a portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). (A) is a front view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112 (a), (b) is a side view of the main control device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVb of FIG. 114 (a), FIG. 114C is a side view of the main controller as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXIVc in FIG. (A) is a partial enlarged front view of the substrate box in a state where the key is operated to the off position, and (b) is a partial enlarged front view of the substrate box in a state where the key is operated to the on position. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box as viewed in the direction of arrow CXVIb in FIG. 115 (b). is there. FIG. 115A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. FIG. FIG. 115A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along section line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 115B is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along section line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb in FIG. FIG. FIG. 116A is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116A, and FIG. 116B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box taken along the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the board | substrate box in 8th Embodiment, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the board | substrate box in sectional line CXXIb-CXXIb of Fig.121 (a). (A) is a front view of the board | substrate box in 9th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the board | substrate box in 10th Embodiment, (b) is a front schematic diagram of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board in 11th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the CXXXXI-CXXXI line | wire of FIG. (A) is a front view of a variable prize apparatus, (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a variable prize apparatus in the range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the CXXXIII-CXXXIII line | wire of Fig.132 (a). It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of a variable winning device. (A) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of the variable prize apparatus as viewed in the direction of arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137 (a). (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa line of FIG. 137 (a), (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb line of FIG. 137 (a). It is a front view of a variable winning device. (A) And (b) is a front schematic diagram of the rolling surface, the upper right arrangement | positioning inclined surface, and the upper left arrangement | positioning inclined surface which show typically the movement locus | trajectory of the ball | bowl rolling in the range before entrance. It is a partial front enlarged view of a game board showing the vicinity of the variable winning device. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol (C) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter and the hit in the normal symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the opening / closing pattern of the 1st specific prize opening corresponding to a round of the 1st operation pattern, and the 2nd specific prize opening, the number of payout, and game efficiency, (b) Is a diagram showing an opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning opening and the second specific winning opening corresponding to the round of the second operation pattern, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency, (c) It is the figure which showed the opening / closing pattern of the 1st specific winning opening and 2nd specific winning opening corresponding to a round of 3 operation | movement patterns, the number of payout, and game efficiency. It is a front view of the game board in 12th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a variable winning device. (A) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of the variable prize apparatus as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLb in FIG. 150 (a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. 150 (b). It is a rear view of the variable prize-winning device in the direction of arrow CLc. (A) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of the variable prize apparatus as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIb in FIG. 151 (a), and (c) is in FIG. 151 (b). It is a rear view of the variable prize-winning device in the arrow CLIc direction view. (A) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus, (b) is a top view of the variable prize apparatus as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIB of FIG. 152 (a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. 152 (b). It is a rear view of the variable prize-winning device as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIC. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus taken along line CLIIIa-CLIIIa in FIG. 150 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus taken along line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 150 (a); FIG. 151C is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus taken along line CLIIIc-CLIIIc in FIG. 151A, and FIG. 15D is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus taken along line CLIIId-CLIIId in FIG. 152A. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus along the CLIVa-CLIVa line in FIG. 151 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus along the CLIVb-CLIVb line in FIG. 151 (a); (C) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the CLIVc-CLIVc line | wire of Fig.151 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLVa-CLVa in FIG. 152 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along line CLVb-CLVb in FIG. 152 (a), (C) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the CLVc-CLVc line | wire of Fig.152 (a). (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st prize opening, a 2nd prize opening, and a variable prize apparatus. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the performance of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the 1st control example of 12th Embodiment. It is a front view of the variable prize apparatus in 13th Embodiment. It is a top view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a 2nd rotation member and a transmission member. (A) And (b) is the right side view of the 2nd rotation member and transmission member in the arrow CLXIa direction view of FIG. (A) to (c) is a front view of a pre-entrance range in a range CLXIIa in FIG. It is a front view of the game board in 14th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of the variable prize apparatus in 15th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a variable winning device. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus in the CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa line | wire of FIG. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line of FIG. 172, (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line of FIG. 172. FIG. 17C is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along a line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line in FIG. 172. (A) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line of FIG. 172, (b) is sectional drawing of the variable winning apparatus in the line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line of FIG. 172. FIG. 17C is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device taken along a line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line in FIG. 172. It is a front view of the game board and variable prize apparatus in 16th Embodiment. It is a top view of the variable prize apparatus in 17th Embodiment. (A) is a front view of a transmission rotator, (b) is a side view of the transmission rotator in the direction of arrow CLXXb in FIG. 179 (a), and (c) is a circumference of the transmission rotator. FIG. 4D is a development view in which the surface is developed, and FIG. 4D is a schematic view schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotating body and the states of the first guide plate and the second guide plate. It is a front view of a variable winning device. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st guide plate and 2nd guide plate in a 4th operation pattern, (b) is the 1st guide plate and 2nd guide plate in a 5th operation pattern. FIG. It is a front view of the variable prize apparatus in 19th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a partial front view of the variable prize apparatus in 20th Embodiment in the range corresponding to the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158, (c) is a view in the direction of the arrow CLXXXIIIc of FIG. 183 (a). It is a partial top view of a variable winning device. It is a partial front view of the game board in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a top view of the variable winning device in the twenty-second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device along the line CLXXXVb-CLXXXVb in FIG. 185 (a), and (c) is a diagram of FIG. FIG. 185 is a partial side view of the variable prize apparatus as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXXVc of 185 (b). It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of ROM in MPU of the main control apparatus in the 3rd control example in 22nd Embodiment. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st random number table. (A)-(c) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the small hit classification selection table. It is the figure which showed the time change of the 1st guide plate and the 2nd guide plate in the small hit A, and the time change of the 1st guide plate and the 2nd guide plate in the small hit B. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the correspondence of the 1st hit type counter and the jackpot type in a special symbol. (A) is the figure which showed the time change of the specific winning opening in an 8th action pattern, (b) is the figure which showed the time change of the specific winning opening in a 9th action pattern. It is a flowchart which shows a main process. (A) And (b) is a top view of the variable prize apparatus in 23rd Embodiment. It is a right view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a front view of a variable winning device. It is a top view of the transmission hole of a 1st guide plate, a linear motion member, and a rotation member. (A) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus, (b) is a partial top enlarged view of the variable prize apparatus in the direction of the arrow CXCVIIIb in FIG. 198 (a), and (c) is a diagram of the variable prize apparatus. It is a front view and (d) is a partial upper surface enlarged view of the variable winning device as viewed in the direction of arrow CXCVIIId in FIG. 198 (c). (A) is the expanded view which expanded the circumferential surface of the transmission rotary body in 24th Embodiment, (b) is the partial expanded view of 1st effect area B24760, (c) is the 2nd effect. It is a partial expanded view of area B24770. (A) And (b) is a right view of the electrically-driven accessory in 25th Embodiment. (A) is the right view of the transmission member which visually recognized the transmission member from the rotating shaft direction, (b) is a front view of the transmission member in the arrow CCIb direction view of FIG. 201 (a). (A) to (c) is a front view of the electric accessory and the second winning opening. It is a front view of the variable prize apparatus in 26th Embodiment. It is a front view of the variable prize apparatus in 27th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in a 28th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a top view of a lower frame. It is a front view of a lower frame. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXIIIa in FIG. 211, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXIIIb in FIG. 211. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXIV-CCXIV line | wire of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the lower frame in the CCXIV-CCXIV line | wire of FIG. FIG. 220 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CCXVI-CCXVI in FIG. 211. (A) is the elements on larger scale of the lower frame in the CCXVIIa part of Drawing 214, (b) is the elements on larger scale of the lower frame in the CCXVIIb-CCXVIIb line of Drawing 210. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a lower frame showing a transition of a ball distributing operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line CCXIV-CCXIV in FIG. 210. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a lower frame showing a transition of a ball distributing operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line CCXIV-CCXIV in FIG. 210. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of a lower frame showing a transition of a ball distributing operation by a distribution member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along line CCXIV-CCXIV in FIG. 210. It is a front perspective view of the lower frame in the 29th embodiment. It is a back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower frame. It is a top view of a lower frame. It is a front view of a lower frame. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIa in FIG. 226, and (b) is a side view of the lower frame in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIb in FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX in FIG. 225. 226 is a cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX in FIG. 225. 227 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CCXXXXI-CCXXXI in FIG. 227 is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along the line CCXXXII-CCXXXII in FIG. 226 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distributing operation by the distributing member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX in FIG. 226 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distributing operation by the distributing member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX in FIG. 226 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame showing the transition of the ball distributing operation by the distributing member, and corresponds to a cross section taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX in FIG. FIG. 235 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame taken along line CCXXXVI-CCXXXVI in FIG. 235 (b). It is a partial expanded sectional view of the lower frame in a 30th embodiment. It is a rear view of a lower frame. It is a partial expanded sectional view of the lower frame in a 30th embodiment. It is a rear view of a lower frame. (A) is a top view of the dish member in 31st Embodiment, (b) is sectional drawing of the dish member in the CCXLIb-CCXLIb line | wire of FIG. 241 (a), (c) is FIG. It is sectional drawing of the dish member in the CCXLIc-CCXLIc line | wire of a). (A) is sectional drawing of the lower frame in 32nd Embodiment, and respond | corresponds to the cross section in the CCXXXII-CCXXXII line | wire of FIG. 227, (b) is sectional drawing of the lower frame in 33rd Embodiment. , Corresponding to a cross section taken along line CCXXXII-CCXXXII in FIG.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 to FIG. 97, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  In the following description, the front side of the paper is the front (front) side and the back side of the paper is the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is left (left) ) Side. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shot that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the front upper side and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes to the front side and opens the upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light-emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light-emitting mode by turning on or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface opened on the left side. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (launch strength), and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged to the right, and the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened by sliding it to the left against the urge. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and a rail 61. , 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, a second winning port 640, a variable winning device 65, a through gate 67, a variable display unit 80, and the like, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (FIG. 1)) on the back side (or front side).

  The base plate 60 is formed from a wooden plate member. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable display unit 80 are arranged in a through hole (for example, see FIG. 5) formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like. The base plate 60 may be made of a light transmissive resin material. In this case, it is possible for the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, the “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds, and “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  The state change between the opened state and the closed state of the electric accessory 640a is caused by the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate that is provided with a rotating shaft at the lower end portion and is rotationally displaced in a manner of tilting or standing up toward the game area side. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball is easily guided to the second winning opening 640 along the upper surface of the opening / closing plate, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the opening / closing plate is connected to the game area and the second game hole. It is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 by closing the space between the two winning ports 640.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released per time are not changed, Only the hit probability may be changed so as to be higher than normal.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, the variable display device unit 80 is disposed at a position (behind the window portion of the base plate 60) that is visible through the center portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is disposed on the base plate 60 so as to surround the third symbol display device 81 in a front view.

  The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display of about 9 inches to 19 inches, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). The middle and bottom three symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It should be noted that the second prize opening 640 may be changed during the probability change or in a short time by other methods such as increasing the probability of winning during the probability change or in the time short, and increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a with respect to one hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the area on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball launched to the game board 13 can pass therethrough. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be two, for example.

  Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80. For example, the through gate 67 may be on the left or right or below the variable display device unit 80. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, on the lower right side of the through gate 67 when viewed from the front, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. The arrangement of the second winning opening 640 is not limited to this. For example, it may be lower than the first winning opening 64 in front view, or may be on the left side of the left and right center of the game area.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have the electric accessory 640a as in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, so the first winning opening 64 without the electric winning combination 640a is present. Toward the left of the variable display device unit 80 so that the ball passes through the left side (so-called “left-handed”). It is advantageous for the player to aim to become.

  On the other hand, during the probability change or during the short time, passing the ball through the through gate 67 makes it easy for the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state and to easily win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes through the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and passes through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory 640a. It is advantageous for the player to set the state and aim to win the 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  In addition, unlike the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, when the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, aiming at the first winning port 64 by “right-handed” or second by “left-handed” It is also possible to aim at the winning port 640. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Therefore, the troublesomeness of changing how to hit the ball can be eliminated.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the first winning port 64 cannot be aimed by “right-handed”, and the ball fired by “left-handed” does not pass through the through gate 67. It is configured. For this reason, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment allows the player to launch a ball according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming sluggish by adding a game that changes the way the ball is hit.

  A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64, and a specific winning port 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more than two (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the right side of the first winning opening 64, For example, it may be the lower right side of the first winning port 64, the lower left side of the first winning port 64, the left or right side of the variable display device unit 80, or the upper side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the gaming board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A sphere that flows down in the game area and has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to an unillustrated sphere discharge path through the out opening 71.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. In the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a are arranged in the front-rear direction. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 640a is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205. .

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (lighting units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and fluctuating effects (fluctuation). Display) and setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as a notice effect. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors MT1, MT2, MT3, MT4, MT5, and the like.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the structure of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500, and FIG. 6 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. 5 and 6, the liquid crystal display device (variable display device unit 80) disposed in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the back side is shown through the opening 511a. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 is referred to as appropriate.

  The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front by forming a rectangular opening 511 a at the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a has a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

  The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front side end of the outer wall 512, and faces the game board 13 in an assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate part 513 is provided.

  The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted to a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b that can be inserted through the fastening screws.

  By positioning the positioning convex portion 513a in the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60, the rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60, the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b, and the base plate 60 is screwed. Since the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be fixed integrally, the overall rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be improved.

  In addition, the shape of the positioning convex part 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, a convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the fitting concave portion of the base plate 60 (in this embodiment, circular or oval) may be used, and the fitting gap is large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (a smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting concave portion is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also a rectangular shape correspondingly.

  As described above, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a plurality of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, a windmill (not shown), and rails 61 and 62. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the window 60a (see FIG. 90) opened in the base plate 60 can be fitted from the front side. Center frame 86 configured in shape, ball flow down unit 150 configured to allow balls discharged from the game area to flow down, and granular member 320 (see FIG. 54) toward the front side of third symbol display device 81 It is configured by assembling a launching effect unit 300 or the like that can be configured, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the inner frame 12 in a manner in which it is disposed opposite to the surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) and fixed.

  The base plate 60 is formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive resin material, and is configured to make it easy for the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. Thereby, irrespective of the shape and arrangement of the base plate 60, the structure disposed on the back side thereof can be visually recognized and used for various effects.

  For example, even when the ball flow-down unit 150 is provided on the back side of the base plate 60, the base plate 60 can be seen through and the back side can be seen, so that the sphere flowing down the ball flow-down unit 150 can be visually recognized. . In the present embodiment, the ball descending unit 150 is designed in consideration of the effect produced by the visually recognized sphere, which will be described in detail later.

  In addition, when there is a part which you do not want to show to a player, what is necessary is just to cope with sticking a sealing member with low light transmittance (or light non-transmission).

  The center frame 86 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

  The firing effect unit 300 receives the granular member 320 (see FIG. 54), and the partition member 310 that divides the range in which the granular member 320 can be scattered is disposed inside the center frame 86, so that the granular member 320 is placed in the center frame. It is possible to fire toward the inside of 86. Therefore, it is possible for the player who visually recognizes the display of the third symbol display device 81 through the inner window portion of the center frame 86 to effectively recognize the granular member 320 scattered on the front side of the third symbol display device 81. it can. The details of the launch effect unit 300 will be described later.

  The operation unit 500 is disposed on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are disposed therein. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510, and a displacement rotation unit 800 disposed symmetrically on the inner left and right sides of the rear case 510. Is provided.

  Specifically, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 at the position above the opening 511a, and the displacement rotation unit 800 is disposed at the left and right positions of the opening 511a. First, an outline of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

  7 to 11 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of operation control of the operation unit 500 in time series. 7 shows the expansion / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state, and in FIG. 8, the expansion / reduction unit 600 in the overhang state and the displacement rotation unit 800 in the production standby state are shown. In FIG. 9, an enlargement / reduction unit 600 in an enlarged state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in an effect standby state are shown.

  Also, FIG. 10 shows an expansion / reduction unit 600 in the effect standby state and a displacement rotation unit 800 in the effect upper end state, and in FIG. 11, the left displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect upper end state and the right displacement rotation unit. The unit 800 is in the effect lower end state.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap in front view. Therefore, for example, when the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the production upper end state (see FIG. 10), if the enlargement / reduction unit 600 changes state from the production standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the effect standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, The state change from the production standby state is controlled to be executable on condition that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the production standby state, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 overlap in front view. Can be avoided. Accordingly, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (allowing the front and rear positions to overlap).

  As shown in FIGS. 7 to 9, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be able to be displaced downward in a state where the production members 700 are collectively arranged at one place, and in front of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 after the downward displacement. The constituent members of the effect member 700 are separated from each other in the state of being arranged in the position, and the operation is controlled so that the area visually recognized in front view is increased (see FIG. 9).

  After that, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is controlled so that the effect members 700 gather again (see FIG. 8), move up and dispose in a state of being arranged in one place, and return to the effect standby state shown in FIG.

  The state changes shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 are executed when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state. As shown in FIGS. 7, 10, and 11, the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the horizontal slide member 840 can be displaced from the stand-by state in a direction having a horizontal component as well as a vertical component.

  In the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced along a path curve S1 set by a mechanism described later. The path curve S1 includes a common arc part S1a having an arc shape centered on each center point C1, and an advancing / retreating path part S1b extending downward from the lower end of the common arc part S1a.

  In FIG. 10, a pair of left and right lateral slide members 840 are disposed at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a. In FIG. 11, the left lateral slide member 840 is disposed at the upper end position of the common arc portion S1a, while the right side The horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at a position above the lower end position of the common arc portion S1a.

  Therefore, when the left side slide member 840 is displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 11 and the right side slide member 840 is displaced upward, it is as if the side slide member 840 is in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to make the player visually recognize as if it is rotationally displaced around the center point C1 arranged closer to the center.

  That is, the horizontal slide member 840 can be visually recognized as a part of the rotation effect body having the same size as the display area of the 3rd symbol display device 81, and the production freedom degree of the production using the horizontal slide member 840 is improved. be able to.

  12 (a) and 12 (b) are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 7, and FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are the same as FIG. FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIIIa-XIIIa, and FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 along the line XIV-XIV in FIG.

  7 and 9, the game board 13 is not shown, but FIGS. 12 to 14 show a state where the game board 13 is assembled to the front side of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 2).

  12A and 13A show an example of a state in which the granular member 320 stays downward. In FIGS. 12B and 13B, the granular member 320 is fired and scattered. An example of this state is shown.

  In the production standby state shown in FIGS. 12A and 12B, the production member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is arranged such that the central portion of the collective arrangement is arranged above the division member 310 of the firing production unit 300. Through 310, a large part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to be visible.

  On the other hand, in the enlarged state shown in FIG. 13A and FIG. 13B, the effect member 700 is disposed in the vicinity of the partition member 310 of the launch effect unit 300 and is hidden by the effect member 700 (see FIG. 9). ), Most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is shielded from being visible.

  Since the displacement trajectory of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the partition member 310 do not interfere with each other, the firing effect unit 300 is set so as to execute the operation effect of firing the granular member 320 on the partition member 310 regardless of the arrangement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. It is possible to control.

  As shown to Fig.12 (a), the granular member 320 is arrange | positioned below the lower edge of the display area of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, and is fired by the path | route which inclines as it goes ahead. It is struck against the front wall of the partition member 310 and rises while rebounding in the range formed by the partition member 310.

  Thereby, since the granular member 320 can be shown to the player as if it comes toward the player's side, the attention to the effect using the granular member 320 can be improved.

  In addition, by configuring in this way, the range in which the granular member 320 is scattered can be brought to the player side, and the components such as the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. It is possible to avoid a low degree of freedom in arrangement.

  In other words, as the standby position of the granular member 320 that is fired toward the partition member 310 of the present embodiment, a position directly below the partition member 310 or a front position may be employed. However, in this case, since the launch effect unit 300 is disposed in the space on the back side of the first winning opening 64, it is possible to secure a space for providing a guide path for flowing a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. It becomes difficult and it may be necessary to move the position of the first winning opening 64 to cope with it.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the partition member 310 is arranged at the forefront position, and the standby position of the granular member 320 is arranged obliquely rearward, so that the space on the back side of the first winning port 64 can be secured. It is possible to arrange the guide route of the sphere without any problem, and to prevent the situation where the first winning port 64 cannot be arranged freely.

  If the control which discharges the granular member 320 in the state shown to Fig.12 (a) is performed, as shown in FIG.12 (b), the granular member 320 scattered within the division member 310 and the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of FIG. It is possible to show the player together with the display in the display area. Thereby, a player can be made to visually recognize combining a planar display and the motion of the granular member 320 displaced in three dimensions.

  When the control for firing the granular member 320 is performed in the state shown in FIG. 13A, the scattering of the granular member 320 inside the partition member 310 and the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 are performed as shown in FIG. 13B. You can show the player together with the change. In this case, for example, the granular member 320 on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 whose state changes is obtained by combining the timing of the scattering of the granular member 320 and the timing of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 being displaced in a discrete manner. Can be visually recognized, and the force of changing the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be enhanced.

  Here, as a method of effecting together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, a method of switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 together with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is also conceivable.

  However, as in the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is disposed on the back side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 blocks most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Even if the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched, it is difficult to show the display and it is difficult to produce the effect effectively.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the position of the partition member 310 that forms the range in which the granular member 320 that produces the operation effect along with the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 scatters is provided on the front side of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Therefore, even when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 covers most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, it is not difficult to show the granular member 320 to the player.

  Furthermore, by configuring the granular member 320 with a small member, it is possible to prevent the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from becoming difficult to see compared to the case where the granular member 320 is configured with a large member.

  Therefore, even when the enlargement / reduction unit 600 covers most of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the effect of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be improved.

  Further, the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used as the effect of visually confirming the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the displacement rotation unit 800.

  That is, in the displacement rotation unit 800, as with the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the horizontal slide member 840 is retracted from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (effect standby state, see FIG. 7), Since the state of the slide member 840 can be changed between the state in which the slide member 840 is arranged on the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (the effect lower end state, the effect upper end state, see FIGS. 10 and 11), The effect of visually recognizing the dispersed granular member 320 and the display of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing the dispersed granular member 320 and the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotating unit 800 are performed. be able to.

  In this case, although the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has been described as being able to produce an effect effectively by scattering the granular member 320 in accordance with the displacement in a manner in which the effect member 700 is dispersed, the displacement rotation unit 800 can rotate. The particulate member 320 is scattered in accordance with the rotation of the wing member 854 disposed in the air flow, so that an air flow is generated by the rotation of the wing member 854 (the wing member 854 becomes so large that an air flow is generated). It can be visually recognized as if it is rotating at a high speed, and the effect of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be improved.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the effect of visually recognizing the scattering of the granular member 320 in combination with the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing in combination with the enlargement / reduction unit 600 or the displacement rotation unit 800 are provided. And can be used for both.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the rear end line BL1 of the first light irradiation device 330 that is a part of the launch effect unit 300 and is disposed directly above the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown in FIG. It is arranged on the back side of the front end line FL1 of the displacement rotation unit 800 on the cross section. Therefore, depending on the displacement trajectory of the lateral slide member 840 of the displacement rotation unit 800 (for example, when the lateral slide member 840 continues to be displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 14), the first light irradiation device 330 and the displacement rotation unit 800 may collide.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the advance / retreat path portion S1b is set as a path that can avoid a collision between the launch effect unit 300 and the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, by setting the advancing / retreating path portion S1b as a path passing through a gap provided in an oblique direction between the injection device 400 of the launch effect unit 300 and the first light irradiation device 330, the rear end line BL1 and the front end line FL1 The degree of freedom of setting can be improved, and it is configured to be able to move upwardly beyond the first light irradiation device 330 that sets the rear end line BL1, and a large displacement width of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be secured. .

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the effect member 700 is displaced, the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are disposed close to each other in the front-rear direction. In the playable state, the space is arranged so that a space can be secured between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310, but until the space between the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 is secured until the transport. It is not a consideration. Therefore, at the time of conveyance, it is desirable that the effect member 700 is maintained at the upper end position of the displacement range, and the partition member 310 and the effect member 700 are restricted so as not to be disposed close to each other.

  Returning to FIG. The operation unit 500 includes a displacement regulating device 180 that is fastened and fixed to the back case 510. The displacement restricting device 180 is configured to be able to change its state by manual operation from the back surface of the rear case 510, and restricts the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from being displaced downward from the effect standby state in the restricting state.

  By adopting the displacement regulating device 180, even when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment, shipment and conveyance of the pachinko machine 10 can be facilitated.

  In detail, conventionally, means for suppressing the displacement of the movable accessory by, for example, filling a cushioning material (cushion member such as cotton) into the range in which the movable accessory is displaced, and extracting the cushioning material after reaching the game hall. As a result, the movable accessory may be prevented from being displaced during shipment or transportation. However, when the central opening of the base plate 60 is closed as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 12A), there is no through portion for extracting the cushioning material, so the game board 13 and the back case 510 If it is not disassembled, the cushioning material cannot be extracted, and there is a possibility that the burden on the game hall will be great.

  As a countermeasure, the displacement forming device 180 is employed in the present embodiment. Thus, the state of the displacement restricting device 180 can be changed between the restriction state for restricting the up-and-down displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the restriction release state for releasing the restriction without releasing the fixation of the game board 13 and the back case 510. Can be switched. Hereinafter, the details of the configuration of the displacement forming device 180 will be described first, and then the details of the state change will be described.

  15A is a rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 15B is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 15C is a front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180. FIG.

  15A and 15B illustrate the displacement restricting device 180 in a restriction release state, and FIG. 15C illustrates the displacement restricting device 180 in a restricted state. As shown in FIGS. 15A to 15C, the displacement regulating device 180 is switched between the regulated state and the regulated release state when the cylindrical portion 183 d protrudes and appears from the contact member 181. In the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the cylindrical portion 183d extends to the inside of the back case 510 and is configured to be engageable with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, which will be described in detail later.

  16 is an exploded rear perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, FIG. 17 is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement regulating device 180, and FIG. 18 (a) is a rear view of the contact member 181. FIG. 18B is a front view of the guide member 182, and FIG. 18C is a front view of the operation member 183.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 to 18, the displacement regulating device 180 includes a contact member 181 disposed in contact with the back case 510 (see FIG. 6), and a contact member disposed on the back side of the contact member 181. A guide member 182 that is fastened and fixed to 181 and guides the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction, an operation member 183 that is guided in displacement by the guide member 182, and the operation member 183 and the contact member 181. And a coil spring 184 that is configured to be capable of applying a biasing force toward the back side to the operation member 181.

  As the operation member 183 is formed from a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right in the rear view, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 that house the operation member 183 also have a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right in the rear view. Since it is formed, the external shape of the displacement regulating device 180 is a substantially elliptical shape that is long to the left and right in the rear view.

  The contact member 181 is mainly designed in a plate shape so as to increase the holding force by increasing the contact area with the back case 510, and for holding the guide member 182 from the plate end toward the back side. The wall portion is extended, and the back surface is formed in a double cylindrical shape having a shape in which a coil spring 184 can be arranged in a gap and an insertion hole 181a through which a fastening portion that is drilled at the left and right end portions and protrudes from the rear case 510 is inserted. A cylindrical holding portion 181b that protrudes to the side and an engaged portion 181c that constitutes a known latch mechanism in relation to the operation member 183 and that can be engaged with the operation member 183 are provided.

  The guide member 182 is a screw into which an oval annular main body portion 182a extending in the front-rear direction along the outer periphery of the contact member 181 and a fastening screw screwed into a fastening portion inserted through the insertion hole 181a are inserted. An insertion portion 182b, a fastening portion 182c into which a fastening screw inserted into the contact member 181 is screwed, a retaining portion 182d projecting radially inward at the rear side end portion of the main body portion 182a, and the main body portion 182a. And a protrusion 182e that protrudes radially inward in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower inner portions.

  From this configuration, the operation member 183 can be disposed between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 by fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182, but can not be detached. In the embodiment, the situation in which the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled is limited by the setting of the fastening direction.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 is inserted from the front side of the contact member 182 (the side covered by the back case 510). Therefore, in a state where the displacement regulating device 180 is assembled to the back case 510, the fastening screw cannot be touched. Therefore, the contact member 181 and the guide member 182 can be disassembled only in a state where the displacement regulating device 180 is removed from the back case 510.

  Since the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the displacement regulating device 180 to the back case 510 is inserted from the back side of the guide member 182 into the screw insertion part 182b, the back side of the back case 510 is exposed (FIG. 19). The displacement regulating device 180 can be easily removed from the back case 510.

  The operation member 183 has an oval shape slightly smaller than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, a main body portion 183a formed in a cup shape with a rear view outer shape and opened on the front side, and a front edge portion of the main body portion 183a. A flange portion 183b projecting radially outward from the groove portion, a groove portion 183c recessed in the flange portion 183b, a cylindrical portion 183d projecting in a cylindrical shape from the center of the bottom of the main body portion 183a to the front side, and a cylinder thereof An arcuate ridge portion 183e projecting from the front side with an arc shape larger than the outer diameter of the coil spring 184 with the portion 183d as the center, and a position engageable with the engaged portion 181c of the contact member 181 And an engaging portion 183f that can configure a known latch mechanism in relation to the engaged portion 181c.

  An elliptical seal is attached to the back surface of the operation member 183. This seal has a concave shape on one end in the short direction (see Fig. 15 (a)), and by placing this concave shape upwards, it is easy to prevent vertical posture errors when assembling. can do.

  By making the main body 183a elliptical, it is possible to easily prevent the operating member 183 from being rotationally displaced. That is, even if the operation member 183 is likely to be rotationally displaced, the rotation is restricted by contacting the main body 182a of the guide member 182.

  The flange portion 183b is formed larger in rear view than the retaining portion 182d of the guide member 182, thereby preventing the operation member 183 from falling off the guide member 182. That is, the operation member 183 can be displaced in the front-rear direction in a state where the flange portion 183 b is held between the contact member 181 and the guide member 182.

  The groove portion 183c is formed at a position corresponding to the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 and has a role of smoothly performing the longitudinal displacement of the operation member 183. In this embodiment, the protrusion 182e is formed at two locations on the upper side and at one location on the lower side, so that the groove portion 183c is also formed at two locations on the upper side and one location on the lower side. As a result, it is possible to prevent erroneous assembly caused by making the operating member 183 upside down.

  The cylindrical portion 183d is a portion that is inserted through the winding center of the coil spring 184, and is configured to be inserted through the central opening of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181. In a state where the cylindrical portion 183d protrudes from the central opening of the contact member 181, the cylindrical portion 183d engages with the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700, as will be described later.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical portion 183d can be shared by a portion that restricts the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and a portion that supports the coil spring 184.

  The arc-shaped protrusion 183e is disposed so as to be opposed to the outer diameter side of the coil spring 184, and is disposed to face the large-diameter cylindrical portion of the cylindrical holding portion 181b of the contact member 181 in the front-rear direction. When the operating member 183 is pushed in, the arc-shaped protruding portion 183e and the cylindrical holding portion 181b come into contact with each other prior to the other portion, so that the load generation area can be increased and locally large. It is possible to prevent a load from occurring.

  The arc-shaped ridge portion 183e is not circular but is formed in an arc shape in which the circle is interrupted, and the engaging portion 183f is disposed at the interrupted position. Thereby, it can avoid that the engaging part 183f, the cylindrical part 183d, and the coil spring 184 are separated too much.

  A state change of the operation member 183 will be described. The operating member 183 is biased to the back side by a coil spring 184. When the operating member 183 is pushed to the front side against this biasing force, the operating member 183 is configured by an engaging portion 183f and an engaged portion 181c. Each time the latch mechanism is actuated and pushed in at least the minimum stroke at which the latch mechanism acts, the state is switched alternately between the restriction state and the restriction release state.

  As described above, since the state can be changed by the latch mechanism, the operation member 183 is not limited to the above-mentioned minimum, not only when the operation member 183 is intentionally operated, but by applying a large external force to the pachinko machine 10. If it is displaced by the stroke, there is a risk that the displacement regulating device 180 will change its state unintentionally.

  For example, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, if the state of the displacement restricting device 180 is changed unintentionally due to an impact at the time of shipment or vibration at the time of transportation, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state (the effect member 700). May be displaced from the state of being arranged at the upper displacement end. When the effect member 700 displaced from the effect standby state is disposed close to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13), the effect member 700 is subjected to the impact at the time of shipment or the vibration at the time of transportation, and the effect member 700 is divided into the partition member of the launch effect unit 300 There is a possibility of colliding with 310, and there is a possibility that the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 are damaged.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the engaging portion 183f is disposed at a position (a position eccentric to the right side) away from a position (center position) where the urging force is applied to the operation member 183, and the operation member The gap dimension between the groove portion 183c of the 183 and the protrusion 182e of the guide member 182 is set large, and the posture maintaining ability of the operation member 183 is intentionally lowered.

  Thereby, since the attitude | position of the operation member 183 with respect to the guide member 182 can be inclined previously, the displacement resistance of the operation member 183 can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement of the operation member 183 in the front-rear direction due to an unintended external force.

  The relationship between the displacement regulating device 180 and the operation unit 500 will be described. FIG. 19 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 with the front frame 14 open, and FIG. 20 is a rear view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500. FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b). FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XXIa-XXIa in FIG. 20.

  In FIG. 21A, the restriction state of the displacement restriction device 180 is illustrated, and in FIG. 21B, the restriction release state of the displacement restriction device 180 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the open / close base end side (left side) of the inner frame 12, and the operator can reach out by opening the back pack 92 with respect to the inner frame 12. Configured to be touched. Since this position is on the opposite side to the side (opening / closing tip side, right side) where the worker who performs work with the inner frame 12 opened, the displacement regulating device is not intended by the operator when the inner frame 12 is opened. Touching 180 can be avoided.

  As shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the above-described latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180. Since the operation member 183 is loosely supported, not all of the load that pushes the operation member 183 is used to move the operation member 183 back and forth, and is also used to change the posture of the operation member 183.

  For example, when the right side of the operation member 183 is pushed in, even if the right side sufficiently moves back and forth, a situation may occur in which the position of the operation member 183 changes and the left side is not pushed in sufficiently.

  Therefore, for the purpose of pushing in the displacement restricting device 180 and switching the state, it is easier for the operator to cause the displacement restricting device 180 to generate the necessary displacement by pushing the formation portion of the latch mechanism pinpoint. It can be said that it is easy to succeed in switching the state of the regulating device 180.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the engaging portion 183f and the engaged portion 181c constituting the latch mechanism are formed on the right side portion of the displacement regulating device 180, and the operator enters from the right side and controls the displacement. Since the device 180 is operated, the operator can reach the displacement regulating device 180 with a minimum of movement. Therefore, the operator can easily perform an operation of pushing the forming portion of the latch mechanism pinpoint.

  Further, the posture change when the operating member 183 is pushed in occurs in such a manner that the pressing surface (the surface formed on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d) is directed toward the pushing side. Therefore, it can be configured that the operator's pushing load is easily transmitted to the operation member 183 as the pushing amount increases.

  In the restricted state shown in FIG. 21A, the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 to restrict the displacement of the transmission gear 650. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from changing.

  Since the displacement direction of the transmission gear 650 (rotational direction about the front-rear direction axis) and the displacement direction of the operation member 183 (front-rear direction) are orthogonal, the operation member 183 from the transmission gear 650 applies a load in the displacement direction. It can be prevented from receiving. Accordingly, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 can be effectively restricted without the latch mechanism forming portion having a strong configuration.

  Thus, since the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by setting the displacement regulating device 180 to the regulated state, the application of the displacement regulating device 180 is not limited to the time of conveyance. For example, the maintenance of the displacement rotation unit 800 described later can be safely and easily performed by maintaining the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 with the displacement restriction device 180 being in a restricted state during maintenance after installation in the gaming machine store.

  That is, when the displacement locus of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement locus of the displacement rotation unit 800 partially overlap as in the present embodiment, the drive motor of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is maintained during the maintenance work of the displacement rotation unit 800. Even if the MT2 is erroneously operated, the state (arrangement) of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be maintained by the displacement regulating device 180, so that the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 are prevented from colliding with each other. Can do.

  If the displacement restricting device 180 is in the restricted state before the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, the displacement restricting device 180 is switched to the restricted release state by pushing the operating member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180. (See FIG. 21B). Thereby, the transmission gear 650 can be displaced, and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can execute an effect operation accompanied by a state change.

  Here, before turning on the power, the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are slightly opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and looked into from the open front end side (right side), so that the displacement regulating device 180 is in a regulation release state. It is explained that it is configured so that it can be confirmed.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is disposed in front of the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and therefore, when viewed from the right side. The operating member 183 is hidden behind the shape of the bottom wall 511.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the restriction release state of the displacement restricting device 180, the operation member 183 is disposed so as to protrude from the shape portion of the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 to the back side. The operation member 183 is visually recognized at a position protruding from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right side.

  Therefore, the worker can slightly check the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 without fully opening the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 as a confirmation work before turning on the power. It is possible to confirm that the displacement restricting device 180 is in a deregulated state by visually recognizing that the operation member 183 protrudes from the bottom wall portion 511 when viewed from the right and looking in from the right side.

  In the present embodiment, since the back case 510 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material and the operation member 183 is formed from a red transparent resin material, the visibility of the operation member 183 can be improved.

  Here, a case will be described in which the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21A) and the power is turned on. . In the present embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the displacement regulating device 180 is in the regulated state, the detection sensor SC7 (see FIG. 52) indicates that the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 has not changed during the operation of power supply. The position detection error display accompanying this determination is displayed by the third symbol display device 81.

  By showing this position detection error display to the clerk of the gaming machine store, it can be noticed that the state of the displacement regulating device 180 may not be changed. This error display is displayed by detecting the presence / absence of the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and does not detect the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  That is, in the present embodiment, an alarm relating to the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is obtained using the position detection error display that is normally provided in the enlargement / reduction unit 600 without preparing a program for additional error display or display material. Can be output. As a result, the design cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the power is turned on while the cylindrical portion 183d is inserted into the restricted hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 in the restricted state of the displacement restricting device 180 (see FIG. 21A). In this case, while the power is turned on, the push-in operation of the operation member 183 is disabled, and it is required to turn off the power supply, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation member 183 may be operated even when the power is turned on.

  Moreover, the structure which makes pushing operation of the operation member 183 impossible cannot be set arbitrarily. For example, the push-in operation may be disabled due to friction generated between the transmission gear 650 and the operation member 183, or a large-diameter portion may be provided on the base end side of the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 so that the transmission gear 650 is displaced. In the middle, the rear surface of the transmission gear 650 and the large-diameter portion of the cylindrical portion 183d may be engaged in the front-rear direction to limit the displacement of the operation member 183.

  As a different situation, an example in which the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 is pushed in during maintenance at a gaming machine store will be described. In the present embodiment, the pushing operation of the operation member 183 is not possible only when the restricted hole 657 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 matches the cylindrical portion 183d in the front-rear direction.

  For example, during maintenance, even when the operation member 183 is pushed in while the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 8), the displacement restricting device 180 changes to the restricted state. In this case, since the cylindrical portion 183d is disposed on the displacement locus of the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, when the driving force is generated after the maintenance is completed and the transmission gear 650 is displaced, the displacement is the cylindrical portion 183d. Limited to

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to be able to determine that the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is limited, and by performing error display (notification of abnormality) based on this determination, the displacement regulating device 180 remains in the regulated state. This can be notified to the clerk of the gaming machine store, details will be described later.

  Thereby, even if a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180 is not provided separately, the device for detecting the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be used to determine the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  The operation of the displacement regulating device 180 can be executed either before or after the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 are assembled to the inner frame 12. After assembling to the inner frame 12, not only the inner frame 12 but also the work of opening the back pack 92 to the inner frame 12 is required. It is preferable to operate the device 180 in advance.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices that excite the game. These effect devices will be described in order from the launch effect unit 300.

  FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, in the firing effect unit 300, the partition member 310 is disposed to face the light guide plate 161 in the assembled state. That is, it is possible to execute an effect that allows the player to visually recognize the light guide plate 161 and the partition member 310 in an overlapping manner.

  Since the partition member 310 is formed of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, the granular member 320 scattered inside can be visually recognized by the player, and the player who visually recognizes the range surrounded by the center frame 86 can be viewed. Thus, it is possible to execute an effect in which the light guide plate 161 and the scattered granular member 320 are overlapped for visual recognition.

  FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the firing effect unit 300, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the firing effect unit 300. 24 and 25, the partition member 310 is shown in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the firing effect unit 300 includes a partition member 310 that is disposed inward of the center frame 86 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and forms a box shape having an open bottom, and the partition member 310 A plurality of granular members 320 disposed inside the member 310 so as to be displaceable, an injection device 400 disposed in such a manner as to close the lower open portion so that the granular members 320 do not drop from the partition member 310, and the partition members The 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 arrange | positioned on the right side of 310, and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 arrange | positioned on the left side of the division member 310 are provided.

  The partition member 310 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and a front plate portion 311 that is a plate-like portion disposed on the forefront, and a curved plate portion 312 that is integrally formed below the front plate portion 311. And a bottom plate portion in parallel relation with the front plate portion 311 on the back side of the front plate portion 311, and has a blocking wall extending to the front side so as to close the gap from the left and right and the top of the bottom plate portion. It is integrally formed under the back surface partition part 313 and the back surface partition part 313, and communicates with an internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) configured between the front plate part 311 and the back surface partition part 313. A back section lower portion 314 whose path can be configured with the curved plate portion 312 and a deformed through section 315 formed through the back section lower portion 314 are provided.

  Although the size of the partition member 310 is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, the size of the window portion surrounding the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86 is approximately the same as the size of the partition member 310 in front view. It is formed to become. That is, the light guide plate 161 and the front plate portion 311 are formed to have substantially the same shape.

  Thereby, the structural member for concealing the edge part of the light-guide plate 161 can be shared by the use which conceals the edge part of the division member 310. FIG. A dedicated component for hiding the edge of the partition member 310 is not necessary, and the edge of the partition member 310 is displayed by being overlapped with the display by the third symbol display device 81 while reducing the number of members. Therefore, the visibility of display by the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  The internal space IE1 has a role as a range in which the granular member 320 can be scattered, but if this space is too wide, the granular member 320 is scattered too much, and the number of the granular members 320 is very large for a powerful production. There is a need to do more. Therefore, if it is formed as a narrow space to some extent, a powerful effect can be executed by making a small number of granular members 320 visible with high density.

  On the other hand, if the space is too narrow, the granular member 320 may be clogged. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 is ensured to be approximately the same as the front-rear width between the left and right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 and the rear partition lower portion 314. Therefore, it is possible to avoid clogging of the granular member 320 in the internal space IE1 and rapid deceleration at the time of injection, as compared with the case where the front-rear width is shortened.

  Furthermore, since the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 are disposed closer to the back partition lower portion 314 than the left and right center portions 312b, the vicinity of the left and right portions 312b is compared with the movement path of the granular member 320 near the left and right center portions 312b. The movement path of the granular member 320 in can be narrowed.

  That is, when the granular member 320 is injected into the internal space IE1 by the injection device 400, the movement path of the granular member 320 can be concentrated in the vicinity of the left and right central portion 312b, and the granular member 320 is in the internal space IE1. It is possible to easily reach the vicinity of the central portion. Thereby, the granular member 320 can be easily made visible to the player.

  In addition, after the granular member 320 reaches the vicinity of the central portion of the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 collides with the front plate portion 311 and scatters in the internal space IE1. This allows the player to visually recognize the granular member 320 as if it exploded from around the center of the internal space IE1 and scattered in all directions. Can be improved.

  The curved plate portion 312 functions as a portion that receives the granular member 320 when the granular member 320 injected into the internal space IE1 falls. From this point of view, in this embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 is designed to incline downward toward the back side and to incline downward toward the left and right center.

  As a result, regardless of where the granular member 320 is arranged in the internal space IE1, the granular member 320 that is lowered and displaced by its own weight can be displaced downward toward the back side while being moved toward the left and right central side.

  Further, the degree of the downward inclination in the left and right portions 312a of the curved plate portion 312 is configured such that the downward inclination toward the left and right central side is steeper than the downward inclination toward the back side. Thereby, as the tendency of the downward displacement of the granular member 320, it is possible to cause the displacement toward the left and right center side in preference to the displacement toward the back side. Therefore, the granular member 320 stays (clogs) in the middle of the downward displacement as the granular member 320 tends to be displaced to the back side at the left and right end positions where the granular member 320 is likely to be dense due to the configuration of the injection device 400 described later. Can be avoided.

  In addition, the degree of the downward inclination toward the back side in the left and right central part 312b of the curved plate part 312 is abrupt compared to the degree of downward inclination toward the left and right central side in the left and right part 312a of the curved plate part 312. It is configured as follows. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the granular member 320 is crowded in the middle of the flow.

  On the other hand, the back section lower portion 314 has a plate portion opposed to the back side of the curved plate portion 312 that is substantially the same as the left and right central portion 312b of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 12A) (see FIG. 12A). It is formed in a flat plate shape with a slant angle of an aspect in which the distance from the left and right central portion 312b becomes wider toward the front side, that is, the angle with respect to the horizontal direction is large.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the rear partition lower part 314 with respect to the vertical direction is the same (slightly larger angle) as the inclination angle with respect to the vertical direction of the displacement direction of the collision member 420 that injects the granular member 320.

  Therefore, the incident angle of the granular member 320 with respect to the back partition lower portion 314 is the same regardless of the injection direction of the granular member 320 that can change to the left and right, so that the resistance given to the granular member 320 from the back partition lower portion 314 is made substantially uniform. can do.

  The deformed penetrating part 315 is formed in a shape into which the lid member 480 can be inserted, and a short part that extends vertically at both left and right ends, and a long part that curves and extends to the left and right in a manner that connects the upper ends of the short parts. Is provided. The penetration direction is formed so as to be inclined obliquely upward as it goes from the back side to the front side with respect to the plate surface of the back section lower portion 314 (see FIG. 12A). Thereby, the acute angle part (the lower part of the deformed penetrating part 315 in FIG. 12A) of the back surface partition lower part 314 constituting the deformed penetrating part 315 is not disposed opposite to the injection direction of the granular member 320.

  Thereby, since the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with an acute angle portion at the time of injection of the granular member 320 can be reduced, it is possible to avoid a local load from being generated on the granular member 320 and the rear partition lower portion 314. It is possible to prevent the member 320 and the rear partition lower part 314 from being cracked or chipped.

  24 and 25, the granular member 320 is made of a resin material that is relatively flexible (at least more flexible than the resin material that forms the partition member 310) and has a substantially soccer ball shape (12 regular pentagons). And a non-penetrating recess 321 formed in a semi-regular polyhedron) and non-penetratingly recessed along a plurality of straight lines parallel to each other.

  The non-penetrating recess 321 can reduce the weight of the granular member 320 and can also bias the center of gravity of the granular member 320 from the shape center position. That is, in the linear direction in which the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed, the flesh remains on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, so that the center of gravity can be biased toward the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed. .

  Thereby, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted. That is, the standby posture of the granular member 320 can be adjusted to a posture in which the non-penetrating recess 321 faces upward (see FIG. 24).

  In this case, since the load from the injection device 400 can be received by the surface (see FIG. 25) on which the non-penetrating recess 321 is not formed, it is possible to easily avoid breakage or chipping of the granular member 320. . Furthermore, since the non-penetrating recess 321 is directed to the injection direction side when the injection device 400 receives a load and is injected, the surface on the side where the non-penetrating recess 321 is formed collides with the front plate 311. Can do. Thereby, the load at the time of collision with the front plate part 311 can be easily absorbed by the deformation of the granular member 320, and the possibility of damaging the front plate part 311 can be reduced.

  The first light irradiation unit 330 includes a fixed plate portion 331 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back partition portion 313, an electric decoration substrate 332 fastened and fixed to the right side of the fixed plate portion 331, and the electric decoration substrate 332. A lid portion 333 that is disposed on the right side and is fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 331 and is formed so as to accommodate the electric decoration board 332 between the fixing plate portion 331 and the fixing plate portion 331.

  The illumination board 332 is provided with light irradiators 332a such as LEDs on both the left and right sides, and the light irradiator 332a is irradiated with light having an optical axis in the left-right direction. The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed of a resin material having low light transmittance, and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Thereby, it can be visually recognized as the light divided into particles.

  Of the light emitted from the illumination board 332, the light emitted to the right side may illuminate the right path (right-handed flow path) of the game area in which the through gate 67 and the like (see FIG. 2) are disposed. One purpose. The light irradiated to the left side will be described later.

  The fixing plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 are formed from a resin material having low light transmission (or light non-transmission), and through holes 331a and 333a are formed at positions corresponding to the light irradiation portion 332a. Accordingly, the light emitted from the light irradiation unit 332a can be visually recognized as light divided into particles, and the electric decoration substrate 332 is fixed to the fixed plate portion 331 and the lid portion 333 in a range away from the light irradiation unit 332a. It is possible to avoid being shielded and visually recognized.

  The second light irradiation unit 340 includes a fixing plate part 341 fastened and fixed to the back side of the back partition part 313, an electric decoration board 342 fastened and fixed to the left side of the fixing plate part 341, and the electric decoration board 342. A lid portion 343 disposed on the left side and fastened and fixed to the fixing plate portion 341 so as to accommodate the electric decoration board 342 between the fixing plate portion 341.

  The fixing plate portion 341 is formed from a resin material having low light transmission (or light non-transmission), while the lid portion 343 is formed from a colorless and light transmitting resin material. For this reason, the electric decoration board 342 is visible when viewed from the left, but in the present embodiment, the left side portion of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is configured to protrude to the left. Thereby, a player's visual field can be narrowed beforehand and it can avoid that the left side surface of the electrical decoration board | substrate 342 is visually recognized by front view.

  Thereby, light can be irradiated through the transparent cover part 343, avoiding that the electrical decoration board | substrate 342 is visually recognized.

  As for the electrical decoration board | substrate 342, light irradiation parts 342a, such as LED, are arrange | positioned at both right and left surfaces. From the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned at the left side surface, the light which has the optical axis which faces a front direction is irradiated. One purpose of this light is to illuminate the left side of the center frame 86 without illuminating the left path of the game area.

  Here, the configuration different from the configuration in which the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a of the right-side illumination board 332 is positively directed to the game area is that the pachinko machine 10 has a playability (normally Play left-handed games and play right-handed games during probability change, short-running, and big hit games). This will be described below.

  The game area of this pachinko machine 10 has a high degree of freedom in the flow path of the ball on the left side of the game area, so during the normal game, adjust the launch intensity of the ball so that the ball flows down the favorite path The player performs an operation to do. For this reason, if the light emission intensity at the left side of the game area is too high, the visibility of the sphere deteriorates, which may hinder the adjustment of the launch intensity of the sphere and may cause dissatisfaction with the player.

  On the other hand, when launching a ball to the right side of the game area, the player basically launches the ball with the maximum launch strength. The fired sphere is restrained by the return rubber 69, and the degree of freedom of selection of the flow path of the sphere downstream is significantly reduced, and only passes through the same path.

  More specifically, in the present embodiment, a single guide path DL1 (see FIG. 2) is formed with a width through which one sphere passes downstream from the second winning opening 640, and enters the second winning opening 640. All the balls that have not been balled pass through the guide route DL1 and go to the variable winning device 65 and the general winning port 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof.

  As described above, since it is not necessary to adjust the launch strength of the ball, even if the visibility of the ball is deteriorated in the right side of the game area (particularly, where the guide route DL1 is formed), the game is hindered. Since the possibility of coming is low, it is possible to execute an effect with high emission intensity in this range.

  Under such circumstances, in the present embodiment, in the illumination board 332 arranged on the right side, the light irradiation unit 332a is arranged so as to direct light to the game area, while the illumination board 342 arranged on the left side. Then, the light irradiation part 342a is arranged so as not to direct light to the game area. Thereby, an effective light emission effect can be executed while suppressing the occurrence of dissatisfaction with the player.

  From the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned at a right side surface, the light which has the optical axis which faces rightward is irradiated. A through hole 341a is formed in the fixed plate portion 341 at a position corresponding to the light irradiation portion 342a. Thereby, while being able to visually recognize the light irradiated from the light irradiation part 342a as the light divided | segmented into the granular form, the electrical decoration board | substrate 342 is shielded by the fixed board part 341 in the range away from the light irradiation part 342a, Visual recognition can be avoided. In addition, the object illuminated by the light irradiation part 342a arrange | positioned at a right side surface is mentioned later.

  26A is a side view of the first light irradiation device 330 as viewed in the direction of arrow R in FIG. 25, and FIG. 26B is a side view of the second light irradiation device 340 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. FIG. In FIG. 26A and FIG. 26B, the outer shape of the partition member 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, the light irradiation unit 332a disposed on the left surface side of the first light irradiation device 330 has an LED that passes through the partition member 310 and an optical axis passing through the rear surface side of the partition member 310. And an LED through which the shaft passes.

  Accordingly, not only the effect of irradiating the granular member 320 with light inside the partition member 310 but also other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 and displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 are irradiated with light. The effect of irradiating can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the light irradiation unit 342a disposed on the right surface side of the second light irradiation device 340 has no LED through which the optical axis passes through the partition member 310, and the rear surface side of the partition member 310. It consists only of LEDs through which the optical axis passes.

  Thereby, while suppressing the light emission intensity to the inside of the partition member 310, the irradiation intensity of the light toward other movable means (enlargement / reduction unit 600 or displacement rotation unit 800) arranged on the back side of the partition member 310 is reduced. Can be improved.

  In the 2nd irradiation apparatus 340, the comfort of the game in a normal state can be improved by suppressing the emitted light intensity to the inside of the division member 310. FIG. That is, in the game in the normal state, the player's line of sight is not fixed, but is mainly directed to the left side of the game area, the display of the third symbol display device 81 or the vicinity of the first winning port 64, I often see the range from the center of the game area to the left.

  In this case, when light is irradiated from the second irradiation device 340 to the inside of the partition member 310, the light shines at a position that is as close to the game area as that of the game area. Thus, the visibility of the game area may be deteriorated for the player.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the arrangement of the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 is moved to the back side and the game area and the light irradiation unit 342a are separated from each other, the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a It is possible to weaken the degree of influence that the game area has on the visibility of the game area.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emission that causes the inside of the center frame 86 to shine with high intensity in a front view while lowering the degree that the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a of the second irradiation device 340 shines the game area. Production can be performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect of illuminating the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the displacement rotation unit 800 (see FIG. 5) without reducing the visibility of the game area.

  FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 along the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 27, the game board 13 and the launch unit 300 are illustrated, and the operation unit 500 is not illustrated. Moreover, the direction of the light irradiated from the 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 or the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 is typically illustrated with the arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the second light irradiation device 340 is disposed on the left side and the back side of the vertical substrate unit 167, avoiding a vertical substrate unit 167 described later that irradiates light to the light guide plate 161. Thereby, since the light emission effect can be performed while avoiding the light from the light irradiation unit 342a entering the light guide plate 161, the light effect performed by the light irradiated from the light irradiation unit 342a and the light guide plate 161 are illuminated. It can be separated from production.

  When the light guide plate 161 is employed as in the present embodiment, depending on the light irradiation path, the light guide plate 161 may emit light unintentionally, which may reduce the effect. In particular, since the light irradiated to the periphery of the light guide plate 161 (for example, the front side of the center frame 86) easily shines the light guide plate 161, there is a possibility that the light emission intensity needs to be suppressed, which causes a reduction in the degree of freedom in rendering. It was.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is configured to travel avoiding the light guide plate 161, the degree of freedom in setting the irradiation intensity of the light from the light irradiation unit 342a is improved. be able to. Thereby, the freedom degree of the light emission effect around the light-guide plate 161 can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 24 and FIG. The injection device 400 is a device that is disposed below the partition member 310 and on which the granular member 320 that has flowed downward from the internal space IE1 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310 is placed.

  28, 29, and 30 are front exploded perspective views of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 31, 32, and 33 are rear exploded perspective views of the injection device 400. FIG. 28 and 31 illustrate the outline of the configuration of the injection device 400, and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 disposed closer to the front side. 30 and 33 show details of a part of the configuration of the injection device 400 arranged closer to the back side. In the description of FIGS. 28 to 33, FIGS. 24 and 25 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 28 to FIG. 33, the injection device 400 is fastened and fixed on the back side of the fixing member 350 as a fixed member, and a fixing member 350 fastened and fixed to the partition member 310 (see FIG. 24). A space forming member 360 configured to be able to form a space capable of accommodating another movable member between the fixed member 350 and an electric wiring and transmission arm member 470 which are fastened and fixed on the back side of the space forming member 360, which will be described later. A restricting member 370 that restricts displacement in the front-rear direction, and an intermediate member 401 that is disposed between the fixing member 350 and the space forming member 360 and has a keyhole-shaped opening 402 formed at the center.

  A fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the fixing member 350 to the partition member 310 is inserted into the partition member 310 from the front side. Therefore, when removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310, it is necessary to loosen and remove the fastening screw with a screwdriver, but the game board 13 and the firing unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12A). Then, the base plate 60 is disposed on the front side of the fixing member 350, and is configured so that a screwdriver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw.

  Therefore, an operation of removing the firing unit 300 from the game board 13 can be performed as preparation before removing the fixing member 350 from the partition member 310. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the fixing member 350 is accidentally detached from the partition member 310 and the granular member 320 is discharged from the fixing member 310 in a state where the launch unit 300 is assembled to the game board 13. be able to.

  The injection device 400 is configured to be displaceable between the intermediate member 401 and the fixing member 350 so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 fixed to the front surface side of the intermediate member 401 are inserted and linearly displaced. A linear motion member 410, an impact member 420 disposed above the linear motion member 410, supported so as to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the linear motion member 410, and having an arch-shaped collision surface on the upper portion thereof; And a contact member 430 that is arranged below the moving member 410 and is configured to be able to change state between a state in which the linearly moving member 410 can contact in the displacement direction and a state in which the linearly moving member 410 cannot contact.

  The injection device 400 is formed so as to be displaceable between the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 so that a load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 and the abutting member 430 and can rotate to the space forming member 360. The front transmission member 440 that is pivotally supported on the outer peripheral surface and has gear teeth formed on the outer peripheral surface, and the drive that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor MT1 fastened and fixed to the fixing member 350 and meshes with the gear teeth of the front transmission member 440 A gear 450 and a rear transmission member 460 disposed on the opposite side of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440 with respect to the drive gear 450 and fastened and fixed to the rotation transmission member 440.

  The injection device 400 is a member that is disposed so as to be displaceable on the back side of the space forming member 360. The injection device 400 is pivotally supported by a rotation shaft that is parallel to the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440 so as to be displaceable from the rear transmission member 460. A transmission arm member 470 configured to be displaceable by an action, and a lid member 480 that is pivotally supported so as to be rotationally displaceable using a straight line that faces in the left-right direction as a rotation axis and is displaced by a load received from the transmission arm member 470.

  The design concept of the injection apparatus 400 having the above-described configuration will be described. In the injection device 400, the fixed intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 divide the arrangement range of the constituent members into three along the projecting direction of the shaft portion 362 projecting from the space forming member 360. The driving force of the driving motor MT1 is generated in an intermediate range in which the driving gear 450 that rotates with the driving force of the driving motor MT1 is arranged, and the driving force is in the front range and the rear side. By transmitting to each of the ranges, displacement of each component member occurs in the front range and the rear range.

  From such a design concept, the intermediate member 401 and the space forming member 360 are each provided with an opening for transmitting a driving force. That is, the intermediate portion 401 includes an opening 402 formed in a keyhole shape, and the space forming member 360 includes an opening 361 formed in a lemon shape (substantially elliptical shape).

  Since the transmission of the driving force is completed in the range on the front side of the intermediate portion 401 and the range on the rear side of the space forming member 360, the details of the configuration will be described below in the order of the range on the front side and the range on the rear side. Details of the configuration in the middle range will be described, and the operation mode will be described.

  First, a description will be given focusing on the front range. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the intermediate member 401 includes the above-described opening 402, a plurality of columnar protrusions 403 protruding in a columnar shape from the upper end to the front side, and the columnar protrusions 403. A plurality of coil springs SP1 whose upper end portions are supported on each other, a plurality of bar fixing portions 404 disposed at symmetrical positions so that a plurality of metal rods MB1 can be fixed, and a columnar projecting to the front side in the vicinity of the lower end portions The lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 is hooked on each of the plurality of claw portions 411 formed on the lower end portion of the linear motion member 410.

  The natural length of the coil spring SP1 is formed to be shorter than the distance between the columnar protrusion 403 and the claw 411 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. Accordingly, the linear motion member 410 is constantly urged by the coil spring SP1, and the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position by the urging force before transmission of the driving force from the intermediate range. Although the coil spring SP1 is disposed obliquely below the linear motion member 410, this also has an aim of concentrating the urging force of the coil spring SP1 on the side where the granular member 320 tends to accumulate.

  The linear motion member 410 includes the above-described claw portion 411, a plurality of insertion portions 412 that are formed so that the metal rod MB1 can be inserted, a trapezoidal protrusion portion 413 that protrudes in a trapezoidal shape from the upper end portion in the left and right center, On the back side, a linear ridge 414 extending in the left-right direction at a substantially central position in the vertical width direction, and a lower ridge formed as a ridge shorter than the ridge 414 below the ridge 414. 415 and a displacement restricting portion 416 that protrudes from the lower end at the center of the left and right toward the front side.

  The trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is formed so as to be able to contact the collision member 420 in a state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the upper end position. In other words, the linear motion member 410 is formed such that only the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 can be brought into contact with the collision member 420, and a portion other than the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 is not in contact with the collision member 420. The

  The ridge portion 414 and the lower ridge portion 415 are portions that receive loads from other components during load transmission, and will be described in detail later.

  The displacement restricting portion 416 is a portion that abuts the buffer member 352 of the fixing member 350 in the displacement direction, and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by this contact (the rising side displacement end is set).

  The collision member 420 has a curved plate portion 421 that forms an arch-shaped collision surface, and a flat plate-like shape that extends in parallel to the plane on which the linear motion member 410 is displaced from the rear side end portion of the curved plate portion 421. A plate portion 422, a plurality of guide holes 423 formed in a long hole shape extending along the extending direction of the plate portion 422, and the displacement direction of the trapezoidal protruding portion 413 at the lower left and right center lower ends of the plate portion 422 And a buffer member 424 which is fixed at a position where it faces and is arranged so as to come into contact with the trapezoidal protruding portion 413.

  A cylindrical protrusion 403 is inserted through the guide hole 423. That is, the columnar protrusion 403 is used both as a portion that supports the upper end portion of the coil spring SP1 and a portion that guides the displacement of the collision member 420.

  The shock-absorbing member 424 is formed as a small piece of a square shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 424 and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be reduced by the characteristics of the resin material, and the trapezoidal projecting portion 413 can be damaged or chipped. Can be suppressed.

  The contact member 430 is formed in a substantially triangular long plate shape, and a support hole 431 formed as a circular opening through which the support column portion 405 can be inserted at one end of the long plate, and the other end of the long plate A projecting portion 432 projecting to the rear side with a circular cross-section, and a hook-shaped projecting portion 433 projecting to the front side with a saddle-shaped cross section at a position between the support hole 431 and the projecting portion 432. Prepare.

  The support hole 431 is an opening through which the support column portion 405 is inserted, whereby the contact member 430 is pivotally supported by the support column portion 405 so as to be able to be rotationally displaced.

  The projecting portion 432 and the hook-shaped projecting portion 433 are portions that receive a load from other constituent members during load transmission, and will be described in detail later.

  The fixing member 350 is capable of receiving the motor fixing portion 351 in which the above-described drive motor MT1 is disposed and fixed, the buffer member 352 arranged so as to be able to contact the displacement regulating portion 416, and the tip of the circular protrusion 403. A plurality of fastening recesses 353 configured to be fastened by being screwed into a female screw formed in the circular protrusion 403 with fastening screws inserted from the front side into the through-holes inside thereof as recesses; And a guide portion 354 configured to guide the displacement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24), which is configured by an inclined surface that sags from the front side and the left and right three directions.

  The shock-absorbing member 352 is formed as a small piece having a square shape from a highly durable and highly flexible resin material. Although not particularly limited, for example, nylon resin, urethane resin, or the like can be used. In this case, the load and impact when the buffer member 352 and the displacement restricting portion 416 of the linear motion member 410 abut can be reduced by the characteristics of the resin material, and the occurrence of breakage or chipping of the displacement restricting portion 416 is suppressed. be able to.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the buffer members 352 and 424 are disposed at a plurality of locations where the linear motion member 410 abuts at the end of displacement in the urging direction. Thus, as will be described later, even if the linear motion member 410 is displaced at a high speed due to the urging force of the coil spring SP1 and suddenly stops, the load received by the linear motion member 410 during the sudden stop Can be absorbed by the deformation of the buffer members 352 and 424, and the load can be dispersed at a plurality of locations.

  The cylindrical protrusion 403 and the fixing member 350 are connected via the fastening recess 353. To release this connection, it is necessary to turn and remove the fastening screw inserted through the connection recess 353. On the other hand, since this fastening screw is inserted from the front side of the fixing member 350, in the state where the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled (see FIG. 12), a driver may be inserted into the fastening screw. It is configured so that it cannot.

  As a result, it is possible to prevent in advance a situation in which the fastening screw is loosened accidentally and the fastening between the fixing member 350 and the intermediate member 401 is loosened in a state where the game board 13 and the firing effect unit 300 are assembled. Can do.

  Next, a description will be given focusing on the rear range. As shown in FIGS. 30 and 33, the space forming member 360 includes the above-described opening 361, a shaft portion 362 that protrudes in a columnar shape from a substantially central position of the back plate portion toward the front side, and a back. A pair of left and right guide inclined surfaces 363 formed as inclined surfaces on the upper surface of the plate-like portion extending toward the front side at the upper and lower end portions of the face plate portion, and disposed below the left and right inner sides of the guide inclined surfaces 363. A pair of left and right projecting support portions 364 that project from the rear plate portion to the front side, and are formed in a cylindrical shape at both left and right end portions and arranged on the same line so as to be able to support the lid member 480. A plurality of support pillars 365, a torsion spring SP2 that is wound around the left support pillar 364 and generates a biasing force toward the side where the lid member 480 is retracted, and protrudes in a columnar shape on the back side in the upper left part of the opening 361 Columnar protrusion 3 It includes a 6, a.

  The shaft portion 362 is a portion that rotatably supports the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 as will be described later. In accordance with this, a wall portion having an arc-shaped inner surface centering on the shaft portion 362 is extended from the back plate portion of the space forming member 360 to the front side. The wall portion can cover the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 inside.

  The guide inclined surface 363 is configured such that the inclination of the left and right inner side surfaces is flush with the left and right inner side surfaces of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32), and the granular member 320 flowing down the collision member 420 side (left and right center side). It is formed so that it can be guided toward.

  The protruding support portion 364 is formed such that the protruding tip is in contact with the back surface of the intermediate member 401 and the upper surface is flush with the intermediate member 401. On the same upper surface, the left and right ends of the curved plate portion 421 are supported while the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position.

  The support pillar portion 365 has different shapes on the left and right. That is, the right side is formed in a small-diameter cylindrical shape projecting toward the left and right outer sides, and the left side is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter that can receive the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489.

  The columnar protrusion 366 is a part that pivotally supports the transmission arm 470 by being inserted into the transmission arm 470. The transmission arm 470 is supported so as not to fall off by fixing a screw having a large head diameter to a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 366.

  The transmission arm member 470 is a long member formed in a substantially U-shape, and is supported so that the columnar protrusion 366 is inserted with a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 366. A hole 471, a columnar protrusion 472 projecting in parallel with the axial direction of the support hole 471 from one end in the longitudinal direction toward the front side, and an axis of the support hole 471 from the other end in the longitudinal direction And a transmission protrusion 473 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape along the plane.

  The columnar protrusion 472 extends through the opening 361 of the space forming member 360 to the front side, and is formed to be able to engage with the rear transmission member 460. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 is changed in accordance with the change in the posture of the rear transmission member 460, and the posture of the transmission arm member 470 is changed. The details will be described later.

  A limiting member 370 is disposed on the back side of the cylindrical protrusion 472. That is, the limiting member 370 is a plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the space forming member 360, and covers the covering plate portion 371 that covers the movement path of the columnar protrusion 472 from the back side, and the electric wiring. Or a plurality of presser claw portions 372 formed in a claw shape for the purpose of bundling.

  The covering plate portion 371 is disposed close to the back side of the transmission arm member 470, and restricts displacement of the columnar protrusion 472 to the back side (the back side in the rotation axis direction of the transmission arm member 470). Thereby, since the cylindrical protrusion 472 can be prevented from separating from the rear transmission member 460, it is possible to prevent the engagement between the cylindrical protrusion 472 and the rear transmission member 460 from being released. it can.

  The presser claw 372 is a part for temporarily fastening the electrical wiring connected to the drive motor MT1 and the detection sensor SC4 to the back side plate of the space forming member 360. As a result, it is possible to prevent occurrence of fluctuations in the arrangement of the electric wiring (for example, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring due to vibration or the like) and to secure an entry path for other components. The lateral slide member 840 and the wing member 854 (see FIGS. 10 and 12) of the displacement rotation unit 800 can be configured to be displaced along a path including a position close to the device 400.

  The transmission protrusion 473 is a part that is inserted into the lid member 480 and transmits a driving force to the lid member 480.

  The lid member 480 is a member that is configured to be able to advance and retreat into and out of the partition member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 12A) of the partition member 310, and is an advance / retreat portion formed in a curved plate shape. 481, a plurality of extending plate portions 485 extending in the same direction from the left and right end portions of the advancing / retracting portion 481, and a plurality of receiving end portions of the extending plate portion 485 that are received coaxially with the support column portion 365. Receiving portion 486, a transmission hole 487 that is formed in a curved long hole shape in the left extension plate portion 485 and through which the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is inserted, and a cylindrical shape that surrounds the right receiving portion 486 And has a through hole through which a fastening screw fastened to a female screw formed at the tip of the support column portion 365 can be inserted in a state of surrounding the receiving portion 486. Right hip that is secured by It includes a member 488, a cylindrical portion to be inserted into the left side of the receiving portion 486, a left cover member 489 having a long hole shape portion continuous to continuously transfer hole 487, a.

  The left cover member 489 is formed with contact surfaces 489a to 489c that are functionally formed instead of being drilled along the axial direction, and will be described in detail later.

  The cross-sectional shape of the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is an arc shape centered on the rotation axis assumed in the receiving portion 486, so that the load from the outer diameter side (the load given from the granular member 320) rotates. Although it is configured to be directed to the axis, it is not a shape in which the pipe is simply divided, and the radius of the arc and the formation length are changed corresponding to the left and right positions. This design intention will be described.

  First, the advancing / retreating part 481 includes an overhanging part 482 that makes a business trip to the approach side at the left and right center position. The overhang portion 482 is formed so that the overhang width becomes shorter toward the left and right outer sides, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be inclined toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, when the projecting portion 482 and another constituent member (in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 24) is assumed), the load is directed to the left and right outside the constituent member. And the components can be driven to the left and right outside.

  Secondly, as described above, the advancing / retreating portion 481 is configured to be able to enter the partition member 310 through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310, and the overhang portion 482 precedes the partition. Since the member 310 is entered, the arc radius of the advancing / retreating portion 481 is shortened at the left and right center position where the overhang portion 482 is formed.

  As a result, it is possible to suppress a positional shift that may occur at a location where the deformed through portion 315 starts to enter (the center of the left and right of the overhang portion 482), so that the advancement / retreat portion 481 cannot enter the deformed through portion 315. Can be suppressed.

  Thirdly, the arc radius is increased in the vicinity of the left and right outer sides of the advancing / retreating portion 481, contrary to the left and right center position of the overhang portion 482. This is mainly to avoid contact with the granular member 320. That is, in this embodiment, the granular member 320 (see FIG. 12A) disposed on the upper surface of the collision member 420 stays near the left and right outer sides due to the shape of the curved plate portion 421.

  This staying method is not completely uniform from side to side, and may be non-uniform from side to side. For example, an extremely large number of granular members 320 may stay on the right side, and when sufficient space is not ensured, there is a possibility that the granular members 320 that have stayed unevenly and the advancing / retreating portion 481 collide with each other. .

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arc radius of the advance / retreat portion 481 is increased in the vicinity of the left and right outer portions where a large amount of the granular member 320 tends to stay. Thereby, since the space | interval of the advance / retreat part 481 and the curved board part 421 can be ensured long enough beforehand, even when the retention method of the granular member 320 becomes non-uniform | heterogenous, the granular member 320 and the advance / retreat part 481 are You can avoid collisions.

  Other design concepts will be described. The extension plate portion 485 is formed on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480, and the end surface on the entry side is formed to be concave toward the retreat side. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the extended plate portion 485 from colliding with the retained granular member 320.

  In addition, even when the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the entry side before the granular member 320 has flowed down, the granular member 320 is bent into the concave formation portion of the extension plate portion 485 and the partition member 310. The granular member 320 can be collected on the upper part of the collision member 420 by configuring the gap so as to pass through the gap between the plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25).

  The receiving portion 486 has different shapes on the left and right. In other words, the left receiving portion 486a on the left side is formed in a circular cylindrical shape, and the right receiving portion 486b on the right side is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape (half pipe shape). This is a design that takes assembly into consideration.

  Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. Since the support column portion 365 that supports the lid member 480 extends outward in the left-right direction, particularly on the right side, the support member 480 is supported when both receiving portions 486 of the lid member 480 are formed in a circular cylindrical shape. It is necessary to divide the advance / retreat part 481 in order to assemble the pillar part 365.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the lid member 480 moves forward and backward through the deformed through portion 315 (see FIG. 25). The deformed penetrating portion 315 needs to be configured to be capable of preventing the particulate member 320 from being discharged from the partition member 310 while being configured to be able to move the lid member 480 forward and backward in the partition member 310. That is, the irregular shaped penetration part 315 cannot be enlarged without limitation, and the design freedom of the irregular shaped penetration part 315 is limited.

  Here, if the shape collapses to such an extent that the lid member 480 cannot pass through the deformed through portion 315, the forward / backward displacement cannot be made, so that the shape is required to have accuracy. On the other hand, when the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is configured by combining a plurality of members, the shape may be collapsed due to factors such as assembly errors.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the shape of the receiving portion 486 is different on the left and right sides, and the advance / retreat portion 481 is not required to be divided. As an assembling process, first, the left receiving portion 486a is disposed on the outer side (left side) in the axial direction of the support column portion 365, and the cylindrical portion of the left cover member 489 is inserted into the left receiving portion 486a and inserted into the support column portion 365. Thus, the left receiving portion 486a can be arranged coaxially with the support column portion 365.

  At this time, the right receiving portion 486b is disposed so that the support column portion 365 is opposed to the open side of the half cylinder. The left cover member 489 is fastened and fixed to the extended plate portion 485 by inserting a fastening screw through a plurality of screw insertion holes formed in the left cover member 489 and screwing into the extended plate portion 485 on the left side of the lid member 480. can do.

  After that, the right cover member 488 is attached from the outside in the axial direction, and the lid member 480 can be removed by supporting the cap member 480 with a screw head of a fastening screw screwed into a female screw formed at the tip of the right support pillar 365. The forming member 360 can be rotatably supported.

  The design concept of the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 of the transmission arm member 470 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36, the displacements of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 are illustrated in time series.

  34A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 34B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVb in FIG. FIG. 34C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXIVc-XXXIVc in FIG. 34B.

  35 (a) is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 35 (b) is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVb in FIG. 35 (a). FIG. 35C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVc-XXXVc of FIG. 35B.

  36A is a plan view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXIVa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 36B is a transmission arm member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIb in FIG. FIG. 36C is a partial cross-sectional view of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 taken along the line XXXVIc-XXXVIc of FIG.

  35 and 36 illustrate a process in which the transmission projection 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is displaced upward from the state shown in FIG. 34 and the advance / retreat part 481 of the lid member 480 is displaced to the entry side. Specifically, FIG. 36 illustrates a state in which the lid member 480 is disposed at the entry side end within the displacement range, and FIG. 34 illustrates the lid member 480 at the retreat side end within the displacement range. FIG. 35 shows a state in which the lid member 480 is arranged at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, in this embodiment, the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 are not parallel. Specifically, a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis of the transmission arm member 470 (a plane illustrated in FIG. 34A) and a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lid member 480 (a plane illustrated in FIG. 34B). ) Are orthogonal to each other.

  Therefore, without any countermeasure, the contact area usually changes as the posture of the transmission protrusion 473 that contacts the left cover member 489 changes. For example, when the inner side surface of the opening of the left cover member 489 is formed by a surface extending in parallel with the axial direction of the lid member 480, the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is the left-right direction as shown in FIG. In an inclined state, it is considered that the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 comes into contact with the right side of the left cover member 489 (closer to the support hole 471 of the transmission arm member 470).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36A, it is considered that the upper side surface of the transmission protrusion 473 abuts over the width direction of the left cover member 489 when the longitudinal direction of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction. It is done.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 34 (c), 35 (c), and 36 (c), the upper surface of the transmission protrusion 473 corresponding to the posture change of the transmission protrusion 473. The left cover member 489 is designed in such a shape that the upper side surface of the opening and the left cover member 489 can contact each other in the left-right width direction.

  That is, the left cover member 489 has a first contact surface 489a that contacts the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side, and the first contact surface 489a. The second contact surface 489b formed with a small inclination with respect to the left-right direction, and the inclination with respect to the left-right direction formed smaller than the second contact surface 489b, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. A third abutting surface 489c that abuts against the transmission protrusion 473 in a state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left cover member 489 in the shape of the upper side surface of the opening with respect to the left-right direction gradually decreases as the first contact surface 489a is maximized and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 is approached. Designed to.

  More specifically, as the transmission arm member 470 rotates, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the upper side surface of the left cover member 489 changes in the axial direction of the lid member 480. The inclination of the left cover member 489 at the contact position with the upper side surface of the opening is designed at an inclination angle along the upper surface of the transmission projection 473 in the contact state.

  Thereby, in the contact state between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489, it is possible to always ensure the contact area between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 without depending on the posture of the transmission arm member 470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a local load (overload) from being applied to the transmission protrusion 473 from the left cover member 489.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is in the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489) at a timing when a large load occurs, that is, a timing at which the lid member 480 starts to be displaced against the gravity. Therefore, the contact area (contact length) between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 can be maximized.

  Thereby, the area responsible for the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be increased, and the load applied per unit area can be reduced, so that the durability of the transmission protrusion 473 can be improved.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the end of displacement on the entry side, the inclination angle of the transmission protrusion 473 is along the left-right direction (the width direction of the left cover member 489). In addition to the reduction in the contact area (contact length) between the portion 473 and the left cover member 489, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is maximized, and there is a possibility that the transmission protrusion 473 is overloaded. is there.

  As a countermeasure against this, in the present embodiment, in the state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the proportion of the weight of the lid member 480 that is applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is reduced. ing.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, the advance / retreat portion 481 occupying most of the weight of the lid member 480 is the rotational axis of the lid member 480. It arrange | positions on the opposite side (front side) of the transmission protrusion 473 in the front-back direction with respect to O1. Therefore, most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated in the direction in which the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, and the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 can be reduced.

  In this case, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied to the lid member 480 is maximum, but since most of the weight of the lid member 480 is generated against the urging force of the torsion spring SP2, at least the urging force A part can be offset by the dead weight of the lid member 480.

  As a result, the load applied to the transmission protrusion 473 is larger than when most of the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 is transmitted to the transmission protrusion 473 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side. Can be reduced.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 changes in the axial diameter direction of the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. More specifically, the distance between the contact position between the transmission protrusion 473 and the left cover member 489 and the rotation axis of the lid member 480 in the process of displacing the lid member 480 from the retracted position to the approaching position is determined by the lid When the member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retract side, it is configured to be the longest.

  In addition, the first contact surface 489a has a normal line at a contact position with the transmission protrusion 473 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480, and an arc centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. Since the inclination of the first contact surface 489a is designed so as to be along (the inclination angle becomes smaller), the load transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480 is centered on the rotation axis O1 of the lid member 480. It can occur along an arc.

  Accordingly, when the load starts to be transmitted from the transmission protrusion 473 to the lid member 480, the arm length of the moment generated in the lid member 480 is increased, thereby reducing the load required to rotate the lid member 480. can do.

  As a device for the shape of the transmission protrusion 473 itself, as shown in FIG. 34C, the transmission protrusion 473 includes a groove 473a formed along the longitudinal direction. That is, in the transmission protrusion 473, a groove 473a along the longitudinal direction is formed from the front side to the back side to a position exceeding the center in the width direction.

  Thereby, the transmission protrusion 473 can be compressed and deformed in the contact direction with the left cover member 489, so that the load at the time of contact can be released by deformation and the contact area can be easily increased by the deformation. can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 (b), 35 (b), and 36 (b), the curved plate portion 312 arranged to face the advance / retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane from side to side. Is done. For this reason, the distance between the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 decreases from the shape of the advance / retreat portion 481 and the overhang portion 482 toward the center in the left-right direction.

  It should be noted that the radius of the overhanging portion 482 of the lid member 480 at the left and right center position is designed to be less than the distance (length) from the rotation axis O1 to the curved plate portion 312. As a result, it is possible to avoid the overhanging portion 482 having the maximum entry width from colliding with the curved plate portion 312, so that the cover member 480 is slightly over-rotated (which is caused by a design error for each member). In this case, the lid member 480 and the curved plate portion 312 can be prevented from colliding and being damaged.

  Returning to FIG. 28 and FIG. 31, the description will be given focusing on the middle range. The drive gear 450 is engaged with the front transmission member 440, and the rear transmission member 460 is fastened and fixed to the front transmission member 440. As a result, as the drive gear 450 rotates, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 440 are engaged. The transmission member 460 is integrally rotated about the shaft portion 362 of the space forming member 360. In the following description, the rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front (viewed from the front transmission member 440) will be described as a normal rotation.

  The front-side transmission member 440 and the rear-side transmission member 460 are configured to ensure the relative position and rigidity of each other on the sides facing each other, and are used for driving force transmission on the opposite surface. A shape portion is formed. The detail of the shape part utilized for this driving force transmission is demonstrated below.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a plan view of the front transmission member 440 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 37 (b) is a plan view of the rear transmission member 460 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG. . The direction of arrow XXXVIIa and the direction of arrow XXXVIIb are set as directions parallel to the rotation axes of front transmission member 440 and rear transmission member 460.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the front transmission member 440 has a substantially disc-shaped main body plate portion 441 and projects in the axial direction on the center side of the edge portion of the main body plate portion 441, and a groove is formed on the inner side. A groove forming portion 442 that is recessed, a support hole 443 that is a circular opening that is drilled to a size that allows insertion of the shaft portion 362 at the center of the main body plate portion 441, and a gear that is formed on the main body plate portion 441. A flange portion 444 that covers the teeth, a detected portion 445 that extends radially outward from the flange portion 444 and is formed so as to be able to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 (see FIG. 32), and groove formation A transmission protrusion 446 that protrudes in parallel with the rotation axis from a position that is eccentric with respect to the support hole 443 on the support hole 443 side of the groove formed in the part 442.

  The groove forming portion 442 is recessed with a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding portion 432 so that the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The front transmission member 440 rotates in the forward direction with the first groove portion 442a formed along the first arc shape and the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 disposed in the first groove portion 442a. The second groove portion 442b through which the projecting portion 432 is guided, and an arc shape formed on the opposite side of the first groove portion 442a with respect to the second groove portion 442b and having a larger diameter than the arc serving as a reference for the first groove portion 442a And a fourth groove part 442d that connects the third groove part 442c and the first groove part 442a.

  The second groove portion 442b and the fourth groove portion 442d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 442a and the third groove portion 442c, but the formation angle range is not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 442d has a smaller formation angle range than the second groove portion 442b, and the change in the distance between the groove and the support hole 443 with respect to the rotation angle of the front transmission member 440 is abrupt. Designed to be

  The transmission protrusion 446 does not have a simple cylindrical shape, but includes a groove 446a that is formed along the protruding direction in a straight line connecting the central portion and one point on the outer diameter side. Accordingly, the degree of deformation of the transmission protrusion 446 with respect to the load input from the radial direction can be changed in accordance with the input angle of the load. That is, the transmission protrusion 446 can be formed so that the degree of deformation is maximized when a load is input from a direction orthogonal to the straight line serving as a reference for the groove 446a.

  As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the rear transmission member 460 has a main body plate portion 461 formed in a substantially disc shape with a diameter similar to that of the flange portion 444 of the front transmission member 440, and the main body plate portion 461. A groove forming portion 462 that protrudes in the axial direction of the main body plate portion 461, and a shaft portion 362 that is formed at an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 362 at the center portion of the main body plate portion 461. And a non-contact opening portion 463 that is formed so as to avoid the contact.

  The main body plate portion 461 is provided with a weight portion 461a that is enlarged in the radial direction in a range that does not function as a groove, and a groove portion that is recessed is not formed in the groove forming portion 462. The weight portion 461a is an adjustment portion formed for the purpose of correcting the amount of deviation of the center of gravity of the rear transmission member 460 that is rotationally displaced from the rotational axis.

  In this embodiment, for the purpose of calculating the center of gravity when the rear transmission member 460 and the front transmission member 440 that are integrally rotated and displaced are viewed as an integrated object, and correcting the center of gravity to the shape of the rotation shaft, The weight is calculated and formed integrally with the rear transmission member 460. As a result, the center of gravity of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 can be made to coincide with the rotation shaft, so that the posture change of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 with respect to the rotation shaft can be suppressed. .

  The groove forming portion 462 has a groove formed with a groove width slightly longer than the diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 472 so that the cylindrical protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 (see FIG. 28) can enter. The groove includes the first groove 462a formed along the first arc shape, and the rear transmission member 460 in a state where the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed in the first groove 462a. The first groove 462b is formed on the opposite side of the first groove 462a with respect to the second groove 462b, and the second groove 462b through which the cylindrical protrusion 472 is guided by forward rotation (clockwise rotation in the rear view). A third groove part 462c formed along an arc shape having a diameter larger than that of the reference arc of 462a, and a fourth groove part 462d that connects the third groove part 462c and the first groove part 462a.

  While the second groove portion 462b and the fourth groove portion 462d have a common role of connecting the first groove portion 462a and the third groove portion 462c, the formation angle range is not common. That is, the fourth groove portion 462d has a significantly larger formation angle range (about 180 degrees) than the second groove portion 462b, and the groove and the non-contact opening portion 463 with respect to the rotation angle of the rear transmission member 460 It is designed so that the change in distance between is slow.

  Hereinafter, an example of the displacement mode enabled by the injection device 400 will be described. First, an outline of the displacement mode of the injection device 400 will be described.

  38, 39, 40 and 41 are plan views of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 38, 39, 40, and 41, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually recognized. In order to facilitate understanding, the coil spring SP1 is illustrated with an imaginary line as a schematic diagram to the extent that a change in length can be grasped.

  38 to 41, the displacement of the injection device 400 is illustrated in time series. 38 shows a state immediately after the granular member 320 has flowed down to the collision member 420 and stopped, FIG. 39 shows an effect standby state of the injection device 400, and FIG. FIG. 41 shows a launch standby state that is a state of waiting for the launch timing of the device 400, and FIG. 41 shows a launch state that is a state immediately after the injection device 400 executes the launch effect. In FIG. 41, the state where the granular member 320 is still on the collision member 420 is illustrated, but the granular member 320 is scattered in the normal direction of the curved plate portion 421 immediately after this.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38, the collision member 420 is supported by the linear motion member 410, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retracting side. The state in which the lid member 480 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 38 to the entry side displacement end will be described as an effect standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 39).

  In the effect standby state shown in FIG. 39, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side, the lid member 480 can partially block the player's line of sight to the granular member 320. Thus, the player's attention to the granular member 320 can be reduced, and the player's eyes can be kept away from the subsequent displacement of the granular member 320 and the collision member 420 disposed below the granular member 320.

  In the firing standby state shown in FIG. 40, the collision member 420 is suspended in such a manner that the cylindrical protrusion 403 contacts the upper inner surface of the guide hole 423, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the retreat side. . In addition, as will be described later, the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430, and the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is accumulated.

  In the firing state shown in FIG. 41, the arrangement of the lid member 480 is maintained at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the collision member 420 jumps up and moves up by the linear motion member 410, and the cylindrical protrusion 403 is guided into the guide hole. It stops at a position where it abuts against the lower inner surface of 423. Thereafter, the collision member 420 is displaced downward by its own weight or the weight of the granular member 320, and returns to the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The flow down of the granular member 320 splashed and scattered by the collision member 420 is guided to the collision member 420 side after being brought to the left and right center side by the shape of the curved plate portion 312 (see FIG. 25) of the partition member 310. (See the arrows schematically shown in FIG. 38).

  In this embodiment, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is disposed relatively upward, so that the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) of the fixed member 350 and the collision member 420 are arranged. The depth of the saucer shape formed by the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 is set to be shallow.

  For this reason, there is a possibility that the plurality of granular members 320 cannot be biased in shape. In the present embodiment, the partition member 310 accommodates a number of granular members 320 that cannot be received in a biased manner.

  Thereby, for example, even when the granular member 320 starts to return to the right side of the collision member 420, when the granular member 320 returns thereafter, the granular member 320 returns to the collision member 420. Since a slope that slopes downward toward the left side is formed in the right side portion, the granular member 320 that has returned later flows to the left side along this slope. That is, it flows to the left in a manner that it flows on the granular member 320.

  Thereby, since the right and left bias of the granular member 320 accumulated on the upper surface of the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 can be reduced, the deviation of the arrangement of the granular member 320 (difference in scattering mode) in each launch effect is reduced. can do.

  Further, when the granular member 320 is guided to the collision member 420 side, the collision member 420 is arranged in the middle of the displacement section, and the lower linear motion member 410 is one point with the trapezoidal protruding portion 413. It just touches with. Therefore, the collision member 420 is allowed to change its posture by the gap generated between the cylindrical protrusion 403 and the guide hole 423. In other words, it is allowed to change the posture in such a manner that it rotates around an axis parallel to the axis of one cylindrical protrusion 403.

  As described above, for example, when the granular member 320 starts to return to the right side of the collision member 420, the collision member 420 changes its posture in such a manner that the right side portion is lowered compared to the left side portion. However, in this case, the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is relatively displaced to the right side.

  Therefore, it becomes easier to guide the granular member 320 that flows down near the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 (see FIG. 32) and returns to the collision member 420 side to the left side. For example, before the collision member 420 is changed in posture, the left and right center position of the guide portion 354 and the uppermost position of the curved plate portion 421 coincide with each other in front view, and the adjustment left and right center position of the guide portion 354 is determined. It is considered that whether the granular member 320 that flows down flows to the left or right is almost uniformly distributed to the left and right due to the difference in contact between the granular member 320 and the curved plate portion 421.

  On the other hand, if the posture of the collision member 420 is changed, the position of the uppermost portion of the curved plate portion 421 is shifted to the right side with respect to the center position of the guide portion 354 and flows down the center position of the guide portion 354. The granular member 320 is considered to be guided to the left along the inclination of the curved plate portion 421. Thereby, since the granular member 320 returned later is easily flowed down to the side where the remaining granular member 320 is small, the granular member 320 can be easily distributed substantially horizontally.

  Note that the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is not always permitted in the same manner. For example, in the firing standby state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 40), the columnar protrusions 403 are respectively disposed at the upper end positions of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is suspended at two symmetrical points. As a result, the posture change of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

  Further, for example, in the firing state of the injection device 400 (see FIG. 41), the columnar protrusions 403 are respectively disposed at the lower end positions of the pair of guide holes 423, and the collision member 420 is upward at two symmetrical points. Therefore, the change in the posture of the collision member 420 is suppressed as compared with the effect standby state of the injection device 400.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 receives a load from the linear motion member 410, the load is an urging force generated by the pair of coil springs SP1 that expand and contract in a direction parallel to the longitudinal direction of the pair of guide holes 423. The posture of the collision member 420 is easily stabilized.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the change in the posture of the collision member 420 from the launch standby state to the launch state. Thereby, in the case where the staying state of the granular member 320 (the left and right deviation of the number of particles) is the same, it is possible to stabilize the scattering method of the granular member 320 that receives the load from the collision member 420 and scatters.

  As described above, when the injection device 400 performs the firing effect, the granular member 320 scatters and then flows down along the internal shape of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 25), and the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420. Return to the top of the screen, and return to the production standby state. That is, in the present embodiment, the injection device 400 is configured to be able to repeatedly execute the state changes of FIGS. 38 to 41. The relationship between the structures of the injection device 400 for enabling this state change will be described in detail below.

  42 (a) to FIG. 42 (f) and FIG. 43 (a) to FIG. 43 (e) are a linear motion member 410, a collision member 420, a contact member 430, and a front transmission member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. FIG.

  42 (a) to 42 (f) and FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e), the outer shapes of the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As a part related to mutual load transmission, the protruding portion 414 and the lower protruding portion 415 of the linear motion member 410, the buffer member 424 of the collision member 420, the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430, and the hook shape The outer shape of the protrusion 433 is shown by a solid line, the inside thereof is shown transparently, and the front transmission member 440 arranged on the back side thereof is shown without being hidden.

  In order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. Is shown without being hidden.

  Further, in order to facilitate understanding of the relationship with the drive control, the arrangement of the detection sensor SC4 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  42 and 43, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 (hereinafter, also referred to as “each component member” in the description of FIGS. 42 and 43) when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward. ) Is shown in time series. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  In FIG. 42A, the arrangement of each component member in the effect standby state of the injection apparatus 400 is illustrated. As shown in FIG. 42A, in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 starts to enter the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the normal rotation. By detecting the switching from the state in which the part 445 is not placed to the state in which the detected part 445 is entered, it can be determined that the injection device 400 is in the effect standby state.

  FIG. 42B illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 comes into contact with the protrusion 414 of the linear movement member 410 and starts to push down the linear movement member 410. From the state shown in FIG. 42B, the front transmission member 440 starts to push down the linear motion member 410 against the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38).

  Accordingly, since the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are not in contact with each other between FIG. 42A and FIG. 42B, direct load transmission between the members is blocked. Therefore, for example, even if the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) flows down and collides with the collision member 420 and the collision member 420 slightly vibrates, the vibration and load are directly transmitted to the front transmission member 440. Is configured to be shut off.

  FIG. 42C illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the collision member 420 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range and the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 starts to be released.

  From the state shown in FIG. 42B to the state shown in FIG. 42C, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are integrally displaced downward. In this state, the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 are in contact with each other, and the linear motion member 410 and the front transmission member 440 are in contact with each other. Indirectly, it can be transmitted to the front transmission member 440.

  On the other hand, the load generated when the granular member 320 collides with the collision member 420 is a load in a direction in which the linear motion member 410 is pushed down. This is a transmission where the linear motion member 410 is a contact portion with the transmission member 440. This is the direction away from the protrusion 446. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of the load and vibration transmitted to the front transmission member 440 on the forward rotational displacement of the transmission member 440.

  The influence on the positive rotational displacement is not limited at all. For example, there are exemplified effects that make the speed controlled as the rotational displacement different from the actual speed, and influences that prevent the rotational displacement and cause the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to generate heat.

  FIG. 42D shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the first groove portion 442a of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 starts to tilt. Is done.

  The abutting member 430 is a member that does not receive an urging force from other urging means and changes its posture according to the shape of the groove forming portion 442. In FIG. 42D and subsequent figures, the number of members displaced by the front transmission member 440 increases to two, that is, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, but the displacement direction of the contact member 430 is a direction in which it is displaced by its own weight. Therefore, the state of the load received by the front transmission member 440 is substantially less than the state before FIG. 42D in which only the linear motion member 410 is displaced.

  FIG. 42 (e) illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the lower end position of the displacement range. As shown in FIG. 42E, in the state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still disposed apart from each other.

  After the state shown in FIG. 42 (e), the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 starts to move upward. Therefore, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the linear motion member 410 is generated in the direction of pushing the transmission protrusion 446, so that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 The load required for the posture change can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring SP1. As a result, the burden on the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  FIG. 42F illustrates the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the second groove portion 442b of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 has finished tilting. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (f), the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are still separated from each other, but after the state shown in FIG. 42 (f), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430. Is maintained in the third groove 442c, the posture of the contact member 430 is maintained (a change in posture is prevented).

  Therefore, with respect to the contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430, the contact of the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 with a speed in a direction facing each other is smaller than that of the contact. The embodiment can be softened.

  In FIG. 43 (a), a diagram in the same state as FIG. 42 (f) is shown for easy understanding. In FIG. 43 (b), as the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced upward, the linear movement member 410 is displaced upward, and the lower protrusion 415 of the linear movement member 410 and the contact member The arrangement of the constituent members in a state where contact with the hook-shaped protrusion 433 of 430 has started is illustrated.

  Note that the state from the state shown in FIG. 43A to the state immediately before the state shown in FIG. 43D corresponds to the firing standby state (for example, see FIG. 40).

  The lower protrusion 415 and the hook-shaped protrusion 433 are provided with an overhanging portion that protrudes toward the opposite sides at the tip portions on the opposite sides. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of slipping at the contact position between the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433, and the lower protrusion 415 and the hook-like protrusion 433 are stably brought into contact with each other. Can be touched.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43B, the terminal position of the detected portion 445 of the front transmission member 440 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Therefore, when the front transmission member 440 rotates forward from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the detected portion 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4, and this switching of the state occurs in the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). Is output.

  In other words, in this embodiment, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113 detects the front transmission member 440 in the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4 in a state where the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the normal rotation. Control is performed to determine that the injection device 400 has shifted to the firing standby state by detecting the switching from the state in which the part 445 is disposed to the state in which the detected part 445 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is restricted by the contact member 430. The linear motion member 410 is urged by the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and applies a load in the direction of raising the contact member 430 to the contact member 430. Displacement of the installation part 432 is restricted by the groove forming part 442 preventing it.

  The contact between the projecting portion 432 and the groove forming portion 442 is a contact between a circularly curved surface (the outer surface of the projecting portion 432) and an arcuate surface (the inner surface of the third groove portion 442c). The load generated at that time is directed toward the center of the circle.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is generated toward the rotating shaft of the front transmission member 440. Therefore, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 is the front side. The rotation of the transmission member 440 can be prevented from being affected, and the displacement of the projecting portion 432 can be regulated regardless of the driving state of the front transmission member 440.

  Therefore, in the firing standby state shown in FIG. 43B, the state shown in FIG. 43B can be maintained even after the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is released. Thus, for example, the heat generation of the drive motor MT1 can be suppressed compared to a configuration in which the drive motor MT1 needs to be energized at all times in the firing standby state, so that the degree of freedom in setting the drive control of the drive motor MT1 is increased. Can be improved.

  For example, in the case where the injection device 400 is driven and controlled in conjunction with the display effect in the 3rd symbol display device 81, there is a restriction on the setting of the length of the display effect until the emission state is entered after the emission standby state is established. This is advantageous in that it does not occur from the viewpoint of heat generation of the drive motor MT1.

  In FIG. 43 (c), the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove portion 442c of the front transmission member 440, and the arrangement of the constituent members in a state where the contact member 430 starts to stand up is illustrated. Is done.

  After the state of FIG. 43 (c), the position of the groove forming portion 442 that contacts the protruding portion 432 changes from the third groove portion 442c, so the direction of the load applied from the protruding portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is the front transmission. It will deviate from the rotation axis of the member 440.

  Therefore, in order to release the energization of the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) and maintain it in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is changed from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). It is necessary to turn off the power.

  In FIG. 43 (d), the restriction of the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is released by retracting the hook-shaped projection 433 of the contact member 430 from the displacement locus of the lower ridge 415 of the linear motion member 410. The arrangement of each component member in a state where the linear motion member 410 is lifted and displaced by the biasing force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) and the collision member 420 is jumped upward is shown. The state shown in FIG. 43 (d) corresponds to the firing state (see FIG. 41).

  Since the displacement of the contact member 430 in the standing direction basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 442 of the front transmission member 440, the driving force is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38). . On the other hand, since the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not restricted by the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440, the coil spring SP1 transmitted to the abutting member 430 via the linear motion member 410. The urging force (see FIG. 38) also works to assist the displacement of the contact member 430 in the standing direction.

  In the present embodiment, both the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the displacement direction of the contact member 430 caused by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 applied via the linear motion member 410 are both. Since it is configured in the same way in the standing direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the contact member 430 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  FIG. 43 (e) shows the arrangement of the constituent members in a state in which the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed at the terminal position of the fourth groove portion 442d of the front transmission member 440 and the contact member 430 has finished standing up. Is done.

  After the state shown in FIG. 43E, the position of the groove forming portion 442 that contacts the protruding portion 432 of the contact member 430 is the first groove portion 442a. As a result, the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is directed toward the rotation shaft of the front transmission member 440, and therefore the load applied from the projecting portion 432 to the groove forming portion 442 is applied to the front transmission member 440. The influence on rotation can be reduced.

  For example, in this embodiment, the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) was loaded on the contact member 430 until just before the state shown in FIG. ) It is expected that the load generated in the direction in which the contact member 430 is raised in the subsequent displacement is also increased. Therefore, without a countermeasure, there is a possibility that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 is hindered by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as soon as the contact member 430 finishes standing, the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 is disposed in the first groove portion 442a, and from the contact member 430 via the projecting portion 432. The load applied to the front transmission member 440 is configured to face the rotation axis of the front transmission member 440. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the rotation of the front transmission member 440 is hindered by the displacement of the contact member 430 standing up.

  If it is detected from the state shown in FIG. 43 (e) that the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) is driven in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated forward, and the detected portion 445 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. By controlling the drive motor MT1 to stop, the injection device 400 can be returned to the effect stand-by state, and the MPU 221 (so that the state change shown in FIGS. 42 and 43 can be controlled as a series of launch effects. The control program (see FIG. 4) is designed.

  In the above description with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43, as an example of the control of the injection device 400, the firing execution control for rotating the front transmission member 440 once in the normal rotation direction from the effect standby state of the injection device 400 has been described. In the firing execution control, in the firing state, the directing member 410 that rises with the urging force of the coil spring SP1 causes the collision member 420 to jump off and the effect that the granular member 320 scatters is executed.

  Since this effect causes the granular member 320 to scatter in the player's field of view, the player's attention can be improved in a flashy manner. For example, in a state where the player does not know whether or not it is a big hit. At a timing near the end of the subsequent long reach, if it is a big hit, the player's interest can be improved by shifting to the firing state and producing effects by scattering the granular member 320.

  On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (if it is off), executing the effect of scattering the granular member 320 may cause the player to misunderstand that it is a big hit, which is not preferable.

  Further, if the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) of the injection device 400 is not driven at all when it does not shift to the firing state (in the case of disengagement), it is a big hit as a result of the long reach being performed from the drive sound of the drive motor MT1. The player will be able to figure out whether or not the game will be off, which may lower the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the case of a detachment, after the injection device 400 is placed in the firing standby state, the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440, whereby the injection device 400 It is configured to be able to return to the production standby state of the injection device 400 without going through the firing state.

  That is, for example, from the state shown in FIG. 43 (c), the drive motor MT1 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction (clockwise), whereby each component member is displaced in the above-mentioned time-series reverse direction. Can be made.

  In this case, before the contact member 430 starts to be displaced in the standing direction (see FIG. 42E), the linear motion member 410 is pushed down so that the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 are in contact with each other. By releasing (see FIG. 42F), it is possible to avoid rubbing when releasing contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430.

  Further, after FIG. 42E, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38) applied to the transmission projection 446 of the front transmission projection 440 via the linear motion member 410 causes the front transmission projection 440 to rotate. Since it works in the assisting direction, the magnitude of the driving force required for the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be reduced.

  In this case, the upward displacement of the linear motion member 410 is not a momentary displacement based on the elastic return of the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 38), but is a gentle displacement associated with the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446.

  Thereby, since it is possible to avoid the linear motion member 410 jumping off the collision member 420, the injection device 400 is placed in the effect standby state without executing the effect that the granular member 320 is scattered (see FIG. 42A). Can be restored.

  In order to obtain the state shown in FIG. 42A after reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440, the detection sensor SC4 is detected after detecting that the detected portion 445 has been retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor SC4. The drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) may be driven and controlled so that the front transmission member 440 is normally rotated until it is detected that the detected groove 445 has entered the detection groove again.

  As a result, it is possible to execute both the effect control for scattering the granular member 320 and the effect control for preventing the granular member 320 from being scattered with the same preliminary operation associated with the drive of the drive motor MT1. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect so that the player can easily recognize whether the game is a big hit or not, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to predict the result of the success / failure due to a difference in driving sound.

  In particular, according to the present embodiment, in the firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (c)), the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) can be de-energized, and the drive sound of the drive motor MT1 can be eliminated once. . This makes it difficult to grasp from the driving sound whether the driving direction is the same or the reverse direction, compared to the case of performing control for switching the driving direction from the state where the driving of the driving motor MT1 is continued. .

  Therefore, the drive motor MT1 is drive-controlled prior to the success / failure notification timing in the production, and even if a drive sound is generated, it is difficult to determine the drive direction, so a situation where the player can grasp the success / failure result is avoided. be able to.

  Accordingly, the drive control of the drive motor MT1 can be started in advance of the success / failure notification timing without risking the player to grasp the result of the success / failure by the driving sound. A range can be given to the stop timing. In other words, it is not necessary to stop the drive motor MT1 in the state immediately before the firing state, and even if the drive motor MT1 is stopped in a state sufficiently before the firing state, the subsequent effects are not hindered. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor MT1 over-rotates against the control and unintentionally enters the firing state.

  44 (a) to 44 (f) are plan views of the rear transmission member 460, the transmission arm member 470, and the lid member 480 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIb in FIG.

  In FIG. 44, the change in the arrangement of the transmission arm member 470 and the lid member 480 (hereinafter also referred to as “each component member” in the description of FIG. 44) as the rear transmission member 460 rotates forward (clockwise). Illustrated in time series. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

  FIG. 44A shows the arrangement of the components in the effect standby state of the injection apparatus 400 (see FIG. 42A). As shown in FIG. 44 (a), in the production standby state of the injection device 400, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove 462 c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480. Is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side.

  Since the lid member 480 receives an urging force toward the retreat side from the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), a load in a direction of pushing down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 is generated via the lid member 480. By being transmitted to the rear transmission member 460, the rotation of the rear transmission member 460 may be affected without any countermeasure.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 comes into contact with the third groove 462c of the groove forming part 462 in the state after FIG. When a load is applied to the rear transmission member 460, since the circular curved surface and the arc-shaped surface are in contact with each other, the load generated by the contact is directed to the center of the circle.

  Accordingly, the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is directed to the rotational axis of the rear transmission member 460, and therefore the load applied to the groove forming portion 462 via the cylindrical protrusion 472 is rearward. The influence on the rotation of the side transmission member 460 can be reduced.

  In FIG. 44 (b), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the third groove 462c of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement terminal position on the entry side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  In FIG. 44C, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at an intermediate position of the fourth groove portion 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at an approximately intermediate position of the displacement range. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  Since the posture change of the transmission arm member 470 basically occurs along the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460, the driving force for the posture change rotationally drives the rear transmission member 460. It is generated from the drive motor MT1 (see FIG. 38).

  On the other hand, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33) acts in a direction to push down the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 via the lid member 480. At the same time, this urging force causes the cylindrical protrusion 472 to move upward. Therefore, the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 also works to assist the posture change of the transmission arm member 470.

  In the present embodiment, the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the driving force of the drive motor MT1 and the posture change direction of the transmission arm member 470 generated by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 applied through the lid member 480 are: Since both are configured in the same direction in the clockwise direction, the driving force and the urging force applied to the transmission arm member 470 can be generated in a mutually assisting manner.

  In FIG. 44D, the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the fourth groove 462d of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement terminal position of the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 44D, the lid member 480 is maintained at the end of displacement on the retracting side by the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33). Further, the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 are arranged in a non-contact manner.

  Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a load to the transmission protrusion 473 until there is no need to displace the lid member 480 to the entry side, and the degree of accumulation of fatigue on the transmission arm member 470 can be reduced. .

  In FIG. 44 (e), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at a midway position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement end of the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in FIG.

  After the state shown in FIG. 44 (e), a firing standby state (see FIG. 43 (b)) is configured. From the firing standby state to the firing state, the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end of the retracting side, and is configured to avoid collision with the ejected granular member 320 (see FIG. 41).

  In FIG. 44 (f), the columnar protrusion 472 of the transmission arm member 470 is disposed at the terminal position of the first groove 462a of the rear transmission member 460, and the lid member 480 is still disposed at the displacement terminal position of the retracting side. The arrangement of each component in the state is illustrated.

  From the state shown in FIG. 44 (e) to the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the injection device 400 goes through the firing state (see FIG. 41). Then, by continuing normal rotation from the state shown in FIG. 44 (f), the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the entry side, and returns to the effect standby state (see FIG. 44 (a)).

  Here, since the state shown in FIG. 44 (f) is a state after execution of the firing effect, there is no load transmission from the linear motion member 410 or the contact member 430 to the front transmission member 440 (for example, FIG. e)). Therefore, the amount of the driving force of the driving motor MT1 (see FIG. 38) to be distributed to the front transmission member 440 side can be greatly reduced.

  Thus, even if a large driving force is required because the direction of displacement of the lid member 480 is a direction that opposes the urging force of the torsion spring SP2 (see FIG. 33), the driving force of the driving motor MT1. Most of this can be used as a driving force for rotating other constituent members that abut on the rear transmission member 460, so that a sufficient driving force can be ensured.

  45 is a plan view of the injection device 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXXVIIa in FIG. 45, the illustration of the fixing member 350 is omitted, and the internal structure of the injection device 400 can be visually confirmed.

  45, the linear motion member 410, the collision member 420, and the contact member 430 are illustrated in the same manner as described with reference to FIGS. In order to facilitate understanding of the displaceable section of the collision member 420, the outer shape of the cylindrical protrusion 403 is illustrated by a solid line, the inside thereof is illustrated transparently, and the front transmission member 440 disposed on the back side thereof. Is shown without being hidden.

  In FIG. 45, the front transmission member 440 is driven in the reverse rotation direction in the state where the linear motion member 410 is disposed at the displacement end position on the ascending side (for example, the effect standby state, see FIG. 42A), and the front transmission is performed. The state in which the transmission protrusion 446 of the member 440 contacts the lower protrusion 415 of the linear motion member 410 from the lower side and further rotational displacement is restricted is illustrated.

  Thus, in this embodiment, a limit is set in the displacement mode allowed for the front transmission member 440. That is, in the drive in the forward rotation direction, as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the displacement of the front transmission member 440 can be continuously driven without being restricted, whereas in the drive in the reverse rotation direction, When the displacement angle exceeds the allowable angle, the displacement of the transmission protrusion 446 is restricted by the linear motion member 410, and further continuous driving is restricted.

  When the drive of the drive motor MT1 is continued in a state where the displacement is restricted, the drive motor MT1 generates heat and may be damaged. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the drive control is limited to the direction in which the front transmission member 440 is rotated in the reverse direction. However, the details of this will be described later.

  46 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the arrangement of the projecting portion 432 of the contact member 430 as the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 rotate. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change in time of the arrangement of columnar protrusions 472 of a transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 46, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. The change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  Also, in FIG. 46, the horizontal axis shows a guide for the rotation angle of the forward rotation from the effect standby state (FIGS. 42A and 44A). That is, 0 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (a), 66 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (b), 125 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (c), and 162 degrees corresponds to FIG. 202 degrees corresponds to FIG. 42 (e), 219 degrees corresponds to FIGS. 42 (f) and 43 (a), 228 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (b), and 266 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (c). 287 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (d), and 295 degrees corresponds to FIG. 43 (e).

  In FIG. 46, 0 degree corresponds to FIG. 44 (a), 21 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (b), 96 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (c), and 173 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (d). , 304 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (e), and 360 degrees corresponds to FIG. 44 (f).

  In FIG. 46, the rotation angle of the forward rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is described on the horizontal axis with the production standby state as a reference (angle is 0 degree), and each of the above-described components corresponding to the angle State changes in are described. The arrangement change of each component by the drive control in the forward rotation corresponds to the change in the right direction of FIG. 46, and the arrangement change of each component by the drive control in the reverse rotation is in the left direction of FIG. Respond to changes.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the displacement speed when the collision member 420 is displaced upward by rotating the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in reverse before the launch state (angle is 287 degrees) is as follows: It becomes slower than the displacement speed when the collision member 420 reaches the launch state and is displaced upward. That is, in this embodiment, the speed of the upward displacement of the collision member 420 can be configured in a plurality of ways.

  In addition, since the collision member 420 has already risen after exceeding the launch state, the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is regulated in the middle (see FIG. 45). On the other hand, whether or not the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees) is determined only from the output state of the detection sensor SC4. Can not.

  For example, when the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees), the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Even so, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) cannot determine whether or not the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is restricted.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on again, it is suspected that the arrangement of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is between the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) and the production standby state (angle is 360 degrees). If there is a detected portion, that is, if the detected portion 445 is not arranged on the detection sensor SC4 (when the output of the detection sensor SC4 is OFF), the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven in the direction of normal rotation. The motor MT1 is controlled to rotate.

  By this rotation, the injection device 400 is configured to return to the effect standby state at one end, and thereafter perform execution control of each effect. This prevents the situation in which the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 is unintentionally restricted and the drive motor MT1 generates heat after a situation where control is interrupted, such as when the power is turned on again. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the arrangement of the granular member 320 (see FIG. 38) from the firing state (angle is 287 degrees) to the state where the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470 starts to change (angle is 304 degrees). The front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally driven at a rotation speed that stabilizes.

  For example, if the arrangement is stable in 2 seconds from the launch, the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are driven and controlled to rotate at 8 degrees per second (45 seconds / rotation), so that the granularity during the flow down It is possible to avoid a situation in which the member 320 is bitten by the lid member 480 (see FIG. 38).

  In addition, the rotational speed of the front side transmission member 440 and the rear side transmission member 460 is not restricted to this, It can set arbitrarily. For example, it may be rotated at a quadruple speed. In this case, the lid member 480 can be started to be displaced toward the entry side at a timing at which the granular member 320 starts to flow down. In this case, the displacement of the lid member 480 can be completed before the granular member 320 is arranged in the traveling direction of the lid member 480.

  In this state, by stopping the driving in the production standby state, the granular member 320 can be deposited above the lid member 480, so that the granular member 320 is gathered to the left and right center sides along the shape of the lid member 480. Can do. Thereafter, by driving and controlling the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the forward rotation direction, the granular member 320 falls from the lid member 480 as the lid member 480 is displaced to the retracting side, and the collision member 420 is moved. Get on.

  In this way, by controlling the rotational speeds of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 to be different, a plurality of types of modes until the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 can be configured.

  Thereby, the relative position with respect to the collision member 420 of each granular member 320 (each spherical member) can be changed for every launch execution control. Therefore, for example, by forming the granular member 320 with a plurality of spherical members having different shapes and colors, the appearance of the granular member 320 to be fired (the arrangement and displacement direction of each granular member 320) can be varied. The production effect can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices that excite the game. Next, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described.

  47 and 48 are front perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIGS. 49 and 50 are rear perspective views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. FIG. 47 and 49, the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown, and in FIGS. 48 and 50, the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is shown.

  47 to 50, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes an effect member 700 that can be moved up and down at the center position in the left-right direction and that can emit light, and a hemispherical illumination that is fixedly arranged to the left and right. Device 613.

  By performing the light emission effect by the effect member 700 and the hemispherical illumination device 613, the player emits light from the near side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) and executes an effect of visually recognizing it. be able to.

  51 is a front exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 51 and 52, the effect member 700 is shown in an assembled state. 47 and 49, in the assembled state, the front end portion of the lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is disposed on the front side of the rear plate portion 611, but in FIGS. For convenience, it is arranged on the back side of the rear plate portion 611.

  As shown in FIGS. 51 and 52, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 includes a main body member 601 having an elongated left and right shape that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 (see FIG. 5), and the front surface of the main body member 601. A front cover member 610 having a design surface disposed on the side, a pair of upper arm members 620 that are rotatably supported by the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and interlocked in a meshing relationship, and the upper arm member 620 and the middle A pair of lower arm members 630 that are connected by the upper arm member 620 and change in posture as the upper arm member 620 rotates, a drive motor MT2 fastened and fixed to the back side of the main body member 601, a drive gear and teeth of the drive motor MT2 A transmission gear 650 rotatably engaged with the main body member 601 and engaged with the upper arm member 620 on the left side so that the driving force of the driving motor MT2 can be transmitted; Annulus assembled to 1, provided with a torsion spring SP3 loading the biasing force of the upward to the upper arm member 620, and the presentation member 700 coupled to a distal end of the lower arm member 630, a.

  The main body member 601 is formed in a left and right long plate shape, and a pair of left and right guide holes 602 that are arranged in a straight line on the left and right sides, and a pair of protrusions that protrude in a columnar shape from the left and right symmetrical positions in both the front and rear directions. A cylindrical shaft portion 603, a pair of arc-shaped holes 604 drilled in an arc shape centering on the cylindrical shaft portion 603, a cylindrical shaft portion 605 projecting in a cylindrical shape from the left side to the back side, An arc-shaped hole 606 drilled in an arc shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the central axis, and a circular shape with the cylindrical shaft portion 605 as the center, the posture of the detection groove facing the cylindrical shaft portion 605 side on the back side A detection sensor 607 that is fastened and fixed.

  The guide hole 602 is formed with a vertical width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630. The guide hole 602 functions as a long hole that guides the displacement of the lower arm member 630 by inserting the columnar protrusion 632 of the lower arm member 630.

  A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes from the front side is inserted into the support hole 621 of the upper arm member 620 and rotatably supports the upper arm member 620. The upper arm member 620 is supported so as not to drop off by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 603.

  A portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 that protrudes on the back side is inserted into the wound main body portion of the torsion spring SP3, whereby the arrangement of the torsion spring SP3 is stabilized.

  One arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is pressed from above by a protruding portion 601a projecting in a square shape from the back side of the main body member 601, and the other arm portion is pressed against the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620. Engaged. As a result, the elastic recovery force of the torsion spring SP3 functions in a direction in which the biased portion 625 is pushed down, so that the upper arm member 620 is biased in the direction in which the connecting portion 623 is displaced upward.

  The arc-shaped hole 604 is a through hole for passing the biased portion 625 of the upper arm member 620 to the back side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the to-be-biased part 625 of the upper arm member 620 and torsion spring SP3 can be comprised so that engagement is possible.

  The cylindrical shaft portion 605 is inserted into the support hole 653 of the transmission gear 650 and supports the transmission gear 650 so as to be rotatable. The transmission gear 650 is supported so as not to drop off by screwing a large-diameter head screw into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical shaft portion 605.

  The arc-shaped hole 606 is a through-hole for passing the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650 to the front side of the main body member 601. Thereby, the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 and the transmission gear 650 can be configured to be engageable. The upper arm member 620 is supported by the transmission gear 650 so as not to drop off by screwing a screw having a large head into a female screw formed at the tip of the cylindrical protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650.

  The detection sensor 607 is provided with a detection groove into which the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 can enter, and the transmission gear 650 is disposed at a position where the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the effect standby state or is disposed at any other position. It is configured to be able to determine whether or not

  The front cover member 610 is formed of a resin material having low light transmittance and is a thin member fastened and fixed to the main body member 601. The front cover member 610 includes a rear plate portion 611 formed at the left and right central portions, and a rear plate portion 611. A front plate portion 612 that is formed on the left and right outer sides from the connection position with the left and right upper end portions, and that projects from the rear plate portion 611 to the front side, and is configured to be fastened and fixed to the front side of the front plate portion 612 so as to emit light. Hemispherical illumination device 613.

  The rear plate portion 611 is disposed on the front side of the cylindrical shaft portion 603 of the main body member 601 and shields the visual field so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 is not visually recognized. On the rear side of the rear plate portion 611, avoiding the movement locus of the gear portion 622 of the upper arm member 620, it projects to the rear side with a dimension slightly longer than the front and rear width of the gear portion 622, and contacts the body member 601 on the surface. An overhanging contact portion 611a is provided.

  Accordingly, the fastening state of the rear plate portion 611 with respect to the main body member 601 can be stabilized, and the upper arm member 620 can be displaced in a space divided by the rear plate portion 611 and the main body member 601. it can. In other words, since the posture change of the upper arm member 620 (for example, the posture change that bends with respect to the rotation axis) can be suppressed on both sides in the axial direction, the state of the upper arm member 620 can be stabilized. .

  The front plate portion 612 is a plate-like portion that is arranged on the front side of the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630 and is configured to prevent the player from visually recognizing the structural parts of these members. A pair of left and right sliding surfaces 612a formed as a plane parallel to the front plate portion, and a wiring passage formed as a recess opened to the back side in the plate portion projecting from the upper left end portion toward the back surface. A recess 612b.

  The sliding surface 612a is assembled and fastened to the lower arm member 630 from the front side, and is configured as a flat surface on which the pressing member PC1 formed with low friction due to its shape and material can slide. That is, the pressing member PC1 fixed in the middle of the lower arm member 630 in the longitudinal direction is a flat plate surface formed along a locus that is displaced along with the displacement of the lower arm member 630.

  The shape of the side facing the sliding surface 612a of the pressing member PC1 is a substantially semicircular shape protruding toward the sliding surface 612a, and the state when the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a are in contact is a point contact. It is comprised so that. Thereby, resistance generated between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding surface 612a can be reduced, and the lower arm member 630 can be easily displaced smoothly.

  The sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other, and a gap is provided. On the other hand, before the amount by which the lower arm member 630 is displaced to the front side exceeds the allowable amount, the sliding surface 612a and the pressing member PC1 come into contact with each other to limit the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side. The

  In the present embodiment, the allowable amount of displacement of the lower arm member 630 toward the front side is set according to the dimensional relationship between the rear side plate portion of the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) and the effect member 700. That is, the allowable amount of the displacement amount to the front side of the lower arm member 630 is set in such a dimension that the rendering member 700 having the arrangement assumed from the arrangement of the lower arm member 630 does not contact the partition member 310.

  In other words, according to the present embodiment, the sliding surface 612a abuts against the pressing member PC1 and restricts the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to the front side, whereby the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is separated from the partition member 310. The contact can be prevented.

  The sliding portion 612a arranged on the right side is formed in an arc shape along the locus of the pressing member PC1, but the sliding portion 612a arranged on the left side includes an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1. Although formed as a large plane, the functions of the left and right sliding portions 612a are common. That is, it is sufficient that at least the arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1 is formed in a flat shape, and the shapes in the other portions can be arbitrarily set. For example, like the right side portion of the present embodiment, the sliding portion 612a is formed limited to an arc shape as the locus of the pressing member PC1, and the other portion projects to the back side (the design portion on the front side is It may be configured to project to the back side due to the effect of being arranged closer to the back side, and the periphery of the sliding portion 612a may be configured in the same planar shape as in the left portion of the present embodiment. good.

  The upper arm member 620 is fastened to the torsion spring SP3 and the columnar protrusion 654 in addition to the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630 being limited by the contact between the pressing member PC1 and the sliding portion 612a. The forward displacement is regulated by the fixed fastening screw. That is, in addition to limiting the forward displacement of the lower arm member 630, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 is also limited, so that a large load can be avoided from occurring locally.

  The wiring through recess 612b is a recess that functions as a path for electrical wiring that passes through the proximal end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630. That is, the electrical wiring that reaches between the rear case 510 and the enlargement / reduction unit 600 passes through the wiring through recess 612b, passes through the proximal end side through hole 635a of the lower arm member 630, and then moves to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630. Guided and passed through the production member 700.

  In this way, by setting the insertion path of the electrical wiring to the inside of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 from the upper side, the long lower arm member 630 connected to the effect member 700 is greatly displaced in the left-right direction in accordance with the displacement. Even in the case where the distance of about half of the left-right width of the back case 510 is displaced in this embodiment, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of a situation where the electrical wiring is slackened and droops downward.

  The hemispherical illumination device 613 includes a hemispherical lens member, and is a device for irradiating light emitted from light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the back side of the hemispherical illumination device to the front side through the hemispherical lens member. . In the present embodiment, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means is configured to incline downward in the horizontal direction center side.

  This makes it easier to improve the player's attention to the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 than when the optical axis of the light emitted from the hemispherical illumination device 613 faces in the front-rear direction. it can. For example, it is easy to put light into the field of view of the player who is visually recognizing the center of the third symbol display device 81, or to irradiate the effect member 700 in the overhanging state or the enlarged state so that the light can be easily noticed. Can be.

  The upper arm member 620 is formed in a long plate shape, and is formed as a circular hole having a slightly larger diameter than the outer diameter of the cylindrical shaft portion 603, so that the cylindrical shaft portion 603 can be inserted through the support hole 621. The gear portion 622 is formed on a circular arc centered on the support hole 621 and can be engaged with each other by a pair of upper arm members 620, and the lower arm member 630 is formed in a circular shape at the end in the longitudinal direction. As a long hole having a width slightly longer than the outer diameter of the columnar protrusion 654 of the transmission gear 650, formed only in the connecting portion 623 that can be inserted through the cylindrical protrusion 631 and the upper arm member 620 on the left side. A transmission hole 624 that is formed, and a biased portion 625 that protrudes from the back side of the upper arm member 620 and has a tip formed in a bowl shape.

  The transmission hole 624 includes a transmission portion 624a formed along a straight line passing through the center of the support hole 621 and a margin continuously extended from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. Part 624b.

  The transmission portion 624a functions as a portion that receives the driving force transmitted via the transmission gear 650, and the margin portion 624b functions as a portion that blocks transmission of the driving force, details of which will be described later.

  The biased portion 625 is a portion to which one end of the arm portion of the torsion spring SP3 is engaged, and the biasing force in the direction in which the left and right outer sides of the upper arm member 620 are lifted and displaced is increased via the biased portion 625. Arm member 620 receives.

  Further, the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated by the engagement of the tip flange portion of the biased portion 625 and the torsion spring SP3 (see FIG. 49).

  The lower arm member 630 is configured to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical from the long plate member except that the left arm has a path through which the electric wiring passes, and protrudes in a columnar shape from the middle in the longitudinal direction to the back side. A columnar protrusion 631, a columnar protrusion 632 protruding in a columnar shape from the left and right outer side to the back side with respect to the columnar protrusion 631, and a front-rear direction at a left and right inner position with respect to the columnar protrusion 631 And a plurality of arc-shaped holes 634 penetratingly formed along a pair of arcs centered on the support hole 633.

  The columnar protrusion 631 is inserted into the connecting portion 623 of the upper arm member 620, and a screw having a large head diameter is screwed into the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 631 from the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported on the upper arm member 620 so as not to fall off.

  The columnar protrusion 632 is inserted into the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601 through the collar member C1 formed in a cylindrical shape for resistance reduction, and is connected to the female screw formed at the tip of the columnar protrusion 632 on the back side. The lower arm member 630 is supported by the main body member 601 so as not to fall off by screwing a large-diameter head head screw.

  The support hole 633 and the arc-shaped hole 634 are used for connection with the effect member 700. Due to the relationship with the arrangement portion 635 described later, the thickness of the portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed is configured so that the lower portion is thicker than the upper portion. Thereby, when the production member 700 is arranged at the lower end position, the production member 700 can be supported so as to be held from the left and right in a thick part, so that it is effective that the production member 700 changes its posture to the forward tilted posture. Can be regulated.

  The lower arm member 630 on the left side has an arrangement portion 635 that is open to the back side to form a space for passing electrical wiring in the longitudinal direction of the arm body, and a rear surface of the arrangement portion 635. A thin lid portion 636 that functions as a lid of the arrangement portion 635 disposed on the side.

  The arrangement portion 635 includes a proximal end side through-hole 635a that is drilled in the front-rear direction at the end of the columnar protrusion 632.

  The base end side through-hole 635a is a through-hole for passing the electrical wiring arranged in the placement portion 635 in the front-rear direction. In other words, the electric wiring arranged in the arrangement portion 635 is guided from the arrangement side 635 to the distal end side of the lower arm member 630 through the proximal end side through-hole 635 a from the front side and guided to the arrangement portion 635.

  The lower arm member 630 has a boundary along the longitudinal direction of the lower arm member 630, and in the production standby state, a lower meat portion 637 disposed below the boundary is recessed behind the back surface. Is done. In other words, the upper side of the tangent line is formed as a thin plate portion.

  The lower meat portion 637 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs extending in the short direction in the lower arm member 630 on the right side. Further, the lower meat portion 637 constitutes the upper side wall portion of the placement portion 635 in the lower arm member 630 on the left side, and is configured to be able to guide the electric wiring therein, and is disposed as a lid on the guide path. The thin lid portion 636 is reinforced by being fastened and fixed.

  Since the electrical wiring passes through the inside of the lower arm member 630 (between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636) and is guided to the effect member 700 side, members disposed on the front and back of the lower arm member 630 (for example, It is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620) from contacting the electrical wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the electrical wiring from being entangled or rubbed with these members and being damaged.

  The lower arm member 630 includes, in addition to the above-described pressing member PC1 assembled from the front side, a pressing member PC1 configured from the same member and assembled from the back side. Through this pressing member PC1, the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the main body plate-like portion of the main body member 601 in the front-rear direction. The main body member 601 and the pressing member PC1 are not always in contact with each other and have a slight gap so that the lower arm member 630 comes into contact with the rear side to limit the displacement. It functions similarly to the case of the front pressing member PC1.

  That is, the lower arm member 630 is configured so that the pressing members PC1 are assembled on both front and rear sides and can be brought into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing members PC1. It is possible to easily limit the displacement, and to easily reduce the resistance generated with respect to the up-and-down displacement when the displacement is limited.

  The projecting tip of the pressing member PC1 assembled from the back side to the back side is disposed closer to the back side than the back side end of the upper arm member 620. This prevents the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 even when the front end of the pressing member PC1 is displaced to the back side to such an extent as to come into contact with the main body member 601. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 from coming into contact with the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 disposed in the front-rear direction.

  This configuration is particularly effective when the lower arm member 630 is easily unintentionally displaced in the front-rear direction. For example, in the present embodiment, the tip of the lower arm member 630 is disposed in the vicinity of the rear end surface of the effect member 700, and the center of gravity of the effect member 700 and the connection position of the effect member 700 and the lower arm member 630 are front and rear. Since the position is displaced in the direction, it can be said that the lower arm member 630 is likely to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In addition, the front and rear direction displacement of the lower arm member 630 is likely to occur due to the displacement mode of the lower arm member 630 and the drive displacement of the effect member 700 itself.

  The transmission gear 650 includes a semicircular main body portion 651 formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape, a gear portion 652 engraved in a gear shape on the radially outer side of the semicircular main body portion 651, and a semicircular main body portion. A support hole 653 penetratingly formed as a circular hole through which the cylindrical shaft portion 605 can be inserted on the semicircular center axis of 651, and projecting in a cylindrical shape from the outer diameter end portion of the semicircular main body portion 651 to the front side. A cylindrical projection 654, a detected plate portion 655 formed in a thin plate shape capable of entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 at the circumferential end of the semicircular main body portion 651, and the detected plate portion A thickened portion 656 thickened between 655 and the support hole 653, and a regulated hole 657 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position on the support hole 653 side of the thickened portion 656 are provided.

  The gear portion 652 is disposed in mesh with the drive gear of the drive motor MT2, and the driving force of the drive motor MT2 is directly transmitted.

  The columnar protrusion 654 passes through the arc-shaped hole 606 of the main body member 601 and is disposed inside the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620. As a result, the driving force can be transmitted to the upper arm member 620 through the cylindrical protrusion 654 as the transmission gear 650 rotates. The columnar projection 654 is inserted into a collar member having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the transmission hole 624, and a head-side large-diameter fastening screw is formed on the female screw portion formed at the projecting tip of the columnar projection 654. By being screwed in, the collar member and the upper arm member 620 are supported so as not to drop off, and the forward displacement of the upper arm member 620 is restricted.

  The thickened portion 656 and the regulated hole 657 are parts configured to be engageable with the above-described displacement regulating device 180 (see FIG. 6). Since the regulated hole 657 is disposed on the support hole 653 side (position near the support hole 653), the transmission gear 650 changes to the displacement regulation device 180 in the regulation state of the displacement regulation device 180 (see FIG. 21A). The transmitted load (moment) is configured to be reduced.

  Further, as a design concept of the thickness of the transmission gear 650, the thickened portion 656 is set as a location that needs to be able to withstand the load generated by the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180. That is, the portion where the engagement with the displacement regulating device 180 cannot occur is formed thin, so that the material cost required for the transmission gear 650 can be reduced.

  53 is a front exploded perspective view of the effect member 700, and FIG. 54 is a rear exploded perspective view of the effect member 700. In the description of FIGS. 53 and 54, FIGS. 51 and 52 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the effect member 700 includes a plate-like main body 710 connected to the tip of the lower arm member 630, and a functional plate 720 fastened and fixed to the front side of the plate-like main body 710. A rotating plate 730 disposed between the functional plate portion 720 and the plate-like main body 710 and supported so as to be capable of rotational displacement with respect to the functional plate portion 720, and between the rotating plate 730 and the functional plate portion 720. An expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that is disposed and configured to be able to be displaced in the same manner as the magic hand in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating plate 730, and is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720, and the drive gear MG3 is fixed to the functional plate portion 720. A drive motor MT3 disposed on the back side, a light emitting effect device 750 that is fastened and fixed to the front side of the functional plate portion 720, and a light emitting effect, and an effect standby state that is fastened and fixed to the front ends of the plurality of expansion and contraction displacement members 740, respectively. Dude includes a plurality of shielding design member 760 to be combined so as to shield the passage of light at the front side of the light emitting effect device 750, a.

  The plate-shaped main body 710 includes a pair of columnar protrusions 711 protruding in a columnar shape having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the support hole 633 of the lower arm member 630 on the back side from a symmetrical position, and the columnar protrusions. A plurality of auxiliary projections 712 projecting in a cylindrical shape with an outer diameter slightly shorter than the width of the arc upper hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 from the position on the arc centered at 711 to the back side, and a pair of columnar projections A through hole 713 drilled in the front-rear direction at a position between 711, a wiring guide member 714 disposed below the through hole 713 and opened only on the front side, and a press disposed on the back surface of the plate And a member PC1.

  The through-hole 713 is a through-hole for passing through the lower arm member 630 and the electric wiring DK1 guided to the front end side of the lower arm member 630 between the placement portion 635 and the thin lid portion 636 to the front side. . In the section from the tip of the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, the electric wiring DK1 is guided by the wiring guide member 714. Thereby, even in a limited section from the lower arm member 630 to the through hole 713, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the electric wiring DK1 comes into contact with other members or is visually recognized by the player.

  In addition to the function of guiding the electrical wiring DK1, the wiring guide member 714 is formed with an inclined surface that is inclined downward as the upper surface goes to the back side, and therefore, the lower end portion of the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 It also has a function to relieve the contact.

  That is, the upper side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is disposed to face the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward, and the effect member 700 is displaced to the rear side. Even so, when the wiring guide member 714 abuts against the rear plate portion 611, the effect member 700 can be returned to the front side in the middle of the upward displacement along the inclination of the upper surface of the wiring guide member 714.

  Similar to the wiring guide member 714, the pressing member PC1 is also slidably disposed on the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. That is, in this embodiment, in the process of the upward displacement of the effect member 700, the pressing member PC1 disposed at the upper end and the wiring guide member 714 disposed at the lower portion can be brought into contact with the rear plate portion 611 of the front cover member 610. With this configuration, the load generation position for maintaining the posture of the effect member 700 can be divided.

  FIG. 55 is a front view of the functional plate portion 720. In the description of FIG. 55, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  The functional plate portion 720 is formed in a substantially plate shape from a resin material, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back side at the center portion, and a cylindrical portion 721 in which the inside of the tube is formed, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 721 An arc-shaped hole 722 drilled along a coaxial arc shape, a sensor placement portion 723 formed so that the detection sensor SC7 can be placed at one end of the arc-shaped hole 722, and a drive shaft of the drive motor MT3 can be inserted. A motor fixing portion 724 that has an opening and is configured so that the drive motor MT3 can be fastened and fixed, a radial long hole 725a along a straight line passing through the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721, and the radial long hole 725a A plurality of (in the present embodiment, five sets) guide holes 725 configured by a pair of intersecting long holes 725b that intersect at right angles with each other and extend radially outward on the extension line of the radial long holes 725a. Multiple (in this embodiment, The extended plate portion 726 of the location) and a pair (the book) protruding from the back side end portion of the flat portion disposed at the extended proximal end of the extended plate portion 726 at both ends in the width direction of the extended plate portion 726. In the embodiment, each of the extended plate portions 726 includes a pair of auxiliary protrusions 727 and a pair of columnar protrusions 728 that protrude from the vicinity of the radially outer end toward the back side in a column shape.

  The cylindrical portion 721 is arranged so that the end on the back side is in contact with the plate-like main body 710, and is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710 with the internal through hole communicating with the through hole 713 of the plate-like main body 710. Is done. At this time, the fastening screw is inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side of the plate-like main body 710, and the screw portion is screwed into the female screw formed at the back-side end portion of the cylindrical portion 721.

  As a result, the functional plate portion 720 is fastened and fixed to the plate-like main body 710, and a through hole is formed in the center portion thereof. In this embodiment, the electric wiring DK1 is guided to the front side through the through hole. .

  The electrical wiring DK <b> 1 (see FIG. 76) guided to the front side is connected to the detection sensor SC <b> 7 that is fastened and fixed to the sensor placement portion 723 and the drive motor MT <b> 3 that is fastened and fixed to the motor fixing portion 724. As a result, the detection sensor SC7 and the drive motor MT3 can be energized.

  The arc-shaped hole 722 is a through-hole for allowing the detected portion 731a of the rotating plate 730 to project to the front side, and the detected portion 731a enters the detection groove of the detecting sensor SC7, so that the rotating plate 730 The posture can be determined.

  The guide hole 725 is a through-hole group formed with a width that allows the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 to be arranged, and along a straight line extending in the radial direction from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 721. A long hole shape is formed along a straight line orthogonal to a straight line that is a reference of the radial long hole 725a on both sides of the outer diameter side end of the long hole shape 725a. And a pair of crossed long holes 725b.

  The radial long hole 725a and the cross long hole 725b function to limit the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the extension plate portion 726 and the auxiliary projection 727 correct the posture of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 in the collective arrangement state. The details will be described later.

  The columnar projecting portion 728 is configured such that the tip on the back side can come into contact with the plate-like main body 710. In the abutting state, the functional plate portion 720 is inserted into the female screw formed on the distal end side of the columnar projecting portion 728 by inserting a fastening screw inserted into the plate-like main body 710 from the back side. Fastened to 710.

  In the assembled state, the columnar projecting portion 728 is inserted into the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730 and limits the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730. That is, the columnar projecting portion 728 is used as a portion for fastening and fixing the functional plate portion 720 to the plate-like main body 710 and a portion for limiting the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730.

  56 is a front view of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. 57 is a side view of the rotating plate 730. In the description of FIGS. 56 and 57, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  The rotating plate 730 is formed in a substantially disc shape from a resin material, and has a cylindrical portion 731 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the front side at the center and is formed so as to penetrate the inside of the cylinder, and a central axis of the cylindrical portion 731. A plurality of arc-shaped holes 732 drilled along a coaxial arc shape, and long through holes formed at positions on the outer diameter side of the cylindrical portion 731 and on the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 732. A plurality of (in this embodiment, five) guide holes 733, and extended claw portions 734 extending in a claw shape radially outward at positions corresponding to the guide holes 733.

  The cylindrical portion 731 is designed to have an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 721 of the functional plate portion 720, extends from the front end to the front side, and passes through the arc-shaped hole 722 of the functional plate portion 720 to detect the detection sensor SC7. And a gear portion 731b formed on the outer peripheral side in a gear shape that can mesh with the drive gear MG3 of the drive motor MT3.

  The arc-shaped hole 732 is an opening in which the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is disposed, and is formed with a length that can ensure a rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 of less than about 120 degrees.

  Each guide hole 733 is formed in the same shape, and has a small-diameter arc portion 733a formed in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 and the center of the cylindrical portion 731 rather than the small-diameter arc portion 733a. A large-diameter arc portion 733b having a long length from the shaft, and a connecting portion 733c for connecting the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the small-diameter arc portion 733a are provided.

  Although the aspect of the connection part 733c is not limited at all, in this embodiment, it is formed so that the change of the length from the central axis of the cylindrical part 731 per unit angle changes corresponding to the position. The In particular, in the present embodiment, the change in length from the central axis of the cylindrical portion 731 per unit angle in the vicinity of the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b is designed to be relatively small.

  Thereby, the resistance generated when the load is transmitted to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 can be reduced, and the rendering effect can be improved by making the displacement speed of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 non-uniform.

  The extended claw portion 734 is formed in a claw shape that protrudes in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front, is configured to be able to engage with an expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the front side, and is formed toward the rear side in the thickness direction. The back side nail | claw part 734a and the front side claw part 734b formed in the front side rather than the back side claw part 734a are provided. In the present embodiment, the back side claw portion 734a and the front side claw portion 734b are divided at a substantially middle position of the thickness dimension of the extended claw portion 734.

  The extended claw portion 734 functions as a portion that engages with the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. The front-side claw portion 734b and the back-side claw portion 734a correspond to the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b, respectively, which have different projecting tip positions from the front and rear of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, respectively. Although it guides to a radial inside, the detail is mentioned later.

  In the present embodiment, the extended claw portion 734 has a longer extension length than the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the upper side. Formed. In the present embodiment, the extending length is increased in both the circumferential direction and the radial direction. Thereby, the influence of gravity can be relieved.

  That is, even if the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 has the same shape, the displacement caused by the action of gravity differs for each expansion / contraction displacement member 740 because the relationship between the displaceable direction and the gravity direction is different. For example, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side hangs down by its own weight and displaces in a direction away from the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. 740 1st to-be-guided protrusions 743b may be arrange | positioned, and the guidance to the radial direction inner side by the extension nail | claw part 734 may fail.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the extended length of the extended claw portion 734 disposed on the lower side is designed to be sufficiently long in consideration of the hanging of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. The guide to the inside in the radial direction by the portion 734 can be executed stably.

  On the other hand, even if the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the upper side is displaced by the influence of its own weight, the displacement is a displacement in a direction approaching the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730, so that the extended claw portion 734 is guided inward in the radial direction. Is unlikely to fail. For this reason, the extended claw portion 734 disposed on the upper side is not extended longer than necessary, but is formed shorter, thereby reducing the material cost and reducing the size of the rotating plate 730. Can do.

  58 and 59, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 will be described. In the description of FIGS. 58 and 59, FIGS. 53 and 54 are referred to as appropriate.

  58 (a) is a front perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 58 (b) is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. ) Is a front perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, and FIG. 59B is a rear perspective view of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760.

  58 (a) and 58 (b), one of the five sets of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which is arranged at the top, is shown in a state in which they are arranged together. In FIG. 59 (a) and FIG. 59 (b), the same set is illustrated in a state where it is discrete.

  The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is a member constituting a link mechanism composed of a plurality of long members disposed in the front and rear two layers. Therefore, in the following description, a plurality of expansion / contraction displacement members 740 are disposed on the front side. A plane on which the long member can be displaced is also referred to as a front layer plane, and a plane on which a plurality of long members disposed on the rear side can be displaced is also referred to as a rear layer plane.

  The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in two front and rear layers, and is supported by a pair of base end side members 741 that are rotatably supported at the lower end portion, and at the upper end portion of the base end side member 741 so as to be relatively rotatable. A pair of first elongate members 742, a pair of second elongate members 743 pivotally supported at the upper end of the first elongate member 742, and an upper end of the second elongate member 742 And a tip adjusting member 744 having a guide long hole 744a extending linearly so as to be capable of guiding.

  The base end side member 741, the first long member 742, and the second long member 743 configured by a pair of front and rear are designed so that the length in the longitudinal direction and the support position are the same in a pair.

  The base end side member 741 is a circle of a transmitted projection 741a projecting in a cylindrical shape from the lower end portion of the rear layer plane side member to the back side, and a back surface from which the columnar projection 741a projects. A guided protrusion 741b that protrudes in a columnar shape and is inserted into a member on the front layer plane side, and a lower end portion of the first long member 742 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. And a guided protrusion 741c inserted through a through-hole formed in the outer periphery.

  The transmitted protrusion 741a is disposed in the guide hole 733 (see FIG. 56) of the rotating plate 730 and is configured to be displaced in the radial direction as the rotating plate 730 rotates.

  The guided protrusions 741b and the guided protrusions 741c are disposed in the guide holes 725 of the functional plate part 725 and guided in the longitudinal direction thereof. The guided protrusion 741b is disposed in the radial elongated hole 725a, and the guided protrusion 741c is disposed in the intersecting elongated hole 725b (see FIG. 55).

  The first elongate member 742 is pivotally supported so as to be relatively rotatable about the front-rear direction axis at a substantially intermediate position in the elongate direction, and is projected in a columnar shape from the lower end portion of the member on the rear layer plane side to the front side. And a guided projection 742a that is inserted into the upper end of the base end side member 741 on the side.

  The guided protrusion 742a is disposed in the crossed long hole 725b of the functional plate 725, and is guided in the longitudinal direction (see FIG. 55).

  The second elongate member 743 is pivotally supported at a substantially middle position in the elongate direction so as to be rotatable relative to the front-rear direction axis. The second elongate member 743 protrudes in a columnar shape from the upper end of the front layer plane side to the front side. A pair of protrusions projecting from the upper end of the layer plane side member to the front end surface of the front layer plane side member with a diameter of about the member width and projecting in a cylindrical shape from the protruding tip to the front side. A support protrusion 743a, and a first guided protrusion 743b that protrudes in a columnar shape from a substantially intermediate position of the member on the rear layer plane side to the back surface side.

  The first guided protrusion 743b is guided by the back side claw part 734a of the extended claw part 734 of the rotating plate 730, and receives a load directed radially inward by this guidance (see FIG. 56).

  The tip adjustment member 744 is a member to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side, and is a length that extends along the linear direction with a width that allows the support protrusion 743a of the second long member 743 to be inserted. A pair of guide long holes 744a drilled in a hole shape and a second guided projection 744b projecting in a columnar shape from the center position in the longitudinal direction to the back side are provided.

  The second guided projection 744b has a projecting tip disposed in front of the projecting tip of the first guided projection 743b, and is guided by the front side claw 734b of the extended claw 734 of the rotating plate 730, A load directed radially inward is received by this guidance (see FIG. 57).

  The second guided projection 744b is not circular in the shape of the projecting tip, and is inclined close to the rotation plate 730 having a rotation center on the side of the transmission projection 741a as it is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in the rear view. The surface on the side facing the surface 734c (see FIG. 57) (the surface on the left side of FIG. 59B) includes an inclined surface in a chamfered manner.

  By this inclined surface, even when the arrangement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is slightly shifted in the front-rear direction, it is possible to avoid excessive resistance when contacting the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730. Can do.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (b) and 59 (b), when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is arranged in a collective manner and when it is separated, it is arranged at the tip of the second long member 743 of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. The support protrusions 743a are disposed at both outer end portions or inner end portions of the guide long holes 744a of the tip adjusting member 744. Thereby, arrangement | positioning (arrangement of a longitudinal direction) of the front-end | tip adjustment member 744 with respect to a pair of support protrusion 743a can be stabilized.

  The shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the tip adjustment member 744, extends to the front side with the fastening portion as an end, and covers the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 toward the front side from the extended tip. A member having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front and having a shape portion extending in parallel with a plane (front layer plane or rear layer plane) on which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the extended tip. is there.

  The shielding design member 760 is configured such that a colored (red in the present embodiment) reflective sheet is attached to the front and back to shield the decorative member 752 on the back side invisible, and along the back of the member at the right end. And an extended plate portion 761 extending in a plate shape to the right side in a form in which the plate surface is formed.

  Similarly to the main body of the shielding design member 760, the extended plate portion 761 has a colored (red in this embodiment) reflecting sheet attached to the front and back, and is disposed on the right side (next to the clockwise direction) in front view. The design member 760 is arranged so as to face the back side of the left end portion of the design member 760. When the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the back side, the design member 760 is configured to be able to suppress the displacement.

  The arrangement of the extended plate portion 761 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front surface of the plate may be shifted from the back surface of the main body of the shielding design member 760 to the back surface side. In this case, when the plurality of shielding design members 760 are displaced to the collective arrangement position, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. It is possible to avoid abutting (collision) along.

  This effect becomes more prominent as the disposition of the extended plate portion 761 is separated from the main body portion of the shielding design member 760, but at least as much as the dimension allowed for the shielding design member 760 as a positional deviation in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760. By disposing the extended plate portion 761 apart from each other, the extended plate portion 761 and the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 abut along the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. (Collision) can be avoided.

  Further, the shape of the front surface of the extended plate portion 761 may be formed as an inclined surface, or may be formed as a plane whose normal is directed in the front-rear direction. In this embodiment, it is comprised as an inclined surface of the aspect which approaches the back side, so that it leaves | separates from the shielding design member 760.

  Thereby, for example, the shielding design member 760 is assembled in a state where the shielding design member 760 adjacent to the right of the top shielding design member 760 is slightly displaced to the back side with respect to the top shielding design member 760. Even in the case of displacement to the arrangement (see FIG. 63) position along the front surface inclination of the extended plate portion 761 of the uppermost shielding design member 760, the position in the front-rear direction of the shielding design member 760 right next to the front view Misalignment can be corrected. Thereby, the relative front-back direction position of the adjacent shielding design member 760 can be easily adjusted.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b), the second elongated member 743 of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 has a member that supports the right side portion of the shielding design member 760 arranged on the rear layer plane. The member that supports the left side portion of the shielding design member 760 is arranged on the front layer plane, and the left side portion becomes the right side portion by crossing the middle portion of the pair of second long members 743 in the front and back direction. In comparison, the shielding design member 760 is configured to be easily inclined to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Since the structure of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that supports the shielding design member 760 is common to the five sets, each shielding design member 760 is common, and the left side is the right side (the side on which the extended plate portion 761 is formed). In comparison, it is configured so as to be easily tilted to the posture arranged on the front side.

  Due to the inclination of the posture of the shielding design member 760, the extended plate portion 761 can be positioned away from the back side of the shielding design member 760 disposed to face the extended plate portion 761. In this state, when the shielding design member 760 is displaced to the position of the collective arrangement, the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 are displaced in the displacement direction (displacement plane) of the shielding design member 760 or the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. ) Can be avoided along (collision).

  In a state in which five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged together (see FIG. 53), the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a circular shape, and all the shielding design members 760 are adjacent to the left (next to the counterclockwise direction in front view). The extension plate portion 761 of the shielding design member 760 is restrained from being displaced to the back side.

  According to this configuration, the shielding design member 760 is prevented from being displaced to the front side when the extended plate portion 761 abuts on the shielding design member 760 on the right side (next to the clockwise view in the front view). For this reason, the five sets of shielding design members 760 are arranged opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, whereby the positional deviation in the front-rear direction can be suppressed for each of the five sets of shielding design members 760.

  With reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the interlocking between the rotating plate 730 and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 will be described. 60 and 61 are front views of the functional plate portion 720. FIG. 60 and 61, the guide hole 733 of the rotating plate 730 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an example of the arrangement of the outer shape of the transmitted protrusion 741a and the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is illustrated. The

  60 shows a state in which the elastic displacement members 740 are collectively arranged (see FIG. 58). In FIG. 61, the rotating plate 730 rotates about 120 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the elastic displacement members 740 are discrete. (See FIG. 59).

  In this embodiment, the guided protrusions 741b, 741c, and 742a are guided along the guide hole 725, and the arrangement of the transmitted protrusion 741a that is disposed in the guide hole 733 as the rotating plate 730 rotates is the rotating plate. The state of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 changes by displacing in the direction of approaching the rotating shaft side of 730.

  In this state change, the guided projections 741c and 742a are still maintained on the outer diameter side of the functional plate portion 720. Therefore, the shielding design member 760 is stretched to the outer diameter side with reference to the positions of the guided projections 741c and 742a. Although it is configured to be displaceable so as to be released, details will be described later.

  Returning to FIG. 53 and FIG. The light emitting effect device 750 includes an electrical decoration board 751 having an opening in the center, and a decorative member 752 that is disposed on the front side of the electrical decoration board 751 and is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Since an opening is formed in the center of the electric decoration board 751 and the decorative member 752 is formed in a dome shape projecting to the front side, a region where the drive motor MT3 is disposed can be secured.

  The illumination board 751 has an opening 751a at the center. Inside the opening 751a, the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring guided through the lower arm member 630 are arranged. The larger the opening 751a is, the easier it is to arrange the drive motor MT3 and the electric wiring. However, since the arrangement area of the LED as the light emitting means is limited, the smaller the opening 751a is, from the viewpoint of the light emission effect. desirable.

  Since no LED can be disposed in the opening 751a, the front side thereof is dark and easily visible. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, this is dealt with by dividing the configuration of the decorative member 752 into two parts.

  That is, the decorative member 752 includes a light transmissive member 752a formed of a colorless and light transmissive resin material, and a light-transmitting member 752a that is assembled from the front side and has a mirror-like viewing surface (for example, silver plating is applied). A mirror surface member 752b.

  An opening is formed in the central portion of the light transmitting member 752a, and the mirror surface member 752b is closed at the central portion, so that the mirror surface member 752b can be disposed at a position where the drive motor MT3 is disposed in a front view. . Thereby, even if there is no light irradiation from the LED from the back side, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the reflected light by light irradiation from other directions (for example, light irradiation from the hemispherical illumination device 613). It is possible to prevent the front side portion of the opening 751a from being visually recognized darkly.

  The vertical displacement of the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 will be described. 62 to 64 are front views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the descending displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 62 to 64, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  62 shows the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 63 shows the lowering state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. 64 shows the extension state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Illustrated.

  63 is illustrated as a state in which the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 is half of the rotation angle of the lower arm member 630 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state. In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the upper arm member 620 is similarly halved.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the production standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed at the boundary position between the transmission part 624a and the margin part 624b of the upper arm member 620. That is, the state in which the columnar protrusion 654 immediately enters the transmission unit 624a and is arranged at a position where the effect member 700 can start the downward displacement is the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  This effect standby state suggests that, for example, the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is displaced downward by the effect members including the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) disposed in the pachinko machine 10. The columnar protrusion 654 is arranged on the margin 624b side before the suggestion effect is executed.

  As described above, the margin portion 624b is a shape portion that continuously extends from one end of the transmission portion 624a along an arc centered on the rotation axis of the transmission gear 650. In the state shown in FIG. It is arranged at a position overlapping with 606 in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 via the transmission hole 624 of the upper arm member 620 is directed to the rotation shaft of the transmission gear 650 and does not function as a load for rotating the transmission gear 650. Therefore, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be regulated regardless of whether or not the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is energized, thereby being connected to the lower arm member 630 connected to the upper arm member 620. The displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated.

  Even if the above-described effect that suggests that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is an effect aspect in which the effect member 700 is not finally displaced downward, in this embodiment, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is placed in the effect standby state. Controlled to change state.

  In this case, immediately after the player is informed that the effect member 700 does not move downward, the transmission gear 650 rotates counterclockwise in order to return the cylindrical protrusion 654 to the margin 624b. The drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) is driven.

  As a result, when an effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward is performed, it is possible to avoid prediction of an effect related to the effect member 700 due to a difference in drive sound of the drive motor MT2. .

  The margin 624b also has a function of reducing the accuracy required for the drive stop position when the drive motor MT2 is rotationally driven in the direction in which the effect member 700 is raised. That is, in the driving mode in which the effect member 700 is raised, the effect member 700 is already arranged at the displacement end position on the upper end side in the state shown in FIG. 62, and the displacement of the columnar projection 654 thereafter is a margin part. The displacement is sufficient to slide along 624b.

  Then, no matter what position of the marginal portion 624b the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed, there is no difference in the function of regulating the displacement of the upper arm member 620. Therefore, since the setting accuracy of the stop position of the cylindrical protrusion 654 is allowed to be low, the rotation that can stop the transmission gear 650 immediately after the detected plate 655 enters the detection sensor 607 (see FIG. 52). The rotational speed of the drive motor MT2 (see FIG. 51) when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is not limited to the speed, and can be set large. Thereby, the rising speed of the effect member 700 can be set large.

  In addition, even when the rising speed is excessive, when the upper arm member 620 comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654, the load applied to the cylindrical protrusion 654 is directed in the radial direction of the transmission gear 650. Therefore, it does not function to displace the columnar protrusion 654 in the rotation direction. Therefore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the displacement of the upper arm member 620 can be restricted at the position where it comes into contact with the cylindrical protrusion 654.

  Furthermore, even if the ascending speed is excessive, the lower arm member 630 is restricted from ascending displacement by the upper arm member 620, which will be described in detail later.

  As shown in FIGS. 62 to 64, the change in the left-right distance between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 (the left-right distance between the ends arranged in the guide hole 602 of the main body member 601) changes from the effect standby state. Compared to the state in the middle of the descent, the distance from the state in the middle of the descent to the overhang state is set larger.

  In this way, by increasing the displacement speed between the ends of the pair of lower arm members 630 accompanying the downward displacement of the effect member 700, the lower arm member 630 supporting the effect member 700 is violently displaced in the width direction. And the player can visually recognize as if the displacement speed of the effect member 700 is violently increased, and the effect of the up-and-down displacement of the effect member 700 can be achieved. Can be improved.

  65 to 67 are rear views of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 showing the downward displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. In FIG. 65, for easy understanding, FIG. 65B is also shown as a view in which the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 are omitted.

  65 (a) and 65 (b) illustrate the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, FIG. 66 illustrates a state in which the effect member 700 is lowered from the effect standby state, and FIG. The overhanging state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (a), in the effect standby state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the detected plate portion 655 of the transmission gear 650 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. In other words, in the present embodiment, the drive motor MT2 is stopped in a state where the detected plate portion 655 is disposed in the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 before the execution of the effect suggesting that the effect member 700 is displaced downward. However, the drive motor MT2 is driven and controlled in accordance with the execution of the suggestive effect described above, and the drive motor MT2 is stopped at a position where it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. Control is performed to change the state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 to the effect standby state.

  On the other hand, when the transmission gear 650 is rotationally driven to the side that causes the effect member 700 to move upward, the energization of the drive motor MT2 is performed when it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607. By controlling to release the transmission gear 650, the transmission gear 650 can be stopped at a position slightly entering the margin 624b from the position of the columnar protrusion 654 in the production standby state. As described above, the upper arm member 620 is stopped. The displacement of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be restricted.

  In this embodiment, if it is determined that the detected plate portion 655 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 607, the drive of the drive motor MT2 is not immediately stopped, regardless of whether the drive speed is maintained or reduced. Control is performed so that the drive of the drive motor MT2 is stopped after a time delay sufficient for the position of the columnar protrusion 654 to be disposed at the end of the margin 624b.

  Thereby, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 can be set to a position where the position of the columnar protrusion 654 is disposed at the end of the margin 624b. At this position, the cylindrical portion 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 can be inserted into the regulated hole 657 of the transmission gear 650 (see FIG. 21A). Even when the stop position of the transmission gear 650 is slightly deviated, since the tapered surface is formed at the tip of the cylindrical portion 183 (see FIG. 15C), the cylindrical portion 183 is easily inserted into the restricted hole 657. can do.

  The position of the restricted hole 657 when the cylindrical portion 183 can be inserted is a position slightly rotated clockwise in the rear view from the state shown in FIG. 65A, and the position shown in FIG. It is set at a position partially overlapping with the restriction hole 657.

  Therefore, for example, in the state shown in FIG. 66 or 67, the operation member 183 of the displacement restricting device 180 is pushed in to place the displacement restricting device 180 in the restricted state (see FIG. 15C), and then the transmission gear 650 is turned on. Even if the transmission gear 650 is rotationally controlled in the direction in which the effect member 700 is lifted and displaced by driving control, the displacement of the transmission gear 650 is obstructed by the cylindrical portion 183, and the state shown in FIG.

  The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) determines that the transmission gear 650 is defective in displacement because the detected plate portion 655 does not enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 607 even though the drive motor MT2 continues to be driven. Can do.

  Based on this determination, the abnormality can be notified by a method such as displaying a displacement failure error of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 4). The store clerk can be made aware that the displacement regulating device 180 may remain in the regulated state.

  As a result, information such as an error display regarding the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be diverted, and information regarding the state of the displacement regulating device 180 can be communicated to the clerk of the gaming machine store. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a device for detecting the state of the displacement regulating device 180.

  Here, the stop position of the transmission gear 650 has a margin corresponding to the length of the margin portion 624b of the transmission hole 624, so that the rotation speed of the transmission gear 650 can be set large. If the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when the 700 is displaced upward is excessive, the upward speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 is excessive, and the lower arm member 630 is moved to the upper arm member 620. There is a possibility of collision.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the direction in which the effect member 700 is displaced toward the effect standby state is set in the direction opposite to the direction of gravity (upward), so that downward acceleration is always applied to the lower arm member 630. Thus, the vertical load at the contact position when the lower arm member 630 collides with the upper arm member 620 can be reduced.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the upper side surface shape of the lower meat portion 637 of the lower arm member 630 is formed along the lower side surface shape of the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630 is formed. Can increase the contact area when the upper arm member 620 collides with the upper arm member 620. As a result, it is possible to avoid a large load locally occurring in the upper arm member 620 and the lower arm member 630, and it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620 or the lower arm member 630 from being broken or broken.

  Thus, since the lower arm member 630 is configured to be able to contact the lower surface of the upper arm member 620 with a sufficiently large contact area, the rotational speed of the transmission gear 650 when the effect member 700 is displaced upward is excessive. Even if the ascending speed of the lower arm member 630 suspended from the upper arm member 620 becomes excessive, the lower arm is moved by the upper arm member 620 whose displacement is restricted by the cylindrical protrusion 654 as described above. The upward displacement of the member 630 can be restricted. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from being displaced upward beyond the arrangement in the effect standby state.

  66 and 67, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 are displaced downward from the effect standby state against the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 by the drive force of the drive motor MT2. Corresponding to the state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 66, the auxiliary protrusion 712 of the effect member 700 is disposed at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630. In the state shown in FIG. 67, the effect member is similar to the state shown in FIG. 700 auxiliary protrusions 712 are disposed at the ends of the arc-shaped holes 634 of the lower arm member 630.

  Thereby, the extent to which the lower arm member 630 holds the effect member 700 (the extent to which the posture is stabilized) can be changed. In other words, the lower arm member 630 can increase the degree of holding the effect member 700 in the effect stand-by state or the overhang state compared to the state of lowering.

  In other words, it is possible to easily prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the direction of rotation about the cylindrical protrusion 711. For example, when the auxiliary protrusion 712 is disposed at an intermediate position of the arc-shaped hole 732 and displacement in the rotation direction is not restricted (see FIG. 66), the effect member 700 is rotated in the rotation direction around the right cylindrical protrusion 711. The posture may change.

  In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 is supported by the pair of left and right lower arm members 630 at two points including the left columnar protrusion 711, but in a direction rotating around the right columnar protrusion 711. The displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the effect member 700 changes its posture is the short direction of the lower arm member 630, that is, the direction in which the lower arm member 630 is displaced. Therefore, the posture change of the effect member 700 is not restricted by the lower arm member 630 and may occur visibly, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the overhanging state, the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in the direction of rotation about the right cylindrical protrusion 711 is Lower arm member 630 is arranged along the longitudinal direction of arm member 630. Thereby, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be effectively limited by the lower arm member 630, and the change of the posture to the extent that the effect member 700 can be discriminated can be prevented.

  In addition, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the right side are disposed at the end positions of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the auxiliary protrusion 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732 come into contact with each other on the right side. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back with the cylindrical protrusion 711 as the center. Note that the posture change in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back is limited by the displacement direction of the left cylindrical protrusion 711 being along the longitudinal direction of the left lower arm member 630 as described above.

  Similarly, in the overhanging state, the pair of auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed on the left side are disposed at the end positions of the arc-shaped hole 732, so that the left-hand side is brought into contact with the auxiliary protrusion 712 and the arc-shaped hole 732. It is possible to prevent the effect member 700 from changing its posture in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the back, with the cylindrical protrusion 711 as the center. Note that the posture change in the clockwise direction in the rear view is limited by the displacement direction of the right cylindrical protrusion 711 being along the longitudinal direction of the right lower arm member 630 as described above.

  Further, the auxiliary protrusion 712 not only changes the posture of the effect member 700 in the rotation direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the front-rear direction) but also in the tilt direction (rotation direction centered on the axis extending in the left-right direction). It also functions to suppress posture changes and posture changes in the horizontal swing direction (rotation direction centered on the vertical axis).

  For example, the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are not connected by only a pair of left and right columnar protrusions 711, but the auxiliary protrusions 712 disposed above the columnar protrusions 711 and the columnar protrusions 711. Since the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 can be connected at the upper and lower three positions by being connected also by the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the lower left and right outer sides, the posture change in the tilt direction of the effect member 700 can be changed. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed on the upper side of the cylindrical protrusion 711 is disposed in the middle of the long main body of the lower arm member 630 (the base side of the arc-shaped hole 634), the effect member 700 is tilted. The long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 can withstand the load caused by the change in orientation.

  Further, as described above, the pressing member PC1 is disposed on the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 (see FIGS. 64 and 67), and the lower member is lowered by the main body member 601 or the front cover member 610 via the pressing member PC1. The longitudinal displacement of the arm member 630 is restricted.

  As described above, when the load due to the posture change of the effect member 700 is applied to the long main body portion of the lower arm member 630 and the lower arm member 630 receives a load in the bending direction along the long direction, By using the configuration that regulates the displacement, the posture change of the effect member 700 can be firmly prevented.

  Further, as described above, the auxiliary protrusions 712 arranged on the left and right outer sides (downward) of the cylindrical protrusions 711 can increase the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, and the effect member 700 can be lowered. It is possible to suppress the posture change in the lateral swing direction with respect to the arm member 630.

  In the present embodiment, the connection position of the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is disposed on a horizontal plane that passes through the vertical center of the plate-like main body 710 of the effect member 700. In the present embodiment, the center of gravity of the effect member 700 is disposed on the same horizontal plane.

  Accordingly, the amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in a manner in which the effect member 700 tilts forward around the connection portion with the lower arm member 630 can be minimized, and the lower arm member 630 can The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction when the orientation member 700 changes its posture in a manner in which the effect member 700 tilts backward with the connection portion as the center can be minimized.

  In other words, even when there is a possibility that a plurality of types of posture changes may occur in the effect member 700, the displacement of the effect member 700 in the front-rear direction is suppressed regardless of any of the plurality of posture changes. Since it can, it can respond to any posture change.

  Thus, even when the effect member 700 and the partition member 310 (see FIG. 13A) are arranged with a narrow front-rear distance, the effect member 700 rubs or collides with the partition member 310. Since this can be avoided, it is possible to make it difficult to cause the visibility member 700 to be damaged, the design portion to be deteriorated, the visibility of the partition member 310 to be deteriorated, or the visibility to be deteriorated (reduced permeability).

  In the state where the effect member 700 is disposed at the lower end position, the transmission gear 650 contacts the shape portion of the main body member 601 in the rotation direction, and further rotation is restricted. Therefore, even if the drive of the drive motor MT2 is continued, it is possible to prevent the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the effect member 700 from being displaced excessively only by accumulating the drive force in the transmission gear 650.

  In the present embodiment, in the overhanging state shown in FIG. 67, a driving force slightly exceeding the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is continuously applied to prevent the effect member 700 from bouncing back and displaced. I have control.

  As a result, the effect member 700 can be stably stopped at the lower end position while the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 is set to be large (for example, large enough to lift the effect member 700).

  On the other hand, when starting the displacement of the effect member 700 upward, the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 can be used, so that it is possible to avoid an excessive load on the drive motor MT2.

  For example, when starting the displacement upward, the effect member 700 starts to be displaced upward by the urging force of the torsion spring SP3 after releasing the driving force for stably arranging the effect member 700 at the lower end position. By generating the driving force of the driving motor MT2 after waiting (by providing a waiting time until the driving of the driving motor MT2 starts), it is possible to apply the driving force to the effect member 700 after starting the displacement.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the production | presentation member 700 of a stop state is displaced upward, the burden applied to drive motor MT2 can be reduced.

  In FIGS. 65 to 67, the change in the arrangement of the electric wiring DK1 passed through the lower arm member 630 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the inner side surface shape of the wiring guide member 714 for guiding the electric wiring DK1 is illustrated by a hidden line. Is done.

  As shown in FIG. 65 (b), the electric wiring DK1 passes through the front side of the thin lid portion 636 of the lower arm member 630, passes through the inner diameter side of the arc-shaped hole 634, and is guided to the inside of the wiring guide member 714. It passes through the through hole 713 to the front side.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the tension of the electrical wiring DK1 that may be caused by the relative displacement of the lower arm member 630 with respect to the effect member 700 is offset by the extra length of the electrical wiring DK1 that is arranged in advance inside the wiring guide member 714. Like to do. Thereby, since the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 can be completed in the vicinity of the wiring guide member 714, the displacement of the electric wiring DK1 on the front side of the through hole 713 or inside the lower arm member 630 can be suppressed.

  The shape of the inner side surface of the wiring guide member 714 is formed in an arc shape having a center on the electric wiring DK1 side. Thereby, the load which electrical wiring DK1 receives from the wiring guide member 714 can be reduced.

  In addition, the shape portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed functions to guide the displacement of the electric wiring DK1. For example, when the effect member 700 is lifted and displaced from the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 (see FIG. 67), the shape portion where the arc-shaped hole 634 of the lower arm member 630 is formed with respect to the electrical wiring DK1. The DK1 is configured to be pushed into the wiring guide member 714 side.

  As a result, the electric wiring DK1 can be stably taken in and out of the wiring guide member 714, and the state change of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 can be caused stably.

  As shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the auxiliary protrusion 712 disposed in the arcuate hole 634 disposed on the front side of the thin lid portion 636 and largely hidden in the thin lid portion 636 is in an overhanging state. Only in a position that can be seen in the rear view (see FIG. 67).

  The auxiliary protrusion 712 is a portion guided by the arc-shaped hole 634 and at the same time is a fastening portion used to connect the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. Therefore, in order to assemble (or disassemble) the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700, it is necessary to screw (or remove) a fastening screw into the auxiliary protrusion 712.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the state where the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 are assembled (or the state where the effect member 700 is disassembled) can be limited to the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. Thereby, assembly efficiency and maintenance efficiency can be improved. Moreover, as a result of assembling and maintaining the production member 700 in a halfway position, it is possible to prevent the production member 700 and other components from being damaged.

  Next, the displacement (enlargement / reduction displacement) associated with the state change of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 of the effect member 700 will be described. In the present embodiment, the degree of enlargement / reduction displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be changeable depending on the arrangement of the effect member 700.

  68 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 69 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 68 and 69, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  68 and 69 show a state in which the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is in the middle of lowering. As shown in FIGS. 68 and 69, when the expansion / contraction unit 600 is in the middle of the descending state, the production member 700 is not controlled to be expanded and displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed with the maximum diameter, and the intermediate position is not reached. Control is performed to allow expansion displacement.

  In other words, the rotation angle of the rotating plate 730 is limited by shortening the drive time of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53). Therefore, since it is possible to avoid the effect member 700 from being excessively large in front view, the amount of posture change allowed for the effect member 700 from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). Can be increased.

  The decorative member 752 is partially covered with the shielding design member 760 (the outer diameter side portion is covered) at the midpoint of the expansion displacement of the effect member 700. As a disposition of the decorative member 752 in the front view, the light transmitting member 752a is disposed at a position (gap position) that is not covered by the effect member 700, and the mirror member 752b is a light transmitting member including a position covered by the effect member 700. 752a is arranged at a position other than the position where it is visually recognized.

  Thereby, the visibility of the light irradiated through the light transmissive member 752a from the LED or the like disposed on the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53) can be improved, and the shielding design is transmitted through the light transmissive member 752a. By reflecting the light reflected on the back side of the member 760 with the mirror member 752b, the effect of the mirror member 752b can be improved.

  For example, as an effect mode of the mirror surface member 752b, when light is not emitted from the LED of the electrical decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53), the color of the ground of the shielding design member 760 on the mirror surface member 752b (red in this embodiment). Can be reflected and made visible to the player.

  On the other hand, in the case of irradiating light from the LED of the electric decoration board 751, the color reflected from the mirror member 752b is visually mixed with the color of the ground of the shielding design member 760 and the color of light irradiated from the LED. Can be different colors. Accordingly, the appearance of the mirror member 752b can be changed by light passing through a portion other than the mirror member 752 (for example, the light transmission member 752a).

  The control mode is not limited at all. For example, after stopping the shielding design member 760 in the state shown in FIG. 68, it may be controlled to return to the collective arrangement state, or the drive direction of the drive motor MT3 (see FIG. 53) is changed from the state shown in FIG. The shielding design member 760 may be controlled to vibrate in the radial direction by switching in small increments forward and backward.

  When controlling the shielding design member 760 to vibrate, the displacement of the shielding design member 760 can be further complicated. In the present embodiment, in the state of the enlarged displacement up to the middle position, as shown in FIG. 69, the position of the support protrusion 743a disposed at the tip of the second long member 743 of the telescopic displacement member 740 is the tip adjustment member. The intermediate position of the guide elongated hole 744a of 744 is set. As a result, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced in the longitudinal direction of the guide elongated hole 744a, so that the shielding design member 760 can be displaced not only in the radial direction but also in the circumferential direction.

  In a case where the shielding design members 760 are arranged in a collective manner while being able to achieve such a displacement, or when they are enlarged and displaced in the radial direction to the maximum, a support protrusion 743a arranged at the tip of the second long member 743. Are disposed at both end positions of the guide elongated hole 744a of the tip adjusting member 744, so that the arrangement in the circumferential direction of the shielding design member 760 can be returned (see FIG. 58 (b) and FIG. 59 (b)). ).

  Further, the midway position allowed as the enlarged displacement of the effect member 700 is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 69 and can be arbitrarily set. For example, the position may be slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state, or may be a position slightly before the position where the maximum displacement is performed.

  Here, in the state in which the extended plate is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state (for example, a position in which the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized by overlapping with the shielding design member 760 that is oppositely arranged). Since the part 761 plays the role of filling the gap between the shielding design members 760, the player can be visually recognized as maintaining the collective arrangement state.

  In the present embodiment, since the red reflection sheet is attached to the extended plate portion 761, similarly to the main body portion of the shield design member 760, the red color of the extended plate portion 761 is visually recognized in the gap between the shield design members 760. Even in such a case, it can be configured such that it is difficult to determine whether the red color is the color of the extended plate portion 761 or the color of the shielding design member 760.

  Unlike the present embodiment, in a state where the effect member 700 is enlarged and displaced to a position slightly deviated from the collective arrangement state by means such as painting the extended plate portion 761 with another color (for example, gold). You may make it make the extended board part 761 visually recognized by the clearance gap between the shielding design members 760 stand out.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the light transmissive member 752a is formed from a colorless and light transmissive resin material has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may form from a red resin material.

  In this case, even if the shielding design member 760 is displaced beyond the overlap margin with the extended plate portion 761 from the collective arrangement state, the light transmission member 752a that is visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 is shielded. Since it is visually recognized in red similarly to the design member 760, the player can visually recognize the shield design members 760 at least partially connected to each other.

  On the other hand, in the case of irradiating light from the LED of the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53), the light transmitting member 752a visually recognized in the gap between the shielding design members 760 can be made to emit light and stand out. The production effect can be improved.

  FIG. 70 is a front view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, and FIG. 71 is a rear view of the enlargement / reduction unit 600. 70 and 71, the front cover member 610 is not shown for easy understanding.

  70 and 71, the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 and the enlarged state of the effect member 700 are shown. As shown in FIGS. 70 and 71, in the extended state of the enlargement / reduction unit 600, the effect member 700 is controlled to be able to be enlarged and displaced until the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is dispersed at the maximum diameter.

  Therefore, the size of the effect member 700 in the front view is maximized, and the posture change amount allowed for the effect member 700 is minimized from the viewpoint of avoiding contact with the partition member 310 (see FIG. 22). The device for suppressing the posture change of the effect member 700 is as described above.

  In the enlarged state of the effect member 700, the shielding design member 760 is retracted from the decorative member 752 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the aspect reflected in the mirror member 752b when light is emitted from the LED of the electrical decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53) can be changed from the case where the effect member 700 is arranged at the midway position of the enlarged displacement.

  That is, reflection of the ground color of the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed, and the ground color of the mirror surface member 752b (in this embodiment, silver) can be easily seen by the player. Therefore, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced and the shielding design member 760 is enlarged and displaced, the decoration member 752 is visually recognized even in the control mode in which the same color light is continuously emitted from the LED of the electric decoration board 751 (see FIG. 53). The color of light to be visually recognized by the player can be changed in time series.

  More specifically, for example, in the case of irradiating white light from the illumination board 751, near the start of enlargement, the ground color (red) of the shielding design member 760 is visually recognized. The color of the character 760 is weakened (the range is narrowed), and the background color (silver) of the mirror surface member 752b is easily visible at the end position of the enlarged displacement. Thereby, the color of the light visually recognized by the player can be changed without changing the emission color.

  In the present embodiment, the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 68 and 69 and the enlarged displacement shown in FIGS. 70 and 71 are not controlled in a continuous manner, and the vertical position of the effect member 700 is fixed. Then, the effect member 700 is controlled to execute the enlarged displacement.

  That is, the vertical displacement of the effect member 700 is controlled to be executable only in a state where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged. Thereby, it can prevent that the shielding design member 760 collides with other structural members, such as the hemispherical front apparatus 613 (refer FIG. 47).

  In addition, in consideration of avoiding collision with other structural members, or configured so as not to cause a problem in displacement due to collision with other structural members, the displacement of the effect member 700 is enlarged during the vertical displacement. Control may be possible.

  The radial reduction displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 75. 72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a), and 75 (a) are rear views of the effect member 700 showing the reduction displacement of the effect member 700 in time series. 74 (b) is a top view of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXIVb in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is an upper surface of the effect member 700 as viewed in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. FIG.

  72 (a), 72 (b), 73, 74 (a), and 75 (a), the illustration of the plate-like main body 710 is omitted for ease of understanding. As shown, the rotating plate 730 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the back. In FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 75 (b), the illustration of the rotating plate 730b is further omitted.

  72A shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is dispersed with the maximum diameter (see FIGS. 70 and 71), and in FIG. 72B, the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 700 is shown. The state (refer FIG. 68 and FIG. 69) expanded and displaced to the middle position is shown in figure.

  In the state shown in FIG. 72 (a), the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is disposed at the boundary position between the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the connecting portion 733c of the rotating plate 730, and in the state shown in FIG. 72 (b). The transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is disposed at a midway position of the connection portion 733c of the rotating plate 730.

  73 illustrates a state in which the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side starts to come into contact with the rear side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730, and FIG. The state where the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is guided by the back side claw portion 734a of the rotating plate 730 and has reached the position immediately before the collective arrangement state is illustrated.

  Since the influence of gravity differs between the member arranged on the upper side and the member arranged on the lower side, the displacement modes of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged on the lower side and the member arranged on the upper side. It differs depending on the member.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 disposed on the upper side have their own weight, and the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 disposed on the lower side rotates by its own weight. Since it acts in the direction away from the plate 730, it hangs down in the direction away from the rotating plate 730 to the extent allowed by the gap between the guide hole 733 and the transmitted projection 741a.

  This hanging portion is lifted by a load from the extending claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730, and the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 reach the position of the collective arrangement state. Therefore, the timing when the shielding design member 760 reaches the collective arrangement state is five, not simultaneously, and at least the upper three are earlier than the lower two.

  Thereby, the displacement of the production member 700 to the collective arrangement state can be performed stably. That is, when the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are disposed first, the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 vigorously reach the collective arrangement state. If it collides with 740 and the shielding design member 760, fatigue accumulates in the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, which may cause early damage.

  On the other hand, when the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged first and the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are arranged in the collective arrangement state thereafter, as in the present embodiment. Since the self-weight is generated in a direction that opposes the displacement of the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760, the momentum of collision with the upper expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed. Thereby, accumulation of fatigue due to the collision between the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 can be suppressed.

  In FIG. 74, the transmitted projection 741a of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is disposed at the boundary position between the large-diameter arc portion 733b and the connection portion 733c of the rotating plate 730. Immediately after this, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is pushed by the back side claw portion 734a and is brought into a collective arrangement state. On the other hand, the second guided protrusion 744b of the tip adjustment member 744 is disposed away from the front side claw 734b.

  In FIG. 75, the collective arrangement state of the production members 700 is illustrated. That is, a state in which the rotating plate 730 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the back is illustrated up to a terminal position where the columnar projecting portion 728 of the functional plate portion 720 is disposed at the end of the arc-shaped hole 732 of the rotating plate 730.

  76 is a cross-sectional view of the effect member 700 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 76, in the collective arrangement state of the production members 700, the surface on the center axis side of the back side claw portion 734a abuts on the first guided protrusion 743b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the diameter of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 Displacement outward in the direction is restricted.

  In addition, the surface on the central axis side of the front side claw portion 734b comes into contact with the second guided protrusion 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, and the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 to the outside in the radial direction is restricted. At this time, the second guided protrusion 744b and the first guided protrusion 743b abut in the radial direction with the front-rear width in the protruding direction, and the arrangement of the second elongated member 743 and the tip adjusting member 744 and The posture can be stabilized.

  Further, the front surface of the tip adjusting member 744 is configured to be slidable on the back surface of the extended plate portion 726. In this sliding process, the projecting tip of the second guided projection 744b of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 contacts the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730 in the front-rear direction, and the inclined surface 734c is inclined in the rotational direction. (The closer it is to the collective arrangement state, the more it is inclined so as to project to the front side), and therefore, the load on the front side can be applied to the second guided protrusion 744b by the inclined surface 734c.

  As a result, in the configuration in which the tip adjusting member 744 is sandwiched between the extended plate portion 726 of the functional plate portion 720 and the inclined surface 734c of the rotating plate 730, as the rotating plate 730 rotates and the effect member 700 approaches the collective arrangement state, the tip In a mode in which the adjustment member 744 is gradually brought into close contact with the extended plate portion 726, the tip adjustment member 744 can be displaced toward the front side.

  Therefore, while preventing the resistance caused by the rotation of the rotating plate 730 from excessively increasing, the front end adjustment member 744 is given a load that is gradually increased in the front-rear direction, and the front-rear position and posture of the front end adjustment member 744 are given. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the position and posture of the shielding design member 760 in the front-rear direction, and it is possible to arrange the shielding design member 760 in close contact with each other in the collective arrangement state.

  With reference to FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 75 (b), it will be described that the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 can be corrected by the load applied to the second guided protrusion 744b. The configuration of the shielding design member 760 is common, and the configuration of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 that displaces the shielding design member 760 is also common.

  As described above, the shielding design member 760 is formed on the side where the extending plate portion 761 (see FIG. 59A) is formed in the width direction (on the right side in the case of the shielding design member 760 disposed on the top, FIG. 74). (B)) is configured so that the posture is inclined so as to be arranged on the rear side compared to the opposite side.

  This is due to the formation of the second long member 743, and this posture inclination similarly occurs in the tip adjustment member 744 to which the shielding design member 760 is fastened and fixed. Due to the inclination of the position of the tip adjusting member 744, the tip position of the second guided projection 744b is compared with the tip position of the first guided projection 743b (the projection direction is along the front-rear direction). The position tends to shift to the clockwise direction side (left side in the case of the shielding design member 760 arranged at the top, see FIG. 74B).

  On the other hand, the rotating claw 730 has the extended claw portion 734 disposed opposite to the second guided protrusion 744b in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and in the counterclockwise direction in the rear view with respect to the second guided protrusion 744b. It is rotationally displaced so that a load can be applied.

  That is, for example, when the inner side surface of the front side claw portion 734b and the front side surface of the inclined surface 734c (see FIGS. 56 and 57) abut on the second guided projection portion 744b, Since the tip position can be returned to the counterclockwise direction in the rear view, the inclination of the postures of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be relaxed (the inclination can be eliminated). Thereby, it is possible to easily eliminate the posture inclination of the shielding design member 760 at the position where the effect members 700 are collectively arranged.

  The load on the second guided protrusion 744b is configured to occur from the state shown in FIG. 74 to the state shown in FIG. Therefore, in the process of state change of the effect member 700 shown in time series in FIGS. 72 to 75, until the shielding design member 760 is arranged at the small diameter side end (reduction side end) of the allowable displacement range (see FIG. 74). The posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, and thereafter, a posture change that eliminates (corrects) the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be caused.

  That is, while the shielding design members 760 are close to each other, the posture adjustment of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is maintained, so that the main body portion of the shielding design member 760 and the extended plate portion 761 come into contact (collision). On the other hand, after the approach between the shielding design members 760 is completed, the inclination inclination of the tip adjusting member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is eliminated (corrected), thereby the shielding design member. The plate portion arranged on the forefront of 760 can be arranged flush with each other, and it is possible to easily produce a sense of unity of the shielding design member 760 in the collective arrangement state.

  Note that the state shown in FIG. 74B is illustrated as a state in which the posture deviation of the shielding design member 760 has occurred to the maximum. Further, the posture shift on the opposite side of the posture shift of FIG. 74 (b) is configured so as not to easily occur from the front-rear arrangement configuration of the second long member 743. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that the extension board part 761 collides with the main-body part of the shielding design member 760 arrange | positioned facing.

  Further, an auxiliary protrusion 727 (see FIG. 54) disposed on the opposite side of the extending plate portion 726 is configured to be able to contact the reduced side wall portion in the enlargement / reduction displacement of the tip adjustment member 744. Since the auxiliary protrusions 727 are formed as a pair on the left and right sides of the extended plate portion 726, the abutment of the tip adjustment member 744 is brought into contact with the left and right ends of the tip adjustment member 744 that has reached the reduction side end of the displacement range. Posture deviation can be corrected.

  This not only corrects the posture by engaging with another shielding design member 760, but also stabilizes the posture when the tip adjustment member 744 is a single product and reaches the reduction side end of the displacement range. it can.

  Returning to FIG. 5 and FIG. In the present embodiment, in addition to the third symbol display device 81, the above-described launch effect unit 300, enlargement / reduction unit 600, and displacement rotation unit 800 are provided as effect devices that excite the game. Next, the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described.

  Since the displacement rotation unit 800 has a pair of units arranged symmetrically and has a symmetrical shape, the configuration of the left displacement rotation unit 800 will be described below, and the description of the right displacement rotation unit 800 will be given below. Omitted. In the following description, FIG. 5 is referred to as appropriate.

  77 is a front perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 77 and 78, the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

  79 is a front exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800, and FIG. 80 is a rear exploded perspective view of the displacement rotation unit 800. 79 and 80, the lateral slide member 840 is shown in an assembled state.

  As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, the displacement rotation unit 800 includes a base plate portion 810 fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and a metal fixed to the base plate portion 810 with a member such as a screw. The rod MB2, the vertical slide member 820 inserted through the metal rod MB2 and configured to be slidable in the vertical direction, and the drive fastened and fixed to the back side of the vertical slide member 820 and fastened to the base plate portion 810 A transmission member 830 configured to transmit the driving force of the motor MT4, a metal rod MB3 fixed to the vertical slide member 820 with a member such as a screw, and the metal rod MB3 is inserted and configured to be slidable in the left-right direction. As the horizontal slide member 840 and the vertical slide member 820 are displaced in the vertical direction, the driving force of the drive motor MT4 is changed laterally through the vertical slide member 820. Transmission means 860 configured to be able to transmit to the ride member 840, a wiring arm member 870 fastened and fixed to the vertical slide member 820 at the upper end position on the metal rod MB2 side of the vertical slide member 820, and the wiring arm member 870 and a wiring guide member 880 for guiding the electrical wiring.

  The base plate portion 810 includes a pair of both end fixing portions 811 where the metal rod MB2 is disposed, a slide guide portion 812 formed so as to be able to guide the transmission member 830 disposed on the front side, and a long side on the back side. A transmission guide portion 813 formed in a groove shape so as to be able to guide the columnar projection 862b of the transmission means 860, a drive motor MT4 fastened and fixed to the back side, and a rack member 862 guided by the transmission guide portion 813. A drop prevention plate 814 disposed on the back surface side.

  The vertical slide member 820 has a flat plate portion 821, a wall portion 822 extending from the edge of the flat plate portion 821 to the back side, and a circle from the approximate center position of the region surrounded by the wall portion 822 to the back side. At the left end of the flat plate portion 821, a columnar projection 823 that protrudes in a column shape, a size that can be inserted through the connector portion of the electrical wiring, and omitted portions 824 a and 824 b that are omitted from forming the wall portion. A pair of upper and lower metal rod insertion portions 825 formed in a cylindrical shape through which the metal rod MB2 can be inserted (or provided with a cylindrical member), and a metal rod MB3 that can be inserted in the upper and lower central portions of the flat plate portion 821 A pair of left and right metal rod insertion portions 826 formed (or arranged with a cylindrical member) and fastened and fixed to the flat plate portion 821 near the end of the metal rod insertion portion 826 to prevent the metal rod MB3 from falling off. Drop-off prevention member 82 configured to be possible And a shaft support portion 828 that is formed in a columnar shape on the back side of the flat plate portion 821 so as to be able to support the two-stage pinion 861 and is cylindrical from the upper end portion to the left and right outside in the horizontal direction (left side in FIG. 79). And a support protrusion 829 protruding in a shape.

  The wall portion 822 is a portion for ensuring the durability of the electrical wiring by forming a region where the electrical wiring disposed between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced inside. Omitted portions 824a and 824b formed as portions where the wall portion 822 is interrupted include a first omitted portion 824a that is formed as an opening and a second omitted portion 824b that is formed as a recessed portion that is opened to the back side.

  The upper part of the metal rod insertion part 825 is extended in the shape of a plate on the back side at the upper side, and the upper side detection sensor SC8 and the lower side detection are fastened and fixed to the base member 810 with the detection groove facing the front side of the base member 810. A to-be-detected plate portion 825a that can be arranged in the detection groove of the sensor SC9 is provided.

  The transmission member 830 includes a main body portion 831 formed in a plate shape that is long in the vertical direction, and a female screw formed at the top end portion of the columnar protrusion 823 of the vertical slide member 820 in the upper portion of the main body portion 831. An insertion hole 832 that is formed so as to be able to insert a fastening screw that can be screwed into the plate, and a plate portion in which the insertion hole 832 is formed, and in the region formed by the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820 A lid-shaped portion 833 that covers from the side, and a linear gear portion 834 in which gear teeth are linearly formed on the left side surface of the main body portion 831 in the vertical direction.

  The columnar protrusion 823 has both a role as a portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 832 is screwed and a role as a winding center of electric wiring as will be described later.

  The linear gear portion 834 is meshed with the drive gear MG4 of the drive motor MT4. That is, as the drive motor MT4 is rotationally controlled, the transmission member 830 is moved up and down in the vertical direction. Thereby, the vertical slide member 820 moves up and down.

  81 is an exploded front perspective view of the lateral slide member 840, and FIG. 82 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lateral slide member 840. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the lateral slide member 840 is formed in a substantially circular plate shape, the main body plate member 841 through which the metal rod MB3 is inserted and the displacement in the left-right direction is limited, and the back surface of the main body plate portion 841. A wiring guide member 844 that is fastened and fixed to the upper side and constitutes a guide route for electrical wiring, a circular member 847 that is disposed on the front side of the main body plate member 841 and is formed in a circular plate shape in front view, and the circular member 847 And the main body plate member 841, an annular decorative member 853 fastened and fixed to the front side of the circular member 847, and a circular member 847 via a cylindrical collar member C 8. And a mediating member 857 fitted from the front side into the opening of the wing member 854 in order to adjust the central opening diameter of the wing member 854 to the opening diameter of the collar member C8. Comprises a central design member 858 columnar member can be inserted through the outer diameter to the center opening of the intermediary member 857 is projected from the rear side.

  The main body plate member 841 has a drive motor MT5 fastened and fixed to the back side, a drive gear MG5 arranged on the front side, and a bar arrangement part 842 where the metal bar MB3 is arranged, and a lower side of the bar arrangement part 842. A rack gear portion 843 in which gear teeth are engraved along the left-right direction.

  The wiring guide member 844 is a member for guiding the displacement of the electric wiring in the left-right direction, and is formed in a shape that bypasses the electric wiring. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the electric wiring from rubbing against other constituent members, but details will be described later.

  The circular member 847 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is configured in such a manner that a wing member 854 and a drive gear MG5 formed so as to be able to mesh with each other are assembled from different directions.

  The circular member 847 has a receiving portion 848 formed in a concave shape toward the back side in a cup shape having a size capable of receiving the wing-like member 854, and a cylindrical shape protruding from the center of the receiving portion 848 to the front side. A cylindrical protrusion 849.

  The receiving portion 848 includes a through-hole portion 848a that is formed to penetrate a shape that overlaps a cylinder centering on the drive shaft of the drive motor MT5, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-like member 854 passes through the through-hole portion 848a. Exposed to a position where it can be seen in the rear view.

  In this way, the exposed portion of the gear portion 855 can be engaged with the drive gear MG5, the drive force is transmitted with the rotation of the drive motor MT5, and the rotation of the wing member 854 is controlled. The wing member 854 can be rotated regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800. That is, the shape of the wall portion 882a of the path forming member 882 is designed so as to be possible even in the production standby state.

  The cylindrical protrusion 849 has a linear notch 849a at the tip. This is a shape portion for facilitating maintenance of the posture of the central design member 858 by disposing the radial projecting portion 858b of the central design member 858, and details will be described later.

  83 is a partial cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 taken along line LXXXIII-LXXXIII in FIG. In the description of FIG. 83, FIGS. 81 and 82 are referred to as appropriate.

  The electric decoration board 850 includes a circular opening formed by an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847, a modified opening 851 formed by a long opening extending above the opening, and a modified shape thereof. It is composed of a front side light emitting means 852a composed of a plurality of LEDs disposed on the front side in the vicinity of the opening 851, and a plurality of LEDs disposed on the back side at the outer diameter end portion of the electrical decoration substrate 850. Back side light emitting means 852b.

  In the modified opening 851, the receiving portion 848 of the circular member 847 can be disposed inside the opening, and the gear portion 855 of the wing-shaped member 854 is disposed on the back side of the modified opening 851 in the assembled state.

  The elongated hole-shaped portion extending above the irregular opening 851 is formed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the rotation shaft of the drive gear MG5. Thereby, the drive gear MG5 can be brought close to the electrical decoration board 850, and the gear part 855 of the wing-like member 854 and the drive gear MG5 can be easily meshed.

  The front side light emitting means 852a is configured by an LED or the like whose optical axis faces the front-rear direction. Thereby, light can be irradiated to the front side along the arrow D8a in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the wing member 854.

  The back side light emitting means 852b is configured by an LED or the like whose optical axis faces radially outward. Thereby, light can be irradiated toward the outer diameter side of the circular member 847 along the arrow D8b. By reflecting (refracting) this light to the front side by the uneven shape formed on the back surface of the circular member 847, the light can be advanced to the front side at a position far from the rotational axis of the wing member 854. In the present embodiment, a plurality of long concave and convex shapes formed along a circular arc concentric with the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 are densely formed on the back surface of the circular member 847. On the other hand, arc-shaped (or circular) light can be visually recognized in front view.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, from the player without arranging the LED or the like whose optical axis is directed in the front-rear direction at a position far from the rotation axis of the wing-like member 854 on the front side of the electric decoration board 850. The position where the light is visually recognized can be moved in the radially outward direction. In other words, while using the electric board 850 having a smaller diameter than the outermost diameter of the wing member 854, the outer side of the surface on which the electric board 850 is formed, that is, the outer side of the outermost diameter of the wing member 854. The light can be visually recognized at (see FIG. 14).

  Accordingly, it is possible to execute an effect of visually recognizing light on the radially outer side of the wing-like member 854 without increasing the size of the electric decoration board 850. In the present embodiment, as described later, when the wing member 854 rotates at a high speed, the back side of the wing member 854 becomes a shadow, and it may be difficult to effectively perform the light emission effect in this range. . In order to solve this problem, it is considered effective to irradiate light from the outside in the radial direction of the rotation trajectory of the wing member 854. To that end, it is necessary to increase the arrangement area of the LEDs and the like. In other words, it is necessary to increase the area of the electric decoration board, and the manufacturing cost of the board increases.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the size of the electric decoration substrate 850 is kept smaller than the rotation locus of the wing member 854, only the light viewing position is set in the radially outward direction from the rotation locus of the wing member 854. Can be displaced. Thereby, the production effect of the light emission effect can be improved without increasing the manufacturing cost.

  Returning to FIG. 81 and FIG. The decorative member 853 is a member that is formed from a light-impermeable resin material and is fastened coaxially to the front side of the circular member 847. Therefore, since the light passing through the circular member 847 is divided by the decoration member 853, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of changing the appearance of light between the inside and the outside with the decoration member 853 as a boundary.

  For example, by irradiating blue light from the front side light emitting means 852a and irradiating red light from the rear side light emitting means 852b, an area that appears to emit blue light and an area that appears to emit red light Can be clearly separated by a decorative member 853.

  The wing-shaped member 854 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and has a circular opening 854a drilled in the front-rear direction at the center, and extends radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the circular opening 854a. A plurality of blade portions 854b, a gear portion 855 formed in a gear shape coaxial with the circular opening 854a on the back surface side, and a plurality of recessed portions 856 recessed on the back surface side at an intermediate position between adjacent blade portions 854b. And comprising.

  The circular opening 854a has an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the collar member C8.

  The wing member 854 is configured to be rotatable via a drive gear MG5 that is rotationally driven by the drive motor MT5. However, a detection sensor for detecting the attitude of the wing member 854 is not provided, and the drive motor MT5. The posture of the wing member 854 is managed by the length of the driving time. In this configuration, the wing member 854 is configured such that the rotation axis and the position of the center of gravity coincide with each other, and the idle rotation after the energization of the drive motor MT5 is released is minimized. Therefore, the deviation between the posture of the wing member 854 assumed by the driving time and the actual posture of the wing member 854 can be reduced. In addition, you may comprise so that the attitude | position of the wing member 854 can be detected by comprising drive motor MT5 with a stepping motor.

  The mediating member 857 is formed so as to be able to fit into the front opening of the circular opening 854a, and the inner diameter of the opening 857a is slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 849 of the circular member 847. Thereby, the mediating member 857 can be rotated around the cylindrical protrusion 849.

  The central design member 858 includes a central protrusion 858a that protrudes in a columnar shape from the center to the back side, a radial protrusion 858b that protrudes radially outward of the central protrusion 858a, and a circular main body. And a design protrusion 858c protruding upward.

  The central protrusion 858a is a portion that is inserted into the cylindrical protrusion 849 in a posture that allows the radial protrusion 858b to enter the notch 849a, and is inserted into the female screw formed at the tip from the back side of the circular member 847. The central design member 858 is fastened and fixed to the circular member 847 by screwing the inserted fastening screw.

  In addition to the function as the design portion, the design protrusion 858c can be brought into contact with the wing member 854 to function to adjust the rotation mode of the wing member 854. That is, when the back surface of the design protrusion 858c and the front surface of the wing member 854 are arranged close to each other so as to rub, stabilization of the stopping posture of the wing member 854 can be achieved by using the increased resistance at the time of rubbing. Can be planned.

  Thereby, as a drive control mode of the wing member 854, a drive mode that continues to rotate for a long time and a drive mode that intermittently generates a rotation of about one rotation (irregular operation at the start of rotation is produced) In the latter driving mode, the intermittent stopping posture of the wing member 854 can be stabilized.

  Returning to FIG. 79 and FIG. The transmission means 860 is supported by the vertical slide member 820 so as to mesh with the two-stage pinion 861 rotatably supported by the vertical slide member 820 and the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. A rack member 862, and a dropout prevention member 863 that prevents the rack member 862 from falling off the vertical slide member 820.

  The two-stage pinion 861 is formed as a small-diameter pinion 861a that meshes with the gear teeth of the rack member 862, and a pinion having a longer pitch circle radius than the small-diameter pinion 861a, and the gear teeth and teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 The small-diameter pinion 861b and the large-diameter pinion 861b are integrally formed.

  The rack member 862 is formed in an elongated shape on the left and right sides, a gear portion 862a formed as a rack gear that can mesh with the small-diameter pinion 861a of the two-stage pinion 861, and the longitudinal direction opposite side to the formation position of the gear portion 862a A columnar protrusion 862b that protrudes in a columnar shape from the end to the front side.

  In this embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a of the rack member 862 and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are configured with the same shape gear teeth, and the pitch circle radius of the small-diameter pinion 861a The ratio of the large diameter pinion 861b to the pitch circle radius is 9:16. Therefore, the ratio of the amount of displacement of the rack member 862 in the left-right direction and the amount of displacement of the lateral slide member 840 in the left-right direction is maintained at 9:16.

  The columnar protrusion 862 b is formed with an outer diameter that can be disposed inside the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810. Further, the thickness of the rack member 862 on the side where the cylindrical protrusion 862b is formed is such that the rear side end of the rack member 862 is prevented from falling off when the cylindrical protrusion 862b is disposed on the transmission guide portion 813. Even if it moves to the back side until it comes into contact with the plate 814, the thickness is set such that the cylindrical protrusion 862b does not fall off the transmission guide portion 813.

  Thereby, it is possible to prevent the rack member 862 from dropping from the transmission guide portion 813 when the drop prevention plate 814 is in the assembled state.

  In the present embodiment, the gear teeth of the gear portion 862a and the gear teeth of the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are formed as gear teeth having the same shape, so that the displacement amount of the rack member 862 is larger than that of the small-diameter pinion 861a. The lateral slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction by a displacement amount calculated by multiplying the gear ratio with the diameter pinion 861b.

  Therefore, the displacement amount of the lateral slide member 840 can be increased as compared with the displacement amount of the rack member 862. As a result, it is possible to ensure a large lateral displacement width of the lateral slide member 840 while keeping the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813 small, but details will be described later.

  84 is a perspective view of the wiring arm member 870, and FIG. 85 is a perspective view of the path forming member 882 of the wiring guide member 880. In the description of FIGS. 84 and 85, FIGS. 79 and 80 are referred to as appropriate.

  As shown in FIG. 84, the wiring arm member 870 is a long member formed of a resin material, and has a long main body portion 871 that is formed in a long curved shape and one side is opened, and the long main body portion 871. A support hole 872 formed in a circular shape at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a wiring arrangement hole 873 that is disposed in the vicinity of the support hole 872 and can be disposed in the same direction so that electrical wiring can be disposed. A plurality of claw portions 874 extending from one wall portion toward the other wall portion at the open end portion of the long main body portion 871 and a resin mold for forming the claw portion 874 can be extracted. And a circular projecting portion 876 that projects from the vicinity of the other end in the longitudinal direction of the long main body portion 871 in a circular shape in a cross section parallel to the axial direction of the support hole 872.

  The long main body portion 871 is a portion where electric wiring guided to the open side portion through the wiring arrangement hole 873 is disposed, and includes a narrowed portion 871a whose width is shortened at an intermediate portion thereof. The electrical wiring is arranged along the length direction of the long main body portion 871, and is guided to the outside from the other end portion (the end portion on the side opposite to the side where the support hole 872 is formed) in the length direction.

  The narrowed portion 871a functions as a portion that sandwiches the electric wiring arranged on the open side portion of the long main body portion 871 loosely so as not to cause disconnection and prevents the electric wiring from being excessively displaced. The diaphragm 871a can prevent the electrical wiring disposed on the open side of the long main body 871 from being displaced beyond the diaphragm 871a.

  The support hole 872 is formed in such a size that the support protrusion 829 of the vertical slide member 820 (see FIG. 79) can be inserted, whereby the wiring arm member 870 is pivotally supported by the vertical slide portion 820.

  The wiring arrangement hole 873 is a through-hole through which the electric wiring arranged in the wiring arm member 870 passes when passing to the vertical slide member 820. In the present embodiment, since the wiring arrangement hole 873 is disposed close to the support hole 872, the amount of positional deviation of the wiring arrangement hole 873 when the wiring arm member 870 rotates can be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the electrical wiring as the wiring arm member 870 rotates.

  The claw portion 874 prevents the electrical wiring arranged in a manner of being accommodated on the open side of the long main body portion 871 from dropping off from the long main body portion 871. Further, the space for removing the resin mold required for forming the claw portion 874 is secured by the through-hole 875 having a minimum area, so that the electrical wiring is opposite to the open portion side of the long main body portion 871. It is possible to prevent the outer side (the side where the through-hole 875 is formed in this embodiment) from coming out.

  The circular protruding portion 876 is formed with an outer diameter and a protruding length that can be disposed in the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 (see FIG. 79). In the present embodiment, the guide recess 886 of the wiring guide portion 880 is designed from the viewpoint of appropriately causing the displacement of the wiring arm member 870.

  As shown in FIG. 79, the wiring guide member 880 constitutes an internal path by fastening and fixing the prevention plate 881 for preventing the wiring arm member 870 from dropping from the guide recess 886, and the prevention plate 881. A path forming member 882 that is fastened and fixed to the base member 810.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the path forming member 882 is formed in a box shape with one side opened, and a prevention plate 881 is fastened and fixed to the open part, so that the path forming member 882 opens to the back side at a position separated in the vertical direction. A path passing through the upper opening 883 and the lower opening 884 is formed.

  That is, the path forming member 882 includes a wall portion 882a that protrudes to one side at the edge, and an upper opening portion 883 that forms an upper opening portion of the path by lacking the wall portion 882a, and a lower end of the path forming member 882. A lower opening portion 884 formed in the wall portion 882a with a size that allows insertion of an electrical wiring connector in the portion, and from the wall portion 882a toward the upper opening portion 883 in a range that does not overlap the prevention plate 881 when viewed in the left-right direction. An extending portion 885 that is extended, a guide recess 886 that is recessed in a long groove shape in a range that does not overlap with the extending portion 885 when viewed in the left-right direction, and below the lower edge of the guide recess 886. A columnar projecting portion 887 that protrudes in a cylindrical shape on the side of the prevention plate 881 and into which a fastening screw inserted into the prevention plate 881 is screwed into a female screw formed at the tip.

  On the back side of the path forming member 882, a space in which the vertical slide member 820 can be displaced in the vertical direction is formed, and in the horizontal slide member 840 that is displaced in the horizontal direction in accordance with the displacement, the wall portion 882a is closest to the front side. It enters the back side of the wall portion 882a at the position (position near the lower end of displacement) (see FIG. 86 (a)).

  That is, the lateral slide member 840 is disposed on the back side of the wiring guide member 880 that constitutes a path along which the electrical wiring is guided, at a position near the lower end of the displacement. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring from coming into contact with or rubbing against the horizontal slide member 840 while allowing the overlapping of the arrangement of the electric wiring and the horizontal slide member 840 in front view.

  In the assembled state, the wiring arm member 870 is guided to the path of the wiring guide member 880 through the upper opening portion 883, and the displacement in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 among the displacement of the wiring arm member 880 is the extending portion 885. And the prevention plate 881. Further, the length in the width direction of the path of the wiring guide member 880 is designed to be shorter than the total length in the width direction of the long main body portion 871 and the circular projecting portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870. Accordingly, it is possible to restrict the circular protruding portion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 from dropping from the guide recess 886 in the assembled state.

  The lower opening portion 884 functions as a wiring through hole through which the electric wiring arranged so as to be wound around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 is passed to the back side.

  The guide recess 886 is a connecting recess 886c that connects the front vertical recess 886a extending vertically upward from the lower end, the rear vertical recess 886b extending vertically downward from the upper end, and the lower end of the rear vertical recess 886b and the upper end of the front vertical recess 886a. With.

  The columnar projecting portion 887 has a role as a limiting portion that limits the displacement of the electrical wiring and a role as a fastening portion for fixing the prevention plate 881 to the path forming member 882.

  86 to 89, the displacement mode of the displacement rotation unit 800 will be described. 86 to 89, the state in which the displacement rotation unit 800 changes state from the effect standby state to the effect upper end state is illustrated in time series.

  86 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 86 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the displacement rotation unit 800 along the line LXXXVIb-LXXXVIb in FIG. 86 (a). 87 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 when viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 87 (b) is a displacement rotation unit 800 along line LXXXVIIb-LXXXVIIb in FIG. 87 (a). 88 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 77, and FIG. 88 (b) is a displacement along the line LXXXVIIIb-LXXXVIIIb in FIG. 88 (a). FIG. 89 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rotation unit 800, and FIG. 89 (a) is a side view of the displacement rotation unit 800 as viewed in the direction of arrow L in FIG. 9 (b) is a cross-sectional view of a displacement rotary unit 800 in LXXXIXb-LXXXIXb line in FIG. 89 (a).

  86 shows the effect standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800, and in FIG. 87, the detected plate portion 825a (see FIG. 80) of the vertical slide member 820 is arranged on the upper detection sensor SC8, and the horizontal slide member 840 is the displacement path. 88, the vertical slide member 820 is arranged at an intermediate position between the right end state and the production upper end state, and the horizontal slide member 840 is arranged between the right end state and the production upper end state. A halfway left end state arranged at the left end of the displacement path in between is shown, and in FIG. 89, the effect upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is shown.

  In FIG. 86 (a), FIG. 87 (a), FIG. 88 (a), and FIG. 89 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the wiring guide member 880 has a wall portion 882a, a guide recess 886, and a cylindrical protrusion. The outer shape of the portion 887 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 are made visible by omitting the illustration of the other shape portions. Further, by partially breaking the shape portion near the upper end of the base plate 810, the vertical slide member 820 is prevented from being hidden during the up-and-down displacement.

  86 (b), 87 (b), 88 (b), and 89 (b), the shape line of the transmission guide portion 813 of the base member 810 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and the lateral slide member 840 is For the purpose of illustrating only the lateral displacement width, a circular imaginary line along the outer shape of the main body plate member 841 is illustrated.

  86 to 89, the state of displacement of the electric wiring DK2 connected to the drive motor MT5 accompanying the change in the state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The electrical wiring DK2 is guided from the lower opening 884 (see FIG. 85) of the wiring guide member 880 to the inside of the wiring guide member 880, passes through the inside of the wiring arm member 870, and then reaches the wall portion 822 of the vertical slide member 820. Although it is guided to the horizontal slide member 840 through the enclosed space, details of the displacement will be described later.

  The displacement rotation unit 800 is configured such that the vertical slide member 820 can reciprocate in the vertical direction. First, the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 and the horizontal slide member 840 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect standby state, the vertical slide member 820 is disposed at the lower end position in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86). In the effect standby state, the detected plate portion 825a of the vertical slide member 820 is disposed in the detection groove of the lower detection sensor SC9, so that the displacement rotation unit 800 is set in the effect standby state by the output of the lower detection sensor SC9. The MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine this.

  In the effect standby state, the horizontal slide member 840 is disposed at the left end (left and right outer end portions) of the displacement path, while the lower end side of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed on the front side. That is, by arranging the wiring arm member 870 on the front side so as to be retracted from the displacement locus of the lateral slide member 840, it is avoided that the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited to the left and right positions of the wiring arm member 870. can do. Accordingly, the lateral slide member 840 can be displaced to the full extent on the left and right sides.

  The state in which the drive motor MT4 is driven and controlled in the direction in which the longitudinal slide member 820 is displaced upward from the effect standby state, and the detected plate portion 825a is disposed on the upper detection sensor SC8 corresponds to the right end state on the way (see FIG. 87). ). Therefore, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the displacement rotation unit 800 is in the middle right end state based on the output of the upper detection sensor SC8.

  In the middle right end state, the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the upward direction and the right direction from the effect standby state, while the wiring arm member 870 is only displaced in the upward direction, and the posture is maintained.

  That is, in the middle right end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is still disposed in the front vertical concave portion 886a of the guide concave portion 886, so that the wiring arm member 870 is supported as a support point. The distance in the front-rear direction between the protrusion 829 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is maintained from the effect standby state.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, the displacement of the horizontal slide member 840 to the right accompanying the upward displacement of the vertical slide member 820 from the stand-by state to the right end state is executed without any change in the posture of the wiring arm member 870. The Thereby, it is possible to avoid the collision between the members due to the displacement of the displacement timing, which tends to occur when both the lateral slide member 840 and the wiring arm member 870 are displaced.

  86 (b) and 87 (b), the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced in the left-right direction as the vertical slide member 820 is moved upward. With this displacement, the displacement direction is switched along the shape of the transmission guide portion 813, but the displacement is shifted in the left-right direction beyond the lateral width of the transmission guide portion 813.

  This is because the displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is transmitted via the two-stage pinion 861. That is, it is the rack member 862 of the transmission means 860 that is guided by the transmission guide portion 813, and the gear portion 862 a of the rack member 862 and the rack gear portion 843 of the lateral slide member 840 are teeth on the two-stage pinion 861. Combined. Therefore, the pitch circle radius ratio of the two-stage pinion 861 corresponds to the ratio between the displacement width of the rack member 862 and the displacement width of the lateral slide member 864.

  In this embodiment, since the ratio of the pitch circle radius of the small-diameter pinion 861a and the pitch circle radius of the large-diameter pinion 861b of the two-stage pinion 861 (see FIG. 80) is 9:16, the left and right positions of the transmission guide portion 813 The horizontal slide member 864 is displaced in the left-right direction by a left-right width obtained by multiplying the change amount by a constant (ie, 16/9 = about 1.78).

  As shown in FIG. 88 (b), in the middle left end state, the lateral slide member 840 is not displaced outwardly to the left and right as in the effect standby state. In other words, the horizontal slide member 840 is not displaced to a position where it overlaps the wiring arm member 870 in the front-rear direction.

  In such an arrangement, the posture of the wiring arm member 870 is changed as shown in FIG. That is, in the process from the middle right end state to the middle left end state, the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is connected to the connecting concave portion 886c formed on the back side from the front vertical concave portion of the guide concave portion 886. The distance in the front-rear direction between the support protrusion 829 as the support point of the wiring arm member 870 and the circular protrusion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is reduced compared to the effect standby state.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lateral slide member 840 is configured so that the posture change of the wiring arm member 870 occurs after the lateral sliding member 840 does not overlap the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Further, at the time of descending displacement, the reverse (after the wiring arm member 870 does not change its posture, the lateral slide member 840 is disposed at a position overlapping the wiring arm member 870 when viewed in the front-rear direction) is established.

  As a result, even if a displacement occurs between the displacement timing of the lateral slide member 840 and the displacement timing of the wiring arm member 870, it is possible to avoid a situation where the lateral sliding member 840 collides with the wiring arm member 870.

  The wiring arm member 870 is disposed at the left end portion (outer end portion in the left-right direction) of the displacement rotation unit 800, and the displacement is only the vertical displacement and the posture change in the front-rear direction. In other words, regardless of the state of the displacement rotation unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 can continue to be disposed at the left and right outer ends that are not likely to be noticed by the player, so that the wiring arm member 870 and the wiring arm member 870 are guided. It is possible to prevent the electric wiring DK2 from entering the player's field of view.

  As shown in FIGS. 89 (a) and 89 (b), the circular projecting portion 876 (see FIG. 84) of the wiring arm member 870 is in the period until the production upper end state of the displacement rotation unit 800 is reached. The guide protrusion 886 is disposed in a rear vertical recess 886b formed on the back side of the connection recess 886c, and a support protrusion 829 as a support point of the wiring arm member 870 and a circular protrusion 876 of the wiring arm member 870 ( The distance in the front-rear direction with reference to FIG. 84 is maintained in a minimum state.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged at different front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position by using the wiring arm member 870 configured to change the posture in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820. By making it possible, there is an advantageous effect that it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the constituent members.

  For example, when the electrical wiring DK2 is disposed at a rearward position, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 is limited. Specifically, in order to avoid contact with the electrical wiring DK2, the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840 in the effect standby state is set to the right (toward the left and right inside). In the present embodiment, since the injection device 400 (see FIG. 6) is disposed at a position to the right of the horizontal slide member 840 (toward the left and right inside), the displacement rotation unit 800 can be downsized to avoid contact. It may be necessary to deal with this. That is, the design freedom of the displacement rotation unit 800 is lowered.

  Further, for example, when the electric wiring DK2 is disposed at the front position, the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 can be sufficiently secured, while the game board 13 disposed on the front side of the displacement rotation unit 800. The degree of freedom of arrangement of the constituent members on the back side is reduced.

  In the present embodiment, since the displacement rotation unit 800 is arranged symmetrically, in order to drive the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) of the second winning port 640 disposed in the right region of the game board 13 in particular. The degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the solenoid or the like tends to be low.

  In contrast, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction by the wiring arm member 870, thereby preventing the lateral displacement of the lateral slide member 840 from being restricted. It can avoid that the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the structural member of the back side of the board 13 falls.

  That is, at the lower end position where the horizontal slide member 840 is desired to be retracted to the left and right outside, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed on the front side so that the electric wiring DK2 is disposed on the front side of the horizontal slide member 840. Is prevented from being limited by the electric wiring DK2.

  In addition, the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left and right inward, and at the upper position where the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 2) is to be disposed, the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 is disposed rearward to DK2 is arranged at the back, leaving a space on the front side. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the member arrange | positioned in the game board 13 can be improved as a structure of the solenoid etc. for driving the electrically-driven accessory 640a (refer FIG. 2) of the 2nd winning opening 640. FIG.

  The state change of the electrical wiring DK2 in the state change shown in FIGS. 86 to 89 will be described. Here, the state change of the electric wiring DK2 means a change in the winding state of the electric wiring DK2 in a state where the electric wiring DK2 is wound around a column.

  In the electrical wiring DK2, the upper part (side closer to the wiring arm member 870) of the lower winding part DK2b extends up and down exclusively and is not preferred to bend. In particular, at the time of downward displacement, it is necessary to slide the electric wiring DK2 into the front side of the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (see FIG. 86 (a)), so that it is more rigid than the portion where the lower winding portion DK2b is wound and displaced. Higher is preferable.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a resin cable tube is wound around the upper part of the lower winding part DK2b, and the behavior is such that the rigidity is higher than that of the part to be wound and displaced.

  In the state shown in FIG. 89 (a), the cable tube is disposed between the wall portion 882a and the electric wiring DK2, thereby avoiding friction between the electric wiring DK2 and the wall portion 882a. Yes.

  In addition, since the lower end opening direction of the wiring arm member 870 is configured to be vertically downward, the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 at the start of the downward displacement can be directed vertically downward. Thereby, it is possible to avoid unnecessary bending deformation in the electrical wiring DK2.

  86 to 89, the electric wiring DK2 is arranged such that the upper winding portion DK2a is wound around the cylindrical protrusion 823 between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840, and the lower side The winding part DK2b is arranged to be wound around the cylindrical projecting part 887 below the wiring arm member 870.

  Of the electrical wiring DK2, the upper winding portion DK2a disposed so as to be wound around the columnar protrusion 823 can be displaced in a manner of expanding and contracting in the radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the columnar protrusion 823. Configured.

  Of the electrical wiring DK2, the lower winding portion DK2b disposed so as to be wound around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 is displaced in such a manner as to expand and contract in the radial direction along a plane orthogonal to the central axis of the cylindrical protruding portion 887. Configured to be possible.

  That is, the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is configured differently from the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced below the wiring arm member 870. In the present embodiment, the planes are orthogonal to each other, and the plane in which the electric wiring DK2 is displaced between the wiring arm member 870 and the lateral slide member 840 is the first omission part 824a, the second omission part 824b, and the wiring arrangement hole. 873.

  Displacement of the electrical wiring DK2 is suppressed when the portion of the wiring arm member 870 disposed inside the long main body 871 is sandwiched between the throttle portions 871a as described above. Therefore, the relative displacement of the electric wiring DK2 with respect to the wiring arm member 870 is suppressed.

  From this point, in the present embodiment, the displacement required for the electric wiring DK2 in accordance with the state change of the displacement rotation unit 800 is configured to be completed independently in each of the upper winding portion DK2a and the lower winding portion DK2b. Therefore, it demonstrates separately below.

  First, the displacement of the upper winding part DK2a will be described. The upper winding portion DK2a includes a portion wound around the columnar protrusion 823 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front from a position passing through the wiring arrangement hole 873 of the wiring arm member 870 to the right side, and on the left side of the wiring guide member 844 This means the part up to the point guided by the tip.

  The upper winding portion DK2a is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the columnar protrusion 823 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 822 as a limit, and the production standby state that extends most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (b)). The wall portion 822 is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged with no load (or a position where a slight gap is left). Thereby, the load given to the electric wiring DK2 from the wall part 822 in an effect stand-by state can be reduced.

  When the horizontal slide member 840 is displaced to the right side from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the right side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pulled, and the inner side in the radial direction centering on the cylindrical protrusion 823. The displacement length of the lateral slide member 840 is supplemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the upper winding portion DK2a. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the lateral slide member 840 is displaced to the left side, the side guided by the wiring guide member 844 is displaced to the left side, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is pushed, and the upper winding is performed radially outward with the cylindrical protrusion 823 as the center. The part DK2a is displaced. At this time, a guide piece 844a that inclines downward from the left end portion of the wiring guide member 844 protrudes, so that the upper winding portion DK2a is outward (the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring guide member 844). And the upper winding portion DK2a can be appropriately pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 822.

  Next, the displacement of the lower winding part DK2b will be described. The lower winding portion DK2b is wound clockwise from the position where the lower winding portion DK2b hangs downward from the wiring arm member 870 in the left side view (viewed from the left and right outer sides) around the cylindrical protruding portion 887 (the cylindrical protruding portion 887). Means a portion up to a portion including the portion that passes through the front side and is wound in the forward rotation direction and is disposed in the lower opening portion 884 (see FIG. 85).

  The lower winding portion DK2b is configured to be displaceable in the radial direction at the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 887 with the space surrounded by the wall portion 882a as a limit, and the production standby state that extends most in the radial direction (see FIG. 86 (a)). ), The wall portion 882a is formed at a position along the arrangement of the electric wiring DK2 arranged with no load (or a position where a slight gap is left). Thereby, the load given to electric wiring DK2 from wall part 882a in an effect stand-by state can be reduced.

  When the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward as the vertical slide member 820 is displaced upward from the production standby state, the side guided by the wiring arm member 870 is displaced upward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pulled upward. The displacement length of the wiring arm member 870 is complemented by the surplus length generated by the displacement of the lower winding portion DK2b inward in the radial direction with the cylindrical protruding portion 887 as the center. Thereby, it is possible to avoid applying a tensile force to the electric wiring DK2.

  On the other hand, when the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, the side disposed on the wiring arm member 870 is displaced downward, so that the lower winding portion DK2b is pushed and lowered downward in the radial direction centering on the cylindrical protruding portion 887. The side winding part DK2b is displaced. At this time, since the lower end portion of the wiring arm member 870 opens in the inclined direction toward the front side as it goes downward, the lower winding portion DK2b is located between the columnar protruding portion 887 and the wall portion 882a (columnar). It is possible to prevent the lower winding portion DK2b from being pushed in along the shape of the wall portion 882a.

  In the present embodiment, the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is disposed is disposed below the lower end position of the displacement range of the lateral slide member 840. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid that the size of the space in which the lower winding portion DK2b is displaced in the radial direction is limited by the arrangement of the horizontal slide member 840, and thus the lower winding portion DK2b is attached to the rear case 510 (FIG. 5). It is possible to displace using the full width of the front and back.

  Therefore, a large space for accommodating the lower winding portion DK2b can be secured below the wiring arm member 870, so that the length of the lower winding portion DK2b can be sufficiently increased, and the wiring arm member 870 can have The allowable vertical displacement amount can be increased.

  90 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, the game board 13 includes a center frame 86 disposed on the front side of the window 60a formed in the base plate 60, and a plurality of flows whose front side is opened from the resin member. A spherical flow down unit 150 that is formed in a road shape and is disposed in the lower part on the back side of the base plate 60.

  The ball flow-down unit 150 is formed so as to be able to receive a ball that has flowed down the flow path lower end LB1 of the game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 in the vicinity of the upper end portion of the fixed plate portion 151 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. A first receiving flow path 152 and a long box-shaped member whose front side is open, and is connected to the downstream side of the receiving flow path 151 and fastened and fixed to the fixed plate portion 151 from the back side. A flow path member 153 and a plurality of protrusions 154 projecting inward from the inner side of the left and right walls of the second receiving flow path member 153 in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the sphere.

  The plurality of protrusions 154 are alternately arranged on the left and right sides with an interval of about the diameter of the sphere for each of the left and right wall portions. Thereby, the flow of the sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 can be decelerated.

  The functions of the first receiving flow path 152 and the second receiving flow path member 153 will be described. The first receiving channel 152 and the second receiving channel member 153 enter the second winning port 640 in addition to the function of guiding a game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 to a ball discharge path (not shown). There is a function of improving the effect of rendering by making the later game ball visible to the player. In the following description, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

  The second winning opening 640 is provided with a detection sensor for detecting the passage of a ball in the vicinity of the lower edge shown in FIG. As a result, the payout of prize balls and the hold display on the third symbol display device 81 can be immediately executed, and a comfortable game can be provided to the player. Even if the player does not see the ball entering the second winning port 640, the player can notice the ball entering the second winning port 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the first receiving channel 152. For example, it is possible to easily notice a situation where payout has not been performed due to a malfunction at the gaming machine store side.

  As will be described below, since it is clear that the ball has entered the second winning opening 640 by visually recognizing the ball flowing down the intermediate channel LM1, the position of the detection sensor is set downstream of the intermediate channel LM1, etc. It is also possible to delay the timing for paying out a prize ball and the timing for holding display.

  The game ball that has entered the second winning port 640 is an intermediate channel LM1 (see FIG. 5) that is disposed so as to be visible in front view in the left-right direction of the guide path DL1 through which the ball deviated from the second winning port 640 flows. 27).

  Similarly to the guide channel DL1, the intermediate channel LM1 is formed so as to be guided vertically downward while displacing the sphere in a zigzag direction. That is, since the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 and the sphere flowing down the guide flow path DL1 look the same, the sphere in the right path of the 3rd symbol display device 81 in the right-handed game. Can be made difficult to determine whether the sphere is flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1.

  Here, the information on which flow path the ball is flowing down in the right-handed game is information directly related to the player's profit, and the information on the nail (not shown) implanted in the base plate 60 is provided. This is a part where an individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 occurs corresponding to the state.

  In the present embodiment, the meat portion of the base plate 60 is left in the vicinity of the through gate 67, and a ball before passing through the through gate 67 collides with this position or before entering the second winning opening 640. Since the nail that the ball collides with is planted, whether the ball easily flows down the intermediate flow path LM1 or the guide flow path DL1 in the right-handed game is determined for each pachinko machine 10. Different.

  A ball that has not entered the second prize opening 640 during the probability change or time reduction in which a right-handed game is performed will flow down the guide route DL1 and enter the general prize opening 63 arranged on the downstream side thereof. It is discharged from the game area through the out port 71 and does not benefit the player (becomes a waste ball).

  From here, whether or not to enter the second winning opening 640 and whether or not the ball flows down the guide route DL1 uniquely correspond. Then, compared with the case where attention is paid only to the second winning port 640, the degree of freedom of the attention position is higher when attention is paid to the guidance route DL1, because the guidance route DL1 extends in the vertical direction. It is clear.

  Therefore, depending on the player, the frequency of the ball flowing down the guide route DL1 is confirmed, and the frequency of the ball entering the second winning opening 640, the frequency of occurrence of a waste ball in the right-handed game, etc. are calculated. It is expected to consider whether or not to continue the game taking into account.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish between a sphere that flows down the guide route DL1 and a sphere that enters the second winning port 640 and flows down the intermediate flow path LM1. This makes it seem as if the frequency of entering the second winning port 640 is high, and it is possible to encourage the game to continue.

  On the other hand, since the sphere flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 has already entered the second winning opening 640 and is discharged from the game area, it flows down vertically as it is, and the specific winning opening 65a is seen in front view. If it flows down to a position where it overlaps with the ball, it is difficult to distinguish it from a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a, and there is a risk of hindering the game.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, by causing the sphere to flow down to the left and right inside by the first receiving flow path 152 above the specific winning opening 65a, the sphere reaches a position overlapping the specific winning opening 65a in front view. This is prevented (see FIG. 2). Thereby, it is possible to easily distinguish a ball that can actually enter the specific winning opening 65a from a ball that has already entered the second winning opening 640 and cannot enter the specific winning opening 65a. .

  The first receiving flow path 152 passes from the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 7) in the front view through the vicinity of the lower edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the front view. Let the sphere flow down to the left and right center position side. That is, since the sphere guided to the first receiving flow path 152 enters the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the display on the third symbol display device 81, attention is paid to the display on the third symbol display device 81. The player who is not paying attention to the right-handed path can recognize the presence or absence of the ball entering the second winning opening 640.

  Accordingly, the player can be made aware of the presence or absence of a ball entering the second winning opening 640 without moving the field of view while paying attention to the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, an important display is executed when looking away from the third symbol display device 81 for viewing the second winning opening 640, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player misses the display, and a comfortable game Can be provided.

  The sphere flowing down the second receiving flow path member 153 flows downward and diagonally to the left on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. Since this sphere is decelerated by the ridge portion 154, the staying time of the sphere flowing down can be extended. Thereby, it is possible to easily increase the number of game balls visually recognized in the game area in the front view.

  Further, by ensuring a long left and right width of the flow path of the sphere, the line of sight directed to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 and the flow path of the second receiving flow path member 153 can easily cross each other. Thereby, it is possible to make it easier for the ball flowing down inside the second receiving flow path member 153 to enter the player's field of view.

  92 and 93 are exploded front perspective views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effect means 160, and the decoration means 170. FIGS. 94 and 95 are exploded views of the center frame 86, the light guide plate effect means 160, and the decoration means 170. It is a rear perspective view.

  92 to 95, the light guide plate effecting means 160 is fastened and fixed to the light guide plate 161 and the center frame 86 from the back side, and is configured to come into contact with the front side and the top side of the light guide plate 161. An upper support member 162 that is formed of an impermeable resin material and aligns the light guide plate 161 and a center frame 86 that is formed of a light transmissive resin material and presses the lower side portion of the light guide plate 161 from the back side. A lower support member 163 configured to be fastened and fixed; a spherical flow path component 164 that is fastened and fixed to the lower support member 163 and is formed of a light-transmitting resin material; A plurality of left and right support members 165 configured to be fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in such a manner that the left and right sides of the light guide plate 161 are pressed from the back side. A horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 that is fastened and fixed to the center frame 86 in a state of extending to the front side of the center frame 86 through the upper side of the upper support member 162, and is formed in a vertically long shape. And a vertically placed substrate unit 167 which is disposed along the left inner wall of the center frame 86 from the front side and fastened and fixed.

  The decoration means 170 includes a first decoration member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material and disposed at a central position near the upper portion of the center frame 86, and a left side of the first decoration member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material. The second decorative member 174 disposed on the front side of the left frame portion of the center frame 86 and the right side of the first decorative member 171 formed of a light transmissive resin material on the front side of the right frame portion of the center frame 86. A third decorative member 177 arranged.

  The first decorative member 171 is a horizontally long rectangular central decorative member 172 configured to be fastened and fixed at a central portion thereof, a blank member 173 configured of a separate member as a blank portion such as a title representing the pachinko machine 10, Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. E4, the first decorative member 171 has a horizontally elongated groove portion 171a in the shape of a horizontally elongated groove on the back side. The horizontally long groove portion 171a is formed with a groove width in which the electric board of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 of the light guide plate effecting unit 160 can be disposed.

  The first decorative member 171 is disposed at a position that slightly overlaps the lower side of the opening 86 a that is drilled in the front-rear direction at the top of the center frame 86. In the present embodiment, the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is configured to be visible through the opening 86a (see FIG. 2).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, while the front position of the third symbol display device 81 is closed by the light guide plate 161 inside the center frame 86, the front position of the effect member 700 in the effect standby state is open. Opened by the portion 86a. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the light emission effect by the effect member 700 in the effect standby state without being shielded by the light guide plate 161.

  With reference to FIG. 96, the relationship between the horizontally long groove portion 171a and the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 will be described. 96 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 taken along line XCVI-XCVI in FIG. In FIG. 96, the vicinity of the laterally long groove portion 171a is separately illustrated as an enlarged view. In the description of FIG. 96, FIGS. 92 to 95 are appropriately referred to.

  In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are disposed on the front and back of the front side of the illumination board of the horizontally placed board unit 166, and light is irradiated along the arrows D1a and D1b in the vertical direction. The light that has reached the reflection-shaped portion 171b formed in a horizontally long wedge shape on the upper and lower sides of the horizontally long groove portion 171a on the back side of the one decorative member 171 can be made to be conspicuously visible.

  Thereby, even in the state where the arrangement of the light emitting means is concentrated on the horizontally placed substrate unit 166, the mode of the light emitting effect (light emitting range or light emitting shape) visually recognized by the player depending on the forming range or the forming shape of the reflective shape portion 171b. Can be visually recognized with different.

  In the present embodiment, light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row on the upper surface of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166, and light emitting means 166a such as LEDs are arranged in a row on the upper surface of the LEDs on the upper surface. The upper and lower rows are arranged in two horizontal rows: a row parallel to the row and a row formed on the back side. Among the rows in which the LEDs as the light emitting means 166a are arranged, the row on the upper surface and the front row on the lower surface are arranged inside the horizontally long groove portion 171a, and the back row on the bottom surface is arranged outside the horizontally long groove portion 171a.

  By comprising in this way, light can be irradiated to the reflective shape part 171b by LED arrange | positioned at the row | line | column of an upper surface, and the front row | line | column of a lower surface, and another light emission object is made by LED arrange | positioned at the back row | line | column of a lower surface Light can be irradiated.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting means 166 b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface is arranged above the light guide plate 161, and the irradiated LED light enters from the edge of the light guide plate 161. That is, the light emitting means 166 b such as LEDs arranged in the rear row on the lower surface of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 is used to make the light guide plate 161 shine.

  Note that the upper support member 162 is disposed between the front and rear rows of the LEDs disposed on the lower surface of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166. Thereby, the light emitted from the front and rear rows of LEDs can be separated by the upper support member 162.

  The horizontally placed substrate unit 166 is disposed directly above the upper edge of the light guide plate 161, that is, near the upper edge of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in a front view. In other words, it is arranged at the boundary position between the display area and the game area in the front view. Thereby, the light irradiated to the display area side and the light irradiated to the game area side without irradiating the display area side can be clearly separated.

  The central decorative member 172 is disposed at the front and rear positions similar to the reflective shape portion 171b, while the front and rear surfaces are formed as flat surfaces. Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the horizontally placed substrate unit 166, it is possible to avoid light being reflected in intensity, and visibility can be maintained.

  In the present embodiment, a pattern such as a star shape is drawn on the front surface of the central decorative member 172, and the type of performance of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the type of specification, so-called another specification) is displayed by the number of the star shape. It is configured to be able to. By constructing the central decorative member 172 as a separate member from the first decorative member 171, when the pachinko machine 10 having different performance types is manufactured, the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by replacing only the central decorative member 172. Can be configured.

  The blank member 173 is configured as a separate member from the first decorative member 171 and has a shape different from the shape formed in the reflective shape portion 171b as the shape of the front and rear surfaces of the plate (in this embodiment, a striped groove). ) Is formed, the reflected light is configured to look different from the reflective shape portion 171b.

  97 is a partially enlarged front view of the first decorative member 171 in the range XCVII in FIG. In the present embodiment, when light is irradiated in the vertical direction of the horizontally mounted substrate unit 166 along the arrows D1a and D1b, the light that has reached the reflective shape portion 171b travels to the front side due to reflection and refraction, and On the other hand, the light that has reached the margin member 173 is not reflected mainly, but is mostly transmitted and travels as it is.

  Thereby, while adopting a configuration in which the light emitted from the horizontally placed substrate unit 166 is advanced in the vertical direction, the shape of the blank member 173 can be visually recognized as a shadow, so that it emits light in an arbitrary shape in a front view. It can be visually recognized. In other words, it can be visually recognized as if the LED is arranged on the back side and the light emission effect is performed.

  The second decorative member 174 includes a shielding member 175 colored in an arbitrary manner on a thin plate member (sheet-like member) having low permeability, and the shielding member 175 is fixed to the back side of the second decorative member 174. . Thereby, it can comprise so that the back side of the 2nd decoration member 174 cannot be visually recognized easily.

  Thereby, a game area (particularly the left side) formed on the front side of the base plate 60, and a formation area of the light guide plate 161 in a front view (including an area overlapping the display area of the third symbol display device 81). Can be clearly divided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the sphere flowing down the game area from being lowered by the light accompanying the effect of the light guide plate 161 or the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81.

  The third decorative member 177 has a three-dimensional shape in which a plurality of hexagonal decorative patterns are three-dimensionally formed on the front side, and a plurality of hexagonal shaped portions arranged in the front and rear positions are combined on the back side. A plurality of three-dimensional decorative members 178 are formed.

  Similar to the third decorative member 177, the three-dimensional decorative member 178 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and is disposed in a space disposed between the light guide plate 161 disposed portion of the center frame 86 and the guide path DL1. The

  Accordingly, it is possible to execute a light effect that is viewed three-dimensionally instead of a light effect that is visually recognized in a plane between the light guide plate 161 placement portion and the guide route DL1. That is, a light emission effect with a depth can be executed in a front view.

  For example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the back side, depending on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 the light is irradiated in front view, which position in the front-rear direction position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 is determined. It changes whether it becomes brighter. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the near side is lit up and the back side is lit up and shown from the player's perspective.

  In this embodiment, as the means for irradiating the three-dimensional decorative member 178 with light from the back side, the third symbol display device 81, the front side light emitting means 852a of the displacement rotating unit 800, etc. (see FIG. 81) are assumed. The light emission position can be changed. Therefore, the types of light effects can be easily increased as compared with a case where light is emitted from light emitting means such as LEDs that are fixedly arranged toward the three-dimensional decoration member 178.

  Further, for example, when light is irradiated to the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the left-right direction or the vertical direction, the position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 in the front-rear direction depends on which position of the three-dimensional decoration member 178 the front view is irradiated with. Which position of becomes brighter changes. Therefore, it is possible to execute a light effect in which the near side is lit up and the back side is lit up and shown from the player's perspective.

  In the present embodiment, the first light irradiation device 330 of the launch effect unit 300 is assumed as means for irradiating the three-dimensional decoration member 178 with light from the left and right directions (see FIG. 27). The first light irradiation device 330 functions so as to shield at least a part of the light directed from the display area of the third symbol display device 81 toward the three-dimensional decoration member 178 from the arrangement.

  Thereby, the extent to which the aspect of the light visually recognized through the three-dimensional decoration member 178 depends on the display effect aspect of the third symbol display device 81 can be suppressed. For example, when the color of light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is blue, even if the color of light emitted from the first light irradiation device 330 is red, the game is played through the three-dimensional decoration member 178. It can be easily avoided that the color of light visually recognized by a person becomes purple (a color in which blue light and red light are mixed). That is, it is possible to make the light visually recognized via the three-dimensional decoration member 178 easily visible independently of the display of the third symbol display device 81.

  The second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing down the sphere falling unit 150 is configured to be visible in front view and the entire sphere is configured to flow along the same route has been described. However, the sphere falling unit of the second embodiment is described. At 2150, the falling sphere is configured to flow down any of the plurality of paths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board 2013 in the second embodiment. FIG. 98 illustrates an example of how the granular member 320 looks immediately after firing. As shown in FIG. 98, the ball flow down unit 2150 is formed to be inclined downward from the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 to the left as a difference from the ball flow down unit 150 described in the first embodiment. And a third receiving channel 2155 formed with a size that allows a sphere to flow down.

  The third receiving flow path 2155 is formed on the upstream side and has an inclination angle that is set to be gentler than that of the first receiving flow path 152, and a lower end (left end) is set on the left side of the first winning port 64 as viewed from the front. , And a discharge portion 2155b extending vertically downward from a front view from the lower end (left side) of the inclined portion 2155a.

  The flow velocity of the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is slower than the flow velocity of the sphere in the first receiving flow path 152 because of the shallow inclination angle. The sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a is configured to be visible to the player, and the inclined portion 2155a is arranged near the lower edge of the light guide plate 161 in a front view. Therefore, the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be put into the player's field of view for a long time.

  Accordingly, the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be configured to enter the field of view of the player who plays the game while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) through the light guide plate 161. . In other words, attention to the sphere flowing down the inclined portion 2155a can be improved without a sense of incongruity.

  The guidance of the sphere to the inclined portion 2155a will be described. In the present embodiment, the ball that has entered the second winning opening 640 flows down to the lower end of the first receiving channel 152 in the same manner, and along the second receiving channel member 153 at the lower end of the first receiving channel 152. The switching means switches whether to flow in the first direction D21 flowing down or to flow in the second direction D22 flowing down along the third receiving flow path 2155.

  In the present embodiment, the ridge portion 154 (see FIG. 90) formed on the second receiving flow path member 153 increases the flow resistance of the sphere flowing through the second receiving flow path member 153. Therefore, when the next sphere reaches the lower end of the first receiving flow path 152 while the sphere flows down the second receiving flow path member 153, the sphere is guided to the third receiving flow path 2155. .

  Such a situation is likely to occur when, for example, a plurality of balls enter the second prize opening 640 in succession, such as a plurality of balls entering in succession. Therefore, by visually recognizing the situation where the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155, the player can grasp that a plurality of balls have entered the second winning port 640 in a row.

  The mode of the switching unit is not limited at all. For example, an opening / closing plate configured to be switchable using a driving means such as a solenoid is provided in the ball flow-down unit 2150 so as to switch between a state allowing the flow of the ball in the first direction D21 and a state restricting the flow. In addition, an electromagnet arranged to generate a magnetic force at a branch point between the first direction D21 and the second direction D22 is arranged, and the generated magnetic force is used as a pulling force or a repulsive force to flow down the sphere. You may make it switch a path | route.

  According to these methods, not only the flow path of the sphere can be switched to the first direction D21 or the second direction D22, but the sphere can be stopped or the sphere can be reversed. Unlike the ball that flows down the game area, changing the flow path of the ball that has entered the second prize opening 640 does not affect the subsequent game results. It is possible to perform switching of the downstream flow path.

  As described above, when the flow path of a sphere is switched using a device that uses electricity, whether the sphere flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22 can be controlled by the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4). it can. Therefore, the result of the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 can be associated with the switching of whether the ball flows down in the first direction D21 or the second direction D22.

  For example, if the switching means is controlled so that the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155 in 60% of the case where the lottery by entering the second winning opening 640 is a big hit, the third receiving flow path It is possible to improve the player's expectation for the jackpot of the player who visually recognizes that the ball is flowing down 2155.

  In this case, the player's line of sight is most easily collected at the lower end position of the first receiving flow path 152 serving as a guide path to the third receiving flow path 2155, and as a result, the discharged ball (game) flowing down the ball flow down unit 2150 It is possible to improve attention to a ball that has already been ejected from the area.

  As described above, when the ball flows down the third receiving flow path 2155, the expected value of the jackpot of the lottery when the frequency of entering the second winning port 640 is high or when entering the second winning port 640 is reached. Suggests a high case.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a detection sensor SC21 capable of detecting the passage of a sphere is provided in the middle of the discharge unit 2155b, and when the passage of the sphere is determined, control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired. .

  As described above, in order to fire the granular member 320, it is necessary to change the state of the injection device 400 in advance from the effect standby state (see FIG. 38) to the fire standby state (FIG. 40). take time. On the other hand, since it is determined whether or not to fire the granular member 320 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning opening 640, and it takes a certain amount of time until the ball reaches the discharge unit 2155b, The injection device 400 is controlled to change its state using this flow-down time.

  As a result, the passage of the sphere is determined by the detection sensor SC21, and at the same time, the granular member 320 can be controlled to fire. By controlling in this way, the granular member 320 is fired after a certain time delay expected to be required for the ball to flow down the third receiving flow path 2155 after entering the second winning opening 640. Compared with the case of controlling to, the flow of the sphere and the firing timing of the granular member 320 can be easily matched.

  For example, there may be a case where a drop in the flow velocity of the sphere occurs due to the oil adhering to the sphere adhering to the first receiving flow path 152. In this case, the granular member 320 is fired after waiting for a certain time delay. If controlled in this way, firing of the granular member 320 is executed before the sphere reaches the third receiving flow path 2155, which may reduce the effect.

  On the other hand, at the same time as the passage of the ball is determined by the detection sensor SC21, the control is performed so that the granular member 320 is fired until the ball reaches the third receiving flow path 2155 until the player can see the ball. After focusing attention on the third receiving flow path 2155, it is possible to improve the effect of a series of effects by executing a powerful effect that spreads to the area of the light guide plate 161 by the firing of the granular member 320. it can.

  Note that the arrangement of the third receiving flow path 2155 through which the sphere flows down and the arrangement of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 12A) viewed through the light guide plate 161 are partially in front view. Therefore, the above-described series of effects can be visually recognized without requiring the player to change the line of sight.

  In addition, you may make it combine the control which does not discharge the granular member 320, when a ball | bowl passes the detection sensor SC21. For example, when the big hit is made when the granular member 320 is not fired, control may be performed so that the probability of the above-mentioned probability variation big hit becomes high.

  In this case, since the types of effects after the sphere is guided to the third receiving channel 2155 can be increased, the player for the third receiving channel 2155 at the stage where the sphere is guided to the third receiving channel 2155. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the attention power.

  In addition, when the firing of the granular member 320 is not executed, it is possible to improve attention to the display effect on the subsequent third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, you may make it arrange | position the detection sensor which has a function similar to the function of detection sensor SC21 in another location. For example, you may arrange | position in the location through which the ball | bowl entered the specific winning opening 65a can pass. In this case, it is possible to execute the effect of firing the granular member 320 at the passage timing of the ball that entered the specific winning opening 65a. In this case, the detection sensor SC21 may be arranged in a specific area where the benefit given to the player by passing the game ball becomes more advantageous.

  A third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is configured to be enlarged / reduced / reduced in the radial direction so as to be symmetrical and discrete, but in the effect member 3700 of the third embodiment, In the radial enlargement / reduction displacement, a section that is not symmetrical is formed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 99 is a front view of an enlargement / reduction unit 3600 according to the third embodiment. The difference between the enlargement / reduction unit 3600 and the first embodiment is only in the effect member 3700, and the configuration of the main body member 601, the front cover member 610, the upper arm member 620, the lower arm member 630, and the transmission gear 650 is common. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 99 shows a state in which the shielding design member 760 of the effect member 3700 is arranged at the midway position (intermediate position) of the enlargement / reduction displacement in the radial direction. As shown in FIG. 99, in this embodiment, the use of five shielding design members 760 is the same as in the first embodiment, but among the shielding design members 760, the lower two pieces and the upper left 1 While the sheets have the same length and are radially expanded and displaced, the upper one sheet and the upper right sheet are still in a collective arrangement state (not radially expanded and displaced). A configuration for realizing this displacement will be described.

  FIG. 100 is a front view of the rotating plate 3730. The rotating plate 3730 has a common configuration with respect to the rotating plate 730 described in the first embodiment except that a part of the guide holes 733 is changed to another guide hole 3733.

  As shown in FIG. 100, the rotating plate 730 includes another guide hole 3733 in place of the upper and upper right guide holes 733 when viewed from the front. The separate guide hole 3733 includes the small-diameter arc portion 733a, the large-diameter arc portion 733b, and the adjustment coupling portion 3733c that couples the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc portion 733b.

  The adjustment connecting portion 3733c extends along the same arc shape from the connecting portion with the large-diameter arc portion 733b to the vicinity of the intermediate position, and on the opposite side of the large-diameter arc portion 733b (the guide hole 733 adjacent in the clockwise direction) It is formed so as to approach rapidly toward the small-diameter arc portion 733a side (at a position close to the separate guide hole 3733).

  That is, in the displacement mode in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced from the collective arrangement state (see FIG. 63), the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 guided by the connection portion 733c is enlarged and displaced in the radial direction from an early stage, while the adjustment connection portion 3733c. The expansion / contraction displacement member 740 guided in the above is not expanded in the radial direction while being guided in the same arc shape as the large-diameter arc portion 733b. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 99, the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 can be shifted. The operation caused by the displacement of the shielding design member 760 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 99, by making the arrangement of the shielding design member 760 left-right asymmetric, the center of gravity position of the effect member 3700 can be shifted from the center in the left-right direction or the center in the up-down direction. In particular, in the state shown in FIG. 99, since the shielding design member 760 arranged at the upper right position still remains in the collective arrangement state, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is shifted to the lower left position accordingly.

  As a result, in the effect member 3700, a load in a direction for correcting the shift of the center of gravity G31, that is, a load in the counterclockwise direction in front view is generated by its own weight. This load can cause the effect member 3700 to change its posture in the rotational direction about the front-rear axis, so that the shielding design member 760 has a radial direction centered on the rotation axis of the effect member 3700, and a rotational direction. Can be displaced in the combined direction.

  Thereby, the direction (namely, it is not planned only from the shape of the function board part 720 (refer FIG. 55) which is a member for displacing the shielding design member 760, the rotary plate 3730, and the expansion-contraction displacement member 740 (refer FIG. 59)). The shielding design member 760 can be displaced in the rotation direction.

  In this embodiment, only the connecting portion 733c and the adjusting connecting portion 3733c are different, and the shapes of the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733 are the same for the other portions, and the small-diameter arc portion 733a and the large-diameter arc are the same. The arrangement of the portion 733b is the same in the guide hole 733 and the separate guide hole 3733.

  For this reason, after the position of the center of gravity G31 shifts in the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 is placed in the collective arrangement state or arranged at the end position of the enlarged displacement in the radial direction. Since they are arranged symmetrically, the center of gravity G31 returns to the horizontal center position and vertical center position of the effect member 3700 again. Thereby, the position of the center of gravity G31 is maintained while being displaced, and the occurrence of problems can be prevented.

  A production example using the return of the center of gravity G31 will be described. In the first embodiment, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 700 are not performed at the same time and are performed individually. However, this purpose is to avoid a collision with another configuration. .

  In this embodiment, after adopting a device for avoiding a collision with another configuration, the vertical displacement and the radial displacement of the effect member 3700 are controlled to be executable simultaneously. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 99, the shielding design member 760 can be enlarged and displaced in the radial direction while the effect member 3700 is displaced downward.

  In this case, in addition to the downward displacement of the effect member 3700 and the radial displacement of the shielding design member 760, the center of gravity G31 of the effect member 3700 is returned, so the effect member 3700 is shown in FIG. It is possible to cause a posture change in the reverse rotation from the rotation direction assumed from the state (counterclockwise in front view).

  Thus, since the rotational displacement in the forward and reverse directions can be applied to the radially expanded displacement of the effect member 3700, a simple configuration specialized for expanding and reducing the shielding design member 760 in the radial direction. As a result, it is possible to obtain a complicated movement with a displacement in the rotational direction. Thereby, the effect by the effect member 3700 can be improved.

  The fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are displaced simultaneously by driving the drive motor M1 in the normal rotation direction from the production standby state has been described. In the fourth embodiment, The shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed, and the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 101 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change in time of the arrangement of the installation portion 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 101, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components is not described, but a guideline of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. The change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in the fourth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 is completed prior to the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420. Therefore, since the downward movement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is started in a state where the lid member 480 is arranged at the displacement end position on the retracting side, the player is not obstructed by the lid member 480. The displacement of the granular member accompanying the downward displacement of the collision member 420 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 12A and FIG. 38).

  In this situation, by reciprocating the linearly moving member 410 between the angle 66 degrees and the angle 125 degrees shown in FIG. 101, the granular member 320 can be vibrated (smallly displaced) and visually recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, since the biasing force of the coil spring SP1 is strong, when the drive of the drive motor M1 is canceled, the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 are displaced upward by the biasing force of the coil spring SP1.

  Therefore, the linear motion member 410 can be reciprocated by energizing the drive motor MT1 intermittently. Thereby, since it becomes unnecessary to switch the drive direction of the drive motor MT1, control can be facilitated.

  Further, in the aspect in which the granular member 320 is vibrated (minutely displaced) and visually recognized by the player in this way, the load (fatigue) received by the torsion spring SP2 is reduced as compared with the case where the lid member 480 is displaced together. Can do.

  In addition, the aspect which displaces the collision member 420 in order to vibrate the granular member 320 (small displacement) is not restricted to this. For example, vibration may be transmitted from another vibration device to the collision member 420 to cause the collision member 420 to vibrate. In this case, the other vibration device is preferably disposed on the lower side of the collision member 420 in the displacement direction. Thereby, it can be avoided that another vibration device receives a load when the collision member 420 is displaced by the urging force of the coil spring SP1.

  The fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 and the transmission arm member 470 are displaced simultaneously by driving the drive motor M1 in the normal rotation direction from the effect standby state has been described. In the fifth embodiment, After the shape of the groove forming portion 462 of the rear transmission member 460 is changed and the displacement of the linear motion member 410 is completed, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470, that is, the displacement of the lid member 480 starts. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 102 shows the output state of the detection sensor SC4, the arrangement of the linear motion member 410, the arrangement of the collision member 420, and the protrusion of the contact member 430 in accordance with the rotation of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a change in time of the arrangement of the installation portion 432 and the arrangement of the columnar protrusions 472 of the transmission arm member 470.

  In FIG. 102, the relative relationship between the change widths of the arrangement changes of the respective components is not described, but an indication of the relative relationship of the timing at which the arrangement change occurs is shown. The change in the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 corresponds to the change in the urging force accumulated in the coil spring SP1.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in the fifth embodiment, the displacement of the transmission arm member 470 starts after the displacement of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 is completed. Further, after the granular member 320 is fired, the displacement of the lid member 480 is completed before the granular member 320 reaches the collision member 420 (see the vicinity of an angle of 290 degrees).

  Therefore, at least a part of the granular member 320 can be placed on the upper side of the lid member 480 and retained. Although the possibility that the granular member 320 collides with the lid member 480 may hinder the rotation of the lid member 480, in this embodiment, the advancing / retreating portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis. Therefore, the load received from the granular member 320 can be directed to the rotating shaft side. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to inhibit the rotation of the lid member 480.

  If driving of the drive motor MT1 in the forward rotation direction is continued while the granular member 320 is on the lid member 480, the transmission arm member 470 is displaced to the retracting side (smaller diameter side in FIG. 102), and the granular member 320 collides. It falls on the member 420.

  On the other hand, since the contact between the collision member 420 and the linear motion member 410 is released at this timing, it is possible to prevent the load transmitted from the granular member 320 to the collision member 420 from being transmitted to the linear motion member 410. .

  Further, when the drive motor MT1 is driven to rotate in the reverse rotation direction from the firing standby state, if the speed is high, the ascending speed of the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be improved, and the granular member 320 can be fired.

  In this case, since the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side at the time of launching, the firing of the granular member 320 is hindered at the left and right center portions where the overhang portions 482 are disposed, and firing in the left-right direction. It can be visually recognized so as to become the main person.

  That is, the direction in which the granular member 320 is ejected can be changed between a firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated forward and a firing mode when the drive motor MT1 is rotated backward. Thereby, a variation can be given to the discharge direction of the granular member 320, and an effect can be improved.

  The sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In 1st Embodiment, although the 1st light irradiation apparatus 330 and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 340 were provided with the flat substrate and demonstrated the case where light was irradiated to the front-back direction and the left-right direction, in 6th Embodiment, The 1 light irradiation apparatus 6330 and the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 6340 are equipped with the electrical decoration board | substrate by which bending arrangement | positioning is carried out. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 103 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 and the firing unit 6300 in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to the line XXVII-XXVII in FIG. That is, in FIG. 103, the game board 13 and the launch unit 6300 are shown, and the operation unit 500 is not shown. Moreover, the direction of the light irradiated from the 1st light irradiation apparatus 6330 or the 2nd light irradiation apparatus 6340 is typically illustrated with the arrow.

  As shown in FIG. 103, the first light irradiation device 6330 has the front-side end adjacent to the front-side end portion of the electrical decoration substrate 332 and the back-side end portion as the electrical decoration substrate in addition to the electrical decoration substrate 332. The second electrical decoration board 6334 is provided so as to be inclined in a posture away from 332.

  The 2nd electrical decoration board 6334 is provided with light emission means, such as LED arrange | positioned so that light can be irradiated from a front side surface at least. By this light emitting means, it becomes easy to direct light to the partition member 310, and it is possible to improve the effect of staging the granular member 320 that scatters in the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310.

  The second light irradiation device 6340 is inclinedly arranged in such a posture that the back side end is close to the back side end of the decor substrate 342 and the front side end is separated from the decor substrate 342 in addition to the decor substrate 342. The second electrical decoration substrate 6344 is provided.

  The 2nd electrical decoration board 6344 is provided with light-emitting means, such as LED arrange | positioned so that light can be irradiated from a back side surface at least. This light emitting means makes it easier to direct light to the effect member 700 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 disposed on the back side of the launch unit 6300, the displacement rotation unit 800, and the like, thereby improving the effect of the light emission effect.

  In addition, arrangement | positioning of an electrical decoration board | substrate is not restricted to this. For example, only the second electric decoration boards 6334 and 6344 may be adopted, and the electric decoration boards 332 and 342 may be omitted, or other combinations may be adopted. In addition, the light emitting means may be arranged on the side where the light emitting means is not arranged in the second electric decoration boards 6334 and 6344, or the light may be irradiated from both sides.

  Further, for the purpose of making the direction of light irradiation oblique, an apparatus capable of changing the attitude of the light emitting means may be configured without taking the method of increasing the electrical decoration substrate. In addition, a light emitting unit may be arranged at the crossing position of the electric decoration boards 332 and 342 and the second electric decoration boards 6334 and 6344 so that light irradiation is possible.

  With reference to FIGS. 104 to 120, a board box A100 according to a seventh embodiment of the present invention will be described. First, a schematic configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107. FIG. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  104 is a rear view of the pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment, FIG. 105 is a front perspective view of the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 106 is a rear perspective view of the substrate box A100. 107 (a) is a front view of the substrate box A100, and FIG. 107 (b) is a side view of the substrate box A100.

  105 to 107, arrows F and B, arrows L and R, and arrows U and D respectively indicate the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction of the substrate box A100. In addition, since it is the same also in each following figure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  The pachinko machine A10 in the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment except for the substrate box A100. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 104 to 107, the substrate box A100 includes a box cover A200, a box base A300 whose opening is covered by the box cover A200, and the box cover A200 and the box base A300 that cannot be opened (caulking structure). And a sub-cover A500 disposed at an end of the box base A300 and the box base A300 opposite to the sealing unit A400. The main control device includes: a sealing unit A400 connected by the sealing unit A400; A110 (see FIG. 112) is stored.

  A rotation axis A410 is formed in the sealing unit A400. The rotation axis A410 is a shaft for pivotally supporting the substrate box A100 on the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 120), and the short direction (arrows U and D) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200). Direction) and an axis orthogonal to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  In addition, the rotation axis A410 is one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B) (on the opposite side to the first connection wall portion A220 across a covering portion A270 described later). (R direction side). The rotation axis A410 may be disposed on the other side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow L direction side) opposite to one side in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200).

  The main control device A110 is provided (mounted) with a switch device A120 and a key device A130. The main control device A110 is configured by further arranging (mounting) the switch device A120 and the key device A130 with respect to the main control device 110 in the first embodiment. That is, the main control device A110 and the main control device 110 in the first embodiment have the same configuration except for the presence or absence of the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, other descriptions are omitted.

  The switch device A120 is operated (turned on) when the operation unit A122 is pushed from the initial position and turned off when the push is released (the operation unit A122 is returned to the initial position). It is configured as a switch and is used for input to the main controller A110. The switch device A120 and the key device A130 correspond to a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4) in the main control device A110 (main control device 110).

  The switch device A120 is configured to generate a predetermined click feeling (change in pressing force) when the operation unit A122 is pushed to the operating position (turned-on position), and the main control is performed based on the click feeling. The operator can detect completion of input to the device A110. Therefore, it becomes effective when it is necessary to operate in the situation where operation part A122 cannot be visually recognized.

  In the key device A130, the key A140 can be inserted / removed at an initial position (hereinafter referred to as “off position”), and the key A140 inserted at the off position is rotated (right rotation in the present embodiment) to a predetermined position (hereinafter referred to as “on”). A key-operated selector switch (mode) which is operated (turned on) by being disposed at a position) and turned off by being rotated (left-rotated in the present embodiment) and disposed at an off position. Switch).

  In the present embodiment, the phase difference between the off position and the on position is set to approximately 90 degrees. In addition, the key device A130 can be inserted and removed in the off position, while the key A140 cannot be removed in the on position.

  Further, the function of the switch device A120 can be switched according to the on / off state of the key device A130. For example, in the present embodiment, in a state where the key device A130 is turned off, the switch device A120 functions as a reset switch (RAM clear switch) that initializes (executes RAM erasure) of the main control device A110. In the state in which A130 is turned on, as will be described later, the switch device A120 is configured to function as a setting change switch for changing the value of the winning probability in the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “setting change”). .

  Here, as described above, the substrate box A100 (box cover A200 and box base A300) is connected so as not to be opened, so that the main controller A110 (for example, the switch device A120 and the key device A130) is operated. Needs to open the substrate box A100, which is troublesome.

  On the other hand, according to the substrate box A100 in the present embodiment, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the box cover A200, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. That is, it is not necessary to open the substrate box A100, and labor can be suppressed. Details will be described later.

  Legs A121 and A131 (electrical connection terminals, see FIG. 114) are provided on the back side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the push-in direction side of the operation unit A122, the insertion direction side of the key A140, and the arrow B direction side). The switch A120 and the key device are protruded by soldering a portion protruding from the front side and protruding to the back side of the leg A121, A131 through a hole opened in the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). A130 is disposed on the front side of main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  In this case, an external force is applied to the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (for example, a force that displaces the operation unit A122 and the key A140 in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction (insertion direction), and a plane including arrows U and D and arrows L and R. When a force in a parallel direction is applied and tilted with respect to the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), the leg on one side of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 (the side lifted from the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). A tensile force is applied to A121 and A131, while a compressive force is applied to the legs A121 and A131 on the other side (the side pressed against the printed circuit board A119 by tilting). Therefore, the legs A121 and A131 are broken or bent, the legs A121 and A131 are removed from the holes, and the solder is peeled off, which may cause disconnection or poor contact. In contrast, the substrate box A100 employs means for solving such a problem. Details will be described later.

  The main controller 100 includes a plurality (four in this embodiment) of 7-segment displays (not shown), and these 7-segment displays are mounted on the printed circuit board A119. Since the box cover A200 is made of a light transmissive resin material, the operator can visually recognize the display on the 7-segment display device via the box cover A200.

  Here, a setting change method using the switch device A120 and the key device A130 will be described.

  First, in a state where the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the on position, and then the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed to the operating position, while the pachinko machine A10 is inserted. Turn on the power. Thereby, it starts as setting change mode, and a setting is changed whenever operation part A122 of switch apparatus A120 is pushed in.

  In the present embodiment, first to sixth six values are defined as set values, and these values are circulated (for example, the set value is changed from the first value to the first value by pressing the operation unit A122). When the operation unit A122 is pushed in from the state set to the sixth value, the set value advances to the first value.

  The set value is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which is a liquid crystal display (display device), and when the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in (when the set value is changed), the third symbol display device. The set value displayed in 81 is also changed. In this embodiment, the set value is also displayed on the 7-segment display.

  In addition, the information regarding the setting change displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the set value, and may include other information. Other information includes the current mode (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the previous setting value, and the like. Thus, by using the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81, the amount of information which can be displayed can be ensured (large) compared with the case where a 7 segment display is used, for example. As a result, it becomes easy to grasp the operation state, and it is possible to improve operability and suppress operation mistakes. Further, by combining the device for displaying information related to the game (the third symbol display device 81), the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The set value may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display and not on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

  After changing the desired set value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the off position. As a result, the setting change mode is terminated (the set value is determined). In this case, the off-edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed in response to the detection, and the normal mode with the set (changed) set value is activated.

  After changing the desired setting value, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position (that is, kept in the on position), and the pachinko machine A10 is turned off. The normal mode with the set (changed) setting value is also activated by turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10 in a state where the key A140 of the key device A130 is located at the off position.

  In the setting change mode, the RAM is erased. Such RAM erasure is determined by placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 at the off position. Examples of the timing for executing the RAM erasing include timing when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on, timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing, timing when the key A140 is arranged at the off position, and the like. That is, the timing for executing the RAM erase can be set as appropriate.

  Further, in the setting change mode (that is, in a state where the setting value can be changed by pushing the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is not placed in the off position ( That is, when the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off (while being in the on-position), the key A140 is removed from the key device A130, or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is removed. When the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on in the state of being placed in the off position, the normal mode is not activated and an error state is displayed, and an error display is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An error display may be displayed on the 7-segment display at the same time as or instead of the third symbol display device 81.

  Next, the set value set in the setting change mode is confirmed by first turning off the power of the pachinko machine A10, placing the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 at the on position, and then turning on the power of the pachinko machine A10. Turn on. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode for confirming the setting value is activated, and the setting value set at that time is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display.

  The setting value display in the setting confirmation mode may be displayed on only one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display and not displayed on the other. Alternatively, both the third symbol display device 81 and the 7-segment display may not be displayed.

  In this setting confirmation mode, the key A140 inserted into the key device A130 is arranged at the off position. Thereby, the setting confirmation mode is terminated. Further, the off edge of the key device A 130 is detected, and the power recovery process is executed in response to the detection, and the normal mode with the set value set at that time is activated.

  In the setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned off and the power of the pachinko machine A10 is turned on with the key A140 inserted in the key device A130 in the off position. The normal mode with the set value is activated.

  In the present embodiment, when the change of the set value in the setting change mode is completed (confirmed), the 7-segment display is issued in a predetermined manner. As the predetermined mode, for example, a mode in which a predetermined display (for example, “7”) blinks at a constant time interval is exemplified.

  In addition, four 7-segment display units are arranged side by side to enable four-digit display, and the mode is displayed by the first two digits (two) (for example, “01” in the setting change mode). However, in the setting confirmation mode, “02” is displayed, and the setting value is displayed by the latter two digits (two) (for example, the first value is “01” and the second value is “ 02 ”is displayed, and“ 06 ”is displayed for the sixth value).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 114, each component (box cover A200, box base A300, and main controller A110) constituting the substrate box A100 will be described in order. First, the box cover A200 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 108 is a front perspective view of the box cover A200, FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the box cover A200, and FIG. 110 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the box cover A200 in the direction of arrow CXa in FIG. 110 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the box cover A200 when viewed in the direction of the arrow CXb in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 108 to 110, the box cover A200 includes a front wall portion A201 formed in a plate-like shape that is substantially horizontally long when viewed from the front, and from the four sides of the front wall portion A201 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B). Wall portions (upper wall portion A202, lower wall portion A203, left wall portion A204 and right wall portion A205 connecting the upper wall portion A202 and lower wall portion A203) that are erected and formed in a plate shape are mainly used. In preparation, the wall portions A201 to A205 are formed in a box shape whose back side is opened. The box cover A200 is made of a light transmissive resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  Two steps are formed on the standing tip surfaces (surfaces in the direction of arrow B) of the upper wall portion A202, the lower wall portion A203, the left wall portion A204, and the right wall portion A205. The first step (first step) is formed on the inner space side of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200), and the second step is formed on the outer side of the first surface (the side opposite to the inner space). A surface (first step) is formed. The first surface is lower than the second surface (the standing height from the front wall portion A201 is small), and the surface on which the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is placed (hereinafter referred to as “seat surface A206”). It is formed as).

  The seating surface A206 is formed in a substantially rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the wall portions A201 to A205 are continuous, and is formed as a surface parallel to the front wall portion A201. The four corners of the seating surface A206 (parts where the surfaces (first surfaces) of the walls A201 to A205 are connected) are recessed with fastening holes A206a in which female threads are threaded on the inner periphery. Is done.

  Therefore, the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) has the outer edge side of the front surface in contact with the seating surface A206, and the screw ASC (see FIG. 5) inserted through the insertion hole A112 of the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119). 117 (b) and FIG. 118 (b)) are screwed into the fastening hole A206a to be fastened and fixed to the box cover A200 (seat surface A206) in a posture parallel to the front wall portion A201. Stored.

  A plurality of engagement pieces A207 are arranged in parallel on the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 at a predetermined interval. The engagement piece A207 extends from the upper wall portion A202 and the lower wall portion A203 to the back side (in the direction of arrow B) and extends in one direction (in the direction of arrow R) from the standing tip of the base portion. It is formed in a shape that is bent in an approximately L shape from the extended portion, and is engaged with the engaged portion A307 of the box base A300, as will be described later.

  A portion of the front wall portion A201 that is recessed toward the back side (arrow B direction) is formed in a part thereof. Such a recessed portion includes a plate-like operation wall portion A210 that is positioned backward from the front wall portion A201 to the back side (main controller 110 side), and each side of the operation wall portion A210 is connected to the front wall portion. It is formed in the front wall part A201 by the plate-shaped wall part (1st connection wall part A220, 2nd connection wall part A230, and 3rd connection wall part A240) connected to A201.

  That is, the outer surface on the front side of the substrate box A100 (the surface on the arrow F direction side) is positioned closer to the main controller A110 than the first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and the first region. And a second region formed by the wall portion A210.

  The operation wall part A210 is a part that forms the operation surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130, and is a substantially horizontally long rectangle in the front view (the length in the arrow L and R directions with respect to the length dimension in the arrows U and D directions). It is formed in a rectangular shape whose dimensions are increased, and is arranged in a posture substantially parallel to the front wall portion A201.

  Note that the operation wall portion A210 is disposed on one side (on the rotation axis A410 side of the sealing unit A400) from the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A200 in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B).

  The first connection wall portion A220 is a wall portion that connects one side of the operation wall portion A210 on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow L direction side) to the front wall portion A201, and from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. It is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction approaching the main controller A110 as it goes. Therefore, a space continuous with the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be formed on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the first connection wall portion A220. The space (the space that can be used when operating the key device A130) as a whole can be expanded as a space that includes the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210.

  In the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210 is set to approximately 45 degrees. Thereby, coexistence with expansion of the space in the front side (arrow F direction side) of operation wall part A210 and securing of the space in the inside of substrate box A100 can be aimed at.

  The second connection wall portion A230 is on one side in the short side direction (arrow U direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and the third connection wall portion A240 is on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (arrow R). One side on the direction side) is a wall portion connected to the front wall portion A201, and is arranged in a posture substantially orthogonal to the front wall portion A201 and the operation wall portion A210.

  The operation wall A210 has an opening A250 for projecting the operation unit A122 to the outside of the substrate box A100, an opening A260 for allowing the key A140 to be inserted into and removed from the key device A130, and the main controller A110 ( Openings AOP1 to AOP8 for enabling connection to a connector (not shown) mounted on the printed circuit board A119) are formed.

  The opening A250 has a shape in front view corresponding to the outer shape of the operation portion A122 (in this embodiment, substantially square in front view), and is substantially in the longitudinal direction (arrow L and R directions) of the operation wall portion A210. Located in the center. Around the opening A250, a guide wall A251 is erected from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The guide wall A251 guides the displacement of the operation portion A122 in the pushing direction (arrow B direction) and is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the pushing direction (a direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). It is a part for restricting (falling), and is formed in a frame shape of a substantially square shape surrounding the opening A250, and its inner peripheral surface is formed so as to be smoothly connected to the inner peripheral surface of the opening A250.

  In this embodiment, the height of the guide wall A251 standing from the operation wall A210 is higher than the front end of the operation unit A122 pushed to the operating position (turned-on position). The tip is set at a low position (the tip of the operation portion A122 protrudes outward (arrow F direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it can avoid that pushing operation of operation part A122 is inhibited by guide wall A251, and can aim at improvement in operativity of operation part A122.

  However, the standing height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is higher than the distal end of the operation portion A122 pushed to the operating position (turned-on position). The position may be set to a dimension (the tip of the operation part A122 is immersed inward (arrow B direction side) from the standing tip of the guide wall A251). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the operation unit A122 from being unintentionally pushed (turned on) to the operation position due to an operator's careless operation or contact (interference) with other members.

  In addition, the height of the guide wall A251 from the operation wall portion A210 is substantially the same as the height of the standing edge from the operation wall portion A210. You may set to the dimension used as the same height position. When the operation unit A122 is pushed in, the finger is brought into contact with the standing tip of the guide wall A251, so that the operator can recognize that the operation unit A122 has been pushed into the operating position with reference to the contact. . This is effective when it is necessary to operate the operation unit A122 in a situation where it cannot be visually recognized.

  A covering portion A270 is projected from the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The covering portion A270 is a portion that covers a part of the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 (see FIG. 112 (a)), and is a peripheral wall that is erected from the operation wall portion A210 and formed in a cylindrical shape. Part A271 and a plate-like end face wall part A272 that closes the protruding tip of the peripheral wall part A271 (forms an end face), and a part on the tip side of the key device A130 is housed in the internal space. The

  The peripheral wall portion A271 has a base A271a formed in a cylindrical shape having a substantially circular cross section, and a pair of protrusions protruding radially outward from two opposing positions (positions whose phases are approximately 180 degrees different) of the base A271a. Part A271b. The entire peripheral wall portion A271 (base portion A271a and protrusion portion A271b) is formed in substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the axial direction (the directions of arrows F and B). Therefore, the operation wall portion A210 has substantially the same shape as the sectional shape of the peripheral wall portion A271 (the base portion A271a and the protrusion portion A271b) (that is, a shape in which two opposing portions of the circular shape protrude radially outward). Are formed (see FIG. 110B).

  The opening A260 is formed in the protruding front end surface of the covering portion A270, that is, the end surface wall portion A272. Thereby, end surface wall part A272 is formed in the plate shape extended in the radial direction inner side from the internal peripheral surface of the protrusion front-end | tip of peripheral wall part A271. That is, the end surface wall portion A272 is formed as a plate (cantilever) whose base end is fixed to the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 and whose one end (opening A260 side) is free.

  Here, the opening A260 is only in a region corresponding to a displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position (a region necessary for permitting the displacement). It is formed. Specifically, the opening A260 has a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140, and the other side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately 90 degrees for allowing displacement of the portion (one side and the opposite side) is formed in a combined shape with a phase difference of approximately 180 degrees.

  As a result, the end wall portion A272 has an annular portion A272a that extends radially inward from the inner peripheral surface of the projecting tip of the peripheral wall portion A271 and is formed in a substantially circular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). And a rectangular portion A272b extending inward in the radial direction from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a and having a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). The square portion A272b is disposed in a posture that tapers radially inward in a front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), and is formed at two locations whose phases are different by approximately 180 degrees.

  Note that the key A140 has a dimension in which the rotation radius of the portion on one side of the rotation center and the rotation radius of the portion on the other side of the rotation center are different. Therefore, the opening A260 is an opening having a different size (radius) between the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 protrude from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. These 1st protrusion A211 and 2nd protrusion A212 are protrusions extended in the shape of a stripe, maintaining substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape, and one end is connected with the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of coating | coated part A270. .

  Specifically, one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) facing the edge of the key A140 in the off position, and the second One end of the protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271 at a position (phase) opposite to the edge portion of the key A140 in the ON position. That is, one end of the first protrusion A211 and one end of the second protrusion A212 are respectively connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 at a position where the phase is different by approximately 180 degrees.

  Further, on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, the display portion is located at a position (on the extension line of the other end) adjacent to the other ends of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. Are formed respectively. The display unit is a part indicating information on the operation position (rotation position) of the key A140, and “OFF” and “ON” are displayed. That is, the key A140 having a posture with the edge directed toward one end of the first ridge A211 is disposed at the off position (see FIG. 115A), and the key having a posture with the edge directed toward one end of the second ridge A212. A140 is arranged at the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  The opening AOP1 is formed in the operation wall portion A210, and the openings AOP2 to AOP8 are formed (in a line) in series (in a line) along the edge of the front wall portion A201.

  Standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. The standing wall A280 includes a first standing wall A281, a second standing wall A282, a third standing wall A283, and a fourth standing wall A284, and these standing walls A281, A282, A283, and A284 are opened. A250 is surrounded (see FIG. 110B). Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the switch device A120 is surrounded by the standing wall A280.

  The first standing wall A281 is disposed between the opening A250 and the second connection wall part A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall part A230 and the lower wall part A203. The second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are disposed to face each other with the opening A250 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape that is substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A281. The fourth standing wall A284 is disposed between the opening A250 and the lower wall part A203, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to the first standing wall A281.

  As for 2nd standing wall A282 and 3rd standing wall A283, one side is connected with 1st standing wall A281, and the other side is connected with lower wall part A203, respectively. That is, the first standing wall A281 is connected to the lower wall part A203 via the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected on one side to the second standing wall A282 and on the other side to the third standing wall A283.

  The standing wall A290 includes a first standing wall A291, a second standing wall A292, and a third standing wall A293, and the opening A260 is surrounded by the standing walls A291, A292, and A293 (FIG. 110). (See (b)). Therefore, in a state where the main control device A110 is housed in the board box A100, the key device A130 is surrounded by the standing wall A290.

  The first standing wall A291 is disposed between the opening A260 and the second connection wall part A230, and is formed in a plate shape substantially parallel to each of the second connection wall part A230 and the lower wall part A203. The second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293 are arranged to face each other with the opening A260 interposed therebetween, and are formed in a plate shape that is substantially orthogonal to the first standing wall A291.

  As for 2nd standing wall A292 and 3rd standing wall A293, one side is connected with 1st standing wall A291 and the other side is connected with lower wall part A203, respectively. That is, the first standing wall A291 is connected to the lower wall part A203 via the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The fourth standing wall A284 is connected on one side to the second standing wall A292 and on the other side to the third standing wall A293.

  The standing wall A290 is formed to have a size (a position outside the covering portion A270) that surrounds the periphery of the covering portion A270 in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). Specifically, in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B), the outer surface (arc) of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 is on the inner surface (straight line) of the second standing wall A292 and the third standing wall A293. The outer surfaces (arcs) of the protrusions A271b in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270 are inscribed in contact with the inner surfaces (straight lines) of the first standing wall A291 and the lower wall portion A203, respectively.

  The first upright walls A281, A291, the second upright walls A282, A292, and the third upright walls A283, A293 of the upright walls A280, A290 are the back surface (inner surface, in the direction of arrow B in the direction of arrow B). The standing height from each of the standing walls A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293 is the seating surface A206. Placed at the same height.

  Accordingly, the standing walls A280 and A290 are such that the standing front end surfaces of the second standing walls A282 and A292 and the third standing walls A283 and A293 are connected to the seating surface A206, and the seating surface A206 and the standing walls A281 and A293 are provided. , A282, A292, A283, and A293 are located on the same plane (form the same plane). Thus, when main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119) is fastened and fixed to box cover A200 (seat surface A206), first standing walls A281, A291, second standing walls A282, A292, and third standing walls are installed. The standing front end surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the walls A283 and A293 is in contact with the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Here, in the standing wall A280, the length dimensions (arrow U and D direction dimensions) of the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 are the same as the length dimensions (arrows L and L) of the first standing wall A281. R dimension (size in the R direction). Therefore, as described later, when the outer surface of the tilted switch device A120 comes into contact with the inner surface of the standing wall A280 (the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283), the second standing wall There is a possibility that A282 and the third standing wall A283 are deformed and the tilt of the switch device A120 cannot be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the space between the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall A283 is connected by the fourth standing wall A284, the second standing wall A282 and the third standing wall are connected. The deformation of A283 can be suppressed. As a result, the tilt of the switch device A120 can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the fourth standing wall A284 is disposed at a position close to the lower wall portion A203, so that the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth standing wall A284 is increased. This corresponds to the partial formation of a part with a large plate thickness dimension, and due to the difference in shrinkage rate from other parts, defective molding at a part with a large plate thickness dimension and its vicinity. Cause it to occur.

  On the other hand, the standing height of the fourth standing wall A284 is smaller (lower) than the standing height of the first standing wall A281, the second standing wall A282, and the third standing wall A283. Thereby, while ensuring the function of suppressing the deformation of the second upright wall A282 and the third upright wall A283, the material volume in the vicinity of the fourth upright wall A284 is reduced, and the molding failure due to the difference in shrinkage rate Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the fourth standing wall A284 is provided at a position closer to the opening A250 than the lower wall part A203, the switch device A120 can be prevented from tilting in the direction of the arrow D, as will be described later. The outer surface of the device A120 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the fourth standing wall A284, and the tilt can be suppressed within an appropriate range (that is, tilted at a smaller angle than the case of contacting the lower wall portion A203). .

  On the inner surfaces of the first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292 and the third standing walls A283, A293 of the standing walls A280, A290, the front end side (arrow B The taper surfaces A280a and A290a, which are inclined surfaces that are closer to the outer surface side, are formed in the direction (direction). Thereby, the thickness dimension (plate thickness dimension) at the standing tip of each standing wall A281, A291, A282, A292, A283, A293 is gradually reduced toward the standing tip side, and accordingly, each standing wall A281. , A291, A282, A292, A283, and A293, the area of the standing tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced.

  The tapered surfaces A280a and A290a may be omitted. Further, the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the outer surfaces of the first standing walls A281 and A291, the second standing walls A282 and A292, and the third standing walls A283 and A293 on the standing front end side of the standing walls A280 and A290. It may be provided.

  A standing wall A208 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the front wall portion A201. In addition to the above-described standing walls A280 and A290, a standing wall A209 is erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210.

  The standing wall A208 is formed in a box shape in which four side plate-like bodies are connected and the opposite side to the front wall portion A201 is opened, and is mounted on the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119) (MPU201, FIG. 4)). The standing wall A209 has an inner shape corresponding to the opening AOP1, is formed in a box shape that is open on the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, and is mounted on the main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119). Is formed at a position corresponding to. Therefore, in a state where the main controller A110 is housed in the board box A100, the arithmetic unit (MPU201) is surrounded by the standing wall A208 and the connector is surrounded by the standing wall A209.

  Here, in the plurality of standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 that respectively surround the plurality of objects, the height position of the standing front end surface of one or the plurality of standing walls is the standing position of the remaining standing walls. A height position different from the height position of the tip surface is set. In the present embodiment, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, separated from the printed circuit board A119). Located on the side to be). Thereby, even when there is a dimensional tolerance of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, A290, a mounting tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 to the box cover A200, or a dimensional tolerance of the printed circuit board A119 (for example, variation in flatness). Compared with the standing wall A209, the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A208, A280, and A290 can be easily adhered to the printed circuit board A119. That is, it is possible to secure the close contact of the standing wall surrounding the highly important object with the printed circuit board A119.

  Next, the box base A300 will be described with reference to FIG. 111 (a) is a front perspective view of the box base A300, and FIG. 111 (b) is a rear perspective view of the box base A300.

  As shown in FIG. 111, the box base A300 has a rear wall portion A301 formed in a plate-like shape that is substantially horizontally long when viewed from the front, and stands from the four sides of the rear wall portion A301 toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F). And a wall portion (upper wall portion A302, lower wall portion A303, left wall portion A304 and right wall portion A305 connecting these upper wall portion A302 and lower wall portion A303) formed in a plate shape, These wall portions A301 to A305 are formed in a box shape whose front side is open. The box base A300 is made of a resin material and is molded using a resin mold.

  A plurality of engaged portions A307 are juxtaposed at predetermined intervals on the upper wall portion A302 and the lower wall portion A303. The engaged portion A307 is a portion to which the engagement piece A207 of the box cover A200 is engaged, and is formed so as to project downward (arrow D direction side).

  As for the connection between the box base A300 and the box cover A200, first, the phase of the extension portion of the engagement piece A207 is opposite to the extension direction of the extension portion (the arrow L direction side) by the extension length of the extension portion. Face each other at the shifted position and push the box cover A200 toward the box base A300. As a result, the engaging piece A207 enters the space between the adjacent engaged portions A307, so that the box cover A200 is then placed in the extending direction of the extending portion in the engaging piece A207 with respect to the box base A300 (see FIG. Slide and move in the direction of arrow R). As a result, the engagement piece A207 enters the back side (arrow B direction side) of the engaged portion A307, and both are engaged (the displacement of the box cover A200 in the arrow F direction is restricted).

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114, main controller A110 will be described. 112 (a) is a front perspective view of the main control device A110, FIG. 112 (b) is a rear perspective view of the main control device A110, and FIG. 113 is a main view in a portion CXIII of FIG. 112 (a). It is a partial expansion front perspective view of control apparatus A110.

  114A is a front view of main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVa in FIG. 112A, and FIG. 114B is main controller A110 in the direction of arrow CXIVb in FIG. 114A. 114 (c) is a side view of main controller A110 as viewed in the direction of arrow CXIVc in FIG. 114 (a).

  In FIG. 112 to FIG. 114, only the main ones of various electronic components mounted on the printed circuit board A119 are shown and the other illustrations are omitted to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. .

  As shown in FIGS. 112 to 114, the main controller A110 includes a printed circuit board A119, and a switch device A120 and a key device A130 mounted on the printed circuit board A119. The printed circuit board A119 has various electronic components (IC, resistors, capacitors and transistors) mounted on a plate made of an insulating resin material, and a circuit (pattern) for connecting the electronic components is a conductor such as a copper foil. The insertion holes A112 are formed at four corners.

  The printed circuit board A119 is in a posture in which the front surface (the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted, the surface on the arrow F direction side) faces the back surface of the box cover A200 (front wall portion A201). It is stored in.

  In this case, at least the regions AS1 and AS2 of the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 where the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 in the box cover A200 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 abut (FIG. 114). (See (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed, and the regions AS1 and AS2 are formed as flat surfaces. In FIG. 114 (a), only the portion connected to the standing walls A280 and A290 in the region where the seating surface A206 is in contact is shown.

  The switch device A120 includes a main body A123 that holds the operation portion A122 so that the operation portion A122 can be displaced (push-in operation), and a coil spring that is disposed inside the main body A123 and applies a biasing force to return the operation portion A122 to the initial position. An urging means (not shown), a contact (not shown) disposed inside the main body A123 and switched in accordance with the displacement of the operation portion A122, and a leg A121 electrically connected to the contact. Prepare.

  The main body A123 includes a base A123a formed in a substantially cubic shape and mounted on the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, and a columnar protrusion A123b protruding from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base A123a. The outer diameter dimension of the projection A123b is larger than the maximum dimension (length of the diagonal line) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). In a state where main controller A110 is housed in substrate box A100, the front surface of projection A123b and the back surface of operation wall portion A210 (the surface on the arrow B direction side) face each other.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a portion of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a where the leg A121 protrudes) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the base portion A123a (a part of the bottom surface of the base portion A123a from which the leg A121 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the base A123a may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A121.

  In the present embodiment, a predetermined gap is formed between the front surface of the projection A123b and the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. However, you may comprise so that the front of protrusion A123b and the back surface (surface of the arrow B direction side) of operation wall part A210 may contact | abut.

  The leg A121 protrudes from the back surface of the base A123a in the main body A123 (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119), and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. Thereby, the switch device A120 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The key device A130 includes a cylinder part A132 formed as a lock that allows the inner cylinder A132a to rotate with respect to the outer cylinder A132b when a suitable key A140 is inserted into the inner cylinder A132a, and the cylinder part A132 is disposed therein. The main body A133 to be held, the support A134 that supports the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the main body A133, and the contact that is switched according to the state of the cylinder part A132 (the rotational position of the inner cylinder A132a relative to the outer cylinder A132b). (Not shown) and a leg A131 electrically connected to the contact.

  The main body A133 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape, and has a base A133a that holds the cylinder part A132 on the inner peripheral side (inside) and two locations on the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A133a (positions whose phases are different by approximately 180 degrees). ) And a pair of protrusions A133b protruding radially outward, and an end A133c that forms an end surface on the tip side (arrow F direction side) of the base A133a.

  In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and the leg A131 protrudes) is brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. However, a gap may be formed between the bottom surface of the main body A133 (a portion of the bottom surface of the main body A133 and the leg A131 protrudes) and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. In other words, the main body A133 may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131.

  The end surface on the arrow F direction side of the protrusion A133b is formed at a position (arrow B direction side) one step lower than the end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) formed by the end portion A133c. The end A133c is formed with a circular opening in front view at a position substantially concentric with the base A133a, and the key A140 can be inserted into and removed from the cylinder A132 (inner cylinder A132a) through the opening. .

  In a state where the main controller A110 is stored in the substrate box A100, a part of the front end side (arrow F direction side) of the main body A133 is stored in the internal space of the covering portion A270.

  Specifically, the outer diameter of the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is set to a value that is equal to or slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the base portion A271a in the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and the protruding shape of the protruding portion A133b of the main body A133 is covered with The base A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the base A271a of the peripheral wall A271, so that the base A133a of the main body A133 is formed on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271. The protrusion A133b of A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall part A271.

  In this case, there is a predetermined gap between the front surface (end surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 and the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end surface wall portion A272 in the covering portion A270. It is formed. In addition, you may comprise so that the front surface of edge part A133c and the back surface of end surface wall part A272 may contact | abut.

  The leg A131 protrudes from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side, the surface facing the printed circuit board A119) of the base A133a in the main body A133, and is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 as described above. The part protruding to the back side is soldered. As a result, the key device A130 is disposed (mounted) on the front side of the printed circuit board A119.

  The support A134 is formed with a base portion A134a in which an opening is formed substantially in the center, and the main body A133 (base A133a and protrusion A133b) is inserted into the opening, and two opposite sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119. A pair of extending portions A134b extending and a pair of reinforcing portions A134c extending from the remaining two sides of the base portion A134a toward the printed circuit board A119 are integrated by bending a metal plate. Formed.

  The extension length of the extension portion A134b from the base portion A134a is larger than the extension length of the reinforcement portion A134c from the base portion A134a, and the extension tip surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extension portion A134b. Is brought into contact with the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. A leg A134b1 protrudes from the extended distal end surface of the extended portion A134b. The support A134 is disposed and self-supported on the front side of the printed circuit board A119 by soldering the portion where the leg A134b1 is inserted from the front side into the hole opened in the printed circuit board A119 and projecting to the back side. As a result, the main body A133 can be supported by the support A134, and the support A134 can prevent the main body A133 from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119.

  Note that a gap may be provided between the extended front end surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the extended portion A134b and the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. That is, the support A134 may be raised from the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 by the legs A131. In this case, the heat dissipation of the key device A130 can be enhanced by the gap.

  On the other hand, the extension length from the base portion A134a of the extension portion A134b and the extension length from the reinforcement portion A134c may be the same dimension. That is, the extending front end surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the reinforcing portion A134c may also be configured to contact the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119. In this case, the main body A133 is supported by both the extending portion A134b and the reinforcing portion A134c, and the main body A133 can be more securely suppressed from tilting with respect to the printed circuit board A119. Moreover, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, penetrate | invade into the leg A131 side of key apparatus A130.

  Further, the soldering of the leg A134b1 is omitted, the leg A134b1 is formed in a cross-sectional shape bent in a substantially U shape or a substantially S shape, and the leg A134b1 is inserted into the hole of the printed circuit board A119 in an elastically deformed state. It is good also as composition to do. That is, the leg A134b1 may be elastically engaged with the inner peripheral surface (inner surface) of the hole of the printed circuit board A119 using the elastic recovery force of the leg A134b1. Since the soldering can be omitted, the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Alternatively, in addition to the elastic engagement of the legs A134b1 with the holes, soldering may be performed. It can suppress more firmly that leg A134b1 comes out from a hole. Therefore, the function of the support A134 that supports the tilting of the main body A133 can be further enhanced.

  The leg A134b1 has a width dimension (arrow L and B direction dimensions, dimension in FIG. 114 (b) left and right direction) larger than the thickness dimension of the plate-like body constituting the support A134 (that is, the cross section of the leg A134b1). The hole of the printed circuit board A119 through which the leg A134b1 is inserted is formed in a rectangular shape. Thereby, the rigidity of the leg A134b1 is increased, and when the tilt of the main body A133 is supported by the support A134, the base portion of the leg A134b1 (the connecting portion with the extending portion A134b) can be prevented from being deformed or broken.

  However, the width dimension of the leg A134b1 may be substantially the same as the thickness dimension. That is, the cross-sectional shape of the leg A134b1 may be a square shape.

  Further, by forming the reinforcing portions A134c on the two opposing sides of the support A134, it is possible to regulate bending and twisting of the base portion A134a. Thereby, since the rigidity as the whole support body A134 can be improved and the function which supports the main body A133 can be improved, the inclination with respect to the printed circuit board A119 of the main body A133 can be controlled more firmly (suppression).

  Next, the detailed configuration of the substrate box A100 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 115 (a) is a partially enlarged front view of the substrate box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated to the off position, and FIG. 115 (b) is a substrate box A100 in a state where the key A140 is operated to the on position. 116 (a) is a partially enlarged side view of the substrate box A100 in the direction of the arrow CXVIa in FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. 116 (b) is a partially enlarged side view of FIG. 115 (b). It is a partial expanded side view of the board | substrate box A100 in the arrow CXVIb direction view.

  117A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXVIIa-CXVIIa in FIG. 115A, and FIG. 117B is a substrate along the cutting line CXVIIb-CXVIIb in FIG. 115A. FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the box A100, FIG. 118 (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXVIIIa-CXVIIIa of FIG. 115 (a), and FIG. It is a partial expanded sectional view of substrate box A100 in section line CXVIIIb-CXVIIIb of a).

  FIG. 119 (a) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the substrate box A100 along the cutting line CXIXa-CXIXa of FIG. 116 (a), and FIG. 119 (b) is the substrate at the cutting line CXIXb-CXIXb of FIG. 116 (a). It is a partial expanded sectional view of box A100.

  117 to 119, in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding, the internal structure is not shown, and a single hatching is attached to the cross section, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are schematically illustrated. This is illustrated schematically.

  As shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the substrate box A100 has a covering portion A270 protruding from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 of the box cover A200, and the covering portion A270 is protrudingly provided. Opening A260 is formed in end surface wall part A272 which forms a tip surface (surface by the side of arrow F). Thereby, it is difficult to make the tip of a foreign object such as a wire reach the opening A260.

  For example, when the opening A260 cannot be visually recognized by a person who performs fraud due to a shield or the like, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260, the tip of the foreign matter such as a wire is placed on the box cover A200 (for operation). A method of sliding to the opening A260 by sliding on the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the wall portion A210) is performed.

  In contrast, when the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210 because the covering portion A270 protrudes from the front surface (outer surface) of the operation wall portion A210. Further, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire can be brought into contact with the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion A271), and further progression (sliding) can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271) can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of a foreign object such as a wire. As a result, insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening A260 can be suppressed.

  The covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main controller A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

  Thereby, the clearance gap between the inner surface of coating | coated part A270 and the outer surface of key apparatus A130 can be bent. That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path (a gap between the end surface wall portion A272 and the end portion A133c and a peripheral wall portion A271) through which the foreign object such as the wire passes. A path formed by a gap between the base A133a and the protrusion A133b) and a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire abuts (a wire passing through a gap between the end wall A272 and the end A133c, etc.) A wall against which the tip of the foreign matter abuts, that is, the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being fraudulently caused by foreign matter such as inserted wires (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  The key device A130 is formed by inserting a substantially cylindrical main body A133 through a support A134 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped outer shape. In this case, the width dimension of the support A134 (the lateral dimension in FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) is the inner diameter dimension (FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)) of the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271). Larger than the horizontal dimension).

  Thereby, the upper surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the support A134 can be made to face the inner surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the clearance gap between the inner surface of coating | coated part A270 and the outer surface of key apparatus A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (formed by a gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protruding portion A133b). The wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts (the wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire passing through the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the projection A133b abuts, that is, the support A134. In addition, for the foreign matter such as a wire whose traveling direction is changed by abutting against the upper surface of the support A134, each of the standing walls A291, A292, A293 and the inner surface of the lower wall portion A203) is formed in the path. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being fraudulently caused by foreign matter such as inserted wires (see FIGS. 117 (a) and 117 (b)).

  A protrusion A271b is formed on the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, a protrusion A133b is formed on the main body A133, and the base portion A133a of the main body A133 is on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the base portion A271a of the peripheral wall portion A271. The protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is housed on the inner peripheral side (inner side) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall A271.

  Thereby, the outer surface (surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the protrusion A271b can face each other. Therefore, the clearance gap between the inner surface of coating | coated part A270 and the outer surface of key apparatus A130 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A260, a path through which the foreign object such as a wire passes (in the circumferential direction due to the gap between the peripheral wall portion A271 and the base portion A133a and the protruding portion A133b). The tip of the wire or the like that passes along the circumferential direction through the wall between the peripheral wall A271 and the base A133a and the protrusion A133b. Wall, that is, the outer surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A133b and the inner surface in the circumferential direction of the protrusion A271b) can be formed in the path. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being cheated by foreign matter such as inserted wires (see FIG. 118 (a)).

  In the switching device A120, the outer diameter dimension of the protrusion A123b is set to a value larger than the maximum dimension (the length of the diagonal line) of the opening A250 (the inner edge of the guide wall A251). Thereby, the upper surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the projection A123b can be made to face the inner surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. Therefore, the clearance gap between the inner surface of guide wall A251 and operation wall part A210, and the outer surface of switch apparatus A120 can be bent.

  That is, when a foreign object such as a wire is inserted into the substrate box A100 from the opening A250, a path through which the foreign object such as the wire passes (the guide wall A251 and the operation wall part A210, the operation part A122, and the protrusion A123b). A wall where the tip of a foreign object such as a wire abuts (a wall where the tip of a foreign object such as a wire passing through the gap between the guide wall A251 and the operation portion A122 abuts, The upper surface of the protrusion A123b, and for the foreign matter such as a wire whose advancing direction is changed by contacting the upper surface of the protrusion A123b, the inner wall of each of the standing walls A281, A282, A283 and the lower wall portion A203) Can be formed inside. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main controller A110 from being fraudulently caused by the inserted foreign matter such as a wire (see FIGS. 118 (a) and 118 (b)).

  As described above, the covering portion A270 has an internal space, and a part of the front end side (one end side, arrow F direction side) of the key device A130 of the main control device A110 is accommodated in the internal space. That is, the covering portion A270 covers a part of the tip side of the key device A130.

  Thereby, the inner surface of the covering portion A270 and the outer surface of the key device A130 can face each other in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction of the key A140 (a direction parallel to a plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R). Therefore, for example, due to an operator's inadvertent operation or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, collision of another member with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion 170, and tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted).

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the breakage and bending of the leg A131, the disconnection of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed board A119, and the peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from dropping from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  The covering portion A270 is formed with an end surface wall portion A272 at the protruding tip (arrow F direction side), and this end surface wall portion A272 faces the end portion A133c of the key device A130. Thereby, in addition to the area of the opening A260 (in addition to the area of the opening A260 in the front view (viewed in the direction of the arrow B), the cross-sectional area of the path through which foreign matters such as a wire pass) can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the substrate box A100 and improperly applied to the main controller A110.

  In particular, the end face wall portion A272 of the covering portion A270 has a square portion A272b extending radially inward from two locations on the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. That is, only the area where the key A140 is allowed to be displaced (the area corresponding to the displacement trajectory of the key A140) is opened on the protruding front end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the covering part A270, and the covering part A270 is protrudingly provided. All other regions of the front end surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) are end surface wall portions A272. Accordingly, it is possible to minimize the area of the opening A260 and make it difficult to insert a foreign object such as a wire into the opening A260. Further, since the opposing area between the inner surface of the end surface wall portion A272 and the outer surface of the key device A130 (end portion A133c) can be maximized, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening A260, the foreign object such as the wire passes therethrough. Can be difficult.

  Thus, in order to make the opening A260 an irregular shape (a shape in which a pair of fan shapes are opposed to each other), the end surface wall portion A272 is relatively complicated with the pair of square portions A272b projecting from the inner edge of the annular portion A272a. It is formed in a simple shape. In this case, the end wall portion A272 (annular portion A272a and rectangular portion A272b) is a cantilever having a plate shape with a constant thickness dimension (the base end is fixed to the peripheral wall portion A271 and one end (extending tip) is free). Therefore, the shape can be simplified and the moldability can be ensured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  Here, only the peripheral wall portion A271 is formed in the covering portion A270, and the end surface wall portion A272 is not formed (that is, the inner edge of the protruding tip side (arrow F direction side) of the peripheral wall portion A271 is the opening A260. Even when the external force in the direction orthogonal to the insertion direction is applied to the key A140, the outer surface of the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 to suppress tilting of the key device A130. (Regulation) Yes.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the end surface wall portion A272 is formed on the projecting distal end side (arrow F direction side) of the covering portion A270, and the key A140 is formed on the inner edge of the end surface wall portion A272 (portion forming the opening A260). Can be brought into contact with each other. That is, a position (key A140) farther from the fulcrum (leg A131) when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of the external force described above can be brought into contact with the end wall A272. As a result, tilting of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted), and breakage of the box cover A200 (covering portion A270) can be suppressed.

  Further, the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 and the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271 are partially formed in the circumferential direction, and the protrusion A133b of the main body A133 is stored on the inner peripheral side (inside) of the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271. Therefore, as described above, the outer circumferential surface (surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A133b and the inner circumferential surface (surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A271b face each other. (See FIG. 118 (a)).

  Therefore, for example, due to the operator's inadvertent or rough operation on the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, due to the collision of other members with the key A140 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11, etc. When an external force in the rotational direction is applied to the key A140, the circumferential outer surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A133b is the circumferential inner surface (the surface on the arrow L, R direction side) of the projection A271b. ) To restrict the rotation (displacement in the circumferential direction) of the key device A130.

  Therefore, as described above, it is possible to suppress the breakage and bending of the leg A131, the disconnection of the leg A131 from the hole of the printed board A119, and the peeling of the solder. As a result, it is possible to prevent the key device A130 from dropping from the main control device A110 (printed circuit board A119), and disconnection or poor contact of the key device A130 (leg A131).

  Here, for example, the operator's inadvertent operation or rough operation on the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 or the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, or the operation unit A122 during the opening operation of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. Alternatively, an external force in a direction orthogonal to the pushing direction or the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R) is applied to the operation unit A122 or the key A140 due to a collision of another member with the key A140. When acted, the switch device A120, the key device A130, or the key A140 tilts, and the box cover A200 (particularly, the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270) may be deformed and damaged due to their contact. .

  On the other hand, standing walls A280 and A290 are erected on the back surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, and these erected walls A280 and A290 have their standing tip surfaces ( The surface on the arrow B direction side) is brought into contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119 (see FIGS. 117A and 117B).

  Thereby, in addition to the improvement of the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 due to the standing walls A280 and A290 being erected (functioning as ribs), the support portion (deformation suppression) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as means. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  When the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is brought into contact with the inner surface of the standing walls A280, A290, and the switch device A120 or The tilt of the key device A130 can be suppressed (restricted). That is, the portion that abuts against the switch device A120 or the key device A130 and suppresses the tilt is shared not only with the operation wall portion A210 or the covering portion A270 but also with the standing walls A280 and A290, and the load is accordingly increased. Can be dispersed. Also from this point, the breakage of the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, even if foreign matter such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed board A119 because the standing tip surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are in contact with the front surface of the printed board A119, The standing walls A280 and A290 can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire abuts (a wall that restricts further progress). Thereby, it can suppress that fraud is added to main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  The standing walls A280 and A290 are formed to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203 (see FIG. 118B). That is, the region AS1 where the standing end surfaces (the surface on the arrow B direction) of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 and the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction) of the printed board A119 are in contact. , AS2 has a substantially rectangular frame shape and is formed as an endless continuous shape (closed shape) (see FIG. 114 (a)).

  Therefore, a path for foreign matter such as a wire to enter the inside of the substrate box A100 can be blocked (divided) by the standing walls A280 and A290. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 reaches the printed circuit board A119, the outward movement is restricted from the space surrounded by the standing walls A280 and A290 and the lower wall part A203. Can do. Thereby, it can suppress that fraud is added to main controller A110 (printed circuit board A119).

  Further, the standing walls A280 and A290 are formed so as to surround the switch device A120 and the key device A130 together with the lower wall portion A203, so that the standing walls A280 and A290 are erected (function as ribs). Not only can the rigidity of the operation wall portion A210 be improved, but also the direction of the external force applied to the operation portion A122 or the key A140 (that is, the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R can be changed). Even if an external force in any direction within the plane including the surface acts), the function as the support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be surely exhibited. As a result, the deformation of the box cover A200 (in particular, the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270) can be suppressed, and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  The first upright wall A291 is arranged in a posture that is orthogonal to the key A140 in the off position and parallel to the key A140 in the on position, and the second upright wall A292 and the second upright wall A292. The three standing walls A293 are arranged in a posture that is orthogonal to the key A140 in the on position and parallel to the key A140 in the off position. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall part A210 and the covering part A270 can be efficiently exhibited on the standing wall A290.

  That is, when the external force in the direction of the arrow U, D or the direction of the arrow L, R among the external forces in the direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U, D and the arrows L, R is applied to the key A140, the standing wall While the load received by A290 (the load resistance that the standing wall A290 should exhibit as a support portion) is maximized, an external force in a direction inclined by a predetermined angle with the directions of arrows U and D or arrows L and R is applied. In this case, there is a high possibility that the key A140 is rotated due to the inclination of the acting direction of the external force, and the load received by the standing wall A290 (the standing wall A290 exhibits as a support portion as much as the external force escapes by the rotation). The load capacity) should be low. As a result, by setting the posture of the standing wall A290 to the above-described arrangement, the standing wall A290 can efficiently function as a support portion (deformation suppressing means) that supports the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270. be able to.

  Since the standing walls A280, A290 (second standing walls A282, A292 and third standing walls A283, A293) are connected to the lower wall portion A203, the standing wall is utilized by utilizing the rigidity of the box cover A200. The rigidity of A280 and A290 can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire box cover A200 can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces of the operation wall part A210 and the lower wall part A203 via the standing walls A280 and A290. Therefore, the function of the standing walls A280 and A290 as the support portions (deformation suppressing means) that support the operation wall portion A210 and the covering portion A270 can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the box cover A200 can be suppressed.

  In the printed board A119, the surface on which the electronic components are connected by solder is the surface facing the box base A300 (the surface opposite to the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are mounted), and the standing wall A280. , A290 and the seating surface A206 of the lower wall portion A203 are in contact with the regions AS1 and AS2 (see FIG. 114 (a)), no electronic components are mounted or circuits are formed. , AS2 is formed as a flat surface.

  Therefore, the standing front end surfaces (the surfaces on the arrow B direction side) of the standing walls A280 and A290 are easily brought into close contact with the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the printed circuit board A119, and the standing walls A280 and A290 It can suppress that a clearance gap is formed between printed circuit boards A119. Therefore, the standing walls A280 and A290 can be surely functioned as walls against which the tips of foreign matters such as wires inserted from the openings A250 and A260 come into contact.

  The first standing walls A281, A291, the second standing walls A282, A292, and the third standing walls A283, A293 in the standing walls A280, A290 are formed with tapered surfaces A280a, A290a, so that the standing tips The area of the surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) is reduced (see FIGS. 117 and 118). As a result, the surface pressure at the standing tip surface abutted against the printed circuit board A119 is increased, and the insertion of foreign matters such as wires from between the printed circuit board A119 and the standing walls A280 and A290 can be suppressed.

  In this case, since the taper surfaces A280a and A290a are formed on the inner surfaces (surfaces facing the switch device A120 and the key device A130) of the standing walls A280 and A290, the moldability is improved. Meanwhile, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the substrate box A100.

  That is, the shape of the standing walls A280 and A290 is reduced by reducing the area of the standing tip surface by the inclined surfaces (tapered surfaces A280a and A290a) gradually approaching the outer surface side toward the standing tip side (arrow B direction). The fluidity of the resin in the mold can be secured by making the change moderate. Therefore, moldability can be improved.

  Further, when the standing end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 are brought into contact with the front surface of the printed circuit board A119, a groove having a substantially V-shaped cross section can be formed by the tapered surfaces A280a and A290a and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 ( 117 (a) and 117 (b)). Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the openings A250 and A260 can be moved (guided) along the above-described groove. In other words, it is difficult to pass between the standing front end surfaces of the standing walls A280 and A290 and the front surface of the printed circuit board A119. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of substrate box A100.

  A first ridge A211 and a second ridge A212 protrude from the front surface (outer surface, surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210. One end of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the base A271a or the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) (FIG. 115 (a) and FIG. 115 ( b)).

  Thereby, the 1st protrusion A211 and the 2nd protrusion A212 are functioned as a rib for improving rigidity, and the coating | coated part A270 can be supported by the 1st protrusion A211 and the 2nd protrusion A212. As a result, when the outer surface of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 comes into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion A270, the tilt of the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is further increased by utilizing the rigidity of the protrusions A211 and 222. While being able to suppress reliably, damage to coating | coated part A270 can be suppressed.

  Further, on the front surface (outer surface, the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210, the display portion is located at a position (on the extension line of the other end) adjacent to the other ends of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. ("ON" and "OFF") are formed respectively. Thereby, the function as an instruction line for pointing to the position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display unit can be shared by the first and second protrusions A211 and A212. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, the position where one end of the first protrusion A211 is connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the covering portion A270 (the protrusion A271b of the peripheral wall portion A271) is the end surface of the key A140 in the off position (the surface gripped by the finger). The same phase position (position facing the end surface of the key A140) as that of the narrow surface along the outer edge (see FIG. 115 (a)), and one end of the second protrusion A212 is the covering portion A270 (the peripheral wall portion A271). The position connected to the outer peripheral surface (outer surface) of the base A271a) is the same phase position as the end surface of the key A140 in the ON position (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  Accordingly, an external force acts on the key A140 in the off position, and the key A140 covers the end surface on the arrow U direction side (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) with the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272). ), The first protrusion A211 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (a)), and the ON position. When an external force acts on the key A140 in the position and the key A140 is tilted in a direction (arrow L direction) in which the end surface on the arrow L direction side is in contact with the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272), The second protrusion A212 is positioned on the extension line of the load input from the key A140 (see FIG. 115 (b)).

  As a result, when the key device A130 is tilted by the action of an external force, a portion where the load is input from the end surface of the key A140 (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger) (the end surface of the key A140 abuts). Portion) can be efficiently reinforced by the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212. As a result, damage to the covering portion A270 can be suppressed.

  It is to be noted that the external force in the direction opposite to that described above (the force that displaces key A140 in the direction of arrow D) acts on key A140 in the off position by second connection wall portion A230 (FIG. 115 (a )), The external force in the direction opposite to that described above (the force for displacing the key A140 in the direction of the arrow R) acts on the key A140 in the ON position can be suppressed by the first connection wall portion A220 (FIG. 115). (See (b)).

  That is, as will be described later, the operation wall A210 is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the other side (arrow U, D direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region) (arrow D, arrow D). The direction side) is open (no connection wall is formed). Further, the key device A130 is positioned on one side (the first connection wall portion A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region), and the key device A130 to the third portion. The distance to connection wall part A240 is enlarged.

  Therefore, since there is a space on the open side and a space on the third connection wall portion A240 side, the operator's hand and other configurations on the space side collide with the key A140, and the key A140 is moved to the arrow D. An external force that is displaced in the direction or the direction of the arrow L is easily applied. Therefore, by forming the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 on the side that suppresses tilting of the key device A130 with respect to such external force (receiving side), it is possible to reduce material costs and ensure rigidity. Can be done efficiently.

  As described above, the square portion A272b of the end wall portion A272 is disposed in two places whose phases are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees, and is formed in a substantially triangular shape when viewed from the front (viewed in the direction of arrow B). In this case, the lengths of the two sides (outer edge, the edge forming the opening A260) in the triangular shape of the square portion A272b are set to different values (that is, the front view shape is formed as an unequal triangular shape).

  Specifically, the square portion A272b on the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220 with respect to the key A140 in the off position is a side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140. The rectangular portion A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall portion A220 (opposite side across the key A140) than the key A140 in the off position is longer (larger) than the key A140 in the off position. The length dimension of the side (outer edge) facing the side is shortened (decreased) (see FIG. 115A).

  Therefore, in other words, the rectangular portion A272b on the side close to the first connection wall portion A220 is the length dimension of the side (outer edge) on the side facing the gripping surface (the surface gripped by the finger) of the key A140 in the on position. Is shortened (smaller), and the rectangular part A272b on the side farther from the first connection wall part A220 has a longer (larger) length dimension on the side (outer edge) facing the gripping surface of the key A140 in the ON position. (See FIG. 115 (b)).

  As described above, the presence of the space on the open side and the space on the third connection wall A240 side causes the operator's hand and other configurations on the space side to collide with the key A140, and the key A140. Where an external force that causes displacement in the direction of arrow D or arrow L is likely to be applied, according to the square portion A272b in this embodiment, the side on the side that receives the key A140 to which the external force in the direction of arrow D or arrow F is applied Since the length of the (outer edge) is increased, the rigidity of the square portion A272b can be efficiently increased, and the tilt of the key A140 (key device A130) can be reliably suppressed. Further, the surface pressure can be suppressed, and the breakage of the square portion A272b can be suppressed.

  An outer surface on the front side (surface in the direction of arrow F) of the substrate box A100 is a first region formed by the front wall portion A201 and an operation wall that is located closer to the main controller A110 than the first region. The openings A250 and A260 are formed in the second region.

  Accordingly, the openings A250 and A260 are disposed at positions recessed from the outer surface of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200) (the first region formed by the front wall portion A201), and the first region and the second region are connected. Steps (first connection wall part A220, second connection wall part A230, and third connection wall part A240) to be arranged can be arranged around the openings A250 and A260. Thereby, compared with the case where opening A250, A260 is formed in front wall part A201 (1st field), while being able to carry out fraud, the distance to opening A250, A260 can be made long, and It is difficult to visually recognize the openings A250 and A260, and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire into the opening A260.

  Here, considering the heat radiation from the main controller A110, the board box A100 is a distance between the main controller A110 (for example, a distance between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200 (internal space). )) Must be secured. On the other hand, if the openings A250 and A260 are too far from the switch device A120 and the key device A130, the operability is deteriorated.

  In this case, the openings A250 and A260 are formed in the operation wall portion A210 (second region), so that the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily secured, and as described above, the openings A250, It can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted into the inside of substrate box A100 from A260. However, when the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is operated, the steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) that connect the first region and the second region work. The operator's (operator's) hands interfere and interfere with the operation. For this reason, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is deteriorated.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined (downwardly inclined) in a direction approaching the main control device A110 as it goes from the front wall portion A201 to the operation wall portion A210. Thus, the space on the front side (arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 can be expanded by the amount of such inclination (the space on the front side of the first connection wall portion A220). As a result, the operability when operating the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a length dimension along one direction (arrows L and R) in the front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B) and the other direction (arrows U and D) orthogonal to the one direction. It is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular shape (horizontal rectangle) in front view larger than the length dimension along the direction (see FIGS. 115A and 115B).

  The key device A130 is arranged so that the posture of the key A140 in the off position is the posture along the other direction (arrow U, D direction) described above (see FIG. 115 (a)). That is, the key A140 in the off position has the surface to be gripped by the finger facing the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the key A140 in the front view (viewed in the arrow B direction). Is a posture along the short direction (arrow U, D direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  Thereby, a space can be secured on the side (the right side and the left side in FIG. 115 (a)) where the surface to be gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position is desired. Therefore, when the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 or pulled out from the key device A130, a finger (for example, thumb and index finger) holding the key A140 connects the first region and the second region (first connection wall). Interference with the part A220, the second connection wall part A230, and the third connection wall part A240) can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  In this case, the key device A130 is located on one side (the first connecting wall A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). As described above, since the first connection wall portion A220 is formed to be inclined downward, when the key A140 is gripped with a finger and operated (rotated from the off position to the on position or vice versa), the key A140 is It can suppress that the finger different from the finger to hold | grips interferes in the level | step difference (1st connection wall part A220, 2nd connection wall part A230, and 3rd connection wall part A240) which connects a 1st area | region and a 2nd area | region. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  For example, when gripping the key A140 in the off position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger or the ring finger can be arranged using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220, and from the off position to the on position. When operating (rotating) the heel key A140, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space secured by the downward inclination of the first connection wall portion A220.

  When holding the key A140 in the ON position with the index finger and thumb, the little finger and the ring finger are formed with the operation wall portion A210 (second region) in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the key device A130 is operated. Arranged using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by being positioned on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction of the wall portion A210 (second region). When the key A140 is operated (rotated) from the off position to the on position, the little finger or ring finger can be displaced (moved) using the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) described above. it can.

  In the switch device A120, the position of the protruding tip surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation portion A122 in the initial position (the height of standing from the operation wall portion A210) is such that the covering portion A270 protrudes. It is set to a position (small size) lower than the position (the height of standing from the operation wall A210) of the front end surface (the front surface of the end wall A272, the surface on the arrow F direction side). Therefore, it is possible to suppress interference between the operation unit A122 and the finger when operating the key A140.

  The operation wall portion A210 (second region) includes connection surfaces (first connection wall portion A220 and third connection wall on both sides of the longitudinal side in the arrow L direction) and the other side (in the arrow R direction side 9). Part A240) is formed, and a connection surface (second connection wall part A230) is formed on one side in the short direction (arrow U direction side), while on the other side in the short direction (arrow D direction side). The connection surface is not formed.

  Thereby, the other side (arrow D direction side) of the transversal direction in operation wall part A210 (2nd area | region) can be open | released. That is, the opening allows the space on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) to communicate with the external space. Therefore, when holding the key A140 with a finger and performing an operation (insertion into the key device A130, extraction from the key device A130, rotation from the off position to the on position, or vice versa), the key A140 is Use the space (external space) communicated to the above-mentioned opening as a space for placing and moving (moving) a finger (little finger or ring finger) different from the gripped finger (for example, thumb and index finger). Can do. As a result, the operability when operating the key device A130 can be improved.

  Here, as described above, the board box A100 has a distance (for example, between the front surface of the printed circuit board A119 and the inner surface of the box cover A200) in consideration of heat radiation from the main controller A110. (Distance (internal space)).

  In this case, steps (first connection wall portion A220, second connection wall portion A230, and third connection wall portion A240) connecting the front wall portion A201 (first region) and the operation wall portion A210 (second region). The first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, while the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are composed of the front wall portion A201 (first region) and It is formed in a form substantially orthogonal to the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  That is, by tilting the first connection wall portion A220 downward, the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240 are connected to each other while suppressing interference with fingers and improving the operability of the key device A130. By making it non-inclined (by making only the first connecting wall portion A220 to be inclined downward), the volume of the internal space of the substrate box A100 for accommodating heat radiation from the main controller A110 can be secured.

  In this way, even when only the first connection wall portion A220 is inclined downward and the others (the second connection wall portion A230 and the third connection wall portion A240) are not inclined, the interference with the fingers could be suppressed. The operation wall portion A210 (second region) has a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and one side from the longitudinal center of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (the first connection wall portion A220 side) ) By adopting a configuration in which the key device A130 is arranged close to.

  The third connection wall portion A240 is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (the side opposite to the first connection wall portion A220). The switch device A120 and the key device A130 (key A140) can be protected. For example, it is possible to prevent the robot arm that handles the substrate box A100 from colliding with the switch device A120 or the key device A130 during manufacturing.

  120 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10, and shows a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. In FIG. 120, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, illustration of a part of the configuration (for example, various electrical connection lines connected to the main controller A110) is omitted. Only the main components are labeled.

  As shown in FIG. 120, as described above, in the pachinko machine A10, hinges 18 (rotating shafts) for supporting the inner frame 12 on the outer frame 11 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front. The inner frame 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable to the front front side, with the side provided with the opening / closing axis.

  Here, when the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as an opening / closing axis, the release angle can be made sufficiently large (for example, approximately 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 120). In the case where the opening angle can be secured), the operator stands at a position facing the front of the substrate box A100, so that the switch device A120 and the key device are as described above (the procedure described in FIGS. 115 to 119). A130 can be operated, and its operability can be secured.

  On the other hand, when the release angle cannot be made sufficiently large (for example, the opening angle can be secured only about 45 degrees, and the outer frame 11 and the inner frame are brought into the space formed on the back side of the inner frame 12 by the opening. 12), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is ensured even when it is necessary to operate the key device A130.

  That is, the substrate box A100 has a direction in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) (for example, the directions of arrows R and L in FIG. 115A) is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft). And the short direction (the direction of arrows U and D in FIG. 115 (a)) is directed to the direction substantially parallel to the axial direction of the hinge 18 (rotating shaft), and one side in the longitudinal direction (the arrow on FIG. 115 (a)). (L direction side) is arranged in a posture to be positioned on the hinge 18 side. Therefore, the first connection wall portion A220 is disposed on the side closer to the hinge 18 than the key device A130, and the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the hinge 18 than the key device A130.

  Thereby, when the hand is inserted from the space between the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 to the back surface of the inner frame 12 (front surface of the substrate box A100) at the same height position as the operation wall portion A210 (second region), A space between the key device A130 and the third connection wall portion A240 (ie, the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) is formed in a rectangular shape that is horizontally long when viewed from the front, and the palm near the thumb and the base of the thumb. The space on the other side in the longitudinal direction (arrow R direction side) secured on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 by positioning A130 on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region)) Can be placed using

  With this arrangement, the switch device A120 can be operated (pressed) with the thumb or index finger on the operation unit A122, and the key device A130 can be rotated when the key A140 is rotated. As a space for displacing (moving) the thumb and index finger holding the key A140, a space secured by tilting the first connection wall portion A220 downward can be used. As a result, the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be ensured.

  Note that the above-described setting change (operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130) may be performed while the substrate box A100 is rotated from the state illustrated in FIG. 120 around the rotation axis A410. Since the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be positioned on the front side (the front side of the outer frame 11), the operability of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be improved.

  In a state where the inner frame 12 is opened to the front side with the hinge 18 as an opening / closing axis, the substrate box A100 is further opened to the front side (front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as an opening / closing axis. Also good. Accordingly, the operator can stand at a position facing the front of the substrate box A100 at a position where the operator does not interfere with the outer frame 11, and the switch device A120 or the like in the above-described manner (the manner described in FIGS. 115 to 119). The key device A130 can be operated, and its operability can be ensured.

  In this case, the main control device A110 (input / output port 205) is connected to various devices (power supply device 115, payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first through the openings AOP1 to AOP8. 1 symbol display device 37, 2nd symbol display device 83, 2nd symbol hold lamp 84, refer to FIG. 4), the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line is connected to one end.

  Here, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed regardless of the connection state of these electrical connection lines to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be easily operated illegally. On the other hand, if the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is uniformly prohibited regardless of the connection state of the plurality of electrical connection lines, the work (setting change) associated with the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 There is a risk of deteriorating sex.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, whether or not the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line with the main control device A110. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, at least the other end (connector) of the electrical connection line whose one end is connected to the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 among the plurality of electrical connection lines is the main control device A110. As long as it is connected to (input / output port 205), regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected, released, or connected and released together) ), The operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed. As a result, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

  That is, if a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is not connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120 and the key device A130. Therefore, the operation of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be prevented from being illegally operated.

  On the other hand, when a predetermined electrical connection line (electrical connection line connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is secured to the main control device A110, and fraud can be suppressed. Is connected to the main controller A110 with other electrical connection lines (dispensing control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display device 83, and second symbol hold lamp 84). Even if the electrical connection line) is released (unplugged) from the main control device A110, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed to improve workability (ensure versatility). ).

  That is, when the main control device A110 is opened to the front front side (front side in FIG. 120) with the rotation axis A410 as an opening / closing axis, the main control device A110 is rotated (main control is performed on the electrical connection line). It is necessary to release (remove) the electrical connection line so that the rotation of the device A110 is not restricted.

  Therefore, if all the electrical connection lines are not connected to the main control device A110, the main control device A110 is placed at a predetermined position (switch device) in a configuration in which the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line released (removed) from the main control device A110 to the main control device A110 after being rotated to a position where the operation of the A120 and the key device A130 can be easily performed.

  In particular, when the main controller A110 is separated from the back surface of the inner frame 12 due to displacement (rotation) and the length of the electrical connection line is insufficient, it is released (removed) with an extension line interposed. It is necessary to reconnect the electrical connection line to the main control device A110, which increases labor.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, if predetermined electrical connection lines (electrical connection lines connecting the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) are connected to the main control device A110, Since the operation (change of setting) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is allowed, other electrical connection lines (dispensing control device 111, various switches 208, solenoid 209, first symbol display device 37, second symbol display) It is possible to eliminate the need to reconnect (reconnect) the device 83 and the second symbol holding lamp 84 to the main control device A110 via an extension line.

  As a result, the main control device A110 can be arranged at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be easily operated, and the workability associated with the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is reduced. Can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, a substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the entire back surface of the end surface wall portion A272 is formed as a flat surface has been described. However, the end surface wall portion A2272 in the eighth embodiment is provided with a protrusion A2273 from the back surface. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 121A is a partially enlarged rear view of the substrate box A2100 in the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 121B is a partially enlarged sectional view of the substrate box A2100 taken along the cutting line CXXIb-CXXIb of FIG. 121A. It is.

  FIG. 121 (a) corresponds to FIG. 110 (b). Further, in FIG. 121 (b), only a portion viewed in cross-section is shown in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  As shown in FIG. 121, a protrusion A2273 protrudes from the rear surface (the inner surface, the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end surface wall portion A2272 of the covering portion A2270 of the eighth embodiment. The protrusion A2273 is a portion (protrusion) extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular cross-sectional shape, and the outer edge of the end surface wall part A2272 (the tip in the overhanging direction protruding radially inward from the peripheral wall part A271) (Side edge) in a predetermined range.

  Specifically, the range in which the protrusion A2273 is formed is a position facing (opposite) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) in the main body A133 of the key device A130 and a range (position) along the outer edge of the square portion A272b. The range between the position AP1 and the position AP3 including the AP2, and the range between the position AP4 and the position AP6 including the position AP5) and one side (inward in the radial direction from the peripheral wall portion A271) with the square portion A272b interposed therebetween. And a range along the inner edge of the annular portion A272a (a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4), and in this range (a range between the position AP1 and the position AP6) It is formed continuously.

  The projecting dimension from the back surface of the end face wall part A2272 (annular part A272a and square part A272b) of the ridge A2273 is set to a constant value in a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4, and from the position AP3 to the position AP2. The value is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes to, and gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP2 to the position AP1, and the position AP2 is set to the same value as the position AP3. Similarly, the projecting dimension is gradually changed to a larger value as it goes from the position AP4 to the position AP5, and gradually changed to a smaller value as it goes from the position AP5 to the position AP6. The position AP6 has the same value as the position AP4. Is set. Further, the position AP2 and the position AP5 are set to the same value (projecting dimension).

  As described above, the protrusion A2273 protrudes from the end surface wall portion A2272, so that the rigidity of the end surface wall portion A2272 can be increased. Therefore, a force in a direction perpendicular to the insertion direction (direction parallel to the plane including the arrows U and D and the arrows L and R) is applied to the key A140 inserted into the key device A130, and the key device A130 is tilted. When the key A140 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the end surface wall portion A2272, the end surface wall portion A2272 can be prevented from being damaged.

  Since the protrusion A2273 is formed at a position facing (opposite) the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, the back surface of the end wall portion A2272 and the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133) are formed. ) Can be reduced, and foreign matter such as wire can be prevented from being inserted into the substrate box A2100 through the gap.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the protrusion A2273 has a protruding dimension in a range between the position AP3 and the position AP4 so that the back surface of the end surface wall portion A2272 and the front surface of the end portion A133c of the main body A133 of the key device A130. It is set to a value approximately equal to the facing interval between them. Therefore, the projecting tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is brought into contact with the front surface of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130.

  This eliminates a gap between the back surface of the end wall A2272 and the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133), and a foreign substance such as a wire is inserted into the board box A2100 through the gap. Can be suppressed.

  In particular, at the positions AP2 and AP5, since the protruding dimension of the protrusion A2273 is set to a large value, the elastic deformation of the square part A272b formed as a plate shape (cantilever) in which the outer edge side is free is used. Thus, the protrusion A2273 in the range from the position AP1 to the position AP3 and in the range from the position AP4 to the position AP6 can be firmly attached to the front surface of the key device A130 (end A133c of the main body A133). Thereby, it can suppress more reliably that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of the board | substrate box A2100 from the clearance gap between the back surface of end surface wall part A2272 and the front surface of key apparatus A130 (end part A133c of main body A133). .

  Further, in this way, the protruding tip (arrow B direction side) of the protrusion A2273 is in contact with the front surface of the end A133c (see FIG. 113) of the main body A133 of the key device A130, so that the key device A130. Even when the end surface wall portion A2272 is accidentally pushed in the insertion direction by the key A140 when the key A140 is inserted into the key A140, the end surface wall portion A2272 can be prevented from being deformed in the insertion direction. Therefore, it can suppress that the base end side (side connected with peripheral wall part A271) of end surface wall part A2272 is damaged.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a substrate box A3100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are arranged on the side closer to the rotation axis A410 (the arrow R direction side) than the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the substrate box A100 (box cover A200). In the ninth embodiment, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are disposed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A3100 (box cover A3200). In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 122 (a) is a front view of a substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment, and FIG. 122 (b) is a schematic front view of a pachinko machine A3010. FIG. 122B shows a state in which the substrate box A3100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range). Further, in FIG. 122 (b), only a main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the board box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is different from the board box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the formation position of the operation wall part A210 and the opening A260 (covering part A270, key in the operation wall part A210). The arrangement of the device A130) and the opening A250 (the guide wall A251, the switch device A120) are different, but the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 122, the substrate box A3100 in the ninth embodiment is formed on the side (arrow L direction side) where the operation wall portion A210 is farther from the rotation axis A410 than the longitudinal center of the box cover A3200. Three sides of the working wall portion A210 are connected to the front wall portion A201 by the first connection wall portion A220, the second connection wall portion A230, and the third connection wall portion A240.

  An opening AOP1, an opening A260 (covering portion A270), and an opening A250 (guide wall A251) are formed in the operation wall A210, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated through the openings A250 and A260. Is done.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the switch device A120 is disposed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (the side closer to the first connection wall portion A220, the arrow L direction side). That is, the arrangement is the reverse of the arrangement in the seventh embodiment.

  Here, the substrate box A3100 is disposed at the first position (during game) where the movable range (rotatable range) when rotated about the rotation axis A410 is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. Position (refer to FIG. 120) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12, and a second position in which the front of the box cover A3200 (operation wall portion A210) faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010 ( That is, it is set to a range of approximately 180 ° up to a position facing the same side as the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 122B).

  Accordingly, the board box A3100 is arranged (displaced) at a position where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be operated while visually recognizing information (for example, information on setting change, setting value) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. )be able to. As a result, since it can be operated while confirming the display (information), it is possible to easily grasp the operation states of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 based on the display (information). As a result, operability can be improved and operation errors can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the state where the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are not operated, the pachinko machine A3010 (inner frame 12) can be placed on the back side (that is, the position hardly visible from the outside, see FIG. 120). (The switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated) can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 are in the same direction (arrows). The substrate box A3100 can be displaced (rotated) to a position where a desired posture (B direction) (a posture in which both surfaces are substantially parallel in this embodiment) is obtained. In addition, it is preferable that the angle which the front surface of operation wall part A210 and the display surface of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 make is set in the range of about 0 degree to about 45 degrees.

  That is, the board is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the board box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. Box A3100 can be displaced (rotated). As a result, in order to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while visually recognizing the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to eliminate the necessity of taking an unreasonable posture such as turning the hand around the back side of the pachinko machine A3010. .

  As a result, it is easier to operate the switch device A120 and the key device A130 while confirming information displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (for example, information related to setting change), improving operability and operating errors. Can be more reliably achieved.

  Further, as described above, the operation wall portion A210 is formed on the side farther from the rotation axis A410 than the center in the longitudinal direction of the box cover A3200 (arrow L direction side), and the switch device A120 and the key are provided on the operation wall portion A210. Apparatus A130 is provided.

  As a result, the substrate is placed at a position where the surface on which the switch device A120 and the key device A130 of the substrate box A3100 are disposed (the front surface of the operation wall portion A210) and the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 can be simultaneously viewed. With the box A3100 displaced (rotated) (see FIG. 122 (b)), the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are positioned farther from the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12) (right side in FIG. 122 (b)). Can be placed. Therefore, it can suppress that the finger which operates switch apparatus A120 (operation part A122) and key apparatus A130 (key A140) interferes with the outer edge of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Here, in the setting change mode, it is necessary to repeatedly perform the pushing operation of the switch device A120 (operation unit A122), and the operation frequency of the switch device A120 is higher than that of the key device A130.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the switch device A120 having a higher operation frequency than the key device A130 is located farther from the rotation axis A410 than the key device A130 (that is, closer to the first connection wall portion A220). Arranged. Thereby, switch device A120 with high operation frequency can be arrange | positioned in the position (FIG. 122 (b) right side) farther from the outer edge of pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). Therefore, it can suppress more reliably that the finger which operates switch apparatus A120 (operation part A122) interferes with the outer edge of pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). As a result, operability can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the switch device A120 is disposed adjacent to the first connection wall portion A220, the space formed by the inclination of the first connection wall portion A220 is also used when the switch device A120 (operation portion A122) is operated. It can be used as a space (a space for avoiding interference between fingers and the box cover A3200). As a result, operability can be improved from this point.

  Here, in the pachinko machine A3010 in the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 reaches the second position described above (a position where the front of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, see FIG. 122B). When displaced (rotated), the substrate box A3100 is engaged, and displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is restricted (that is, the substrate box A3100 is fixed at the second position). ) Is provided. Accordingly, when the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are operated, it is not necessary to hold the substrate box A3100 by hand, so that the operability can be improved.

  Note that the restricting means uses a magnetic force (attraction force) of the magnet to fix (hold) the substrate box A3100 at the second position (the force exceeding the attraction force is applied, so that the first Displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the position is permitted), and includes a protruding member that is disposed at the protruding position by the elastic recovery force of the elastically deformed biasing means (for example, a coil spring), and is disposed at the protruding position. The projected member engaged with the substrate box A3100 disposed at the second position and restricting displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 (biasing means from the projected position) When the projecting member is immersed against the urging force, displacement (rotation) in the direction toward the first position of the substrate box A3100 is permitted.

  Next, a substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventh embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A410 of the substrate box A100 is arranged in a posture along the vertical direction (arrow U, D direction) of the pachinko machine A10 has been described, but the rotation axis A4410 in the tenth embodiment is It arrange | positions with the attitude | position in alignment with the width direction (left-right direction, arrow L, R direction) of pachinko machine A4010. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 123A is a front view of the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment, and FIG. 123B is a schematic front view of the pachinko machine A4010. FIG. 123B shows a state in which the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the maximum movable position (second position) in the movable range (rotatable range), and is displaced to the first position. A (rotated) substrate box A4100 is illustrated in broken lines. Further, in FIG. 123 (b), only a main configuration is schematically illustrated in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding.

  Here, the substrate box A4100 in the tenth embodiment differs from the substrate box A100 in the seventh embodiment in the arrangement (arrangement position and orientation) and the number of arrangement of the rotation axis A4410, but the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the description thereof is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 123, the substrate box A4100 according to the tenth embodiment includes a pair of rotating shafts A4410 that project from the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 in directions away from each other. The pair of rotation shafts A4410 is located on one side of the substrate box A4100 in the short direction (arrow U, D direction) (on the side opposite to the operation wall portion A210, arrow U direction), and in the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100 (arrow (L, R direction) formed so as to project outward from both ends along the longitudinal direction of the substrate box A4100. Further, the pair of rotation axes A4410 are arranged on the same axis.

  Here, the substrate box A4100 is disposed at a first position (during game) where the movable range (rotatable range) when rotated about the rotation axis A4410 is disposed on the back side of the inner frame 12. Position (a position indicated by a broken line in FIG. 123 (b)) is displaced (rotated) in a direction away from the back surface of the inner frame 12 (arrow B direction), and the front of the box cover 4200 (operation wall portion A210) is vertical. It is set within a range of approximately 90 ° up to a second position facing upward (in the direction of arrow U) (that is, the position where the board box A4100 protrudes most to the back side of the inner frame 12, see FIG. 123 (b)). .

  Accordingly, in the second position, the operation wall portion A210 can be directed upward, and the release side (the side opposite to the second connection wall portion A230) can be directed to the side where the operator is present. In addition, the operability of the key device A130 can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the first position, the front surface of the operation wall portion A <b> 210 can face the back surface of another component arranged on the inner frame 12. Therefore, the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be faced with different parts, and the switch device A120 and the key device A130 can be arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate. As a result, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized operation (the switch device A120 and the key device A130 are illegally operated).

  In the present embodiment, in a state where the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130, even if the board box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the key A140 is applied to another member of the inner frame 12. By being in contact with each other, the substrate box A4100 is formed so as not to be placed at the first position. Thereby, forgetting to remove the key A140 can be suppressed. Therefore, unauthorized acquisition of the key A140 forgotten to be removed can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the second position of the board box A4100 is located below the first position in the direction of gravity (vertical direction), and thus the key A140 is inserted into the key device A130 as described above. In the state where the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) toward the first position, the substrate box A4100 can be displaced (rotated) to the second position by its own weight. Therefore, it can be made easy for an operator to recognize that the substrate box A4100 is in a state in which it cannot be placed at the first position.

  Note that the separate member is such that, in a state where the substrate box A4100 is displaced (rotated) to the first position, a part of the separate member is located on the front side of the operation wall portion A210 rather than the front wall portion A201 of the box cover 4200. It is preferable to have a shape that penetrates. Thereby, the space formed in the front side of operation wall part A210 can be made small, and it can suppress that switch apparatus A120 and key apparatus A130 are operated illegally.

  The eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 143. In the first embodiment, the case where the variable winning device 65 arranged in the gaming area is opened in the special gaming state, and there is one winning port (specific winning port 65) that makes it easy for the gaming ball to enter has been described. However, in the variable winning device B1000 of the eleventh embodiment, a plurality of winning holes are provided to facilitate the entry of game balls in the special gaming state. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board 13 in the eleventh embodiment. A ball ball game is performed when a ball (hereinafter also referred to as a game ball or a pachinko ball) flows down in front of the game board 13.

  The game board 13 includes a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, a general winning port 63, a first winning port 64, and a second winning prize. The port 640, the variable winning device B1000 normal winning port (through gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

  The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device B1000, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a band-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the band-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed in front of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin-made arc member 70 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 124) to prevent a situation in which a ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once returns to the ball guide passage again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere, and the ball launched at a predetermined momentum or more hits the return rubber 69 and gains momentum. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated. A resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. The plate 60 is driven and fixed.

  Hereinafter, the lottery based on winning will be described in detail. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, winnings to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 (something for the player (for example, paying out a winning ball, performing lottery, and shifting to a more advantageous state). The special symbol (1st symbol) is drawn in the event that there is a winning ball) that can be expected to be granted), and the normal symbol (2nd symbol) when the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 The lottery will be held. In the special symbol lottery performed for the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, it is determined whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and the special symbol big hit is determined. In that case, the jackpot type is also determined.

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, for example, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of 1/320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also referred to as the probability variation state of the special symbol), For example, a special symbol jackpot is determined with a probability of 1/60. For convenience of explanation, the special symbol lottery performed for the entrance to the first winning slot 64 is referred to as “special symbol 1 lottery”, and the special symbol lottery performed for the second winning entrance 640 is performed. The symbol lottery is referred to as “special symbol 2 lottery”.

  When the special symbol is a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special game state, and the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 that is normally closed is until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds elapses). Alternatively, the operation of releasing 10 balls (until a prescribed number) is repeated a maximum of 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large amount of balls are awarded to the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002, so that a larger amount of winning balls are paid out than usual. It should be noted that the payout of prize balls and the number of payouts will be described later in connection with the entry into the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002.

  Note that there are six types of special symbol jackpot types: “jackpot A”, “jackpot B”, “jackpot C”, “jackpot a”, “jackpot b”, and “jackpot c”. Although details will be described later, the opening patterns of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are different depending on the jackpot type.

  When the special symbol (the first symbol) is drawn, the special symbol variation display is started on the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery result A special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is a maximum of 4 for each type of winning port. The number of balls held is shown by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls for the first winning port 64 (the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1) or the number of reserved balls for the second winning port 640 (special symbol 2) If the number of reserved balls) remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is started. When both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is preferentially executed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when both the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol 2 remain, the lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 2 is preferentially executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the lottery may be preferentially executed in the special symbol acquisition order (the order of entering the balls), or the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 may be alternately executed. Alternatively, the lottery may be executed for the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 at the same time.

  In the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol), whether or not the normal symbol is hit is determined. When the normal symbol is hit, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball easily enters the second winning opening 640. become. That is, when a normal symbol is hit, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640, and as a result, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, when the normal symbol (the second symbol) is drawn, the normal symbol variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 30 seconds) has elapsed, A normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the normal winning opening 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passes is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37. At the same time, the second symbol holding lamp 84 is also shown. When the variable display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal winning opening 67 remains, the next normal symbol is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts. Is done.

  In this embodiment, as a value added after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special gaming state ends, and the special symbol lottery is After 100 times, it is configured to be set to the normal state.

  In this embodiment, when the probability change state of the special symbol is given after the special gaming state is finished, the probability change state of the special symbol is ended according to the number of times of the special symbol lottery. For example, after a jackpot game of a predetermined jackpot type (for example, jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot a to be described later), from the end of the jackpot to the next jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 May be shifted to a high probability state of a special symbol (during special symbol change). In this case, after the jackpot game of another jackpot type (for example, jackpot C, jackpot b, jackpot c, which will be described later), it may be configured to be in a short time state of a normal symbol until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. good.

  Note that the number of lotteries for special symbols to which the above-described special symbol probability variation state (high probability state) is given is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

  In addition, the number of lotteries for the special symbol that is in the short time state of the normal symbol described above is not limited to 100. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times.

  Here, the “high probability state of a special symbol” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability is changing (probability is changing), in other words, to the special gaming state. It is a game state that is easy to shift. The high probability state of the special symbol in this embodiment (during the probability change of the special symbol) includes a game state in which the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, the “special symbol low probability state” means a time when the special symbol is not being probable, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that during the special symbol probabilistic change.

  Also, “normal symbol time-short state (short time medium)” means a game state in which the probability of hitting the normal symbol increases and the ball easily wins the second winning slot 640. In addition, the “normal state” means a game state (a state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the normal symbol (second symbol) has been increased) that is neither a probability change of the special symbol nor a short time of the normal symbol.

  During the probabilistic change of the special symbol and the normal symbol time, not only does the probability of hitting the normal symbol increase, but the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is also changed to the normal state. A long time is set in comparison. When the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (open state, a state where the rotation tip moves to the right side with the lower end portion as an axis and assumes a tilted posture), the electric accessory 640a is closed (closed state) Compared to the case where the rotation tip is standing on the second winning opening 640 side (left side), the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time. That is, it becomes easy to draw a special symbol.

  In addition, in addition to changing the opening time, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction, You may comprise so that the frequency | count of open | release of the electrically-driven accessory 640a in the case of winning a normal symbol may be increased rather than a normal state.

  In addition, the probability of hitting the normal symbol (the second symbol) is not changed during the probability change of the special symbol or the normal symbol, the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is opened, and the electric It is good also as what changes at least one among the frequency | count of opening of the accessory 640a.

  In addition, during the change of probability of the special symbol or during the short time of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is released are not changed, and the normal symbol (first It may be configured that only the hit probability of (2 symbols) is increased compared to the normal state.

  A first symbol display provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, in the upper right part of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right part of FIG. 124). A device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

  The plurality of LEDs 37a are changed by indicating whether or not a special symbol lottery performed in accordance with a ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (starting winning) is being executed. A special symbol (the first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol after the end of variation, or a variation among the balls entered in the first winning opening 64. The number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), is indicated by a lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is being displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball has entered Is held for a maximum of 4 times for each type of winning opening, and the number of balls held is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, it is configured that the balls entered into the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of holding times is limited to four times. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds that are a big hit and an error display. Note that the LEDs 37a are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 (high probability states of special symbols) And normal symbols, etc.). In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, but if it is a big hit, the big hit type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, A special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to jackpot a, jackpot b, jackpot c) is shown.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area.

  The variable display device unit 80 uses the winnings (start winnings) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger to synchronize with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and to display the variable display of the third symbol. A 3rd symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter also simply referred to as “display device”) and an LED for variably displaying the 2nd symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of a normal winning opening (through gate) 67 A configured second symbol display device 83 and a second symbol hold lamp 84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball has passed through the normal winning opening 67 by a lighting state are provided. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that.

  In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the display of the gaming state accompanying the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the first symbol display thereof is performed. A decorative display corresponding to the display of the device 37 is performed. The display device is not limited to a device including a liquid crystal display. For example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

  In the present embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols with numbers “0” to “9”. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) described later is a big hit, the variable display (the same main symbol) that the same main symbol is aligned. (Variable display that finally stops in a state in which all of them are arranged) is performed, and after the variable display is finished, a jackpot is generated (the transition to the special gaming state is started). On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of place, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (variable display that finally stops in a state where they are not aligned) is performed.

  For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is “big hit B”, “big hit C”, “big hit b”, “big hit c”, even numbers “0, 2, 4, 6, 8” are added. A variable display with the main symbols aligned is performed. On the other hand, if “big hit A” or “big hit a”, any number among all the numbers “0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9” including an odd number is added. Fluctuation display in which main symbols to which are added is aligned is performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is off, the variable display in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned is performed.

  Next, a display (right-handed navigator) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and that prompts the user to launch a ball aiming at the right path (flow path) of the game board 13 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened when the special symbol is changed or the normal symbol is in a short-time state. By hitting (right-handed), it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640. In addition, as will be described in detail later, when a special symbol lottery (the lottery of special symbol 2) is performed based on the ball entering the second winning port 640, the first winning port 64 Compared to the case where a special symbol lottery (the special symbol 1 lottery) is performed based on the fact that a ball has entered, it is likely to be a big hit (big hit a) where the maximum profit can be obtained.

  Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to perform the right-handed hitting in the probability change state of the special symbol given after the end of the jackpot or the short time state of the normal symbol. In other words, even if the probable state of the special symbol or the short time state of the normal symbol is set, the ball cannot enter the second winning port 640 unless the player hits the right. The player will not be able to fully benefit from the certainty change state and the short time state of normal symbols.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the player can display a specific image (right-handed navigation) in the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state, thereby allowing the player to display the special symbol probability change state or the normal symbol time reduction state. It is configured to ensure that the benefits of becoming

  In right-handed navigation, the characters “Aim for the right !!” are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the characters. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, the player can be surely acquired the benefits of being in the special symbol probability changing state and the normal symbol time-saving state.

  Next, an example of a warning image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. This warning image is determined to be right-handed even though the player is not in a period when the player should hit (right-hand) a ball into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. It is an image (right-handed warning image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the case of More specifically, this message is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right stroke in a normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not changed or a normal symbol is in a short time state).

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to be less likely to be opened in a normal state (even if a right hand is made, it is difficult to make a ball enter the second winning opening 640). For this reason, if a right hand is made in a normal state, the chance of receiving a special symbol lottery is reduced as compared with the case where a ball is launched by aiming at the first winning port 64 by left-handed. That is, if a right strike is made in a normal state, it is difficult for the player to win a big hit, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, it is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from losing by displaying a right-handed warning image and urging left-handed.

  When it is determined that the player is making a right strike in the normal state, the characters “Warning” and “Left-handed play!” Are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, the player can be made aware that the player should not make a right stroke (should make a left stroke). In addition, the hall clerk can also easily determine whether or not there is a player who is executing an irregular game method of making a right turn in a normal state by checking the presence or absence of the right turn warning screen.

  In the present embodiment, as a method for determining whether or not a right hand is made, the ball enters the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) through which the ball can flow when the right hand is made. Judgment is based on whether or not

  In the present embodiment, the right-handed warning image is displayed when it is detected that a ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see FIG. 124) in the normal state. It is not limited to. For example, in a state other than the special game state (big win state), when it is detected that the ball has won (entered) the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002, an illegal game (right-handed game) In addition, for example, a game mode in which a load is applied to the variable winning device B1000 to open the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 and forcibly enter the game ball is also performed). A right-handed warning image may be displayed by discriminating. Thereby, the store clerk in the hall can easily determine the presence / absence of fraud simply by confirming the presence / absence of a right-handed warning image.

  In addition, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 in a state other than the special gaming state (big win state), the hall computer is illegal. You may comprise so that the signal which shows being performed may be output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraud and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 on which the fraud is being performed.

  Further, for example, by narrowing the right channel of the variable display device unit 80, a range in which a game ball must pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is disposed in the range. You may do it. In this case, it can be determined that the right hand is being made based on the passage of the game ball detected by the detection sensor.

  In addition, for example, a detection sensor capable of detecting the displacement of a movable member (for example, a windmill) disposed on the left side of the uppermost position (corresponding to the left-right center position in FIG. 124) of the variable display device unit 80 may be provided. good. In this case, when the game ball is being launched, it can be determined that the right strike is being performed based on the fact that the displacement of the movable member is not detected even after the expected operation timing.

  Next, a warning image displayed when it is detected that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000 will be described. Here, the abnormality of the variable winning device B1000 is exemplified by, for example, a case where a ball entering the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 is detected although it is not in a special game state (a big win state). Is done.

  When it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the variable winning device B1000, the word “Warning” is displayed large in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. In the lower part of the screen, the text “Please call a gate error agent” is displayed. With these characters, the player can determine that an error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10, and therefore can promptly request repairs or the like from a hall clerk or the like.

  The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol “◯” and a symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67. Fluctuation display in which the lights are alternately turned on for a predetermined time is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, a lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol “◯” after the second symbol variation is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 after the variation of the second symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is predetermined. It is configured to be activated (opened) only for a period of time.

  The time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol (variation time) is set to be shorter when the probability of the special symbol or the normal symbol is shorter than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, during the probability change of the special symbol and during the short time of the normal symbol, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be performed more than in the normal state. it can. Therefore, since the chance of winning a normal symbol increases, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric combination 640a of the second prize opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change of the special symbol and during the short time of the normal symbol.

  Note that the ball to the second prize opening 640 may be increased by other methods such as increasing the probability of hitting or increasing the opening time or the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a during the special symbol change or the normal symbol time reduction. When it is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, if the time required to display the fluctuation of the 2nd symbol is set shorter than that in the normal state during the probability change of the special symbol or in the normal symbol time, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is constant regardless of the gaming state Alternatively, the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a with respect to one normal symbol hit may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the balls flowing down to the right of the game board among the balls launched to the game board can pass therethrough. It is configured.

  The total number of passes through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 of the ball is reserved up to a total of four times, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 described above and also on the second symbol hold lamp 84. Lights up. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided corresponding to the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching on and off of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol. Alternatively, a part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls for passing the ball of the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). May be. Further, the number of assembling of the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to one, but may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not perform the lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37.

  Further, each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports (prize ball ports) through which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five. Further, the relationship of the number of prize balls may be reversed.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “○” is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, 640a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is higher during the probability change of a special symbol and the time of a normal symbol than in the normal state, and the time taken to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol is also short. In the display, the symbol “◯” is easily displayed. Therefore, the frequency | count that the electrically-driven accessory 640a will be in an open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the special symbol change and the normal symbol time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened also becomes longer than in the normal state.

  Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the change of probability of the special symbol and during the short time of the normal symbol as compared with the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory such as that provided in the second winning port 640, and the ball is in a state where the ball can always be won.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability of the big win (big hit A, big win a) that can obtain the maximum profit (out of pitch) as the type of big win selected when the big win is the probability that the ball wins the second winning opening 640 Is set higher than when the ball has won the first winning opening 64.

  During normal times, there are many cases where the electric prize accompanying the second prize opening 640 is in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize opening 640. Therefore, toward the first prize opening 64 without the electric prize, The ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lottery of lottery wins is obtained by winning the first winning opening 64, so that the big win The aim is more advantageous for the player.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol is being changed or the normal symbol is being shortened, by passing the ball through the normal winning opening (through gate) 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is easily opened, Since it is in a state where it is easy to win the second winning opening 640, the ball is fired toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and the normal winning is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to pass the mouth (through gate) 67 to open the electric accessory 640a and aim for a big hit by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device B1000 is arranged on the lower right side of the first winning port 64 (the lower left side of the second winning port 640), and a first specific winning port B1001 opened in the left-right direction at a substantially vertical center portion thereof. In addition, a second specific winning opening B1002 is provided.

  In the pachinko machine 10, if a special symbol lottery is performed due to winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640, after a predetermined time (variation time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be a stop symbol. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 that is normally closed wins a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds or 10 balls (specified number)). Until).

  The first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed when a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a larger amount of game value (game value) than usual (in this embodiment, 15 prize balls are paid out based on the winning of one ball.

  The game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 below the first winning port 64. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 640, B1001, B1002 are guided to the unillustrated ball discharge path through the out opening 66. A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  Specifically, the variable winning device B1000 includes a first guide plate B1300 that constitutes an open state in which a ball is guided to the first specific winning port B1001 by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, and a first guide plate B1300 that operates the first guide plate B1300. 1 solenoid B1410, a second guide plate B1500 that constitutes an open state in which the ball is guided to the second specific prize opening B1002 by sliding movement in the front-rear direction, and a second solenoid B1610 that operates the second guide plate B1500. I have.

  The first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are normally in a closed state where the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is driven to slide the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 in the front-rear direction, and the ball is the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific An open state in which the winning opening B1002 is easy to win is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

  Next, the variable winning device B1000 will be described. 125, 126 and 127 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B1000. 125 illustrates the closed state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, FIG. 126 illustrates the closed state of the first guide plate B1300 and the open state of the second guide plate B1500, and FIG. 127 illustrates the first guide plate B1300. The open state and the closed state of the second guide plate B1500 are shown.

  In FIGS. 125, 126, and 127, the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is shown transparent except for the outer shape, and the shape on the back side thereof is visually recognized in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding. Possible illustrated.

  The variable prize-winning device B1000 first identifies almost all of the spheres that have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface among the spheres flowing down to the right of the variable time device unit 80 by the player making a right strike. It is configured so that it can be guided to a range between the winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002.

  128 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 129 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B1000. The variable prize-winning device B1000 is formed of a horizontally-long rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side, and the base member B1100 is fastened and fixed to the base member B1100 from the front side. A covering member B1200, a first guide plate B1300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the base member B1100, a first drive device B1400 for driving the first guide plate B1300, and a base member B1100 The second guide plate B1500 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the first guide plate, the second drive device B1600 that drives the second guide plate B1500, and the base member B1100 are assembled from the back side, and the first guide plate B1300, the first driving device B1400, the second guide plate B1500, and the second driving device B1600 are configured to cover from the back side. Mainly it includes a cover member B 1700, the after being.

  The base member B1100 is formed into a shape of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 at a substantially central portion of the thin plate member B1110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board. A through-hole forming portion B1120 that is formed through (with a slightly larger shape), a pair of holding holes B1130 that are through-holes into which the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are inserted on the left and right sides of the through-hole forming portion B1120, and a thin plate On the front side of the member B1110, a plurality of projecting portions B1140 projecting to the front side toward the flow path of the sphere, a pair of discharge ports B1150 for discharging the sphere from the front side to the back side of the thin plate member B1110, and a pair Guide hole arranged on the thin plate member B1110 on the inner side in the left-right direction of the holding hole B1130 to guide the sphere from the front side to the back side 1160 mainly includes a detour path B1170 for guiding the ball which has passed through the guide opening B1160, a.

  The penetration forming portion B1120 functions as guide means for guiding both the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 at different timings, and also serves as a support hole for supporting the extended support portion B1212 of the covering member B1200. Function.

  The through-hole forming portion B1120 is formed as a left-right symmetric through-hole, and has a lower flat surface B1121 formed in a flat shape extending in a horizontally long linear shape, and is opposed to the lower flat surface B1121 in the vertical direction and toward the left and right center. A pair of left and right support protrusions B1123 projecting from the left and right ends to the left and right inside in a range between the lower surface B1121 and the ceiling surface B1122, A pair of left and right auxiliary projections B1124 projecting upward from the lower plane B1121 below the support projection B1123.

  The ceiling surface B1122 is a surface disposed opposite to the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 and the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500, and the inclination angle thereof is along the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521. It is formed. That is, it is formed so that the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane is 7 degrees and descends toward the left and right center side.

  The support protrusion B1123 protrudes up to a position facing the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the up-down direction, and a surface disposed to face the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. It is designed to be along the plane (in this embodiment, it is parallel).

  That is, the upper side surface of the support protrusion B1123 is an inclined plane configured to incline downward toward the left and right center of the penetration forming portion B1120 with an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane, and below the support protrusion B1123. The side surface is an inclined plane configured to be inclined upward toward the left and right center of the penetration forming portion B1120 at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. As a result, the left and right end portions of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, which are opposed to the support projection B1123 in the vertical direction, and the support projection B1123 can come into contact with each other on the surface, so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 Support stability can be improved.

  The auxiliary protrusion B1124 has the same lateral width as the protrusion length of the support protrusion B1123 described above, and the function thereof is the same as that described above as the function of the support protrusion B1123. That is, the upper side surface of the auxiliary projection B1124 is configured as an inclined plane inclined upward toward the left and right center of the penetration forming portion B1120 at an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane, and the left and right outer end portions of the guide members B1310 and B1510 (Downstream side end) is arranged opposite to the vertical direction.

  As a result, the left and right outer end portions (downstream end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the auxiliary projection B1124 can come into contact with each other on the surface, so that the support stability of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be improved.

  In particular, the left and right outer end portions (downstream end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 are portions where the spheres are bridged to the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, so that positional stability is required. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper displacement of the left and right outer ends (downstream end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 is suppressed by the support projection B1123, and the downward displacement is suppressed by the auxiliary projection B1124. Therefore, the position stability of the left and right outer end portions (downstream end portions) of the guide members B1310 and B1510 can be improved.

  The projecting portion B1140 is a ridge extending in the vertical direction with a length approximately equal to the radius of the sphere, and is a sphere that is guided by the opened first guide plate B1300 or the opened second guide plate B1500 and flows down. It arrange | positions along a flow-down path | route and protrudes to the position which can contact | abut to the sphere to flow down. As a result, the sphere that is guided by the first guide plate B1300 in the open state or the second guide plate B1500 in the open state and flows down is decelerated by coming into contact with the projecting portion B1140.

  The detour path B1170 includes a partition wall part B1171 that extends to the back surface so as to surround the flow path of the sphere that has passed through the guide port B1160, and a closing plate part B1172 that closes the rear-side opening of the partition wall part B1171, Is provided.

  The partition wall portion B1171 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the back, and an opening through which the sphere can pass downward is formed at the downstream end of the sphere flow path. From the opening, the sphere flowing down the detour path B1170 is discharged. The flow path formed by the partition wall portion B1171 is configured to merge with the flow path of a sphere passing from the left discharge port B1150 to the back side. Accordingly, the sphere that has passed through the left discharge port B1150 to the back side is also discharged downward through the opening formed in the partition wall portion B1171.

  In the present embodiment, when the ball riding on the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 rolls on the upstream side from the left and right center position, it can come into contact with the projecting portion B1140, and the left and right center position The projecting range of the projecting portion B1140 is set so that the projecting portion B1140 does not come into contact with the projecting portion B1140 when rolling on the downstream side. The details will be described later.

  Note that a similar projecting portion B1211 is also disposed on the covering member B1200 at a position that does not overlap with the projecting portion B1140 when viewed in the front-rear direction (alternately disposed back and forth with an interval of about the diameter of the sphere). )

  The covering member B1200 extends in a frame shape from the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 to the front side with a plate-like main body member B1210 disposed at a predetermined distance and from the right side of the main body member B1210 to the back side. A right extension B1220 provided, a first detection sensor B1230 disposed and fixed to the right extension B1220, and a left extension extending in a frame shape from the left side of the body member B1210 toward the back side. It mainly includes an installation part B1240, a second detection sensor B1250 arranged and fixed on the left extension part B1240, and a ball guide receiving part B1260 arranged on the main body member B1210 and guiding the sphere to the guide port B1160. .

  In the present embodiment, the right extension B1220 and the left extension B1240 are configured in a bilaterally symmetric shape, and the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 use the same shape detection sensor. .

  The sphere can flow down in a range surrounded by the main body member B1210, the left side wall portion of the right extension portion B1220 in front view, the right side wall portion of the left extension portion B1240 in front view, and the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100. Composed. Hereinafter, this range is also referred to as “pre-entry range”.

  The main body member B1210 has a disposition and a cross-sectional shape that can be inserted into the center of the plurality of projecting portions B1211 projecting toward the back surface toward the flow path of the sphere on the back surface side, and the penetration forming portion B1120 of the base member B1100. And an extension support portion B1212 extending to the back side.

  In addition, the effect | action by arrangement | positioning of protrusion part B1211 and the effect | action by the shape of extension support part B1212 are mentioned later.

  The main body member B1210 is made of a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the pre-entry range. In addition, the aspect of main body member B1210 is not restricted to this, You may be comprised partially opaque.

  In particular, in the vicinity of the first specific prize opening B1001 and in the vicinity of the second specific prize opening B1002, in the vicinity of the straight path for guiding the ball to the first specific prize opening B1001 and the second specific prize opening B1002, Even when the range excluding the vicinity of the guide portions B1222, B1242 and the like where the ball passing through the B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 flows down is made opaque, the visibility of the ball is not greatly affected. Therefore, a seal member having a shape that covers a range other than these ranges may be prepared and pasted, and the design surface on which a figure or pattern is printed on the surface side of the seal member is produced. May be improved.

  Further, a light emitting unit such as an LED that emits light toward the front side may be disposed on the back side of the main body member B1210, and the degree of light transmission of the main body member B1210 may be changed (for example, transmissive liquid crystal).

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extended support portion B1212 is inserted into the penetration formation portion B1120 of the base member B1100, and the lower side portion thereof is disposed on the lower plane B1121 of the penetration formation portion B1120. That is, the extended support part B1212 is supported by the penetrating formation part B1120 at the extended end side, and is supported by the main body member B1210 on the base end side and the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100. Thereby, the position stability of the extension support part B1212 can be enhanced while the weight of the sphere is loaded on the extension support part B1212.

  In the assembled state (see FIG. 125), the extended support portion B1212 is not limited to the penetration forming portion B1120, and is further extended rearward, and the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. Regardless of the arrangement of the sliding parts B1513, B1523 and the guide plates B1300, B1500, the sliding parts B1513, B1523 are always arranged to face each other (contact). Thereby, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be stably guided in the front-rear direction.

  The right extension B1220 has a sensor support B1221 formed to support the first detection sensor B1230 at the left end, and a sphere that has passed through the first detection sensor B1230 supported by the sensor support B1221 on the back side. A guide part B1222 that can be guided to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1223 that is formed so as to incline downward toward the left in the front view on the ceiling, and protrudes from the left side to the left. A ridge portion B1224 and a ridge support portion B1225 projecting leftward below the ridge portion B1224 are provided.

  The protrusion B1224 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially parallel to the inclination direction of the inclined surface B1243, thereby narrowing the entry path of the sphere to the first detection sensor B1230.

  The ridge support portion B1225 is provided so as to project from the vicinity of the lower end portion of the first detection sensor B1230 substantially in parallel with the opening direction of the first specific winning port B1001, thereby guiding the slide displacement of the first guide plate B1300 described later. There is an effect.

  1st detection sensor B1230 is provided with the through-hole as 1st specific prize opening B1001. When the ball passes through the first specific winning opening B1001, the first detection sensor B1230 detects the passage, and a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the number of winnings is counted.

  The left extension B1240 has a sensor support B1241 formed to be capable of supporting the second detection sensor B1250 at the right end, and a sphere that has passed through the second detection sensor B1250 supported by the sensor support B1241 on the back side. A guide portion B1242 formed so as to be capable of guiding to the discharge port B1150, an inclined surface B1243 formed so as to be inclined downward toward the right in front view in the ceiling portion, and protruded from the right side surface to the right side. A plurality of ridge portions B1244 and a ridge support portion B1245 that protrudes rightward below the ridge portion B1244.

  The protrusion B1244 projects from the vicinity of the upper end of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially in parallel with the inclination direction of the inclined surface B1243, and thereby has an effect of narrowing the approach path of the sphere to the second detection sensor B1250.

  The ridge support portion B1245 projects from the vicinity of the lower end portion of the second detection sensor B1250 substantially in parallel with the opening direction of the second specific winning port B1002, thereby guiding the slide displacement of the second guide plate B1500, which will be described later. There is an effect.

  The second detection sensor B1250 includes a through hole as the second specific prize winning opening B1002. When the ball passes through the second specific prize opening B1002, the second detection sensor B1250 detects the passage, and a signal is transmitted to the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4), and the number of winning prizes is counted.

  The ball guide receiving portion B1260 is configured and arranged so that a ball that has entered inside is guided to the guide port B1160 on the back side and discharged to the back side of the thin plate member B1110.

  The first guide plate B1300 is supported so as to be slidable back and forth, is in a state of projecting to the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and can guide (roll) the ball toward the first specific winning opening B1001. A member that is configured to be switchable between an open state and a closed state in which the ball is dropped and that is retracted to the rear side of the open state, and the ball is moved to the first specific prize opening B1001 A guide member B1310 disposed so as to be capable of guiding, an upstream member B1320 disposed upstream of the guide member B1310 and disposed so as to be capable of guiding a ball to the guide member B1310, and the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320. And a connection hole B1330 that is formed in the connection fixing member B1330 and is associated with transmission of driving force from the first driving device B1400. Including 0 and, the.

  The guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 are portions that are inserted from the front side with respect to the base member B1100 at the time of assembly. However, in order to facilitate understanding, the guide member B1310 and the upstream side member B1320 are arranged on the back side of the base member B1100 (connection fixing In the state of being assembled to the member B1330). Details of the assembly method will be described later.

  The guide member B1310 is a member including a left and right long plate-like portion, and the width in the short direction is configured to be about the diameter of a sphere, and the right end portion in the long direction can be disposed close to the first detection sensor B1230. A rolling surface B1311 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, an upper extending portion B1312 extending obliquely upward from the front end on the right end side, and a left side portion, A sliding part B1313 that is slidable on the extension support part B1212 and a connecting extension part B1314 that extends to the back side of the plate-like part and is connected to the connection fixing member B1330 are provided.

  The rolling surface B1311 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines to the right by 7 degrees in a front view with respect to the horizontal.

  The upward extending part B1312 is a part for obstructing an unexpected ball entry into the first specific winning opening B1001. That is, the upper extending portion B1312 is disposed inside the opening constituting the first specific winning opening B1001 in the closed state of the first guide plate B1310 in the opening direction view of the first specific winning opening B1001. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001.

  On the other hand, in the opened state of the first guide plate B1310, it is arranged outside the opening constituting the first specific winning opening B1001, thereby preventing the ball entering the first specific winning opening B1001 from being hindered. it can.

  Further, the upward extending portion B1312 is formed with a size that comes into contact with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 when the first guide plate B1300 is opened. Thereby, in the open state of 1st guide plate B1300, the frictional resistance which arises between the front side surface of upper extension part B1312 and main-body member B1210 can be increased.

  Thereby, the up-and-down position of the downstream end part of guide member B1310 can be stabilized. That is, it is possible to prevent the downstream side end portion of the guide member B1310 from being displaced downward (sinking displacement) or ascending displacement (for example, jumping displacement caused by the impact of a ball bound).

  In the present embodiment, the upper extending portion B1312 is formed so as to protrude to the front side from the front side end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, and the formation of the front side end portions of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 is a covering member. It stays at a position where the gap between B1200 and the body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1310 as described above, the formation width of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 can be shortened, and the material cost can be reduced. In addition, since the gap is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end portion of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 when the first guide plate B1300 is opened, so that the rolling surface B1311, It is possible to easily meander the ball rolling B1321 back and forth.

  Further, the upward extending portion B1312 has an inclined surface B1312a on the opposite side of the first detection sensor B1230. The inclined surface B1312a functions to guide the sphere toward the first detection sensor B1230 by being formed so that the abutting sphere can be moved toward the back side in the opened state of the first guide plate B1300.

  In addition, the inclined surface B1312a is formed such that when the first guide plate B1300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the abutting sphere can be moved toward the opposite side of the first detection sensor B1230 in the left-right direction. The sphere is moved away from the first detection sensor B1230, and functions to prevent (cut off) excessive entry.

  Thereby, the inclined surface B1312a makes it possible to prevent the entry to the first detection sensor B1230 smoothly and to prevent the entry exceeding the specified number.

  The shape of the sliding portion B1313 is such that the side surface of the extended support portion B1212 that is disposed to face the lower right disposed side surface B1215 and the right middle disposed inclined surface B1217 is parallel to the facing side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

  The extension part B1314 for connection is disposed on the left side (closer to the upstream member B1320) from the longitudinal intermediate position of the guide member B1310.

  The upstream member B1320 is a member including a left and right long plate-shaped portion, and the width in the short direction is configured to be about the diameter of a sphere, and the left end in the longitudinal direction extends to a position below the ridge B1244. A rolling surface B1321 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, a sliding portion B1323 that is slidable on the extended support portion B1212 on the right side, and a plate-like portion A connecting extension B1324 that extends to the back surface and is connected to the connection fixing member B1330, and a forming portion that is formed so that the front side portion is removed while leaving the back side end on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1321. B1325. The details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1321 will be described later.

  The shape of the sliding portion B1323 is such that the side surface opposed to the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 of the extended support portion B1212 is parallel to the opposing side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

  The connecting extension B1324 is disposed on the right side (near the guide member B1310) from the longitudinal intermediate position of the upstream member B1320.

  The forming portion B1325 is a portion that is cut for the purpose of avoiding a collision with the upper extending portion B1512 of the second guide plate B1500 when the first guide plate B1300 is displaced. That is, the formation portion B1325 is formed with a sufficient left-right width in order to avoid a collision with the upper extension portion B1512.

  On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1325 (the portion disposed to face the upper extending portion B1512) can come into contact in a state where the first guide plate B1300 is disposed at the front position (open state). It is formed. Thereby, since frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1320 and the upward extending portion B1512 in the opened state of the first guide plate B1300, the positional stability of the upstream member B1320 can be improved. .

  The connection fixing member B1330 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with a thin upper and lower thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1331 formed to be able to receive the connection extending portions B1314 and B1324.

  In the present embodiment, the receiving portion B1331 is formed as a recess that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear end portion of the connection extending portion B1314, B1324, and this recess is formed behind the connection extension portion B1314, B1324. By engaging with the end portion, the displacement of the connection extending portions B1314 and B1324 with respect to the connection fixing member B1330 is prevented.

  In addition, a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole (not shown) drilled in the vertical direction in the connecting extension parts B1314, B1324, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the vertical direction of the connection fixing member B1330. The connection extending portions B1314 and B1324 are fastened and fixed to the connection fixing member B1330 by being screwed into the female screw.

  The transmission hole B1340 includes a straight portion B1341 that extends linearly in the left-right direction, and a curved portion B1342 that extends from the right end of the straight portion B1341 along an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432 of the first drive device B1400. Although configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

  The first drive device B1400 includes a first solenoid B1410 that linearly moves a movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1420 that is fixed to the tip of a plunger (linear motion rod) of the first solenoid B1410, A rotating member B1430 is connected to the moving member B1420 and a short projecting part B1434 is connected to be rotatable about the projecting shaft part B1432.

  The linear motion member B1420 has a through hole B1421 on the opposite side of the side fixed to the first solenoid B1410. The through hole B1421 is formed as a long long hole in the front and rear so that the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434 of the rotating member B1430 can be received.

  The rotating member B1430 includes a bent bar-shaped main body B1431, a projecting shaft B1432 that protrudes in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body B1431, and an end of the main body B1431. A longitudinal projecting portion B1433 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432 from an end portion (first end portion) disposed on the left side of the shaft portion B1432, and an end portion of the main body portion B1431 A short projecting portion B1434 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432, from an end portion (second end portion) that can be disposed on the right side of the projecting shaft portion B1432. Is provided.

  The projecting shaft B1432 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, and details will be described later.

  Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is inserted through the transmission hole B1340, the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is displaced along an arc locus centering on the projecting shaft portion B1432 by the rotational movement of the rotating member B1430. Accordingly, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  The short projecting portion B1434 is inserted through the through-hole B1421, and is displaced along with the displacement of the through-hole B1421 due to the linear motion member B1420 being linearly displaced by switching the excitation state of the first solenoid B1410. .

  The displacement of the short projecting portion B1434 is a rotational displacement about the projecting shaft portion B1432. Since the short projecting portion B1434 and the long projecting portion B1433 are integrally formed via the main body B1431, the long projecting portion B1433 is also rotationally displaced corresponding to the displacement of the short projecting portion B1434.

  In the present embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1342 of the transmission hole B1340 is an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1432, and the radius is equal to the distance between the projecting shaft portion B1432 and the longitudinal projecting portion B1433. It is made into the shape along.

  Thereby, the precision requested | required by the displacement amount of the longitudinal protrusion B1433 for producing the displacement of 1st guide plate B1300 can be made low. This effect is achieved by shifting the displacement amount of the longitudinal protrusion B1433 and the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 accompanying the displacement of the transmission hole B1340.

  More specifically, the displacement of the first guide plate B1300 occurs when the long protruding portion B1433 displaces the linear portion B1341. On the other hand, when the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is disposed on the curved portion B1342, the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is only displaced along the curved portion B1342, and the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is displaced from the inner wall of the transmission hole B1340. As a result, there is no displacement of the first guide plate B1300.

  Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is disposed at the curved portion B1342, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 regardless of the position within the curved portion B1342 where the longitudinal projecting portion B1433 is disposed. Can be kept constant.

  In other words, the curved portion B1342 can be used as a portion that absorbs an error in the displacement amount of the long protruding portion B1433. Therefore, for example, even if the shape of the through hole B1421 is deformed due to deterioration over time, or the displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410 in the excited state is insufficient, the displacement amount of the rotating member B1430 is insufficient. Minutes can be absorbed by the curved portion B1342, and the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 can be kept constant.

  The distance between the long projecting portion B1433 and the projecting shaft portion B1432 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short projecting portion B1434 and the projecting shaft portion B1432. Accordingly, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300 can be ensured while suppressing the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1420 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the first solenoid B1410) to be small.

  Since the second guide plate B1500 is basically configured to have a shape obtained by inverting the first guide plate B1300 symmetrically, its function is common except that it is opposite in the left-right direction.

  That is, the second guide plate B1500 is supported so as to be slidable back and forth, and is projected to the front side of the thin plate member B1110, and guides (rolls) the ball toward the second specific prize winning opening B1002. Is a member configured to be switchable between an open state in which the ball can be opened and a closed state in which the ball is dropped, the state being drawn to the rear side of the open state, and the second specific prize opening B1002 A guide member B1510 arranged to be able to guide the ball, an upstream member B1520 arranged upstream of the guide member B1510 and arranged to guide the ball to the guide member B1510, the guide member B1510 and the upstream side A connection fixing member B1530 to which the member B1520 is fixed, and a transmission hole that is formed in the connection fixing member B1530 and is associated with transmission of driving force from the second driving device B1600. It includes a 1540, a.

  The guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are parts that are inserted from the front side with respect to the base member B1100 at the time of assembly. However, in order to facilitate understanding, the guide member B1510 and the upstream side member B1520 are arranged on the back side of the base member B1100 (connection fixing In the state of being assembled to the member B1530). Details of the assembly method will be described later.

  The guide member B1510 is a member including a left and right long plate-shaped portion, and the width in the short direction is configured to be about the diameter of a sphere, and the left end portion in the long direction can be disposed close to the second detection sensor B1250. A rolling surface B1511 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, an upper extending portion B1512 extending obliquely upward from the left end side front end, and a right side portion, A sliding portion B1513 that is slidable on the extending support portion B1212 and a connecting extending portion B1514 that extends to the back side of the plate-like portion and is connected to the connecting fixing member B1530 are provided.

  The rolling surface B1511 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines to the left by 7 degrees in a front view with respect to the horizontal.

  The upward extending portion B1512 is a portion for obstructing an unexpected ball entry into the second specific winning opening B1002. That is, the upward extending portion B1512 is disposed inside the opening constituting the second specific winning opening B1002 in the closed state of the second guide plate B1510 in the opening direction view of the second specific winning opening B1002. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002.

  On the other hand, in the opened state of the second guide plate B1510, it is arranged outside the opening that constitutes the second specific winning opening B1002, thereby preventing the ball entering the second specific winning opening B1002 from being hindered. it can.

  Further, the upper extending portion B1512 is formed with a size that comes into contact with the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 when the second guide plate B1500 is opened. Thereby, in the open state of 2nd guide plate B1500, the frictional resistance which arises between the front side surface of upper extension part B1512 and the main body member B1210 can be increased.

  Thereby, the up-and-down position of the downstream end part of guide member B1510 can be stabilized. In other words, it is possible to prevent the downstream end portion of the guide member B1510 from being displaced downward (sinking displacement) or ascending displacement (for example, jumping displacement caused by a ball bounce impact).

  In the present embodiment, the upper extending portion B1512 is formed to protrude to the front side from the front side end portions of the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521, and the formation of the front side end portions of the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 is a covering member. It stays at a position where the gap between B1200 and the body member B1210 is less than the radius of the sphere. As a result, while maintaining the effect of stabilizing the vertical position of the guide member B1510 as described above, the formation cost of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 can be reduced to reduce the material cost. In addition, since the gap is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end portion of the sphere can be placed on the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 when the second guide plate B1500 is in an open state. It is possible to easily meander the ball rolling on B1521 back and forth.

  Further, the upward extending portion B1512 has an inclined surface B1512a on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. The inclined surface B1512a functions to guide the sphere toward the second detection sensor B1250 by being formed so that the abutting sphere can be moved toward the back side in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500.

  In addition, the inclined surface B1512a is formed so that when the second guide plate B1500 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the abutting sphere can be moved toward the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250 in the left-right direction. The sphere is separated from the second detection sensor B1250, and functions to prevent (cut off) excessive entry.

  Thereby, the inclined surface B1512a can make it difficult to generate a ball exceeding the specified number while smoothly generating a ball into the second detection sensor B1250.

  The shape of the sliding portion B1513 is a flat surface in which the side surface opposed to the lower left side surface B1216 and the left middle disposed inclined surface B1218 of the extended support portion B1212 is parallel to the opposite side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

  The extending portion for connection B1514 is disposed on the left side from the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the guide member B1510 (on the opposite side of the upstream member B1520).

  The upstream member B1520 is a member including a left and right long plate-like portion, and the width in the short direction is configured to be approximately the diameter of a sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction extends to a position below the ridge B1224. A rolling surface B1521 formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface on which the sphere rolls, a sliding portion B1523 that is slidable on the extended support portion B1212 on the left side, and a plate-like portion A connecting extension B1524 extending to the back surface and connected to the connection fixing member B1530, and a forming portion formed so as to remove the front side portion while leaving the back side end portion on the upper end side of the rolling surface B1521. B1525. The details of the inclination of the rolling surface B1521 will be described later.

  The shape of the sliding part B1523 is such that the side surface of the extended support part B1212 facing the upper right-facing inclined surface B1213 is parallel to the facing side surface. The relationship with the extended support portion B1212 will be described later.

  The extending portion for connection B1524 is arranged on the right side (the side opposite to the guide member B1510) from the middle position in the longitudinal direction of the upstream side member B1520.

  The forming portion B1525 is a portion that is cut for the purpose of avoiding a collision with the upper extending portion B1312 of the first guide plate B1300 when the second guide plate B1500 is displaced. That is, the formation portion B1525 is formed with a sufficient left-right width in order to avoid a collision with the upper extension portion B1312.

  On the other hand, the rear end portion of the notch of the forming portion B1525 (the portion disposed to face the upper extending portion B1312) can be brought into contact with the second guide plate B1500 in the front position (open state). It is formed. As a result, frictional resistance can be generated between the upstream member B1520 and the upward extending portion B1312 in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500, and thus the positional stability of the upstream member B1520 can be improved. .

  The connection fixing member B1530 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with a thin upper and lower thickness, and includes a plurality of receiving portions B1531 formed to be able to receive the connection extending portions B1514 and B1524.

  In the present embodiment, the receiving portion B1531 is formed as a concave portion that is recessed in a shape corresponding to the rear end portions of the connecting extending portions B1514 and B1524, and this concave portion is formed behind the connecting extending portions B1514 and B1524. By engaging with the end portion, the displacement of the connection extending portions B1514 and B1524 with respect to the connection fixing member B1530 is prevented.

  In addition, a fastening screw is inserted into an insertion hole (not shown) drilled in the vertical direction in the connecting extension parts B1514 and B1524, and the inserted fastening screw is formed in the vertical direction of the connection fixing member B1530. The extension portions B1514 and B1524 for connection are fastened and fixed to the connection fixing member B1530 by being screwed into the female screw.

  The transmission hole B1540 includes a straight portion B1541 that extends linearly in the left-right direction, and a curved portion B1542 that extends from the right end of the straight portion B1541 along an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632 of the second drive device B1600. Although configured as a through hole, its function will be described later.

  As described above, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 have substantially the same configuration, but there are portions having different shapes and arrangements. In particular, the shape and arrangement of the connecting and fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B1300 is different from the shape and arrangement of the connecting and fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500, and accordingly, the connecting extension portion of the first guide plate B1300. The arrangement and extension length of B1314 and B1324 are different from the arrangement and extension length of the connecting extension parts B1514 and B1524 of the second guide plate B1500.

  Specifically, the connecting and fixing member B1330 is formed with a shorter left and right length than the connecting and fixing member B1530, and is disposed on the front side. Accordingly, the extension portions B1314 and B1324 for connection are formed to have a shorter extension length in the front-rear direction than the extension portions B1514 and B1524 for connection, and are disposed on the left and right inner sides. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the collision between the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500, but details will be described later.

  The second drive device B1600 includes a second solenoid B1610 that linearly moves the movable member by switching excitation, a linear motion member B1620 that is fixed to the tip of the plunger (linear motion rod) of the second solenoid B1610, Rotating member B1630 is connected to moving member B1620 and short projecting portion B1634 is connected to be rotatable about projecting shaft portion B1632.

  The linear motion member B1620 has a through hole B1621 on the opposite side of the side fixed to the second solenoid B1610. The through hole B1621 is formed as a long long hole in the front and rear so that the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634 of the rotating member B1630 can be received.

  The rotating member B1630 includes a bent rod-like main body B1631, a protruding shaft B1632 protruding in a columnar shape from the vicinity of the bent portion of the main body B1631, and an end of the main body B1631. A longitudinal projecting portion B1633 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1632 from an end portion (first end portion) disposed on the left side of the shaft portion B1632, and an end portion of the main body portion B1631 And a short projecting portion B1634 projecting in a columnar shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1632 from an end portion (second end portion) that can be disposed on the right side of the projecting shaft portion B1632. Is provided.

  The projecting shaft B1632 is supported by the rear cover member B1700, which will be described in detail later.

  Since the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540, the rotation of the rotating member B1630 causes the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 to be displaced along an arc locus centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632. Accordingly, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  The short projecting portion B1634 is inserted through the through-hole B1621, and is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the through-hole B1621 due to the linear motion member B1620 being linearly displaced by switching the excitation state of the second solenoid B1610. .

  The displacement of the short projecting portion B1634 is a rotational displacement about the projecting shaft portion B1632. Since the short projecting portion B1634 and the long projecting portion B1633 are integrally formed via the main body B1631, the long projecting portion B1633 is also rotationally displaced corresponding to the displacement of the short projecting portion B1634.

  In this embodiment, the shape of the curved portion B1542 of the transmission hole B1540 is an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B1632, and the radius is the same as the distance between the projecting shaft portion B1632 and the longitudinal projecting portion B1633. It is made into the shape along.

  Thereby, the precision requested | required by the displacement amount of the longitudinal protrusion B1633 for producing the displacement of 2nd guide plate B1500 can be made low. This effect is achieved by shifting the displacement amount of the longitudinal protrusion B1633 from the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 accompanying the displacement of the transmission hole B1540.

  Specifically, the displacement of the second guide plate B1500 occurs when the long protruding portion B1633 displaces the linear portion B1541. On the other hand, when the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is disposed on the curved portion B1542, the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is merely displaced along the curved portion B1542, and the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is located on the inner wall of the transmission hole B1540. Since there is no action of pushing in the front-rear direction, the second guide plate B1500 is not displaced.

  Therefore, as long as the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is disposed on the curved portion B1542, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 is determined regardless of where the longitudinal projecting portion B1633 is disposed on the curved portion B1542. Can be kept constant.

  In other words, the curved portion B1542 can be used as a portion that absorbs an error in the displacement amount of the long protruding portion B1633. Therefore, for example, even if the displacement amount of the rotating member B1630 is insufficient due to the shape of the through hole B1621 being deformed due to deterioration over time or the displacement amount of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610 in the excited state is insufficient. Minutes can be absorbed by the curved portion B1542, and the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 can be kept constant.

  The distance between the long protruding portion B1633 and the protruding shaft portion B1632 is designed to be longer than the distance between the short protruding portion B1634 and the protruding shaft portion B1632. Thereby, the displacement amount of the second guide plate B1500 can be ensured while keeping the displacement amount of the linear motion member B1620 (the displacement amount of the plunger of the second solenoid B1610) small.

  The rear cover member B1700 includes a body portion B1710 having a U-shaped cross section, a pair of left and right coupling plate portions B1720 that extend from the front end portion of the body portion B1710 to the left and right outer sides to form a coupling surface with the thin plate member B1110, A first support plate B1730 arranged at the lower left and right inner bottom positions of the portion B1710 and configured to be able to support the first solenoid B1410 on the upper surface side, and a first guide plate B1300 disposed above the first support plate B1730 The second support plate B1740 is disposed so that the upper surface abuts on the lower surface of the fixing member B1330, and the lower surface contacts the upper surface of the connection fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 disposed above the second support plate B1740. A third support plate B1750 disposed so as to be in contact therewith, and an upper left and right inner upper position of the main body B1710 above the third support plate B1750 The second solenoid B1610 disposed comprises a fourth support plate B1760 that bites supportably configured on the lower surface side.

  The main body B1710 is configured to be disassembleable with the first support plate B1730 downward and the fourth support plate B1760 upward. That is, the first drive device B1400 including the first solenoid B1410 supported by the first support plate B1730 and the second drive device B1600 including the second solenoid B1610 supported by the fourth support plate B1760 are the main body B1710. It is possible to remove it vertically.

  The coupling plate portion B1720 includes a receiving portion B1721 through which the screw portion of the fastening screw can be inserted. The fastening screw inserted through the receiving portion B1721 is screwed into the female screw portion of the thin plate member B1110, whereby the rear cover member B1700 is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110.

  The first support plate B1730 includes a discharge portion B1731 for forming a gap between the first support plate B1730 and the thin plate member B1110 by being arranged on the rear side of the front end position of the coupling plate portion B1720.

  The discharge part B1731 forms a through-hole through which the sphere discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes with the thin plate member B1110. The sphere discharged from the through hole (the sphere discharged from the discharge port B1150 or the detour path B1170) is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown).

  The second support plate B1740 includes a recessed portion B1741 for allowing the longitudinal protruding portion B1433 of the first driving device B1400 to pass in the up-down direction. The formation range of the recessed portion B1741 is formed as small as possible on the premise that the recessed portion B1741 is a range including the movement locus of the long protruding portion B1433. Thereby, plane parts other than recessed part B1741 can be ensured, and the connection fixing member B1330 of 1st guide plate B1300 can be supported stably.

  The third support plate B1750 includes a recessed portion B1751 for allowing the longitudinal protruding portion B1633 of the second drive device B1600 to pass in the vertical direction. The formation range of the recessed portion B1751 is formed as small as possible on the premise that the recessed portion B1751 is a range including the movement locus of the long protruding portion B1633. Thereby, plane parts other than the recessed part B1751 can be ensured, and the connection fixing member B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 can be stably supported from the upper surface side.

  Here, an example of the assembling method of the variable winning device B1000 and the assembling method to the base plate 60 will be described. Only the covering member B1200, the guide members B1310 and B1510 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the upstream side members B1320 and B1520 are assembled from the front side with respect to the thin plate member B1110, and the others are assembled from the rear side.

  In assembling the variable prize-winning apparatus B1000, first, the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are inserted into the penetration forming portion B1120 from the front side with respect to the thin plate member B1110, and the connecting and fixing member on the back side of the thin plate member B1110. Fastened to B1330 and B1530.

  Next, the rear cover member B1700 with the first support plate B1730 and the fourth support plate B1760 removed is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110. At this time, the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 are housed inside the second support plate B1740 and the third support plate B1750 in the vertical direction.

  Next, the first support plate B1730 to which the first driving device B1400 is assembled is assembled to the main body B1710 while the long protruding portion B1433 is inserted into the transmission hole B1340 of the first guide plate B1300. Similarly, the fourth support plate B1760 to which the second driving device B1600 is assembled is assembled to the main body B1710 while the long protruding portion B1633 is inserted through the transmission hole B1540 of the second guide plate B1500.

  Then, after the covering member B1200 is fastened and fixed to the thin plate member B1110, the variable winning device B1000 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by assembling and fastening the variable winning device B1000 to the base plate 60 from the front side.

  With reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the closed state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described. FIG. 130 is a front view of the variable prize apparatus B1000, and FIG. 131 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus B1000 taken along the line CXXXI-CXXXI in FIG. 130 and 131, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in a closed state, and in FIG. 130, the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is transparently illustrated, The shape is visible.

  In FIG. 130, a polka dot pattern (dot) is added to at least a part of the range in which the sphere cannot pass in the range before entering the ball. That is, in FIG. 130, the extended support portion B1212 is formed over the range between the base member B1100 and the covering member B1200 in the range where the polka dot pattern (dot) is attached. The upper extending portions B1312 and B1512 are configured to be impassable, and are configured to be impermeable to the sphere by being disposed at a substantially intermediate position between the base member B1100 and the covering member B1200.

  As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, when the second guide plate B1500 is closed, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided by the penetration forming portion B1120 and are on the rear side of the front plate surface of the thin plate member B1110. By arrange | positioning, it can maintain, without narrowing the space | interval between the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100, and the main body member B1210 of covering member B1200.

  The thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 are juxtaposed at intervals through which the sphere can pass. In the state shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the right extension B1220 and the left extension The sphere that has reached between the installation part B1240 can be dropped below the variable winning device B1000.

  As shown in FIG. 131, in the closed state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is disposed so as to partially block the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the second specific winning opening B1002.

  Therefore, an irregular winning (for example, a ball hitting another component or the like is thrown in the horizontal direction and enters the second specific winning opening B1002 without being guided by the second guide plate B1500) or illegal activities. (For example, the act of attracting a ball with a magnet to win a prize, the act of pulling or shaking the yarn end on the opposite side of the ball that is launched with the thread adhered, and controlling the position of the ball to win) Can prevent winning a prize.

  With reference to FIGS. 132 and 133, the open state of the second guide plate B1500 will be described. FIG. 132 (a) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus B1000, FIG. 132 (b) is a partially enlarged front view of the variable prize apparatus B1000 in the range CXXXIIb of FIG. 132 (a), and FIG. It is sectional drawing of variable prize-winning apparatus B1000 in the CXXXIII-CXXXIII line of 132 (a).

  In FIGS. 132 (a), 132 (b), and 133, the first guide plate B1300 is closed and the second guide plate B1500 is opened, and FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b). ), The main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is illustrated transparently, and the shape of the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In addition, in FIG. 132 (a), a sphere passing through the second detection sensor B 1250 is illustrated as an example of a sphere that flows down, and in FIG. 133, the outer shape of the sphere is an imaginary line in order to grasp the size of the sphere. Illustrated.

  In FIGS. 132 (a) and 132 (b), a polka dot pattern (dot) is supplementarily attached to at least a part of the range in which the sphere cannot pass in the range before entering the ball. 132 (a) and 132 (b), the polka dot pattern (dots) is added to the above-described range in FIG. 130 by adding the plate-like portions of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520. On the other hand, the polka dot pattern (dot) is erased from the upward extending portion B1512.

  That is, in the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is slid to the front side, so that the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 The gap is less than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere is configured to be unable to pass downward on the front side of the second guide plate B1500.

  On the other hand, in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is arranged in the vicinity of the covering member B1200 so as not to interfere with the ball entering the second specific winning opening B1002.

  As shown in FIGS. 132 (a), 132 (b), and 133, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened, the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are guided to the penetration forming portion B1120, and the thin plate member. Projecting to the front side of the front plate surface of B1110 and extending to the right side when the distance between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is less than the diameter of the sphere. The falling of the sphere that reaches between the part B1220 and the left extending part B1240 is prevented.

  In this embodiment, since the distance between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is less than the radius of the sphere, the lower end of the sphere is the rolling surface. Get on B1311, B1321. As a result, the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 can be easily meandered in the front-rear direction of the rolling sphere.

  As shown in FIG. 133, in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500, the upward extending portion B1512 is disposed at a position that does not block the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Specifically, the second detection sensor B1250 is moved to a position that overlaps with the frame portion that forms the opening. Therefore, the ball can pass through the second specific winning opening B1002.

  The sphere that has reached between the right extension B1220 and the left extension B1240 in the open state of the second guide plate B1500 rolls along the inclination on the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 of the second guide plate B1500. The second detection sensor B1250 is passed from the left end.

  In the open state of the second guide plate B1500, a gap shorter than the radius of the sphere is provided between the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200. As a result, the necessary material can be reduced as compared with the case where the plate-like portion of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are formed to such an extent that they abut against the main body member B1210, or compared with the case where they abut. Since generation | occurrence | production of load can be prevented, there exists an advantageous effect that durability of 2nd guide plate B1500 can be improved.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 132 (b), the operation of the extended support portion B1212 with respect to the longitudinal slide displacement of the second guide plate B1500 will be described. As described above, the extended support portion B1212 extends to the rear of the penetration forming portion B1120, and can be brought into contact with the second guide plate B1500 in the vertical direction regardless of the arrangement of the second guide plate B1500.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (b), the extended support part B1212 is connected to a main body part whose cross section is formed in a long rhombus shape and a lower end part of the main body part, and the cross section is a horizontally long rectangular shape. And a lower support portion formed in a pentagonal shape with a triangle on the upper side, and is configured such that the space between the main body portion and the lower support portion can be bound to the left and right inner sides.

  The main body portion of the extended support portion B1212 is formed on the upper surface thereof as an inclined surface that is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides with the left-right center position coincident with the center in the left-right direction of the projecting portion B1211. B1213 and the upper left arrangement | positioning inclined surface B1214, and the lower right arrangement | positioning side surface B1215 and the lower left arrangement | positioning side surface B1216 which comprise the constricted upper side surface formed between a lower side support part are provided.

  The lower support portion of the extended support portion B1212 is formed on the upper surface as an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides with the left and right center position coincident with the center in the left and right direction of the projecting portion B1211. An arrangement inclined surface B1217 and a left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 are provided.

  The upper right arrangement inclined surface B1213 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding part B1523, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding part B1523 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower side plane of the sliding part B1523). It is configured to be surface contactable. Thereby, the front-rear direction displacement of the sliding part B1523 can be stably guided while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding part B1523.

  The upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding part B1323, and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding part B1323 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the lower side plane of the sliding part B1323). It is configured to be surface contactable. Thereby, the front-rear direction displacement of the sliding part B1323 can be stably guided while suppressing the downward displacement of the sliding part B1523.

  The lower right side surface B1215 is disposed to face the upper side surface of the sliding part B1313, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding part B1313 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper side surface of the sliding part B1313). It is configured to be surface contactable. Further, the right middle arrangement inclined surface B1217 is arranged to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313 and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1313 (in this embodiment, parallel to the lower plane of the sliding portion B1313). Flat surface) and configured to be able to contact the surface. Thereby, the longitudinal displacement of the sliding part B1313 can be stably guided while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding part B1313.

  The lower left side surface B1216 is disposed to face the upper side surface of the sliding part B1513, and has a shape corresponding to the upper side surface of the sliding part B1513 (in this embodiment, a planar shape parallel to the upper side surface of the sliding part B1513). It is configured to allow surface contact. Further, the left middle disposed inclined surface B1218 is disposed to face the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513 and has a shape corresponding to the lower side surface of the sliding portion B1513 (in this embodiment, parallel to the lower plane of the sliding portion B1513). Flat surface) and configured to be able to contact the surface. Accordingly, the longitudinal displacement of the sliding portion B1513 can be stably guided while suppressing the vertical displacement of the sliding portion B1513.

  In this embodiment, for convenience of explanation, as shown in FIG. 132 (b), the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 is formed in the same plane as the plane on which the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 are arranged, and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 is The rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 are formed in the same plane as the plane on which the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 are arranged, and the lower right arrangement side surface B1215 and the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 are the same plane as the plane on which the lower surfaces of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 are arranged. The lower left side surface B1216 and the right middle side inclined surface B1217 are designed to be formed in the same plane as the plane on which the lower side surfaces of the guide member B1310 and the upstream side member B1320 are arranged.

  On the other hand, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is naturally conceivable to adopt each surface formed in the extended support portion B1212 from a shape including not only a flat surface but also other shapes (curved surface shape, uneven shape, saw blade shape, etc.).

  In particular, the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 having a function as a rolling surface of a sphere have a functional meaning in that they are formed in a flat shape, while the other parts are slid. The above-described operation can be caused by corresponding to the shapes of the moving parts B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523.

  As a design concept in that case, it is considered that it is a common matter that the frictional resistance is increased while the contact of the surface improves the action of guiding the displacement as compared with the contact of the line. In this embodiment, the left and right widths of the extended support portion B1212 are designed so that the frictional resistance can be reduced while ensuring the action of guiding the displacement.

  Note that the sliding portions B1313, B1323, B1513, and B1523 have a shape capable of guiding a sphere even in a configuration in which the extended support portion B1212 is omitted. That is, both the sliding portions B1313 and B1323 of the first guide plate B1300 and the sliding portions B1513 and B1523 of the second guide plate B1500 project to the left and right inward so as to narrow the gap in the left and right direction. Accordingly, regardless of the state of the extended support portion B1212 (for example, even when the support portion B1212 is damaged), the ball is rolled on the upper surface of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, thereby moving to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. You can guide the sphere.

  134 to 136 are top views of the variable winning device B1000. FIG. 134 illustrates a case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are in a closed state. In FIG. 135, the first guide plate B1300 is opened and the second guide plate B1500 is closed. FIG. 136 illustrates a case where the first guide plate B1300 is in a closed state and the second guide plate B1500 is in an open state.

  Hereinafter, switching of excitation of the solenoid will be described. In FIG. 134, both the first solenoid B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 are not energized and are in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B1000, which is maintained before the game starts or in the normal state, and the variable winning device B1000 maintains most of the operating time in this state.

  Mainly in the special game state, as shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is energized and excited, so that the state of the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is changed. Can be switched.

  As shown in FIG. 135, the second solenoid B1610 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the first solenoid B1410 is excited, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, and the first specific winning of the first detection sensor B1230 is achieved. The sphere can be guided to the mouth B1001.

  The state switching of the first guide plate B1300 is performed by forward / backward slide displacement, but the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300 is smoothly supported by the covering member B1200. Done.

  The downstream end portion (right end portion) of the guide member B1310 is supported by the ridge support portion B1225, and the upstream end portion (left end portion) of the guide member B1310 is disposed at the lower right side of the extended support portion B1212. It is sandwiched and supported by the side surface B1215 and the middle right arrangement inclined surface B1217 (see FIG. 132B).

  Accordingly, first, even when a plurality of balls are on the guide member B1310, the guide member B1310 can be prevented from sinking and being displaced, and the ball enters the first specific prize opening B1001. The sphere can be made smooth.

  Second, since the positional deviation between the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1310 can be suppressed, the flow of the sphere from the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1310 is made smooth. be able to.

  In addition, although the protrusion support part B1225 and the extended support part B1212 can also be formed over the length direction (left-right direction) of the guide member B1310, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the guide member B1310. It only keeps forming. Thereby, the displacement resistance (friction resistance) of 1st guide plate B1300 can be reduced.

  The downstream end (right end) of the upstream member B1320 is supported by the extended support portion B1212. Thus, even when a plurality of balls are on the upstream member B1320, the upstream member B1320 can be prevented from sinking and being displaced, and the balls can smoothly enter the extended support portion B1212. Can be done.

  In the present embodiment, the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320, the upper surface of the extending support B1212 that is inclined downward to the right, and the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. Designed to be Thereby, the step in the vertical direction can be removed from the flow path of the sphere, and the flow of the sphere to the first specific winning opening B1001 can be made smooth.

  As shown in FIG. 136, the first solenoid B1410 is maintained in the non-excited state, and when the second solenoid B1610 is excited, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state, and the second specific winning of the second detection sensor B1250 is performed. The sphere can be guided to the mouth B1002.

  The state switching of the second guide plate B1500 is performed by front / rear slide displacement, but the front / rear direction displacement of the guide member B1510 and the upstream member B1520 of the second guide plate B1500 is smoothly supported by the covering member B1200. Done.

  The downstream end portion (left end portion) of the guide member B1510 is supported by the ridge support portion B1245, and the upstream end portion (right end portion) of the guide member B1510 is the lower left side surface of the extended support portion B1212. It is sandwiched and supported from above and below by B1216 and the left middle arrangement inclined surface B1218 (see FIG. 132 (b)).

  Accordingly, first, even when a plurality of balls are on the guide member B1510, the guide member B1510 can be prevented from sinking and being displaced, and the ball can enter the second specific prize opening B1002. The sphere can be made smooth.

  Second, since the positional deviation between the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 and the upper surface of the guide member B1510 can be suppressed, the flow of the sphere from the upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 to the upper surface of the guide member B1510 is made smooth. be able to.

  In addition, although the protrusion support part B1245 and the extended support part B1212 can also be formed over the length direction (left-right direction) of the guide member B1510, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the left and right end parts of the guide member B1510. It only keeps forming. Thereby, the displacement resistance (friction resistance) of the second guide plate B1500 can be reduced.

  The downstream end (left end) of the upstream member B1520 is supported by the extended support portion B1212. Thereby, even when a plurality of balls are on the upstream member B1520, the upstream member B1520 can be prevented from sinking and being displaced, and the flow of the balls to the extended support portion B1212 can be smoothly performed. Can be done.

  In this embodiment, the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520, the upper surface of the extending support B1212 that is inclined downward to the right, and the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510 are flush with each other and have the same inclination angle. Designed to be Thereby, the step in the vertical direction can be removed from the flow path of the sphere, and the flow of the sphere to the second specific prize winning opening B1002 can be made smooth.

  Next, an example of the flow-down mode of the sphere will be described. FIG. 137 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B1000, and FIG. 137 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B1000 in the direction of the arrow CXXXVIIb in FIG. 137 (a). FIG. 137 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus B1000 along the line CXXXVIIIa-CXXXVIIIa in FIG. 137 (a), and FIG. 138 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus B1000 along the line CXXXVIIIb-CXXXVIIIb in FIG. 137 (a). .

  In FIGS. 137 and 138, the first guide plate B1300 is in the closed state, while the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, and a plurality of balls are rolling on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1500. Illustrated.

  FIG. 137 shows a state in which three balls are on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500, but the second guide plate B1500 is configured with a left and right length that allows up to five balls to be placed simultaneously. Has been. In order to facilitate understanding, the spheres connected on the upstream side have a cross section passing through the center of the projecting portion B1140 (see FIG. 138 (b)) or a cross section passing through the center of the projecting portion B1211 (FIG. 138 ( a), the center of the sphere is positioned.

  The projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are formed on the base member B1100 or the covering member B1200, but the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 project on the path side of the sphere that has reached the pre-entrance range, It is designed with the common purpose of influencing

  In the present embodiment, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 do not affect the sphere rolling on the downstream side with reference to the left and right center position of the extended support portion B1212, while rolling on the upstream side. Designed to affect the sphere.

  That is, downstream of the projecting part B1211 formed immediately above the center of the left and right of the extended support part B1212 (left side in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500, hereinafter also simply referred to as “lower part before entering the ball”). .) Is provided above the rolling trajectory of the sphere. Therefore, when the ball rolls on the second guide plate B1500, the ball does not collide with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 arranged at the lower part of the range before entering the ball.

  On the other hand, on the upstream side of the projecting portion B1211 formed immediately above the center position of the left and right of the extended support portion B1212 (right side in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500, hereinafter also simply referred to as “the upper range before entering the ball”). .) Is arranged at least partially inside the rolling trajectory of the sphere.

  The arrangement of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 with respect to the sphere that reaches and flows down before entering the ball will be described. In the present embodiment, when the ball is fired right-handed, when a ball that has not entered the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 124) reaches the inclined surface B1223 of the variable winning device B1000, along the inclination. It will flow down to the left and reach the pre-entry range.

  In this case, it is unclear whether the sphere flows down on the side close to the base plate 60 (the rear side of the flow path) or the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) side (the front side of the flow path). However, the sphere is configured to hit the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 at least twice or more.

  For example, when the sphere flows down the front side portion of the flow path, as shown in FIG. 138 (a), the sphere comes into contact with the protruding portion B1211 and flows down while being displaced to the rear side portion of the flow path. Thereafter, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are arranged in a staggered manner, so that the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 come into contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 three times before reaching the lower part of the pre-entrance range, and the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced. Is done.

  Further, for example, when the sphere flows down the rear side portion of the flow path, the sphere does not come into contact with the protruding portion B1211 arranged in the uppermost stream, but as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the sphere is protruded portion B1140. It flows down while being displaced to the front side of the flow path. After that, since it comes into contact with the projecting portion B1211 disposed immediately above the extended support portion B1212, it comes into contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 twice before reaching the lower part of the pre-entrance range. And the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced.

  Here, because of the relationship in which the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portion B1211 disposed on the left and right are disposed outside the movement trajectory of the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300, their lower end positions are Along with being designed to be different, the position (abutting height) of the abutting sphere is different. Therefore, if no countermeasure is taken, there is a possibility that the sphere escapes from the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 by the amount of curvature of the sphere, and the deceleration action is weakened.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is made longer than the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 arranged on the left and right, thereby reducing the deceleration that the projecting portion B1140 gives to the sphere. The action and the deceleration action that the protruding portion B1211 arranged on the left and right side gives to the sphere can be maintained equally. This will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (a), the position (contact height) of the sphere BP2 that makes contact with the protruding portion B1211 at the right end in the front-rear direction is a position away from the center BCP of the sphere by a length BH1. . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the position (contact height) of the sphere BP1 that makes contact with the protruding portion B1140 in the front-rear direction is a position away from the center BCP of the sphere by a length BH2. It becomes.

  Here, since the length BH2 is longer than the length BH1 (BH2> BH1), if the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 have the same projecting length, the balls BP1 and BP2 have the projecting portions B1140, When rolling the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in contact with the base end side plate member (thin plate member B1110 or main body member B1210) of B1211, a ball is used to avoid the projecting portions B1140 and B1211. The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction required for BP1 and BP2 is larger in the displacement amount when avoiding the protruding portion B1211 at the right end than the displacement amount when avoiding the protruding portion B1140.

  In other words, the longitudinal displacement generated in the balls BP1 and BP2 by the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is not equal to the front and rear, and the displacement to the rear side is larger than the displacement to the front side. Compared to the case where the positions (contact height) of the spheres BP1 and BP2 contacting the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction are the center BCP of the sphere because the path is asymmetrically bent (curved) linearly. Thus, the action of decelerating the balls BP1 and BP2 is slightly weakened.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the protruding length of the protruding portion B1140 is formed longer than the protruding length of the left and right protruding portions B1211, and the balls BP1 and BP2 are on the base end side of the protruding portions B1140 and B1211. When rolling the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in contact with the other plate member (thin plate member B1110 or main body member B1210), the balls BP1 and BP2 are required to avoid the protruding portions B1140 and B1211. The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction is equal. Thereby, the deceleration effect by contact | abutting with protrusion part B1140, B1211 and a rolling ball can fully be exhibited.

  Although the projecting length of the projecting portion B1140 is increased, this design change is caused by the balls BP1 and BP2 contacting the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 in the front-rear direction with the rolling paths of the balls BP1 and BP2. This is only a design change to make the position (contact height) equal to the rolling path when the position is the center BCP of the sphere, and a plate member (thin plate member B1110 or This is not a design change that narrows the gap widths BCL1 and BCL2 between the balls BP1 and BP2 in contact with the main body member B1210) and the projecting portions B1140 and B1211.

  That is, the ball width BP2 (see FIG. 138 (a)) between the projecting portion B1211 in a state where the ball BP2 rolling the upstream member B1520 contacts the thin plate member B1110 and the upstream member B1520 roll. The gap width BCL2 (see FIG. 138 (b)) between the projecting portion B1140 and the sphere BP1 in contact with the main body member B1210 is equivalent (BCL1 = BCL2). Therefore, it is possible to prevent clogging of the ball BP1 while increasing the protruding length of the protruding portion B1140.

  Thus, in this embodiment, the design concept of limiting the formation range of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 to the position where the sphere is desired to be decelerated in the flow path is adopted. Thereby, the flow velocity of the sphere that flows down the upper area before entering the ball and the flow velocity of the sphere that flows down the lower area before entering the ball can be made different.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 is designed to be the same at the left and right three locations. That is, the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 disposed on the left and right is made equal to the projecting length of the projecting portion B1211 disposed just above the extended support portion B1212.

  Since the formation height of the protruding portion B1211 arranged at the center in the left and right extends over the entire vertical width of the rolling trajectory of the sphere, the position of the sphere (contact height) contacting the protruding portion B1211 arranged at the center of the left and right Is equivalent to the center BCP of the sphere.

  Therefore, when the balls BP1 and BP2 roll on the rolling surface B1521 of the upstream member B1520 in a state where the balls BP1 and BP2 are in contact with the base end side plate member (main body member B1210) of the projecting portion B1211, the balls BP1 and BP2 are arranged at the left and right centers. The amount of displacement in the front-rear direction required for the balls BP1 and BP2 in order to avoid the protruding portion B1211 is larger than the amount of displacement in the case of avoiding the protruding portion B1211 at the right end.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the speed reduction action of the sphere by the protruding portion B1211 arranged at the center in the left and right is larger than the speed reduction action of the sphere by the other protruding portions B1140 and B1211 (maximum Configured to be). Thereby, it is possible to make the balls rolling on the upper surfaces of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 easy to cut (easy to be divided) with the protruding portion B1211 at the center of the left and right as a boundary.

  As shown in FIG. 138 (b), the gap between the projecting portion B1140 and the main body member B1210 is less than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, if the sphere flows down from vertically above the projecting portion B1140, the center of the sphere cannot pass between the projecting portion B1140 and the main body member B1210, but flows down toward the left and right sides. If another sphere is arranged on the approaching side, the sphere that has been arranged interferes with the flow of the sphere, and the flow of the sphere may deteriorate. In addition, if the ball is clogged and does not flow (stagnation state), the game cannot be continued, which is a problem.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is disposed at a position where the flow of the ball from the vertically upper side of the projecting portion B1140 can be inhibited. Thereby, since it is possible to prevent a situation in which the sphere flows down from vertically above the projecting portion B1140, it is possible to easily maintain a good flow of the sphere.

  With respect to the flow velocity of the sphere, in this embodiment, in the upper part of the range before entering the ball, it is configured such that it takes about 0.5 seconds to flow down the left-right distance between the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 (about 60 [mm / second). ]) In the lower part of the pre-entrance range, it takes about 0.5 seconds to flow down the distance from the extended support B1212 to the center of the second detection sensor B1250 (assuming the position where the passage of the sphere is detected). (About 22 [mm / sec]). In other words, the flow velocity at the lower part of the pre-entrance range is configured to be about three times the flow velocity at the upper part of the pre-entry range.

  This speed setting is also set for the purpose of reducing the number of staying balls in the lower part of the range before entering the ball. According to this speed setting, for example, when a plurality of spheres BP1 and BP2 flowing down in succession ride on the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 137 (a)), the downstream sphere BP1 extends. The upstream ball BP2 is disposed immediately above the extended support portion B1212 until the second detection sensor B1250 detects passage through the protruding portion B1212 disposed immediately above the support portion B1212. It does not pass through the protruding portion B1212.

  That is, even when a plurality of balls BP1 and BP2 flow down in the upper part of the pre-entry range, the number of spheres staying in the lower part of the pre-entry range can be limited to one. As a result, when the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state as the specified number of balls enter the second specific prize opening B1002, there is a situation in which the balls fall from the rolling surface B1511 of the guide member B1510. Can be avoided.

  Thus, it can be said that the upper part of the pre-entrance range is an advantageous section in the sense that at least the occurrence frequency of the situation of the sphere falling can be lowered as compared with the lower part of the pre-entry range. In the present embodiment, the flow velocity of the sphere varies depending on whether the sphere that rides on the first guide plate B1300 is arranged at the upper part of the pre-entry range or the lower part of the pre-entry range. Configured differently.

  This makes it easier to attract the attention of the player who is viewing the ball compared to when the ball flows down at a constant speed, and the ball is placed in the upper part of the pre-entry range (advantageous section). It is possible to easily distinguish whether it is located at the lower part of the range before entering the ball.

  In addition, a sphere can be easily placed on the upper surface side of the first guide plate B1300 that is switched to the open state by being replaced with the second guide plate B1500.

  FIG. 139 is a front view of the variable winning device B1000. In FIG. 139, the first guide plate B1300 is in an open state, while the second guide plate B1500 is in a closed state. In addition, the spheres BP1 and BP2 illustrated in FIG. In the description of FIG. 139, FIG. 137 (a) is referred to as appropriate.

  From the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state as the ball BP1 is detected as the predetermined number of balls. In this case (see FIG. 139), as long as the ball BP2 is on the inclined upper surface of the extended support portion B1212 until the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state (for example, the interval between rounds is set to 0.04 seconds). The ball BP2 rides on the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream member B1320 of the first guide plate B1300.

  More specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 137 (a), the sphere BP2 passes through the projecting portion B1211 where the sphere BP1 is disposed immediately above the extending support portion B1212, and then the left side of the extending support portion B1212. Although it is possible to flow down the inclined upper surface, when the first guide plate B1300 is opened before flowing down, the upstream member B1320 sinks below the center of the ball BP2 and supports the ball BP2 from below.

  Thereby, the ball BP2 rolls on the rolling surface B1311 of the first guide plate B1300 and can pass through the first specific winning opening B1001. Thus, in the present embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state before the ball BP2 that has been guided halfway to the opened second guide plate B1500 passes through the second specific winning opening B1002. Even in this case, the sphere BP2 is configured to easily ride on the first guide plate B1300.

  Therefore, although the ball BP2 is different from the second specific winning opening B1002 that was initially guided, the ball BP2 enters the first specific winning opening B1001, and therefore, from the ball that has reached the pre-entry range in the special gaming state. Generation of a sphere (hereinafter also referred to as “zero ball”) toward the out port 66 (see FIG. 124) can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the sphere falling from the inclined surface B1223 after the sphere BP2 is disposed above the sphere BP2 (upper range before entering the ball), the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state. It is easier to be saved by the first guide plate B1300 than the ball BP2. Thereby, when switching the state of 1st guide plate B1300 and the state of 2nd guide plate B1500, the possibility that the situation where a ball will spill under 1st guide plate B1300 and 2nd guide plate B1500 will occur is reduced. Can do.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the definition of the interval between rounds. For example, it may be a period from when the guide plates B1300, B1500 that have been opened are switched to the closed state until the next time the guide plates B1300, B1500 are switched to the open state, or the guide plates B1300, B1500 are driven. Focusing on the solenoids B1400 and B1600, the energized solenoids B1400 and B1600 may be switched to the non-excited shell, and then the solenoids B1400 and B1600 may be switched to the excited state.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the interval between rounds is set with a length capable of suppressing the spilling sphere. Therefore, the difference in the number of spilling balls can be reduced between a game mode in which the ball launch is stopped in accordance with the interval between rounds and a game mode in which the ball launch is continued without being stopped. Therefore, it is possible to improve the equality of the profits obtained by the player.

  In FIG. 139, in addition to the sphere BP2, a sphere that arrives later falls from the inclined surface B1223 to the first guide plate B1300. Here, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are designed not to contact the rolling ball on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300 as described above, but until the first guide plate B1300 is reached ( During the fall, the sphere may collide with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211.

  The action caused by the collision between the falling ball and the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 will be described. It is unclear whether the falling ball is located on the side close to the base plate 60 (the rear side of the flow path) or the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) side (the front side of the flow path). However, the case where it is arranged at the front side portion of the flow path is more likely to come into contact with the projecting portion B1211 arranged close to the inclined surface B1223.

  On the other hand, when the sphere is arranged on the rear side of the flow path, it is not without the possibility of coming into contact with the protruding portion B1140. For example, when the spheres collide with each other on the inclined surface B1223 and fall in a state where the horizontal component of the flow velocity of the sphere increases, the sphere also contacts the protruding portion B1140 arranged slightly apart from the inclined surface B1223. obtain.

  In this way, the sphere can collide with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 regardless of the front-rear arrangement of the falling sphere. The ball that collides with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is displaced in the front-rear direction along the curvature of the tip of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211, collides with the opposite wall surface, jumps, and collides with the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 again. The front and rear collision will be repeated several times.

  Due to this collision, the speed of the sphere decreases in the left-right direction, and the speed of the sphere mainly includes a component in the drop direction. Therefore, even when a ball rides on the rolling surface B1311 of the guide member B1310 or the rolling surface B1321 of the upstream side member B1320 whose tilting direction is opposite to the tilting direction of the tilted surface B1223, the first It is possible to shorten the time until the ball enters the specific winning opening B1001.

  More specifically, when the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are omitted, the ball that passes through the inclined surface B1223 and rides on the first guide plate B1300 rolls along the inclination of the rolling surface B1311 or the rolling surface B1321. After decelerating in the process of making, it flows down to the opposite side (the first specific winning port B1001 side).

  In this case, the ball moves away from the first specific winning opening B1001 after landing on the rolling surface B1311 or the rolling surface B1321 until it is decelerated and then flows down including the distance of the distance. One specific winning opening B1001 will be passed. For this reason, the period until the ball dropped from the inclined surface B1223 passes through the first specific prize opening B1001 tends to be long, and it is difficult to digest the special gaming state in a short time.

  In addition, while the ball that first landed on the rolling surface B1311 or the rolling surface B1321 rolls toward the first specific winning opening B1001, the ball that has fallen from the inclined surface B1223 after that ball is It is easy for a situation of landing between the landing ball and the first specific winning opening B1001 to occur, and the balls collide with each other and are easily guided to the first specific winning opening B1001.

  On the other hand, since the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 can reduce the velocity component in the left-right direction of the sphere by abutting the sphere before landing on the first guide plate B1300, the first identification of the sphere is possible. The flow down to the winning opening B1001 can be shortened, the occurrence of collision between balls can be suppressed, and the occurrence of excess winnings can be suppressed.

  In this way, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 have different effects depending on the state of the variable winning device B1000. That is, on the premise that the sphere flows down from the inclined surface B1223 side, when the second guide plate B1500 having an inclination on the same side as the inclination of the inclined surface B1223 is in an open state, the ball rides on the second guide plate B1500. In the open state of the first guide plate B1300 having a slope opposite to the left and right sides of the inclined surface B1223, the first guide plate B1300 is ridden. It functions as a drop direction adjusting means for reducing the horizontal component of the flow velocity of the previous sphere and bringing the drop direction of the sphere to the vertical direction.

  With reference to FIG. 140, the flow-down mode of the sphere that reaches the range before entering the ball and rolls on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 will be described.

  140 (a) and 140 (b) show rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, B1521, a right upper arrangement inclined surface B1213, and an upper left arrangement inclination that schematically show the movement trajectory of the sphere rolling in the pre-entrance range. It is a front schematic diagram of surface B1214.

  The rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 are shown by solid lines in a state where they are arranged so as to overhang and receive the balls, and are arranged outside (rear side) of the pre-entrance range. An unacceptable state is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  That is, in FIG. 140 (a), the open state of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137) is shown, and in FIG. 140 (b), the open state of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139) is shown. .

  140 (a) and 140 (b) illustrate the movement trajectory of the sphere center BCP in order to explain the movement trajectory of the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521. That is, the movement trajectory of the center BCP of the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in the opened state of the second guide plate B1500 is shown as a left inclined trajectory BKL1 as a straight line descending to the left (FIG. 140). (See (a)), the movement trajectory of the center BCP of the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 and the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 in the opened state of the first guide plate B1300 is shown as a right-inclined trajectory BKL2 as a straight line descending to the right. (See FIG. 140 (b)).

  Here, when the second guide plate B1500 in the open state is switched to the closed state and the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state with an interval between rounds (in this embodiment, 0.04 seconds), The center BCP of the sphere can be displaced downward. If the center BCP after the downward displacement is on the upper side of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 and the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213, the front side ends of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 switched to the open state You can rescue the ball by letting it sink into the lower hemisphere of the ball. Therefore, the vertical relationship between the arrangement of the center BCP of the sphere after the downward displacement and the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 is important.

  The descending displacement of the sphere at the interval between rounds (0.04 seconds in this embodiment) is calculated as a free fall (approximately 7.84 mm in this embodiment), and the amount of the sphere that has been displaced downward from the left inclined locus BKL1 by that amount is calculated. A trajectory in which the center BCP can be arranged is illustrated as a trajectory BKD1 after descending (see FIG. 140 (a)). Similarly, a trajectory in which the center BCP of a sphere displaced downward from the right inclined trajectory BKL2 can be arranged is illustrated as a trajectory BKD2 after descending.

  Trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 after descending are illustrated as lines connecting points where the center BCP of the sphere after free fall can be arranged. For this reason, the line form differs between the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214, which is a range in which free fall is disturbed, and the other ranges.

  That is, the descending trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 are shown in parallel with the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 above the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 or the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214. On the left and right outer sides of the inclined surface B1214, they are illustrated as lines (parallel straight lines in this embodiment) offset downward from the left inclined locus BKL1 or the right inclined locus BKL2 across a slight connection range.

  When switching the state in which the first guide plate B1300 is opened after the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state, the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 are arranged below the center BCP of the sphere. If switching is performed, the front side ends of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 can be embedded in the lower hemisphere of the sphere, and the sphere can be rescued.

  In other words, in the left-right direction arrangement in which the trajectory BKD1 after the descent is arranged above the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, the balls that have dropped from the rolling surfaces B1511, B1521 can be rescued by the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sphere arranged at the upper part of the pre-entrance range (right side of the apex position of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140 (a)) can be rescued without omission. On the other hand, among the spheres arranged in the lower part of the pre-entrance range (left side of the apex positions of the upper right arranged inclined surface B1213 and the upper left arranged inclined surface B1214 in FIG. 140 (a)), the trajectory BKD1 after descending A sphere arranged on the left side of the position of intersection with the rolling surface B1321 tends to be a spilling sphere.

  In particular, since the ball that rolls in the pre-entrance range has a speed component in the left-right direction, the falling state after the second guide plate B1500 is closed is not the vertical direction but the vertical displacement. And a horizontal displacement is a fall along the combined parabola. Therefore, even if the downward displacement amount in the interval between rounds is as described above (about 7.84 mm in this embodiment), the position in the left-right direction is the inclination of the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 on which the sphere was rolling. Since it is closer to the accompanying rolling direction (left direction in this embodiment), the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321 with respect to the center BCP of the sphere is closer to the upper side than in the case of free fall in the vertical direction. A spilling sphere is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, since it is configured to prevent a plurality of spheres from being arranged at the lower part of the pre-entrance range, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the sphere falling from the lower part of the pre-entry range. can do. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of a zero sphere can be suppressed.

  The descending trajectories BKD1 and BKD2 that descend by about 7.84 mm described in FIG. 140 correspond to the interval between rounds in the present embodiment, and are changed according to the length of the interval between rounds. The

  In the present embodiment, the rolling surfaces B1511 and B1521 are arranged on the same straight line when viewed from the front, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. By changing the design of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 based on the trajectory after descending corresponding to the interval between rounds, a variable winning device with fewer spilling balls can be manufactured.

  For example, when the interval between rounds becomes longer than the value (0.04 seconds) in the present embodiment, the lower line is arranged below the rolling surfaces B1311, B1511 of the guide members B1310, B1510. Although there is a possibility, the design is changed so that the arrangement of the guide members B1310, B1510 with respect to the upstream members B1320, B1520 is shifted downward (the downstream end of the upstream members B1320, B1520 and the upstream of the guide members B1310, B1510) By forming a step between the side end portions), it is possible to obtain a structure that has an effect of preventing a spilling ball as in the present embodiment.

  It should be noted that the protruding side tip portions of the guide members B1300 and B1500 are shown to be thick, but the front-rear direction contact area between the protruding side tip portion and the ball when protruding and displaced to the front side You may comprise so that may become small. Thereby, it can be made easy to prevent the situation where the ball is sandwiched between the guide members B1300 and B1500 and the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 and the vehicle stops. In this case, the arrangement of the rolling surfaces B1311, B1321, B1511, and B1521 shown in FIG. 14-2 corresponds to the upper edge of the overhanging front end portion.

  In the present embodiment, the interval between rounds is set to be short for the purpose of preventing the falling sphere. However, the interval between rounds may be set to be long (for example, 2 seconds) while allowing the occurrence of the falling sphere. Moreover, you may set arbitrarily between rounds with a long interval between rounds, and between rounds with a short interval between rounds.

  FIG. 141 is a partial front enlarged view of the game board 13 showing the vicinity of the variable prize apparatus B1000. As shown in FIG. 141, a sorting apparatus B1800 configured to be operable in conjunction with the variable prize apparatus B1000 is disposed above the variable prize apparatus B1000. Due to the effect resulting from the configuration of the variable winning device B1000, the arrangement range of the sorting device B1800 is twisted.

  That is, conventionally, a plurality of variable winning devices have been arranged below the second winning port 640. However, in this case, the range required for arranging a plurality of variable prize-winning devices tends to increase in the vertical direction, and it is difficult to create a range for arranging a movable mechanism that acts on the flow of a sphere like the sorting device B1800. It was. Although it is conceivable that the second winning opening 640 is arranged at the upper side and the range is twisted, this causes a reduction in the degree of freedom of arrangement of the configuration of the through gate 67 and the nail on the upstream side thereof. Therefore, it was not preferable.

  On the other hand, the variable winning device B1000 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are arranged on the left and right rather than being stacked up and down, and the first specific winning port By adopting a configuration in which the vertical height of the right inclined trajectory BKL2 guiding the ball to B1001 and the vertical height of the left inclined trajectory BKL1 guiding the ball to the second specific prize opening B1002, a plurality of specific prize winning holes B1001 are adopted. , B1002, the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B1000 can be suppressed.

  Further, the right inclined trajectory BKL2 and the left inclined trajectory BKL1 intersect so that the trajectories of the spheres partially overlap each other, so that the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) Even if it is a case where at least a part of the game area is limited to a front-rear width (about 19 mm in this embodiment) that allows one sphere to pass through, the right-inclined trajectory BKL2 and the left-inclined trajectory Both the left and right lengths of BKL1 can be sufficiently secured.

  In the present embodiment, the vertical height of the right slope locus BKL2 and the vertical height of the left slope locus BKL1 are equal over the entire region, so that the variable prize-winning device B1000 including the plurality of specific prize openings B1001, B1002 Although the case where a vertical dimension can be suppressed was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, it may be configured such that at least a part of the vertical height of the right inclination locus BKL2 is equal to at least a part of the vertical inclination of the left inclination locus BKL1. That is, the right inclination locus BKL2 and the left inclination locus BKL1 may intersect at a left-right asymmetric position, or the length of the right inclination locus BKL2 may be different from the length of the left inclination locus BKL1. .

  The sorting device B1800 includes a plate-like member whose left end is rotatably supported by the base plate 60, and is postured in conjunction with the state switching of the second drive device B1600 (see FIG. 134) by a mechanism (not shown). Configured to change. That is, when the second solenoid B1610 of the second driving device B1600 is excited, the posture is inclined downward to the right (see the imaginary line portion in FIG. 141), and when the second solenoid B1610 is not excited, the posture is inclined downward to the left. (See the solid line portion in FIG. 141).

  Various modes are exemplified as a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the second driving device B1600 to the sorting device B1800. For example, the back side surface of the base plate 60 is moved from the rotating tip of the sorting device B1800. A rod-shaped portion is provided so as to project beyond the engagement member, and an engagement member that engages with the rod-shaped portion is disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 so as to be laterally displaceable, and the engagement member is a linear motion member of the second drive device B1600. You may make it connect with B1620. In this case, as the engaging member is displaced to the right, the engaging position with the rod-shaped portion is formed so as to be displaced downward (for example, formed from a shape inclined downward to the left in front view). Thus, the attitude of the sorting device B1800 can be changed by the driving force generated by the second driving device B1600.

  The sphere flow paths BL1 and BL2 branched by the sorting device B1800 will be described. When the second driving device B1600 (see FIG. 134) is in a non-excited state, the allocating device B1800 is maintained in a downwardly inclined posture, so that the sphere is likely to flow along the left-side flow path BL1.

  The sphere that flows down in the left flow path BL1 flows down to the left along the nail planted in the left side of the sorting device B1800, and enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260 at a branch point set by the nail. It is branched into a spherical channel and a channel reaching the inclined surface B1243.

  Therefore, the easiness of facing the sphere to the ball guide receiving portion B 1260 can be set by the arrangement mode of the nails implanted on the left side of the sorting device B 1800. In the present embodiment, the sphere branched to the flow path reaching the inclined surface B 1243 and the sphere branched to the flow path capable of entering the ball guide receiving portion B 1260 are distributed at a ratio of about 2: 1. The arrangement of the nails is set so that

  Therefore, as exemplified in the present embodiment, when the ball guide receiving portion B 1260 is configured as the general winning opening 63 and the number of winning balls is set to 3, the sorting device B 1800 during the time reduction or the probability change. Each time three balls flow down on the left flow path BL1, one of the balls enters the ball guide receiving part B1260 and the three balls are paid out as prize balls. Ball loss during probability change can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the second driving device B1600 is excited, the sorting device B1800 is inclined to the right, so that the sphere is likely to flow along the right flow path BL2. The sphere that flows down on the right flow path BL2 reaches the inclined surface B1223.

  Here, the progress of the special game state using the variable winning device B1000 will be described. In the special game state, as described above, the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 that is normally closed is a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or 10 balls (prescribed number of balls). The operation to be released is repeated a maximum of 15 times (15 rounds) until winning a prize, and it is set in various manners whether the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened in each round. be able to. In the following description, the state in which the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened is also simply referred to as “round”.

  For example, it is possible to set so that the first specific prize opening B1001 is opened in all rounds, or it is possible to set so that the second specific prize opening B1002 is opened in all rounds. It is also possible to interweave the round in which the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened and the round in which the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. In the present embodiment, the relationship between the round and the specific winning openings B1001, B1002 to be opened is set in advance for each jackpot type to be described later.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot type is jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, which will be described later, the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened in the odd round, and the first specific winning opening B1001 is opened in the even round. (First operation pattern). That is, each time a round progresses, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 to be opened are alternately switched.

  In this case, as a first feature, when the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state, the second solenoid B1610 is excited, whereby the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state, and the sorting device B1800 is tilted and displaced. To do.

  For this reason, even when the second guide plate B1500 is displaced in a displacement mode in which the change in state in the front view, that is, the forward / backward slide displacement is scarce and the state change is easily overlooked, the change in the state in which the sorting device B1800 is in the front view When the second guide plate B1500 is displaced at the same time as the displacement of the second guide plate B1500, the switching of the state of the sorting device B1800 is visually recognized, thereby overlooking the timing at which the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state. Occurrence can be easily prevented.

  As a second feature, the path through which the ball is guided to the variable prize-winning device B1000 is switched, so that the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is disposed upstream of the open side. A sphere can be landed on the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243. Thereby, the mechanism (refer FIG. 137 and FIG. 139) which suppresses the fall of a ball | bowl at the time of switching the opening-and-closing state of 1st guide plate B1300 and 2nd guide plate B1500 can be produced in every round.

  In other words, for example, when a sphere lands on one of the inclined surface B1223 or the inclined surface B1243 (for example, the inclined surface B1223) in a plurality of consecutive rounds, the guide accepts the sphere at the upper part of the range before entering the sphere. The big hit round starts when the plate (corresponding to the second guide plate B1500) is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the opposite guide plate (corresponding to the first guide plate B1300) is switched from the closed state to the open state. Sometimes it is easy to prevent the ball from falling.

  On the other hand, in the next round, the guide plate (corresponding to the first guide plate B1300) that receives the ball at the lower part of the range before entering the ball is switched from the open state to the closed state, and the opposite guide plate (to the second guide plate B1500). Equivalent) is started by switching from the closed state to the open state, but since the guide plate that can be switched to the open state is not disposed below the sphere, it is difficult to prevent the sphere from falling. Therefore, it is difficult to produce the effect of suppressing the fall of the sphere every round.

  On the other hand, in jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C or jackpot a, which will be described later, an inclined surface on which the sphere lands by switching the sphere's flow path alternately between the left flow path BL1 and the right flow path BL2 for each round. B1223 and B1243 can be switched alternately for each round, and the effect of suppressing the fall of the sphere can be produced every round.

  As a third feature, a round in which a ball can be guided to the ball guide receiving unit B1260 and a round in which the ball is not guided to the ball guide receiving unit B1260 are alternately generated. In addition to the sphere, a round in which a prize ball can be expected to be paid out by entering the ball guidance receiving part B1260 and a round in which time is likely to be shortened but a prize ball cannot be paid out by entering the ball guidance receiving part B1260 are alternated. Can be generated.

  Here, the round game ends when a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002. The shortest time of the ball launch interval is limited to a constant (in this embodiment, 0.6 second interval), thereby limiting the shortest time that a specified number of balls can reach the variable winning device B1000.

  When the balls flow down the right flow path BL2 and reach the variable winning device B1000, all the balls that have flowed downstream from the sorting device B1800 reach the variable winning device B1000. It is possible to enter the winning opening B1002. Accordingly, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is such that the tenth ball enters the second specific prize opening B1002 from the start of the launch of the first ball that can enter the second specific prize opening B1002. It will be time to ball.

  On the other hand, when the balls flow down the left flow path BL1 and reach the variable winning device B1000, all the balls that have flowed downstream from the sorting device B1800 do not reach the variable winning device B1000, but one in three. The balls are entered into the ball guide receiving unit B1260 at the rate of the number, and do not reach the first specific winning port B1001 of the variable winning device B1000.

  In this case, it is not possible to enter all the launched balls into the first specific prize opening B1001, and in order to enter a prescribed number of balls into the first specific prize opening B1001, more balls than the prescribed number are launched. It is necessary to do. More specifically, it is necessary to fire 1.5 times as many balls as the specified number.

  Therefore, the time required from the launch of the ball to the end of the round game is such that the fifteenth ball from the start of the launch of the first ball that can enter the first specific prize opening B1001 enters the first specific prize opening B1001. It will be time to ball.

  In this way, since the number of shot balls required to reach a prescribed number of balls to the variable winning device B1000 can be varied 1.5 times between consecutive rounds, rounds and rounds that require a short round of game play Rounds that take a long time to play can be generated. Thereby, it is possible to easily perform control for adjusting the time required for execution (digestion) of the jackpot game.

  In addition, since a round with a short time required for a round game and a round with a long time required for a round game occur alternately, it is possible to easily avoid giving the player the impression that the big hit game is extended.

  Note that the probability of entering the ball guide receiving portion B 1260 can be easily changed by changing the design of the nail placement position. For example, if the design is such that one in two balls is guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the time required for the round game in which the ball flows down on the left flow path BL1 can be further extended. Further, for example, if the design is such that one ball out of 10 balls is guided to the ball guide receiving portion B1260, the time required for the round game in which the ball flows down on the left flow path BL1 and the round in which the ball flows down on the right flow path BL2 The difference from the time required for the game can be reduced.

  As a fourth feature, the interval between the balls is changed between the time when the first guide plate B1300 or the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state and the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. The timing can be easily changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the entrance mode in the jackpot game from becoming monotonous, and to easily increase the number of winning balls that are paid out before and after the interval between rounds (immediately in the present embodiment) where the payout of balls is likely to be interrupted. Can be configured.

  This will be described by taking as an example a state in which the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state and a ball is being guided to the second specific winning opening B1002. In this case, the sphere that has reached the distribution device B1800 lands on the inclined surface B1223 of the variable prize winning device B1000 along the inclination of the distribution device B1800, and moves toward the second specific prize opening B1002 along the inclination of the inclined surface B1223. Rolling.

  As shown in FIG. 141, the balls that are successively fired land on the upper surface of the second guide plate B1500 along the inclination of the inclined surface B1223. As described above, when the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the sphere passes through the flow path in the lower part of the pre-entrance range (downstream side with respect to the extended support part B1212) in the pre-entrance range. It takes 0.5 seconds, and it takes 0.5 seconds to pass between the projecting parts when passing through the flow down path in the upper part of the pre-entrance range (upstream side with reference to the extended support part B1212). Since there are three installation parts B1140 and B1211, 1.0 second is required.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 141, after the ball BP3 gets on the second guide plate B1500 and reaches the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (about 1.5 seconds), the two balls launched later BP4 and BP5 can easily ride on the second guide plate B1500 (since the firing interval is 0.6 seconds, the time required to fire the three balls BP3, BP4 and BP5 is about 1.2 seconds). Further, there is a sphere BP6 that reaches the inclined surface B1223 beyond the sorting device B1800 even if it does not reach the second guide plate B1500.

  When the ball BP3 shown in FIG. 141 is detected by the second detection sensor B1250 as the specified number of balls of the big hit round constituted by the open state of the second guide plate B1500, the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state. After that, the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state after an interval between rounds (in this embodiment, about 0.04 seconds).

  In this case, since the centers BCP of the balls BP4 and BP5 are both disposed above the first guide plate B1300, the first guide plate B1300 falls below the first guide plate B1300 before the open state is formed. This can be avoided (see FIGS. 140 (a) and 140 (b)).

  When the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the balls BP4 and BP5 flow down toward the first specific winning opening B1001 along the inclination of the first guide plate B1300. As described above, in the relationship with the sphere rolling in the lower part of the pre-entrance range (downstream side of the extended support part B1212) in the pre-entrance range, the projecting part B1140 and the projecting arrangements arranged on the left and right Since the part B1211 is configured not to contact the ball, the balls BP4 and BP5 are guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 without being decelerated by the protruding part B1140 and the protruding part B1211 arranged on the left and right. Is done.

  At that time, the ball passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 in the order of the ball BP5 and the ball BP4. That is, the sphere BP4 closer to the second specific winning opening B1002 passes through the first specific winning opening B1001 later than the sphere BP5 arranged away from the second specific winning opening B1002.

  Further, since the sphere BP6 also comes into contact with the projecting portion B1140 and the projecting portion B1211 disposed on the left and right sides, the speed component in the left-right direction is reduced, so that the first swiftness immediately after landing on the first guide plate B1300 Enter the specific winning opening B1001.

  Thus, immediately after the state is switched from the open state of the second guide plate B1500 to the open state of the first guide plate B1300, the balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 are continuously displayed in a short time in the first specific winning opening B1001. A lot of prize balls are paid out.

  That is, while the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in the open state, a ball has entered at an interval of about 0.5 seconds, but the second guide plate B1500 is switched to the closed state, Immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the three balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 enter the first specific winning opening within about 0.5 seconds. As a result, in the jackpot game, due to the constant interval between the balls, it is possible to notify the entrance mode and effects associated with the entrance (for example, the number of prize balls to be displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81). The display effect to be displayed and the sound output effect to be output for the same purpose) can be reduced, and the player's attention to the entry mode and effect can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched, the attitude of the sorting device B1800 is switched, and the flow path of the sphere is switched to the left flow path BL1, so the state of the first guide plate B1300 is changed. It is a configuration in which it is easy to have time before the sphere that has reached the sorting device B1800 after reaching the first guide plate B1300.

  Therefore, without taking measures, the payout of the winning ball is easily interrupted, and it is easy for the player to feel that the winning ball obtained by the jackpot game is small, or that the jackpot game is extended, and the player's interest is reduced. There is a risk of inviting.

  On the other hand, according to this embodiment, as described above, immediately after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the plurality of balls BP4, BP5, and BP6 are entered into the first specific winning opening B1001. As a result, the number of prize balls to be paid out (reserved) is secured.

  For this reason, the first spheres BP4, BP5, and BP6 are used for the prize balls that are paid out before the ball that has reached the sorting device B1800 after entering the first specific prize opening B1001 after the state of the first guide plate B1300 is switched. Since it can be covered with a prize ball accompanying the entry to the specific prize opening B1001, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being interrupted even when the ball flow path is long as in this embodiment. be able to. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that there are few prize balls obtained in the jackpot game or feeling that the jackpot game is extended.

  When the first guide plate B1300 is opened and the sphere flows down the left flow path BL1, a part of the spheres enter the sphere guide receiving portion B1260, and as a result, formed on the upper surface of the first guide plate B1300. Since the number of balls arranged in the upper part of the range before entering the ball is less than two, the second guide plate B1500 is opened after the first guide plate B1300 is switched to the closed state. The increase in payout accompanying the entry into the second specific prize opening B1002 that can occur immediately after being switched to is the same as that described above for the balls BP4, BP5, BP6, etc. (that is, the second opening / closing plate B1500 is switched to the closed state) After the first opening / closing plate B1300 is switched to the open state, the amount of payout associated with entering the first specific winning hole B1001 is increased.

  On the other hand, regardless of the opening / closing of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, it is possible to enter the ball guide receiving portion B1260. Since the ball is also paid out by this entry, the monotonousness of the payout and the interruption of the payout of the ball at the interval between rounds are unlikely to occur in the first place.

  The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 142 (a) is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 142 (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 142 (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the second random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 stores, as part of the fixed value data, a first per random number table 202a, a first per type selection table 202b, and a second per random number table 202c. , And a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored.

  The first hit random number table 202a is a data table in which the jackpot determination value of the first hit random number counter that is updated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) is stored. When the value of the first per-random number counter acquired based on the start winning matches with any one of the determination values defined in the first per-random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit.

  The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 142 (b)) is a data table in which a judgment value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the judgment value of the first hit type counter C2 is set to each jackpot type. , And the type of entrance that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 142 (b)).

  If the jackpot A is reached, the 15-round jackpot game is executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the shot balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 49”, the big hit B is associated and defined (see 202b2 in FIG. 142 (b)).

  When the jackpot B is reached, the eight-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1160 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the ball for the shot.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit C is associated and defined (see 202b3 in FIG. 142 (b)).

  When the jackpot C is reached, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 580 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the ball for the shot.

  As described above, in any case, if the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance 64), the variable winning device B1000 operates in the first operation pattern. To do. Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference in the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the big hit game also increases.

  In the jackpot based on the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance slot 64), the jackpot of 15 rounds can be obtained with a probability of 20%, but the jackpot of four rounds with a probability of 50%. So basically you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 79”, The jackpot a is defined in association with it (see 202b4 in FIG. 142 (b)).

  When the jackpot is a, as in the jackpot A, 15 rounds of the jackpot game are executed with the first operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the shot balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “80 to 89”, the big hit b is associated and defined (see 202b5 in FIG. 142 (b)).

  When the jackpot b is reached, the 15 round jackpot game is executed with the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of award balls to be paid out to the player is about 2100 as an increase obtained by subtracting the ball for the launch, and the time required for the jackpot game is likely to be shorter than the time required for the jackpot a.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “90 to 99”, the big hit c is associated and defined (see 202b6 in FIG. 142 (b)).

  When the jackpot c is reached, a 15-round jackpot game is executed according to a third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B1000. In this case, the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player is about 2250 as an increase obtained by subtracting the balls for the fire, and the time required for the jackpot game is likely to be longer than the time required for the jackpot a.

  As described above, when the big win is made in the lottery of the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the operation pattern of the variable winning device B1000 changes according to the type of the big win. Due to the difference in the operation pattern, the number of big hit rounds is not changed, but the number of payouts and the arrival at the variable winning device B1000 are not entered into the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002. A difference can be provided between the occurrence frequency of a ball (hereinafter also referred to as “zero ball”) toward the out port 66 and the time required for the big hit game.

  More specifically, in addition to providing a difference in the number of winning balls depending on whether or not a ball has entered the ball guide receiving part B1260, and forcibly prolonging the time required for the big hit game, Since a difference can be provided in the probability of occurrence, it is possible to provide a difference in profit per unit time (the number of payouts including time efficiency, game efficiency) obtained by the player by the jackpot game due to the difference in jackpot type.

  As a result, in the jackpot breakdown in the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance 640), the jackpot (bonus a) that can receive a large amount of timely, and the time efficiency or payout A jackpot (big hit b, jackpot c) in which at least one of the numbers deteriorates can be provided, and the player's profit balance obtained when the jackpot a is acquired can be improved. As a result, even if the probability of winning the jackpot “a” is maintained large, the jackpots b and c whose profit balance has deteriorated are acquired with a small probability. A gaming machine having a large width can be configured.

  As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a when hitting the normal symbol is reached. It is set to be long (1 second × 2 times). Therefore, since it becomes easy to make a ball enter the 2nd entrance 640, it becomes easy to draw the special symbol 2 lottery. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the probable change state of the special symbol, the probabilistic state of the special symbol that is likely to become a big hit of the special symbol and to become a big hit a (a big hit with a good profit balance) when the big win is repeated. Since it becomes easy, it becomes easy for a player to acquire a lot of prize balls. Thus, the game can be performed while strongly expecting the player to shift to the probabilistic state of the special symbol, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 142 (c)) is a data table in which a hit determination value for a normal symbol is stored. Specifically, “5 to 28” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the normal state of the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 142 (c)). Further, “5 to 204” is defined as a determination value that is a hit of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 142 (c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second per random number counter C4 acquired based on the passing of the ball through the normal entrance 67 and the second per random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol It is determined whether or not it is a win. The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the variation pattern display mode is defined for each display mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 143, the opening pattern of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 in the first control example of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 143 (a) is a diagram showing the opening / closing pattern, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 corresponding to the round of the first operation pattern. FIG. 143 (b) is a diagram showing the opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the second operation pattern. FIG. 143 (c) is a diagram showing the opening / closing pattern of the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 corresponding to the round, the number of payouts, and the game efficiency of the third operation pattern. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a), in the first operation pattern, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 that are opened each time the round is switched are switched alternately. That is, a round in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited and a round in which the first solenoid B1410 is excited alternately occur, and a round in which the sphere flows down the right flow path BL2 and a round in which the sphere flows down the left flow path BL1. It occurs alternately.

  The number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout in the big hit of 15 rounds will be described. Note that the number of payouts due to excess winning at the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

  First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize slot B1001 or the second specific prize slot B1002, and the specified number of each round is 10, so that the first specific prize slot B1001. Alternatively, with respect to the entry to the second specific winning opening B1002, the increased number obtained by subtracting the number of shot balls is 2100 (= (number of rounds × specified number × (number of payouts−1)) = (15 × 10 × (15− 1))).

  Next, in the even-numbered round, three prize balls are paid out by entering the ball guide receiving unit B1260, and ten balls, which are the prescribed number of each round, are the first specific prize opening B1001 or the second specific prize. In contrast to entering the mouth B1002, five balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving unit B1260. , 70 (= (number of rounds × expected number × (number of payouts−1)) = (7 × 5 × (3-1))).

  Therefore, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to payout is 2170 in the big round of 15 rounds when the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened and closed in the first operation pattern.

  The game time required to finish 15 rounds of jackpot will be described based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode continues to fire balls at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the odd-numbered rounds, it can be expected that all of the balls that have been launched enter the second specific winning opening B1002. Therefore, if a prescribed number (10 in this embodiment) of balls is fired, the jackpot game can be terminated. . Therefore, the required game time based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (= number of balls × shoot interval = 10 × 0.6).

  On the other hand, in the even-numbered rounds, it is expected that 2 out of 3 shot balls will enter the first specific winning opening B1001, so 15 (= specified number × 3/2 = 10 × 3/2). ), You can end the jackpot game. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (= number of balls × shoot interval = 15 × 0.6).

  From here, it is calculated that the game time required to finish the jackpot of 15 rounds is 111 seconds (= number of odd rounds × 6 + number of even rounds × 9 = 8 × 6 + 7 × 9).

  According to the first operation pattern, the occurrence of zero balls is suppressed to zero from the above description, so that the game efficiency is about 19.5 [pieces / second] (= (number of winning balls−number of zero balls)). / Game time = (2170-0) / 111).

  As shown in FIG. 143 (b), in the second operation pattern, what is opened in the round game is fixed to the second specific winning opening B1002. That is, only the round in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited is configured and the first solenoid B1410 is maintained in a non-excited state, so that only a round in which the sphere flows down the right flow path BL2 occurs, and the sphere flows in the left flow path BL1. There is no round to flow down.

  The number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout in the big hit of 15 rounds will be described. Note that the number of payouts due to excess winning at the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

  First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the second specific prize opening B1002, and the prescribed number of each round is 10. The increased number obtained by subtracting the sphere is 2100 (= (number of rounds × specified number × (number of payouts−1)) = (15 × 10 × (15-1))).

  Next, since the flow of the sphere is limited to the right-side flow path BL2, no ball enters the ball guide receiving portion B1260. Accordingly, the number of spheres related to the entrance of the sphere guide receiving portion B 1260 is zero.

  Therefore, the number of prize balls expected to increase by payout is 2100 in the big hit of 15 rounds in which the second specific prize opening B1002 is opened and closed in the second operation pattern.

  The game time required to finish 15 rounds of jackpot will be described based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode continues to fire balls at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the second operation pattern, since the balls do not enter the ball guide receiving portion B 1260, it can be expected that all the balls that have been launched enter the second specific winning opening B 1002. Jackpot game can be ended by firing a ball. Therefore, the required game time based on the number of shot balls is 6 seconds (= number of balls × shoot interval = 10 × 0.6).

  From here, it is calculated that the game time taken to finish the big hit of 15 rounds is 90 seconds (= number of rounds × 6 = 15 × 6).

  According to the second operation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the occurrence of a zero sphere. Assuming that an average of two spheres are generated between rounds, the total number of spheres is 28 [pieces] (= 2 × 14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as approximately 23.0 [pieces / second] (= (number of winning balls-number of lost balls) / game time = (2100-28) / 90).

  As shown in FIG. 143 (c), in the third operation pattern, being released by the round game is fixed to the first specific winning opening B1001. That is, since the first solenoid B1410 is composed only of the rounds that are excited and the second solenoid B1610 is maintained in a non-excited state, only a round in which the sphere flows down the left flow path BL1 occurs, and the sphere flows in the right flow path BL2 There is no round to flow down.

  The number of prize balls that are expected to increase due to payout in the big hit of 15 rounds will be described. Note that the number of payouts due to excess winning at the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 (excess payout when more than 10 balls enter) is not considered.

  First, 15 prize balls are paid out by entering the first specific prize opening B1001, and the prescribed number for each round is 10. Therefore, regarding the entry to the first specific prize opening B1001, The increased number obtained by subtracting the sphere is 2100 (= (number of rounds × specified number × (number of payouts−1)) = (15 × 10 × (15-1))).

  Next, there is a payout of 3 prize balls by entering the ball guide receiving part B1260, and 10 balls, which is the prescribed number of each round, enter the first specific prize opening B1001. Since 5 balls can be expected to enter the ball guide receiving unit B1260, the number of the balls entering the ball guide receiving unit B1260 after subtracting the number of shot balls is 150 (= (number of rounds × expected number). × (Number of payouts−1)) = (15 × 5 × (3-1))).

  Therefore, the number of prize balls expected to increase due to payout is 2250 in the big hit of 15 rounds in which the first specific winning opening B1001 opens and closes in the third operation pattern.

  The game time required to finish 15 rounds of jackpot will be described based on the number of shot balls. It is assumed that the game mode continues to fire balls at 0.6 second intervals.

  In each round, it can be expected that 2 out of 3 shot balls will enter the first specific prize opening B1001, so 15 (= specified number × 3/2 = 10 × 3/2) You can end the jackpot game by firing the ball. Therefore, the game time required based on the number of shot balls is 9 seconds (= number of balls × shoot interval = 15 × 0.6).

  From here, it is calculated that the game time taken to finish the big hit of 15 rounds is 135 seconds (= number of rounds × 9 = 15 × 9).

  According to the third operation pattern, it is difficult to eliminate the occurrence of a zero sphere. Assuming that an average of two spheres are generated between rounds, the total number of spheres is 28 [pieces] (= 2 × 14). In this case, the game efficiency can be calculated as approximately 16.5 [pieces / second] (= (number of winning balls−number of lost balls) / game time = (2250−28) / 135).

  Therefore, even when a 15-round jackpot game is executed, the time required for it and the number of payout balls differ. That is, when the jackpot game is executed with the third operation pattern, the game time required for the jackpot game is longer than that when the jackpot game is executed with the first operation pattern, and the game is executed with the first operation pattern. In the case, the game time required for the jackpot game becomes longer than that executed in the second operation pattern.

  Also, when the jackpot game is executed in the third operation pattern, the number of payout prize balls is larger than that in the first operation pattern, and the game is executed in the first operation pattern. However, the number of payout winning balls is larger than that in the second operation pattern.

  Furthermore, paying attention to the game efficiency in the above definition, the game efficiency is higher when the jackpot game is executed in the second operation pattern than in the first operation pattern (23.0> 19). .5), the game efficiency is higher when executed in the first operation pattern than in the third operation pattern (19.5> 16.5).

  Thus, according to this embodiment, the number of winning balls and the game time can be set to be different while the number of jackpot rounds of the special symbol 2 is equal. According to the comparison including the game efficiency, it can be said that the first operation pattern is a balanced operation pattern that always exhibits medium performance in comparison with the second and third operation patterns.

  According to the present embodiment, in the jackpot of the special symbol 1, since the variable winning device B1000 is controlled by the first operation pattern regardless of the jackpot type, it is possible to suppress the generation of the spilling ball as much as possible. When the special symbol 1 is a big hit, since the player has few balls, the player wants to increase the number of balls by one. Since the spilling ball is a sphere that surely becomes a useless ball, the generation of the spilling ball at the jackpot of the special symbol 1 particularly discourages the player. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a spilling ball in the jackpot of the special symbol 1 as much as possible, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, in the jackpot of the special symbol 2, in addition to the first action pattern, the second action pattern in which the time required for the jackpot game is shorter than the first action pattern and the first action pattern. And a third operation pattern in which the number of prize balls increases.

  This makes it possible to slightly change the profit obtained for each jackpot type that has been won, so that it is possible to avoid the jackpot game from becoming monotonous compared to the case where the operation pattern does not change regardless of the jackpot type. it can.

  In the second operation pattern and the third operation pattern, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of a zero ball. However, since the special symbol 2 jackpot is obtained through the special symbol 1 jackpot, the player has already gathered together. I got a prize ball. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of discouragement with respect to the occurrence of the spilling ball, and it is possible to reduce the degree to which the player's interest is reduced by the generation of the spilling ball.

  The twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 144 to 157. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 are slid in the front-rear direction to form an open state has been described. However, the variable winning device B2000 in the twelfth embodiment includes the opening and closing plates B2300 and B2300. The open / close bar B2500 can be configured to be opened by rotating around a predetermined rotation axis. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 144 is a front view of the game board 13 in the twelfth embodiment. In the twelfth embodiment, the components of the game area are configured symmetrically, and the player can always arbitrarily select whether to perform left-handed game or right-handed game, and this is caused by the selection. It is structured to reduce the disadvantages. The variable winning device B2000 is disposed at the lower left and right center of the game area.

  145, 146, and 147 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B2000. 145 shows the closed state of the open / close plate B2300 and the open / close bar B2500, FIG. 146 shows the closed state of the open / close bar B2500 and the open state of the open / close plate B2300, and FIG. 147 shows the open state of the open / close bar B2500 and The closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 is illustrated.

  In FIG. 145, FIG. 146, and FIG. 147, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is shown transparent except for the outer shape, and the shape on the back side thereof is visually recognized in order to improve visibility and facilitate understanding. Possible illustrated.

  The variable winning device B2000 is configured such that almost all of the spheres that have been launched and flow down the left and right sides of the variable timepiece device unit 80 and have reached the inclined surfaces B1223 and B1243 provided on the upper surface are designated as the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific. It is configured to be able to guide to a range (flow path configuration range, pre-entrance range) between the winning opening B1002.

  FIG. 148 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 149 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device B2000. The variable prize-winning device B2000 is formed of a horizontally-long rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side, and the base member B2100 is fastened and fixed to the base member B2100 from the front side. A cover member B2200 that covers the body, an opening / closing plate B2300 that is pivotally supported by being sandwiched between the body member B2100 and the cover member B2200, a first drive device B2400 that drives the opening / closing plate B2300, and a body member An opening / closing rod B2500 supported by being sandwiched between B2100 and the covering member B2200, a second driving device B2600 for driving the opening / closing rod B2500, and a first driving device assembled to the base member B2100 from the back side And a rear cover member (not shown) configured to cover B2400 and the second driving device B2600 from the back side. That. The rear cover member includes a discharge portion that is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The base member B2100 includes other components in place of the base member B1100 described in the first embodiment, instead of including the penetration forming part B1120 and the guide port B1160. That is, the base member B2100 includes a pair of holding holes B1130, a plurality of projecting portions B1140, and a pair of discharge ports B1150 as the parts described above in detail.

  In addition, the base member B2100 is provided with a thin plate member B2110 formed from a horizontally long rectangular thin plate disposed on the front side of the game board as a newly described part, and is recessed in the thin plate member B2110 from the front side to the back side. A first receiving portion B2111 that receives the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 and is partially penetrated, and the shaft portions B2511 and B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500 that are recessed from the front to the back side of the thin plate member B2110. A second housing part B2115 formed partially through, a rotation support part B2170 protruding from the back side of the thin plate member B2110 and supporting the power transmission member B2430 of the first driving device B2400, and a back side of the thin plate member B2110. Guide support that guides the displacement of the driven rotating member B2630 and the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second driving device B2600. And B2180, a mainly includes.

  The first accommodating portion B2111 includes a pair of left and right support recesses B2112 in which the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is accommodated, and a rectangular recess B2113 recessed in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the support recesses B2112. In order to move the loaded portion B2330 of the opening / closing plate B2300 operating along the right end of the rectangular recess B2113 to the front and rear of the thin plate member B2110, the rectangular shape along the direction perpendicular to the straight line connecting the pair of support recesses B2112. And a through hole B2114 formed so as to penetrate therethrough.

  The support recess B2112 has a different structure on the left and right. The right support recess B2112 is formed to be recessed from the front side to the back side with a slightly larger width than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300. In the assembled state, the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is accommodated and covered. The recessed opening is closed by the back surface of the member B2200. That is, the opening / closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2112 and the back surface of the covering member B2200.

  On the other hand, the left supporting recess B2112 is formed to be recessed from the back side to the front side with a slightly larger width than the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300. During assembly, the shaft portion B2320 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is formed. Is accommodated in a manner of being inserted obliquely from the rectangular recess B2113 side. That is, the opening / closing plate B2300 is pivotally supported by the bottom of the front side of the support recess B2112 and the end of the rectangular recess B2113.

  The rectangular recess B2113 has a larger surface area than the plate portion B2310 of the opening / closing plate B2300, and the recessed length is slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate portion B2310. Thereby, in the posture (closed state) in which the open / close plate B2300 is tilted, the plate portion B2310 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess B2113, and the open / close plate B2300 can be prevented from projecting to the front side of the thin plate member B2110.

  The second housing part B2115 is orthogonal to the axial direction of the shaft parts B2511 and B2521 of the opening / closing bar B2500 on the left and right inside of the pair of left and right support recessed parts B2116 in which the shaft parts B2511 and B2521 of the opening and closing bar B2500 are housed. And an opening B2117 that is formed in the shape of a long hole along the flat surface.

  The support recess B2116 is formed as a non-penetrating recess and is formed to be slightly wider than the shaft portions B2511, B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500. In the assembled state, the support recess B2116 accommodates the shaft portions B2511, B2521 of the opening / closing rod B2500. The recessed opening is closed by the back surface of B2200. That is, the opening / closing bar B2500 is pivotally supported by the support recess B2116 and the back surface of the covering member B2200.

  More specifically, the shaft portion B2511 of the left arm portion B2510 is pivotally supported by the back side surface of the left extending portion B1240 and the support recessed portion B2116, and the shaft portion B2521 of the right arm portion B2520 is disposed on the right extending portion B1220. It is pivotally supported by the rear side surface of the flange portion B2271 and the support recess B2116.

  The opening B2117 is formed such that the width in the short direction is slightly longer than the width in the short direction of the opening / closing part B2513 of the opening / closing bar B2500, and the opening / closing part B2513 can enter when the opening / closing bar B2500 is open. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing portion B2513 can be completely accommodated in the opening B2117 when the opening / closing rod B2500 is in the open state (the lowered position), so that a large rotation angle of the opening / closing rod B2500 can be easily secured. A notch extending from the middle position of the vertically long opening to the opposite side of the support recess B2116 functions as an opening through which the action part B2512 of the left arm part B2510 passes to the back side.

  The rotation support portion B2170 has a shaft portion B2171 that rotatably supports the power transmission member B2430, and a uniform projecting height toward the back side of the thin plate member B2110 along a circular shape or an arc shape coaxial with the shaft portion B2171. And a circular rib B2172 formed in a rib shape.

  The circular rib B2172 maintains the distance between the rotational tip B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 and the back surface of the thin plate member B2110 at a certain distance or more. That is, during the operation of the power transmission member B2430, the circular rib B2172 is formed in the entire angle range in contact with the rotating tip B2436.

  The guide support B2180 is provided in a vertical direction on the left side of the shaft B22181 and the shaft B2181 that rotatably supports the driven rotation member B2630 of the second driving device B2600, and is projected in parallel with the shaft B2171. And a pair of guide ridges B2182 formed as long ridges. A pair of guide protrusions B2182 are arranged in parallel, and are configured to be able to guide the vertical displacement of a transmission downstream member B2640 described later.

  The covering member B2200 includes other components instead of the ball guide receiving portion B1260 as compared with the covering member B1200 described in the first embodiment. That is, the covering member B2200 includes a right extension B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250 as the above-described parts.

  The covering member B2200 includes, as newly explained portions, a plate-like main body member B2210 disposed at a predetermined distance from the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 on the front side, and an extension of the right extending portion B1220. And a lid plate portion B2270 extending in a protruding shape from the tip portion toward the left extending portion B1240.

  A range surrounded by the main body member B2210, the left side wall portion in front view of the right extension portion B1220, the right side wall portion in front view of the left extension portion B1240, and the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 (pre-entrance range) The sphere is configured to flow down.

  The main body member B2210 is formed in a long rectangular shape along the inclination of the rotation axis of the open / close bar B2500 and a plurality of projecting portions B2211 projecting toward the back surface toward the flow path of the sphere on the back surface side. A scale opening B2215.

  The projecting portion B2211 is similar in function to the projecting portion B1211 described in each of the above embodiments, but in this embodiment, the projecting portion B2211 cannot be projectingly formed from the long opening B2215, and an open / close bar Due to the need to avoid collision with B2500, the shape is different.

  That is, the projecting part B2211 faces the long opening B2215 while maintaining the effect of decelerating the sphere by making the outer shape of the side facing the flow path side of the sphere equal to the shape of the projecting part B1140. A curved surface B2212 formed slightly apart from the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530 is formed on the side surface, and a downward extending portion B2213 extending downward from a portion above the long opening B2215 is formed.

  The protruding length of the protruding portion B2211 is equal to the protruding length of the protruding portion B1140. In addition, the height position of the lower end portion from the center of the ball rolling the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 in the open state is the same in the protruding portion B1140 and the protruding portion B2211. Therefore, the meandering degree in the front-rear direction of the sphere rolling the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing bar B2500 can be made substantially the same, so that a high deceleration effect can be produced.

  In this way, the contact position is shifted from the center of the sphere, and the protrusion length in the front-rear direction of the protrusion B2211 is increased and the formation length in the vertical direction is shortened. It is possible to make it easier to form the protruding portion B2211.

  In this embodiment, the curved surface B2212 is configured as a relief for moving away from the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530, and a slight gap is provided, but even if the curved surface B2212 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the connecting portion B2530. good. That is, you may design so that curved surface B2212 may be formed along the rear edge part of the displacement locus | trajectory of connection part B2530.

  In this case, the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 can be guided by the curved surface B2212, the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 can be stabilized, and the backward displacement of the connecting portion B2530 in the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500 is curved. It can be regulated by the surface B2212.

  Therefore, for example, even when the gap at the support position is large and the arrangement of the opening / closing bar B2500 is unstable, the connecting portion B2530 is displaced rearward when the opening / closing bar B2500 is closed, and the range before entering the ball Can be prevented from overhanging. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the flow of the sphere from being inhibited.

  The downwardly extending portion B2213 functions as a portion for forming the base end portion of the protruding portion B2211 outside the long opening B2215. The downwardly extending portion B2213 allows the protruding portion B2211 to be viewed from the front. It can project to the inside of the long opening B2215.

  The downward extending part B2213 is shaped to hang from above the long opening B2215, and is configured to partially block the upper part and the rear part of the connecting part B2530 in the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500. Therefore, even when the sphere flows down to the connecting portion B2530, it is possible to prevent the connecting portion B2530 from being loaded by causing the ball to collide with the downward extending portion B2213 before colliding with the connecting portion B2530. .

  In addition to the configuration shown in FIG. 145, only the shape portion of the downwardly extending portion B2213 may be arranged so as to be densely arranged on the left and right above the long opening B2215. Thus, while maintaining the degree of deceleration, the formation range of the downward extending portion B2213 for preventing the collision of the sphere with the connecting portion B2530 can be expanded, so that the load on the connecting portion B2530 can be increased. Can be prevented with probability.

  The long opening B2215 is formed in a shape into which the connecting part B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500 can enter. That is, the shape of the opening is designed so as to avoid the movement locus of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500.

  The body member B2210 is formed from a light transmissive material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball flowing down the pre-entry range. In addition, the aspect of main body member B2210 is not restricted to this, You may be comprised partially impervious, and you may give the device similar to main body member B1210 mentioned above.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, since the back side of the main body member B2210 can be visually recognized through the long opening B2215, even if the main body member B2210 is configured to be opaque, it flows down the range before entering the ball. The sphere can be easily viewed.

  The right extension B1220 has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, but the protrusion support B1225 is not formed (omitted) in order to realize the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300. The left extension B1240 has a configuration substantially the same as that of the first embodiment, but the protrusion support B1245 is not formed (omitted).

  The lid plate portion B2270 is a portion that is formed at a position where the support concave portion B2116 of the base member B2100 can be closed from the front side, and prevents the shaft portion B2521 of the opening / closing bar B2500 from dropping off. That is, the shaft part B2521 of the opening / closing bar B2500 is supported by the support recessed part B2116 and the lid member B2270.

  The opening / closing plate B2300 is a member that switches between a case where the sphere rolls toward the first detection sensor B1230 and a case where the sphere is dropped downward without coming into contact with the sphere due to a difference in posture. A portion B2310, a pair of shaft portions B2320 projecting along the longitudinal direction from the short-side end of the plate portion B2310, and a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B2320 at the root of the shaft portion B2320 on the right side when viewed from the front. And a loaded part B2330 which is extended.

  The plate portion B2310 includes a rolling surface B2311 on which the ball rolls in the ascending posture (open state, see FIG. 146), and the length in the short direction is the ascending posture (open state) along the short side direction. ) In which the distance from the covering member B2200 is equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the right end in the longitudinal direction is close to the first detection sensor B1230.

  In addition, the plate part B2310 includes a chamfered part B2312 that is chamfered in a cross-sectional arc shape at the upper corner part in the rising posture (open state) of the end part on the opposite side of the shaft part B2320.

  The plate portion B2310 is formed in a plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five balls to be placed side by side.

  The loaded portion B2330 includes an arc-shaped entrance prevention portion B2331 extending to the front side of the rolling surface B2311 and an intermediary transmission portion B2332 extending from the end of the entrance portion B2331 on the shaft portion B2320 side. And an engaging portion B2333 that protrudes from the intervening transmission portion B2332 on the right side in the rear view (the side on which the power transmission member B2430 is disposed).

  The engaging portion B2333 is provided with a chamfered portion B2333a that extends to a position where it enters the operation locus of the power transmission member B2430 and is chamfered in an arc shape on the upper surface portion. At the time of contact with the power transmission member B2430, the chamfered portion B2333a is in contact with the power transmission member B2430 instead of the corner portion, so stress concentration at the time of contact between the engagement portion B2333 and the power transmission member B2430 can be avoided. .

  The first drive device B2400 includes a first solenoid B2410 that linearly moves the movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H shape (a shape that includes a concave portion on the top and the bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the first solenoid B2410. ) And a power transmission member B2430 that is rotatably supported by a shaft portion B2171 of the base member B2100 and applies a load to the opening / closing plate B2300 by rotation.

  The tip member B2420 is configured such that the concave portion on the upper side thereof can accommodate the projecting pin B2433 of the power transmission member B2430. Specifically, a recess is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin B2433 accommodated inside while the power transmission member B2430 rotates (see FIG. 151 (c)).

  The power transmission member B2430 mainly includes a disc-shaped main body portion B2431 and an extending portion B2435 extending from the main body portion B2431 in the axial radial direction.

  The main body portion B2431 mainly includes a support hole B2432 through which the shaft portion B2171 is inserted, and a projecting pin B2433 that projects from the vicinity of the outer peripheral portion in parallel to the drilling direction of the support hole B2432.

  The projecting pin B2433 is a part that engages with the tip member B2420, and the projecting pin B2433 is displaced in accordance with the linear operation of the tip member B2420 by switching the excitation of the first solenoid B2410, and the power transmission member B2430 is moved. It rotates.

  The extending part B2435 includes a rotating tip part B2436 formed from an arc shape coaxial with the center of the support hole B2432 at the extending tip part, and a pushing part B2437 protruding from the rotating tip part B2436 to the front side. Prepare.

  The opening / closing bar B2500 has a pair of left and right arm portions B2510, B2520 supported at one end thereof so as to be swingable with respect to the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 and spaced apart in the left-right direction on the front surface side, and the pair of arm portions. B2510 and B2520, and a connecting portion B2530 that connects the other end portion located on the opposite side to the pivot end portion, and is formed in a substantially U shape.

  The opening / closing bar B2500 is configured such that when the arm portions B2510 and B2520 are swung, the connecting portion B2530 is close to and away from the thin plate member B2110 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110, and the arm portions B2510 and B2520 are Left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 are formed at the upper end portion (one end portion) located on the thin plate member B2110 side in the opened state of the open / close bar B2500 so that the left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 protrude from each other. The left and right shaft portions B2511 and B2521 are supported by the support recess B2116 (see FIG. 148) of the thin plate member B2110.

  The connecting portion B2530 is provided on the surface facing the pivot end portion side (one end portion side pivoted by the thin plate member B2110) of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 so as to extend along the longitudinal direction. A moving surface B2531 is provided.

  In the following description, the left arm part may be referred to as a left arm part B2510, and the right arm part may be referred to as a right arm part B2520 to be distinguished.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the left arm portion B2510 is provided adjacent to the opening edge of the second special prize opening B1002, and the rear end portion of the left arm portion B2510 is passed through the opening B2117 of the thin plate member B2110. The thin plate member B2110 is configured to protrude to the rear side.

  In the left arm portion B2510, an action portion B2512 is provided at a position protruding to the rear side of the thin plate member B2110, and the action portion B2512 is configured to be able to be inserted into the transmission downstream member B2640 of the second drive device B2600 from the front side. .

  Accordingly, the open / close bar B2500 is configured to be displaceable (swingable) in an open state and a closed state in accordance with driving (excitation) of the second solenoid B2610. The details of the open state and the open / close state of the open / close bar B2500 will be described later.

  Here, when the open / close bar B2500 swings from the closed state to the open state, the connecting portion B2530 moves downward with the shaft portions B2511, B2521 as the center and moves close to the thin plate member B2110, and conversely from the open state. When swinging in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is moved upward while being separated from the thin plate member B2110 around the shaft portions B2511, B2521 (see FIGS. 154 and 155). That is, the open / close bar B2500 is configured to swing so as to pass the ball on the rolling surface B2531 downward when displaced from the open state to the closed state.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 151 (b) and 152 (b), the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 can pass through the region surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. Thus, the connecting portion B2530 is formed with a length that can be separated from the thin plate member B2110.

  In the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 is separated forward from the thin plate member B2110 so that the ball can pass between the thin plate member B2110, while in the open state, the ball cannot pass between the thin plate member B2110. The connecting portion B2530 is configured to be closer to the front of the thin plate member B2110 than in the closed state.

  That is, the open / close bar B2500 is switched between a closed state and an open state by moving the connecting portion B2530 back and forth on the front side of the thin plate member B2110 as the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 swings. The connecting portion B2530 is separated in front of the thin plate member B2110 so that the sphere can pass between the thin plate member B2110, and the sphere passes downward through a region surrounded by the pair of arm portions B2510, B2520 and the connecting portion B2530. On the other hand, in an open state, the connecting portion B2530 is positioned in front of the thin plate member B2110 so as to receive the ball so that the ball cannot pass between the thin plate member B2110.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, a part of the left arm portion B2510 is located on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. When the ball is prevented from entering and the open / close bar B2530 is in the open state, the left arm portion B2510 retracts from the right side of the opening of the second specific prize opening B1002 to the rear and the ball to the second specific prize opening B1002 It is configured to allow the entry of.

  That is, as the opening / closing bar B2500 is switched between the closed state and the open state, the second specific prize opening B1002 is opened and closed by the left arm portion B2510. Therefore, in the following description, the portion of the left arm portion B2510 that opens and closes the second specific prize opening B1002 is referred to as an opening and closing portion B2513.

  That is, the opening / closing bar B2500 includes an opening / closing part B2513 for closing the ball in the second specific prize opening B1002 so that the ball cannot enter the ball on the inclined lower end side of the rolling surface B2531, and the opening / closing bar B2500 is disposed at the raised position. In the closed state, the opening / closing part B2513 closes the second specific prize opening B1002, and in the open state in which the opening / closing bar B2500 is arranged at the lowered position, the opening / closing part B2513 is configured to open the second specific prize opening B1002. .

  In the present embodiment, the left arm B2510 is formed so as not to overlap with the opening of the second specific prize opening B1002 in the open state by forming the opening / closing part B2513 in a curved shape (J-shaped cross section) that is concave toward the rear. Is configured to retract backward.

  Note that, in a state where the second specific winning opening B1002 is closed by the opening / closing part B2513, a part of the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened (not hidden from the opening direction) with an opening width in which a ball cannot enter. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening right side of the second specific prize opening B1002 may be completely blocked by the opening / closing part B2513.

  In addition, the opening / closing part B2513 is formed in an inclined surface shape in which the right side surface facing the side opposite to the second specific winning port B1002 is inclined toward the second specific winning port B1002 as it approaches the front edge side, and the open / close bar B2500 is in the open state When the state is switched from the closed state to the closed state, the opening / closing part B2513 can be inserted between the second specific winning port B1002 and the ball on the rolling surface B2531 at a position close to the opening of the second specific winning port B1002. It has become.

  In other words, by forming the opening / closing portion B2513 in an inclined surface shape, a ball immediately before entering the second specific prize opening B1002 (a ball immediately before being detected by the second detection sensor B1250) is set as the second specific prize opening B1002. Can be pushed back from.

  Further, when the open / close bar B2500 is in an open state, a part of the open / close part B2513 protrudes to the front side of the thin plate member B2110 and is positioned above the rolling surface B2531 (FIG. 153 (d)). Reference), a ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 in contact with the thin plate member B2110 comes into contact with the opening / closing part B2513.

  Accordingly, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B2531 in contact with the thin plate member B2110 contacts the opening / closing portion B2513 at the lower end of the rolling surface B2531 in the left-right direction, and thus along the inclination of the opening / closing portion B2513. The sphere can be guided to the center of the opening of the second specific prize opening B1002 by separating the sphere from the thin plate member B2110.

  In this way, the opening / closing part B2513 functions to push back the ball just before entering the second specific prize opening B1002, while separating the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 from the thin plate member B2110. It also functions as a guide surface for guiding to the second specific winning opening B1002.

  The right arm portion B2520 is formed in a curved shape (J shape) substantially the same as the left arm portion B2510, and a weight portion B2522 is provided at a connection end portion (the other end portion) with the connection portion B2530. The open / close bar B2500 is configured to be biased from the closed state to the open state.

  That is, in the open / close bar B2500, the weight B2522 is provided on the end side away from the shaft parts B2511 and B2521 pivotally supported by the thin plate member B2110, so that the open / close bar B2500 can be quickly displaced from the closed state to the open state. At the same time, the stability of the open / close bar B2500 in the open state is enhanced by the weight B2522, and the open / close bar B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state due to an impact when the reached ball contacts the rolling surface B2531. It is configured to prevent (suppress).

  As shown in FIG. 148, the weight part B2522 is formed by fitting and fixing a metal weight member B2523 from a side opening of a cylindrical weight fixing part B2522a that opens to the right.

  The weight part B2522 is disposed below the upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200 in the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500, and is provided to be positioned on the front side of the rear side surface of the body member B2210. It is provided so that it may be located under the collar part B2271 of the cover board part B2270, and it prevents that the ball | bowl which flows down contacts the weight part B2522.

  That is, the covering member B2200 is provided with a flange B2271 that prevents the ball from contacting the weight B2522 above the moving range of the weight B2522 on the front side of the thin plate member B2110, and the falling ball is a weight. The opening / closing bar B2500 is prevented from being biased from the closed state to the open state by contacting the part B2522.

  The connecting portion B2530 is formed in a rod shape extending in parallel with the axis of the shaft portions B2511, B2521 (see FIG. 148), and the left end portion of the connecting portion B2530 with the opening / closing rod B2500 supported by the base member B2100. Is located below the right end and is inclined downwardly to the left.

  In the connecting portion B2530, a rolling surface B2531 is formed on the surface facing the pivot end of the pair of arm portions B2510 and B2520 (the surface facing the upper side in the opened state), and the connecting portion B2530 is connected in the opened state. The sphere received by the bar B2530 can be rolled toward the left end which is the lower end of the tilt in the left-right direction.

  Here, the left end portion of the rolling surface B2531 in the opened state of the opening / closing bar B2500 is configured to be positioned at a height position that is substantially aligned with the lower end portion of the opening of the second specific prize winning opening B1002, and on the rolling surface B2531 Is configured to be able to roll toward the second specific winning opening B1002.

  That is, the rolling surface B2531 is provided on the opening / closing bar B2500 so as to incline downward to the downstream side of the flow path of the sphere toward the second specific prize opening B1002 in the opened state of the opening / closing bar B2500. The ball restricted by the part B2530 is made to roll toward the second specific prize opening B1002.

  Further, in the open state, the connecting portion B2530 is configured to be separated to the front side of the thin plate member B2110 at an interval narrower than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 152 (b)), and the open / close bar B2500 is displaced toward the closed state. By this, the space | interval between connecting rod B2530 and thin plate member B2110 can be expanded rapidly to the space | interval more than the diameter of a ball | bowl, and the ball | bowl on rolling surface B2531 can be dropped below.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 145, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is in the closed state, the connecting portion B2530 comes into contact with the upper edge portion B2216 that forms the upper edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200. In the closed state, at least a part of the rolling surface B2531 is opposed to the upper edge B2216.

  In the present embodiment, the entire length of the connecting portion B2530 is configured to contact the upper edge portion B2216 in the closed state. That is, the ball that flows down from above does not come into contact with the rolling surface B2531 in the closed state, and the open / close bar B2500 is prevented from being displaced from the closed state to the open state by contact with the ball. .

  As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the rolling surface B2531 is inclined downward toward the second specific prize opening B1002 in the open state, and is configured to be horizontal in the front-rear direction (front-rear) The direction is composed of non-inclined). Thereby, since the ball rolling on the rolling surface B2531 can be easily displaced back and forth, a deceleration action by contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 can be effectively generated.

  Further, the rolling surface B2531 is formed so that the width dimension is different between the inclined upper end side and the inclined lower end side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the rolling surface B2531 is connected to the belt-shaped first rolling surface portion B2532 located on the left side of the inclined upper end in the left-right direction and the inclined lower end in the left-right direction of the first rolling surface portion B2532. And a second rolling surface portion B2533 having a larger width dimension than the first rolling surface portion B2532.

  The first rolling surface portion B2532 and the second rolling surface portion B2533 are formed in a straight line in which the rear end portion facing the thin plate member B2110 in the open state is continuous over the forming portions of both rolling surface portions B2532, B2533. ing.

  On the other hand, the front end portion located on the main body member B2210 side of the covering member B2200 in the second rolling surface portion B2533 is positioned more forward than the front end portion located on the main body member B2210 side in the first rolling surface portion B2532. Is formed.

  That is, on the opening / closing bar B2500, a step B2534 is formed in the front application portion of the rolling surface B2531, corresponding to the connecting portion of both rolling surface portions B2532, B2533. When the opening / closing bar B2500 is in a closed state, the step B2534 engages from below with an engagement recess B2217 that is recessed upward from the upper left edge of the long opening B2215 of the covering member B2200. Thus, the positional deviation of the opening / closing bar B2500 in the axial direction is prevented (corrected).

  As described above, in the rolling surface B2531, the second rolling surface portion B2533 is widened so as to correspond to the inclined lower end portion where the opening / closing portion B2513 is formed, so that the rolling surface B2531 extends along the inclination of the opening / closing portion B2513. Even if the ball that rolls is guided forward, it can roll on the second rolling surface portion B2533, so that the ball can stably roll on the rolling surface B2531. The second rolling surface portion B2533 is formed with a left-right width exceeding the diameter of the sphere from the right end portion of the opening / closing portion B2513 (the right side surface of the left arm portion B2510).

  The second driving device B2600 includes a second solenoid B2610 that linearly moves the movable member by switching excitation, and a front view H-shape (a shape that includes a concave portion on the top and the bottom) disposed at the tip of the movable member of the second solenoid B2610. ), A driven rotary member B2630 pivotally supported (shaft supported) on the shaft portion B2181 so as to be rotatable in accordance with the lateral displacement of the tip member B2620, and the rotational displacement of the driven rotary member B2630. And a transmission downstream member B2640 that is displaceable and is guided in the vertical direction by the guide protrusion B2182.

  The tip member B2620 is configured such that the lower concave portion thereof can accommodate the projecting pin B2633 of the driven rotation member B2630. Specifically, the recessed portion is formed in a shape that keeps the protruding pin B2633 accommodated inside while the driven rotation member B2630 rotates (see FIGS. 150C and 152C).

  The driven rotation member B2630 includes a disk-shaped main body B2631, a support hole B2632 that is drilled with a diameter (slightly large diameter) through which the shaft B2181 can be inserted into the main body B2631, and an outer diameter side from the main body B2631. A projecting pin B2633 projecting in a columnar shape in parallel with the drilling direction of the support hole B2632 from an extending arm portion extending to the center, and an extending portion B2635 extending from the main body B2631 in the axial radial direction The extending portion B2635 mainly includes a protruding pin B2636 that protrudes in a columnar shape in parallel with the direction in which the support hole B2632 is drilled.

  The projecting pin B2633 is a portion that engages with the tip member B2620. As the tip member B2620 moves linearly by switching the excitation of the second solenoid B2610, the projecting pin B2633 is displaced, and the driven rotation member B2630 is moved. It rotates.

  The protruding pin B2636 protrudes toward the main body plate B2641 side of the transmission downstream member B2640 and can be inserted into the long hole B2643. The distance between the projecting pin B2636 and the support hole B2632 is longer than the distance between the projecting pin B2633 and the support hole B2632. At the tip of the projecting pin B2636, a retaining projection is formed in a direction perpendicular to the projecting direction.

  The retaining protrusion is formed in a shape that can be inserted into the long hole B2643 when the longitudinal direction is aligned, and can be inserted during assembly. The long direction and the long direction of the long hole B2643 are not aligned. Thereby, when the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it can be prevented from dropping from the projecting pin B2636.

  The transmission downstream member B2640 protrudes from the front side as a plate-like main body plate portion B2641 disposed opposite to the back surface side of the thin plate member B2110, and a vertically long protrusion from the left side portion of the main body plate portion B2641. A pair of plates arranged vertically as a wide plate portion in the front-rear direction on the left side of the main body plate portion B2641 and a long hole B2643 formed in the left and right elongated shape in the main plate portion B2641 Part B2644.

  The guided protrusion B2642 has a lateral width slightly shorter than the gap between the pair of guide protrusions B2182. Thereby, since the guided protrusion B2642 can be guided by the guide protrusion B2182, the posture of the transmission downstream member B2640 can be stabilized, and the displacement direction of the transmission downstream member B2640 can be stabilized in the vertical direction. it can.

  The elongated hole B2643 is a through-hole through which the protruding pin B2636 of the driven rotation member B2630 is inserted, and the vertical width of the elongated hole B2643 is slightly longer than the diameter of the protruding pin B2636. The followability of the transmission downstream member B2640 with respect to the displacement can be improved. Further, the long hole B2643 is configured such that the lateral displacement of the projecting pin B2636 can be allowed by forming the lateral width longer than the vertical width.

  The plate part B2644 is arranged so as to sandwich the action part B2512 of the opening / closing bar B2500 in the vertical direction. Thereby, with the displacement of the transmission downstream member B2640 in the vertical direction, a load in the vertical direction is generated from the plate part B2644 to the action part B2512, and the opening / closing bar B2500 can be displaced.

  As described above, the displacement mode of the opening / closing bar B2500 is rotational displacement about the shaft portions B2511 and B2521, so that the action portion B2512 is displaced not only in the vertical direction but also in the front-rear direction. The longitudinal length of the plate portion B2644 is set so that the plate portion B2644 has a positional relationship in which the action portion B2512 is sandwiched in the vertical direction when the action portion B2512 is disposed at any position in the front-rear direction. Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the open / close bar B2500, the allowable displacement of the open / close bar B2500 can be restricted by the arrangement of the plate portion B2644.

  The allowable width will be described in more detail. First, the plate portion B2644 may be only one on the upper side if only switching the state of the opening / closing bar B2500 between the open state and the closed state is considered. As long as there is an upper plate portion B2644a, the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized, and the action portion B2512 is pushed down by the plate portion B2644a in a state where the tip member B2620 is displaced leftward, so that the open / close bar B2500 is closed. (See FIGS. 150 (a) and 150 (c)).

  In this closed state, the center of gravity of the opening / closing bar B2500 is disposed on the weight B2522 side (front side of the shafts B2511, B2521), and therefore the rotation of the weighting part B2522 downward in the opening / closing bar B2500 alone ( (Also referred to as the front-down direction).

  The plate portion B2644a applies a load in the rotational direction (also referred to as the front upper direction) which is the reverse direction of the front lower direction to the opening / closing bar B2500. In this embodiment, the load in the front upper direction is the front lower direction. By exceeding the load, the opening / closing bar B2500 is maintained in the closed state.

  When the second solenoid B2610 is excited and the tip member B2620 is displaced to the right, the plate portion B2644a is displaced upward, so that the load in the direction of pushing down the action portion B2512 from the plate portion B2644a is temporarily reduced. In the present embodiment, the plate portion B2644a is configured to retreat upward from the arrangement range of the action portion B2512 so that the load on the action portion B2512 is eliminated.

  Accordingly, the opening / closing bar B2500 can be displaced forward and downward by the urging force by the weight B2522, and is switched to the open state. If the second solenoid B2610 is de-energized from this state, the plate portion B2644a can push down the action portion B2512 again to constitute a closed state. Thus, if only switching the state of the open / close bar B2500 between the open state and the closed state is considered, only the plate portion B2644a is essential, and the lower plate portion B2644b is unnecessary.

  On the other hand, the plate B2644a alone may cause a problem in the stability of the posture of the opening / closing bar B2500 when the opening / closing bar B2500 is opened. For example, in the open state of the open / close bar B2500, it can be easily assumed that the open / close bar B2500 is displaced by a ball colliding with the open / close bar B2500. However, only the plate portion B2644a is displaced in the front-up direction of the open / close bar B2500. Cannot be regulated.

  Therefore, although the second solenoid B2610 is excited and controlled to maintain the open / close bar B2500 in an open state, the open / close bar B2500 is displaced forward and upward due to the impact of a ball collision, and the closed state is The problem of configuring can occur.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, by disposing the plate portion B2644b below the plate portion B2644a, the displacement of the open / close bar B2500 in the open state is restricted. As a result, the open / close bar B2500 has a ball impact or other disturbance (for example, when a player applies a load to the pachinko machine 10 to move it, a load caused by the displacement of a movable accessory, And the like which are displaced by a load applied from the outside and the like, which constitutes a closed state, can be avoided.

  Next, the state switching of the variable winning device B2000 will be described. 150 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 150 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLb in FIG. 150 (a), and FIG. 150 (c). These are back views of variable prize-winning apparatus B2000 in the arrow CLc direction view of FIG.150 (b).

  151 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 151 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIb in FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 151 (c) These are back views of variable prize-winning apparatus B2000 in the arrow CLIc direction view of FIG. 151 (b).

  152 (a) is a front view of the variable winning device B2000, and FIG. 152 (b) is a top view of the variable winning device B2000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLIB in FIG. 152 (a). These are the back views of variable prize-winning apparatus B2000 in the arrow CLIIIc direction view of FIG. 152 (b).

  153 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize apparatus B2000 along the line CLIIIa-CLIIIa in FIG. 150 (a), and FIG. 153 (b) is a variable prize apparatus B2000 along the line CLIIIb-CLIIIb in FIG. 150 (a). 153 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the line CLIIIc-CLIIIc of FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 153 (d) is a view of CLIIId-CLIIId of FIG. 152 (a). It is sectional drawing of the variable prize-winning apparatus B2000 in a line.

  150, the closed state of the open / close plate B2300 and the closed state of the open / close bar B2500 are illustrated, FIG. 151 illustrates the open state of the open / close plate B2300 and the closed state of the open / close bar B2500, and FIG. 152 illustrates the open / close plate. The closed state of B2300 and the open state of the open / close bar B2500 are shown. Further, in FIGS. 150 to 152, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is transparently illustrated, and the shape on the back side thereof can be visually recognized.

  150 (a), 151 (a), and 152 (a), a polka dot pattern (dot) is added to at least a part of the range in which the sphere cannot pass in the range before entering the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (a), in the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300, the ball prevention portion B2331 is arranged on the left side of the opening of the first specific winning opening B1001, as shown in FIG. As shown in a), the first specific winning opening B1001 is partially blocked to prevent the ball from entering. In the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500, the opening / closing part B2513 is disposed on the right side of the opening of the second specific winning opening B1002, and the second specific winning opening B1002 is partially blocked as shown in FIG. 153 (b). Is prevented from entering the ball.

  In this way, in the state shown in FIG. 150 (a), the ball flowing down the pre-entry range falls down without entering the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002. Become. That is, in the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300, the ball entry preventing part B2331 is disposed so as to partially block the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and in the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500, the opening / closing part B2513 is disposed in the second detection sensor B1250. It arrange | positions so that the opening of may be partially plugged. Therefore, it is possible to physically prevent the ball from passing through the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

  For this reason, an irregular winning (for example, a ball hitting another component or the like is blown in the horizontal direction without being guided by the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing bar B2500, and the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002 Entering the ball), cheating (for example, attracting the ball with a magnet to win a prize, or pulling or shaking the yarn end on the opposite side of the ball that was launched with the yarn attached, It is possible to prevent winning by the act of manipulating the position and winning.

  In addition, the range where the polka dot pattern (dot) is given in FIG. 151 (a) is the addition of the plate portion B2310 of the opening / closing plate B2300 to the range described above in FIG. A polka dot pattern (dot) is erased from the part B2331.

  That is, when the first solenoid B2410 is excited and the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, the gap between the plate portion B2310 and the body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is less than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere opens and closes. The front side of the plate B2300 is configured to be unable to pass downward.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (c), in the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300, the ball entry preventing portion B2331 enters the through hole B2114 and is more than at least the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 (at least of the first specific prize winning opening B1001). By retreating to the back side (from the opening range), the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 is disposed at a position where the opening is not blocked, and the ball entering the first specific winning opening B1001 is not disturbed.

  Therefore, the sphere that flows down the pre-entry range in the state shown in FIG. 151 (a) is guided to the first specific winning opening B1001 and is configured to be able to enter the first specific winning opening B1001.

  In addition, in the range where the polka dot pattern (dot) is attached in FIG. 152 (a), the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500 is added to the range described above in FIG. 150 (a), while the opening / closing portion B2513. The polka dot pattern (dot) has been erased from.

  That is, when the second solenoid B2610 is excited and the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the open state, the gap between the connecting portion B2530 and the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the connecting portion Since the gap between B2530 and the main body member B2210 of the covering member B2200 is less than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is configured so that it cannot pass through the opening and closing bar B2500 downward.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 153 (d), in the open state of the opening / closing bar B2500, the opening / closing portion B2513 enters the opening B2117 and is located on the back side (at least of the second specific prize opening B1002). By retreating to the outer side of the opening range, the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 is disposed at a position where the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 is not blocked, and the ball entering the second specific winning opening B1002 is not disturbed.

  Therefore, the sphere that flows down the pre-entry range in the state shown in FIG. 152 (a) is guided to the second specific winning opening B1002 and is configured to be able to enter the second specific winning opening B1002. In order to enter the first specific winning port B1001, the first specific winning port B1001 is blocked by the ball preventing part B2331 of the opening / closing plate B2300, and the right arm part B2520 and the connecting part B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500 are This is prevented by being arranged in the opening direction of one specific winning opening B1001.

  Hereinafter, switching of excitation of the solenoid will be described. In FIG. 150 (c), both the first solenoid B2410 and the second solenoid B2610 are not energized and are in a non-excited state. This is the standby state of the variable winning device B2000, which is maintained in the normal state before the game starts, and the variable winning device B2000 is maintained in this state for most of the operating time.

  Mainly in the special game state, as shown in FIGS. 151 (c) and 152 (c), the first solenoid B2410 or the second solenoid B2610 is energized and excited, so that the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 The state is switched.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (c), the second solenoid B2610 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the first solenoid B2410 is excited, the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, and the first detection sensor B1230 is first identified. The ball can be guided to the winning prize opening B1001.

  The opening / closing plate B2300 is rotationally displaced about the axis of the shaft portion B2320 (see FIG. 153 (a)) when the engagement portion B2333 is pushed down from the power transmission member B2430 in the state switching to the open state. The details of the state switching and the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300 will be described. That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG.

  When the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state, the first solenoid B2410 is in an excited state, the rotational tip B2436 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced counterclockwise as viewed from the back, and the engaging portion B2333 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is pushed in. It is pushed into part B2437 (see FIG. 148).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a) and 153 (c), the engaging portion B2333 of the opening / closing plate B2300 is operated by the power transmission member B2430 when the opening / closing plate B2300 starts to operate from the closed state. When the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state while being arranged on the trajectory BE1, it is pushed outward (front side) of the motion trajectory BE1 along the rotational axis direction of the power transmission member B2430. The operation locus BE1 is illustrated as an outer shape of a movement locus of a portion including the pushing portion B2437.

  Therefore, the load transmitted from the opening / closing plate B2300 to the power transmission member B2430 after the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state is not the operation direction (rotation direction) of the power transmission member B2430, but the surface forming the rotation direction. And applied in the vertical direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load around the shaft B2320 (see FIG. 153 (a)) applied to the opening / closing plate B2300 from being transmitted to the first solenoid B2410 via the power transmission member B2430.

  Thus, once the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the first solenoid B2410 for maintaining the opening / closing plate B2300 in the open state is prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the opening / closing plate B2300. Can do. Therefore, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the first solenoid B2410 to the opening / closing plate B2300.

  In this way, even when a load that fluctuates is applied to the opening / closing plate B2300, the opening / closing plate B2300 can be maintained in an open state without being affected by the load. In addition, the load given by the weight of a ball | bowl is illustrated as a fluctuating load applied to the opening-and-closing board B2300. That is, for example, the opening / closing plate B2300 has a configuration in which a sphere is landed on the rolling surface B2311. Therefore, when the sphere is landed, a load due to the weight of the sphere is received. It can be said that the load applied to the opening / closing plate B2300 can vary.

  When the first solenoid B2410 is in a non-excited state, the extending portion B2435 of the power transmission member B2430 is displaced upward, the load on the opening / closing plate B2300 is eliminated, and the opening / closing plate B2300 is rotated in such a manner that the plate portion B2310 is displaced downward. Dynamic displacement. Due to this rotational displacement, the ball entry prevention part B2331 projects so as to close the first specific winning opening B1001 (see FIG. 153 (a)).

  That is, the ball entry prevention unit B2331 closes the opening of the first specific prize winning opening B1001 in a manner of narrowing from the rear side edge. In the present embodiment, the inner surface on the back side of the first specific winning opening B1001 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100. The opening of the mouth B1001 can begin to narrow. Thereby, the 1st specific prize opening B1001 can be closed quickly.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (c), the first solenoid B2410 is maintained in a non-excited state, and when the second solenoid B2610 is energized, the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the open state, and the second detection sensor B1250 performs the second identification. The ball can be guided to the winning opening B1002.

  When the state of the open / close bar B2500 is changed to the open state, the plate part B2644 is displaced upward and the load in the push-down direction applied to the action part B2512 of the open / close bar B2500 is released, so that the shaft parts B2511, B2521 (FIG. 153 (b)) is pivotally displaced about the axis. That is, it is rotationally displaced about an axis perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 153 (b). The details of the state switching and the open state of the opening / closing bar B2500 will be described.

  When the open / close bar B2500 is in the open state, the second solenoid B2610 is in an excited state. That is, when the second solenoid B2610 is energized and energized, the driven downstream member B2640 is displaced counterclockwise as viewed from the rear, and the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced upward to be provided to the opening / closing bar B2500. The open load is released, and the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the open state.

  In the excited state of the second solenoid B2610, the plate part B2644b is disposed below the action part B2512 of the opening / closing bar B2500, and restricts the forward rotation of the opening / closing bar B2500. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the opening / closing bar B2500 from changing its state toward the closed state due to an impact that may be caused by a ball colliding with the opening / closing bar B2500.

  Note that the displacement of the open / close bar B2500 from the closed state to the open state is a downward displacement, and a displacement restricting protrusion B2514 (see FIG. 149) that protrudes in parallel with the axial direction from the left arm B2510 is provided in the base member B2100. An open state is formed at the abutting position. Therefore, it is unlikely that the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the closed state due to an increase in the load caused by the weight of the ball riding on the rolling surface B2531 of the open / close bar B2500, and it is rather easy to maintain the open state.

  Therefore, once the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the open state, the driving force of the second solenoid B2610 for maintaining the open / close bar B2500 in the open state can be prevented from fluctuating due to the load applied to the open / close bar B2500. (In the first place, the opening / closing bar B2500 is not in an open state by the driving force). Accordingly, it is unnecessary to continuously apply the voltage applied to the second solenoid B2610 at the maximum value.

  In this way, even when a load that fluctuates is applied to the opening / closing bar B2500, the opening / closing bar B2500 can be kept open without being affected by the load. In addition, the load given by the weight of a ball | bowl is illustrated as a fluctuating load applied to the opening-and-closing rod B2500. That is, for example, the open / close bar B2500 has a configuration in which a sphere is landed on the rolling surface B2531, so that when the sphere is landed, the load due to the weight of the sphere is received, and therefore the number of the spheres is not constant and can change. It can be said that the load applied to the open / close bar B2500 can vary.

  When the second solenoid B2610 is in a non-excited state, the plate portion B2644 of the transmission downstream member B2640 is displaced downward, causing a load in a direction to push down the action portion B2512 of the opening / closing rod B2500. The opening / closing rod B2500 has a pair of arm portions B2510, The B2520 and the connecting part B2530 are rotationally displaced in a manner of upward displacement. Due to this rotational displacement, the opening / closing part B2513 projects so as to block the second specific prize opening B1002 (see FIG. 153 (b)).

  That is, the opening / closing part B2513 closes in such a manner that the opening of the second specific prize opening B1002 is narrowed from the rear side edge. In this embodiment, since the back side inner surface of the second specific prize opening B1002 is flush with the front side surface of the thin plate member B2110 of the base member B2100, the second specific prize opening B1002 is simultaneously with the start of displacement of the opening / closing part B2513. You can begin to narrow the opening. As a result, the second specific winning opening B1002 can be quickly closed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 on the flowing-down sphere will be described.

  FIG. 154 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVa-CLIVa line in FIG. 151 (a), and FIG. 154 (b) shows the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVb-CLIVb line in FIG. 151 (a). FIG. 154 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 along the CLIVc-CLIVc line in FIG. 151 (a).

  FIG. 155 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B2000 on the CLVa-CLVa line in FIG. 152 (a), and FIG. 155 (b) is a variable winning on the CLVb-CLVb line in FIG. 152 (a). It is sectional drawing of apparatus B2000, FIG.155 (c) is sectional drawing of variable prize-winning apparatus B2000 in the CLVc-CLVc line | wire of Fig.152 (a).

  In FIG. 154 and FIG. 155, the outer diameter of the sphere is illustrated by an imaginary line for easy understanding. In FIGS. 154 and 155, the description of the first drive device B2400 and the second drive device B2600 is omitted.

  In the special game state, the state shown in FIG. 154 and the state shown in FIG. 155 are alternately switched. At that time, after switching the open side of the open / close plate B2300 or the open / close bar B2500 to the closed state, the side in the closed state is opened with an interval between rounds in which the time length is defined in advance. Although the switching is performed, the interval between the switchings is made shorter than that when the sphere falls (for example, 0.04 seconds), so that it is possible to prevent the generation of a spilling sphere.

  Here, in the case of the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing bar B2500, the ball on the side switched from the open state to the closed state is arranged above the side switched from the closed state to the open state. As described in the above embodiments, it is easy to prevent the generation of a spilling sphere. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, another effective configuration for preventing the occurrence of a zero sphere is adopted. This will be described in order.

  First, since the displacement of the open / close plate B2300 from the open state to the closed state is a forward-downward rotational displacement with the rear end as an axis, the ball on the open / close plate B2300 flows down while being moved toward the front side. As a result, the displacement direction of the connecting portion B2530 when the opening / closing bar B2500 goes from the closed state to the open state is along the arc direction with the rear end portion as the center axis in the aspect of sinking downward on the back side. That is, the displacement direction of the connecting portion B2530 is opposed to the flow direction of the sphere in the front-rear direction.

  Similarly, since the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500 from the open state to the closed state is along the arc direction with the rear end portion as the central axis in the form in which it rises upward on the front side, it rides on the connecting portion B2530. When the sphere flows down while being moved toward the rear side, the displacement direction when the opening / closing plate B2300 moves from the closed state to the open state is a forward-moving rotational displacement with the rear end portion as an axis. That is, the direction of displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 is opposed to the flow direction of the sphere in the front-rear direction.

  Therefore, compared with the case where the sphere flows down vertically, the displacement amount of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the connecting portion B2530 until the sphere is switched to the open / closed state and starts to receive the ball can be reduced. Can be made easier.

  Secondly, as shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, at least a part of the displacement locus BE11 of the plate portion B2310 of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the displacement locus BE12 of the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing rod B2500 is a counterpart member (opening / closing). It is located below the center of the sphere on the plate B2300 or the open / close bar B2500). Therefore, even if the counterpart member is switched to the closed state and the sphere starts to fall, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the spilling sphere by configuring the open state while the sphere is in the displacement trajectory BE11, BE12. .

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 154 (c), the ball riding on the lower part of the pre-entry range of the ball rolling on the opening / closing plate B2300 protrudes below the displacement locus BE12, and a spilling ball is likely to occur. In the embodiment, the ball is easily rescued by the spill prevention part B2524 extending from the vicinity of the right arm part B2520 of the connection part B2530.

  The spill prevention part B2524 extends from the turning tip of the right arm part B2520 in a thin plate shape that curves downward in the closed state of the open / close bar B2500. The thin plate has a constant cross-sectional shape in the axial cross section, and the curvature radius of the curved shape is configured to be larger than the radius of the sphere when viewed in the axial direction. Thereby, contact | abutting with the spill prevention part B2524 and a ball | bowl can be made into the contact | abutting in one point.

  The extending tip of the spill prevention portion B2524 is formed to be tapered in the axial cross-sectional shape. Thereby, since the contact area with the sphere when the spill prevention portion B2524 is displaced close to the sphere can be suppressed, the spill prevention portion B2524 can be easily embedded in the lower hemisphere portion of the sphere.

  Here, as in the guide plates B1300 and B1500, when a part that hangs forward is attached to the tip of a member that is displaced in the front-rear direction, the area of the part to be rescued in front view increases. In addition, since the direction of the load is orthogonal to the front side surface, there is no longer a place for the load to escape through the ball, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are likely to stop.

  On the other hand, since the displacement of the spill prevention portion B2524 includes the displacement in the vertical direction, even if the tip is thinned, the surface in contact with the sphere can be increased. In addition, since the direction of the load is inclined with respect to the front and rear side surfaces, the load can be suitably released. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of the situation where the opening / closing bar B2500 stops.

  In the present embodiment, since the spill prevention part B2524 is formed from the downstream end with a width that is half the axial length of the connection part B2530, the sphere is placed in the lower part of the pre-entry range of the sphere rolling on the opening / closing plate B2300. Even if the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state when the vehicle is riding, the opening / closing bar B2500 is then opened, so that the ball can be easily rescued by the spill prevention portion B2524. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a spilling sphere.

  On the other hand, paying attention to the sphere rolling on the opening / closing bar B2500, the sphere is arranged above the lower edge of the displacement locus BE11 in the entire flow path of the sphere flowing down on the opening / closing bar B2500. Therefore, without forming a portion corresponding to the spill prevention portion B2524 in the opening / closing plate B2300, it is possible to easily rescue the ball by using the width in the short direction of the plate portion B2310. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a spilling sphere.

  As shown in FIGS. 154 and 155, when the opening / closing plate B2300 is displaced from the closed state to the open state, the opening / closing plate B2300 is displaced upward, so that it faces the protruding portions B1140 and B2211 in the vertical direction across the sphere. To do. Therefore, if no countermeasure is taken, the ball is fixed between the opening / closing plate B2300 and the projecting portions B1140, B2211, and the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 are arranged so as to be displaced from side to side, and each projecting length is shorter than the radius of the sphere (in this embodiment, 2.7 mm). When the sphere comes into contact with the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 during the operation of the opening / closing plate B2300, the sphere can be displaced in the left-right direction using the curvature of the sphere. Moreover, since the lower end part of protrusion part B1140, B2211 is arrange | positioned above the center position of the ball | bowl which rolls the opening-and-closing plate B2300, it can displace a ball | bowl to the front-back direction using the curvature of a ball | bowl. it can. Thereby, since it can avoid that a ball | bowl is fixed, operation | movement of opening-and-closing plate B2300 can be kept favorable.

  When the open / close bar B2500 is displaced from the open state to the closed state, the open / close bar B2500 is displaced upward, and thus faces the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 in the vertical direction across the sphere. Therefore, if no countermeasure is taken, the ball is fixed between the opening / closing bar B2500 and the projecting portions B1140, B2211, and the operation of the opening / closing bar B2500 may be hindered.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the radius of the displacement locus of the connecting portion B2530 is set larger than the radius of the sphere, the connecting portion B2530 can be configured to move around the outside of the sphere. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation where the sphere is fixed between the connecting portion B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500 and the protruding portions B1140 and B2211.

  Further, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is displaced toward the closed state, the connecting part B2530 is displaced to the covering member B2200 side (front side), while the ball riding on the connecting part B2530 is accompanied by the displacement of the opening / closing bar B2500. The rolling surface B2531 is displaced toward the base member B2100 (rear side) by inclining in the rearward downward direction.

  In other words, the sphere riding on the connecting portion B2530 is configured to approach the upper side of the connecting portion B2530 toward the side that does not interfere with the displacement of the connecting portion B2530. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement of the connecting portion B2530 from being hindered by the sphere, so that the sphere is fixed between the connecting portion B2530 of the open / close bar B2500 and the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. Occurrence can be easily avoided.

  With reference to FIG. 156, description will be given of the manner in which a ball enters the variable winning device B2000. FIGS. 156 (a) and 156 (b) are front views of the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the variable winning device B2000.

  In FIG. 156 (a), the open / close plate B2300 is opened and the open / close bar B2500 is closed. In FIG. 156 (b), the open / close plate B2300 is closed and the open / close bar B2500 is opened. State.

  In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 144, the variable prize-winning device B2000 is arranged in the lower left and right center of the game area (below the first winning hole 64). The ball can reach the variable winning device B2000. In addition, since the game area is configured in a substantially bilaterally symmetric shape, there is no great difference in the time it takes for the launched ball to reach the variable winning device B2000 depending on whether the game is left-handed or right-handed.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device is configured to be opened by being tilted and displaced toward the player's side with the lower side as an axis, and the detection sensors are located at the back of the opening / closing plate. In the case of symmetrical arrangement, it is considered that there is no great difference in the time until the ball passes the detection sensor after reaching the variable winning device in both the left-handed game and the right-handed game.

  On the other hand, in the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment, there is a large difference between the left-handed game and the right-handed game in the time until the ball passes the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 after reaching the range before entering the ball. Arise.

  First, it will be described that there is a difference in the time from reaching to entering the ball. For example, when playing a left-handed game, many balls are left along the left-handed down flow path BL21 before entering the variable winning device B2000 except for a ball that has a high firing strength and deviates right above the first winning port 64. Head to range.

  In this case, when the opening / closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156 (a)), the ball rides on the left side (upstream side) of the opening / closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. To do. For this reason, it takes more time than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left and right length of the opening / closing plate B2300 from when the ball rides on the opening / closing plate B2300 to pass through the first specific prize opening B1001.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156 (b)), the ball rides on the left side (downstream side) of the opening / closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning port B1002. To do. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the second specific prize opening B1002 after getting on the opening / closing bar B2500 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left / right length of the opening / closing bar B2500.

  In addition, for example, when playing a right-handed game, many balls move to the pre-entry range of the variable winning device B2000 along the right-handed downflow path BL22 except for the ball that deviates to the left above the first winning opening 64. Head.

  In this case, when the opening / closing plate B2300 is in an open state (see FIG. 156 (a)), the ball rides on the right side (downstream side) of the opening / closing plate B2300 and flows down toward the first specific winning opening B1001. To do. Therefore, the time required for the ball to pass through the first specific prize opening B1001 after getting on the opening / closing plate B2300 is less than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left / right length of the opening / closing plate B2300.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing bar B2500 is in an open state (see FIG. 156 (b)), the ball rides on the right side (upstream side) of the opening / closing bar B2500 and flows down toward the second specific winning port B1002. To do. Therefore, it takes more time than the time required for the ball to flow down half of the left and right length of the open / close bar B2500 after the ball rides on the open / close bar B2500 and passes through the second specific prize opening B1002.

  As described above, in the variable prize winning device B2000, the distance from the left downflow path BL21 (or right downflow path BL22) to the first detection sensor B1230 and the second downflow path BL21 (or right downflow path BL22) to the second position. Since the distance to the detection sensor B1250 is different, the period until the ball that has reached the pre-entry range passes through the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002 is determined as left-handed game or right It can be changed by hitting games.

  Therefore, since the selection of the ball launch mode (selection of left-handed game or right-handed game) can be associated with the digestion speed of the jackpot game, the player is required to switch the ball launch mode in the jackpot game. be able to. Thereby, the player's willingness to participate in the jackpot game can be improved.

  Notification that suggests a launch mode in which the digestion speed of the jackpot game is advantageous (for example, quicker) to the player may be executed by a display device or voice output. For example, “Right-handed” is displayed in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the open / close plate B2300 is in the open state, or voice output is performed, while “Right-handed” is executed in accordance with the execution of the round game in which the open / close bar B2500 is in the open state. “Left-handed” may be displayed or voice output may be performed. In this case, the player can speed up the jackpot game by switching the launch mode of the ball according to the notification.

  Secondly, it will be described that a difference occurs in the likelihood of the spilling sphere. For example, in a round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156 (a)), when a left-handed game is performed, a ball that rolls on the rolling surface B2311 by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. Among them, it is possible to limit the number of spheres arranged on the downstream side (right side in FIG. 156 (a), lower part of the range before entering the ball) to the left and right center protruding portion B2211.

  Therefore, even if the specified number of balls enter the first specific prize opening B1001 from the lower part of the range before entering the ball and the open / close plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2311 are left and right. Since it is arranged only on the upstream side (left side in FIG. 156 (a), upper part of the pre-entrance range) from the central projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening / closing bar B2500 that is immediately switched to the open state. As a result, the number of generated spheres can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is opened (see FIG. 156 (a)), when a right-handed game is performed, the ball that has reached the rolling surface B2311 by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 Although promptly guided to the first specific winning opening B1001, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball is not limited to one.

  Therefore, when a specified number of balls enter the first specific prize opening B1001 from the lower part of the pre-entry range and the open / close plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the balls from the open / close plate B2300 enter the lower part of the pre-entry range. Can slide down. Since the connecting part B2530 of the opening / closing bar B2500 that is immediately switched to the open state is not arranged below the sphere, a spilling sphere may occur. Therefore, in the round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state, the left-handed game is configured to reduce the number of spilled balls more easily than the right-handed game.

  Further, for example, in the round in which the open / close bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156 (b)), when a right-handed game is performed, the rolling surface B2531 rolls by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211. Of the spheres to be placed, the number of spheres arranged on the downstream side (left side in FIG. 156 (b), lower part of the pre-entrance range) with respect to the left and right center protrusion B2211 can be limited to one.

  Therefore, even if the specified number of balls enter the second specific prize opening B1002 from the lower part of the range before entering the ball and the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the balls rolling on the rolling surface B2531 Since it is disposed only on the upstream side (right side in FIG. 156 (b), upper part of the pre-entrance range) with respect to the central projecting portion B2211, it can be saved by the opening / closing plate B2300 that is immediately switched to the open state. As a result, the number of generated spheres can be reduced.

  On the other hand, in the round in which the open / close bar B2500 is opened (see FIG. 156 (b)), when a left-handed game is performed, the ball that has reached the rolling surface B2531 by the action of the projecting portions B1140 and B2211 Although it is promptly guided to the second specific winning opening B1002, the number of balls arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball is not limited to one.

  Therefore, when a specified number of balls enter the second specific prize opening B1002 from the lower part before entering the ball and the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the closed state, the balls from the open / close bar B2500 enter the lower part before entering the ball. Can slide down. The displacement trajectory BE11 (see FIG. 155 (a)) of the opening / closing plate B2300 that is switched to the open state immediately afterward extends to the lower side of the ball on the opening / closing rod B2500 in the lower part of the range before entering the ball. Are arranged at positions overlapping each other in the front-rear direction, so that a spilling sphere can be generated. Therefore, in the round in which the open / close bar B2500 is opened, the right-handed game is configured to reduce the number of spilled balls more easily than the left-handed game.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, an advantageous launching method is right-handed for the purpose of reducing the number of spilled balls depending on whether the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening / closing bar B2500 is in the open state. Or left-handed. Therefore, it may be controlled to notify an advantageous launch direction in accordance with whether the opening / closing plate B2300 is open or whether the opening / closing bar B2500 is open.

  For example, on the 3rd symbol display device 81, the launch direction which is advantageous to the player may be notified by displaying “aim for the right”, “aim for the left” or the like. In this case, for example, “Aim at the left” may be displayed during the round in which the open / close plate B2300 is opened, and “Aim at the right” may be displayed during the round in which the open / close bar B2500 is opened. The player can fire the ball in the launch direction in which the falling ball is reduced by firing the ball according to the notification.

  Note that similar notification may be performed by sound output or light emission to the game area. For example, in the case of light emission, the player can be notified of the launch direction of the ball by causing the traveling path of the launched ball to shine in a streak shape by a light emitting means such as an LED that irradiates the game area.

  In the above description, the variable winning device B2000 has been described assuming that the opening and closing plates B2300 and the opening and closing bar B2500 are alternately opened and closed. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, only the opening / closing plate B2300 may be opened or closed, or only the opening / closing rod B2500 may be opened / closed, or the round section and the opening / closing that the same member of the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 repeatedly opens and closes. The round section in which the plate B2300 and the open / close bar B2500 are alternately opened and closed may be mixed.

  By providing a round section in which the same member of the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing bar B2500 is repeatedly opened / closed, the effect of suppressing the spilling ball is weakened, but the ball that has reached the pre-entry range is achieved from the configuration of the variable winning device B2000. Still has the effect of being able to satisfy both the case of entering the first specific prize opening B1001 and the case of entering the second specific prize opening B1002.

  FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram schematically illustrating an example of the performance of the variable prize apparatus B2000 in the first control example of the twelfth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 157, the first specific prize opening B1001 and the second specific prize opening B1002 are set so that the number of payout balls is different, and further, the specified number in the round game in the special game state is set differently. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, the flow range of the ball rolling on the opening / closing plate B2300 and the flow down route of the ball rolling on the opening / closing bar B2500 are included in the range before entering the ball, so that the opening / closing plate B2300 is in the open state or the opening / closing bar. Regardless of whether or not B2500 is in an open state, it is possible to advance the jackpot game by firing the ball in a common launch mode (for example, right-handed).

  In other words, in the jackpot game, even when the opening / closing plate B2300 is open and the first specific winning opening B1001 is open, the opening / closing bar B2500 is opened and the second specific winning opening B1002 is opened. Even if it is, it is possible to play a game by launching a ball aiming at a common range (pre-entry range), so it is possible to prevent the player from feeling the difference of jackpot type . Thereby, the fall of the interest of the player who plays a jackpot game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, as shown in FIG. 157, the performance of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the performance of the second specific winning opening B1002 are set to be different. As a result, it is possible to cause a difference in the number of payout prize balls according to the difference in jackpot type.

  For example, even if the jackpot is the same number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds), only one opening / closing plate B2300 is configured to be repeatedly open and set to be able to enter the first specific winning opening B1001. (The number of payout prize balls is 2250 (= 15 × 10 × 15)), and in the other jackpot type jackpot, only the open / close bar B2500 is repeatedly opened to be set to be able to enter the second specific winning slot B1002. (The number of payout prize balls is 375 (= 5 × 5 × 15)), the difference in the number of payout prize balls is about 1875. Furthermore, by setting many jackpot types and setting jackpots for different numbers of rounds, it is possible to increase the number of payout prize balls.

  Thereby, the difference in the number of prize balls between the jackpot with the smallest number of prize balls and the jackpot with the largest number of prize balls can be increased. In addition, it is possible to realize such an improvement in the pitching performance in a space-saving manner.

  In other words, conventionally, it has been possible to improve the ball-out performance by arranging a plurality of variable winning devices in the game area and setting the number of winning balls and the number of prescribed balls to be different. However, in this case, the range required for arranging a plurality of variable winning devices tends to be large.

  In particular, in the case where the game area is bilaterally symmetric as in the present embodiment, when a plurality of variable winning devices are arranged on the left and right, not only the arrangement range is increased, but depending on the variable winning device to be opened, It is required to play an appropriate one of the hit game and the right-hand game, and the advantage of the symmetrical game area that can be freely divided into the left and right is hindered.

  In addition, when a plurality of variable winning devices are arranged above and below, the height of the plurality of specific winning awards will be stacked up and down, and the vertical width of the variable winning devices will become longer and the arrangement range will be increased, along with it. The problem that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the third symbol display device 81, the first winning port 64, and the second winning port 640 is likely to occur is likely to occur.

  On the other hand, the variable winning device B2000 of the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are arranged on the left and right, while suppressing the vertical dimension of the variable winning device B2000, By arranging a plurality of paths whose vertical widths can be suppressed by overlapping in the range before entering the ball, it is possible to eliminate the left and right hitting.

  In the present embodiment, it has been described that one of the special winning openings B1001, B1002 is continuously open in the special gaming state, but as in the first operation pattern (see FIG. 143 (a)). In addition, it may be controlled so as to constitute an open state alternately left and right.

  In this case, an inter-round interval (hereinafter also referred to as “inter-round interval A”) for shifting from an odd-numbered round to an even-numbered round and an inter-round interval (hereinafter referred to as “inter-round interval B”) for shifting from an even-numbered round to an odd-numbered round. May be set to be different.

  For example, the case where the interval A between rounds is set short (for example, 0.04 second) and the interval B between rounds is set long (for example, 2 seconds) will be described. In this case, in the interval B between rounds, the ball that has been in the range before entering the ball becomes the whole ball spilling ball. Therefore, by shooting the ball with the aim of preventing the spilling ball in the interval A between rounds, the player Can increase the profit.

  Immediately before the interval B between rounds, the first specific winning opening B1001 is open and a large number of winning balls can be obtained, so the player aims to enter more than the specified number of balls and launches a large number of balls. It tends to be easy. On the other hand, in the setting of the length of the interval B between rounds in this embodiment, since all of the more frequently launched balls can be spilled balls, it is possible to thin out the profits that the player can acquire. In other words, it is configured to increase the possibility that a sphere that has been launched more frequently with the aim of winning over will become a spilling ball.

  A spilling ball is used for the transition from odd-numbered rounds (rounds where the ball is guided toward the lower left in the pre-entry range) to even rounds (rounds where the ball is guided toward the lower right in the range before the entering) In order to reduce, it is only necessary to fire the ball toward the right side that is the upstream side (upper range before entering the ball) in the odd round, so reducing the sloppy ball by firing the ball toward the right side of the game area Can do.

  Immediately before the inter-round interval A, it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening B1002, but since the number of winning balls is small in the first place, it is common to fire a large number of balls aiming for over winning. At that time, if all of the larger balls are made to be spilled balls, there is a possibility that the loss of the player is great and the interest is significantly reduced. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the interval A between rounds is set to be short so that a sphere that has been launched a lot to aim at entering the second specific prize opening B1002 is not a spilling ball.

  In this way, by setting the length of the interval between rounds to be different, it is possible to provide a variable winning device in which over-winning is likely to occur, for example. That is, as described above, in the mechanism that sets the interval between rounds short and reduces the spilling ball, it is easy to enter the number of balls collected in the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 immediately after the interval between rounds. For example, when the specified number of specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is set to one, the second and subsequent balls are all over-winned (the number of balls exceeding the specified number of round games is the specified winning opening B1001, Enter B1002). Therefore, depending on the setting of the prescribed number, it can be configured to generate many over winnings.

  The length of the interval between rounds can be arbitrarily set. The lengths of the intervals A and B between the rounds may be set in the opposite order, or the lengths may be set only for some of the intervals between rounds, and the intervals between the other rounds may be set to a certain length regardless of the intervals A and B between the rounds. Alternatively, all the intervals between rounds may have different lengths.

  Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 162. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by sliding the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the front-rear direction has been described. However, the variable winning device B3000 in the thirteenth embodiment is displaced. A plurality of members constituting the open state are configured. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 158 is a front view of a variable winning device B3000 according to the thirteenth embodiment. In FIG. 158, the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 is not shown in order to make the pre-entrance range visible, and the back side thereof is visible.

  As shown in FIG. 158, the variable prize winning device B3000 includes a covering member B1200 in a state in which the projecting portion B1211 and the extending support portion B1212 are omitted, and the base member B3100 is arranged on the back side of the covering member B1200. A first guide plate B3300, a second guide plate B3500, a first turning member B3700 that constitutes a guide path of a sphere by being rotationally displaced so as to be close to the first guide plate B3300, and a second A second rotation member B3900 that forms a guide path for the sphere by being rotationally displaced so as to be close to the guide plate B3500.

  The base member B3100 includes a thin plate member B1100, a holding hole B1130, and a discharge port B1150, similarly to the base member B1100 (see FIG. 128), while the protruding portion B1140 and the guide port B1160 are omitted. A through-hole forming portion B3120 that is formed so as to penetrate along the shape of the upstream side member B3320 and the upstream side member B3520 (with a slightly larger shape) in the substantially central portion of the thin plate member B1110, and the rotation members B3700 and B3900 can be pivotally supported. A pair of left and right projecting shaft portions B3171 projecting in a columnar shape, an arcuate hole B3172 that is perforated along an arc centered on the projecting shaft portion B3171, and guides the displacement of the projecting portions B3711, B3911; Is provided.

  The penetration forming portion B3120 is formed in a substantially V shape when viewed from the front, and the vertical width of the central portion is slightly longer than the vertical width of the left and right end portions.

  The first guide plate B3300 includes an upstream member B3320 that is inserted into the left half of the penetration forming portion B3120 and formed to be slidable back and forth. The upstream member B3320 is formed in a plate shape that is inclined downward toward the left and right central side (right side) of the range before entering the ball, and a rolling surface B3321 formed on the upper surface side so that a game ball can be placed thereon, and a lower right end And an extension receiving portion B3322 configured to be able to come into contact with the first rotating member B3700.

  The rolling surface B3321 is formed with an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed with an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1321 of the first guide plate B1300 (see FIG. 139) described in the above embodiment. Thereby, also in the present embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, the deceleration action can be caused by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321.

  In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3320 is configured in a plate shape with a uniform thickness on the left and right, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed in a wedge shape in which the lower surface is horizontal and only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling contact surface B3321 can be maintained.

  The first turning member B3700 is turned and displaced so as to fill a gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001 and the first guide plate B3300. A main body B3710 that is configured to be switchable between an open state in which the ball can be guided to the specific winning port B1001, and is pivotally displaced by the right protruding shaft B3171, and its main body B3710. Extending plate part B3720 extending along the radial direction.

  The main body B3710 includes a projecting portion B3711 that projects from the left and right inner (left) positions to the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from the projecting shaft B3171. The projecting portion B3711 projects to the back side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arc-shaped hole B3172.

  The extension plate portion B3720 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, is formed so as to taper toward the extension tip in front view, and has a rolling surface B3721 on which a game ball can be placed, and a rolling surface at the extension tip. And a curved portion B3722 that is chamfered and formed in a curved shape on the opposite side of the moving surface B3721.

  The rolling surface B3721 has an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state in which the sphere is guided. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3721 is formed larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3321, and the balls rolling on the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3721 are formed on the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3721. The degree of deceleration is reduced as the boundary position enters the first specific prize opening B1001 side.

  The curved portion B 3722 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper right surface of the extended receiving portion B 3322 of the first guide plate B 3300. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B 3722 to match the shape of the upper right surface of the extended receiving portion B 3322, the first rotating member B 3700 is curved in the open state of the first receiving member B 3700. Therefore, the posture of the first rotating member B3700 can be stabilized.

  The second guide plate B3500 is provided with an upstream member B3520 that is inserted into the right half of the penetration forming portion B3120 and is formed so as to be capable of sliding back and forth. The upstream member B3520 is formed in a plate shape that is symmetrical with the upstream member B3320 and is inclined downward toward the left and right center side (left side) of the range before entering the ball, and is formed on the upper surface side so that a game ball can be placed thereon. Rolling surface B3521, and an extension receiving portion B3522 that extends to the left from the lower left end portion and is configured to come into contact with the second rotating member B3900.

  The rolling surface B3521 is formed with an inclination angle of 3 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. That is, it is formed with an inclination angle smaller than the inclination angle (7 degrees) of the rolling surface B1521 of the second guide plate B1500 (see FIG. 137) described in the above embodiment. Thereby, also in the present embodiment in which the formation of the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 is omitted, the deceleration action can be caused by reducing the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521.

  In the present embodiment, the upstream member B3520 is configured in a plate shape having a uniform thickness on the left and right, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed in a wedge shape in which the lower surface is horizontal and only the upper surface is inclined. Even in this case, the inclined state of the rolling surface B3521 can be maintained.

  The second rotating member B3900 is rotated and displaced so as to fill a gap between the closed state (see FIG. 158) that prevents the ball from entering the second specific prize opening B1002 and the second guide plate B3500. A main body B3910 that is configured to be switchable between an open state in which the ball can be guided to the specific winning port B1002, and that is pivotally displaced by the left projecting shaft B3171, and its main body B3910 Extending plate part B3920 extending along the radial direction.

  The main body B3910 includes a projecting portion B3911 that projects from the left and right inner (right) positions to the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from the projecting shaft portion B3171. The projecting portion B3911 protrudes to the back side of the thin plate member B1110 through the arc-shaped hole B3172.

  The extending plate portion B3920 has the same cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction, is formed so as to taper toward the extended distal end in front view, and has a rolling surface B3921 on which a game ball can be placed, and a rolling surface at the extended distal end. And a curved portion B3922 chamfered in a curved shape on the opposite side of the moving surface B3921.

  The rolling surface B3921 has an inclination angle of 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane in the open state in which the sphere is guided. That is, the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3921 is formed larger than the inclination angle of the rolling surface B3521, and the balls rolling on the rolling surfaces B3521, B3921 are formed on the rolling surfaces B3521, B3921. The degree of deceleration is reduced as the boundary position enters the second specific prize opening B1002 side.

  The curved portion B3922 has a shape that matches the shape of the upper left surface of the extended receiving portion B3522 of the second guide plate B3500. That is, by forming the shape of the curved portion B3922 to match the shape of the upper left surface of the extended receiving portion B3522, the second rotating member B3900 is curved in the open state of the second receiving member B3900. Therefore, the posture of the second rotating member B3900 can be stabilized.

  Thus, according to the present embodiment, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700, or the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotating member B3900 are in the closed state or the open state while acting on each other. Constitute. In this case, the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotation member B3700 are driven by the first drive device B1400, and the second guide plate B3500 and the second rotation member B3900 are driven by the second drive device B1600.

  FIG. 159 is a top view of the variable winning device B3000, FIG. 160 is a front perspective view of the second rotating member B3900 and the transmission member B3640, and FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b) are FIGS. It is a right side view of 2nd rotation member B3900 and transmission member B3640 in the arrow CLXIa direction view.

  In FIGS. 161 (a) and 161 (b), only the second rotating member B3900, the transmission member B3640, and the transmission extending portion B3550 are shown for easy understanding, and these members are held. Illustration of other configurations is omitted. 161 (a) shows the closed state of the second rotating member B3900 (the second solenoid B1610 is in a non-excited state), and FIG. 161 (b) shows the open state ( A state in which the second solenoid B1610 is excited) is illustrated.

  That is, when the second solenoid B1610 is in a non-excited state and the transmission extending portion B3550 is disposed on the back side, the second rotating member B3900 is in a raised position (see FIG. 161 (a)). When the 2 solenoid B1610 is energized and the transmission extending portion B3550 is disposed on the front side, the second rotating member B3900 is inclined (see FIG. 161 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 159, in the present embodiment, the transmission members B3440 and B3640 capable of transmitting the driving force to the rotating members B3700 and B3900 while adopting the driving devices B1400 and B1600 similar to the variable prize winning device B1000, By interposing between the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900, the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 are configured to be displaced at a time.

  That is, a pair of support claws B3111 protruding in a U shape on the back side of the thin plate member B1110 is disposed on both left and right sides, and the transmission members B3440 and B3640 are pivotally supported by the respective support claws B3111. The

  The transmission members B3440 and B3640 are configured so that their rotational displacement can be changed to the displacement of the rotating members B3700 and B3900. The transmission members B3440 and B3640 can be brought into contact with transmission extending portions B3350 and B3550 formed integrally with the guide plates B3300 and B3500. The transmission members are caused by the longitudinal displacement of the guide plates B3300 and B3500. B3440 and B3640 are configured to be rotationally displaced.

  Specifically, the first guide plate B3300 includes the upstream member B3320 described above, a connection fixing member B1330 that supports the upstream member B3320, and a transmission hole B1340, in addition to the right side of the connection fixing member B1330. A transmission extending portion B3350 extending from the lower portion to the front side so as to be able to contact the transmission member B3440 is provided.

  Further, the second guide plate B3500 includes the upstream member B3520, the connection fixing member B1530 that supports the upstream member B3520, and the transmission hole B1540, and from the lower left portion of the connection fixing member B1530. A transmission extending portion B3550 extending to a position where it can contact the transmission member B3640 to the front side is provided.

  160 and 161, a mechanism for transmitting a driving force to the second rotating member B3900 is illustrated. Since the mechanism of driving force transmission to the left and right rotating members B3700 and B3900 is the same, the driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be described and the driving force transmission to the first rotating member B3700 will be described. Omitted.

  The transmission member B3640 is a member that is rotatably supported on the back side of the thin plate member B1110 and engages with the transmission extending portion B3550, and includes a claw-like portion B3642 and a projecting portion B3911 disposed at the rotation tip portion. Are configured to engage. Thereby, it is comprised so that the change (open state or closed state) of 2nd rotation member B3900 may arise with the change of the attitude | position of transmission member B3640.

  The transmission member B3640 is made of a resin material having flexibility, and has a rotating arm portion B3641 composed of a plate-like portion intersecting (orthogonal) with the rotation axis BJ1, and a C-shaped portion at the rotation tip of the rotating arm portion B3641. From a claw-shaped portion B3642 formed in a claw shape, a pair of projecting shaft portions B3643 projecting from the rotating arm portion B3641 in a columnar shape centering on the rotation axis BJ1, and from the rotation base end side of the rotating arm portion B3641 A proximal-side extending portion B3644 extending in the radial direction, and a distal-side extending portion B3645 extending in a direction parallel to the proximal-side extending portion B3644 from the rotating distal end side of the rotating arm B3641. Prepare.

  The transmission member B3640 is supported by the thin plate member B1110 by inserting the protruding shaft portion B3643 into the support claw portion B3111 from the front end side. At this time, the support claw of the transmission member B3640 is formed by adopting a shape relationship (a shape relationship in which the clearance on the tip side of the support claw portion B3111 is less than the diameter of the projecting shaft portion B3643) while fitting the support claw portion B3111 elastically. It is intended to prevent the part B3111 from falling off.

  The driving force transmission to the second rotating member B3900 will be described. As shown in FIG. 161 (a), when the second solenoid B1610 of the second driving device B1600 is in a non-excited state, the lower end portion on the distal end side of the extension portion B3550 for transmission is the extension portion on the proximal end side of the transmission member B3640. It is in contact with B3644. The transmission extension B3550 is urged to the back side by the return spring of the second solenoid B1610, and the posture of the transmission member B3640 is maintained in such a manner that it is pushed to the back side by this urging force. Accordingly, the closed state of the second rotating member B3900 is maintained.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (b), in the excited state of the second solenoid B1610 of the second drive device B1600, the lower end portion on the front end side of the transmission extending portion B3550 contacts the front end side extending portion B3645 of the transmission member B3640. ing. The transmission extending portion B3550 is urged to the front side by the driving force of the second solenoid B1610, and the posture of the transmission member B3640 is maintained in such a manner that it is pushed to the rear side by this driving force. Thereby, the open state of 2nd rotation member B3900 is maintained.

  162 (a) to 162 (c) are front views of the pre-entrance range in the range CLXIIa of FIG. 158. FIG. FIG. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (c) illustrate, in time series, how the state of the second specific prize opening B1002 is switched from the closed state to the open state.

  That is, in the variable winning device B3000, after the front-rear distance between the front end of the upstream member B3520 and the covering member B1200 is less than the diameter of the sphere (see FIG. 162 (b)), the second rotating member B3900. The transmission extension B3550, the transmission member B3640, and the second rotation member B3900 are designed so that the displacement occurs in the order of displacement to the end of rotation.

  Further, when switching from the open state to the closed state, the gap between the transmission extending portion B3550 and the proximal end side extending portion B3644 is as small as possible so that the second rotating member B3900 starts to be displaced without delay. (Refer to FIG. 161 (b)), and the upstream member B3520 is configured to be able to release the contact between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 before starting the sliding displacement. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the rubbing between 2nd rotation member B3900 and upstream member B3520 can be suppressed.

  Thus, in the state switching to the open state, the second rotating member B3900 is displaced in a direction (non-parallel direction) perpendicular to the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the upstream member B3520 of the second guide plate B3500. Therefore, the gap between the second rotating member B3900 and the upstream member B3520 can be narrowed by displacement.

  The switching from the open state to the closed state of the second specific prize winning opening B1002 occurs so as to reverse from FIG. 162 (a) to FIG. 162 (c). In this case, the rolling surface B3921 is displaced upward so as to be close to the second specific prize opening B1002. Therefore, when a ball is on the rolling surface B3921, the ball is guided to the second specific prize opening B1002. It becomes the structure which is easy to be done. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to easily generate an overwinning (the number of balls exceeding the specified number of round games enter the second specific winning hole B1002).

  Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 to 171. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the open state of the variable winning device B1000 is configured by the guide plates B1300 and B1500 being displaced to the front side has been described. However, the variable winning device B4000 in the fourteenth embodiment is directed to the front side. The open state is constituted by the guide plate B4300 which is displaced and the opening / closing bar B2500 which is displaced toward the back side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 163, in the gaming area in the present embodiment, the first winning port 64 and the second winning opening 64 and the second winning arrangement that are arranged between the variable winning device B2000 and the third symbol display device 81 in the gaming area described above with reference to FIG. The winning opening 640 is omitted, and these functions are supplemented by a configuration provided in the variable winning device B4000.

  That is, in the present embodiment, in the configuration shown in FIG. 163, the function of the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 144) is moved to the guide port B 4160, and the function of the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 144) is the second. The function of the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 144) is transferred to the open / close bar B2500. The first detection sensor B1230 is used as the first specific prize opening B1001 as described above.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the area surrounded by the rails 61 and 62 (area including the game area). For example, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 may be enlarged using the range generated by omitting the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640, or the first winning port 64 and the second winning opening 640 are omitted in another distribution mechanism (for example, a mechanism that alternately distributes the spheres that have arrived to the left and right, or a drive that is constantly driven to change the flow path of the spheres). A mechanism or the like) may be arranged to increase the variation of the flow-down mode of the sphere.

  FIGS. 164, 165 and 166 are front perspective views of the variable winning device B4000. 164 shows the closed state of the guide plate B4300 and the open / close bar B2500, FIG. 165 shows the open state of the guide plate B4300 and the closed state of the open / close bar B2500, and FIG. 166 shows the closed state of the guide plate B4300 and The open state of the open / close bar B2500 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 164 to 166, in the variable winning device B4000, the front-rear width of the driving device can be reduced as compared with the variable winning device B1000, and the arrangement space can be reduced. Since the area below the guide route of the sphere can be made empty, the sphere guide receiving portion B4260 can be provided.

  FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable prize apparatus B4000, and FIG. 168 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable prize apparatus B4000. As shown in FIGS. 167 and 168, the configurations of the variable prize-winning device B4000 are partially combined with the configurations of the variable prize-winning devices B1000 and B2000 described above. This will be described below.

  The variable prize winning device B4000 is formed of a horizontally-long rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side, and the base member B4100 is fastened and fixed to the base member B4100 from the front side. A covering member B4200 that covers the guide member B4300, a guide plate B4300 configured to be slidable forward from the back side of the base member B4100, the first driving device B1400 that drives the guide plate B4300, and the open / close bar B2500 described above. And the above-described second drive device B2600 and a rear cover member B4700 that is assembled to the base member B4100 from the back side and configured to cover the guide plate B4300 and the first drive device B1400 from the back side. .

  The base member B4100 includes the thin plate member B1110, the holding hole B1130, the projecting portion B1140, and the discharge port B1150, as well as the above-described base member B1100, and the second housing portion B2115, similarly to the above-described base member B2100. And a guide support B2180.

  Further, the base member B4100 extends from the upper end portion of the projecting portion B1140 to the left and right outer sides through the penetration forming portion B4120 whose design is changed to a shape suitable for the guide plate B4300 through which the above-described penetration forming portion B1120 is inserted. Auxiliary protrusion B4141, a guide port B4160 drilled so as to be able to guide the sphere from the front side to the back side below the penetration forming portion B4120, a detour path B4170 for guiding the sphere passing through the guide port B4160, and a thin plate A projecting portion B4190 that projects from the right side of the member B1110 to the front side so as to cover the right extending portion B1220 of the covering member B4200. The penetration forming part B4120 is formed as a long rectangular opening inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front.

  The auxiliary protrusion B4141 has a cross-sectional shape similar to that of the protrusion B1140 and extends in a direction of rising and tilting toward the left and right outer sides. With this configuration, the auxiliary protrusion B4141 functions as a part that assists the ball flow down, and details will be described later.

  The overhanging part B4190 is formed so as to incline to the lower left when viewed from the front at the same angle as the inclined surface B1223 of the right extension B1220, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 164), the lower side is inclined to the right extension B1220. The surface B1223 is configured to come into contact with the surface. Rolling surface B4191 which comprises an upper side is formed as an inclined surface which inclines and descends, so that it goes to the front side.

  The rolling surface B4191 is formed in a planar shape on which the sphere can roll. The sphere rolling on the rolling surface B4191 flows into the pre-entry range in a state of being brought to the front side along the inclination. As a result, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 and flows into the range before entering the ball can easily flow down avoiding the projecting portion B1140, so that the deceleration effect applied to the ball can be weakened.

  Similar to the above-described covering member B2200, the covering member B4200 includes a main body member B2210, a right extension B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extension B1240, a second detection sensor B1250, and a lid plate B2270. In addition, a ball guide receiving portion B4260 is provided on the main body member B2210 and guides the ball to the guide port B4160.

  Note that the protruding portion B2211 provided in the main body member B2210 is omitted in the covering member B4200. Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a sphere that flows down toward a later-described ball guide receiving portion B4260 collides with the protruding portion B2211 and deviates from the ball guide receiving portion B4260. Further, it is possible to avoid the situation where the sphere is decelerated by the left and right protruding portions B2211.

  In the right extension B1220, a ridge support B1225 is formed in the same manner as the variable prize-winning device B1000 described above, and the longitudinal displacement of the guide member B1310 of the guide plate B4300 is guided. Further, in the left extending portion B1240, the formation of the ridge support portion B1245 is omitted in the same manner as the variable winning device B2000 described above.

  The guide plate B4300 has the same configuration as the first guide plate B1300 described above, is formed so as to eliminate the gap between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320, and connects the rolling surface B1311 and the rolling surface B1321 in a flush manner. And a front projecting portion B4360 projecting upward from the front end portion between the guide member B1310 and the upstream member B1320.

  The front projecting portion B4360 is formed in a triangular shape in which the front side surface B4361 has an upper apex vertically above the center position of the guide port B4160 in front view and is inclined symmetrically, and the upper side surface B4362 faces the front side. It is formed as an inclined surface that rises and inclines.

  With this configuration, the front projecting portion B4360 flows down with the ball rolling on the rolling surface B1321 close to the body member B2210 side (front side) of the covering member B4200 in the open state of the guide plate B4300. In this case, it is possible to make the flow path of the sphere approach the back side by contacting the sphere. That is, the front projecting portion B4360 is formed so as to be able to abut against a sphere that flows toward the main body member B2210 side in the open state of the guide plate B4300 and flows down the pre-entrance range, and the sphere is brought into contact with the thin plate member B1110. The contact side, that is, the inner surface of the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are flush with each other, so that it can be guided to the side with less ball entry resistance (see FIG. 126).

  In the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front projecting portion B4360 is configured to enter the penetration forming portion B4120 and not protrude from the front side surface of the thin plate member B1110. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the front protruding portion B4360 comes into contact with the ball in the closed state of the guide plate B4300.

  When the guide plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the front projecting portion B4360 can abut on the sphere. This contact is intended to suppress the entry of the sphere into the sphere guide receiving portion B4260, which will be described in detail later.

  In addition, the aspect of front side protrusion part B4360 is not restricted to the aspect of this embodiment. For example, the guide plate B4300 may be configured to project from the front side surface of the thin plate member B1110 to the front side in the closed state. In this case, since the front projecting portion B4360 can come into contact with the sphere in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, it is possible to vary the flow-down mode of the sphere.

  The rear cover member B4700 omits the formation of the third support plate B1750 and the fourth support plate B1760, which are not required when the second drive device B1600 is omitted, from the above-described rear cover member B1700. It is formed so as to reduce the vertical dimension and the longitudinal dimension.

  That is, since the rear cover member B4700 is smaller than the above-described rear cover member B1700, the variable winning device B4000 includes a guide plate B4300 that slides back and forth in the same manner as the variable winning device B1000. However, the space required on the back side of the game area in order to dispose the drive devices B1400 and B2600 can be reduced (particularly in the front-rear direction).

  With reference to FIGS. 169 to 171, switching of the state of the variable winning device B4000 will be described. 169, 170, and 171 are front views of the variable winning device B4000. In FIG. 169, the guide plate B4300 and the open / close bar B2500 are closed, in FIG. 170, the guide plate B4300 is open and the open / close bar B2500 is closed, and in FIG. 171, the guide plate B4300 is closed. The open / close bar B2500 is opened.

  Further, in FIGS. 169 to 171, the main body member B2210 of the covering member B4200 is illustrated transparently, and the shape on the back side thereof can be visually recognized. In addition, a polka dot pattern (dot) is added to at least a part of the range in which the ball cannot pass in the range before entering the ball. In the description of FIGS. 169 to 171, FIG. 163 is referred to as appropriate.

  First, the outline of the game progress of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment will be described. The progress of the game is based on the contents described in the eleventh embodiment. That is, during normal times, aiming for a big hit by lottery of the special symbol 1, the ball is entered to the guide port B4160 by left-handed.

  As an added value after the end of the jackpot, a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) is given until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special gaming state ends, and the special symbol 2 lottery is easily received. This is followed, and after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the normal state is set.

  Therefore, after the big hit, the ball is launched aiming to enter the opening of the second detection sensor B 1250 until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special gaming state is finished. In the special game state, the winning ball is paid out by entering the opening of the first detection sensor B1230.

  Next, each part of the game progress will be described in detail. The game area in the present embodiment is based on a bilaterally symmetric configuration, and is configured to be able to reach the variable prize-winning device B4000 even if the ball is launched to the left or right. On the other hand, due to the influence of the added structure, it is recommended to play left-handed games in a normal state aiming to win a jackpot of special symbol 1.

  The game board 13 has a projecting wall B4010 that is fixed so as to project to the front side of the base plate 60 on the lower side of the center frame 86 as a part that is not symmetrically configured, and blocks the passage of the ball, Above the left through gate 67, a spherical aggregate wall B4020 that is fixed so as to protrude in an inverted C shape on the front side of the base plate 60 is added.

  The overhanging wall B4010 is a wall portion extending in the vertical direction at a position on the right side of the center of the left and right of the center frame 86, and obstructs the passage of the sphere to the left and right. Thereby, the sphere that can be guided to the center right and left of the center frame 86 by the nail disposed directly under the center frame 86 can be limited to the left-handed sphere.

  That is, the left-handed ball is guided to the right and left center of the center frame 86 by the nail and then falls on the flow path BL41 extending vertically along the left and right center of the center frame 86 to enter the guide port B4160. Since a ball is possible, it is easy to win a lottery of the special symbol 1.

  Further, since the projecting portions B1140 are arranged on the left and right of the flow down path BL41, even when the sphere deviates from the flow down path BL41 to the left and right, the projecting portion B1140 comes into contact with the sphere, thereby It can be returned to the flow path BL41 side. Thereby, the entrance probability to the guide port B4160 can be improved.

  On the other hand, the right-handed ball is prevented from passing to the left and right by the overhanging wall B4010, and therefore is not guided directly below the center of the left and right of the center frame 86 by the road nail, and reaches the variable winning device B4000. Also in this case, it will land on the rolling surface B4191 and flow down along the rolling surface B4191 in the downflow path BL42.

  Since the rolling surface B4191 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, the ball that rolls on the rolling surface B4191 in the flow-down path BL42 passes through a path closer to the front. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the degree of deceleration by contact with the projecting portion B1140.

  The sphere that has passed the left end of the rolling surface B4191 is configured to pass from the right to the left on the upper side of the guide port B4160 along the upper surface of the auxiliary projection B4141. In particular, the right extension B1220 is provided with a cover plate B2270, and a rolling surface B4191 for guiding the sphere projects from the left side toward the center, so that the sphere can be easily placed on the upper surface of the auxiliary projection B4141. Can be put on. Thereby, the entrance probability to the guide port B4160 can be lowered.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, a ball launched to the left or right is configured to be able to reach the variable prize-winning apparatus B4000. The sphere is configured to have a higher probability of entering the guide port B4160. Therefore, it is recommended to play a left-handed game in a normal state aiming to win the jackpot of the special symbol 1.

  In the probability variation state, the player is configured to select whether to play left-handed or right-handed according to the player's preference. At this time, the player considers the profits and disadvantages obtained and selects whether to play left-handed or right-handed. This will be described below.

  In the certain change state, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the open / close bar B2500 is switched to the open state according to the result of the lottery, and the ball can enter the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. Since the through gates 67 are arranged on the left and right, a ball launched to the left or right can pass through the through gate 67, but the probability of entering the left and right through gates 67 is different depending on the spherical aggregate wall B4020. .

  That is, in the right through gate 67, the path is changed by the collision with the nail disposed on the upstream side, and only the sphere that has reached the through gate 67 passes through the through gate 67, while the left through gate 67. Then, in addition to the sphere whose path has been changed by the collision with the nail, the sphere that has rolled on the upper surface of the sphere assembly wall B4020 can pass through the through gate 67.

  The spherical aggregate wall B4020 is composed of a pair of plate-like wall portions disposed above the through gate 67 with a gap about the diameter of the sphere. The left plate-like wall portion has a gap with the inner rail 61 less than the radius of the sphere, and the right plate-like wall portion has a gap with the center frame 86 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

  Between the lower ends of the pair of plate-like wall portions, a gap slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere is provided, and the center position of the gap is positioned vertically above the center of the through gate 67. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the gap of the sphere assembly wall B4020 passes through the through gate 67 with a higher probability (than the probability that a right-handed sphere passes through the right through gate 67). Therefore, focusing on passing the ball to the through gate 67, it is more advantageous for the player to fire the ball left-handed.

  On the other hand, as described above, the left-handed ball enters the guide port B4160 where the lottery of the special symbol 1 is performed with a higher probability than the right-handed ball. When the lottery of the special symbol 1 is set so that the profit obtained by the player when the lottery result is a big hit compared to the lottery of the special symbol 2 (for example, FIG. 142 ( (See b)) In a situation where a special symbol 2 lottery is likely to be performed, it may be more profitable for the player to advance the game so that the special symbol 1 lottery is not performed.

  Therefore, when focusing on the progress of the game so that the ball does not enter the guide port B4160 (so that the special symbol 1 is not drawn), it is more advantageous for the player to launch the ball with a right hand strike. .

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the game in the probability variation state is advantageous in that the ball easily passes through the through gate 67, but is disadvantageous in that the ball easily enters the guide port B4160. While it is disadvantageous in that the probability of passing the ball to the through gate 67 is inferior, it can be left-handed, which is advantageous in that it is difficult to enter the guide port B4160, or it can be left to the player's choice .

  In the special game state (big hit state), the guide plate B4300 is controlled so as to constitute an open state as the round progresses. In this case, a right-handed game is recommended for the purpose of reducing the probability of entering the guide port B4160.

  That is, in the left-handed game, when the ball flows down on the flow-down path BL41 when the opening / closing plate B4300 is in the closed state, the ball enters the guide port B4160. Therefore, a right-handed game is recommended to avoid this. . Since the right-handed ball flows into the pre-entry range along the flow path BL42 even in the closed state of the opening / closing plate B4300, the ball passes from the right to the left above the guide port B4160. It is difficult for the ball to enter.

  On the other hand, the right-handed sphere flows into the pre-entrance range along the flow down path BL42, and thus passes right above the guide port B4160 before heading to the first detection port B1230. Therefore, without taking countermeasures, a ball slipped from the opening / closing plate B4300 can enter the guide port B4160. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the entrance to the guide port B4160 can be avoided by the action of the front projecting portion B4360.

  That is, the sliding of the sphere from the opening / closing plate B4300 occurs when the opening / closing plate B4300 is switched from the open state to the closed state, but due to the displacement of the opening / closing plate B4300 at this time, the front projecting portion B4360 causes the rolling trajectory of the sphere to move. Pass the lower part to the back side. Therefore, when a sphere is arranged behind the front projecting portion B4360, the sphere is pushed by the upper side surface B4362 of the front projecting portion B4360 and is moved to the left and right outside by the action of the shape of the front side surface B4361. Slide down. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where a ball enters the guide port B4160.

  Here, it is possible to control the flow path of the sphere after being switched to the closed state by providing the same shape portion on the above-described opening / closing plate B2300, but the displacement direction of the tilt displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 Since both the falling directions of the spheres are downwards, the displacement of leaving the sphere is likely to occur. For this reason, the degree of pushing the sphere tends to be weak. In addition, if the bulge remains in the pre-entry range even in the closed state, there is a risk of adversely affecting the sphere flowing down the pre-entry range.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, in addition to the direction in which the sphere falls and the moving direction of the front projecting portion B4360 intersect (orthogonal), the guide plate B4300 to such an extent that the front projecting portion B4360 contacts the sphere. Since the sphere slides down from the guide plate B4300 only after the rearward is displaced rearward, the degree to which the front protruding portion B4360 pushes the sphere can be easily increased. Therefore, as compared with the case where the opening / closing plate B2300 is used, the sphere can be greatly moved to the left and right outside, so that the situation where the sphere enters the guide port B4160 can be easily avoided.

  With such a configuration, the guide port B4160 can be disposed at a position close to the guide port B4160 directly below the guide plate B4300 while maintaining the above-described game playability. In this case, the guide port B4160 may be arranged above the embodiment. For example, the upper and lower positions of the upper edge portion of the guide port B4160 may be arranged at a higher position than the vertical position of the lower end portion of the guide plate B4300 (and the vertical position of the lower end portion of the opening / closing bar B2500). . In this case, the vertical width for arranging the openings of the guide port B4160 as the entrance and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be reduced.

  In order to configure in this way, the guide plate B4300 is more advantageous than the opening / closing plate B2300. That is, in the opening / closing plate B2300, the guide port B4160 cannot be disposed in a range where the plate portion B2310 (see FIG. 150A) hangs downward in the closed state. Since the guide plate B4300 is not configured to hang downward in the closed state, the guide port B4160 can be disposed at a higher position.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the entrances corresponding to the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, and the specific winning port 65a (see FIG. 2) can be collectively arranged in the variable winning device B4000. . In addition, left-handed is recommended in the normal state, right-handed is recommended in the special game state (big hit state), and in the promiscuous state, the gameability that allows the player to select left-handed or right-handed game according to the player's preference. Can be configured.

  In addition, while the guide port B4160 corresponding to the first winning port 64 is arranged below the rolling path in the range before entering the ball, the probability of entering the guide port B4160 in the left-handed game or the right-handed game By making different, the game can be advanced so that the lottery of the special symbol 1 is not performed.

  Next, a fifteenth embodiment is described with reference to FIGS. 172 to 176. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate B2300 is arranged on the back side of the range before entering the ball has been described. However, the variable winning device B5000 in the fifteenth embodiment includes the opening / closing plate B2300 that is displaced to the front side, An open state is constituted by the second opening / closing plate B5500 that is displaced to the back side by the same displacement as B2300. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 172 is a front view of a variable winning device B5000 according to the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is a rear view of the variable winning device B5000. In FIG. 172, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the second opening / closing plate B5500 are in a closed state, and the body member B1210 of the covering member B5200 is shown in a transparent manner so that the shape of the back side can be visually recognized. . In addition, a polka dot pattern (dot) is added to at least a part of the range in which the ball cannot pass in the range before entering the ball.

  In FIG. 173, the first driving device B2400 is illustrated, while the second driving device B5600 that generates a driving force for opening and closing the second opening / closing plate B5500 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

  The variable prize-winning device B5000 is formed of a horizontally-long rectangular plate shape, and is fixed to the base plate 60 from the front side with the base member B5100 fixed to the base plate 60, and the flow path configuration range (pre-entrance range) is set to the front side. The cover member B5200, the opening / closing plate B2300, the first driving device B2400, the second opening / closing plate B5500 rotatably supported by the covering member B5200, and the second opening / closing plate B5500. And a rear cover member (not shown) configured to cover the first driving device B2400 and the second driving device B5600 from the back side, which is assembled to the base member B5100 from the back side. ) And mainly. The rear cover member includes a discharge portion that is a through hole through which a ball discharged from the discharge port B1150 passes, and the ball discharged from the discharge portion is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

  The base member B5100 is provided with a thin plate member B2110, a holding hole B1130, a projecting portion B1140, a discharge port B1150, and a rotation support portion B2170, as well as the above-described base member B2100. A slide guide hole B5180 is formed so that the slide bar B5610 of the drive device B5600 can be inserted.

  The slide guide hole B5180 is formed in a gap between the through hole B2114 and the power transmission member B2430 (the operation locus BE1). In the present embodiment, the extending portion B2435 is formed slightly shorter than the power transmission member B2430 described in the twelfth embodiment, and the gap that forms the slide guide hole B5180 is twisted out.

  The covering member B5200 is provided with a main body member B1210, a right extending portion B1220, a first detection sensor B1230, a left extending portion B1240, and a second detection sensor B1250, as in the case of the above-described covering member B1200. The part B1212, the ridge support parts B1225, B1245, and the ball guide receiving part B1260 are omitted.

  Further, the covering member B5200 includes a housing part B5270 that is recessed from the back surface to the front side of the body member B1210 and houses the shaft part B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 and is partially formed to penetrate therethrough.

  The accommodating part B5270 is a rectangular concave part B5272 which is recessed (through-formed) in a rectangular shape below a straight line connecting the left and right support concave parts in which the shaft part B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 is accommodated. And a straight line connecting the pair of support recesses to move the small load-bearing portion B5530 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 operating along the right end of the rectangular recess B5272 so as to enter the front and rear width inside of the main body member B1210. And a through-hole B5273 formed in a rectangular shape along a perpendicular direction.

  The support recess is formed to be recessed from the front side to the back side with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and the shaft portion B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 is accommodated in the assembled state. The rectangular lid plate B5273 (see FIG. 174) is fixed from the front side so as to close the support concave portion, thereby preventing the shaft portion B5520 from falling off the support concave portion.

  The rectangular recess B5273 has a larger surface area than the plate part B5510 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and the recessed length is slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate part B5510. Thereby, in the posture (closed state) in which the second opening / closing plate B5500 is tilted, the plate portion B5510 can be completely accommodated in the rectangular recess B5272, and the opening / closing plate B5500 can be prevented from projecting to the back side of the main body member B1210.

  The second opening / closing plate B5500 is a member that switches between a case where the sphere rolls toward the second detection sensor B1250 and a case where the sphere is dropped downward without coming into contact with the sphere due to a difference in posture. A horizontally long rectangular plate portion B5510 formed in the same size as the plate B2300 and a pair of shaft portions B5520 protruding along the longitudinal direction from the short-side end portion of the plate portion B5510 are newly described. As a part to be performed, a small load portion B5530 extending along a plane perpendicular to the shaft portion B5520 at the root of the shaft portion B5520 on the right side in the front view, and a shaft portion 5520 at the root of the shaft portion B5520 on the left side in the front view. And a ball entry prevention part B5540 that extends along a flat surface and blocks the opening (partially) so as to prevent entry into the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 in the closed state. .

  The plate portion B5510 includes a rolling surface B5511 on which a ball rolls in an ascending posture (open state), and a base member in the ascending posture (open state) in which the length in the short side direction is along the short side direction. The distance from B5100 is set to a length equal to or less than the radius of the sphere, and the left end in the longitudinal direction is close to the second detection sensor B1250.

  In addition, the plate portion B5510 includes a chamfered portion B5512 that is chamfered in a circular arc shape at the upper corner portion of the end portion on the opposite side of the shaft portion B5520 in the raised posture (open state).

  The plate portion B5510 is formed in a plate shape that is long in the left-right direction, and has a length that allows up to five spheres to be placed side by side.

  The small load portion B5530 is provided on the opposite side of the rolling surface B5511 with respect to the shaft portion B5520, and has a shape in which the axial cross section forms a part of a circular shape, from the second drive device B5600. This is the part that receives the driving force.

  The ball entry prevention part B5540 is provided with a parallelogram-shaped cross section in the axial direction on the front side of the rolling surface B5511, and extends to a position that closes at least part of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. This is a part configured to prevent the ball from entering the second specific winning opening B1002.

  174 (a) and 174 (b) are cross-sectional views of the variable winning device B5000 along the line CLXXIVa-CLXXIVa in FIG. 174 (a) shows the closed state of the second opening / closing plate B5500, and FIG. 174 (b) shows the opened state of the second opening / closing plate B5500.

  The second drive device B5600 includes a slide bar B5610 that is inserted through the slide guide hole B5180 and is configured to be displaced back and forth in accordance with the operation of a second solenoid (not shown). The slide bar B5610 is disposed so as to be pulled back from the front side of the thin plate member B2110 when the second solenoid is not excited (see FIG. 174 (a)), and when the second solenoid is excited. The thin plate member B2110 projects to the front side and is configured to be able to push the small load portion B5530 (see FIG. 174 (b)).

  As shown in FIG. 174 (b), in the open state of the second opening / closing plate B5500, the slide bar B5610 enters between the upper edge of the through hole B5273 and the small load portion B5530. In this state, when a ball rides on the rolling surface B5511 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, the second opening / closing plate B5500 is biased to the closed state (tilted state) by the weight of the ball. On the other hand, since the slide bar B5610 has entered the displacement locus of the small load part B5530, the slide bar B5610 is pushed to the small load part B5530 when the second opening / closing plate B5500 is displaced toward the closed state. The slide bar B5610 is restricted from being displaced upward by the upper side surface of the through hole B5273. Thereby, since the displacement of small load part B5530 can be controlled, the 2nd opening-and-closing plate B5500 can be maintained in an open state.

  In the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the slide bar B5610 projects to the pre-entrance range when the second opening / closing plate B5500 is in the open state. Therefore, without measures, there is a possibility that a ball flowing down the pre-entry range may be blocked by the slide bar B5610. For example, when the second opening / closing plate B5500 is arranged so as to project from the vicinity of the left shaft portion B5520 to the front side, the slide bar B5610 is arranged on the right side of the opening of the second detection sensor B1250, thereby obstructing the flow of the sphere. there's a possibility that.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the slide bar B5610 is disposed in the vicinity of the right shaft portion B5520 of the second opening / closing plate B5500, that is, on the opposite side of the second detection sensor B1250. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the slide bar B5610 from obstructing the flow of the sphere toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250.

  FIG. 175 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along the line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line in FIG. 172, and FIG. 175 (b) is the variable winning along the line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line in FIG. It is sectional drawing of apparatus B5000, FIG.175 (c) is sectional drawing of variable prize-winning apparatus B5000 in the line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line | wire of FIG. 175 (a) to 175 (c) show the open state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the closed state of the second opening / closing plate B5500.

  Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 along a line corresponding to the CLXXVa-CLXXVa line in FIG. 172, and FIG. 176 (b) is a line corresponding to the CLXXVb-CLXXVb line in FIG. FIG. 176 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device B5000 taken along a line corresponding to the CLXXVc-CLXXVc line of FIG. 172. 176 (a) to 176 (c) show the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opened state of the second opening / closing plate B5500.

  As shown in FIGS. 176 (a) to 176 (c), the ball on the opening / closing plate B2300 when the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state regardless of the left-right arrangement of the opening / closing plate B2300. The second opening / closing plate B5500 is configured to be displaced toward the open state so as to pass below the sliding start position. The same applies to the displacement of the opening / closing plate B2300 when the second opening / closing plate B5500 is switched to the closed state.

  Thereby, in the opening and closing of the opening and closing plate B2300 and the second opening and closing plate B5500, it is possible to produce an effect of reducing the number of falling balls regardless of the order of opening and closing and the arrangement of the balls with respect to the opening and closing plates B2300 and B5500.

  This effect is particularly significant when the ball placed in the upper part of the range before entering the ball slides (see FIG. 176 (a)). That is, when the ball slides from the opening / closing plate B2300, in addition to the vertical distance between the rolling surfaces B2311 and B5511 in the open state, the width of the plate portion B5510 of the second opening / closing plate B5500 from the lower side in the width direction Since the rolling contact surface B5511 can be displaced upward (displaced upward), the ball can be easily rescued.

  In the present embodiment, for example, in the special gaming state, after the round in which the opening / closing plate B2300 is maintained in the open state (see FIG. 175) ends and the opening / closing plate B2300 is switched to the closed state, the second opening / closing plate B5500 In the case of switching from the closed state to the open state (see FIG. 176), it is possible to configure the second sliding plate B5500 to easily rescue the sphere that has slid down from the switching plate B2300.

  Therefore, in the special gaming state, the interval between rounds is controlled by controlling the opening / closing plate B2300 and the second opening / closing plate B5500 to alternately open and close as the round progresses, as in the first operation pattern described above. In this case, it is possible to cause an action of suppressing the generation of the spilling sphere.

  In order to suppress the generation of the zero ball, it is required to shorten the interval between rounds. In this embodiment, the displacement direction of the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 toward the closed state and the opening / closing plate B5500 toward the open state are required. , B2300 are opposed to each other in the vertical direction, and the displacement trajectories partially overlap. Therefore, if the displacement of the open / close plates B2300, B5500 to the closed state is delayed, there is a possibility of colliding with the open / close plates B5500, B2300 that are displaced toward the open state.

  Here, for example, when the displacement direction to the closed state is a direction to rescue the sphere as in the above-described first rotating member B3700, the displacement resistance varies depending on the number of the spheres. May be delayed.

  On the other hand, since the direction of displacement of the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 in the present embodiment in the closed state is a downward tilting direction, the displacement resistance does not change depending on the number of balls. Furthermore, if the number of balls increases, the degree to which the weight of the balls is urged toward the displacement direction of the opening / closing plates B2300 and B5500 increases, so that the speed of displacement to the closed state can be improved.

  Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the delay of the displacement of the opening / closing plates B2300, B5500 to the closed state, the opening / closing plates B2300, B5500 that are displaced toward the closed state and the opening / closing plate B5500, that is displaced toward the opened state. Collisions with B2300 can be avoided.

  Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described. In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 are arranged with an interval of about 60 mm is described. However, the variable winning apparatus B6000 in the sixteenth embodiment is The interval between the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 is increased. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 177 is a front view of the game board 13 and the variable prize apparatus B6000 in the sixteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 177, the arrangement of the first specific winning opening B1001 and the second specific winning opening B1002 is shifted to the left and right outside, and the interval is long.

  In the present embodiment, the first specific prize opening B1001 is disposed at a position where the left-right distance from the electric accessory 640a is 65 mm, and the second specific prize opening B1002 is 65 mm from the left-right distance from the electric accessory 640a. Placed in position. Since the outer width of the electric accessory 640a in the closed state is about 30 mm, the distance between the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 is about 160 mm. In this case, the left and right length that allows the ball to flow into the range before entering the ball is about 130 mm by subtracting the length of the outer width of the electric accessory 640a.

  The electric accessory 640a forms an open state by tilting in a direction away from each other around a rotation shaft arranged at the lower end, and forms a closed state by rising in a direction approaching each other.

  The structure of the member that opens and closes in the range before entering the ball can be diverted by changing the design described above. For example, according to the interval between the first specific prize opening B1001 and the second specific prize opening B1002, the above-described guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream side members B1320, B1520 are extended in the longitudinal direction to provide the guide plates B1300, B1500. By configuring, the variable winning device B6000 can be configured such that a ball that has reached the range before winning is entered into the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

  As described above, the inclination angles of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 are 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane. In this case, the length in the vertical direction between the upper end portions of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower end portions of the guide members B1510 and B1310 disposed therebelow is about 19.6 mm (= 160 × tan (7 degrees)). Become. For this reason, even if the interval between rounds is set longer than that described above, the occurrence of a zero sphere can be suppressed.

  In addition, although this embodiment demonstrated the case where the inclination angle of guide member B1310, B1510 and upstream member B1320, B1520 was 7 degree | times, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the inclination angle may be set at 45 degrees. In this case, the length in the vertical direction between the upper end portions of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower end portions of the guide members B1510 and B1310 disposed below the upstream members B1320 and B1520 can be further increased. Even if it is set, it is possible to suppress the generation of a spilling sphere.

  Further, a space is formed between the upper end portions of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower end portions of the guide members B1510 and B1310 disposed below the upstream members B1320 and B1520 so that the sphere can enter from the side. Therefore, after the sphere that has not been guided by the upstream side members B1320 and B1520 and has flowed down to the left and right sides collides with other members (nails and resin members) on the downstream side, the guide member passes through the space described above. A situation that reaches B1510 and B1310 can be caused.

  This is a judgment material when the player selects whether to make a right or left strike aiming at the lower part of the pre-entry range or to make a left or right strike aiming at the upper part of the pre-entry range. In the situation where the ball can be guided to the first specific winning opening B1001, the upper part of the pre-entry range can be aimed by left-handed, and the lower part of the pre-entry range can be aimed by hitting right. On the other hand, in a situation where the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening B1002, it is possible to aim at the upper part of the pre-entry range by hitting right and to launch the lower part of the pre-entry range by hitting left. Since the relationship between the mode and the aim is reversed when the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 capable of guiding the ball are changed, the player can be concentrated on the game.

  When launching a ball aiming at the upper part of the pre-entry range, it is possible to avoid a plurality of spheres being arranged at the lower part of the pre-entry range by the deceleration action of the projecting portion B1140 described in the above embodiments. This is advantageous in that the number of generated spheres can be reduced. On the other hand, even if the ball enters the pre-entry range from the space between the upper end portions of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower end portions of the guide members B1510 and B1310 disposed below the upstream members B1320 and B1520, the balls are out. This is disadvantageous in that it tends to flow down toward the mouth 71.

  On the other hand, when launching a ball aiming at the lower part of the range before entering the ball, it is impossible to expect a deceleration action, so multiple balls will be placed at the lower part of the range before entering the ball, and the number of spilling balls will increase. It is disadvantageous in that it is easy. On the other hand, the sphere that has entered the pre-entry range from the space between the upper ends of the upstream members B1320 and B1520 and the lower ends of the guide members B1510 and B1310 disposed below the upper members B1320 and B1520 It is advantageous in that it can be reached and guided to the specific winning openings B1001, B1002.

  To put it simply, when hitting a ball aiming at the upper part of the range before entering the ball, it is unlikely that the ball after falling from above the variable winning device B6000 will be a spilling ball, but entered the range before entering the ball from the side. There is a high possibility that the sphere will become a spilling sphere. On the other hand, when the ball is launched aiming at the lower part of the range before entering the ball, it is considered that even the ball after dropping from above the variable winning device B6000 may be a spilling ball. Even if the ball has entered the range, it may be guided to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 without becoming a spilling ball.

  Thus, in this embodiment, since the balance is set to the profit that the player can obtain when the flow path of the ball toward the variable prize winning device B6000 is different, the player selects the desired profit balance. , The firing mode of the sphere can be selected.

  In the present embodiment, the state is switched between a state in which the sphere is guided to the lower right, a state in which the sphere is guided to the lower left, and a state in which the sphere is not guided, in the same driving manner as the variable winning device B6000. Variable devices B6001 and B6002 that can be configured are arranged in the game area. In addition, although the timing of state switching is not limited in any way, in the present embodiment, the state is switched in a constant pattern from power-on (a constant state switching pattern is repeatedly executed or at regular intervals). State can be switched).

  The first variable device B6001 is disposed directly below the left through gate 67. In a state where the sphere is guided to the lower left, since the distance between the lower end of the plate that guides the sphere and the inner rail 61 is less than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere is temporarily retained. As a result, it is possible to control the arrangement intervals of the spheres fired at equal intervals intentionally.

  In the state where the sphere is guided downward, the guided sphere is guided to the internal flow path 86 a of the center frame 86. The ball that has entered the internal flow path 86a passes through the center frame 86 and is guided from the vicinity of the position directly above the first winning opening 64 to the base plate 60 side (front side), and the base plate 60 and the glass unit 16 ( (See FIG. 1). Therefore, it is possible to easily enter the first winning opening 64.

  Note that the first variable device B6001 is not disposed on the right side of the game area. Therefore, the ease of entering the internal flow path 86a can be changed between the case where the ball is aimed toward the left side of the center frame 86 and the case where the ball is aimed toward the right side of the center frame 86. The ease of entering 64 can be changed.

  The second variable device B6002 is disposed immediately above the center frame 86, and is disposed so that the intersection position of the guide paths coincides with the left and right center position of the center frame 86. A sphere is formed between the second variable device B6002 and the outer rail 62. It is arranged with sufficient space to pass through.

  With the second variable device B6002, it is possible to switch between a state in which a ball that has been launched with sufficient strength to land on the upper end of the center frame 86 is flowed to the left side of the game area and a state of flowing to the right side of the game area. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the situation where the balls flow down evenly to the left and right, and to flow down the number of balls gathered on the left side or the right side.

  Thus, by grasping the state of the second variable device B6002 and launching the ball, it is possible to easily guide the ball to the target range of the game area, so the player's attention to the second variable device B6002 The power can be improved.

  Next, a seventeenth embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven by separate drive devices B1400 and B1600 has been described. However, the variable prize winning device B7000 in the seventeenth embodiment is the first guide plate. A dual-purpose drive device B7700 that is also used for displacement of B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 178 is a top view of the variable winning device B7000 according to the seventeenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 178, in addition to the configuration of the variable prize apparatus B1000 described above, the variable prize apparatus B7000 includes a dual-purpose drive apparatus B7700 disposed on the back side and a linear motion member B1420 toward the dual-purpose drive apparatus B7700. A transmission rod B7422 that extends from the back to the back, bends at the extended tip, and extends upward, and a transmission rod B7622 that extends from the linear motion member B1620 to the back, bends at the extended tip, and extends downward. And comprising.

  Through the transmission rods B7422 and B7622, the driving force generated by the combined drive device B7700 is transmitted to the linear motion members B1420 and B1620, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are configured to be displaceable.

  The combined drive device B7700 is a rotationally driven drive motor B7710, and the rotational force of the drive motor B7710 is rotationally displaced about an axis fixed so as to face in the left-right direction (horizontal direction), thereby transmitting the transmission rod B7422. A transmission rotator B7720 configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force to B7622.

  The transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are extended along the vertical vertical direction of the axis of the transmission rotating body B7720 at the extending tip side. The extending ends of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are configured to engage with the transmission rotary body B7720 at the vertical position of the transmission rotary body B7720 (position 180 degrees away from the axis center, see FIG. 179 (a)). Yes. Hereinafter, the configuration of the transmission rotating body B7720 will be described in detail, and the manner of transmitting the driving force to the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 will be described.

  179 (a) is a front view of transmission rotator B7720, and FIG. 179 (b) is a side view of transmission rotator B7720 as viewed in the direction of arrow CLXXIXb in FIG. 179 (a). These are the expanded views which expanded the circumferential surface of transmission rotator B7720.

  As shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (c), the transmission rotating body B7720 is a member formed in a circular plate shape, and has a center hole B7721 to which the shaft portion of the drive motor B7710 is fixed, and an outer periphery. A groove B7730 that is recessed from the surface inward in the radial direction and is continuously formed along the circumferential direction.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged so as to enter the groove B7730. The entered groove B7730 is configured to have a dimension in which the minimum groove width Wmin is slightly longer than the distal end thickness of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622. Therefore, the transmission is performed with the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 entering the received groove B7730. Rotating body B7720 can be rotated 360 degrees or more.

  The groove B7730 to be entered is formed with a groove width Wmin in almost all angle ranges, and the groove width is expanded to the maximum groove width Wmax in a specific angle range. The groove width Wmax is set as a sufficiently long width that does not limit the displacement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 allowed by the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

  The entering groove B7730 has a section formed by the groove width Wmin extending along one of the two planes BS71 and BS72 perpendicular to the rotation axis, and the two planes BS71 and BS72 with respect to the rotation axis. It is comprised by the area connected along the inclined line.

  The two planes BS71 and BS72 correspond to the left and right positions of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622. In the present embodiment, the interval between the two planes BS71 and BS72 is set so as to correspond to the displacement width of the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 of the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

  That is, when the transmission rod B7422 is disposed on the first plane BS71, the linear motion member B1420 is disposed at a position in the non-excited state of the first solenoid B1410, and therefore the first guide plate B1300 is closed. State. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7422 is arranged on the second plane BS72, the linear motion member B1420 is arranged at a position in the excited state of the first solenoid B1410, so that the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. Is done.

  Further, when the transmission rod B7622 is disposed on the first plane BS71, the linear motion member B1620 is disposed at a position in the non-excited state of the second solenoid B1610, so that the second guide plate B1500 is closed. State. On the other hand, when the transmission rod B7622 is arranged on the second plane BS72, the linear motion member B1620 is arranged at a position in the excited state of the second solenoid B1610, so that the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state. Is done.

  Therefore, the state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched in synchronization with the rotation of the transmission rotating body B7720 by appropriately designing the entry groove B7730. Hereinafter, the details of the shape of the entering groove B7730 will be described.

  The entering groove B7730 is configured such that the transmission rod B7622 is guided to the upper groove portion and the transmission rod B7422 is guided to the lower groove portion with the boundary position BCL71 as a reference, and above and below the boundary position BCL71, respectively. The non-drive section B7731, drive sections B7740, B7750, and effect section B7760 are configured in the same angle range and order.

  In the non-drive section B7731, sections of about 30 degrees are arranged at two positions at intervals of 180 degrees, and the central part in the angular direction is set to the groove width Wmax. In a state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the portion of the groove width Wmax, the displacement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 is not limited to the entry groove portion B7730. Therefore, the state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state by driving and controlling the solenoids B1410 and B1610.

  The driving sections B7740 and B7750 are continuously formed at a section of 105 degrees from the end of the non-driving section B7731, but the shapes are different with respect to the boundary position BCL71.

  In FIG. 179 (c), the first drive section B7740 disposed below the boundary position BCL71 is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7422, and the first groove B7741 formed over about 15 degrees. The second groove B7742 is formed continuously from the first groove B7741 over about 45 degrees, and the third groove B7743 is formed continuously over about 45 degrees from the second groove B7742.

  The first groove B7741 and the second groove B7742 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the arrangement of the third groove B7743 is moved from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

  In FIG. 179 (c), the second drive section B7750 disposed above the boundary position BCL71 is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7622, and the first groove B7751 formed over about 15 degrees, A second groove B7752 continuously formed from the first groove B7751 over about 45 degrees and a third groove B7753 continuously formed from the second groove B7752 over about 45 degrees.

  The first groove B7751 and the third groove B7753 are arranged on the first plane BS71, and the arrangement of the second groove B7752 is moved from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72.

  Therefore, in a state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the drive sections B7740 and B7750, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are displaced along the shape of the entering groove B7730. Therefore, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be switched between the closed state and the open state by the rotation of the transmission rotating body B7720.

  FIG. 179 (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship between the rotation direction of the transmission rotating body B7720 and the state of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500. In FIG. 179 (d), it is assumed that the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 have entered the drive sections B7740 and B7750.

  According to FIG. 179 (d), by appropriately switching the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, the operation pattern for opening and closing only the first guide plate B1300 and the operation pattern for opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 are both guide plates. An operation pattern that alternately opens and closes B1300 and B1500 is also executable.

  When the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are disposed in the first groove portions B7741 and B7751 in the standby state, the second guide plate B1500 is opened even when the operation pattern for opening and closing only the second guide plate B1500 is started. Before configuring the state, it is necessary to go through the open state of the first guide plate B1300, but by increasing the rotational speed of the drive motor B7710, the first guide plate B1300 can be immediately switched to the closed state. In practice, it is unlikely to be a problem.

  In addition, when the second guide plate B1500 is opened in the final round, the second rod portions B7742 and B7752 are used to return the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 to the first grooves B7741 and B7751 at the end of the round. It is necessary to cause a problem that the first guide plate B1300 is opened.

  On the other hand, in actuality, as described above, this can be dealt with by increasing the rotational speed of the drive motor B7710, or the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged at the boundary positions between the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 and the third groove portions B7743 and B7753. Therefore, since both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be dealt with by closing them, practical problems are unlikely.

  Even when the special game state is finished with both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 being closed by disposing the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 at the boundary position between the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 and the third groove portions B7743 and B7753. If the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 is stored until the start of the next special gaming state (that is, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are located at the boundary positions between the second groove portions B7742 and B7752 and the third groove portions B7743 and B7753). If the first guide plate B1300 is opened in the first round, both the case where the second guide plate B1500 is opened can be dealt with.

  As an advantage when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced by the rotation of the transmission rotating body B7720, the operation order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be mechanically defined only by rotationally driving the transmission rotating body B7720. It is done.

  Therefore, a complicated control program required when driving the guide plates B1300 and B1500 with separate driving devices is unnecessary, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are linked in an appropriate order regardless of the speed of the transmission rotating body B7720. Can be made.

  In this case, the interval between rounds can be shortened by increasing the rotation speed of the drive motor B7710 and rotating the transmission rotating body B7720 at a high speed. Further, when the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are driven so as to switch between the closed state and the open state, it is not necessary to reverse the rotation direction of the drive motor B7710, so the interval between rounds is shortened. Can be made easier.

  In the effect section B7760, sections of about 45 degrees are arranged at two positions at intervals of 180 degrees so as to connect the non-drive section B7731 and the drive sections B7740, B7750, and the second plane from the first plane BS71. It is formed so that the arrangement moves on the BS 72. That is, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the effect section B7760, both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state.

  FIG. 180 is a front view of the variable winning device B7000. FIG. 180 shows a state where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the effect section B7760. That is, the state where both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state is illustrated.

  As shown in FIG. 180, when both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are opened, the ball entering the first specific winning hole B1001 is obstructed by the upstream member B1520 and entering the second specific winning hole B1002. The sphere is blocked by the upstream member B1320. In addition, the spheres that have reached the pre-entry range are collected at the intersections of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 and fall downward when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced to the closed state.

  That is, in the state shown in FIG. 180, it is possible to prevent both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 from being opened while preventing both of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 from entering. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 while attracting the player's attention by opening and closing the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

  The state shown in FIG. 180 is not strictly an open state because the state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is changed, but the balls entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are prevented. Therefore, for example, the drive motor B 7710 can be rotationally driven by the output from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) of the sound lamp control device 113, and the state shown in FIG. 180 is controlled as the rendering operation in the normal state. May be. Moreover, you may comprise in the aspect shown in FIG. 180 when guide board B1300, B1500 comprises an open state (for example, small hit), without starting the big hit game.

  Further, as the closed state of the guide plates B1300, B1500, both the state where both the guide plates B1300, B1500 are arranged on the back side and the state where both the guide plates B1300, B1500 are arranged on the front side. It may be configurable. In a state in which both are arranged on the front side, by displacing one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the back side, it becomes possible to enter the ball into one of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002, and the open state is It becomes configurable.

  In the present embodiment, a discharge port B7160 through which the sphere can be discharged from the crossing position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 to the back side is formed. Thereby, it can avoid that a ball | bowl accumulates in the crossing position of guide plate B1300 and B1500.

  The ball that has passed through the outlet B7160 may be treated as an out ball, or it is configured to return to the game area again via a bypass channel that communicates with the outlet B7160, and the return ball is placed at the entrance. You may comprise so that it may enter.

  In the present embodiment, the drive motor B7710 is disposed in addition to the solenoids B1410 and B1610, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the solenoids B1410 and B1610 may be omitted, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be driven only by the drive motor B7710.

  Further, the driving of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in the special game state is executed with the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 in the first state, and the driving force of the drive motor B7710 in the second state different from the first state. You may make it do.

  The special game state may be executed by the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, and the drive motor B7710 may be controlled by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, in the special game state, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 may enter the non-drive section B7731.

  Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described. This embodiment corresponds to another control example of the eleventh embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 both constitute the special winning openings B1001 and B1002. However, the variable winning device B1000 in the eighteenth embodiment provides the first guide. The plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are allowed to be displaced simultaneously, and the first detection sensor B1230 constitutes the first specific winning opening B1001, while the second detection sensor B1250 is configured to function as a specific area. The In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 181 (a) is a diagram showing time changes of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 in the fourth operation pattern, and FIG. 181 (b) is the first guide in the fifth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the time change of board B1300 and 2nd guide board B1500. In the description of FIG. 181, FIGS. 130, 132, and 137 are referred to.

  In the present embodiment, the second guide plate B1500 and the second detection sensor B1250 function as a probability variation determination unit. That is, the second detection sensor B1250 functions as a sensor that detects passage of a sphere in a specific area.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the ball passes the second detection sensor B1250 in the special game state, control is performed so as to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol after the jackpot game is finished.

  The MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 makes a determination regarding acquisition of the right to shift to a special symbol probability change state (high probability state) in the special round during the jackpot game (the first round in this embodiment). ) Only. Hereinafter, the operation pattern of this special round will be described in detail.

  In this embodiment, two types of jackpot D and jackpot E are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. Depending on the jackpot type, the operation pattern of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 is configured differently, and the number of payout prize balls associated with entering the ball and the transition to a probable change state (high probability state) of special symbols It is configured to change the probability of acquiring the right.

  When the jackpot is D, the first round jackpot game is executed in the fourth operation pattern. In this case, the player can almost certainly acquire the right to shift to the probability variation state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but is configured so as to receive almost no payout of the prize ball.

  When the jackpot E is reached, the jackpot game of the first round is executed in the fifth operation pattern. In this case, the player can receive about 150 prize balls, and in most cases, cannot acquire the right to shift the special symbol to the probability change state (high probability state).

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the fourth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot D, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fourth operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 is a solenoid that keeps the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first solenoid starts so as to open the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state. B1410 is driven and controlled. The drive of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled to be switched at intervals of 3 seconds, and the first guide plate B1300 can be switched between an open state and a closed state at intervals of 3 seconds.

  The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state when the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled two seconds after the first drive timing of the first solenoid B1410. The second solenoid B1610 is kept driven for 28 seconds thereafter. Therefore, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to close the first specific winning port B1001 by displacing the first guide plate B1300 to the closed state, and the first round game R is completed. To do.

  According to the above-mentioned fourth operation pattern, it is possible to enter the first specific winning opening B1001 for 2 seconds after the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state, but after 2 seconds have elapsed. Since the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, it is possible to enter the specific area of the second detection sensor B1250, while the first specific winning opening B1001 is closed by the second guide plate B1500. The number of balls cannot be achieved.

  As a result, in the special game in the first round, the player can acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but controls so that it is necessary to wait for the elapse of the specified time. be able to.

<When operating in the fifth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with jackpot E, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 operate based on the fifth operation pattern.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 is a solenoid that keeps the guide plates B1300 and B1500 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) has elapsed by a timer means (not shown). B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first solenoid starts so as to open the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B1300 from the closed state to the open state. B1410 is driven and controlled. The driving of the first solenoid B1410 is controlled so that the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state, and the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state until the end of the round.

  The second guide plate B1500 is switched to the open state when the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled two seconds after the first drive timing of the first solenoid B1410. Since the second solenoid B1610 is released from the drive after 0.5 seconds, the second guide plate B1500 returns to the closed state.

  Then, in the round game R of the first round, the progress of the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or the specified number (10 in the present embodiment) of pachinko balls When the (winning) is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled so as to close the first specific winning port B1001 by displacing the first guide plate B1300 to the closed state, and the first round game R is completed. To do.

  According to the fifth operation pattern described above, it is possible to enter the first specific winning opening B1001 after the first guide plate B1300 is in the open state. Although the second guide plate B1500 is opened after 2 seconds, it is immediately switched to the closed state, so that there is no obstacle to entering the first specific winning hole B1001. On the other hand, since the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state over the period in which the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the second detection sensor B1250 is blocked by the first guide plate B1300. Therefore, the sphere does not pass through the specific area.

  As a result, in the special game in the first round, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probability change state (high probability state) of the special symbol, but without waiting for the elapse of the specified time, The special game in the first round can be completed by entering a prescribed number of balls into the mouth B1001.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the variable winning device B1000 provides a different operation pattern as the control of the first round, so that the payout of the winning ball in the round game is hardly allowed, and the probability change state of the special symbol ( A round can be configured to acquire the right to transition to (high probability state).

  Here, unlike the prior art, in the fourth operation pattern and the fifth operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is used while the second guide plate B1500 is closed before the operation in the first round game. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere reaching the first guide plate B1300 from spilling. This will be described below.

  In the prior art, when a predetermined number of balls have won a prize in the first specific prize opening B1001 before the operation of the operation member that opens and closes the specific area, and the round game ends, the operation member is in an open state. However, there is a possibility that the ball cannot be won in the first specific winning opening B1001 and that the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol. In order to prevent this, the opening / closing member that opens and closes the first specific prize opening B1001 after the start of the round is controlled to be maintained in a closed state for several seconds.

  Therefore, the ball that has flowed down after the start of the round and has reached the opening / closing member at the timing at which it can enter the first specific winning opening B1001 is spilled because the opening / closing member is maintained in the closed state, and the player feels sorry There was a risk of increase.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the second detection sensor B1250 is not arranged downstream of the first specific prize opening B1001, the first guide plate B1300 constitutes a closed state and the first specific prize opening B1001. Even if the ball is unable to enter the ball, if the second guide plate B1500 is in the open state, the player has the right to shift to the probable state (high probability state) of the special symbol without any problem. can do.

  In addition, by setting the time until the start of driving to 2 seconds, the second guide plate B1500 is opened before a specified number of balls (10 in this embodiment) enter the first specific prize opening B1001. I try to switch.

  Therefore, in this operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state even while the second guide plate B1500 is in the closed state before the operation in the first round game. While preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable with the operation of B1300, the player cannot acquire the right to shift to the probable change state (high probability state) of the special symbol due to the winning mode. It can be prevented from occurring.

  Further, in the fifth operation pattern, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state and does not change to the closed state. Therefore, as compared with the case where the opening / closing member is maintained in the closed state for several seconds as described above in the prior art. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of zero balls generated during the first round of gaming.

  The aspect of the special round is not limited to the above description. For example, it may be configured in the second round instead of the first round, or may be configured in the final round, and the number of rounds is arbitrary. A plurality of special rounds may be configured.

  The operation patterns after the second round of jackpot D and jackpot E are not particularly described, but may be configured in common. For example, the first opening / closing plate B1300 is kept open during the round, and the second opening / closing plate B1500 is always kept closed.

  Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described. In the fourteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball that rolls on the guide plate B4300 is configured to be difficult to enter the ball guide receiving portion B4260. However, the variable winning device B9000 in the nineteenth embodiment is a ball guide. It is configured to facilitate entry into the receiving part B4260. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In addition, it is possible to arbitrarily set what kind of profit is given to the player by entering the ball guidance receiving unit B4260. For example, it may be advantageous such as drawing a special symbol, paying out a prize ball, giving a certain probability change state, or disadvantageous such as a falling lottery.

  FIG. 182 is a front view of a variable winning device B9000 in the nineteenth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 182, in the variable winning device B9000, the formation of the left extending portion B1240 is omitted, and the penetration forming portion B9120 drilled in the base member B9100 is inclined from the left end portion of the above-described penetration forming portion B4120. The shape is extended to the left while being maintained, and in the same manner, the front and rear direction is switched so that the state can be switched between an open state in which the sphere can be guided to the opening of the first detection sensor B 1230 and a closed state in which the sphere cannot be guided. A guide plate B9300 that is slidably displaceable from the left end portion of the guide plate B4300 is inclined to the left while maintaining an inclination.

  That is, the variable winning device B9000 forms only a right-downward guiding path that guides the sphere toward the opening of the first detection sensor B1230, and unlike the above embodiments, the formation of the left-downward guiding path is omitted. ing.

  When the guide plate B9300 is in an open state, various modes are exemplified as the manner in which the sphere reaches the guide plate B9300. For example, the base plate 60 (see FIG. 124) is configured such that the sphere falls from above the guide plate B9300, or in an arrangement mode (inclined mode) that can guide the sphere to the guide plate B9300 on the left side (upstream side) of the guide plate B9300. A mode in which a sphere that collides with a nail BKG91 implanted in () reaches the left side of the guide plate B9300 is exemplified.

  The base member B9100 includes a plurality of projecting portions B9140 that act on a ball that rolls on the rolling surface 9311 of the open guide plate B9300. The plurality of projecting portions B9140 are formed in a columnar shape that is long in the vertical direction, and projectingly formed with a length that allows contact with a ball that rolls on the guide plate B9300. Different.

  That is, the first projecting portion B 9141 disposed at the left end is disposed with an interval of about the diameter of the ball from the rolling surface B 9311, and the diameter of the sphere is adjacent to the right of the first projecting portion B 9141. The second projecting portions B9142 arranged at a left-right interval of about twice the length are arranged at an interval of about 5/6 of the rolling surface B9311 and the diameter of the sphere.

  The third projecting portion B9143 disposed at the right side of the second projecting portion B9142 on the right and left sides of the diameter of the sphere is about 4/6 (= 2/3) of the rolling surface B9311 and the diameter of the sphere. The fourth projecting portion B9144, which is disposed with a space between them and is disposed on the right side of the third projecting portion B9143 on the right and left sides of the diameter of the sphere, is approximately the radius of the rolling surface B9311 and the sphere. They are arranged at intervals. The fourth projecting portion B9144 is formed at a position slightly displaced to the left from directly above the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

  That is, as the projecting portion B9140 moves from the first projecting portion B9141 to the fourth projecting portion B9144, the contact position with the sphere rolling on the rolling surface B9311 approaches the center of the sphere. The action of decelerating the ball gradually increases. Therefore, the protruding portion B9140 can increase the degree of deceleration of the sphere rolling on the rolling surface B9311 as it goes downstream.

  Thereby, a difference can be given to the residence time of the rolling ball for every position of rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the stay time of the sphere in the vicinity of the fourth projecting portion B 9141 can be made relatively long, the probability that the sphere will flow down toward the sphere guide receiving portion B 4260 when the guide plate B 9300 is switched to the closed state. Can be raised.

  The fifth projecting portion B9145, which is disposed on the right side of the fourth projecting portion B9144 with a left and right spacing of about 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, is 4/6 (= 2 of the diameter of the sphere and the rolling surface B9311. / 3) The sixth projecting portion B9146, which is disposed at a right and left distance of about the diameter of the sphere on the right side of the fifth projecting portion B9145, is spaced from the rolling surface B9311. They are arranged at an interval of about 5/6 of the diameter of the sphere.

  That is, as the projecting portion B9140 moves from the fourth projecting portion B9144 to the sixth projecting portion B9146, the contact position with the sphere that rolls on the rolling surface B9311 is separated from the center of the sphere. The action of slowing down the sphere gradually decreases. Therefore, the protruding portion B9140 can increase the degree of acceleration of the sphere rolling on the rolling surface B9311 toward the downstream side.

  Thereby, a difference can be given to the residence time of the rolling ball for every position of rolling surface B9311. In particular, since the stay time of the sphere at the position immediately before the first detection sensor B 1230 can be made relatively short, the sphere enters the first detection sensor B 1230 before the guide plate B 9300 is switched to the closed state. Can be made easier. As a result, the efficiency of entering the first detection sensor B 1230 into the opening can be improved, and the number of falling balls can be reduced.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the load in the vertical direction is easily applied to the sphere by making the contact position with the sphere different vertically. Therefore, not only the case where the ball rolls in close contact with the rolling surface B9311, but also a case where the ball flows down (runs out) while jumping may occur. As a result, it is possible to give a kind to the flow-down mode of the sphere guided by the guide plate B9300, and the player who pays attention to the sphere does not get bored.

  In addition, although protruding part B9140 was demonstrated as a rod shape long in a perpendicular direction, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the longitudinal direction may be inclined with respect to the vertical direction. For example, the elongate direction may coincide with the direction of downward inclination toward the left side. In this case, a difference in the degree of deceleration of the sphere can be caused by the speed of the sphere rolling on the rolling surface B9311. For example, when the ball rolls at a high speed, it is easy to get on the slope of the projecting portion B9140 and the degree of deceleration becomes small. On the other hand, when the rolling speed of the ball is slow, the ride does not occur and it is sufficient It can comprise so that it can decelerate to. In this case, the degree of deceleration of the sphere approaching the protruding portion B9140 can be varied depending on the difference in the rolling speed of the sphere.

  In the present embodiment, a gradually accelerating section may be provided in a section where the degree of deceleration gradually increases (a section from the first projecting portion B 9141 to the fourth projecting portion B 9144), or gradually accelerated. A section that gradually decelerates may be provided in a section (a section from the fourth projecting portion B9144 to the sixth projecting portion B9146) in which the degree of increase increases.

  Note that the configuration of the present embodiment may be employed in a device that intersects the guide routes described in the above embodiments. Further, the protruding portion B9140 is not limited to the case where it is fixed to the base member B9100.

  For example, through the opening formed integrally with the guide plate B9300 and formed in the base member B9100, switching between a state protruding into the pre-entry range in conjunction with the guide plate B9300 and a state buried from the pre-entry range You may comprise. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball collides with the projecting portion B9140 in the closed state. In this case, all the protruding portions B9140 may be configured to be interlocked with the guide plate B9300, or some of the protruding portions B9140 are interlocked with the guide plate B9300, and the other protruding portions B9140 are the base members. It may be fixed to B9100.

  Note that the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is not limited to being disposed below the lower end of the guide plate B9300. For example, it may be disposed close to the guide plate B9300 and may be disposed so as to enter the upper side of the lower end portion of the guide plate B9300 (the portion in contact with the ridge support portion B1225). In this case, by narrowing the vertical distance between the guide plate B9300 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a ball slipped from the guide plate B9300 enters the ball guide receiving portion B4260.

  Next, a twentieth embodiment will be described. In the thirteenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are configured to be in the open state by being pivotally displaced downward. However, the variable winning device B20000 in the twentieth embodiment is directed upward. It is configured to be in an open state by rotational displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 183 (a) and 183 (b) are partial front views of the variable prize apparatus B 20000 in the twentieth embodiment in a range corresponding to the range CLXIIa in FIG. 158, and FIG. 183 (c) is a view in FIG. ) Is a partial top view of the variable prize apparatus B20000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXXXIIIc.

  183 (a) and 183 (c) illustrate the closed state of the variable prize apparatus B20000, and FIG. 183 (b) illustrates the open state of the second rotating member B20900. As shown in FIG. 183, the variable prize-winning device B20000 has a first turning member B20700 that constitutes a ball guiding path by being rotationally displaced, and a second time that constitutes a ball guiding path by being rotationally displaced. Moving member B20900.

  The supporting member that supports the rotating members B20700 and B20900 is provided with the above-described projecting shaft portion B3171 and the arcs centered on the projecting shaft portion B3171, and the displacement of the projecting portions B20711 and B20911 is guided. Arc-shaped hole B20172 is formed.

  Since the first rotation member B20700 and the second rotation member B20900 are formed in a substantially symmetrical shape, the first rotation member B20700 will be described, and the description of the second rotation member B20900 will be omitted.

  The first turning member B20700 is in a closed state (see FIG. 183 (a)) for preventing the ball from entering the first specific winning opening B1001, and is turned and displaced in the rising direction to move to the first specific winning opening B1001. Can be switched between an open state (see FIG. 183 (b) for the second rotating member B20900) and is pivotally supported by the right projecting shaft portion B3171. Main body B20710 and an extending plate B20720 extending along the radial direction of the main body B20710.

  The main body B20710 includes a projecting portion B20711 that projects from the left and right inner (left) positions to the back side in parallel with the rotation axis from the projecting shaft B3171. The protruding portion B20711 extends to the back side through the arc-shaped hole B20172.

  In addition, the main body B20710 includes a plate portion B20712 that projects along the radial direction. The plate portion B20712 projects to the opening side of the first detection sensor B1230, and can prevent the ball from entering the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 in the closed state. On the other hand, the plate B20712 and the lower edge of the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 are gently connected in the open state (in a state where the tip is raised), and the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 is opened in the open state. A ball can be entered.

  The extended plate portion B20720 is formed so as to taper toward the extended distal end side in a front view, and is recessed along a rolling surface B20721 on which a game ball can be placed, and a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis direction. A recessed portion B20722.

  The recessed portion B20722 is a recessed portion formed from the movement locus of the second rotating member B20900 in the front view to a position where it is retracted in order to avoid interference with the second rotating member B20900. B20922 is also formed on the second rotating member B20900.

  The recessed portions B20722 and the recessed portions B20922 are alternately formed in the axial direction. Accordingly, the formation area of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 is ensured while avoiding the collision between the first rotating member B20700 and the second rotating member B20900.

  A ball can be brought into contact with the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 regardless of the state of the rotating members B20700 and B20900. Therefore, for example, immediately after being guided by the rolling surface B20721 in the closed state and reaching the vicinity of the center position, the rolling surface B20921 is in an open state, and a situation can be caused in which the sphere is guided to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. . In other words, both rotating members B20700 and B20900 may function to bring the sphere closer to the opening of the same detection sensor (for example, the second detection sensor B1250).

  In the closed state shown in FIG. 183 (a), the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 intersect with each other, and the ball accumulates as it is. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge port B20001 for discharging the sphere that has reached the intersection of the rolling surfaces B20721 and B20921 to the back side is formed. Thereby, it can avoid that a ball | bowl accumulates in the intersection position of rolling-contact surface B20721 and B20921 in a closed state.

  The profit given to the player by the ball that has entered the outlet B20001 is not limited in any way. For example, the discharge port B20001 may be configured as an out port so that no profit is given, or a prize ball may be paid out by entering the discharge port B20001, or the discharge port B20001 The ball that has entered the ball may be configured to return to the game area again, and in that case, the return position may be configured as a position where it is easy to enter one of the winning holes.

  Next, a twenty-first embodiment will be described. In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the ball guide receiving portion B1260 is fixed has been described. However, in the variable winning device B21000 according to the twenty-first embodiment, the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to be capable of rotational displacement. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 184 is a partial front view of the game board 13 in the twenty-first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 184, in the variable winning device B21000 in the present embodiment, a ball guide receiving portion B21260 formed so as to have a recessed portion that can receive one ball vertically above the intersecting position of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Is disposed.

  The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can receive one ball in the receiving posture in which the concave portion faces upward, and the received ball is held in the ball guide receiving portion B21260 as long as the receiving posture is maintained. When another sphere reaches the ball guide receiving unit B21260 while the ball is received by the ball guide receiving unit B21260, the ball collides with the sphere held by the ball guide receiving unit B21260 to guide the ball. It flows down the left and right outer sides of the receiving part B21260.

  The ball guide receiving portion B21260 can be switched to a discharge posture in which the concave portion faces obliquely downward to the right by rotating clockwise about the rotation axis B21261. It is configured to be able to discharge the ball that has been down. The ball guide receiving portion B21260 is configured to return to the receiving posture by being rotationally displaced counterclockwise from the discharging posture.

  As a result, it is possible to hold up to one sphere flowing down on the left flow path BL1 by the ball guide receiving portion B21260. Therefore, when the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is included in the range before entering the ball, The period until the arrived sphere enters the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be changed by the sphere guide receiving part B21260.

  Note that the timing at which the attitude of the ball guidance receiving unit B21260 changes is not limited in any way. For example, the posture may change at a certain interval from power-on, the posture may change due to a ball collision load to the discharge posture, and the posture may return to the receiving posture by a biasing means such as a spring. The posture may be changed in conjunction with a solenoid for driving the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

  In the case of interlocking with the solenoid, each time the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are switched to the open state, the ball guide receiver B21260 is switched from the receiving posture to the discharging posture, and at the timing when the ball guide receiving portion B21260 is switched to the closed state. By allowing B21260 to return to the receiving posture, a ball that may pass through the pre-entry range in the closed state can be temporarily retained in the ball guide receiving portion B21260. Can be reduced.

  In addition, the displacement of the ball guide receiving portion B21260 has been described as a displacement in which the concave portion reciprocates on the right side of the rotation axis B21261. However, the displacement is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the ball guide receiving unit B21260 may be configured to be displaced in the same direction after one or more rotations so that it returns from the receiving posture to the discharging posture and then returns to the receiving posture again.

  A twenty-second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The eleventh embodiment has been described on the assumption that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 are individually displaced. However, the variable winning device B22000 in the twenty-second embodiment includes the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B2500. It is configured taking into account that it can be displaced simultaneously. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 185 (a) is a top view of the variable prize apparatus B22000 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 185 (b) is a sectional view of the variable prize apparatus B22000 along the CLXXXVb-CLXXXVb line in FIG. 185 (a). FIG. 185 (c) is a partial side view of the variable winning device B22000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CLXXXVc in FIG. 185 (b).

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of circuits for exciting the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are prepared. That is, a positive direction circuit for energizing and exciting the plunger in a direction opposite to the biasing force of the return spring is prepared in each solenoid B1410, B1610, and the plunger is moved in the direction along the biasing force of the return spring. A reverse circuit for energizing and exciting the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is prepared for displacement. Of course, such a circuit can be added in other embodiments.

  As shown in FIGS. 185 (a) to 185 (c), the second guide plate B22500 of the variable winning device B22000 is connected to the connection fixing member B22530 from the connection fixing portion B1530 of the second guide plate B1500 in the eleventh embodiment. In addition, the first guide plate B22300 is formed in an L shape in front view so that the shape portion projected from the front and rear direction of the connecting and fixing member B1330 is removed.

  Accordingly, the connecting and fixing member B22530 can be arranged at the same front and rear position as the connecting and fixing member B1330 of the first guide plate B22300. Therefore, the front and rear widths required for arranging the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B2500 are as follows. Can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when a plurality of movable members (guide plates B1300, B1500, etc.) are arranged densely as in each of the above embodiments, or when configured as in this embodiment, for example, the first solenoid B1410 is excited. Thus, when only the first guide plate B22300 is opened / closed, there is a possibility that the second guide plate B22500 is interlocked by the action of the frictional force generated between the connection fixing member B1330 and the connection fixing member B22530.

  It should be noted that the situation in which the frictional force is generated between the connection fixing member B1330 and the connection fixing member B22530 does not matter whether the design is intentional or not. For example, in the design stage, even if a gap is left between the coupling fixing member B1330 and the coupling fixing member B22530 so that no frictional force is generated, the arrangement of the coupling fixing members B1330 and B22530 may be displaced due to secular change, The gap between the connecting and fixing member B1330 and the connecting and fixing member B22530 is blocked due to the fact that dust accumulates on the surface, or other liquids or fluids that have entered the gap adhere to the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B22530, etc. Power can be generated.

  In the present embodiment, it is designed so as to leave a gap. By forming the rear cover member B23700 in such a shape as to cover the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B22530, which are part of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 and are arranged close to each other, the dust on the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B22530 Can be suppressed. Further, as will be described later, the dust placed between the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B22530 can be scattered by generating small hits frequently before the shift to the big hit game. Thereby, accumulation of dust can be suppressed and malfunction caused by the accumulation of dust can be prevented.

  Further, for example, by closing the gap between the connection fixing member B1330 and the connection fixing member B22530 from the design stage, the effect of the one connection fixing member B1330, B22530 guiding the displacement of the other connection fixing member B22530, B1330 is achieved. You may design as you expect.

  In this case, when one of the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 is driven, there is a premise that a frictional force is applied to the other, and therefore a load (for example, a solenoid B1410) for preventing the other displacement. , B1610 biasing spring) may be generated.

  Even in this case, the frictional force may increase due to the ingress of dust, other liquids or fluids may stick, or the load to prevent displacement may decrease due to deterioration over time. The first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 may be displaced in accordance with the displacement of one.

  Here, similarly to the first embodiment, the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced to the front side to constitute the open state of the corresponding specific winning ports B1001, B1002, but the first guide In a state where both the plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced to the front side, the balls entering both the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 are prevented (see FIG. 180).

  Therefore, when the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is energized and excited, the guide plates B22500 and B22300 different from the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to be displaced by the excited solenoids B1410 and B1610 are the first It is a problem if it is left in a state where it is moved by the frictional force generated between the guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500.

  In other words, as a round game, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main controller 110 is controlled so as to constitute a state in which it is possible to enter the first specific winning port B1001 or the second specific winning port B1002. Nevertheless, the ball cannot be entered into the specific winning openings B1001, B1002, and the normal game cannot be continued.

  In other words, as a round game, it is controlled so that the fired ball can easily enter any one of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002, and can be expected to pay out a large amount of prize balls. The display on the device 81 (see FIG. 124) is designed on the assumption that a large amount of prize balls can be expected, and even though the balls are fired no matter how many times the balls are fired, the prize balls can be paid out. The game will be confused. In this case, the interest of the player may be significantly reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the first guide plate B22300 and the arrangement of the second guide plate B22500 can be detected, and the malfunction of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 can be grasped at an early stage. It is possible.

  More specifically, the variable winning device B22000 is provided with a first detection sensor BSC221 and a second detection sensor BSC222. The first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 have detection grooves of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. The plate-like detected parts B22350 and B22550 that can be arranged in the same manner are formed respectively. In addition, although the formation position of to-be-detected part B22350, B22550 is not limited at all, in this embodiment, it is not arrange | positioned in a detection groove in the closed state of guide plate B22300, B2500, but the open state of guide plate B22300, B2500 Then, it is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove.

  The detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are photocoupler type sensors that detect the positions of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. The photocoupler type sensor includes a light projecting unit that projects light and a light receiving unit that receives light from the light projecting unit, and a gap in which a portion to be detected (detected portions B22350, B22550) can be inserted. It means a sensor provided with (slits, detection grooves) and arranged in a substantially U-shape.

  That is, with the above configuration, the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 can determine the arrangement of the guide plates B22300 and B2500 from the outputs of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. If so, measures can be taken by various methods such as control to return to the normal arrangement. Hereinafter, some countermeasure examples will be described with specific examples.

  First, a first countermeasure example will be described. If the first solenoid B1410 is energized and excited to bring the first guide plate B22300 into an open state, the first detection sensor BSC221 is provided with the detected portion B22350 and the second detection is performed if it is normally operated. The sensor BSC 222 should be in a state where the detected part B22550 is not arranged.

  Here, in the first countermeasure example, when it is detected that the detected part B22550 is arranged in the second detection sensor BSC222, in the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main controller 110, the guide plate B22300, It is determined that a malfunction has occurred in B2500.

  That is, although the second solenoid B1610 is not excited, the load transmitted from the first guide plate B22300 to the second guide plate B22500 causes the second guide plate B22500 to be displaced to the front side and the linear motion member B1620. Is displaced to the left, and it is determined that there is a situation in which the plunger of the second solenoid B1610 is pushed to the left.

  In this case, the control program of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main control device 110 is sent to the second solenoid through a drive circuit that excites the second solenoid B1610 so as to displace the linear motion member B1620 to the right side (the opposite side to the normal side). By configuring B1610 to be excited, the second guide plate B22500 can be retracted to the rear side (controlled to be restored). As a result, even if the guide plates B22300 and B22500 temporarily malfunction in an interlocking manner, the interlock can be eliminated, so that the game can be continued.

  Next, a second countermeasure example will be described. When the first solenoid B1410 is energized and energized to bring the first guide plate B22300 into an open state, the detected portion B22350 is disposed in the first detection sensor BSC221, and the second detection sensor BSC222 is If the detected portion B22550 is not disposed, and then the first solenoid B1410 is deenergized, the detected portion B22350 is not disposed in the first detection sensor BSC221.

  Here, in the second countermeasure example, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is used when the detected portion B 22350 is left in the first detection sensor BSC 221 even after the energization of the first solenoid B 1410 is released. (See FIG. 4), it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the guide plates B22300 and B22500.

  That is, despite the fact that the excitation of the first solenoid B1410 has been canceled, the displacement resistance generated between the second guide plate B22500 and the first guide plate B22300 increases due to the above-described circumstances, or unexpected circumstances. When the displacement of the first guide plate B22300 is obstructed due to (for example, illegal acts that illegally obstruct the displacement of the first guide plate B22300), the linear motion member B1420 is maintained in the left position. Then, it is determined that there is a situation where the first guide plate B22300 is maintained in the open position.

  In this case, the control program of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main controller 110 is controlled by the first solenoid through a drive circuit that excites the first solenoid B1410 so as to displace the linear motion member B1420 to the right (opposite side). By configuring the B1410 to be excited, the first guide plate B22300 can be retracted rearward. As a result, even if the malfunction occurs in such a manner that the guide plates B22300 and B2500 are retracted, the malfunction can be solved by using the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, so that the game can be continued. can do.

  Next, a third countermeasure example will be described. When the first solenoid B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 are maintained in a non-excited state, the detected portions B22350, B22550 should not be arranged in any of the detection sensors BSC221, BSC222.

  Here, in the third countermeasure example, the detected part B22350 is arranged in the first detection sensor BSC221 even though the first solenoid B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 are maintained in a non-excited state, or When the detected part B22550 is arranged in the second detection sensor BSC222, it is determined that a malfunction has occurred in the guide plate B22300 or B2500 in the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main controller 110.

  That is, a fraudulent act (for example, a thin line such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area through a through passage such as a foul ball path connecting the game area and the lower plate 50 (see FIG. 1), and the guide plate B22300 is passed through the piano line. , B22500 etc., the guide plate B22300 or B22500 is illegally opened by a player who performs a fraudulent act to change the state of the movable members such as the guide plates B22300, B22500 by applying a load to the movable member from the outside of the game area. Is determined to have occurred.

  In this case, the control program of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) of the main controller 110 drives the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the side having at least the detected portions B22350 and B22550 that are not detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 on the side to be operated are energized, both guide plates B22300 and B22500 are configured to be in an open state, and error notification is executed to keep the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 closed (see FIG. 180), an error can be notified.

  In the present embodiment, both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are energized and both guide plates B22300 and B2500 are in an open state in order to more reliably configure the closed state of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Is done.

  As a result, when an illegal act of illegally opening the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is performed, error notification can be executed without causing a payout associated with winning.

  In other words, in the conventional case, for the illegal act of illegally opening the variable prize apparatus B22000, for example, in the case of being controlled in a closed state (for example, before the execution of a round game or during a normal game, etc.) When a ball entering B1001 or B1002 is detected, an error notification may be controlled.

  However, in this case, there is a possibility that a prize ball will be paid out when the player enters the ball, and it is considered that a fraudulent person may obtain an illegal profit (payout prize ball). For example, the fraudster can enter a specific number of balls into the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 and obtain a payout prize ball during the period from error notification to when the error notification is dealt with. It is thought that there is a case and it is a problem.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 by opening both the guide plates B22300 and B22500 without waiting for the entering into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. (See FIG. 180) and error notification can be executed while maintaining this state, so that error notification can be executed without causing a payout associated with winning.

  The countermeasure method is not limited to the first countermeasure example to the third countermeasure example, and various modes are exemplified.

  In summary, when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 whose outputs are to be changed are set based on the driving modes of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, the expected change does not occur or the unexpected change occurs. Control is performed so that the problem is solved or an error is notified.

  The detection by the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 and the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 may be used as a countermeasure against fraud (electromagnetic radiation fraud) in which a prize ball is obtained by electromagnetic wave irradiation. This electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud is a fraudulent act that causes detection sensors B1230 and B1250 to erroneously detect that a sphere has passed by emitting electromagnetic waves toward the game board 13 using a dedicated device. In the case where the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are prize ball sensors, an illegal profit can be generated by paying out the prize balls, and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 perform lottery (for example, special symbol lottery) by entering the ball. In such a case, profits based on fraudulent lottery may occur, so early detection and prevention of electromagnetic wave radiation fraud are desired.

  Here, since the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are arranged close to each other so as to be accommodated in the variable prize apparatus B22000, when a strong electromagnetic wave is irradiated, erroneous detection occurs in the first detection sensor B1230. At the same time, it is considered that erroneous detection also occurs in the second detection sensor B1250. On the other hand, due to the structure, the entrance to the first detection sensor B 1230 and the entrance to the second detection sensor B 1250 are prevented from occurring simultaneously.

  Therefore, when the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 detect the incoming ball at the same time, it is highly possible that the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud has been performed, so that it is possible to detect the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud early by executing error notification. it can.

  In addition, since the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged close to each other so as to be accommodated in the variable prize apparatus B22000, when erroneous detection occurs in the first detection sensor BSC221 when a strong electromagnetic wave is irradiated, At the same time, it is considered that erroneous detection occurs in the second detection sensor BSC222.

  Therefore, when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are detected at the same time, it is highly possible that the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud has been performed, so that it is possible to detect the electromagnetic wave irradiation fraud early by executing error notification.

  In the normal control, when the detection of the detected part B 22350 by the first detection sensor BSC 221 and the detection of the detected part B 22550 by the second detection sensor BSC 222 can occur simultaneously, only in that case, the above-mentioned It is preferable to perform control so as not to execute such error notification.

  Here, various modes are exemplified as modes for executing error notification. For example, it may be controlled so that the game is disabled at the same time as the error notification (for example, the operation of the payout control device 111 (see FIG. 4) is stopped), or a ball is entered into some winning holes at the same time as the error notification. (For example, both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are energized and both specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 are closed), and the game itself can be performed while error notification is being executed. If the error notification is continued even after the time has elapsed, it may be controlled so that the game is disabled. When the error notification is executed in the special gaming state, until the special gaming state is ended. The game may be continued and may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the special game state is ended, or may be controlled in other manners.

  In addition, when the cause of an error alert | report requires an urgent response, it is preferable to make a game impossible simultaneously with an error alert | report. Although various modes are exemplified as those requiring urgent response, they may occur when normal control is being executed even when a load such as a frictional force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is taken into consideration. This corresponds to the case where no situation is determined.

  For example, when the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are in a non-excited state (excluding a state in which the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are not energized immediately after being energized), it is determined that the detected parts B22350 and B22550 have entered the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. In such a case, it is suspected that an illegal act of applying a load to the guide plates B22300 and B22500 from the outside is required.

  For example, if it is not determined that the detected parts B22350, B22550 have entered the detection sensors BSC221, BSC222 in the state where the solenoids B1410, B1610 are excited, a failure of the drive devices B1400, B1600 or the detection sensors BSC221, BSC222 is suspected. Urgent action is required.

  In particular, when the drive devices B1400 and B1600 are out of order (for example, when the longitudinal projecting portions B1433 and B1633 are broken so that the driving force cannot be transmitted to the guide plates B22300 and B2500, or the wires of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are In the case of burnout, etc., it is impossible to execute the jackpot game, and even if the player wins the jackpot, the player cannot pay out sufficient prize balls in the jackpot game. Therefore, the dissatisfaction of the player will increase, and this is a problem, so it is preferable to stop the game early.

  Note that various modes are exemplified as the error notification. For example, a warning message such as “error occurred” may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or red light emission may be executed and alerted by the lighting units 29 to 33 (see FIG. 1). Alternatively, a warning sound may be output from the sound output device.

  If there is a possibility of fraud or deterioration over time, an auxiliary repair control is executed before the error notification, and if the normal state is restored by this repair control, an error notification is performed. The game may be continued without being executed, but may be controlled so as to make the game impossible by performing error notification when the normal state is not restored by the repair control.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as handling of the output signal detected as a premise of error notification. For example, error notification may be executed in accordance with determining a difference from an output assumed as a normal detection pattern.

  In addition, for example, one or a plurality of erroneous detection patterns having different causes may be set in advance, and if they coincide with any of the erroneous detection patterns, the possible causes of the erroneous detection pattern may be simultaneously displayed in the error notification. . In this case, the time required for investigating the cause can be reduced, so that the time required for repairing the defective part can be shortened.

  Next, a third control example will be described using the configuration of the twenty-second embodiment. In the third control example, the configuration of the twenty-second embodiment will be described for convenience, but this control example can also be used in other embodiments. The same applies to other control examples.

  First, the ROM 202 in the third control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the third control example. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first hit random number table 202a, a second hit random number table 202c, a first hit type selection table 202b, a variation pattern selection table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

  This small hit type selection table 202e is used to select the small hit type when a small hit is made based on a game ball entering the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640. It is.

  The contents of the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 187 (a) to 187 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a.

  In this control example, as in the above-described eleventh embodiment, as the added value after the jackpot, the special symbol probable state until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times after the special game state (bonus game) ends. (High probability state) is assigned, and after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times, the normal state is set.

  As shown in FIG. 187 (a), the first per-random number table 202a determines whether or not the value of the first per-random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the first winning port 64 is a big hit. In order to determine whether the value of the first symbol random number counter C3 acquired when the game ball enters the second winning port 640 and the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining The special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is set.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), a random value determined to be a win in the lottery of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first winning port 64. This is a table in which (determination value) is set. In the first special symbol lottery, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “0”, and if it is “0”, it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “10 to 19”, and if it is “10 to 19”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is “1 to 9” or “20 to 319”, it is determined that the value is off.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 is a random value (determination value) determined to be a win in the lottery of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second winning opening 640. Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first random number counter C3 is “0-9”, and if it is “0-9”, it is determined that it is a big hit. In addition, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is “10 to 39”, and if it is “10 to 39”, it is determined that it is a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that “40 to 319”, it is determined that it is out of place.

  Thus, the first per-random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In the first per-random number counter C3, when the first special symbol is drawn based on the first winning port 64, the first special symbol is a random number, and the total number of random numbers is 320. Among them, since the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 1, the probability of jackpot of the first special symbol is “1/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 10, the probability that the first special symbol will be a small hit is “10/320”.

  On the other hand, at the time of lottery of the second special symbol based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640, the random number value that is the big hit of the second special symbol is 10, and the total number of random number values is 320, Since the total number of random numbers is 10, the probability of winning the second special symbol is “10/320”. In addition, since the total number of random numbers that will be a small hit is 30, the probability that the second special symbol will be a small hit is “30/320”.

  As in the above-described embodiments or control examples, when it is determined that the symbol is a normal symbol, after the variable display on the second symbol display device is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol) is “○”. The symbol is lit up and the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time.

  The electric accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened in 1 second × 2 times when the probability change is being performed, but is opened only for 0.2 seconds when the probability change is not being performed. Therefore, even when the value of the second winning random number counter C4 (see FIG. 142 (c)) becomes a win when the probability change is not in progress, it is difficult to win the game ball into the second winning opening 640. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a game that attempts to enter the second winning port 640 even though the probability is not changing.

  The change in the total number of small hit determination values described above is set with the number of lotteries generally required from the end of the big hit game until the next big win is obtained as a guide. That is, about 1/30 frequency is set for the small bonus of the first special symbol, if the probability of the big bonus is “1/320”, at least about 30 times by the next big bonus. This is based on the perceived expectation that a lottery will be required. In addition, the small special hit of the second special symbol is set to a frequency of about 1/10 because if the probability of a big hit is “10/320”, it is at least about 10 times before the next big hit. This is based on the perceived expectation that a lottery will be required.

  By setting in this way, in many cases, it is possible to generate at least one small hit after the end of the previous jackpot game and before the start of the jackpot game immediately after that. Thereby, when a defect has occurred in the variable winning device B22000, it is possible to easily find the defect before the start of the jackpot game. Accordingly, there is a situation in which the player's interest is significantly lowered, that is, the defect of the variable prize winning device B22000 is detected only after the game state is shifted to the jackpot game and a period in which a large amount of prize balls can be paid out is started. Can be easily avoided.

  Note that the small hitting frequency can be arbitrarily set. The lower the frequency, the lower the frequency of occurrence of short opening of the variable prize apparatus B22000 and the possibility of disturbing the player's concentration. However, the effect of early detection of defects in the variable prize apparatus B22000 is reduced. On the other hand, the higher the frequency, the higher the frequency of short opening of the variable winning device B22000, so there is a greater risk of disturbing the player's concentration. However, it is possible to easily detect defects in the variable winning device B22000 at an early stage. That is, the small hitting frequency can be arbitrarily set by selecting from the advantages and disadvantages exemplified above.

  Next, the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 188 (a) to 188 (c) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202e.

  The small hitting type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hitting selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hitting type based on the first winning opening 64, and a small hitting based on the second winning opening 640. A special symbol 2 small hit selection table 202e2 for selecting the type (see FIG. 188 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 188 (b), at the small hit based on the first winning opening 64, when the value of the small hit type counter C6 is “0 to 49”, the small hit A is selected, and “50 to 99”. In this case, the small hit B is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 188 (c), at the small hit based on the second winning opening 640, when the value of the first hit type counter C6 is “0-9”, the small hit A is selected. In the case of “˜99”, the small hit B is selected.

  In this control example, the operation of the guide plates B22300 and B2500 is set according to the small hit type (see FIG. 189). As will be described in detail later, the small hit A is set for the purpose of determining a failure based on unintended interlocking of the guide plates B22300 and B2500, and the small hit B is a deterioration of the return spring of the guide plates B22300 and B2500. The operation is set with the aim of determining a defect based on.

  Note that the small hit B based on the second winning opening 640 is more easily selected than the small hit A for various reasons. As a first reason, since the small hit B is easier to prevent entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 than the small hit A, it is executed to enter the second winning hole 640. Even in a situation where a ball flowing down without entering the second winning hole 640 in the right-handed game flows down through the variable winning device B22000, it is difficult for a ball to enter the specific winning holes B1001, B1002 at the time of small hitting execution. Reducing the number of payout balls. Note that the details of the fact that the small hit B is easier to prevent entering the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 than the small hit A will be described later.

  Also, as a second reason, it is considered that the jackpot based on the second winning opening 640 is likely to occur a plurality of times in succession, so when the stop state continues for a long time and the gap between the members is filled, etc. It is expected that a failure based on the interlocking between the guide plates B22300 and B22500, which is considered to occur easily, is unlikely to occur. Rather, it is considered that the deterioration of the return spring, which is likely to occur when the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are repeatedly driven, is considered to have a higher priority for detection.

  The probability that the small hit A and the small hit B are selected is not limited to this. For example, the small hit A may be set so as to be selected more easily than the small hit B. In this case, since the sign can be found at a stage where the frictional force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is smaller, it is possible to find a defect in advance or early detection.

  This can be explained by the difference in the state of the return spring between the small hit A and the small hit B when the displacement starts due to the friction force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500.

  That is, at the small hit A, it is detected that the guide plates B22300, B22500 on the non-driven side are displaced by the frictional force against the urging force of the return spring in the extended state (small urging force), which is defective. It aims to judge. On the other hand, in the small hit B, it is detected that the guide plates B22300, B22500 on the side not driven are not displaced by the frictional force against the urging force of the return spring in a contracted state (a large urging force state). It aims to judge.

  For this reason, the biasing force of the return spring against which the frictional force opposes is smaller in the case of the small hit A than in the case of the small hit B, and therefore the friction force generated between the guide plates B22300 and B2500 is smaller. Even so, you can find signs of the failure. As a result, it is possible to detect defects before they occur or early detection.

  In other words, by increasing the occurrence frequency of the operation (for example, small hit A) on the side that can detect a failure from an early stage as compared with the occurrence frequency of the operation on the inferior side (for example, small hit B). , It is possible to detect defects in advance and early detection.

  FIG. 189 is a diagram showing the time changes of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 at the small hit A and the time changes of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 at the small hit B.

  In FIG. 189, illustration of a shift in the operation timing of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 and the timing of energization (excitation) of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is omitted, and the timing is illustrated as being the same.

  In addition, the normal detection pattern described later actually takes into account the time during which the guide plates B22300 and B2500 are displaced from the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern described later as a timing chart showing the excitation timing of the solenoids B1410 and B1610. However, in the explanation of FIG. 189, for the sake of convenience, the switching timing (excitation or deexcitation timing) in the timing chart of the sixth operation pattern or the seventh operation pattern is preferable in the description of FIG. This is illustrated and described on the assumption that it is the same as the switching timing in the normal detection pattern.

  First, an outline of the operation in the small hit A will be described. In the small hit A, the first solenoid B 1410 is driven (excited) so that the first guide plate B22300 is maintained in an open state for 0.1 second from the start of the small hit, and when 0.1 second has elapsed, The drive (excitation) of the first solenoid B 1410 is released, and this release state continues for 0.1 second. This is one set, and two sets are repeated as the operation of the first guide plate B22300.

  Thereafter, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited) so that the second guide plate B22500 is maintained in an open state over 0.1 second, and when the 0.1 second has elapsed, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited). Is released, and this released state continues for 0.1 second. This is one set, and two sets are repeated as the operation of the second guide plate B22500.

  Next, an outline of the operation in the small hit B will be described. At the small hit B, the first solenoid B 1410 is driven (excited) for the first guide plate B22300 so that the first guide plate 22300 is maintained in an open state for 0.2 seconds from the start of the small hit. When 2 seconds have elapsed, the drive (excitation) of the first solenoid B 1410 is released, and the release state is continued from the start of the small hit until reaching 0.4 seconds.

  On the other hand, with respect to the second guide plate B2500, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited) so that the second guide plate 22500 is maintained in the open state from the start of the small hitting for 0.3 seconds, and the 0.3 second. When elapses, the driving (excitation) of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and the release state is continued from the start of the small hit until reaching 0.4 seconds.

  The first solenoid B1410 is driven (excited) so that the first guide plate 22300 is maintained in an open state over 0.3 seconds after 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit, and 0.3 seconds have elapsed. Then, the drive (excitation) of the first solenoid B 1410 is released, and the release state is continued from the start of the small hit until reaching 0.8 seconds.

  On the other hand, for the second guide plate B22500, the second solenoid B1610 is driven (excited) so that the second guide plate 22500 is maintained in an open state for 0.2 seconds after 0.4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the small hit. When the 0.2 second has elapsed, the driving (excitation) of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and the released state is continued from the start of the small hit until reaching 0.8 seconds.

  As described above, in the small hit B, the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are both in the closed state, and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are both in the front. In particular, a state that prevents entry to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 (hereinafter, also referred to as “special closed state”), and an open state in which one of the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 is positioned forward. The state can be switched with.

  As described above, the small hitting A and the small hitting B have the same small hitting game time itself (0.8 seconds), but the operation modes of the guide plates B22300 and B2500 during the small hitting game are different.

  As described above, the small hit A is set with the aim of determining a failure based on unintended interlocking of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. That is, based on the sixth operation pattern set to the small hit A, a normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 when operating normally with the sixth operation pattern is set. Keep it. When the normal detection pattern is compared with the actual detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and it is determined that they do not match (for example, the guide plates B22300 and B2500 on the non-driven side). When the displacement to the front side is detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222), the guide plates B22300 and B2500 are interlocked by increasing the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B2500. It is possible to determine that the state has been reached, and it is possible to make a player or a clerk of a gaming machine store grasp the defect by error notification.

  Note that an allowable value for determining whether the detection patterns match or does not match can be arbitrarily set. Also, the type of allowable value (pattern deviation width, deviation frequency, etc.) can be arbitrarily set. In this control example, the determination is made based on the pattern shift width, and when a position having a shift width of 0.1 seconds or more occurs, it is determined that there is a mismatch.

  In this case, if the deviation frequency exceeds 0, it is determined that there is a mismatch. If this is too severe for practical use, for example, the determination of the deviation frequency may be performed at the same time, and when the deviation frequency is 10 times / second, it may be determined that there is a mismatch. Note that the numerical setting of the deviation frequency can be arbitrarily changed.

  At the small hit A, the drive and release of the first guide plate B22300 and the drive and release of the second guide plate B22500 are executed as a set. Therefore, even when any of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is driven, a failure can be found with a single small hit, so an early detection of the failure can be achieved.

  The small hit B is set for the purpose of determining a failure based on the deterioration of the return springs of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. That is, based on the seventh operation pattern set to the small hit B and the seventh operation pattern, it is assumed that the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 detect the normal operation with the seventh operation pattern. The normal detection pattern to be set is set. When the normal detection pattern is compared with the actual detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 and it is determined that they do not match (for example, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the side where the drive is released) Is detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222), for example, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 exceeds the biasing force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610. It is possible to determine that the state has been reached, and it is possible to make a player or a clerk of a gaming machine store grasp the defect by error notification.

  In the small hit B, the case where the driving force of the first guide plate B22300 is released first and the case where the driving force of the second guide plate B22500 is released first are executed as a set. Therefore, even if there is a defect in the return spring of any solenoid B1410, B1610, it is possible to find a defect with one small hit, so it is possible to detect the defect early.

  Further, by detecting the timing at which the difference between the seventh operation pattern and the normal detection pattern occurs at the small hit B, it is determined which of the solenoids B1410, B1610 has a defective return spring. Can do.

  That is, if there is a difference in 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit, the first guide plate B22300 is maintained in the open state even though the excitation of the first solenoid B1410 is released. If it can be determined that the urging force of the return spring of the first solenoid B1410 is low and a difference occurs after 0.4 seconds from the start of the small hit, the second solenoid B1610 Since the second guide plate B22500 is maintained in the open state despite the release of the excitation, it can be determined that the urging force of the return spring of the second solenoid B1610 is low.

  By changing the type of notification using this judgment result, it is possible to accurately notify the position that needs repair, so the time for the operator to find the position that requires repair can be reduced, and the work time for maintenance Can be shortened.

  As a comparison between the sixth operation pattern for the small hit A and the seventh operation pattern for the small hit B, the possibility of entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 during the small hit execution will be described.

  In FIG. 189, the timing at which it is possible to enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 in each operation pattern is schematically described side by side in the operation pattern. That is, the straight lines described as the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 indicate that the solid line section is allowed to enter, and the broken line area is not allowed to enter. Is shown.

  In both the small hit A and the small hit B, the specific winning opening B1001, B1002 is maintained in the open state for 0.1 seconds, so the ball is rolled to the left and right (unlike the situation where the ball enters due to falling). In order to enter the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, the time for which the balls are guided is insufficient, and the possibility of entering the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 during the small hitting execution is low.

  If it dares to compare, the special winning opening B1001, B1002 is smaller in the small hit B with the timing of simultaneous operation compared to the small hit A in which the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 is opened and closed independently. It is assumed that entering the ball is less likely to occur.

  That is, when both the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced forward (see FIG. 180), the flow of the sphere in the vicinity of the openings of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 interferes with the upstream members B1320 and B1520. As a result, the ball arrives at the rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 immediately after the displacement.

  In addition, when both the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are displaced forward, the sphere that has reached near the upstream side of the specific winning holes B1001, B1002 is moved to the center along the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521. Since it is formed so as to be approached, a speed in a direction away from the specific winning openings B1001, B1002 is generated, and it is difficult to make a ball entering the specific winning openings B1001, B1002.

  From these facts, compared with the small hit A, the small hit B is less likely to enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002. Therefore, by configuring the control so that the small hit B can be selected as the small hit, it is possible to reduce the number of payout winning balls generated at the time of the small hit execution.

  In the situation assumed as a case where the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 described above do not match the normal detection pattern assumed to be detected, as shown in FIG. 189, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 cannot enter the ball. (A broken line). Therefore, even when the guide plates B22300 and B22500 malfunction as described above, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player can enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

  The time difference (0.1 second in the present embodiment) set in the seventh operation pattern is set as a sufficiently short time to prevent entry into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, but is detected. For the sensors BSC221 and BSC222, a device having a performance with a sampling period (resolution) sufficiently shorter than 0.1 seconds is selected. As a result, it is possible to effectively determine whether or not an operation pattern with a time difference as short as 0.1 seconds has occurred normally.

  The purpose of detecting the deviation from the normal detection pattern is to determine that the other guide plates B22300 and B22500 are displaced at the timing when only one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 should be displaced as described above. Various purposes are envisaged in addition to the purpose.

  For example, the purpose of determining that there is an operation delay from the drive execution timing or the drive release timing is assumed. As the operation delay, at least a delay in driving execution timing (start operation delay) and a delay in driving release timing (return operation delay) are assumed.

  The cause of the delay in the drive execution timing is that the device (structure or control) is delayed so as to delay the opening operation of the guide plates B22300 and B2500 in order to increase the operating resistance due to deterioration over time or adjust the profit rate in the jackpot game. Injustice that adds

  Even if the drive is controlled with the same operation pattern, if the opening operation of the guide plates B22300 and B2500 is delayed, the length of time that the guide plates B22300 and B2500 can be maintained in the open state is shortened. Therefore, it is assumed that the number of balls entered into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 tends to be small, and this is illegally used for adjusting the profit rate.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is a discrepancy with the normal detection pattern, the above-mentioned fraud can be detected early by performing error notification. That is, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage in the big hit game by finding the fraud when the small hit game is executed.

  The cause of the delay in the timing of release of driving may be an increase in operating resistance due to deterioration over time, a decrease in the urging force of the return spring due to deterioration over time, or a profit exceeding the normally planned profit in jackpot games (for example, the interval between rounds) In order to obtain an excessively large number of winning prizes (excess prizes), the device (structure or control) is modified so as to delay the return operation (for example, a thin metal wire is entered from the outside, and the thin metal wire is It is assumed that a load is applied in such a direction as to hinder the backward displacement by hooking on the guide plates B22300 and B2500.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that there is a discrepancy with the normal detection pattern, the above-mentioned fraud can be detected early by performing error notification. In other words, by detecting the above fraud at the time of execution of a small hit game, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a player suffers a disadvantage in a big hit game or a situation in which a person who performs an illegal act can obtain an illegal profit. Can do.

  On the other hand, time delay can usually occur due to entanglement with the sphere. Therefore, when performing error notification as a time delay, in addition to the method of setting only the length of the time delay itself, an error notification is performed when the preset maximum limit value of excess winnings is exceeded. A method of setting so as not to report an error regardless of the length of the delay is also conceivable.

  In this case, for example, a ball clogging occurs on the downstream side, the ball stays in the pre-entry range, and the staying ball affects the operation of the guide plates B22300 and B22500. Even in a regular mode, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game can be continued without error notification. Thereby, the freedom degree of game property can be improved.

  FIG. 190 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the big hit type in the special symbol. The first hit type selection table 202b is a data table in which a determination value for determining the big hit type is stored, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is a lottery trigger for each of the big hit types and special symbols. Is defined in association with the type of the winning prize. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

  Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning port 64) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”. Is defined in association with jackpot F (see 202b11 in FIG. 190).

  When the jackpot F is reached, the 15-round jackpot game is executed with the eighth operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the shot balls.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “20 to 49”, the big hit G is associated and defined (see 202b12 in FIG. 190).

  When the jackpot G is reached, an eight-round jackpot game is executed with the eighth operation pattern of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 1160 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the ball for the shot.

  In the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “50 to 99”, the big hit H is associated and defined (see 202b13 in FIG. 190).

  When the jackpot is H, a four-round jackpot game is executed with the eighth operation pattern of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 580 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the ball for the shot.

  As described above, in any case, if the big win is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol 1 (the lottery based on the first winning opening 64), the variable winning device B22000 operates in the eighth operation pattern. . Therefore, the difference in the number of prize balls paid out by the player appears as a difference in the number of rounds. As the number of rounds increases, the number of prize balls to be paid out increases and the time required for the big hit game also increases.

  The jackpot based on the special symbol 1 lottery (the lottery based on the entrance to the first winning slot 64) can win 15 rounds with a 20% probability, while it has a 50% chance to win 4 rounds. Basically, you can't expect a lot of prize balls. On the other hand, the 4-round jackpot game is completed in a shorter time compared to the 15-round jackpot game, so that it is possible to start launching a ball for the subsequent jackpot acquisition early.

  On the other hand, if the special symbol 2 lottery (the lottery based on the entry to the second winning opening 640) is a big win, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 99” (all ranges). Is defined in association with jackpot f (see 202b14 in FIG. 190).

  When the jackpot f is reached, as in the case of the jackpot F, a 15-round jackpot game is executed with the ninth operation pattern of the variable winning device B22000. In this case, the player can receive a payout of about 2170 prize balls as an increase obtained by subtracting the shot balls.

  As described above, in the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol 1, the total number of rounds of the jackpot game is selected from three types and controlled by the eighth operation pattern. On the other hand, in the jackpot by lottery of the special symbol 2, the total number of rounds of the jackpot game is the same every time and is controlled by the ninth operation pattern.

  In addition, for convenience of explanation, the total number of rounds of jackpot by lottery of special symbol 2 is controlled to be the same every time, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, like the lottery of the special symbol 1, the total number of rounds of the jackpot game may be selected from a plurality of types. Hereinafter, the difference between the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern will be described.

  FIG. 191 (a) is a diagram showing a change in time of the specific winning ports B1001, B1002 in the eighth operation pattern, and FIG. 191 (b) is a time measurement of the specific winning ports B1001, B1002 in the ninth operation pattern. It is the figure which showed the change.

  When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a big hit in the special figure determination, the MPU 201 starts control of the determined type of big hit game after the special figure change display (symbol change effect) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 performed when the big hit game is awarded will be described.

<When operating in the eighth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is jackpot game with jackpot F, jackpot G or jackpot H, the MPU 201 controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are operated based on the eighth operation pattern.

  Based on the eighth operation pattern, the MPU 201 sets a normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 when operating normally in the eighth operation pattern. The detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be collated at any time or at a specified timing.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 solenoids the timer means (not shown) to keep the guide plates B22300 and B2500 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first solenoid starts so as to open the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B22300 from the closed state to the open state. B1410 is driven and controlled, and the first guide plate B22300 is operated for a long time. At this time, immediately after the start of the first round game R, the short opening operation (a part of the sixth operation pattern, see FIG. 189) is controlled.

  In this case, when the actual detection result in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern, error notification is executed. Accordingly, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B2500 is increased, so that early detection of defects (discovery in the vicinity of the start of the initial round) due to the fact that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in an interlocking state is achieved. be able to.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled to displace the first guide plate B22300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the round game R of the first round is completed. .

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to hold the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. The second round game R is started after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  The first interval time Int1 between rounds is set as a time sufficient for the balls guided by the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to pass through the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 (discharge from the game area).

  Here, in the configuration of the variable winning device B22000, specific winning ports B1001, B1002 are arranged adjacent to the lower ends of the guide plates B22300, B22500 (see, for example, FIG. 180) and guided to the guide plates B22300, B2500. Since there is almost no time delay until the ball passes through the specific winning openings B1001, B1002, it is also possible to set the first interval time Int1 between rounds in an extremely short time (for example, 0.01 seconds). .

  For example, by setting the first interval time Int1 between rounds to an extremely short time, it is easy to prevent the spheres placed in the pre-entry range at the first interval time Int1 between rounds from being out balls. it can.

  Moreover, the length of the interval between rounds does not need to be unified between rounds. It is also possible to set a jackpot type that is set so that the length of the interval between rounds differs at least in part, or a jackpot type that is set so that the length of the interval between rounds between rounds is all different Is possible. In this case, for example, as a feature between rounds, when the target rounds are different, between rounds where spilling balls are likely to occur and between rounds where spilling balls are unlikely to occur are generated within the same jackpot game. Can do.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the second guide plate B22500 is displaced from the closed state to the open open state. The second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled to open the second specific winning opening B1002, and the second guide plate B22500 is operated for a long time. At this time, immediately after the start of the round game R of the second round, control is performed so that a short opening operation (part of the sixth operation pattern, see FIG. 189) is executed.

  In this case, when the actual detection result in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern, error notification is executed. Accordingly, the frictional force between the guide plates B22300 and B2500 is increased, so that early detection of defects (discovery in the vicinity of the start of the initial round) due to the fact that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in an interlocking state is achieved. be able to.

  Then, in the round game R of the second round, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has been won. ) Is satisfied, the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled to displace the second guide plate B22500 to the closed state and close the second specific prize opening B1002, and the round game R of the second round is completed. .

  When the second round game R ends, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to hold the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. The third round game R is started after the first interval time Int1 between rounds.

  In the third round, as with the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) starts to be measured by the timer means, and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are released from the closed state. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled to be displaced to the open state. In this state, the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is still maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 180). Thereafter, only the driving of the second solenoid B1610 is released, and the first guide plate B22300 is operated for a long time, so that the first specific prize winning opening B1001 is maintained in an open state.

  In other words, immediately after the start of the third round game R, a part of the seventh operation pattern (see FIG. 189) is controlled to be executed. In this case, when the actual detection result in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern, error notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve early detection of defects (discovery in the vicinity of the start of the initial round) associated with a decrease in the biasing force of the return spring of the second solenoid B1610.

  Then, in the round game R of the third round, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has been won. ) Is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled to displace the first guide plate B22300 to the closed state to close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the round game R of the third round is completed. .

  When the round game R of the third round is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to hold the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. And the round game R of the fourth round is started after the first interval time Int1 between rounds has elapsed.

  In the fourth round, as with the start of the first round, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means and the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 are released from the closed state. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled to be displaced to the open state. In this state, the second specific winning opening B1001 is still maintained in the closed state (see FIG. 180). Thereafter, only the driving of the first solenoid B1410 is released, and the second guide plate B22500 is operated for a long time, thereby maintaining the second specific winning opening B1002 in an open state.

  In other words, immediately after the start of the round game R of the fourth round, control is performed so that a part of the seventh operation pattern (see FIG. 189) is executed. In this case, when the actual detection result in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern, error notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to achieve early detection of defects (discovery in the vicinity of the start time of the initial round) associated with a decrease in the biasing force of the return spring of the first solenoid B1410.

  Then, in the round game R of the fourth round, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has been won. ) Is satisfied, the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled to displace the second guide plate B22500 to the closed state to close the second specific prize opening B1002, and the round game R of the fourth round is completed. .

  When the round game R of the fourth round is completed, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to hold the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds has elapsed. And, after the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the round game R of the fifth round is started.

  In the fifth and subsequent rounds, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are alternately operated for a long time for each round game R (that is, the first guide plate B22300 is opened in the odd round and the second guide plate B22500 is opened in the even round. Mode, the round game R of the 5th round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the first interval time Int1 between rounds, and the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are closed and opened. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled so as to be displaced between the states and to open and close the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

  In this case, when the actual detection result in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern set based on the eighth operation pattern, error notification is executed. Thereby, early detection of the defect of variable prize-winning apparatus B22000 can be aimed at.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid B1410, the timer means keeps the guide plates B22300, B2500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. B1610 is driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

<When operating in the ninth operation pattern>
When the jackpot type is a jackpot game with a jackpot f, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 so that the guide plates B22300 and B22500 operate based on the ninth operation pattern.

  Based on the ninth operation pattern, the MPU 201 sets a normal detection pattern that is assumed to be detected by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 when operating normally with the ninth operation pattern. The detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be collated at any time or at a specified timing.

  When the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) is finished, the MPU 201 solenoids the timer means (not shown) to keep the guide plates B22300 and B2500 in a closed state until a predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled, and after the opening time OP has elapsed, the first round game R is started.

  That is, the first solenoid starts so as to open the first specific winning opening B1001 by starting the measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) by the timer means and displacing the first guide plate B22300 from the closed state to the open state. B1410 is driven and controlled, and the first guide plate B22300 is operated for a long time.

  In the first round game R, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls won. ) Is satisfied, the first solenoid B1410 is driven and controlled to displace the first guide plate B22300 to the closed state and close the first specific winning opening B1001, and the round game R of the first round is completed. .

  When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to hold the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in the closed state until the second interval time Int2 (0.04 seconds) between rounds elapses. The second round game R starts after the second interval time Int2 between rounds.

  In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, measurement of the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started by the timer means, and the second guide plate B22500 is displaced from the closed state to the open open state. The second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled to open the second specific winning opening B1002, and the second guide plate B22500 is operated for a long time.

  Then, in the round game R of the second round, a round end condition (round game time (30 seconds which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has passed or a predetermined number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has been won. ) Is satisfied, the second solenoid B1610 is driven and controlled to displace the second guide plate B22500 to the closed state and close the second specific prize opening B1002, and the round game R of the second round is completed. .

  When the second round game R ends, the timer means controls the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to hold the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in a closed state until the second interval time Int2 between rounds elapses. After the elapse of two interval times Int2, the third round game R is started.

  In the third and subsequent rounds, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are alternately operated for a long time for each round game R (that is, the first guide plate B22300 is opened in the odd round and the second guide plate B22500 is opened in the even round. Mode, the round game R of the third round to the maximum 15th round is repeated between each round game R with the second interval time Int2 between rounds, and the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are closed and opened. The solenoids B1410 and B1610 are driven and controlled so as to be displaced between the states and to open and close the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

  In this case, when the actual detection result in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern set based on the ninth operation pattern, error notification is executed. Thereby, early detection of the defect of variable prize-winning apparatus B22000 can be aimed at.

  Then, when the round game R of the final round is finished, the solenoid B1410, the timer means keeps the guide plates B22300, B2500 in the closed state until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapses. B1610 is driven and controlled, and the big hit game ends with the passage of the time.

  There are mainly the following differences between the above-described eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern. As a first difference, in the eighth operation pattern, a part of the sixth operation pattern or a part of the seventh operation pattern is executed at the start of the round game R in the first to fourth rounds. . The second difference is that in the eighth operation pattern, the interval between round games R is set at the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds, whereas in the ninth operation pattern, round games R are set. Is set as the second interval time Int2 (0.04 seconds) between rounds. Hereinafter, each difference will be described in order.

  According to the first difference, in the eighth operation pattern, the failure detection by detecting the deviation from the normal detection pattern of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be executed at the initial stage of the jackpot game. As a result, it becomes possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied due to the fact that the defect becomes obvious during the subsequent probability change and the game cannot be continued.

  In the ninth operation pattern, since no failure was found in the jackpot (first jackpot) of the special symbol 1 executed in the eighth operation pattern, it is not necessary to dare to try to find a failure many times. Therefore, executing part of the sixth operation pattern or part of the seventh operation pattern at the start of the round game R is omitted.

  Therefore, there is a disadvantage that the player cannot enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 during execution of a part of the sixth action pattern or a part of the seventh action pattern, It is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will have a disadvantage that the ball that has reached the point spills from the guide plates B22300 and B22500 and is guided to the out port 66 (see FIG. 124).

  As a result, the ball can be guided to the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 immediately after the start of the round game R, so that the time required for the round game R can be shortened and the number of lost balls generated. Can be reduced.

  According to the second difference, the time of the round game R is shorter in the ninth operation pattern than in the eighth operation pattern, and the time required for the entire jackpot game can be shortened. . Therefore, even if the special symbol 2 lottery is easily performed during the probability change, and even if the special symbol 2 wins continuously, it is possible to prevent the jackpot game from being delayed and efficient even in a short time. The jackpot game can be executed a plurality of times, so that the player can acquire sufficient prize balls.

  Furthermore, compared with the 8th operation pattern, the 9th operation pattern has a shorter time between the round games R, and it passes through the pre-entry range between the round games R and goes to the out port 66. It is easy to reduce the number of spilling spheres. As a result, the number of spilling spheres can be reduced regardless of the sphere firing mode.

  Therefore, the ninth operation pattern can reduce the number of sloppy balls while reducing the time required for the entire jackpot game (advantage of obtaining the same prize ball number in a short time) as compared with the eighth operation pattern. Since it can be done (advantage that can reduce the waste of the launch ball (investment) to obtain a prize ball), it is advantageous twice for the player. Therefore, the player's willingness to win the jackpot of the special symbol 2 can be increased, and the interest of the player when the jackpot of the special symbol 2 is actually acquired can be improved.

  Further, according to the ninth operation pattern, since the second interval time Int2 between rounds is short, the operation timings of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that are displaced to the closed state and the guide plates B22500 and B22300 that are displaced to the open state are partially Can be easily stacked. In other words, it is easy to configure a situation in which the other guide plates B22500 and B22300 start to be displaced before the operation of the one guide plate B22300 and B2500 that has started to be displaced is completed and stopped.

  In operation, the arrangement of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is likely to be unstable compared to the arrangement relationship of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in a stopped state. By deliberately operating the guide plates B22300 and B22500 in an unstable state, it is easy to configure a situation in which the gap between the guide plates B22300 and B2500 is filled, and it is possible to easily generate a frictional force.

  Further, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the side displaced to the closed state are displaced rearward from the state in which the weight of the sphere before being guided to the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 is loaded, so that the stable position in the closed state In comparison, the arrangement tends to shift downward. Also from this, the gap between the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is likely to be shorter than the dimension at the time of design, and the frictional force can be easily generated between the guide plates B22300 and B22500.

  Thereby, for example, the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that should be displaced to the closed state by frictional force are maintained in the open state (front position), or the displacement is delayed, resulting in a pattern different from the normal detection pattern. Is detected (output) by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, the MPU 201 can determine that a defect has occurred, and can perform error notification based on this determination.

  Thereby, for example, it is possible to detect an early failure caused by the urging force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, and repair can be executed before the failure affects the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 after the startup process described above will be described. FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As its outline, each process of S1001 to S1009 is executed as a periodic process with a period of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1012 and S1013 is executed in the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 192), first, during execution of a timer interrupt process (not shown, the same applies hereinafter), output data such as commands stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is received. External output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence / absence of winning detection information detected by the switch reading process is determined, and if there is winning detection information, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of balls acquired is transmitted to the payout control device 111. In addition, the number-of-holding balls command set in the special symbol variation process or the start winning process is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a command such as a round number command set in the jackpot control process is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a sphere, a sphere launch signal is transmitted to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS 1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the big win state, the execution of the big hit effect or the variable winning device B22000 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning openings B1001, B1002 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, whether or not the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 are opened for each round of the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 has elapsed, or whether a specified number of balls have won the specified winning holes B1001 and B1002 Determine. And when any of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning openings B1001, B1002 are closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning ports B1001 and B1002 are repeatedly executed a predetermined number of rounds. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 192), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 109).

  Next, a small hitting control process (S1005) is executed. In the small hit control process, the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are opened and closed with the set operation pattern (in the present control example, the sixth operation pattern or the seventh operation pattern, see FIG. 189). In the present embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 192), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, abnormality processing (S1006) is executed. In the abnormal process, when the detection is different from the reference based on the pattern detected by each detection sensor (detection sensors B1230, B1250, BSC221, BSC222, etc.) in the normal state (normal detection pattern) Control is performed so as to return it to the reference, or it is determined that a malfunction has occurred and an error notification is issued. In the present embodiment, the abnormality process (S1006) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 192), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

  Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process (S1007) for performing opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning prize opening 640 is executed. In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set, the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the normal symbol variation process are completed.

  Next, the 1st symbol display update process which updates the display of 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B is performed (S1008). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start processing, variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red until the fluctuation time elapses after the fluctuation starts, the red LED If the green LED is lit, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is lit. If the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is turned on. And turn on the red LED.

  The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed every time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted once each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The counter value is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Further, in the first symbol display update process (S1008), when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process ends, the variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. , And the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in the display mode set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 110).

  Next, the 2nd symbol display update process which updates the display of a 2nd symbol display apparatus is performed (S1009). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the normal symbol variation start process, the variable symbol display device starts the variable display. Thereby, in the 2nd symbol display apparatus, the variable display which turns on the symbol of "(circle)" and the symbol of "x" as a 2nd symbol alternately is performed. In addition, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the normal symbol variation process, the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device is terminated and the normal symbol variation start is started. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit display) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010). If the occurrence information of power interruption is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: No), a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. SG1 is not output and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current main process (S1011). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1011: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the processes after S1001 described above are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the current main process (S1011: No), the first time is reached until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process execution timing. The updating of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1012 and S1013).

  First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1012). Specifically, 1 is added to the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (319, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the update of the variation type counter CS1 is executed by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1013).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1009 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next main process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly performing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C3 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can be updated at random.

  In the processing of S1010, if the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is stored in the RAM 203 (S1010: Yes), the power supply is shut down due to the occurrence of a power outage or the power off, and the power outage monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power outage signal SG1. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process has been executed, the power-off process after S1014 is executed. First, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1014), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113). (S1015). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1016), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1017), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut down and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area to be backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1010 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1009, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1012 and S1013 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main controller 110, the occurrence information of the power supply interruption is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power interruption state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. The process can be started from S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case where the initialization is performed in the startup process. Therefore, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value in the initial setting process without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer in the process at power-off. By setting the value (initial value), it is possible to start from the processing of S1001. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control device 110 and to perform accurate control without causing the main control device 110 to malfunction or run away.

  The twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 198. The eleventh embodiment has been described on the assumption that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 of the variable winning device B1000 are individually displaced. However, the variable winning device B23000 in the twenty-third embodiment includes the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500. It is configured in consideration of the possibility of simultaneous displacement based on control. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are top views of the variable winning device B23000 in the twenty-third embodiment. FIG. 193 (a) shows a state in which the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 are integrally connected by the switching device B23800, and FIG. 193 (b) shows the first guide plate by the switching device B23800. A state where the connection between B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 is released is illustrated.

  FIG. 194 is a right side view of the variable prize apparatus B23000, and FIG. 195 is a front view of the variable prize apparatus B23000. In FIG. 194, the rear cover member B23700 is not shown for easy understanding, and a part of the switching device B23800 is shown by an imaginary line. In FIG. 195, only the right side plate portion related to the switching device B23800 is shown in the rear cover member B23700, and the other portions are not shown. FIGS. 194 and 195 illustrate a state where the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are not excited.

  The difference between the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 from the guide plates B1300 and B1500 described above in the eleventh embodiment is mainly whether or not an engaging portion with the switching device B23800 is provided.

  That is, the first guide plate B23300 includes a receiving recess B23350 that is recessed from the right side of the connection fixing member B1330, and the second guide plate B23500 is a reception recess that is recessed from the right side of the connection fixing member B1530. The installation part B23550 is provided. These receiving recessed portions B23350 and B23550 function as engaging portions with the switching device B23800.

  The switching device B23800 has a slide main body B23810 configured to be slidable in the left-right direction and a pair of front and rear protrusions that are arranged on the left side of the slide main body B23810 and can enter the receiving recesses B23350 and B23550. The slide auxiliary portion B23820 having the entrance protrusion B23821 formed, the transmission member B23830 configured to transmit the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 to the slide main body B23810, and the displacement of the slide main body B23810 in one direction A guide rail-like portion B23840 for guiding the slide body B23840, and a biasing means B23850 for generating a biasing force for moving the slide main body B23810 to the left side.

  The slide main body B23810 is supported by a pair of guide rail-like portions B23840 formed on the upper and lower inner surfaces of a rear cover member B23700 configured by partially changing the shape of the rear cover member B1700 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. It is urged by the urging means B23850 to be arranged at the left side position (engagement position).

  Since the slide auxiliary part B23820 is supported by the slide main body part B23810 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, the entry projecting part B23821 is configured to be displaceable not only in the left-right direction but also in the front-rear direction. The freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of B23821 is raised. That is, the displacement of the entry projecting portion B23821 is ensured by the slide main body B23810 in the left-right direction, and is secured by the slide auxiliary portion B23820 in the front-rear direction.

  The approach projecting portion B23821 projects from the front and rear end portions of the slide main body B23810 toward the guide plates B23300 and B23500, and the slide main body B23810 is in the left position (engaged position, see FIG. 193 (a)). The guide plates B23300 and B23500 are engaged with each other by being arranged inside the receiving recesses B23350 and B23550, while the slide main body B23810 is in the right position (release position, FIG. 193 (b) )), The guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be displaced independently by retracting from the receiving recesses B23350 and B23550.

  The transmission member B23830 is displaced as the plungers of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are displaced, and functions to change the arrangement of the slide body B23810. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 196 is a front view of the variable winning device B23000. In FIG. 196, only the right side plate portion related to the switching device B23800 is shown in the rear cover member B23700, and the other portions are not shown. FIG. 196 shows a state in which the second solenoid B1610 is de-energized while the first solenoid B1410 is excited.

  The transmission member B23830 is arranged in a pair of upper and lower sides, and a base end side part B23831 rotatably supported by the rear cover member B23700, and a displacement locus side of the plungers of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 from the base end side part B23831 ( A loaded portion B23832 extending toward the upper side or the lower side, and an action portion B23833 extending from the base end side portion B23831 toward the slide main body portion B23810 and configured to come into contact with the slide main body portion B23810, Is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 196, when the first solenoid B1410 is excited and the linear motion member B1420 is displaced, the driving force is transmitted to the loaded portion B23832 and the transmission member B23830 rotates.

  By this rotation, in the non-excited state, the action part B23833 arranged on the upper and lower outer sides of the slide main body part B23810 enters the upper and lower inner sides and pushes the slide main body part B23810 to counter the urging force of the urging means B23850. Thus, the slide main body B23810 can be displaced to the right position (release position, see FIG. 193 (b)).

  Since the transmission members B23830 are arranged in a pair in the upper and lower directions and each transmission member B23830 corresponds to each solenoid B1410, B1610, the displacement of the slide main body B23810 shown in FIG. 196 excites the first solenoid B1410. Not only the case but also when the second solenoid B1610 is excited.

  Therefore, the slide main body B23810 can be displaced to the release position by using the driving force generated when the first solenoid B1410 or the second solenoid B1610 is energized and excited.

  That is, using the driving force of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 for driving the guide plates B23300 and B23500, the state where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are integrally interlocked and the state where the displacements of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are independent. And can be switched.

  Accordingly, it is unnecessary to prepare separate driving means for generating a driving force for switching between a state in which the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are integrally interlocked and a state in which the displacements of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are independent from each other. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced.

  Note that the device for driving the switching device B23800 is not limited to this. For example, when the product cost is not considered, a separate driving device for driving the switching device B23800 may be provided, or the guide plates B23300, B23500 and the switching device B23800 may be driven by a single drive. You may make it drive with an apparatus.

  FIG. 197 is a top view of the transmission hole B23340, the linear motion member B1420, and the rotation member B23430 of the first guide plate B23300. The transmission hole B23340 is from a transmission hole B1340 (see FIG. 134) for the purpose of causing the displacement of the transmission member B23830 before the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 as the relationship of the displacement caused by the excitation of the solenoid B1410. The design has been changed. In addition, although description about 2nd guide plate B23500 is abbreviate | omitted, the design change similar to 1st guide plate B23300 is performed. This will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIG. 197, the transmission hole B23340 is centered on the linear portion B1341 and the curved portion B1342 described above in the description of the transmission hole B1340, and the protruding shaft portion B1432 of the first drive device B23400 from the left end of the linear portion B1341. And a second curved portion B23343 extending along the arc.

  The first drive device B23400 includes the first solenoid B1410 and the linear motion member B1420 already described above, and the rotation member B23430 whose design is changed from the rotation member B1430 (see FIG. 134) due to the design change of the transmission hole B23340. Prepare.

  The rotating member B23430 includes the protruding shaft portion B1432 and the short-side protruding portion B1434 described above in the description of the rotating member B1430 as portions protruding from the main body portion B23431 described later, and changes the arrangement of the long protruding portion B1433. A bent-bar-shaped main body B23431 whose design has been changed from the main body B1431, and an end (first end) that is an end of the main body B23431 and is disposed on the left side of the projecting shaft B1432. And a longitudinal projecting portion B23433 projecting in a cylindrical shape in a direction parallel to the projecting shaft portion B1432.

  The longitudinal projecting portion B23433 can be inserted into the transmission hole B23340, and is configured to be disposed at the extended end portion of the second curved portion B23343 when the first solenoid B1410 is in a non-excited state.

  Since the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is inserted into the transmission hole B23340, the rotation of the rotating member B23430 causes the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 to be displaced along an arc locus centering on the projecting shaft portion B1432. Thus, the first guide plate B23300 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

  In this embodiment, the shape of the curved part B1342 and the second curved part B23343 of the transmission hole B23340 is an arc centered on the projecting shaft part B1432, and the radius is the projecting shaft part B1432 and the longitudinal projecting part B23433. The shape is along an arc that is equal to the distance. Thereby, a time difference can be produced between the displacement of the rotating member B23340 and the displacement of the first guide plate B23300.

  More specifically, the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 occurs when the long protruding portion B23433 displaces the linear portion B1341. On the other hand, when the long protruding portion B23433 is arranged in the curved portion B1342 or the second curved portion B23343, the long protruding portion B23433 is only displaced along the curved portion B1342 or the second curved portion B23343. Since the long protruding portion B23433 does not press the inner wall of the transmission hole B23340 in the front-rear direction, the first guide plate B23300 is not displaced.

  That is, the displacement of the linear motion member B1420 is started after the first solenoid B1410 is excited and the rotation member B23430 starts to rotate until the long protruding portion B23433 is disposed on the linear portion B1341. The first guide plate B23300 is not displaced, and the arrangement is maintained.

  In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the slide body B23810 of the switching device B23800 is configured to change from the left position (see FIG. 195) to the right position (see FIG. 196) during this period. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction in which the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 are integrally driven in a state where the slide main body B23810 is disposed at the left side position from the structural surface. .

  The curved portion B1342 has a function of absorbing the arrangement error of the long protruding portion B1433 in the first place. Therefore, even if the arrangement of the long protruding portion B23433 is slightly deviated in the curved portion B1342, the description of the long protruding portion B1433 is provided. As described above, the amount of displacement of the first guide plate B23300 is not affected. For this reason, even if the rotation member B23430 is configured to rotate at the same angle as the rotation angle described above in the description of the rotation member B1430, the displacement amount of the first guide plate B23300 is approximately the same as the displacement amount of the first guide plate B1300. Since the amount of displacement can be secured, the above-described additional functions can be added without requiring design changes of the first solenoid B1410, the linear motion member B1420, the projecting shaft portion B1432, and the short projecting portion B1434. it can.

  The function of the variable winning device B23000 configured as described above will be described in detail focusing on the effect produced by the shape of the transmission hole B23340.

  198 (a) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus B23000, and FIG. 198 (b) is a partially enlarged top view of the variable prize apparatus B23000 as viewed in the direction of the arrow CXCVIIIb in FIG. 198 (a). c) is a front view of the variable prize apparatus B23000, and FIG. 198 (d) is a partially enlarged top view of the variable prize apparatus B23000 in the direction of the arrow CXCVIIId in FIG. 198 (c).

  In FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), the middle of the rotational displacement of the rotating member B23430 generated by the excitation of the first solenoid B1410 is shown. In FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d), A state in which the first guide plate B23300 is displaced to the front side while the posture of the rotating member B23430 is changed toward the posture shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) is illustrated.

  Here, the state shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b) shows the state of the rotating member B23430 when the first solenoid B1410 is normally driven and controlled, and FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 are shown. In the state shown in (d), an illegal load is applied to the first guide plate B23300 even if the first solenoid B1410 is not driven (for example, a player who performs an illegal act pulls the first guide plate B23300 to the front side). The state of the rotating member B23430 displaced with the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 by applying the load to be output) is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), when the first solenoid B1410 is normally driven, the transmission member B23830 is rotated before the first guide plate B23300 starts to be displaced, and the slide main body portion. B23810 is arranged at the right position (release position). Thereby, 1st guide plate B23300 can be displaced independently.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d), when the first guide plate B23300 is displaced to the front side prior to the displacement of the rotating member B23430, the long protruding portion B23433 is the second curved portion. Displacement occurs in the extended end portion of B23343. In this case, since the direction BPR along the second curved portion B23343 and the displacement locus BKR of the long protruding portion B23433 intersect, the displacement of the long protruding portion B23433 is restricted, and the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 is continued. It becomes impossible. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the first guide plate B23300 from being opened illegally.

  This fraud prevention effect is achieved by the shape of the transmission hole B23340, and is effective even when the switching device B23800 is not provided. On the other hand, assuming such a rare situation that the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is damaged by a load applied by an illegal act, this countermeasure alone is insufficient. Therefore, an effect produced by the switching device B23800 configured for the same purpose will be described.

  According to the switching device B23800, even when the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is damaged and the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 can be continued due to an improper load, the displacement of the first guide plate B23300 is changed in the switching device B23800. By making it occur before the slide main body B23810 is retracted, the first guide plate B23300 and the second guide plate B23500 can be configured to maintain a state of being integrally displaced. Thereby, even if 1st guide plate B23300 continues displacement to the front side, the state which cannot enter into specific winning opening B1001, B1002 can be maintained (refer FIG. 180).

  More specifically, in this embodiment, when the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced to the front side before the slide main body portion B23810 is retracted, and the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is displaced to the front side, the retraction operation of the slide main body portion B23810 is performed. Configured to be prevented. Specifically, a guide rod that guides the displacement direction of the slide main body portion B 23810 is arranged in the displacement direction of the slide auxiliary portion B 23820, and the displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B 23820 is restricted by the guide rod.

  In other words, the slide body B 23810 is not displaced rightward in a state where the slide auxiliary portion B 23820 is displaced in the front-rear direction from the initial front-rear position (see FIG. 193 (a)).

  With this configuration, under the normal drive control shown in FIGS. 198 (a) and 198 (b), before the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced toward the front side, the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is moved. Since it is displaced to the right (see FIG. 198 (a)), the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be displaced independently.

  On the other hand, in the unauthorized displacement mode shown in FIGS. 198 (c) and 198 (d), before the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced toward the front side, the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is slid before being displaced to the right side. Since the auxiliary portion B23820 is started to be displaced in the front-rear direction, the slide main body portion B23810 is not displaced rightward, and the displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 to the right is restricted.

  As a result, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are maintained in a state of being integrally displaced (see FIG. 193 (a)), so that even if the first guide plate B23300 continues to be displaced to the front side, the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 It is possible to maintain a state where it is impossible to enter the ball (see FIG. 180).

  In addition, since the displacement of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 to the right side is restricted, the rotational displacement of the transmission member B23830 is restricted in the middle, so the displacement of the linear motion member B1420 is obstructed in the middle, so the guide plate The displacement of B23300 and B23500 is also disturbed on the way. Therefore, when the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are not fully opened, it is possible to maintain a state in which it is impossible to enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are displaced independently in normal drive control, and the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are integrally displaced in displacement based on an illegal act. Therefore, if a detection sensor corresponding to the above-described detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 (see FIG. 185) is provided so that the arrangement of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be detected, it is not possible to enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002. An abnormal arrangement of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be determined while maintaining a possible state, and an error notification is executed in accordance with this determination, so that early detection of fraud can be achieved.

  Note that the variable winning device B23000 can also be driven and controlled with the various operation patterns described above. In particular, according to the present embodiment, not only the situation where either one of the solenoids B1410, B1610 is excited, but also the situation where at least one of the solenoids B1410, B1610 is excited, the slide main body B23810 of the switching device B23800 is in the release position. Therefore, even when the drive control is performed with an operation pattern with a short interval time between rounds as in the ninth operation pattern (see FIG. 191 (b)), the slide main body B23810 is erroneously engaged. Is not placed in position.

  In other words, the switching of excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 occurs at an extremely short time interval, so that it can be identified as if both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are excited, or both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are excited. In this case, it is possible to avoid the slide main body B 23810 being disposed at the engagement position. Thereby, the freedom degree of operation | movement of guide plate B23300, B23500 can be improved.

  In this embodiment, when both of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are arranged on the front side and constitute a special closed state, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are caused by an impact caused by a collision with a sphere that has reached the pre-entrance range. And the switching device B23800 are configured to be less likely to be released.

  That is, when receiving a load from a ball that has reached the pre-entrance range, the guide plates B23300 and B23500 in a special closed state are slightly displaced in a small amount (in a minute amount) (supporting the base member B1100 on which the penetration forming portion B1120 is formed) In this embodiment, the width of the cross section of the slide auxiliary portion B23820 and the entrance protrusion B23821 in the projecting direction is long in the vertical direction. (See FIG. 194).

  Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the entry projecting portion B23821 is disengaged from the receiving recessed portions B23350 and B23550 of the coupling fixing members B1330 and B1530 and the engagement is released.

  Moreover, by configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the resistance to engagement with the load applied to the guide plates B23300 and B23500 from the game area regardless of the impact from the ball. That is, for example, one end of a thread or a thin metal wire enters the game area from a gap generated around the foul ball passage or the game area, and the other end is pulled or pushed while touching the guide plates B23300 and B23500. Thus, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the engagement is released when a load is applied to the guide plates B23300 and B23500. Therefore, resistance to fraud can be improved.

  The twenty-fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. This embodiment corresponds to another example of the seventeenth embodiment. In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the transmission rotating body 7720 functions only as a member that transmits the driving force has been described. However, the variable winning device B24000 in the twenty-fourth embodiment is assumed to be displaced by receiving a load from the game area side. Thus, the transmission rotator B24720 is designed. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 199 (a) is a development view in which the circumferential surface of the transmission rotator B24720 in the twenty-fourth embodiment is developed, and FIG. 199 (b) is a partial development view of the first effect section B24760, and FIG. c) is a partial development view of the second effect section B24770.

  Transmission rotator B24720 is an alternative to transmission rotator B7720 provided in above-described dual drive device B7700, and is formed with the same diameter as that of transmission rotator B7720 and is recessed in the same manner as ingress groove B7730. The to-be-entry groove part B24730 by which the design was changed was provided.

  The entry groove B24730 is mainly different from the effect section B7760 in comparison with the entry groove B7730. In other words, the entry groove portion B24730 includes production sections B24760 and B24770 whose design has been changed from the production section B7760.

  In the state shown in FIG. 199 (a), the first effect section B24760 disposed below the boundary position BCL71 is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7422 (see FIG. 178), and its upper end side. In the region, a common groove B24761 formed so that the arrangement of the transmission rod B7422 is moved from the first plane BS71 to the second plane BS72 is provided.

  In addition, the second effect section B24770 disposed above the boundary position BCL71 is a section related to the displacement of the transmission rod B7622 (see FIG. 178), and the first plane BS71 in the upper end side area thereof. To the second plane BS72 is provided with a common groove B24771 formed so that the arrangement of the transmission rod B7622 is moved.

  That is, in a state where the transmission rod B7422 enters the common groove B24761 of the first effect section B24760 and the transmission rod B7622 enters the common groove B24777 of the second effect section B24770, the first guide plate B1300 and the second guide plate B1500 are opened. Switch to state.

  On the other hand, the configuration after the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged on the plane BS72, that is, the configuration at the lower side of the common groove portions B24761 and B24771 is different in the first effect section B24760 and the second effect section B24770. Designed. Hereinafter, the difference will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the first effect section B24760 is formed to be recessed as a wide groove extending from the second plane BS72 to the first plane BS71 in a manner connected to the common groove B24761. A groove part B24762, and a displacement limiting groove part B24767 extending along the second plane BS72 from the lower side of the displacement allowable groove part B24762.

  A plurality of projecting portions B24763 project from the displacement allowing groove B24762 along a plane parallel to the second plane BS72. The projecting portion B24763 is formed in a projecting manner such that the displacement of the transmission portion B7422 due to the urging force of the return spring (see FIG. 134) of the solenoid B1410 can be limited by the load (frictional force) applied from the projecting portion B24776. The

  That is, when the transmission rod B7422 enters the displacement allowance groove B24762 from the common groove B24761 of the first effect section B24760, the transmission rod B7422 is also in the state where the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1410 is generated. Since it is maintained on the plane BS72, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring (see FIG. 134) of the solenoid B 1410 is applied, an urging force for displacing the transmission rod B 7422 to the right is generated from the projecting portion B24763. When the load (frictional force) is exceeded, the transmission rod B7422 is displaced to the right. When the transmission rod B7422 is displaced to the right side of the projecting portion B24763, the frictional force from the projecting portion B24763 is not generated, and the transmission rod B7422 is displaced toward the first plane BS71 by the biasing force of the return spring.

  That is, in the state where the transmission rod B7422 is disposed in the displacement allowance groove B24762 of the first effect section B24760, a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1410 is generated, and the transmission rod B7422 is on the right side of the projecting portion B24763. When the first guide plate B1300 is displaced to the closed position, the first guide plate B1300 changes to a closed state.

  In addition, although the aspect of the urging force other than the return spring is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, a description will be given assuming that the load exceeding the urging force of the return spring is caused by the weight of the sphere.

  The displacement limiting groove B24767 is formed along the second plane BS72 as a recessed groove having a groove width Wmin. Therefore, in a state where the transmission rod B7422 is disposed in the displacement limiting groove B24763, the transmission rod B7422 is mechanically maintained on the second plane BS72, and thus the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in the open state.

  As described above, in the state where the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the first effect section B24760, the first guide plate B1300 is maintained in an open state until a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring is generated, and the first guide The case where the plate B1300 is maintained in the open state regardless of the magnitude of the urging force is switched.

  As shown in FIG. 199 (c), the second effect section B24770 includes a displacement limiting groove B24772 extending along the second plane BS72 in a manner connected to the lower side of the common groove B24777, and its displacement. A displacement-permissible groove B24777 formed as a wide groove extending from the second plane BS72 to the first plane BS71 in a manner connected to the restriction groove B24777.

  The displacement limiting groove B24777 is formed along the second plane BS72 as a recessed groove having a groove width Wmin. Therefore, in a state where the transmission rod B7622 is disposed in the displacement limiting groove B24772, the transmission rod B7622 is mechanically maintained on the second plane BS72, and thus the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state.

  A plurality of projecting portions B24778 project from the displacement allowing groove B24777 along a plane parallel to the second plane BS72. The projecting portion B24778 is formed in a projecting manner such that the displacement of the transmission portion B7622 due to the biasing force of the return spring (see FIG. 178) of the solenoid B1610 can be limited by the load (frictional force) applied from the projecting portion B24778. The

  That is, when the transmission rod B7622 enters the displacement allowance groove B24777 from the displacement restriction groove B24777 of the second effect section B24770, the transmission rod B7622 is also in the state where the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1610 is generated. Therefore, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1610 (see FIG. 178) is applied, an urging force for displacing the transmission rod B7622 to the right is generated from the protruding portion B24778. When the load (frictional force) is exceeded, the transmission rod B 7622 is displaced to the right. When the transmission rod B7622 is displaced to the right of the projecting portion B24778, the frictional force from the projecting portion B24778 is not generated, and the transmission rod B7622 is displaced toward the first plane BS71 by the biasing force of the return spring.

  That is, in a state where the transmission rod B7622 is disposed in the displacement allowance groove B24777 of the second effect section B24770, a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring of the solenoid B1610 is generated, and the transmission rod B7622 is located on the right side of the projecting portion B24778. When the second guide plate B1500 is displaced to the closed position, the second guide plate B1500 changes to a closed state.

  In addition, although the aspect of the urging force other than the return spring is not limited at all, in the present embodiment, a description will be given assuming that the load exceeding the urging force of the return spring is caused by the weight of the sphere.

  As described above, in the state where the transmission rod B7622 is arranged in the second effect section B24770, the second guide plate B1500 is maintained in an open state until a load exceeding the urging force of the return spring is generated, and the second guide The case where the plate B1500 is maintained in the open state regardless of the magnitude of the urging force is switched.

  As described above, since the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged at intervals of 180 degrees, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in one production section B24760 and B24770, the other production sections B24770 and B24760 are also arranged. Transmission rods B7622 and B7422 are arranged.

  When the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in the production sections B24760 and B24770, the positions of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 with respect to the production sections B24760 and B24770 are changed in the rotation direction of the transmission rotating body B24720 to change the state of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Can be switched. In addition, in this embodiment, it is comprised so that the state of 1st guide plate B1300 and the state of 2nd guide plate B1500 can be varied.

  That is, by adjusting the rotational position of the transmission rotating body B24720, the transmission rod B7422 is disposed in the displacement limiting groove B24767 and the transmission rod B7622 is disposed in the displacement allowable groove B24777 (first open state), and transmission A state (second open state) in which the bar B7422 is disposed in the displacement-permissible groove B24762 and the transmission bar B7622 is disposed in the displacement-limiting groove B24772 can be arbitrarily configured.

  Therefore, for example, the transmission rotator B24720 is controlled to rotate forward, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 pass through the common groove portions B24761 and B24777, and both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward (see FIG. 180). When the rotating body B24720 is in the first open state, the second guide plate B1500 is displaced so as to be retracted to the back side by the load applied from the sphere that reaches the pre-entry area, and the first specific prize opening B1001. It is switched to the state that can enter.

  Further, for example, after the transmission rotator B24720 is controlled to rotate forward, the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 pass through the common groove portions B24761 and B24771, and both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward (see FIG. 180). When the rotating body B24720 is in the second open state, the first guide plate B1300 is displaced so as to be retracted to the back side by a load applied from a sphere that reaches the pre-entry area, and the second specific prize opening B1002 It is switched to the state that can enter.

  Thus, until the ball reaches the pre-entry range, the state in which the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both displaced to the front side is maintained, and which of the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 can enter the ball? It is possible to know whether it is possible to enter the first specific winning opening B1001 or whether it is possible to enter the second specific winning opening B1002 only when the ball reaches the pre-entry range. It is configured to be.

  As a result, even if the guide plates B1300 and B1500 after the drive displacement are viewed, it is a jackpot type that can be entered into the first specific winning port B1001 or a jackpot type that can be entered into the second specific winning port B1002. It is possible to determine whether it is a big hit. In addition, since the jackpot type can be clarified by causing the sphere to reach the pre-entry range, it is possible to prompt the launch of the sphere toward the pre-entry range.

  Here, if the performance differs between the first specific winning port B1001 and the second specific winning port B1002 (see FIG. 157), which specific winning port B1001, B1002 is opened directly in the jackpot game is directly related to profit. It is important information, but when it becomes clear which specific winning opening B1001 and B1002 are opened with the start of the round game, it is the specific winning opening B1002 (see FIG. 157) on the lower profit side. The interest in the round game is quickly lost, and the interest of the player is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the round game is started, any of the specific winning holes B1001 until the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both displaced to the front side and the ball reaches the pre-entry range. , B1002 is unclear. Thereby, the attention of the player who wants to know which jackpot type is increased, and the player's interest can be maintained until the ball reaches the pre-entry range.

  With this configuration, even after the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven and displaced, it is possible to continue to enjoy the prediction of which jackpot type is the jackpot, and to improve the interest of the player. .

  Control related to execution of error notification in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can constitute an open state as the transmission rotating body B24720 is controlled to rotate. Therefore, for example, it is inappropriate to perform control so that error notification is executed unconditionally when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 output simultaneously.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, a situation in which both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can constitute an open state is detected, and in that situation, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are controlled to allow simultaneous output. .

  That is, determination means such as a detection sensor capable of determining the attitude of the transmission rotator B24720 is provided, and by the determination means, the transmission rod B7422 is arranged in the first effect section B24760 of the transmission rotator B24720, and the second effect section. In a situation where it is determined that the transmission rod B7622 is arranged at B24770 (hereinafter, also referred to as “allowable situation”), control is performed so that error notification is not executed even if output occurs simultaneously in the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. The

  On the other hand, in situations other than the above-described permissible situations, when the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 output simultaneously, the error notification is controlled. Thereby, early detection of abnormality can be aimed at, maintaining the effect of improving the interest of a player.

  In this embodiment, the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are formed as inclined surfaces that are inclined downward toward the front side. Thereby, it is possible to easily generate a load in the front-rear direction due to the weight of the ball on the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521.

  In addition, an inclined surface in the front-rear direction is formed only at a position where the ball rides with both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 displaced forward (see rolling surfaces B1321, B1521, FIG. 180), and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are formed. The rolling surfaces B1311 and B1511 in which both of them are displaced forward are not formed even if they are inclined in the front-rear direction, so that the above effects are not produced. is doing.

  For this reason, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the entrance to the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is hindered when the inclined surfaces in the front-rear direction are formed up to the rolling surfaces B1311, B1511.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific winning holes B1001, B1002 are close to the rear side (the base member B1100 side) before entering the ball (see FIG. 126), the rolling surfaces B1311, B1511 You may comprise as an inclined surface which inclines below as it goes to the side. Thereby, it is possible to smoothly enter the specific winning openings B1001, B1002.

  Depending on the inclination, the front-rear direction component obtained by disassembling the weight of the sphere faces the front side, but the sphere does not get on when both the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward, so the guide plates B1300 and B1500 However, both do not affect the change in state due to the weight of the sphere from the state of being displaced forward.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting portions B24763 and B24778 are formed to increase the displacement resistance of the transmission portions B7422 and B7622. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance of the transmission portions B7422 and B7622 may be changed by forming a wave-like or sawtooth-like groove on the surface of the displacement allowable groove portions B24762 and B24777, or the surface of the displacement allowable groove portions B24762 and B24777. You may make it change the displacement resistance of transmission part B7422 and B7622 by giving an embossing process (giving an embossing).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 are arranged in a range other than the non-driving section B7731, the shape of the entering groove B24730 defines the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Unexpected interlocking between the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be prevented.

  Next, a twenty-fifth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 that open and close the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002 are displaced while being engaged is described as preventing illegal entry, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, a pair of The electric winning combination B640a is displaced while being engaged, so that it is possible to prevent an illegal winning to the second winning opening 640. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  200 (a) and 200 (b) are right side views of the electric accessory B640a in the twenty-fifth embodiment. In FIG. 200 (a) and FIG. 200 (b), only the electric accessory B640a, the drive solenoid B25110, the transmission member B25640, and the switching device B25700 are shown for ease of understanding, and other members that hold these members are shown. Illustration of the configuration is omitted. In addition, since arrangement | positioning of the electrically-driven accessory B640a has already been illustrated by said each embodiment (refer FIG. 177), in the following description, already demonstrated drawing (for example, FIG. 177) is referred suitably.

  The electric accessory B640a is disposed in a pair of left and right in order to change the ease of entering the second winning opening 640, and is in a closed state in which the probability of entering the second winning opening 640 is kept low (FIG. 177). And the open state in which the probability of entering the second winning hole 640 is increased by tilting left and right about the lower end portion as an axis.

  The electric accessory B640a is disposed on the front side of the base plate 60. As another member (apparatus) disposed behind the front surface of the base plate 60, a position of the drive solenoid B25110 fixed to the base plate 60, and between the drive solenoid B25110 and the electric accessory B640a. A transmission member B25640 that is arranged so that the driving force generated from the drive solenoid B25110 can be transmitted to the electric combination B640a and a lower side of the electric combination B640 so that the state of the electric combination B640a can be switched. The switching device B25700 is provided.

  The drive solenoid B25110 includes a tip member B25111 that slides in the front-rear direction by excitation, and a coil spring B25112 that applies a biasing force to the tip member B25111.

  When the driving solenoid B25110 is in a non-excited state, the tip member B25111 is disposed at the front side position (see FIG. 200A) by the urging force of the coil spring B25112, and when the driving solenoid B25110 is excited, the coil spring B25112 is The tip member B25111 is driven against the urging force and is disposed at the back side position (see FIG. 200 (b)).

  200A illustrates the closed state (reduced state) of the electric accessory B640a, and FIG. 200B illustrates the open state (enlarged state, operating state) of the electric accessory B640a. That is, when the drive solenoid B25110 is in a non-excited state and the tip member B25111 is disposed at the front side position, the transmission member B25640 is in a downward inclined posture (see FIG. 200A), and the drive solenoid B25110 is in an excited state. When the tip member B25111 is disposed at the back side position, the transmission member B25640 is in the upward inclined posture (see FIG. 200B).

  In the present embodiment, the tip member B25111 is configured to allow slight displacement (wobble) with respect to the plunger of the drive solenoid B25110, so that it corresponds to (holds) the pair of left and right electric charges B640a. The deviation of the posture of the transmission member B25640 is allowed. As a result, the electric accessory B640a can operate asymmetrically in the left-right direction, and details will be described later.

  The switching device B25700 is provided with a through hole in the thickness range of the base plate 60, or behind the front surface of the base plate 60 using the gap space on the rear side of the base plate 60 (behind the game area). The switching solenoid B25710 in which the plunger can be displaced in the vertical direction, and when the switching solenoid B25710 is in a non-excited state, the switching solenoid B25710 is biased upward so as to face the back surface of the electric accessory B640a. On the other hand, the switching member B25720 is configured to be retracted downward from the back side of the electric accessory B640a when the switching solenoid B25710 is excited.

  The switching member B25720 is connected to the switching solenoid B25710 so as to be relatively displaceable in the left-right direction with respect to the plunger of the switching solenoid B25710. As a result, when it is configured to be able to come into contact with the eccentric projecting portion B640b of the electric accessory B640a in the left-right direction as will be described later, when a biasing force in the rotational direction is generated in the electric accessory B640a due to a ball collision or the like The possibility that the load concentrates between the switching member B25720 and the eccentric protruding portion B640b and the eccentric protruding portion B640b is damaged can be reduced.

  The electric accessory B640a is rotatably supported by a columnar part B25013b fixedly arranged on the front side of the base plate 60, and an eccentric projecting part projecting from the position eccentric to the rotation axis to the back side. B640b is provided.

  The eccentric projecting portion B640b is disposed so as to be vertically contactable with the claw-shaped portion B3642 of the transmission member B25640. As the eccentric projecting portion B640b is displaced in conjunction with the claw-shaped portion B3642, it is electrically driven. The state of the accessory B640a changes.

  The projecting receiving portion B25013a is configured to be able to contact the transmission member B25640 and the distal end member B25111, and is a portion that defines the movement end position thereof, which will be described in detail later.

  The transmission member B25640 is configured such that two similar members to the above-described transmission member B3640 are connected to each other, and is rotatably supported (pivotally supported) on the back side of the base plate 60. It is comprised so that the nail | claw-shaped part B3642 arrange | positioned and the electrically-driven accessory B640a may engage. Thereby, it is comprised so that the change (state of an open state or a closed state) of the electrically-driven accessory B640a may arise with the change of the attitude | position of transmission member B25640. Next, details of the transmission member B25640 will be described with reference to FIG.

  201A is a right side view of the transmission member B25640 when the transmission member B25640 is viewed from the direction of the rotation axis BJ1, and FIG. 201B is a view of the transmission member B25640 in the direction of the arrow CCIb in FIG. 201A. It is a front view. In the description of FIG. 201, FIG. 200 is referred to as appropriate.

  The transmission member B25640 is formed of a resin material having flexibility, and includes a pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 formed of a plate-like portion that intersects (orthogonally) the rotation axis BJ1, and a rotation tip of the rotating arm portion B25641. A claw-shaped portion B3642 formed in a C-shaped claw shape, a pair of projecting shaft portions B3643 projecting from the rotating arm portion B25641 to the left and right in a columnar shape centering on the rotation axis BJ1, and a rotating arm portion A proximal end extending portion B3644 extending radially from the rotational base end side of B25641, and a distal end side extending in a direction parallel to the proximal end extending portion B3644 from the rotational distal end side of the rotating arm portion B25641 The extending portion B3645 and the rotating arm portion B25641 are connected in a manner that the rotating arm portions B25641 are relatively rotatable in a manner of being inserted into a pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 that are formed in a columnar rod shape whose axial center is disposed on the rotating shaft BJ1. It comprises a constant connecting rod portion B25646, a.

  The front end of the transmission member B25640 is in contact with the lower end of the projecting receiving portion B25013a, so that further rotation is restricted (see FIG. 200 (a)). As described above, the transmission member B25640 is a part for opening and closing the electric combination B640a, and a ball can enter the second winning opening 640 in the open state of the electric combination B640a.

  The pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are disposed to face each other with an interval larger than the diameter of the sphere. Thereby, since the flow path of the sphere can be formed so that the sphere passes between the rotating arm portions B25641, the degree of freedom in designing the downstream flow path on the downstream side of the second winning port 640 can be improved.

  That is, since the rotating arm portion B25641 is arranged with a space longer than the diameter (11 mm) of the sphere, the sphere can flow between the opposing rotating arm portions B25664. Thereby, since transmission member B25640 can be arrange | positioned in the aspect which encloses the flow path of a sphere from the upper side, transmission member B25640 and the flow path of a sphere can be arrange | positioned compactly.

  The driving force transmission to the electric accessory B640a will be described. In a non-excited state of the drive solenoid B25110, the lower end portion of the distal end member B25111 is in contact with the distal end side extending portion B3645 of the transmission member B25640 (see FIG. 200 (a)). The tip member B25111 is urged to the front side by a coil spring B25112, and the posture of the transmission member B25640 is maintained by this urging force. Accordingly, the electric accessory B640a is maintained in the closed state.

  In the excitation state of the drive solenoid B25110, the lower end portion of the distal end member B25111 is in contact with the proximal end side extending portion B3644 of the transmission member B25640 (see FIG. 200B). The tip member B25111 is urged to the back side by the driving force of the drive solenoid B25110, and the posture of the transmission member B25640 is maintained in such a manner that it is pushed to the back side by this driving force. As a result, the electric accessory B640a is maintained in the open state.

  Accordingly, in the load transmission with the tip end member B25111 upstream, the pair of rotary arm portions B25641 arranged on the downstream side are rotationally displaced so that their postures coincide with each other. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left and right rotating arm portions B25641 are purposely configured to be relatively changeable in posture by the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645.

  Therefore, load transmission with the electric component B 640a side upstream (for example, transmission of a load caused by a ball collision, or illegal use of a foreign object such as a thread or a thin metal wire inserted into the game area is given to the electric component B 640a. The transmission of the load) is configured such that the postures of the pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 can be varied. This will be described below.

  202 (a) to 202 (c) are front views of the electric accessory B640a and the second winning opening 640. FIG. In FIG. 202 (a), the closed state of the electric combination B640a is illustrated, and in FIG. 202 (b), the open state of the electric combination B640a whose state is switched by driving the drive solenoid B25110 is illustrated. FIG. 202 (c) shows a state where the right electric accessory B640a is forcibly displaced to the open position in a state where the drive solenoid B25110 is not driven.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (a), in the closed state of the electric accessory B640a, the switching member B25720 is disposed at a position between the eccentric protruding portions B640b, and can be interlocked with the lateral displacement of the eccentric protruding portion B640b. It is configured.

  When the lottery of the second symbol is won, etc., the drive solenoid B25110 is excited based on the signal from the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), and the electric accessory B640a is switched in advance. Control program so that the solenoid B25710 is excited and the switching member B25720 is retracted in advance below the lower end of the eccentric projecting portion B640b (outward from the movement locus of the eccentric projecting portion B640b) (see FIG. 202 (b)). Is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 202 (b), when the switching solenoid B25710 is excited and the switching member B25720 is retracted downward, the eccentric protrusion B640b does not interfere with the switching member B25720, and the electric accessory B640a is rotationally displaced. Can be made.

  On the other hand, FIG. 202 (c) shows one of the electric charges B640a (for example, the right electric charge on the right side) when the switching solenoid B25710 is in a non-excited state, such as a timing deviating from the timing at which the drive solenoid B25110 is driven. B640a) is a state in the case of tilting displacement.

  Since the switching device B25720 is still disposed within the displacement locus of the eccentric projecting portion B640b, the switching member B25720 is pushed by the eccentric projecting portion B640b and displaced to the left, and the switching member B25720 is moved to the electric member B640a. Displacement occurs when the other side (the left electric accessory B640a) is pressed. As a result, the other electric accessory B640a closes the second winning opening 640 so as not to enter the ball.

  Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second winning port 640 from becoming easy when the electric accessory B640a is displaced regardless of the driving force from the driving solenoid B25110 (see FIG. 200A). .

  For example, when the electric accessory B640a is displaced regardless of the driving force from the drive solenoid B25110, for example, when the ball flowing down the game area collides with the impact, or when the fraudulent acts as a foreign object ( For example, a case where a thread or a fine metal wire) is illegally entered and the electric accessory B640a is forcibly displaced through the foreign matter is exemplified. That is, according to this embodiment, even if the situation illustrated in this way occurs, it is possible to prevent the ball entering the second winning opening 640 from becoming easy.

  Since the switching member B25720 is slidable in the left-right direction, when the left electric combination B640a is tilted and displaced without being driven by the drive solenoid B25110, the right electric combination B640a is the second prize. The mouth 640 is displaced to close the ball so that it cannot enter the ball. That is, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second winning port 640 from becoming easy even if the electric combination B640a to which the load is applied is the left or right electric combination B640a.

  In addition, as a state which closes the 2nd winning opening 640 to a ball, it is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, as exemplified in the present embodiment, the size of the ball and the size of a general entrance hole exemplified as the second prize opening 640 (FIG. 137), even though the entire second prize opening 640 is not blocked. The second winning opening 640 may be closed to the extent that the size of the second winning opening 640 is smaller than the size of the sphere based on the relative relationship with the guide opening B1160), or the entire second winning opening 640 may be covered. It may be a form that closes.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202 (c), the distance between the pair of electric actors B640a is set to be less than the diameter of the sphere, and the sphere is located on the front side of the second winning opening 640. It also prevents it from reaching.

  Further, the turning tip of the electric accessory B640a displaced so as to close the second winning port 640 is displaced in the left-right direction beyond the horizontal center of the second winning port 640, so that the left and right sides of the second winning port 640 are left and right. When a collision from a sphere flowing down along the vertical direction passing through the center is received, a load in a direction away from the second winning opening 640 in the left-right direction can be applied to the sphere.

  In addition, when the load which inclines and displaces the electric combination B640a as described above is generated in both the pair of left and right electric combinations B640a, the eccentric protruding portions B640b are arranged in the left-right direction via the switching member B25720. It becomes a state which pushes, and the displacement to the left-right inner side of eccentric protrusion part B640b is suppressed by switching member B25720. Thereby, since the displacement of the electric accessory B640a can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the ball entering the second winning opening 640 from becoming easy.

  Note that the switching member B25720 is disposed behind the game area, and is configured to prevent a ball flowing down the game area, a foreign object entering the game area, or the like from directly applying a load to the switch member B25720. Has been. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the second winning opening 640 from being easily entered at an unscheduled timing.

  In the state shown in FIG. 202 (c), the vertical position of the eccentric projecting portion B640b is shifted, and the postures of the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 of the transmission member B25640 are shifted from each other. As described above, B25640 uses a configuration in which the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are connected to the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645, thereby allowing posture deviation.

  In the present embodiment, similarly to the above-described embodiments, devices corresponding to the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged to detect the state of the electric accessory B640a (the operation mode such as the posture and the operation pattern). You may comprise. In this case, it can be determined by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) whether or not the electric accessory B640a is operating normally, and control is performed so that error notification is executed based on the determination result. Can do.

  Next, a twenty-sixth embodiment will be described. The twenty-sixth embodiment is another form of the nineteenth embodiment. In the nineteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving unit B4260 are always in a state in which a ball can be received. However, the variable winning device B26000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment has the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving unit. An opening / closing plate B26500 for opening and closing the part B4260 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 203 is a front view of a variable winning device B26000 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 203, the variable prize-winning device B26000 is an open / close plate configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction between a closed position projecting to the front side of the base member B9100 and an open position retracting backward from the front side of the base member B9100. B26500 is provided.

  When the opening / closing plate B26500 is disposed at the closed position, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260. In addition, when an opening / closing solenoid (not shown) that generates a driving force for displacing the opening / closing plate B26500 is excited and the opening / closing plate B26500 is disposed at the open position, it enters the guide port B4160 and the ball guide receiving portion B4260. Spheres are acceptable.

  Since the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B26500 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the left side when viewed from the front, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B26500 is configured to easily flow down to the left side. Accordingly, even when the opening / closing plate B26500 is disposed at the closed position, the guide plate B9300 is in a closed state, and even when a plurality of balls on the rolling surface B9311 fall, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 It is possible to avoid occurrence of a situation in which a plurality of spheres flow into a range where the right and left width is tapered between the right extension B1220 and the flow of the spheres is hindered.

  In the present embodiment, the guide plate B9300 is driven by a first solenoid B1410 (see FIG. 167), and the opening / closing plate B26500 is a drive device different from the first solenoid B1410 (for example, the second solenoid B1610 or the second solenoid B2610). ). Therefore, the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B26500 are configured to be able to operate independently based on the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4).

  Here, the above-described switching device B23800 (see FIG. 193) may be employed in such a manner that the engagement state and the release state of the displacement between the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B26500 can be switched. That is, when the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B26500 are driven based on the control of the main control device 110, they can operate independently (can be disengaged), but are not controlled by the main control device 110. When the guide plate B9300 or the opening / closing plate B26500 is forcibly displaced by an improper load, the guide plate B9300 may be configured to be interlocked (engaged).

  In this case, even if an improper load occurs, the guide plate B9300 is disposed rearward (closed state) and the open / close plate B26500 is disposed forward (closed state), or the guide plate B9300 is disposed forward. (Open state) and the state in which the opening / closing plate B26500 is disposed rearward (open state) can limit the possible states.

  In order to enter the guide port B4160, it is necessary that the guide plate B9300 is disposed rearward (closed state) and the open / close plate B26500 is disposed rearward (open state). Can prevent illegal entry.

  The function of the guide port B4160 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a prize ball outlet in which a prize ball is paid out when entering a ball, an out mouth in which a prize ball is not paid out, a start opening with a lottery of symbols, or a player is advantageous by passing a ball. A V entrance having a specific area for acquiring a certain state on the downstream side may be used, or a falling entrance having a falling area for the player to acquire an unfavorable state by passing the ball may be used.

  Next, a twenty-seventh embodiment will be described. The twenty-seventh embodiment is another form of the nineteenth embodiment or the twenty-sixth embodiment. In the nineteenth embodiment, a case has been described in which there is one path through which the sphere that has passed through the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 flows down to the discharge path. However, the variable winning device B27000 in the twenty-seventh embodiment is the first detection sensor. The path on the downstream side of B1230 is branched, and the sphere can flow down through a plurality of paths. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 204 is a front view of a variable winning device B27000 in the twenty-seventh embodiment. As shown in FIG. 204, the variable prize-winning device B27000 is an open / close plate configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction between a closed position projecting to the front side of the base member B9100 and an open position retracting backward from the front side of the base member B9100. B27500 is provided.

  The variable winning device B27000 includes a branch range B27180 in which a sphere can be arranged on the downstream side of the opening of the first detection sensor B1230. The branch range B27180 includes an advantageous side entrance B27181 formed so that a sphere can pass just below the opening and closing plate B27500, and a disadvantageous side entry formed so that a sphere rolling on the upper surface of the opening and closing plate B27500 can pass. And a ball outlet B27182.

  In this embodiment, the player is given the right to change the game state after the jackpot game to the probability change state (probably changing) by detecting the entrance to the advantageous side entrance B27181 during the jackpot. It can be configured (functions as a specific area). On the other hand, when only the entrance to the disadvantageous entrance B27182 is detected during the jackpot, the game state after the jackpot game is configured to be in the short-time state (short-time medium) (as a non-specific area) Function). That is, the profit given to the player by entering the disadvantageous entrance B27182 is set lower than the profit given to the player by entering the advantageous entrance B27181.

  The profit generated by entering the advantageous side entrance B27181 and the disadvantageous entrance B27182 is not limited to this. For example, the guide plate B9300 may be controlled to open and close in a small hit game, and the right to enter the big hit game may be acquired by entering the advantageous side entrance B27181 (so-called so-called two-type mixed type) May be configured as a machine).

  Whether the ball entering the branch range B27180 enters the advantageous side entrance B27181 or the disadvantageous entrance B27182 can be controlled by the operation pattern of the opening / closing plate B27500.

  When the opening / closing plate B27500 is disposed in the open position (a position retracted rearward from the front surface of the thin plate member B1110), the entry of a ball into the advantageous side entrance B27181 is allowed. In addition, when an opening / closing solenoid (not shown) that generates a driving force for displacing the opening / closing plate B27500 is excited, the opening / closing plate B27500 is disposed at a closed position (a position protruding forward from the front surface of the thin plate member B1110). In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the advantageous side entrance B27181.

  Since the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the right side when viewed from the front, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 is configured to easily flow down to the right side. Thereby, when the opening / closing plate B27500 is disposed at the closed position, the ball rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate B27500 can be smoothly guided to the disadvantage-side entrance B27182.

  In the present embodiment, the guide plate B9300 is driven by a first solenoid B1410 (see FIG. 167), and the opening / closing plate B27500 is a drive device different from the first solenoid B1410 (for example, the second solenoid B1610 or the second solenoid B2610). ). Therefore, the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B27500 are configured to be able to operate independently based on the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4).

  Here, the above-described switching device B23800 (see FIG. 193) may be employed in such a manner that the engagement state and the release state of the displacement between the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B27500 can be switched. That is, when the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B27500 are driven based on the control of the main control device 110, the guide plate B9300 and the opening / closing plate B27500 can operate independently (can be disengaged). When the guide plate B9300 or the opening / closing plate B27500 is forcibly displaced due to an improper load, the guide plate B9300 may be configured to be interlocked (engaged).

  In this case, an improper load is applied to the closed guide plate B9300, and the ball is allowed to enter the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 by being forcibly displaced toward the open state. Even so, the open / close plate B27500 can be displaced to the closed position in accordance with the displacement of the guide plate B9300. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the advantageous side entrance B27181. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the entry into the advantageous side entrance B27181 by unauthorized means.

  In addition, the function of the advantageous side entrance B27181 and the disadvantageous entrance B27182 is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a prize ball outlet in which a prize ball is paid out when entering a ball, an out mouth in which a prize ball is not paid out, a start opening with a lottery of symbols, or a player is advantageous by passing a ball. A V entrance having a specific area for acquiring a certain state on the downstream side may be used, or a falling entrance having a falling area for the player to acquire an unfavorable state by passing the ball may be used.

  Moreover, although the case where there exists a difference in the function of advantageous side entrance B27181 and disadvantageous entrance B27182 was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the functions of the advantageous side entrance B27181 and the disadvantageous entrance B27182 may be set to be the same. Further, the advantages and disadvantages may be reversed and set.

  In addition, although the case where the open / close plate B27500 is disposed at the closed position by the excitation of the solenoid has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the solenoid may be disposed in a closed position in a non-excited state, and may be displaced to an open position when the solenoid is excited.

  In addition, although it demonstrated that the opening-and-closing plate B27500 was driven with a drive device, the drive aspect is not limited at all. For example, on the basis of the operation timing of the guide plate B9300, the opening / closing operation may be controlled after a predetermined time has elapsed, or the opening / closing operation may be controlled so as to always perform a constant operation after the power is turned on.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 205 to 220, a center frame C86 in the 28th embodiment will be described.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the center frame 86 is composed of one component has been described. However, the center frame C86 in the twenty-eighth embodiment is composed of two members, an upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 205 is a front view of the game board C13 in the twenty-eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 205, the center frame C86 is a member that is configured to fit into the window 60a (see FIG. 90) of the base plate 60, and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 by a tapping screw or the like. An upper frame C86a and a lower frame C86b are provided.

  The upper frame C86a is disposed along the inner edges of the upper side (upper side of FIG. 205) and the left and right sides (left side and right side of FIG. 205) of the window 60a (see FIG. 90) of the base plate 60, and the lower frame C86b 60 windows 60a are disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 205). The third symbol display device 81 can be visually recognized through a region surrounded by the upper frame C86a and the lower frame C86b.

  The upper frame C86a is a portion disposed along the inner edge of the lower side (lower side in FIG. 205) of a part of the center frame 86 in the first embodiment (the window 60a (see FIG. 90) of the base plate 60). In other words, the portion where the lower frame C86b is disposed) is omitted, and the other portions other than the omitted portion have the same configuration as the center frame 86 in the first embodiment.

  Next, the lower frame C86b will be described. 206 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 207 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. 206 and 207, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the lower frame C86b to the base plate 60 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the lower frame C86b has a receiving port COPin formed as an opening capable of receiving a sphere, a first passage CRt1 communicating with the receiving port COPin, and a first passage thereof. The second passage CRt2 through which the ball guided through CRt1 flows down, and the third passage through which the ball guided through the second passage CRt2 (a ball reciprocating along the longitudinal direction of the second passage CRt2) flows down. CRt3, the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5 in which the ball guided in the third passage CRt3 is distributed and flowed down by the sorting member C170, and the ball guided in the fourth passage CRt4 is flowed down. Six passages CRt6 and an outlet COPout formed as an opening through which the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows into the game area are formed (FIGS. 214 and 2). See 5).

  An upper frame passage CRt0 (see FIG. 205) is formed in the upper frame C86a. The upper frame passage CRt0 guides a sphere that has flowed in (entered) from the left side (left side in FIG. 205) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61). The inlet COPin of the lower frame C86b is communicated with the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0.

  That is, a ball that flows (enters) from the game area into the upper frame passage CRt0 flows (enters) from the upper frame passage CRt0 into the first passage CRt1 of the lower frame C86b via the receiving port COPin.

  The lower frame C86b is provided with a sorting member C170 that operates according to the weight of the sphere (see FIGS. 214 and 215), and when the sphere in a continuous state is guided through the third passage CRt3. The preceding ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt4, while the following ball is distributed to the fifth passage CRt5. When the interval between the balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the preceding ball and the following ball are distributed to the fourth passage CRt4.

  Here, the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt5 (the opening through which the ball flows out to the game area), is formed (placed) at a position that is vertically above the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 205). . Therefore, the balls distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 are likely to win the first winning port 64 (the probability of winning the first winning port 64 is high).

  On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt6, a first prize is formed as a concave surface formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) in order to allow the ball guided through the sixth passage CRt6 to flow out to the game area. The center outflow surface C181 is not only formed (arranged) at a position above the mouth 64 in the vertical direction, but is also located in the width direction of the game board 13 from the top of the first winning opening 64 in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 205). Side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (placed) at two different locations. Further, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed with undulations, a side outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulations.

  Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt4 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the gaming area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 into the gaming area in the sixth passage CRt6. It is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is lower than the ball distributed to the fifth passage CRt5).

  Thus, in the lower frame C86b in the present embodiment, when the spheres in a continuous state flow into the third passage CRt3, the preceding sphere is distributed to the normal passage (fourth passage CRt4), while the rear The balls to be lined are distributed to a passage (in the present embodiment, the passage (the fifth passage CRt5) in which the ball is almost certainly won in the first winning opening 64) that is easy to win the first winning opening 64. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball wins at the first winning port 64 (make sure to win), the player can be expected to form a state in which the balls are connected, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the lower frame C86b will be described with reference to FIGS. 208 to 220 in addition to FIGS. 206 to 207. FIG.

  208 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 209 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C86b. 210 is a top view of the lower frame C86b, FIG. 211 is a front view of the lower frame C86b, and FIG. 212 is a rear view of the lower frame C86b. 213 (a) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXIIIa in FIG. 211, and FIG. 213 (b) is a side view of the lower frame C86b as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXIIIb in FIG.

  214 and 215 are sectional views of the lower frame C86b along the CCXIV-CCXIV line of FIG. 210, and FIG. 216 is a sectional view of the lower frame C86b along the CCXVI-CCXVI line of FIG. 217 (a) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C86b in the CCXVIIa portion of FIG. 214, and FIG. 217 (b) is a partially enlarged sectional view of the lower frame C86b in the CCXVIIb-CCXVIIb line of FIG. is there. 214 shows a state where the sorting member C170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 215 shows a state where the sorting member C170 is arranged at the second position.

  As shown in FIGS. 206 to 217, the lower frame C86b includes a front member C110, a dish member C120 disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the front member C110 (arrow L direction side), and the front member C110. A back member C130 disposed opposite to the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) at a predetermined interval, and a first intermediate member C140 disposed on the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the back member C130; A second intermediate member C150 arranged to face the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the back member C130 at a predetermined interval, and a first intermediate interposed between the back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150. The installation member C160 and the distribution member C170, the front member C110 and the second intermediate member C180 interposed between the first and second intermediate members C140 and C150, and the rear surface of the rear member C130. Comprising a decorative member C190 and bypass member C200 is, the.

  In the lower frame C86b, each member is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw, and the sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190 are rotatably supported by the back member C130, so that one (single unit) ) (See FIG. 206).

  Further, the lower frame C86b is made of a resin material in which the members other than the sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190 are light transmissive (that is, transparent through which the rear side member and the sphere can be seen through). C170 and the decorative member C190 are made of a colored resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first passage CRt1 to the sixth passage CRt6, and the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting member C170 and the displacement of the decoration member C190 accompanying the operation. The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

  In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame C86b that at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player is informed of at least one or both of the continuous state of the balls in the third passage CRt3 (whether or not the interval between the preceding ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C170. On the other hand, if it is possible to visually recognize that the following ball has been distributed to the fifth passage CRt5 by the sorting member C170, such a ball has a high probability from the outlet COPout to the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment). This is because it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 since almost the whole ball enters.

  The sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190 may be made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material and coated on the front surface or attached with a seal.

  On the other hand, at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150 are made of a colored resin material, or at least one or both of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. It may be painted or attached with a seal. That is, the ball or the sorting member C170 passing through the third passage CRt3 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.

  The front member C110 includes a plate-shaped front portion C111 that forms a front surface, a plate-shaped bottom portion C112 that stands up from the back of the front portion C111, and one side in the longitudinal direction of the front portion C111 and the bottom portion C112 ( And a connecting portion C113 disposed on the arrow L direction side.

  In the front part C111, a plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower part (arrow D direction side) of the front part C111. The lower frame C86b is assembled (unitized state), fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

  In the front portion C111, an outlet COPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position that is vertically above the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 205). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening that serves as an outlet when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt5 flows out to the gaming area.

  The bottom surface portion of the bottom surface C112 has the bottom surface of the second interposed member C180 facing the top surface, and a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the bottom surface portion C112 and the second interposed member C180 (concave portion C183). The Therefore, for example, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed as compared with the case where the through hole formed through the second interposed member C180 is part of the fifth passage CRt5.

  The bottom surface portion C112 is formed continuously over the entire length of the front surface portion C111, and the standing tip (the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C112 is in contact with the front surfaces of the first intermediate member C140 and the second intermediate member C150. Touched. Thereby, intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire is suppressed.

  An opening COPin is formed in the connecting portion C113 (perforated in the thickness direction). As described above, the receiving port COPin is an opening for receiving a sphere from the upper frame passage CRt0 of the upper frame C86a. When the center frame C86 is attached (arranged) to the base plate 60, the back surface of the upper frame C86a is overlapped with the front surface of the front portion C111 and the connecting portion C113, and both are fastened and fixed by tapping screws. As a result, the downstream end of the upper frame passage CRt0 and the receiving port COPin communicate with each other.

  The dish member C120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C121 and a lower bottom surface portion C122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C123 and a lower side wall portion C124 that form the side walls of the passage.

  The upper bottom surface portion C121 is extended along the left-right direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in a top view, and is inclined downward toward the direction away from the receiving port COPin (arrow R direction). Formed. Note that the upper bottom surface portion C121 is positioned vertically downward (arrow D direction side) from the receiving port COPin, and a vertical step is formed between the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the upper frame passage CRt0. That is, the dish member C120 is configured to freely drop the ball from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121.

  A concave groove C121a having a U-shaped cross section is formed in the upper bottom surface portion C121 at the center in the width direction (arrow LR direction) (see FIG. 217). The concave groove C121a extends linearly along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction). The groove width (dimension in the arrow LR direction) of the concave groove C121 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere, and the groove depth (dimension in the arrow UD direction) of the concave groove C121a is the bottom surface of the concave groove C121a. The depth is set so that the sphere does not touch.

  Thereby, the sphere on the upper bottom surface portion C121 can be supported at two locations (a pair of ridge lines where the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the recessed groove C121a intersect). Therefore, the contact area between the sphere and the passage can be increased as compared with the case where the concave groove C121a is not formed (that is, when the sphere is supported only at one place). Therefore, the impact of the sphere falling from the upper frame passage CRt0 can be buffered (received), and the resistance when the sphere rolls can be increased.

  As described above, the sphere is dropped from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121, and the spheres on the upper bottom surface portion C121 are supported at two locations. When the sphere flows (falls) from the upper frame passage CRt0 to the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1), the flow of the preceding sphere is delayed in the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and followed This makes it easier to catch up with the preceding ball. Therefore, the interval between the preceding sphere and the following sphere can be reduced.

  The upper side wall portion C123 divides the upstream and downstream ends of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) and the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set and a plurality of spheres can be guided only in series.

  The upper side wall C123 is formed with a notch C123a at the downstream end of the upper bottom C121 (first passage CRt1), and the upper bottom C121 (first first) via the notch C123a. The sphere can flow down from the passage CRt1) to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

  The lower bottom surface portion C122 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in a top view, and the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrows). A cross-sectional shape on a plane including the (UD direction) is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 217 (b)).

  The lower side wall portion C124 includes an end portion on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (direction in which the sphere is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). ) And the passage width. Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set so that a plurality of spheres can be guided only in series.

  The lower bottom surface portion C122 is juxtaposed in parallel with the upper bottom surface portion C121 in a top view, and is one end side in the longitudinal direction of the downstream end (end portion on the arrow B direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C121 and the lower bottom surface portion C122. (The end on the arrow B direction side) are disposed at adjacent positions.

  In the position corresponding to the notch C123a in the upper side wall C123, the lower side wall C124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface C121 (first passage CRt1) via the notch C123a. The sphere can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2).

  The lower side wall C124 is formed with a notch C124a at a position corresponding to the bottom of the lower bottom surface C122 curved in an arc shape (the position having the lowest height in the vertical direction). The sphere can flow from the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) via the portion C124a.

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) to the rising slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122). Since the sphere flows down, the sphere that has flowed down is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), and then the notch C124a. The sphere can flow down from the bottom to the bottom C142 (third passage CRt3).

  Thus, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C121 (first passage CRt1) into the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) with a predetermined distance therebetween, the lower bottom surface portion C122 ( By using the reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt2), it is possible to follow the following sphere to the preceding sphere, and to reduce the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere (to connect the spheres). .

  In the lower bottom surface portion C122, an outflow surface C122a is recessed at a position corresponding to the notch portion C124a (that is, a position having the lowest height in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a part for allowing the sphere guided through the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). It is formed as a concave surface inclined downward.

  Therefore, after reciprocating the lower bottom surface portion C122, the ball whose rolling speed is reduced can smoothly flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. it can. That is, by using the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2), the sphere in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the sphere in a continuous state) is in the continuous state. It is possible to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3).

  In addition, the outflow surface C122a has a concave surface width (a dimension along the rolling direction of a sphere reciprocating on the lower bottom surface part C122, a dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) in the top view, and a notch C124a. The side closer to is formed into a larger shape (see FIG. 210).

  Further, in a state where the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch C124a when viewed from above, the sphere rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is located farthest from the notch portion C124a (the top of the side of the ball is brought into contact with the lower side wall portion C124. Even when the position rolls, the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range overlapping the center of the sphere when viewed from above (the locus of the top below the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface C122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

  On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) on the lower bottom surface portion C122, the sphere that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) is moved to the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage). CRt2) may flow out (flow down) to bottom surface part C142 (third passage CRt3) without reciprocating once, or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, due to the inclination of outflow surface C122a. . That is, there is a possibility that both the spheres may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) without decreasing the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C122 is formed so as to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch C124a (arrow L direction) (see FIG. 217). As a result, the sphere is pressed against the lower side wall portion C124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a by the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C122. It can be rolled (reciprocated) in two paths CRt2).

  Thereby, before the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low, the sphere can be prevented from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the ball becomes sufficiently low, the ball easily flows over the outflow surface C122a (is easy to cross), and the ball is sufficiently reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). Easy to do. As a result, it can be ensured that the preceding sphere is followed by the following sphere and the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the spheres are linked).

  In addition, it is a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction)). The arc shape that protrudes downward in the direction (arrow D direction, see FIG. 217 (b)) is that the radius of the arc shape on the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction is on the one end side and the other end side. It is made smaller than the radius of the circular arc shape in the region between them (the region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

  Thereby, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof), the sphere can be easily reciprocated and the following sphere can be easily followed. The stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating sphere becomes low (the sphere does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof, and the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including the outflow surface C122a. In the stage), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state where both balls are connected.

  Note that the dish member C120 is disposed in a posture in which the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) extends along the front-rear direction (arrow F-B direction). Therefore, the space in the front-rear direction formed by the window portion 60a can be used effectively. Therefore, it is possible to secure the full length of the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) and easily connect the balls.

  The back member C130 includes a body portion C131 formed in a plate shape, a lower stopper portion C132, an upper stopper portion C133, and a shaft support portion C134 that are erected from the front surface of the body portion C131.

  The main body C131 is formed with an opening C131a which is an opening for communicating a passage (fifth passage CRt5) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body C131. A recess C131b in which the outer edge of the main body C131 is recessed is formed below the opening C131a. The recessed part C131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt5 between the facing part of the detour member C200.

  The lower stopper portion C132 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced downward, and defines the second position of the sorting member C170 (see FIG. 215). . On the other hand, the upper stopper portion C133 is formed so as to be able to contact the upper surface of the sorting member C170 when the sorting member C170 is displaced upward, and defines the first position (predetermined position) of the sorting member C170. (See FIG. 214).

  The shaft support seat portion C134 is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C192. The shaft C192 is fixed to the decoration member C190, and the distribution member C170 and the decoration member C190 are connected to the shaft C192 inserted from the back surface of the main body C131 in a non-rotatable manner. It is integrally pivotally supported by the main body C131 (shaft support portion C134). Further, the shaft C192 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion C134 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

  The first intermediate member C140 includes a plate-like main body C141 and a bottom surface C142, a top surface C143, and a passage C144 standing from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body C141. The member C130 is disposed on the left side when viewed from the front.

  In a state where the first intermediate member C140 is disposed on the back surface member C130, the standing ends (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142, the top surface portion C143, and the passage portion C144 are in contact with the front surface of the back surface member C130. As a result, a third passage CRt3 is formed by the space defined by the back member C130 and the first intermediate member C140 (the main body C141, the bottom surface C142, and the top surface C143), and the back member C130 and the first intermediate member. A fourth passage CRt4 is formed by a space defined by C140 (passage portion C144) and the sorting member C170 at the second position (see FIG. 215).

  The bottom surface portion C142 is inclined downward from the dish member C120 side toward the sorting member C170 side. The passage portion C144 includes a facing portion C144a formed at a position facing the sorting member C170 at the second position, and a bottom surface portion C144b that forms a rolling surface of the sphere. The bottom surface portion C144b It is formed to be inclined downward from the sorting member C170 side at the second position toward the opposing portion C144a side and downwardly inclined from the back member C130 side to the front member C110 side. Therefore, the ball can be received from the sorting member C170 displaced to the second position into the fourth passage CRt4 and the ball can flow out (roll) into the sixth passage CRt6.

  Here, the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) of the dish member C120 rolls a ball along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction), and the horizontal direction ( The sphere flows down along the arrow LR direction (to the right in the present embodiment), and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) moves the sphere flowing down from the dish member C120 in the left-right direction (arrow LR direction). ) (In this embodiment, to the right).

  In this case, the distance between the preceding sphere CB1 and the following sphere CB2 (see FIG. 218) is determined by reciprocation in the lower bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2). The side bottom surface portion C122 (second passage CRt2) flows down from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) along the left-right direction, and the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) flows down along the left-right direction (rolling). Therefore, the distance between the two balls CB1 and CB2 can be confirmed by a front view, and can be easily recognized by the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The second intermediate member C150 includes a plate-like main body portion C151 and a bottom surface portion C152 erected from the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion C151. Established. In a state where the second intermediate member C150 is disposed on the back surface member C130, the standing tip (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C152 comes into contact with the front surface of the back surface member C130.

  The main body C151 is formed with a recess C151a whose outer edge is recessed. The bottom surface portion C152 has a bypass member C200 (a collar portion C203) opposed to the bottom surface thereof, and a portion of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recess C151a and the bottom surface portion C152 and the bypass member C200 (a flange portion C203). Is done. Therefore, for example, as compared with the case where the detour member C200 is formed in a cylindrical shape to be a part of the fifth passage CRt5, the structure can be simplified and the product cost can be suppressed.

  The first interposed member C160 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a sphere in a part of the fifth passage CRt5, and is interposed between the back member C130 and the second intermediate member C150 facing each other. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed by the space defined by the back member C130, the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the first interposed member C160.

  The first intervention member C160 has a cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow LR direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), directed downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). It is curved and formed into a convex arc shape (see FIG. 215). Accordingly, the balls distributed to the first interposed member C160 (the fifth passage CRt5) by the distributing member C170 can be reciprocated on the first interposed member C160 and then flowed out to the opening C131a.

  Thereby, for example, the time required to flow out to the opening C131a can be increased compared to a configuration in which the balls distributed by the sorting member C170 are directly flowed out to the opening C131a. That is, it is possible to make it easier for a player who expects the formation of a state having a high probability of winning (winning) to the first winning opening 64 to ensure that such a state has been formed, and to ensure time to enjoy this state. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The first interposed member C160 flows out to a position corresponding to the opening C131a of the back member C130 (that is, the position where the height in the vertical direction of the rolling surfaces of the first interposed member C160 is the lowest). The surface C160a is recessed. The outflow surface C160a is a part for allowing the sphere guided by the first intervention member C160 to flow out to the opening C131a, and is formed as a concave surface that is inclined downward toward the opening C131a.

  The sorting member C170 includes a main body C171 having a fitting hole C171a formed on one side, and a receiving part C172 formed on the other side of the main body C171 opposite to the side on which the fitting hole C171a is formed. And a rolling part C173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body part C171, and is rotatable around a shaft C192 (shaft support part C134) fitted in the fitting hole C171a.

  The fitting hole C171a is formed as a hole having a D-shaped cross section, and the shaft C192 having a cross-sectional shape corresponding to the cross-sectional shape is fitted, whereby the shaft C192 is fixed to the main body C171 so as not to rotate. The shaft C192 is also fixed to the decorative member C190 without rotation. Therefore, the main body C171 (distributing member C170) and the decorative member C190 are integrated (formed as one unit) via the shaft C192. The

  In this case, the unit composed of the distribution member C170 and the decoration member C190 has a center of gravity position on one side with respect to the rotation center (axis C192) (on the opposite side to the distribution member C170 across the axis C192, right side in FIG. 214). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the sorting member C170 is lifted on the receiving portion C172 side (rotated clockwise about the axis C192 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted by the upper stopper portion C133 (first position). (A state of being arranged at a predetermined position)) (see FIG. 214).

  On the other hand, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C170, the center of gravity as a whole is placed on the other side (axis C192) with respect to the rotation center (axis C192) due to the weight of the ball. It is decentered to the side where the distribution member C170 is disposed, the left side in FIG. Therefore, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C172, the sorting member C170 is lowered on the receiving portion C172 side (rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C132. It is made into the state (state arrange | positioned in the 2nd position) (refer FIG. 215).

  The decoration member C190 is such that at least a part of the main body C191 can be visually recognized by the player, and the decoration member C190 (main body) is accompanied by displacement (rotation) between the first position and the second position of the sorting member C170. Part C191) is also rotated, and the position (form) visually recognized by the player is changed. Therefore, based on the position (form) of the decorative member C190, the player can recognize the state of the sorting member C170 (that is, the direction of ball distribution). Further, the role as a weight for displacing the sorting member C170 and the role as a part for recognizing the sorting direction of the sphere can be shared by the decorative member C190, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  When the ball is discharged (outflowed) from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 after the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position, the sorting member C170 is moved to the sorting member C170. The unit is returned to the first position (predetermined position) by the action of its own weight (eccentricity from the axis C192 of the center of gravity position) of the unit made up of the decorative member C190.

  Thus, the displacement (return) to the first position of the sorting member C170 is performed by the weight (weight) of the unit composed of the sorting member C170 and the decorative member C190. For example, an urging spring is provided, The structure can be simplified as compared with the case where the allocating member C170 is urged toward the first position by the urging spring.

  Moreover, since the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C170 to the first position can be made slower than in the case of using the biasing spring, the following ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling part C173. it can. That is, after the sorting member C170 starts to be displaced (rotated) from the second position toward the first position, the following ball CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow into the rolling part C173. It takes a long time to complete. Furthermore, the possibility that a third sphere that is further succeeding the following sphere CB2 can reach the rolling part C173 can also be given (see FIGS. 218 to 220).

  The receiving portion C172 supports the facing portion C172a formed at a position facing the third passage CRt3 at the first position and the ball received at the first position, and rotates the ball toward the passage portion C144 at the second position. And a bottom surface portion C172b that forms a rolling surface for movement.

  In the receiving portion C172, when the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, the facing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140, and the bottom surface portion C172b is the facing portion. It is formed so as to be inclined upward from C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (see FIG. 214).

  Here, in a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the facing portion C172a is inclined with respect to a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the rotation of the facing portion C172a). If the moving part C173 side is inclined more in the direction away from the third passage CRt3 than the bottom face part C172b side, the ball that has collided with the opposing part C172a may be bounced upward and flow back to the third passage CRt3. There is.

  On the other hand, since the facing portion C172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, the first intermediate member C140 is provided. It is possible to suppress the sphere received from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) from being received by the facing portion C172a and flowing back to the third passage CRt3.

  Further, in a state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed to be inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 (passage portion C144) of the first intermediate member C140. The ball received in the receiving portion C172 flows out to the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 at an early stage, and the weight of the ball cannot be used, so that the sorting member C170 reaches the second position. There is a risk that it will not be allowed.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C172b is formed so as to rise and incline from the facing portion C172a toward the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom surface portion C172b until at least the sorting member C170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. Thereby, the time until the sphere received in the receiving part C172 flows out into the passage part C144 of the first intermediate member C140 can be delayed. As a result, it is possible to reliably reach the second position by using the weight of the sphere effectively.

  For the reason described above (preventing backflow to the third passage CRt3), the facing portion C172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C173 side is closer to the third passage CRt3 than the bottom surface portion C172b side.

  The receiving portion C172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C172a toward the passage portion C144 of the first intermediate member C140 in a state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position ( (See FIG. 215). Thereby, the ball | bowl received in the receiving part C172 can be reliably flowed out to the channel | path part C144 of the 1st intermediate member C140.

  Further, while the ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the sorting member C170, and the sorting member C170 is moved to the second position (that is, the succeeding ball is moved to the rolling portion C173 (first). It can be easily maintained in a state in which it can be guided to 5 passages CRt5).

  The rolling part C173 is a part for guiding (distributing) a ball rolling on the bottom surface part C142 (third path CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 to the second interposed member C160 (fifth path CRt5). Yes, in a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the second position, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 and the second interposed member C160 (fifth passage CRt5). Positioned (built) between the upstream end.

  The upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling part C173 is formed so as to protrude from the facing part C172a of the receiving part C172. That is, it protrudes toward the upstream end (first intermediate member C140 (third passage CRt3) side, arrow L direction) from the opposing portion C172a at the upstream end (end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling part C173. A plate-like portion is formed. By inserting this plate-like portion between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2, both the spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.

  In the state in which the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position, the rolling is performed with respect to the height position at the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C140. The height position at the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the part C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically downward (arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173, and the sorting member C170 disposed at the second position is moved toward the first position by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle). ), The downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 are disposed at the same height position.

  Here, when a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 flows into the receiving portion C172, the sorting member C170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (Rotation) is performed, and the lower surface of the sorting member C170 is brought into contact with the lower stopper portion C132, so that the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position.

  In this case, there is a possibility that the sorting member C170 may be jumped upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by an impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C132, and the first intermediate member is caused by the upward jumping of the sorting member C170. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling part C173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically upward (arrow U direction) with respect to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom surface part C142 (rolling surface) of C140. Then, the ball may not be allowed to flow (roll) from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) of the first intermediate member C140 into the rolling portion C173.

  In particular, when a ball collides with the sorting member C170 bounced upward (the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173) and the sorting member C170 is further bounced up by an impact caused by the collision of the ball (ball When the sorting member C170 is further pushed up by the above, the ball flows into the receiving portion C172 even though it is originally a ball that should flow into the rolling portion C173 (roll). There is a risk of being accepted.

  On the other hand, in the state where the sorting member C170 is arranged at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 (rolling surface) Since a step is formed between them, even when the sorting member C170 is flipped upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is more than the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 by the amount of the step between them. Positioning vertically above (arrow U direction) can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to allow the sorting member C170 to be flipped upward by the amount of the difference between the two. Therefore, the sphere to be introduced (rolled) into the rolling part C173 (the following sphere CB2 in which the distance from the preceding sphere CB1 is equal to or less than the predetermined amount) is changed to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3). Can easily flow (roll) into the rolling part C173.

  Further, the sorting member C170 has an upstream end surface (a surface facing the first intermediate member C140, a surface on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173 from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 ( It is formed to be inclined downward toward the bottom surface portion C142). That is, the end portion on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173 is closer to the first intermediate member C140 at the edge portion on the receiving portion C172 (opposing portion C172a) side than the edge portion on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C173. It is formed in an adjacent shape.

  Thereby, when a ball collides with the sorting member C170 (upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) bounced upward, the sorting member C170 (upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173) from the ball. ) Can be a force in a direction of pushing down the sorting member C170 downward. As a result, the sphere to be introduced (rolled) into the rolling part C173 (the succeeding sphere CB2 whose distance from the preceding sphere CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is changed to the bottom part C142 (third passage CRt3). ) To the rolling part C173.

  Receiving part C172 and rolling part C173 are arranged on the same side (the side in which the direction in which sorting member C170 is rotated by the weight of the sphere is the same) with respect to C192. Therefore, even if the ball is discharged from the receiving portion C172 after the sorting member C170 is arranged at the second position by the weight of the ball received in the receiving portion C172, the weight of the ball rolling on the rolling portion C173 is reduced. Utilizing this, the sorting member C170 can be maintained in the second position. That is, when there is a sphere to be guided to the fifth passage CRt5, the posture of the sorting member C170 can be maintained in the posture for guiding the sphere to the fifth passage CRt5 by using the weight of the sphere. .

  Therefore, it is not necessary to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position by using the weight of the sphere received in the receiving part C172 (the sphere rolling the bottom part C172b), and the extended length of the bottom part C172b is not necessary. The distribution member C170 can be reduced in size accordingly. As a result, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the distribution member C170 can be raised.

  Here, the sorting member C170 includes a direction in which the sphere rolls from the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) toward the receiving portion C172 (a direction in which the receiving portion C172 receives the sphere, an arrow R direction), and a receiving portion C172. The direction in which the ball rolls from the passage C144 to the passage C144 (the direction in which the received ball rolls, the direction of the arrow L) is the reverse direction. That is, in the receiving part C172, it is set as the structure which reverses (direction change) the flow direction (rolling) of a ball | bowl.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the direction in which the receiving part C172 receives the sphere and the direction in which the sphere rolls from the receiving part C172 to the passage part C144 is the same direction, the sphere is distributed by the time required for reversal. Time to stay in the member C170 (receiving part C172) can be secured, and it is easy to maintain the sorting member C170 in the second position by using the weight of the sphere retained in the receiving part C172. As a result, the sphere can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C173.

  Further, since the retention time can be secured by utilizing the reversal of the sphere, the extending length of the bottom surface portion C172b in the receiving portion C172 can be shortened accordingly, and the sorting member C170 can be downsized. As a result, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of the distribution member C170 can be raised.

  The second interposed member C180 is a member that forms a rolling surface of a sphere in the sixth passage CRt6, and is interposed between the front member C111, the first intermediate member C140, and the second intermediate member C150. That is, the sixth passage CRt6 is formed by the space defined by the front member C110, the first intermediate member C140, the second intermediate member C150, and the second interposed member C180.

  On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180, as described above, the front side (arrow) is used to allow the ball guided through the second interposed member C180 (sixth passage CRt6) to flow out to the game area. Concave surfaces (center outflow surface C181 and side outflow surface C182) formed to be inclined downward toward the F direction) are formed. In addition, a undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt6, and a side outflow surface C182 is disposed at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface C181 is disposed at the top of the undulation.

  The upper edge (the edge in the arrow U direction) of the front portion C111 of the front member C110 is the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 except for the region where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. It projects upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C180 flows out (flows down) only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

  A recessed portion C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second interposed member C180, and as described above, a part of the fifth passage CRt5 is formed between the recessed portion C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110. .

  The decorative member C190 includes a main body C191 formed in a plate shape and a shaft C192 fixed to the main body C191. As described above, the decorative member C190 is connected (integrated) to the sorting member C170 via the shaft C192. ) In addition, on the front surface of the main body C191, characters such as characters are displayed by printing or attaching stickers, and based on the movement (displacement) of the characters, the operation of the sorting member C170 can be visually recognized by the player. .

  The axis C192 is disposed in a posture orthogonal to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 205). Thus, the size of the lower frame C86b in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) can be reduced.

  The detour member C200 further includes a plate-shaped main body C201, a wall surface C202 standing from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main body C201, and a part of the wall surface C202 further extending to the front side. And a collar portion C203 formed and formed, and disposed on the back side of the back member C130 at a position facing the opening C131a.

  In a state where the bypass member C200 is disposed on the back member C130, the standing tip (the arrow F direction side) of the wall surface portion C202 is in contact with the back surface of the back member C130 (main body portion C131), and the flange portion C203 The standing tip (arrow F direction side) is in contact with the back surface of the second intermediate member C150 (main body portion C151), and the edge portion of the flange portion C203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the second intermediate member C150 (bottom surface portion C152). Touched.

  Thereby, the space partitioned into the back member C130 (main body part C131) and the bypass member C200 (main body part C201 and wall surface part C202), the second intermediate member C150 (bottom surface part C152), and the bypass member C200 (saddle part). C203) forms a part of the fifth passage CRt5 (see FIG. 216).

  Note that the flange portion C203 is inclined downward from the back member C130 side toward the second intermediate member C150 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the bypass member C200 from the opening C131a of the back member C130 is rolled on the flange C203, so that the space between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C110 and the second interposed member C180 (concave portion C183). Can flow into the fifth passage CRt5.

  Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C170 will be described. 218 to 220 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C86b showing the transition of the ball distributing operation by the distributing member C170, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line CCXIV-CCXIV in FIG.

  218 (a) and 218 (b) show a state in which the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, and corresponds to FIG. 214. FIG. 219 (b) and FIG. 220 show a state in which the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position, and corresponds to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (a), in a state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, the receiving portion C172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (ball) CB1 can be introduced).

  That is, the receiving part C172 has a facing part C172a arranged at a position intersecting with an extension line extending the bottom face part C142 (rolling surface), and is vertically lower than the extension line extending the bottom face part C142 (rolling surface). The bottom surface portion C172b is disposed at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

  In the state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C142 (the rolling surface) and the bottom surface (the rolling surface) of the rolling portion C173. The distance between the opposite surface, the surface on the arrow D direction side, and the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere can pass). .

  On the other hand, the rolling portion C173 cannot receive the ball CB1 that rolls on the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in) when the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position. Placed in.

  That is, in the rolling portion C173, the bottom surface portion C172b is arranged at a position (a step higher) in the vertical direction (arrow U direction) than the extended line obtained by extending the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface). In addition, the space | interval (height of a level | step difference) between the rolling part C173 and the extended line which extended the bottom face part C142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of a sphere. Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl gets over a level | step difference, and flows in into the rolling part C173 of the distribution member C170 in a 1st position.

  In the state in which the sorting member C170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C143 of the first intermediate member C140 and the upstream end (arrow L) of the rolling portion C173. The distance from the direction side end) is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere cannot pass). Thereby, it can suppress that a ball | bowl gets over a level | step difference, and flows in into the rolling part C173 of the distribution member C170 in a 1st position. However, this interval may be larger than the diameter of the sphere.

  When the bottom surface portion C142 of the first intermediate member C140 rolls between the sphere CB1 (leading sphere) and the sphere CB2 (succeeding sphere with a predetermined interval between the preceding spheres), FIG. ), The ball CB1 flows into (accepts) the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C170, and the ball CB1 comes into contact with (becomes received from) the opposing portion C172a and is held by the receiving portion C172.

  When the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 comes into contact with the ball CB1. As described above, in the state where the sorting member C170 is arranged at the first position, the distance between the downstream end of the top surface portion C143 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C173 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere ( Therefore, the sphere CB2 can be prevented from getting over the sphere CB1 and flowing into the rolling part C173. That is, the sphere CB2 can stand by behind (upstream) the sphere CB1.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (b), when the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C172, as shown in FIG. 219 (a), the distribution member C170 is moved from the first position to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. Is displaced (rotated). Further, when the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 is also applied to the sorting member C170.

  Here, the receiving portion C172 includes a region connected to the bottom surface portion C172b of the facing portion C172a and a region connected to the facing portion C172a of the bottom surface portion C172b, that is, the facing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b. Is connected in a circular arc shape that is convex toward the axis C192 and has substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the sphere (substantially the same diameter as the sphere), and the sphere is held by the curved portion. It is possible.

  The spacing between the sorting member C170 (the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C172b (the end portion on the arrow L direction side)) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connection portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) In a state where the distribution member C170 is disposed at the first position, the dimension is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension in which the sphere cannot pass), and the distribution member C170 is displaced from the first position toward the second position ( The image is gradually enlarged by being rotated.

  That is, when the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (position between FIG. 219 (a) and FIG. 219 (b)), The distance between the sorting member C170 (the downstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the bottom surface portion C172b) and the first intermediate member C140 (the connecting portion between the bottom surface portion C142 and the facing portion C144a) is the diameter of the sphere. When the size of the distribution member C170 is enlarged to approximately the same size (size through which the sphere can pass) and the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-described interval is further enlarged, Maximum spacing is formed at two positions.

  Therefore, while the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state where the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 is maintained. That is, the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) in a state where the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thereby, the state where the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, and the state where the sphere CB2 is positioned at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained.

  In this case, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 (rolling surface) (the end portion on the arrow R direction side) and the upstream of the bottom surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface opposite to the rolling surface, the surface on the arrow D direction side). The distance from the end (the end on the arrow L direction side) is gradually reduced by the displacement member C170 being displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position, so that the distribution member C170 is Before reaching the predetermined intermediate position, the dimension is set to be smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension in which the sphere cannot pass). Therefore, it can suppress that sphere CB2 flows into (accepts) the receiving part C172.

  Further, when the sorting member C170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position, the locus of the ball CB1 held in the receiving portion C172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C172a and the bottom surface portion C172b). The locus of the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the bottom surface (the surface on the opposite side to the rolling surface, the surface on the arrow D direction) of the rolling part C173 rather than the outer edge (the outer edge on the opposite side to the axis C192) Is configured to pass through the side closer to the axis C192.

  Therefore, while maintaining the state where the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1, the state where the ball CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C142 can be maintained, and the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C173. Part) can push back the sphere CB2. That is, the upstream end of the rolling part C173 can be inserted between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 to separate both spheres. Therefore, it can suppress that sphere CB2 flows into (accepts) the receiving part C172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling part C173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

  When the sorting member C170 is further displaced (rotated) toward the second position from the state shown in FIG. 219 (a), the ball CB1 rolls on the bottom surface portion C172b toward the passage portion C144 and the ball CB2 Is flowed down to the rolling part C173 (accepted by the rolling part C173).

  As shown in FIGS. 219 (b) and 220, when the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C172 into the passage portion C144 (fourth passage CRt4), and the ball CB2 rolls on the rolling part C173 and flows into the first interposed member C160 (fifth passage CRt5).

  After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the fourth passage CRt4 and the fifth passage CRt5, the sorting member C170 is returned (displaced) by its own weight from the second position toward the first position. Note that the third sphere is in a state where the sorting member C170 is disposed at the second position or after the sorting member C170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position. Reaches the rolling part C173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling part C173, the third ball rolls on the rolling part C173 and flows (guides) into the fifth passage CRt5.

  As described above, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C173 (the surface on the side facing the first intermediate member C140, the surface on the arrow L direction side) extends from the rolling portion C173 to the first intermediate member C140 (bottom surface portion C142). ) So that the distribution member C170 starts to be displaced (rotated) from the second position to the first position, and thus the inclined surface (on the upstream side of the rolling portion C173) ( The third sphere can be easily introduced into the rolling part C173 using the end face.

  The sorting member C170 is configured to be able to be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position with the weight of only one sphere. Therefore, when the distance between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are sequentially received by the receiving unit C172, and the fourth passage CRt4 is subjected to the above-described sorting operation. Be distributed to.

  As described above, according to the lower frame C86b in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are connected to each other with a predetermined amount or less (including a case where the interval between the two balls is in close contact with each other). Distributes (guides) the ball CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4 and distributes (guides) the ball CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170 that is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both the spheres (the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. As described above, since the guide path can be changed according to the continuous state of the balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball exceeds a predetermined amount), the interest is improved. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 221 to 236, a center frame C2086 in the 29th embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 221 is a front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b in the 29th embodiment, and FIG. 222 is a rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. In FIGS. 221 and 222, only a part of the base plate 60 is partially illustrated, and a tapping screw for fastening and fixing the lower frame C2086b to the base plate 60 is omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the lower frame C2086b has a receiving port COP2000in formed as an opening capable of receiving a sphere, a first passage CRt2001 communicated with the receiving port COP2000in, and the first passage. The second path CRt2002 through which the sphere guided through CRt2001 (the sphere reciprocated along the longitudinal direction of the first path CRt2001) flows down, and the sphere guided through the second path CRt2002 is distributed by the sorting member C2170. The third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004 that are flown down and the ball guided through the third passage CRt2003 and the ball that has fallen from the fourth passage CRt2004 (the ball that has not reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flow down. The sixth passage CRt2006 and the fourth passage CRt2004 The fifth passage CRt2005 from which the inserted ball (the ball reaching the end of the fourth passage CRt2004) flows down, and the flow formed as an opening for the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 to flow out to the game area An outlet COP2000out is formed (see FIGS. 229 and 230).

  Note that the center frame in the twenty-ninth embodiment includes an upper frame (not shown) and a lower frame C2086b. The upper frame in the twenty-ninth embodiment is the same as the twenty-eighth embodiment except that the shape of the upper frame path (not shown) is different from the upper frame path CRt0 of the upper frame C86a in the twenty-eighth embodiment. Since the configuration is the same as that of the upper frame C86a, the description thereof is omitted.

  The upper frame passage is a ball that flows in (enters) from the left side (left side in FIG. 205) of the game area (the area between the center frame (upper frame) and the rail 61 (see FIG. 205)). The receiving port COP2000in of the lower frame C2086b is communicated with the downstream end of the upper frame passage. That is, a ball that flows (enters) from the game area into the upper frame passage flows (enters) from the upper frame passage into the first passage CRt2001 of the lower frame C2086b via the receiving port COP2000in.

  The lower frame C2086b is provided with a sorting member C2170 that operates according to the weight of the sphere (see FIGS. 229 and 230), and when the sphere in a continuous state is guided through the second passage CRt2002. The preceding ball is distributed to the third passage CRt2003, while the following ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004. If the interval between the balls is larger than a predetermined amount, both the preceding ball and the following ball are distributed to the third passage CRt2003.

  Here, the ball that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt4 flows down to the fifth passage CRt5, and the outlet COPout, which is the outlet of the fifth passage CRt2005 (the opening that allows the ball to flow into the game area), is It is formed (arranged) at a position that is vertically above the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 205). Therefore, the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 is likely to win the first winning port 64 (the probability of winning the first winning port 64 is high).

  On the other hand, in the sixth passage CRt2006, as a concave surface formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) in order to allow the ball guided to the sixth passage CRt2006 to flow out to the game area, The center outflow surface C181 is not only formed (arranged) at a position above the mouth 64 in the vertical direction, but is also located in the width direction of the game board 13 from the top of the first winning opening 64 in the width direction (left and right direction in FIG. 205). Side outflow surfaces C182 are formed (placed) at two different locations. Further, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed with undulations, a side outflow surface C182 is formed at the bottom of the undulations, and a central outflow surface C181 is formed at the top of the undulations.

  Therefore, the ball distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 has a higher probability of flowing out from the side outflow surface C182 to the gaming area than the probability of flowing out from the central outflow surface C181 into the gaming area in the sixth passage CRt2006. It is difficult to win the first winning opening 64 (the probability of winning the first winning opening 64 is lower than the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 described above).

  Thus, as in the case of the 28th embodiment, the lower frame C2086b in the present embodiment allows the preceding sphere to move to the normal path (the first path) when the connected spheres flow into the second path CRt2002. 3 passages CRt2003), while the following balls are easy to win the first winning port 64 (in this embodiment, the first winning port 64 passes the ball almost certainly (fifth passage CRt2005). ) To the fourth passage CRt2004 that causes the ball to flow down. Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball wins at the first winning port 64 (make sure to win), the player can be expected to form a state in which the balls are connected, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a sphere guided through the fourth passage CRt2004 is formed so as to be able to drop to the sixth passage on the way, and only a sphere that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 without dropping to the fifth passage CRt2005. It is possible to flow down (inflow). Therefore, in order to increase the probability that the ball will win the first winning port 64 (make sure to win), after the following balls among the consecutive balls are distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, The player can expect the ball to reach the end of the 4-passage CRt2004 without dropping, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 236 in addition to FIGS. 221 to 222, the detailed configuration of the lower frame C2086b will be described.

  223 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 224 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lower frame C2086b. 225 is a top view of the lower frame C2086b, FIG. 226 is a front view of the lower frame C2086b, and FIG. 227 is a rear view of the lower frame C2086b. 228 (a) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIa in FIG. 226, and FIG. 228 (b) is a side view of the lower frame C2086b as viewed in the direction of arrow CCXXVIIIb in FIG.

  229 and 230 are cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX of FIG. 225. FIG. 231 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b along the CCXXXXI-CCXXXI line of FIG. 227, and FIG. 232 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b along the CCXXXII-CCXXXII line of FIG. 229 shows a state in which the sorting member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and FIG. 230 shows a state in which the sorting member C2170 is arranged in the second position.

  As shown in FIGS. 221 to 232, the lower frame C2086b includes a front member C2110, a dish member C2120 disposed on one side in the longitudinal direction of the front member C2110 (arrow L direction side), and the front member C2110. A back member C2130 disposed opposite to the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) with a predetermined interval, a first intermediate member C2140 disposed on the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the back member C2130, 2 intermediate member C2150, first interposed member C2160, magnetic part C2400 and receiving member C2500, sorting member C2170 interposed between the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140, front member C2110 and back member The second interposed member C2180 interposed between the opposing C2130 and the detour member C2200 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130 Fine includes a magnet C2300, a.

  The lower frame C2086b is fastened and fixed to each other by a tapping screw, and the sorting member C2170 is rotatably supported by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140, so that one (single unit) ) (See FIG. 221).

  Further, in the lower frame C2086b, the members other than the sorting member C2170 are made of a light-transmitting resin material (that is, a transparent member that can see through the back side member and the sphere), and the sorting member C2170 is colored. Consists of resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball passing from the first passage CRt2001 to the sixth passage CRt2006, and the player can visually recognize the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  In this case, it is sufficient for the lower frame C2086b that at least the first intermediate member C2140 is made of a light-transmitting resin material. The player can visually recognize the continuous state of the balls in the second passage CRt2002 (whether the interval between the preceding ball and the following ball is smaller than a predetermined amount) and the sorting operation by the sorting member C2170. If it can be visually confirmed that the following ball is distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the distribution member C2170, the ball flows from the outlet COPout to the first winning port 64 with high probability (in this embodiment, flows into the fifth passage CRt2005). This is because almost the whole ball enters the ball, so that it is not necessary for the player to visually recognize the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005.

  The sorting member C2170 may be made of a light-transmitting (or colored) resin material, and the front surface of the sorting member C2170 may be painted or a seal attached.

  On the other hand, the first intermediate member C2140 may be made of a colored resin material, or the first intermediate member C2140 may be painted or a seal may be attached. That is, the ball or the sorting member C2170 passing through the third passage CRt2003 may be configured to be invisible to the player from the front side.

  The front member C2110 includes a plate-shaped front surface portion C111 that forms the front surface, and a plate-shaped bottom surface portion C112 that stands up from the back surface of the front surface portion C111.

  In the front part C111, a plurality of insertion holes C111a are formed in the thickness direction along the outer edge of the lower part (arrow D direction side) of the front part C111. In the assembled state (unitized state), the lower frame C2086b is fitted into the window 60a from the front of the base plate 60, and the tapping screw inserted through the insertion hole C111a is fastened to the base plate 60. It is fixed (arranged) to the base plate 60.

  In the front portion C111, an outlet COPout is formed (perforated in the thickness direction) at a position that is vertically above the first winning port 64 (see FIG. 205). As described above, the outlet COPout is an opening that serves as an outlet when the ball guided through the fifth passage CRt2005 flows out to the gaming area.

  The bottom surface part C112 is disposed such that the bottom surface of the second interposed member C2180 is opposed to the top surface thereof. Note that a cylindrical portion communicating with the outlet COPout is formed in the bottom surface portion C112, and this cylindrical portion is a part of the fifth passage CRt2005. Therefore, since the overlapping portion (seam) between the front member C2110 and the second interposed member C180 is not formed on the inner wall surface of the fifth passage CRt2005, when the player looks into the fifth passage CRt2005 from the outlet COPout. The appearance can be improved and foreign objects such as wires can be prevented from entering from the overlapping portion (seam).

  The bottom surface portion C112 is continuously formed over the entire length of the front surface portion C111, and the standing tip (the arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C112 is in front of the first intermediate member C2140 and the first interposed member C2160. Abutted. Thereby, intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire is suppressed.

  The dish member C2120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C2121 and a lower bottom surface portion C2122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and a side wall portion C2124 that forms the side wall of the passage.

The upper bottom surface portion C2121 extends as a substantially linear passage in the top view along the front-rear direction (arrow LR direction), and inclines downward toward the direction away from the receiving port COP2000in (arrow direction). Formed.

  The lower bottom surface portion C2122 is extended along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) as a substantially linear passage in a top view, and the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrows). A cross-sectional shape on a plane including the (UD direction) is formed to be curved in an arc shape that protrudes downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction) (see FIG. 217 (b)).

  The side wall C2124 has one end side and the other end side in the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 (first passage CRt2001) and the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) (the direction in which the sphere is guided). And a passage width of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set and a plurality of spheres can be guided only in series.

  The lower bottom surface portion C2122 intersects the upper bottom surface portion C2121 at approximately 90 degrees in a top view, and is one end in the longitudinal direction of the downstream end (the end portion on the arrow R direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C2121 and the lower bottom surface portion C2122. The side (the end on the arrow F direction side) is disposed adjacent to the side.

  The side wall C2124 is formed with a notch C124a at a position corresponding to the bottom of the lower bottom surface C2122 curved in an arc shape (the position where the height in the vertical direction is the lowest), and this notch C124a. The ball can flow from the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and the sphere flows down from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the rising slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122). The sphere thus flowed down is reciprocated between the one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001), and then the bottom surface portion C2142 (first portion) from the notch portion C124a. The sphere can be caused to flow down to two passages CRt2002).

  As a result, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C2121 to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) with a predetermined distance therebetween, in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001). Using the reciprocating motion, it is possible to make the preceding sphere catch up with the following sphere, and to reduce the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere (to connect the spheres).

  An outflow surface C122a is recessed in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 at a position corresponding to the notch C124a (that is, the position having the lowest height in the vertical direction). The outflow surface C122a is a part for allowing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002), and the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). It is formed as a concave surface inclined downward.

  Therefore, after reciprocating the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the ball whose rolling speed has decreased can smoothly flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) using the outflow surface C122a. it can. That is, by using the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (the first passage CRt2001), the sphere in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the sphere in a continuous state) is in the continuous state. It is possible to flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

  In addition, the outflow surface C122a has a concave surface width (a dimension along a rolling direction of a sphere reciprocating on the lower bottom surface part C2122, a dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) in the top view, and a notch part C124a. The side closer to is formed into a larger shape (see FIG. 225).

  Further, in a state where the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch C124a when viewed from above, the sphere rolls (crosses) on the outflow surface C122a. That is, the sphere that rolls (reciprocates) the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is positioned farthest from the notch C124a (the top of the side of the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall C2124). Even in a state where the position rolls, the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range overlapping with the center of the sphere in the top view (this is the locus of the top of the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface C2122). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

  On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) on the lower bottom surface portion C2122, the sphere that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) is affected by the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage). CRt2001) may flow out (flow down) to bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) without reciprocating once, or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, due to the inclination of outflow surface C122a. . That is, there is a possibility that both the spheres may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) without being reduced in distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 is formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch C124a (the direction of the arrow L) (see FIG. 229). Accordingly, the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage) is pressed while the sphere is pressed against the side wall portion C2124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch portion C124a by the action of the inclination of the lower bottom surface portion C2122. CRt2001) can be rolled (reciprocated).

  Thereby, before the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low, the sphere can be prevented from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) by the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low, the sphere can be easily reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (first passage CRt2001) by making it easy to get over the outflow surface C122a (easier to cross). Easy to do. As a result, it can be ensured that the preceding sphere is followed by the following sphere and the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the spheres are linked).

  In addition, the arc shape of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 (cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C2122 and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction), (See FIGS. 217 (b) and 228 (b)), the radius of the arc shape on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction is the one end of the arc shape that protrudes downward in the direction (arrow D direction). It is made smaller than the radius of the circular arc shape in the region between the side and the other end side (region including the outflow surface C122a). That is, the radius of the arc shape in the region including the outflow surface C122a is increased.

  Thereby, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof), the sphere can be easily reciprocated and the following sphere can be easily followed. The stage where the rolling speed of the reciprocating sphere becomes low (the sphere does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction or the vicinity thereof, and the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including the outflow surface C122a. In the stage), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) while maintaining a state where both balls are connected.

  The back member C2130 includes a main body C2131 formed in a plate shape, and a shaft support C2134 erected from the front of the main body C2131.

  The main body C2131 includes an opening C2131a that is an opening for communicating a passage (fifth passage CRt2005) formed between the front side and the back side of the main body C2131, and a distribution member C2170 (weight C2175). An opening C2131c, which is an opening for avoiding interference, is formed. A recess C2131b is formed below the opening C2131a. The recess C2131b is formed by recessing the outer edge of the main body C2131. The recess C2131b forms a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 between the facing portion of the detour member C2200.

  The shaft support seat C2134 is formed as a shaft support (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the sorting member C2170. Note that the shaft C2174 is pivotally supported by the shaft support portion C2134 and the shaft support portion C2141b of the first intermediate member C2140 in a posture along the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction).

  The first intermediate member C2140 includes a plate-like main body C2141 and a bottom surface C2142, a top surface C2143, a passage C2144, and a lower stopper C2145 that are erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body C2141. And disposed on the left side of the rear member C2130 when viewed from the front.

  The main body C2141 is formed with an opening C2141a which is an opening for communicating passages (third passage CRt2003 and sixth passage CRt2006) formed on the front side and the back side of the main body portion C2141. A shaft support portion C2141b is erected from the back surface of the main body portion C2141. The shaft support portion C2141b is formed as a shaft support portion (bearing) that rotatably supports the shaft C2174 of the sorting member C2170.

  In a state where the first intermediate member C2140 is disposed on the back surface member C2130, the standing ends (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the top surface portion C2143 are in contact with the front surface of the back surface member C2130. As a result, the second passage CRt2002 is formed by the space defined by the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member C2140 (main body portion C2141, bottom surface portion C2142, and top surface portion C2143), and the back member C2130 and the first intermediate member are formed. A third passage CRt2003 is formed by a space defined by C2140 (the bottom surface portion C2142 and the passage portion C2144) and the sorting member C2170 at the second position (see FIG. 230).

  The bottom surface portion C2142 is inclined downward from the dish member C2120 side toward the sorting member C2170 side. The passage portion C2144 is positioned between the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position and the opening C2141a, and the opening C2141a from the distribution member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) in the second position. It is formed to be inclined downward toward the side. Therefore, when the passage portion C2144 receives the sphere from the sorting member C2170 displaced to the second position, the sphere can flow out (roll) to the sixth passage CRt2006 through the opening C2141a.

  The bottom surface portion C2142 is formed so as to come into contact with the top surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced upward. A first position is defined (see FIG. 229). On the other hand, the lower stopper portion C2145 is formed so as to be able to come into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) when the sorting member C2170 (bottom surface portion C2172b) is displaced downward, and the sorting member C2170. Is defined (see FIG. 230).

  Note that when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 is displaced (raised) upward. That is, the bottom surface portion C2173 in the state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position is higher than the top surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface portion C2173 in the state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position (arrow). (U side).

  The second intermediate member C2150 includes a plate-like main body portion C2151, a bottom surface portion C2152 and wall surface portions C2153 and C2154 that are erected from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the main body portion C2151. The rear member C2130 is disposed on the right side as viewed from the front, with a predetermined gap between the member C2140 and the member C2140.

  In the present embodiment, the facing interval (interval in the direction of arrow LR) between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 is the same as the longitudinal direction (in the direction of arrow LR) of the receiving member C2500. It is set to a value larger than the dimension obtained by adding at least twice the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, the space | interval which can pass a ball | bowl is ensured in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) both sides (both between the 1st intermediate member C2140 and the 2nd intermediate member C2150) of the receiving member C2500, respectively. can do. Therefore, the types (variations) of the direction in which the ball flows down can be increased, and the fun of the game can be enhanced.

  In the state where the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back member C2130, the bottom surface portion C2152 is disposed at a position where it can communicate with the opening C2131a of the back member C2130, and is inclined downward toward the opening 2131a. Therefore, when the bottom surface portion C2152 receives the sphere that has reached the end of the fourth passage CRt2004 (the sphere that has dropped from the end of the magnetic portion C2400), the bottom portion C2152 can flow (roll) the sphere into the opening C2131a. That is, a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed on the upper surface side of the bottom surface portion C2152.

  In a state where the second intermediate member C2150 is disposed on the back surface member C2130, the standing ends (arrow B direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2152 and the wall surface portions C2153 and C2154 are brought into contact with the front surface of the back surface member C2130. Further, the main body C2151 and the wall surface parts C2153 and C2154 protrude upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by a predetermined amount along the edge of the upper surface (rolling surface) of the bottom surface part C2152.

  The wall surface portion C2153 located on the side far from the magnetic portion C2400 intersects with an extension line in the moving direction of the sphere guided along the fourth passage CRt2004 (the direction along the lower edge (edge portion adsorbing the sphere) of the magnetic portion C2400). A surface to be formed is formed. Thereby, the ball drained from the fourth passage CRt2004 (falling from the magnetic part C2400) is directly received by the wall surface part C2153, or is bounced by the bottom surface part C2152 (after jumping up) and received by the wall surface part C2153, It can be dropped onto the bottom C2152. In the embodiment, the wall surface portion C2153 is formed up to a position higher than the lower edge (edge portion to which the sphere is attracted) at the terminal end (end portion in the arrow R direction) of the magnetic portion C2400.

  On the other hand, the projecting dimension of the bottom surface part C2152 from the upper surface is such that the projecting dimension of the wall surface part C2154 located on the side close to the magnetic part C2400 and the projecting dimension of the main body part C2151 are located on the side far from the magnetic part C2400. It is made smaller (lower) than the protruding dimension of C2153. Thereby, the ball can fall from the bottom surface portion 2152 (fifth passage CRt2005) to the first interposed member C2160 or the second interposed member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006), and the interest of the game is enhanced. In addition, it is preferable that the protrusion dimension of the wall surface part C2154 and the main-body part C2151 is made smaller than the diameter of a sphere.

  The receiving member C2500 includes a first bottom surface part C2501 and a second bottom surface part C2502 that form an upper surface (rolling surface), and is between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member 2150, and is a magnetic part C2400. It is arrange | positioned in the position which becomes below (arrow U direction side). Therefore, the ball dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400) can be received by the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 and can flow down (roll) to the first interposed member C2160.

  The first bottom surface portion C2501 is formed to be inclined downward from the connection portion with the second bottom surface portion C2502 toward the first intermediate member C2140 side (arrow L direction), and the second bottom surface portion C2502 is the first bottom surface portion C2501. And is inclined downward toward the second intermediate member C2150 side (arrow R direction). Further, the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 are inclined downward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back surface side (back surface member C2130 side) (see FIG. 232).

  As described above, at least one sphere space is formed between the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150 on both sides in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the receiving member C2500.

  Therefore, the ball that has dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) rolls in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom surface part C2501 or the second bottom surface part C2502, and the first interposed member C2160. Can flow down. In this case, the direction in which the sphere flows down can be varied depending on the portion (first bottom surface portion C2501 or second bottom surface portion C2502) that has received the ball that has dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic portion C2400).

  Further, after rolling the sphere dropped from the fourth passage CRt2004 (magnetic part C2400) in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) of the first bottom face part C2501 or the second bottom face part C2502, the first bottom face part It can be caused to flow down from the downstream end of the part C2501 or the second bottom face part C2502 to the first interposed member C2160. Thereby, this sphere can be easily rolled along the longitudinal direction of the first interposed member C2160.

  In addition, at least one or both of the first bottom surface portion C2501 and the second bottom surface portion C2502 may be inclined upward from the front side of the receiving member C2500 toward the back surface side (back surface member C2130 side), or the receiving member. It may be non-inclined (that is, horizontal) from the front side of C2500 toward the back side (backside member C2130 side).

  Further, the receiving member C2500 has a configuration in which a space through which a sphere can pass is ensured only on one side in the longitudinal direction (arrow LR direction) (that is, one of the first intermediate member C2140 and the second intermediate member C2150). A space in which a sphere can flow (pass) is formed only between the spheres, and a sphere can not flow (pass) between the other. In this case, the length in the longitudinal direction of the first bottom surface portion C2501 or the second bottom surface portion C2502 can be secured, and the rolling time of the sphere can be increased accordingly. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The first interposed member C2160 is a member that forms a rolling surface that causes the sphere that has flowed down from the receiving member C2500 to flow down to the second interposed member C2180, and includes a first intermediate member C2140 and a second intermediate member C2150. It is interposed between the facing.

  On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, a concave surface (center outflow) is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (in the direction of arrow F) in order to allow the sphere to flow out to the second interposed member C2180. Surface C2161 and side outflow surface C2162) are formed. The central outflow surface C2161 is formed (arranged) at a position vertically above the central outflow surface C181 (that is, the first winning port 64) of the second interposed member C2180, and the side outflow surface C2162 is the central outflow surface C2162 It is formed (arranged) at two locations whose positions are different from C2161 in the width direction of the game board 13 (left and right direction in FIG. 205). In addition, a undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the first interposed member C2160, a side outflow surface C2162 is formed at the bottom of the undulation, and a central outflow surface C2161 is formed at the top of the undulation.

  In addition, the side outflow surface C2162 is located outward (arrow L direction or arrow R direction) in the width direction (FIG. 205 left-right direction) of the game board 13 with respect to the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposed member C2180. Are formed (arranged) differently. Therefore, the sphere flowing down from the side outflow surface C2162 is outside the side outflow surface C182 of the second interposed member C2180 (ie, the second interposed member C2180 inclined downward toward the side outflow surface C182). Can flow down to the upper surface (rolling surface). Therefore, it is possible to easily roll the sphere along the longitudinal direction of the second interposed member C2180. As a result, an opportunity to flow down from the central outflow surface C181 of the second interposed member C2180 (that is, to enter (win) the first winning port 64) can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  The distribution member C2170 includes a main body C2171 on which the shaft C2174 is pivotally supported, a receiving part C2172 formed on one side of the main body C2171, a rolling part C2173 formed on the upper surface side of the main body C2171, A brass weight C2175 disposed (attached) to the main body C2171 at a position opposite to the receiving portion C2172 across the shaft C2174, with the shaft C2174 (shaft support portions C2134, C2141b) as the center It can be rotated.

  The distribution member C2170 has its center of gravity located on the other side (the side where the weight C2175 is disposed, that is, the side opposite to the receiving portion C21720, the right side in FIG. 229) with respect to the rotation center (axis C2174). Be eccentric. Therefore, in the no-load state, the sorting member C2170 is raised on the receiving portion C2172 side (rotated clockwise around the axis C2174 in the front view), and the rotation is restricted by the bottom surface portion C2142 (at the first position). (Refer to FIG. 229).

  On the other hand, in a state where the sphere is received in the receiving portion C2172 of the sorting member C2170, the center of gravity position as a whole is formed on one side (receiving portion C2172) with respect to the rotation center (axis C2174) due to the weight of the sphere. On the other side, that is, on the opposite side to the weight C2175 with respect to the axis C2174 (left side in FIG. 230). Therefore, in a state where the ball is received in the receiving portion C2172, the sorting member C2170 is lowered on the receiving portion C2172 side (rotated counterclockwise about the axis C2174 in front view), and the rotation is restricted by the lower stopper portion C2145. It is made into the state (state arrange | positioned in the 2nd position) (refer FIG. 230).

  When the ball is discharged (outflowed) from the receiving portion C2172 to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 after the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the sorting member C2170 is moved to the sorting member C2170. Is returned to the first position by the action of its own weight (eccentricity of the center of gravity position from the axis C2174).

  As described above, the displacement (return) of the distribution member C2170 to the first position is performed by the weight (weight) of the distribution member C2170. For example, an urging spring is provided, and the distribution is performed by the urging spring. Compared with the case where the member C2170 is urged toward the first position, the structure can be simplified.

  Further, since the displacement (returning operation) of the sorting member C2170 to the first position can be made slower than in the case of using the urging spring, the following ball CB2 can easily reach the rolling part C2173. it can. That is, after the sorting member C2170 starts to be displaced (rotated) from the second position toward the first position, the succeeding ball CB2 is displaced (rotated) to a position where it cannot flow onto the rolling part C2173. It takes a long time to complete. Furthermore, the possibility that a third sphere that is further succeeding the following sphere CB2 can reach the rolling part C2173 can also be given (see FIGS. 233 to 235).

  The receiving portion C2172 supports the facing portion C2172a formed at a position facing the second passage CRt2002 at the first position and the ball received at the first position, and rotates the ball toward the passage portion C2144 at the second position. And a bottom surface portion C2172b that forms a rolling surface for movement.

  In the receiving portion C2172, in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140, and the bottom surface portion C2172b is the facing portion. It is formed so as to be inclined upward from C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (see FIG. 229).

  Here, in a state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the facing portion C2172a is inclined with respect to a direction orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the rotation of the facing portion C2172a). If the moving part C2173 side is inclined more in the direction away from the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom part C2172b side, the ball colliding with the facing part C2172a may be bounced upward and flow backward to the second passage CRt2002. There is.

  On the other hand, since the facing portion C2172a is substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the first intermediate member C2140 is provided. It is possible to suppress the sphere received from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) from being received by the facing portion C2172a and flowing back to the third passage CRt2003.

  Further, in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed to be inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 (passage portion C2144) of the first intermediate member C2140. The ball received in the receiving portion C2172 flows out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 at an early stage, and the weight of the ball cannot be used, so that the sorting member C2170 reaches the second position. There is a risk that it will not be allowed.

  On the other hand, the bottom surface portion C2172b is formed to rise and incline from the facing portion C2172a toward the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position. The ball can be held on the bottom surface portion C2172b at least until the sorting member C2170 rotates by a predetermined amount from the first position. Thereby, the time until the sphere received in the receiving part C2172 flows out into the passage part C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 can be delayed. As a result, it is possible to reliably reach the second position of the sorting member C2170 by effectively using the weight of the sphere.

  In this case, in this embodiment, the bottom surface portion C2172b is a region on the base end side (right side in FIG. 229, arrow R direction side) connected to the facing portion C2172a in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position. Is set to an angle larger than the angle of ascending in the region on the tip side (left side in FIG. 229, arrow L direction side) opposite to the facing portion C2172a. In other words, the bottom surface portion C2172b has a downward inclination angle in a region on the tip side (left side in FIG. 229) opposite to the facing portion C2172a when the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position. The angle is set to be larger than the downward inclination angle in the region on the base end side (right side in FIG. 229) connected to the part C2172a.

  Therefore, in the initial stage in which the distribution member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the receiving portion C2172 is utilized by utilizing the rising inclination in the base end side (right side in FIG. 229) of the bottom surface portion C2172b. In the latter stage, while maintaining the holding of the sphere in the (bottom surface portion C2172b), the downward inclination in the tip side (left side in FIG. 229) of the bottom surface portion C2172b is used to enter the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003). The ball can be smoothly discharged.

  For the reason described above (preventing backflow to the second passage CRt2002), the facing portion C2172a may be inclined in a direction in which the rolling portion C2173 side is closer to the second passage CRt2002 than the bottom surface portion C2172b side.

  The receiving portion C2172 is formed such that the bottom surface portion C2172b is inclined downward from the facing portion C2172a toward the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140 in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position ( (See FIG. 230). Thereby, the sphere received in the receiving portion C2172 can surely flow out to the passage portion C2144 of the first intermediate member C2140.

  Further, while the ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the weight of the ball is applied to the sorting member C2170, and the sorting member C2170 is moved to the second position (that is, the succeeding ball is moved to the rolling portion C2173 (first). It is easy to maintain a state in which guidance to 4 passages CRt4) is possible.

  The rolling part C2173 is formed in a region on the opposite side of the receiving part 2172 (bottom surface part 2172b) with the axis C2174 interposed therebetween. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position by the weight of the sphere received by the receiving portion C2172, the region is raised upward (in the direction of the arrow U) with the rotation. A rolling part C2173 is formed in a region including at least. That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position, the downstream side of the rolling part C2173 is lifted upward, and the distance to the magnetic part C2400 is shortened. Therefore, the ball rolling on the rolling part C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic part C2400.

  In this case, when the rolling member C2173 is formed only on the opposite side in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) across the axis C2174 with the sorting member C2170 disposed at the second position, the bottom surface portion When the sphere flows down from 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling part C2173, the sorting member C2170 may be rotated toward the first position due to the weight of the sphere or the momentum of the drop. Therefore, the height position (vertical position) of the rolling part C2173 is lowered, and the distance from the magnetic part C2400 is increased, so that the ball rolling the rolling part C2173 jumps to the magnetic part C2400. There is a risk that it will not be adsorbed.

  On the other hand, the rolling part C2173 is formed over a range (region) overlapping with the axis C2174 in the vertical direction in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position (see FIG. 230). That is, the region on the upstream side (second passage CRt2002 side) of the rolling part C2173 is located on the one side in the horizontal direction (arrow L direction side) with respect to the axis C2174, and the weight of the sphere rolling on the upstream side is It is possible to act as a force in the direction of maintaining the sorting member C2170 at the second position.

  Therefore, when the sphere flows down from the bottom surface portion 2142 (second passage CRt2002) to the rolling portion C2173, the inertia in the direction of maintaining the state at the second position using the weight of the sphere or the momentum of the drop. While the force is applied to the sorting member C2170 and the sorting member C2170 is about to be displaced (rotated) in the direction of maintaining the second position by the action of the inertial force, the ball is moved downstream of the rolling part C2173. It can be rolled to the side area. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling part C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic part C2400.

  The extended length of the bottom surface portion C2172b (the length in the direction of guiding the sphere) of the receiving portion C2172 is set to a dimension larger than the extended length of the rolling portion C2173. Therefore, while the ball rolls on the rolling part C2173, it is possible to easily form a state in which another ball rolls on the bottom surface part C2172b of the receiving part C2172. That is, while the ball rolls on the rolling part C2173, the weight of another sphere can be applied to the sorting member C2170 on the bottom surface part C2172b of the receiving part C2172.

  Accordingly, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the sorting member C2170 is displaced from the second position toward the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). Can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling part C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic part C2400.

  In particular, since the bottom surface portion C2172b of the receiving portion C2172 extends in a direction away from the axis C2174 (a direction orthogonal to the axis C2174), as the ball rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, The distance between the position where the weight acts and the fulcrum (rotation center) can be increased (increased). That is, as the sphere rolls on the bottom surface portion C2172b, the sorting member C2170 can be easily maintained at the second position (to displace (rotate) the sorting member C2170 disposed at the second position to the first position). The necessary force can be increased).

  Accordingly, when the ball rolls on the rolling surface C2173, the sorting member C2170 is displaced from the second position toward the first position by the weight of the ball (the downstream side of the rolling surface C2173 is displaced downward). Can be suppressed. As a result, the ball rolling on the rolling part C2173 can be easily jumped (adsorbed) to the magnetic part C2400.

  Here, the sorting member C2170 has a direction in which the sphere rolls from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) toward the receiving portion C2172 (a direction in which the receiving portion C2172 receives the sphere, an arrow R direction), and a receiving portion C2172. The direction in which the sphere rolls (the direction in which the received sphere rolls, the direction of the arrow L) is the opposite direction. That is, in the receiving part C2172, it is set as the structure which reverses (downward direction) the flow direction (rolling) of a ball | bowl.

  Thereby, compared with the case where the direction in which the receiving part C2172 receives the sphere and the direction in which the sphere rolls in the receiving part C2172 are the same direction, the sphere is distributed to the sorting member C2170 (receiving). It is possible to secure a time for staying in the part C2172), and to easily maintain the sorting member C2170 in the second position using the weight of the spheres staying in the receiving part C2172. As a result, the sphere can be stably rolled in the rolling portion C2173.

  The rolling part C2173 is a part for guiding (distributing) a ball rolling on the bottom surface part C2142 (second path CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the magnetic part C2400 (fourth path CRt2004). In a state where the dividing member C2170 is disposed at the second position, between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end of the magnetic portion C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004). Positioned (built).

  As described above, the rolling part C2173 is displaced (rotated) between the first position and the second position of the sorting member C2170, so that the height position of the upper surface (rolling surface) thereof is in the vertical direction. It is displaced (raised and lowered) in the direction of (arrow UD). Thereby, the rolling part C2173 can be arranged at a position below the magnetic part C2400.

  As a result, the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, and the rolling part C2173 is displaced (raised) upward, so that the ball comes close to the magnetic part C2400 and adsorbs the sphere against the action of gravity. On the other hand, by placing the sorting member C2170 in the first position and displacing (raising) the rolling part C2173 downward, it is separated from the magnetic part C2400, and the action of gravity is also used to An embodiment that does not allow adsorption can be reliably formed.

  The connecting portion between the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C2173 and the facing portion C2172a of the receiving portion C2172 is on the upstream side (the first intermediate member C2140 (second passage CRt2002) side, the arrow L direction). It is formed in the shape of an acute protrusion that protrudes toward the front. By inserting the protruding portion between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2, both spheres (spheres CB1 and CB2) can be separated.

  In a state in which the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the rolling is performed with respect to the height position at the downstream end (end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) of the first intermediate member C2140. The height position at the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the part C2173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically downward (arrow D direction). That is, a step is formed between the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173, and the sorting member C170 disposed at the second position is moved toward the first position by a predetermined amount (predetermined rotation angle). ) Is displaced (rotated), the downstream end of the bottom surface part C2142 and the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 are arranged at the same height position.

  Here, when a ball rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 flows into the receiving portion C2172, the distribution member C2170 is displaced downward from the first position by the weight of the ball. (Rotation) and the lower surface of the sorting member C2170 is brought into contact with the lower stopper portion C2145, so that the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position.

  In this case, there is a possibility that the sorting member C2170 may be jumped upward (in the direction of the arrow U) by an impact when the lower surface collides with the lower stopper portion C2145, and the first intermediate member is caused by the upward jumping of the sorting member C2170. The height position at the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) is positioned vertically upward (arrow U direction) with respect to the height position at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) of C2140. Then, the ball may not be allowed to flow (roll) from the bottom surface part C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling part C2173.

  In particular, when a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (upstream end surface of the rolling part C2173) that is bounced upward, and the sorting member C2170 is further bounced up by the impact of the collision of the ball (ball When the sorting member C2170 is further pushed upward by the above-described operation, the ball flows into the receiving unit C2172 even though the ball is originally supposed to flow into the rolling unit C2173 (roll). There is a risk of being accepted.

  On the other hand, in the state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, as described above, the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (rolling surface) Since a step is formed between them, even when the sorting member C2170 is flipped upward by an impact, the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 is more than the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 because of the step between the two. Positioning vertically above (arrow U direction) can be suppressed. That is, it is possible to allow the sorting member C2170 to be flipped upward by the level difference between the two. Therefore, the sphere to be flown into (rolled to) the rolling portion C2173 (the following sphere CB2 in which the distance from the preceding sphere CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is changed to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002). Can easily flow (roll) into the rolling part C2173.

  As in the case of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173 (the surface facing the first intermediate member C2140, the surface on the arrow L direction side) is moved from the rolling portion C2173 to the first. You may make it incline and descend toward the intermediate member C2140 (bottom surface part C2142). That is, the edge on the receiving portion C2172 (opposing portion C2172a) side of the end surface on the upstream side of the rolling portion C2173 is closer to the first intermediate member C2140 than the edge on the rolling surface side of the rolling portion C2173. It is good also as cross-sectional shape to adjoin.

  Thereby, when a ball collides with the sorting member C2170 (upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) bounced upward, the sorting member C2170 (upstream end surface of the rolling portion C2173) from the ball. ) Can be a force in a direction to push down the sorting member C2170 downward. As a result, a sphere to be introduced (rolled) into the rolling part C2173 (a succeeding sphere CB2 whose distance from the preceding sphere CB1 is equal to or less than a predetermined amount) is changed to a bottom face C2142 (second path CRt2002). ) To the rolling part C2173 (rolling).

  The magnetic part C2400 is a metal long plate-like body, and can attract a sphere by using a magnetic force acting from a magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130. A plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C2400.

  When the ball is caused to flow from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173 in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball rolling on the rolling surface jumps from the downstream end of the rolling part C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic part C2400. That is, the magnetic part C2400 is attracted to the lower edge (ridge line formed by intersecting the front surface (surface in the direction of arrow F) and the lower surface (surface in the direction of arrow D)) (see FIG. 236). The sphere adsorbed on the magnetic part C2400 is moved along the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400 by the action of the sphere due to jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic part C2400.

  In this case, from the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400, depending on the state of the sphere (the speed of the sphere, the position of the sphere, the rotational state of the sphere, etc. when jumping from the rolling part C2173 of the sorting member C2170 to the magnetic part C2400) It is possible to form an unstable state with the possibility that the sphere falls (possibility that the sphere cannot reach the end). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In particular, since the magnetic part C2400 (fourth passage CRt2004) forms a passage between the sorting member C2170 and the fifth passage CRt2005, the interest of the game can be enhanced. That is, the sphere distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the allocating member C2170 passes through the second passage CRt2002 in a state where the distance from the preceding sphere CB1 is smaller than a predetermined amount (that is, in a state where it is continuous with the preceding sphere CB1). There is only a sphere (rolling sphere CB2) that flows down (rolls), and the possibility that the following sphere B2 is generated is relatively low. Displace the sphere that has reached the sorting member C2170 through such a low possibility (following sphere B2) in an unstable state with the possibility of falling (possibly unable to reach the fifth passage CRt2005). Thus, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player expect to pass safely.

  The thickness dimension of the magnetic part C2400 is set to a value smaller than the diameter of the sphere (in this embodiment, 6% of the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, in the sphere having the outer surface point CP1 attracted to the lower edge of the magnetic part C2400, the outer surface point CP2 at a position below the position CP1 is brought into contact with the front surface of the main body part C2131. In this case, since the center of gravity of the sphere is located farther from the front of the main body C2131 than the outer surface point CP2, the sphere's own weight (gravity acting on the center of gravity) uses the outer surface point CP1 as a fulcrum and the outer surface point CP2 as the main body. It acts as a force in the direction of pressing against the front surface of 2131 (that is, a force that rotates the sphere clockwise around the outer surface point CP1 in FIG. 236) (see FIG. 236).

  Thus, when the sphere is attracted to the magnetic part C2400, the sphere can be supported at two points, the outer surface point CP1 and the outer surface point CP2, and as a result, on the lower edge (longitudinal direction) of the magnetic part C2400. The movement of the sphere along can be stabilized. In addition, the moving speed of the sphere can be reduced (lowered) by using the frictional resistance between the outer surface point CP2 and the front surface of the main body 2131. Therefore, this also stabilizes the movement of the ball and increases the time required for the passage of the fourth passage CRt2004, so that the player can expect to reach the fifth passage CRt2005 without dropping. Can be improved.

  As described above, the magnet C2300 and the magnetic part C2400 are disposed across the main body part c2131 of the back member C2130, and the sphere is moved (slid) along the magnetic part C2400, thereby adjusting the attractive force. In addition, it is possible to form the passage path of the sphere with a simple structure while facilitating the optimization of the frictional force.

  The second interposed member C2180 is a member that forms a ball rolling surface in the sixth passage CRt2006, and is interposed between the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, and the first interposed member C2160. . That is, the sixth passage CRt2006 is formed by the space defined by the front member C2110, the first intermediate member C2140, the first interposed member C2160, and the second interposed member C2180.

  On the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180, as described above, the front side (arrow) is used to allow the ball guided through the second interposed member C2180 (sixth passage CRt2006) to flow out to the game area. Concave surfaces (center outflow surface C181 and side outflow surface C182) formed to be inclined downward toward the F direction) are formed. In addition, a undulation is formed on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the sixth passage CRt2006, and a side outflow surface C182 is disposed at the bottom of the undulation, while a central outflow surface C181 is disposed at the top of the undulation.

  Note that the upper edge (the edge in the arrow U direction) of the front portion C111 of the front member C2110 is the upper surface (roller) of the second interposed member C2180 except for the region where the central outflow surface C181 and the side outflow surface C182 are formed. It projects upward (in the direction of arrow U) from the moving surface). That is, the ball rolling on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the second interposed member C2180 flows out (flows down) only from the central outflow surface C181 or the side outflow surface C182.

  A concave portion C183 is formed in the bottom surface of the second interposed member C2180, and a part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed between the concave portion C183 and the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 as described above. .

  The detour member C2200 further includes a plate-like main body C2201, a wall surface C2202 erected from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side) of the main body C2201, and a part of the wall surface C2202 further extending to the front side. And a flange portion C2203 that is formed and disposed on the back side of the back member C2130 at a position facing the opening C2131a.

  In a state where the detour member C2200 is disposed on the back surface member C2130, the standing tip (the arrow F direction side) of the wall surface portion C2202 is in contact with the back surface of the back surface member C2130 (main body portion C2131) and the flange portion C2203 The standing tip (arrow F direction side) is in contact with the back surface of the second interposed member C2180, and the edge portion of the flange portion C2203 is in contact with the bottom surface of the first interposed member C2160.

  Accordingly, the space defined by the back member C2130 (main body part C2131) and the bypass member C2200 (main body part C2201 and wall surface part C2202), and the first interposed member C2160 and the bypass member C2200 (saddle part C2203) A part of the fifth passage CRt2005 is formed by the partitioned space (see FIGS. 231 and 232).

  Note that the flange portion C2203 is inclined downward from the back member C2130 side toward the second interposed member C2180 side. Therefore, the ball that has flowed into the bypass member C2200 from the opening C2131a of the back member C2130 rolls on the flange C2203, and between the bottom surface portion C112 of the front member C2110 and the second interposed member C2180 (concave portion C183). Can flow into the fifth passage CRt2005.

  Next, the ball sorting operation by the sorting member C2170 will be described. FIGS. 233 to 235 are partial enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C2086b showing the transition of the ball distributing operation by the distributing member C2170, and correspond to the cross section taken along the line CCXXIX-CCXXIX in FIG. FIG. 2366 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the lower frame C2086b taken along the line CCXXXVI-CCXXXVI in FIG. 235 (b).

  233 (a) and 233 (b) show a state in which the sorting member C2170 is arranged at the first position, and corresponds to FIG. 229. 235 (a) and 235 (b) show a state in which the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, and corresponds to FIG. 230.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a), in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the receiving portion C2172 can receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (ball) CB1 can be introduced).

  In other words, the receiving part C2172 is arranged such that the facing part C2172a is arranged at a position intersecting with an extension line extending from the bottom face part C2142 (rolling surface), and vertically below the extension line extending from the bottom face part C2142 (rolling surface). A bottom surface portion C2172b is arranged at a position (in the direction of arrow D).

  In the state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the rolling surface side) and the upstream end (the arrow L direction on the rolling portion C2173). The distance between the end portion on the side, the connecting portion between the rolling portion C2173 and the facing portion C2172a) is set to a dimension larger than the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere can pass).

  On the other hand, the rolling portion C2173 cannot receive the ball CB1 rolling on the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 (the ball CB1 cannot flow in) when the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position. Placed in.

  That is, in the rolling portion C2173, the bottom surface portion C2172b is disposed at a position (a position higher by one step) that is vertically above (in the direction of the arrow U) with respect to an extension line obtained by extending the bottom surface portion C2142 (rolling surface). In addition, the space | interval (height of a level | step difference) between the rolling part C2173 and the extended line which extended the bottom face part C2142 (rolling surface) is set to a dimension larger than the radius of a sphere. Thereby, it can suppress that a sphere overcomes a level | step difference and flows in into the rolling part C2172b of the distribution member C2170 in a 1st position.

  In the state where the distribution member C2170 is disposed at the first position, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the top surface portion C2143 of the first intermediate member C2140 and the upstream end (the arrow L) of the rolling portion C2173. The distance between the end of the direction side) and the diameter of the sphere is set to a dimension (a dimension through which the sphere can pass). Accordingly, it is possible to allow the ball to get over the step and flow into the rolling portion C2172b of the sorting member C2170 at the first position.

  In this case, in a state where the sorting member C2170 is in the first position, the rolling portion C2173 is opposite to the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) across the axis C2174 in the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction). And is inclined downward in a direction (arrow R direction) away from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002).

  Therefore, even if the ball climbs over the step and flows into the rolling part C2172b of the sorting member C2170 in the first position, the sorting member C2170 is rotated toward the second position by the ball (that is, The rolling part C2173 can be prevented from being lifted upward), and the ball can be dropped to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) along the descending slope of the rolling part C2173. As a result, it is possible to suppress a sphere that has climbed over the step from jumping (adsorbed) to the magnetic part C2400 and flowing down the fourth passage CRt2004 (arriving at the fifth passage CRt2005).

  However, the magnetic part C2400 may be arranged at a position where a sphere that has climbed over the step can jump (adhere) to the magnetic part C2400. That is, when the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1 and the ball CB2 gets over the ball CB1, the ball CB2 jumps (adsorbs) to the magnetic portion C2400. C2400 may be provided. Since the ball CB2 is originally a ball to be distributed to the fourth passage CRt2004, the ball is prevented from dropping to the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006), which is disadvantageous to the player. Can be suppressed.

  When the bottom surface portion C2142 of the first intermediate member C2140 rolls between the sphere CB1 (leading sphere) and the sphere CB2 (following sphere with a predetermined interval between the preceding spheres), FIG. 233 (b ), The ball CB1 flows into (accepts) the receiving portion C2172 of the sorting member C2170, and the ball CB1 comes into contact with (accepts) the opposing portion C2172a and is held by the receiving portion C2172.

  When the distance between the balls CB1 and CB2 is relatively small, the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, and the ball CB2 comes into contact with the ball CB1. Thereby, the ball CB2 can stand by behind (upstream) the ball CB1.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (b), when the ball CB1 is received by the receiving portion C2172, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the sorting member C2170 is directed from the first position to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. Is displaced (rotated). When the ball CB2 catches up with the ball CB1, the weight of the ball CB2 is also applied to the sorting member C2170.

  Here, the receiving portion C2172 includes a region connected to the bottom surface portion C2172b of the facing portion C2172a and a region connected to the facing portion C2172a of the bottom surface portion C2172b, that is, the facing portion C2172a and the bottom surface portion C2172b. Is connected to the axis C2174 and is curved into an arc shape that is substantially the same shape (substantially the same diameter as the sphere), and the sphere is held by the curved portion. It is possible.

  Further, the sorting member C2170 (the upstream side (arrow R direction side region) on the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end portion on the downstream side (arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142) Is set to a size smaller than the diameter of the sphere (a size through which the sphere cannot pass) in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the first position, and the sorting member C2170 is moved from the first position to the first position. It is gradually enlarged by being displaced (rotated) toward the second position.

  That is, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) to a predetermined intermediate position between the first position and the second position (position between FIG. 234 (a) and FIG. 234 (b)), Between the distribution member C2170 (the region on the upstream side (arrow R direction side) on the rolling surface of the bottom surface portion C2172b) and the first intermediate member C2140 (the end portion on the downstream side (arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142) Is expanded to a dimension that is substantially the same as the diameter of the sphere (a dimension through which the sphere can pass), and when the sorting member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the predetermined intermediate position to the second position, the above-described interval Is further enlarged to form a maximum spacing at the second position.

  Therefore, while the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position, the state where the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 is maintained. That is, the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) in a state where the ball CB1 is received in the receiving portion C2172 from the first position to the predetermined intermediate position. Thereby, the state where the sphere CB2 is in contact with the sphere CB1 can be maintained, and the state where the sphere CB2 is located at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained.

  In this case, the downstream end (the end on the arrow R direction side) of the bottom surface portion C2142 (the rolling surface) and the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end portion on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a). The interval between the spheres is gradually reduced by the displacement member C2170 being displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position, and before the distribution member C2170 reaches the predetermined intermediate position, It is set to a dimension smaller than the diameter (a dimension in which the sphere cannot pass). Therefore, it can suppress that sphere CB2 flows into (accepts to) receiving part C2172.

  Further, when the sorting member C2170 is displaced (rotated) from the first position toward the second position, the locus of the ball CB1 held in the receiving portion C2172 (the connecting portion between the facing portion C2172a and the bottom surface portion C2172b). The trajectory of the upstream end of the rolling portion C2173 (the end portion on the arrow L direction side, the connecting portion with the facing portion C2172a) passes through the side closer to the axis C2174 than the outer edge (the outer edge opposite to the axis C2174). Configured.

  Therefore, the state where the ball CB2 is in contact with the ball CB1 can be maintained, and the state where the ball CB2 is positioned at the downstream end of the bottom surface portion C2142 can be maintained, and the upstream end (the end on the arrow L direction side) of the rolling portion C2173 can be maintained. Sphere CB2 can be pushed back (returned back) by the connecting portion between the first portion and the facing portion C2172a. That is, the upstream end of the rolling part C2173 can be inserted between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 to separate both spheres. Therefore, it can suppress that sphere CB2 flows into (accepts) the receiving part C2172. Further, the ball CB2 can be gradually rolled to the rolling part C2173, and the subsequent rolling can be stabilized.

  When the sorting member C2170 is further displaced (rotated) from the state shown in FIG. 234 (a) toward the second position, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the sphere CB1 goes to the passage portion C2144 and the bottom surface portion. While rolling on C2172b, the ball CB2 flows down to the rolling part C2173 (accepted by the rolling part C2173).

  As shown in FIGS. 235 (a) and 235 (b), when the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the ball CB1 flows from the receiving portion C2172 into the passage portion C2144 (third passage CRt2003). At the same time, the ball CB2 that has rolled on the rolling part C2173 jumps (is attracted) to the magnetic part C2400 and flows into the fourth passage CRt2004.

  After the balls CB1 and CB2 flow into the third passage CRt2003 and the fourth passage CRt2004, the sorting member C2170 is returned (displaced) by its own weight from the second position toward the first position.

  Note that the third sphere is in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position or after the sorting member C2170 starts displacement (rotation) from the second position to the first position. Reaches the rolling part C2173 and flows into the rolling surface of the rolling part C2173, the third ball rolls on the rolling part C2173. In this case, the second intermediate member 2150 side (sixth passage CRt2006) depends on whether the ball CB1 is on the receiving portion C2172 (bottom surface portion C2172b), the rolling speed (momentum) of the third ball, and the like. Or the magnetic part C2400 is jumped (adsorbed) to be flown into the fourth passage CRt2004. That is, two states can be formed.

  The sorting member C2170 is configured to be able to be displaced (rotated) from the first position to the second position with the weight of only one sphere. Therefore, when the distance between the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 is larger than a predetermined amount, both the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are sequentially received by the receiving portion C2172, and the third passage CRt2003 is subjected to the above-described sorting operation. Be distributed to.

  As described above, according to the lower frame C2086b in the 29th embodiment, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are connected with a predetermined amount or less, the sphere CB1 is distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. The ball CB2 can be lifted upward and distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt2004 by the sorting member C2170 displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1, while the balls CB1 and CB2 are separated from each other. In the case where the spheres are connected at an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both spheres (sphere CB1 and sphere CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the third passage CRt2003. As described above, since the guide path can be changed according to the continuous state of the balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball exceeds a predetermined amount), the interest is improved. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 to 240, the center frame C3086 in the thirtieth embodiment will be described.

  In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the case where the sorting member C170 is rotated has been described. However, the sorting member C3170 in the twenty-ninth embodiment is slid. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  237 and 239 are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the lower frame C3086b according to the thirtieth embodiment, and FIGS. 238 and 240 are rear views of the lower frame C3086b. 237 and 238 show a state in which the sorting member C3170 is arranged at the first position, and FIGS. 239 and 240 show a state in which the sorting member C3170 is arranged in the second position. . 237 and 239 correspond to the cross section taken along the line CCXIV-CCXIV in FIG.

  Here, the lower frame C3086b in the thirtieth embodiment differs from the lower frame C86b in the twenty-eighth embodiment in the structure for displacing the sorting member C3170 and the structure for interlocking the decoration member C3190 with the sorting member C3170. Except for this point, the other configurations are the same.

  As shown in FIGS. 237 to 240, in the main body C131 of the back member C3130, two linear guide grooves C3131c are extended in the vertical direction in a posture parallel to each other. These two guide grooves C3131c are arranged in such a posture that the lower side (arrow D direction side) is inclined in a direction closer to the first intermediate member C140.

  That is, the horizontal direction (arrow LR direction) position of the sorting member C3170 at the second position is closer to the intermediate member C140 (arrow L side) than the horizontal position of the sorting member C3170 at the first position. Be positioned.

  In the sorting member C3170, a total of four shafts C3171a with a pair of upper and lower pairs project from the back surface of the main body C3171. The shaft C3171a is a guided portion that is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3131c. The shaft C3171a is slid along the guide groove C3131c, so that the sorting member C3170 is in the first position and the second position. Slide displacement (linear movement) between the two.

  A pair of shafts C3171a is disposed in the left and right guide grooves C3131c. Therefore, the distribution member C3170 does not cause a change in posture due to rotation (that is, the inclination angle of the bottom surface portion C172b and the rolling portion C173 is kept constant), and the first position and the second position. The slide can be displaced between them.

  A collar CW having a diameter larger than the groove width of the guide groove C3131c is disposed at the tip of the shaft C3171a inserted through the guide groove C3131c, and the collar CW restricts the shaft C3171a from coming out of the guide groove C3131c. It is considered as a retaining stopper.

  The distribution member C3170 is defined (arranged) at the first position by the shaft c3171a coming into contact with the upper end (the end in the arrow U direction) of the guide groove C3131c and restricting the upward displacement (FIG. 237). 238), the lower stopper portion C132 comes into contact with the lower surface of the sorting member C3170, and the downward displacement is regulated, so that it is defined (arranged) at the second position (see FIGS. 239 and 240). ).

  The decorative member C3190 is formed integrally with the main body C191, and includes an arm portion C3193 that extends radially outward about the axis C192. The arm portion C3193 includes a linear guide groove C3193a that has the axis C192. It extends along the radial direction which makes the center. A shaft C3171a is slidably inserted into the guide groove C3193a.

  The center of gravity of the decorative member C3190 is eccentric to one side (on the opposite side to the sorting member C3170 across the axis C192, left side in FIG. 238) with respect to the center of rotation (axis C192). Therefore, in the no-load state, the decorative member C3190 is in a posture in which the arm portion C3193 is lifted upward (rotated counterclockwise about the axis C192 in the rear view, see FIG. 238), and the distributing member C3170 is The shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, and is thus placed in the first position (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

  On the other hand, when the sphere is received in the receiving portion C172 of the sorting member C3170, the center of gravity position of the sorting member C3170 and the decoration member C3190 as a whole is different from the rotation center (axis C192) due to the weight of the sphere. Eccentric to the side (the side on which the sorting member C3170 is disposed with respect to the axis C192, the right side in FIG. 240). That is, in a state where the sphere is received in the receiving portion C172, the sorting member C3170 is lowered along the guide groove C3131c due to the weight of the sphere, and is arranged at the second position. In addition, the decorative member C3190 is in a state where the arm portion C3193 is pushed downward by the axis C3171a and rotated clockwise around the axis C192 in the rear view (see FIG. 240).

  When the ball is discharged from the receiving portion C172 to the passage portion C144 in the second position, the decorative member C3190 is rotated counterclockwise around the axis C192 in the rear view using the eccentricity of the center of gravity position, The arm C3193 is lifted upward. Accordingly, the shaft C3171a is pushed upward by the arm portion C3193, so that the sorting member C3170 is disposed (returned) to the first position (see FIGS. 237 and 238).

  Since the sorting operation of the balls CB1 and CB2 due to the sliding displacement of the sorting member C3170 between the first position and the second position is the same as in the above-described twenty-eighth embodiment, the description thereof will be given. Omitted.

  As described above, according to the lower frame C3086b in the thirtieth embodiment, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are connected with an interval equal to or less than a predetermined amount (including a case where the interval between the two balls is in close contact with each other). Distributes (guides) the ball CB1 to the fourth passage CRt4 and distributes (guides) the ball CB2 to the fifth passage CRt5 by the distribution member C170 that is displaced to the second position by the weight of the ball CB1. On the other hand, when the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2 are connected with an interval exceeding a predetermined amount, both the spheres (the sphere CB1 and the sphere CB2) can be distributed (guided) to the fourth passage CRt4. As described above, since the guide path can be changed according to the continuous state of the balls CB1 and CB2 (whether or not the distance between the preceding ball and the following ball exceeds a predetermined amount), the interest is improved. be able to.

  Here, as in the case of the twenty-eighth embodiment, in the structure in which the sorting member C170 is rotated about the axis C192, the displacement amount of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (the position facing the third passage CRt3 and the fourth position). In order to be displaceable between the position facing the passage CRt4), the length (distance) between the shaft C192 and the receiving portion C172 needs to be increased, and the width direction (the shaft C192 and the receiving portion C172 The size of the sorting member C170 is increased in the direction in which the two are connected.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the allocating member C3170 is slid in the vertical direction, a displacement amount of the receiving portion C172 is ensured (that is, a position facing the third path CRt3 and a position facing the fourth path CRt4). The distribution member C3170 in the width direction can be reduced in size because it is not necessary to provide a portion for connecting the rotation center (axis C192) and the receiving portion C172. That is, the dimension in the width direction of the sorting member C3170 can be the length dimension (the dimension in the direction of the arrow LR) of the rolling surface of the rolling part C173.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 241, a dish member C4120 in the thirty-first embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 241 (a) is a top view of the dish member C4120 in the thirty-first embodiment, and FIG. 241 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the dish member C4120 along the CCXLIb-CCXLIb line in FIG. 241 (a). (C) is sectional drawing of the plate member C4120 in the CCXLIc-CCXLIc line | wire of Fig.241 (a).

  The dish member C4120 includes an upper bottom surface portion C4121 and a lower bottom surface portion C4122 that form the bottom surface of the passage, and an upper side wall portion C4123 and a lower side wall portion C4124 that form the side walls of the passage.

  The upper bottom surface portion C4121 is extended along the left-right direction (arrow LR direction) as a substantially linear passage (first passage CRt4001) in a top view, and in the direction close to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (arrow) (In the R direction).

  The upper side wall portion C4123 defines the passage width of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001). Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set and a plurality of spheres can be guided only in series. However, the passage width may be a dimension capable of guiding a plurality of spheres in a parallel state (a dimension larger than twice the sphere).

  The upper side wall C4123 is formed with a notch C4123a at the downstream end of the upper bottom C4121 (the first passage CRt4001), and the upper bottom C4121 (first first) is formed through the notch c4123a. The sphere can flow down from the passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

  The lower bottom surface portion C4122 extends along the front-rear direction (in the direction of the arrow FB) in a top view, and linear portions C4122a whose shapes on one end side and the other end side in the extending direction are substantially linear, and Between the pair of straight line portions C4122a, it is formed from an arc portion C4122b that is curved in an arc shape in which the outflow surface C122a side is concave in a top view. Note that the arc portion C4122b has a shape that protrudes most toward the upstream side (arrow L direction side) in the extending direction (arrow LR direction) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 at the approximate center in the front-rear direction.

  Moreover, as the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is toward the arc portion C4122b in the pair of linear portions C4122a. It is formed as a flat surface that descends downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction), and is formed substantially horizontally at the arc portion C4122b. That is, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction.

  The lower side wall portion C4124 includes an end portion on one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction (direction in which the sphere is guided) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), and a lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). ) And the passage width. Note that the passage width is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere (at least smaller than twice the diameter of the sphere, preferably smaller than 1.3 times the diameter of the sphere). It is set and a plurality of spheres can be guided only in series.

  The straight line portion C4122a of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is disposed substantially perpendicular to the upper bottom surface portion C4121 when viewed from above, and the downstream end (the end portion on the arrow R direction side) of the upper bottom surface portion C4121 and the lower bottom surface One end side in the longitudinal direction of the portion C4122 (the end portion on the arrow B direction side, the rising slope side of the straight portion C4122a) is disposed at a position adjacent to the portion C4122.

  At the position corresponding to the notch C4123a in the upper side wall C4123, the lower side wall C4124 is not formed, and as described above, from the upper bottom surface C4121 (first passage CRt4001) via the notch C4123a. The sphere can flow down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002).

  The lower side wall portion C4124 on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (the center side of the arc in the top view, the arrow R direction side) is substantially at the center in the front-rear direction of the arc portion C4122b (the position protruding most in the direction of the curved arrow L). ), A notch C124a is formed in the notch, and the sphere flows down from the lower bottom surface C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to the bottom C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 214) through the notch C124a. It is possible.

  As described above, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed of a pair of linear portions C4122a and an arc portion C4122b, and the upper bottom surface portion C4121 is formed on the rising slope side (one end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122) of the linear portion C4122a. Since the sphere flows down from the (first passage CRt4001), the sphere that has flowed down is reciprocated between one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002). Above, the sphere can flow down from the notch C124a to the bottom C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 214).

  Thus, when two balls flow from the upper bottom surface portion C4121 (first passage CRt4001) to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) with a predetermined interval therebetween, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 ( By using the reciprocating motion in the second passage CRt4002), it is possible to follow the following sphere to the preceding sphere, and to reduce the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere (to connect the spheres). .

  The arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 protrudes most in the direction corresponding to the cutout portion C124a (that is, approximately in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the arc portion C4122b (in the curved arrow L direction). The outflow surface C122a is recessed in the position), and the outflow surface C122a is a portion for allowing the ball guided through the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) to flow out to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). And formed as a concave surface that slopes downward toward the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 214).

  Therefore, after reciprocating the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the ball whose rolling speed is reduced can smoothly flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) using the outflow surface C122a. it can. That is, by using the reciprocating motion in the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002), the sphere in which the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the sphere in a continuous state) Can be discharged (flowed down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) (see FIG. 214).

  In addition, the outflow surface C122a has a concave surface width (a dimension along a rolling direction of a sphere reciprocating on the lower bottom surface part C4122, a dimension in the direction of the arrow FB) in the top view, and a notch C124a. The side closer to is formed into a larger shape.

  In addition, when the sphere is in contact with the lower side wall C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side, arrow L direction) from the notch C124a when viewed from above, the sphere rolls on the outflow surface C122a. Do (cross). That is, the ball that rolls (reciprocates) the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) is positioned farthest from the notch C124a (the top of the side of the sphere contacts the lower side wall C4124). Even when the position is rolled, the outflow surface C122a is formed up to a range overlapping with the center of the sphere in the top view (the trajectory of the top portion below the sphere when the sphere rolls on the lower bottom surface portion C4112). The rolling line crosses the outflow surface C122a).

  On the other hand, when the outflow surface C122a is recessed (formed) on the lower bottom surface portion C4122, the sphere that has flowed down to the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) is affected by the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage). CRt 4002) may flow out (flow down) to bottom surface part C142 (third passage CRt3) without reciprocating once, or before reciprocating a sufficient number of times, due to the inclination of outflow surface C122a. . That is, there is a possibility that both the spheres may flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) without decreasing the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is formed to be curved in an arc shape, and a cutout portion C124a is formed on the inner diameter side of the arc portion C4122b (center side of the arc when viewed from above, arrow R direction side). Is formed. Therefore, a centrifugal force acts on the sphere rolling on the circular arc part C4122b toward the lower side wall part C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch part C124a, and thereby, opposite to the notch part C124a. The sphere can be rolled (reciprocated) by the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) while pressing the sphere against the lower side wall portion C4124 located on the side (opposite side).

  Thereby, before the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low, the sphere can be prevented from flowing out (flowing down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3, see FIG. 214) due to the action of the inclination of the outflow surface C122a. That is, until the rolling speed of the sphere becomes sufficiently low, the sphere can be easily reciprocated along the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (second passage CRt4002) by making it easy to get over the outflow surface C122a (easier to cross). Easy to do. As a result, it can be ensured that the preceding sphere is followed by the following sphere and the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere is reduced (the spheres are linked).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242 (a), a lower frame C5086b in the thirty-second embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 242 (a) is a sectional view of the lower frame C5086b in the thirty-second embodiment and corresponds to the section taken along the line CCXXXII-CCXXXII in FIG. In FIG. 242 (a), only the cross sections of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C5400 of the lower frame C5086b are shown.

  The magnetic part C5400 is a long metal body, and a protrusion protrudes vertically downward (arrow D direction) from an end on the opposite side (arrow F direction side) to the back member C2130. Therefore, the magnetic part C5400 has a substantially L-shaped cross section. Further, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed at a position where the end on the back member C2130 side is spaced from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 Is formed linearly in the width direction (arrow FB direction).

  The magnetic part C5400 can attract the sphere using the magnetic force acting from the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130. A plurality of magnets C2300 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C5400.

  When the ball is caused to flow from the bottom surface portion C2142 (second passage CRt2002) of the first intermediate member C2140 to the rolling portion C2173 in a state where the sorting member C2170 is disposed at the second position, the upper surface of the rolling portion C2173 ( The ball that rolls on the rolling surface jumps from the downstream end of the rolling part C2173 to the upstream end of the magnetic part C5400 (see FIG. 235). That is, it is attracted to the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400. The sphere adsorbed by the magnetic part C5400 moves to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400 along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic part C5400 due to the force of the sphere caused by jumping (rolling) and the action of gravity due to the downward inclination of the magnetic part C5400. Is done. Thereby, the sphere that has flowed down along the magnetic part C5400 can be guided to the fifth passage CRt2005 (see FIG. 230).

  As described above, the protrusion of the magnetic part C5400 is disposed at a position where the end on the back member C2130 side is separated from the front of the back member C2130 by a distance larger than the radius of the sphere, and thus along the magnetic part C5400. It is suppressed that the ball | bowl and the back surface member C2130 which flow down contact | abut. Therefore, since it can suppress that a frictional force acts on a ball | bowl, the flow-down speed | rate of a ball | bowl can be made high. Further, since the sphere is not supported on the front surface of the back member C2130, it is possible to form a sphere that swings when it flows down, and the sphere may be dropped from the magnetic part C5400 (possibility of not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005). Can be high. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the behavior of the ball and enhance the interest of the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 242 (b), a lower frame C6086b in the thirty-third embodiment will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 242 (b) is a sectional view of the lower frame C6086b in the thirty-third embodiment and corresponds to the section taken along the line CCXXXII-CCXXXII of FIG. 227. In FIG. 242 (b), only the cross sections of the back member C2130, the magnet C2300, and the magnetic part C6400 of the lower frame C6086b are shown.

  The magnetic part C6400 in the thirty-third embodiment is closer to the back member C2130 as the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 faces the back member C2130 than the magnetic part C5400 in the thirty-second embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the magnetic part C5400 in the thirty-second embodiment except for the point formed as the surface to be formed.

  The sphere adsorbed on the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is brought into contact with the back member C2130 due to the effect of the inclination of the bottom surface and the magnetic force directly acting from the magnet part C2300. Accordingly, a frictional force can be applied to the sphere, and the flow speed of the sphere flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 can be reduced. Thereby, the movement time of a ball | bowl can be lengthened and the interest of a game can be heightened.

  Further, the sphere can be sandwiched between the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130, and the sphere can be prevented from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C6400.

  Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configuration in the other embodiments to form another embodiment.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the ball | bowl which flows down the ball | bowl flow-down unit 150 was decelerated by the protruding part 154, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, an adhesive member may be provided on the inner surface to increase the flow resistance of the sphere, or air may be sent into the flow path, or the flow speed of the sphere may be adjusted by magnetic force. You may do it.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed in the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the movable accessory side. The displacement regulating device 180 may be disposed on the back side of the effect member 700, and the projecting width to the back side may be changed by a pushing operation.

  In this case, by disposing the main body 183a of the operation member 183 of the displacement regulating device 180 in a state where the overhanging width is long, the displacement of the effect member 700 can be regulated. it can. On the other hand, the effect member 700 can be displaced by configuring the operation member 183 so that the insertion into the rear case 510 is released in a state where the overhang width is shortened. The displacement regulating device 180 is also displaced with the displacement. Therefore, by adding a design shape to the displacement restricting device 180 or arranging a light emitting device such as an LED, the player can visually recognize the displacement restricting device 180 and produce an effect.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the displacement regulating device 180 is caused by a manual operation has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement regulating device 180 may include a drive device, and the arrangement of the operation member 183 may be switched electrically. In this case, by controlling the displacement restricting device 180 to be in the restriction release state prior to the initial operation after the power is turned on, the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is prevented from starting to be displaced while the displacement restricting device 180 remains in the restricted state. can do. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the operation member 183 from being overloaded.

  Further, a cushioning material having a high cushioning property may be disposed around the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183. In addition, a detection sensor that can detect the arrangement of the operation member 183 is provided without driving the displacement restricting device 180, and it is determined by the detection sensor that the displacement restricting device 180 is in a restricted state. Alternatively, it may be controlled not to start driving of the enlargement / reduction unit 600.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is disposed on the back side of the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be disposed on at least one of the upper and lower sides of the back case 510, may be disposed on at least one of the left and right sides of the back case 510, or a combination thereof.

  For example, in order to maintain the arrangement of the production member 700, it is sufficient to prevent the arrangement change of the lower arm member 630. Therefore, a recess is provided on the upper surface of the lower arm member 630 in the production standby state, and the upper side of the back case 510 is provided. When the cylindrical portion 183d of the operation member 183 is extended, the cylindrical portion 183d is configured to engage with a recess provided in the lower arm member 630, thereby preventing the lower arm member 630 from changing in the left-right direction. Can do.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 is provided as an example of a device that regulates the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 arranged on the upper side of the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, by providing a device for restricting (limiting) the displacement of the granular member 320 (a member that can freely displace the internal space IE1) of the injection device 400, the granular member 320 displaces the internal space IE1 at the time of shipment. By doing so, the partition member 310 may be rubbed against the wall surface, and the granular member 320 may be prevented from being cracked or the partition member 310 being scratched.

  For example, it is possible to prevent the granular member 320 from displacing the internal space IE1 beyond the lid member 480 by shipping the lid member 480 in a state where the lid member 480 is disposed at the displacement end position on the entry side (effect standby state). Therefore, the range of the partition member 310 that can contact the granular member 320 at the time of shipment can be limited, and the amount of displacement of the granular member 320 can be suppressed. it can.

  As another example, the granular member 320 is disposed on the lower support member 163 of the light guide plate effecting unit 160, is configured to be able to project into the internal space IE1 of the partition member 310, and is disposed in the internal space IE1 in a projecting state. You may provide the overhang | projection member comprised so that a displacement of this can be restrict | limited.

  This overhanging member is configured to be able to be pushed in from the front side of the lower support member 163 (the front side of the game board 13), and configured to switch between the overhanging state and the non-extending state each time the pushing operation is performed. After installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store, the projecting member can be operated from the front side by opening the front frame 14, so that the operability of the projecting member can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of the state change of the overhang member is not limited at all. For example, the state may be changed by a latch mechanism similarly to the displacement regulating device 180, or the state may be changed by engagement or disengagement between the claws.

  As another example, the arrangement of the granular member 320 may be maintained by shipping the partition member 310 with the internal pressure increased. In this case, by installing the pachinko machine 10 in the gaming machine store and lowering the air pressure in the partition member 310 before operating, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made free.

  As another example, a ferromagnetic metal powder may be mixed with the resin used as the material of the granular member 320, and a magnet may be disposed near the lower end of the partition member 310 at the time of shipment. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning of the granular member 320 can be maintained with the magnetic force of a magnet at the time of shipment. On the other hand, at the time of operation, the arrangement of the granular member 320 can be made free by removing this magnet.

  In addition, a magnet is not restricted to what needs to be removed at the time of operation. For example, a magnet may be disposed on a part of another movable accessory, and as an example, a magnet may be disposed on the lid member 480.

  In the aspect in which the ferromagnetic metal powder is mixed with the granular member 320, for example, after the firing effect is performed, an operation is performed so as to generate a magnetic force in the vicinity of the partition member 310 (for example, the magnet is brought close to the partition member 310). By disposing the actuating effect item that operates, it is possible to include an effect mode in which the granular member 320 is stopped in the air (visualized as if it is floating).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the displacement regulating device 180 that regulates the displacement of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is fixed to the back case 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an insertion hole formed on the same straight line as the central axis of the restricted hole 657 in a state where the transmission gear 650 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 is disposed at a predetermined terminal position is formed in the rear case 510. The metal rod or resin rod is inserted into the regulated hole 657 through the insertion hole, fixed with tape or the like, and after arriving at the game machine store, the store clerk at the game machine store pulls out the metal rod or resin rod. The enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be configured to be displaceable.

  On the other hand, with this method, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 may become dirty with the fixing tape, and it is not possible to discard the metal bar or the resin bar for delivery to other stores of the pachinko machine 10 and store it. It becomes necessary to do.

  In addition, if the storage of metal bars or resin bars is entrusted to each game machine store, the possibility of loss increases, and the quality of the pachinko machine 10 is ensured when delivered to other stores without metal bars or resin bars. It may not be possible. It can also be recognized that an improvement on this viewpoint is the displacement regulating device 180 fastened and fixed to the back case 510.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 and the front-rear width of the left and right central part 312b of the curved plate part 312 and the rear partition lower part 314 are approximately the same has been described. is not. For example, the front-rear width between the left and right central part 312b and the back partition lower part 314 may be configured to be as narrow as the front and rear width between the left and right part 312a and the back partition lower part 314. In this case, the movement resistance of the granular member 320 can be increased on the lower side of the internal space IE1 regardless of the left and right positions, so that the momentum of the granular member 320 to be injected can be reduced. The probability that the granular member 320 is damaged or damaged by the collision can be reduced.

  Further, for example, the front-rear width of the left and right portions 312a and the rear partition lower portion 314 may be increased to the same extent as the front-rear width of the internal space IE1. In this case, the granular member 320 can be caused to enter the internal space IE1 without reducing the momentum of the granular member 320 to be ejected.

  Further, the front-rear width of the internal space IE1 need not be constant. For example, it is good also as a shape which tapers as it goes to the moving direction (upper side) of the injected granular member 320. FIG. In this case, since the momentum of the granular member 320 can be gradually reduced, it can be easily avoided that an excessive load is locally generated in the partition member 310. Furthermore, by moving the tapering direction toward the front side, the scattered granular member 320 can be easily moved toward the front side.

  Further, for example, a knob-like portion that protrudes in a manner that protrudes toward the back side may be provided at a part of the front plate portion 311 where the injected granular member 320 is predicted to reach together. good. This knob-shaped portion may be configured such that another member is disposed and fixed on the back surface of the front plate portion 311, or gold so that a part of the front plate portion 311 can be projected to the back side. You may comprise so that a convex part may be provided in a type | mold.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is configured in the shape of a soccer ball has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a spherical shape, a rugby ball shape, or a star shape (a shape in which protrusions are three-dimensionally formed) may be used. Since it is possible to create a gap between the members by configuring the members with a certain size, the granular member 320 can be scattered violently when the firing effect is executed.

  In the first embodiment, the injection device 400 is arranged below the back side of the light guide plate 161 and fires the granular member 320 diagonally forward and upward. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the arrangement of the injection device 400 may be the left and right positions of the light guide plate 161 or the upper position. Even in this case, it is possible to execute an effect of firing the granular member 320 diagonally forward. In addition, when arrange | positioning the injection apparatus 400 in an upper position, it is preferable to add the apparatus which lifts the granular member 320 to an effect stand-by position.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the granular member 320 is formed from a single-color (in this embodiment, red) resin member has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one granular member 320 may be configured by two-color molding or by combining two members of different colors. In this case, the appearance at the time of deposition can be devised by color-coding in consideration of the position of the center of gravity. For example, by considering the position of the center of gravity and changing the color at the horizontal position in the stable posture of the granular member 320, the color layer can be visually recognized when the granular member 320 is deposited.

  The number of granular members 320 is not limited and may be one. For example, a member having the same size as that of the collision member 420 may be adopted as the granular member 320 and a concave curved shape similar to the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 may be formed on the outer surface. This changes the way the granular member 320 jumps and looks when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape well fitted and when the firing effect is executed with the curved shape not fitted. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the granular member 320 is arranged to be able to fly in the internal space IE1 and gathers on the collision member 420 by gravity. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an urging unit that urges the granular member 320 toward the initial position side (the position side in the effect standby state) is provided, and the granular member 320 is returned to the initial position side by the urging force of the urging unit. May be. In this case, it can be avoided that the initial position side of the granular member 320 is limited to the lower side.

  Examples of the urging means include a spring, a stretchable rubber-like member, a net-like member whose end is fixedly arranged, an elastic sheet that partially covers the path of the granular member 320, and the like.

  The relationship between the biasing means and the granular member 320 is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the granular member 320 and the biasing means are bonded may be used, or the bonded member is not separated but not separated, and a part of the biasing means is disposed inside the granular member 320 and is integrated. The biasing means may be supported in the internal space IE1 while being distant from the granular member 320.

  Further, the urging means is not limited to an object that can come into contact with the granular member 320. For example, an atmospheric pressure adjusting means for adjusting the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 may be adopted in the same manner as the gravity acts on the granular member 320 in the first embodiment. In this case, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be affected by increasing or decreasing the pressure in the internal space IE1.

  For example, when the atmospheric pressure of the internal space IE1 is increased in such a manner that gas is injected into the internal space IE1 from above, the granular member 320 can be easily maintained below the internal space IE1, and conversely the upper side of the internal space IE1. When the pressure in the internal space IE1 is lowered in a manner in which gas is extracted from the granular member 320, the granular member 320 can be displaced (floating displacement) toward the upper side of the internal space IE1. Further, the direction of gas injection and the direction of gas extraction are not limited to the upper side, but can be set to any side, up, down, left, and right.

  In addition, when producing a pressure change, it is preferable to block the deformed through portion 315. It is possible to easily give the lid member 480 the function of closing the deformed through portion 315. For example, when a deformable member (for example, a sponge-like member or a low-friction rubber-like member) that is flexible, thin and highly deformable is attached to the lid member 480 and the lid member 480 enters the deformed through portion 315, the lid The gap between the member 480 and the deformed through portion 315 may be filled with a deformable member. Thereby, according to the displacement with respect to the unusual penetration part 315 of the cover member 480, the irregular penetration part 315 can be obstruct | occluded or open | released.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is formed to be along a straight line has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the surface on the side facing the transmission protrusion 446 of the right end portion may be formed as a curved surface along the displacement locus of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440. In this case, not only when the transmission protrusion 446 is disposed at the lower end position, the linear motion member 410 can be maintained at the displacement lower end position while contacting the curved surface, so the coil spring SP1. It is possible to shift to the launch state while maintaining the urging force of the maximum.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the left and right central portions of the collision member 420 are configured to have an upwardly curved shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be a slope with the center pointed down and down in the left-right direction, or a dormitory shape. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the granular member 320 to pass through the sharpness of the central portion in the left-right direction as compared with the curved shape. Therefore, the deviation of the left and right arrangement of the granular member 320 can be increased.

  Further, for example, a planar shape orthogonal to the displacement direction may be used, or a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward may be used. In this case, unlike the first embodiment, it is possible to configure a displacement mode in which the granular member 320 is displaced in a lump until it collides with the inner wall of the partition member 310 and is separated by collision.

  In addition, when changing the shape of the collision member 420, it is preferable to change the shape of the cover member 480 according to it. For example, when the upper surface of the collision member 420 is configured with a curved shape in which the left and right central portions are recessed downward, the advancing and retracting portion 481 of the lid member 480 is preferably configured with a curved shape with the left and right central portions protruding upward. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the granular member 320 and the lid member 480.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the curved plate portion 421 of the collision member 420 is configured to be flat when viewed from the side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower half may protrude and be bent in a side view. In this case, the dense positions of the granular members 320 can be brought closer to the upper half side.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the size of the partition member 310 in the front view is configured to be approximately the same as the size of the light guide plate 161 has been described. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the size of the partition member 310 when viewed from the front is designed to be about the size or larger than the size of the visual recognition area in which the player can visually recognize the display within the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Anyway. Thereby, since the occurrence of a situation where the edge portion of the partition member 310 is visually recognized by being superimposed on the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be avoided, the visibility of the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved. it can.

  In the said 1st Embodiment, although the single collision member 420 was employ | adopted as a member which gives load with respect to the granular member 320, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, a plurality of collision members 420 arranged so as to be able to apply a load to the granular member 320 may be adopted, and may be cooperatively operated or individually operated by separate driving devices.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the linear motion member 410 abuts on the collision member 420 and the front transmission member 440 does not abut on the collision member 420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a column portion protruding from the plate portion 422 to the back side may pass through the intermediate member 401 and be configured to contact the front transmission member 440. In this case, the contact portion of the front transmission member 440 with the pillar portion is unevenly formed in such a manner that the radial length is switched according to the angular arrangement, so that the arrangement of the pillar portion is accompanied with the rotation of the front transmission member 440. Can be changed. Using this, the collision member 420 may be slightly displaced up and down, and the granular member 320 may be vibrated (minute displacement).

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lid member 480 enters the partition member 310 by rotational displacement has been described, but the displacement mode of the lid member 480 is not limited at all, and is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, you may approach by the slide displacement along a linear direction. In this case, the shape of the deformed through portion 315 can be easily formed.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the extended board part 485 arrange | positioned at the right and left of the cover member 480 was formed in the shape dented toward the back side, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the recess may not be formed. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the granular member 320 from flowing into the collision member 420 from the left and right.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the granular member 320 is separated from the lid member 480 in the effect standby state of the injection device 400, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a protrusion that protrudes from the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the lid member 480 toward the inner diameter side may be formed, and the protrusion may be configured to be able to contact the granular member 320. In this case, when the granular member 320 is locally deposited, the granular member 320 can be destroyed by pushing the granular member 320 by the protruding portion and moving the lid member 480 toward the entry side. . Thereby, the arrangement of the granular members 320 can be made uniform.

  The shape of the protrusion of the lid member 480 is not limited at all. For example, a plurality of protrusions may be scattered. In this case, regardless of the position at which the granular member 320 is deposited, the protrusion can be brought into contact with the granular member 320 to be deposited, and the deposition of the granular member 320 can be destroyed.

  Alternatively, the protrusions 482 may be configured as a pair of protrusions that start from the left and right central portion of the approaching front end portion and are inclined to both the left and right sides toward the retreating front end portion of the advance / retreat portion 481. . In this case, with the displacement of the entry side of the lid member 480, a load in a direction of pushing the granular member 320 toward the left and right outer sides can be applied to the granular member 320.

  Further, the direction of the ridge is not limited to this. For example, the slope may be reversed, the protrusions may be formed along a single inclination direction instead of a pair of inclination directions, or may be a combination of protrusions having different inclination degrees, There may be a ridge without a ridge (a ridge extending on a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis or a ridge extending on a plane parallel (or overlapping) with the rotation axis). The number of ridges is not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily set.

  In addition, the protrusion length of a protrusion part is not limited at all. For example, the protruding tip may protrude until it reaches a circle having the same diameter as the rotation axis of the lid member 480, or the protruding length of the lid member 480 from the advance / retreat portion 481 is constant. Also good. In the latter case, the surface connecting the projecting tips of the projecting portions has a shape along the lower surface (inner diameter side surface) of the advancing / retreating portion 481, so that the same effects as those described above can be obtained as the effects of the shape of the lid member 480. It can be played by the part.

  The operation timing of the protrusion when the protrusion is formed on the lid member 480 is not limited to when the granular member 320 stops and the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side. For example, in a state where the granular member 320 is located below the lid member 480, the drive motor MT1 is rotated in the forward and reverse directions in the vicinity of the state where the front transmission member 440 has rotated 66 degrees in the forward rotation direction with reference to the effect standby state. By rotating (for example, reciprocating between 56 degrees and 76 degrees), the linear motion member 410 and the collision member 420 can be displaced up and down little by little, and the granular member 320 riding on the collision member 420 is obtained. Can be displaced vertically.

  Since the granular member 320 is not fixed to the collision member 420, the granular member 320 is flipped up by the vertical displacement of the collision member 420 and can collide with the protruding portion of the lid member 480. Due to this collision, the rearrangement of the granular member 320 can be executed, and the accumulation of the granular member 320 can be disrupted.

  In addition, when the collision member 420 jumps up (displaces upward) the granular member 320, the lid member 480 is displaced toward the entry side, so that it is easy to apply a load to the granular member 320 via the protruding portion. be able to.

  Note that the forward / reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 may be controlled so that the driving force is reversed in the forward / reverse direction, or the forward rotation may be generated with a short time interval. In this case, the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is displaced in the reverse rotation direction via the linear motion member 410 by the urging force of the coil spring SP1, so that the reverse rotation of the drive motor MT1 can be caused.

  In the first embodiment, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the advance / retreat portion 481 of the lid member 480 is formed in a shape along the same plane on the left and right, so that the lid member corresponds to the shape of the lid member 480. Although the case where the space | interval of 480 and the curved board part 312 changes was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the curved plate portion 312 disposed opposite to the lid member 480 is configured to have an uneven shape (wave shape) instead of a flat surface, and the lid member is close to the relative relationship between the shape of the lid member 480 and the shape of the curved plate portion 312. You may comprise so that the space | interval of 480 and the curved board part 312 may change. Moreover, you may comprise so that the entrance side edge part of the advance / retreat part 481 of the cover member 480 may be formed in parallel with the axis line of the rotating shaft O1.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the contact area between the transmission arm member 470 and the left cover member 489 is ensured by changing the inclination angle of the contact surfaces 489a to 489c of the left cover member 489 has been described. This is not a limitation. For example, a roller member whose posture can be changed may be provided on the transmission protrusion 473 of the transmission arm member 470, and the contact area with the inner surface of the left cover member 489 may be ensured by changing the posture of the roller member. In this case, the inner wall of the left cover member 489 can be formed as a simple through hole.

  In the first embodiment, the driving force of the drive motor MT1 is transmitted via the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460, and a plurality of members (linear motion member 410, collision member 420, contact member 430, transmission arm) are transmitted. In the situation where the member 470 and the lid member 480) are displaced, the case where the displacement timing is devised so as not to displace all the members at the same time has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, there may be a timing for displacing all of the plurality of members by the driving force of the drive motor MT1. In this case, the employed drive motor MT1 may be slightly enlarged.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted by the front transmission member 440 coming into contact with the linear motion member 410 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when at least a part of the transmission protrusion 446 of the front transmission member 440 is made of a magnetic material and the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410 is made of a magnetic material, A load can be transmitted to the linear motion member 410 in a state where the transmission member 440 and the linear motion member 410 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, the magnetic material of the magnetic pole that generates an attractive force between the protrusion 414 is disposed in the circumferential half of the transmission protrusion 446 that faces the protrusion 414 of the linear motion member 410. On the other hand, a magnetic material of a magnetic pole that generates a repulsive force is provided between the opposite half of the circumference and the protruding portion 414, so that the repulsive force causes the linear motion member 410 to move to the lower end position. Therefore, the load at the start of contact between the linear motion member 410 and the contact member 430 can be reduced.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the driving force is transmitted at two positions, that is, the groove forming portion 442 formed on the front surface of the front transmission member 440 and the groove forming portion 462 formed on the rear surface of the rear transmission member 460. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a groove may be formed on at least one circumferential surface of the front transmission member 440 or the rear transmission member 460, and drive force transmission may be performed through the groove to increase the number of transmission targets of the drive force.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which it is unclear whether or not it is time to reversely rotate the front transmission member 440 due to detection by the detection sensor SC4. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in addition to the detection sensor SC4, a detection sensor for detecting the arrangement of the linear motion member 410 or the collision member 420 is provided, and the detection result of the detection sensor and the detection sensor SC4 determines the reverse rotation of the front transmission member 440. You may determine whether it is possible. As a result, it is possible to determine whether or not the launch state has been passed by driving in the forward rotation direction, so reverse rotation is possible if the launch state has not been reached, and reverse rotation is not possible if the launch state has been exceeded. It can be determined that it is possible.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 are rotationally displaced has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, at least one of the front transmission member 440 and the rear transmission member 460 may be displaced by a displacement other than rotation (for example, a linear slide).

  In the first embodiment, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the effect member 700 is changed up and down so as to prevent inconvenience related to the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 toward the collective arrangement state. Although the case where it was comprised was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this.

  For example, by changing the shape of the extended claw portion 734, the start timing of the radial expansion displacement is higher than that of the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760. The design member 760 may be configured to be faster. Accordingly, the lower expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are balanced with the fact that the start of displacement is accelerated by their own weight, and for the player, the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 are simultaneously provided in all directions. It can appear as if the displacement has started.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which a load is generated in the radial direction of a circle around the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730 by bringing the rotating plate 730 into contact with the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. It is not limited. For example, a spring member that applies an urging force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 may be provided, and the urging force may be applied to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, or a magnet may be arranged to apply a magnetic force to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740. good.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the rotating plate 730 is used as both a means for transmitting a load to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a means for applying a load to the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and a means for displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 may be provided separately.

  In the first embodiment, when the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced toward the collective arrangement state, the first guided protrusion 743b receives a load first and is radially outward from the first guided protrusion 743b. Although the case where the 2nd guided protrusion 744b arrange | positioned receives a load later was demonstrated, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, the shape of the extended claw portion 734 of the rotating plate 730 may be configured so that the order is reversed, and load transmission to the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b occurs simultaneously. You may comprise as follows.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 includes two protrusions, the first guided protrusion 743b and the second guided protrusion 744b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one projecting portion may be configured to project obliquely with respect to the rotation axis of the rotating plate 730. In this case, in addition to the function of changing the arrangement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740, a function of generating a load for adjusting the posture of the shielding design member 760 can be generated in one protrusion.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the extended claw portion 734 arranged on the outer circumference is configured to assist the displacement of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 toward the collective arrangement state. It is not limited. For example, a projecting portion is formed on the outer circumference of the rotating plate 730, and the first guided protrusion 743b can be pushed outward in the radial direction by the projecting portion, thereby moving the telescopic displacement member 740 to the discrete state side. The directed displacement can be assisted.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the lower arm member 630 suppresses the change in posture of the effect member 700 at the lower end position of the effect member and loosens the degree of change in the posture of the effect member 700 allowed in the upper and lower intermediate positions has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may comprise so that the tolerance of the attitude | position change of the production | presentation member 700 may become large, so that it goes to a displacement lower end position.

  Moreover, although the degree of the posture change is configured by increasing / decreasing the generation position of the acting force with respect to the effect member 700, it is not limited to this. For example, you may comprise by increase / decrease in the generation area of action force.

  That is, the contact area between the arcuate hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 may be configured to be variable. For example, since the thickness (hole depth) of the arc-shaped hole 634 can be changed by changing the thickness of the tip of the lower arm member 630 for each part, the arc-shaped hole 634 and the auxiliary protrusion 712 The contact area of can be changed.

  The degree of the posture change of the effect member 700 is not specified only by the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. For example, unevenness may be provided on the front surface of the main body member 601 disposed to face the pressing member PC1 of the lower arm member 630 or the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 so that the distance from the pressing member PC1 is changed. good. In this case, in the process of displacement of the lower arm member 630, the posture change of the effect member 700 is easily allowed at the front surface of the main body member 601 and at the portion where the distance between the sliding portion 612a of the front cover 610 and the pressing member PC1 is wide. Therefore, it is easy to suppress the posture change in the portion where the interval is narrow. Moreover, you may comprise so that an space | interval may become narrow gradually as the production member 700 approaches a descent | fall end.

  In the first embodiment, the case has been described in which the configuration at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 is not changed, but the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a resistance increasing / decreasing device capable of increasing / decreasing the displacement resistance of the relative displacement between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700 may be provided at the connection position between the lower arm member 630 and the effect member 700. The resistance increasing / decreasing device may be a brake device capable of increasing / decreasing frictional resistance, a device for increasing / decreasing displacement resistance by magnetic force, or a device for projecting the displacement of the lower arm member 630 to a position where it can be mechanically regulated. . In the case of a device using magnetic force, it is easily configured by disposing a magnetic body in a portion (for example, an auxiliary arm portion in which the arc-shaped hole 634 is formed) that is arranged close to the tip side portion of the lower arm member 630. be able to.

  In the first embodiment, as the arrangement member 700 moves downward, a large displacement is allowed as the displacement in the expansion direction, and the vertical position of the production member 700 is fixed, and then the production member 700 is expanded in the expansion direction. Although the case where displacement occurs has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may control so that the displacement of an expansion direction may arise in the middle of the displacement of the up-down direction of the production member 700. FIG. In this case, the lower arm member 630 is moved left and right by displacing the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 and the shielding design member 760 in a direction in which the effect member 700 is reduced (displaced radially inward) while the effect member 700 is displaced downward. The effect of changing from a long posture to a vertically long posture can be offset, and a change in the posture of the effect member 700 in the forward tilt direction can be suppressed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the effect member 700 is displaced up and down has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be displaced back and forth. In this case, an opening is provided in the center portion of the center frame 86, the effect members 700 project to the front side of the center frame 86 in a collective arrangement state, and the state changes to a discrete state on the front side of the center frame 86. You may comprise so that it may change to a bigger state.

  In this case, in order to avoid a collision between the glass unit 16 and the effect member 700, it is preferable to open an opening in the front side portion of the center frame 86 of the glass unit 16. That is, it is preferable to provide a second-layer glass unit that covers the front side of the glass unit 16 separately from the glass unit 16 that covers the front surface of the game area. In addition, the second layer glass unit is inclined from the front and rear positions similar to the lower end of the glass unit 16 toward the front as it goes upward, from the viewpoint of maintaining the size of the upper plate 17. Is preferable.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the posture of the shielding design member 760 and the tip adjustment member 744 is easily inclined depending on the positional relationship of the second long member 743 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a biasing means such as a spring that generates a biasing force is disposed between the second long member 743 and the tip adjustment member 744, and the posture of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 is changed by the biasing force. You may comprise so that it may change. In this case, since the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be intentionally formed, the effect of the posture inclination of the tip adjustment member 744 and the shielding design member 760 can be easily achieved.

  Although the case where the cable tube is wound around the wiring DK2 has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a cable tube may be wound around the electric wiring DK1. In particular, it is possible to prevent the main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 and the electric wiring DK1 from rubbing by winding the cable tube around a portion disposed on the upper side of the base end side through hole 635a.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the wiring arm member 870 is displaced along the shape of the guide recess 886 in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a driving device such as a solenoid for changing the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 may be provided. By executing the operation control of the driving device based on the detection of the position of the vertical slide member 820, the arrangement of the wiring arm member 870 can be appropriately changed.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is temporarily fastened by being sandwiched between the narrowed portions 871a of the wiring arm member 870 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electric wiring DK2 may be fixed to the wiring arm member 870 with a fixture such as a binding band, or the displacement direction of the electric wiring DK2 may be limited.

  Further, the fastening position of the electrical wiring DK2 can be arbitrarily set. For example, in the electrical wiring DK2 disposed through the connection position between the wiring arm member 870 and the vertical slide member 820, a fastening position (for example, the throttle portion 871a) may be provided closer to the wiring arm member 870 than the connection position. The fastening position may be provided closer to the longitudinal slide member 820 than the connection position.

  Further, the means for fastening the electric wiring DK2 is not limited to use for the electric wiring DK2. For example, the electric wiring DK1 of the enlargement / reduction unit 600 may be used. That is, the width of a part of the placement portion 635 where the electrical wiring DK1 is disposed may be narrowed so that the displacement is limited by sandwiching the electrical wiring DK1, or the inside of the placement portion 635 Alternatively, the electrical wiring DK1 may be temporarily fastened with a fixture such as a binding band at a position upstream or downstream of the placement portion 635 as the wiring path of the electrical wiring DK1.

  In this case, the target to which the electrical wiring DK1 is temporarily secured may be the lower arm member 630 including the placement portion 635 or the effect member 700 disposed on the distal end side (one end side) of the lower arm member 630. The main body member 601 and the front cover member 610 disposed on the base end side (the other end side) of the lower arm member 630 may be used, or the rear case 510 to which the main body member 601 is fastened and fixed may be used.

  In the first embodiment, in the displacement rotating unit 800, the wiring arm member 870 is displaced in the direction (front-rear direction) in which the wiring arm member 870 approaches and moves away from the upper, lower, left, and right planes in association with the horizontal slide member 840 being displaced on the upper, lower, left, and right planes. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the displacement direction of the lateral slide member 840 is on the front / rear / left / right plane, it is naturally possible to displace the wiring arm member 870 in the up / down direction. The direction may be inclined and displaced.

  In the first embodiment, the relationship between the small-diameter pinion 861a and the large-diameter pinion 861b in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the magnitude relationship may be reversed, and the small diameter pinion 861a and the large diameter pinion 861b may be configured to have the same diameter.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the electrical wiring DK2 is displaced spirally in the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b in the displacement rotating unit 800 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of arm members whose postures can be changed in accordance with the vertical displacement of the vertical slide member 820 are arranged according to the arrangement of the upper winding part DK2a and the lower winding part DK2b, and electric wiring is passed through these arm members. Thus, the arrangement of the electric wiring may be changeable by changing the posture of the arm member.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 are integrally displaced in the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the vertical slide member 820 and the wiring arm member 870 may be disposed apart from each other.

  In this case, by disposing a driving device such as a solenoid that displaces the wiring arm member 870, the wiring arm member 870 can be displaced even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. Therefore, for example, when the wing-shaped member 854 is rotationally displaced, the wiring arm member 870 is further separated from the vertical slide member 820 to displace the wiring arm member 870 when necessary even when the vertical slide member 820 is stopped. The drive can be controlled as described above.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the state change of the expansion member 600 of the expansion / reduction unit 600 to the extended state or the expansion state occurs in the production standby state of the displacement rotation unit 800 has been described. Absent. For example, when the wing member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800 having the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to the effect member 700 is disposed in the gap between the shielding design members 760 of the effect member 700 in a discrete state, the effect member 700 May be configured to be changeable to an enlarged state.

  In this case, it is possible to avoid a collision between the effect member 700 and the displacement rotation unit 800, and to avoid a state change of the effect member 700 from the arrangement of the displacement rotation unit 800. In this case, it is preferable to add a detection sensor for detecting the vertical arrangement of the wing member 854 of the displacement rotation unit 800.

  In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured from the same shape as that of the guide route DL1 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed as a flow path that is bent with a longer left-right width than the guide path DL1, may be bent in the front-rear direction, or may be formed as a flow path that extends vertically without being bent. .

  In the first embodiment, the case where the intermediate flow path LM1 is configured as a path for flowing down the ball that has entered the second winning port 640 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be used as a path of a ball that has entered the general winning opening 63, may be used as a path of a ball that has entered the specific winning opening 65a, or may be shared. good. Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be configured as a path of a sphere that has passed through the out port 71.

  In addition, since the arrangement of the winning ports 63, 64, 640, 65 is set at an arbitrary position in the game area, the arrangement of the intermediate flow path LM1 can also be set arbitrarily. For example, the intermediate flow path LM1 may be arranged on the left side of the game area.

  Further, the intermediate flow path LM1 is not limited to the case where it is arranged on the back side of the game area. For example, it may be arranged side by side on the left and right of the gaming area, or may be arranged on the front side of the gaming area (such as inside the glass unit 16). Even in this case, it is preferable that the intermediate flow path LM1 includes a section that flows down along a path in a front view of a sphere that flows down the game area.

  Further, for the purpose of putting the ball flowing down the intermediate flow path LM1 into the player's field of view, it is sufficient that the intermediate flow path LM1 is formed so as to approach the left and right center side of the game area. Therefore, a route that does not reach the inside of the center frame 86 in front view may be used.

  Although the said 1st Embodiment demonstrated the case where the electrical decoration board | substrate of the horizontal board | substrate unit 166 was arrange | positioned with the attitude | position in which a thickness direction corresponds with an up-down direction, it does not necessarily restrict to this. For example, like the hemispherical illumination device 613, the electric decoration board may be arranged to be inclined with respect to the vertical direction.

  Further, the entire range of the electric decoration board is not limited to the one hidden by the first decorative member 171. For example, a part of the illumination board may not be shielded, and the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED may be directly visible.

  In the third embodiment, the case where the displacement start timing of the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is changed by changing the shape of the guide hole 733 is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by forming the shape of the guide hole 733 in a step shape, a section in which the expansion / contraction displacement member 740 is displaced and a section in which it is stopped may be alternately generated.

  Further, by holding the guide holes 733 formed in a staircase shape in a part of the guide holes 733, the shielding design member 760 can be displaced so as to approach or come into contact with different displacement trajectories and different displacement timings.

  In the sixth embodiment, the case has been described in which the first light irradiation device 6330 and the second light irradiation device 6340 arranged on the left and right of the launch effect unit 6300 include a plurality of illumination boards. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the horizontal substrate unit 166 and the vertical substrate unit 167 of the light guide plate effect unit 160 may be configured by a plurality of electrical decoration substrates. Further, the portion corresponding to the laterally long groove portion 171a (the left and right long portion) of the decoration means 170 is configured to have good light transmission, and the laterally long groove portion 171a is adopted as an intersecting position of a plurality of electrical decoration boards, You may comprise so that light can be visually recognized through the laterally long groove part 171a by arrange | positioning light emission means, such as LED.

  Moreover, from the viewpoint of increasing the light irradiation direction, the present invention is not limited to the case where a plurality of hard electrical decoration boards are used. For example, light emitting means such as LEDs may be arranged on a flexible substrate (flexible printed circuit board). In this case, the surface of the flexible substrate can be directed in various directions by winding the flexible substrate or fixing the flexible substrate. Thereby, the optical axis of light emission means, such as LED arrange | positioned on the surface of a flexible substrate, can be pointed in various directions, and the irradiation direction of light can be increased. In this case, it can be constituted by a single substrate.

  In each of the above embodiments, the configuration may be omitted (in the case of a plurality, the number of components is reduced) regardless of whether the configuration is singular or plural. Similarly, the number of configurations may be increased.

  For example, in each of the embodiments described above, the case where the protrusions A133b are formed at two locations of the key device A130 has been described. However, the number (number of formations) of the protrusions A133b may be reduced to 1. Similarly, in each of the above embodiments, the case where one key device A130 is disposed in the main control device A110 has been described. However, the number (arrangement number) of the key devices A130 may be increased to 2 or more. .

  In each of the above embodiments, the arrangement position of each component with respect to another component, the arrangement direction (orientation, posture, phase) with respect to the other component of each component, or the arrangement based on the other component of each component The order may be changed. The order of arrangement may be changed for all the configurations, or only a part of the configurations may be replaced. That is, the arrangement position, arrangement direction, and arrangement order of each component are arbitrary.

  For example, in each of the above embodiments, the opening A260 (key device A130) is one side (the first connection wall A220 side) from the center in the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall A210 (second region). However, the opening A260 (key device A130) may be arranged at the center in the longitudinal direction of the operation wall A210 (second region), and the opening A260 (second region) of the operation wall A210 (second region) may be arranged. You may arrange | position in the longitudinal direction other side (3rd connection wall part A240 side).

  Further, for example, in each of the embodiments described above, the direction in which the key device A130 (covering portion A270) connects the pair of protrusions A133b (protrusion A271b) is the longitudinal direction (arrow L) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region). , R direction) has been described with respect to the arrangement direction (posture, phase) orthogonal to the direction, the direction connecting the pair of projections A133b (projection A271b) is the operation wall A210 ( The arrangement direction (posture, phase) parallel to the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the second region) and the longitudinal direction (arrow L, R direction) of the operation wall portion A210 (second region) are predetermined. The key device A130 (covering portion A270) may be arranged in an arrangement direction (posture, phase) having an angle of (an angle greater than 0 ° and smaller than 90 °).

  Further, for example, in each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A260 (covering portion A270), the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening AOP1 are arranged in order from the side close to the first connection wall portion A220 has been described. For example, the order in which the openings AOP1, the openings A250 (guide walls A251), and the openings A260 (covering parts A270) are arranged in order from the side closer to the first connection wall part A220 is reversed. The order of arrangement of only a part may be changed (for example, the order of arrangement in which the opening AOP1 is located between the opening A250 (guide wall A251) and the opening A260 (covering part A270) is illustrated. )

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is provided to protrude from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used as the operation wall portion A210), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271. You may provide in the back side (arrow B direction side) of operation wall part A210.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening A250 is formed in the operation wall portion A210 and the opening A260 is formed in the covering portion A270 (end surface wall portion A272) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. It may be formed in the part. That is, it is not necessary to be formed in a part lowered in the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100. As other parts, for example, parts forming the outer surface of the substrate box A100, A2100, A3100, A4100, that is, the front wall part A201, the upper wall part A202, the lower wall part A203, the left wall part of the box covers A200, A3200. Examples include A204 or the right wall portion A205, the back wall portion A301, the upper wall portion A302, the lower wall portion A303, the left wall portion A304, or the right wall portion A305 of the box base A300. Similarly, as other parts, for example, the first connection wall part A220, the second connection wall part A230, or the third connection wall part A240 is exemplified.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the covering portion A270 is provided to protrude from the front surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the operation wall portion A210 is formed at the same height as the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 (that is, the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 are also used as the operation wall portion A210), and the configuration corresponding to the peripheral wall portion A271. You may provide in the back side (arrow B direction side) of operation wall part A210.

  In this case, switch device A120 should just extend the length dimension of operation part A122 to the position projected from the front (surface by the arrow F direction) of operation wall part A210. In addition, it is preferable to provide the guide wall A251 also on the back surface (surface on the arrow B direction side) of the operation wall portion A210 with the extension of the length of the operation portion A122.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a concave portion is formed on the outer surface (front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200, and the portion forming the concave bottom surface of the concave portion is the operation wall portion A210 (that is, from the front wall portion A201). The operation wall portion A210 is positioned at a lower position (main control device A110 side), but is not necessarily limited to this, and is not necessarily limited to the outer surface (for example, the front surface) of the box covers A200 and A3200. It is good also considering the site | part which forms a protrusion and forms the projecting front end surface of the protrusion as the operation wall part A210 (that is, it is operated to a position one step higher than the front wall part A201 (the side opposite to the main controller A110). The wall portion A210 is positioned).

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the main control device 100 is housed in the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the board boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 As long as the operation element is operated through the opening, the stored item is arbitrary. For example, it may not have an electrical configuration. As such a stored item, for example, it has a connecting part connected to an opening / closing lid that opens and closes a discharge port for discharging a sphere from the flow path of the sphere, and the opening / closing cover is operated by operating the connecting part as an operator. Examples of the member (structure, device) for opening and closing the door are illustrated.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where a push button switch or a key operation type selector switch is employed as the operation means (switch device A120, key device A130) has been described. The operation means may be employed. Examples of other types of operation means include a tactile switch, a rocker switch, a dip switch, a thumb rotary switch, and a toggle switch.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the operation mode of the operation elements (operation unit A122, key A140) is pushing and rotation has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the cover is formed on the box covers A200 and A3200. Any operation mode may be used as long as it is arranged to be operable through the openings (openings A250 and A260 in the above embodiments). Other operation modes include pulling out, sliding, seesaw displacement (for example, a mode in which the operation buttons are displaced like a seesaw by pressing both ends alternately like a rocker switch operation button), tilting (for example, toggle) A mode in which the operating lever is displaced so as to fall to one side with the base end side as a fulcrum, such as an operating lever of a switch, is exemplified.

  In this case, the sliding direction of the operating element, the direction connecting both ends of the operating element that displaces the seesaw, and the falling direction of the tilting operating element are in the longitudinal direction (arrows L and R directions) of the operation wall A210 (second region). It is preferable to arrange the operation means in a parallel posture. This is because the operability of the operation means can be improved by effectively utilizing the space formed along the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 (second region).

  In any of the above-described operation modes, the shape of the front view of the openings A250 and A260 is formed only in a region corresponding to the displacement locus of the operation element (a region necessary for allowing displacement). Also good.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which a predetermined gap is formed between the surface and the end surface held by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in the state where no external force is applied to the key A140 or the key device A130, at least one of the surface or end surface gripped by the finger of the key A140 and the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (rings) The configuration may be such that the portion A272a or the outer edge of the square portion A272b) abuts. That is, at least one of the surface or the end surface gripped by the finger of the key A140 in the off position or the on position is brought into contact with the end surface wall portions A272, A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a or the square portion A272b), and the key A140 is operated When (rotated), the end surface of the key A140 may be slid with respect to the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (the outer edge of the annular portion A272a).

  Note that the gap between the surface and the end surface of the key A140 gripped by the finger and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 (outer edges of the annular portion A272a and the square portion A272b), the outer surface of the key device A130, and the inner surface of the covering portion A270. The clearance between the outer surface of the key device A130 and the inner surface of the standing wall A290 and the lower wall portion A203 is such that the tilt of the key device A130 with respect to the printed circuit board A119 is a specified angle (the angle that allows the tilt of the key device A130 to be allowed). That is, before reaching the angle at which the leg A131 is not easily removed or damaged, or the solder is not peeled off, at least one of the gaps is eliminated (the key A140 or the key device A130 comes into contact). . The specified angle is preferably 10 degrees or less, more preferably 7 degrees or less, and still more preferably 5 degrees or less. In this embodiment, it is set to 7 degrees.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are formed at two locations in the circumferential direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited thereto. , A133b may be formed only at one place or at three or more places. Moreover, when forming in two or more places, those circumferential direction positions (phases) are arbitrary. That is, they may be formed at regular intervals in the circumferential direction as in the above embodiments, or may be formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 are intermittently formed in the circumferential direction has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the protrusion A271b is not necessarily limited thereto. , A133b may be formed continuously in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above embodiments, the protrusion A271b of the covering portion A270 and the protrusion A133b of the key device A130 protrude outward in the radial direction, and the protrusion A133b of the device A130 is disposed in the space formed by the protrusion A271b. Although the case has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a protrusion is projected radially inward from the inner surface of the peripheral wall portion A271 of the covering portion A270, and radially inward on the outer surface of the base portion A133a of the key device A130. A configuration is possible in which a concave portion that is recessed is provided, and the protruding portion of the covering portion A270 is disposed in the internal space of the concave portion of the key device A130. In this case, if the concave portion is continued to the end surface (the surface on the arrow F direction side) of the base portion A133a so that the covering portion A270 can be covered with the key device A130 (the protruding portion is inserted into the concave portion) (the protruding portion). An opening for inserting the portion into the recess may be formed on the end face).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and in addition to this, the protrusion on the guide wall A251. May be connected.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where two ridges (the first ridge A211 and the second ridge A212) are connected to the covering portion A270 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of the formed ridges is as follows. There may be one or three or more. In the case of forming a plurality of lines, the connecting position between one end thereof and the covering portion A270 is arbitrary. However, it is preferable to connect other protrusions at positions where the phases of the first protrusion A211 and the second protrusion A212 are different from each other by approximately 180 degrees. This is because the load input from the key A140 in the off position / on position to the covering portion A270 can be efficiently received.

  In addition, the 1st protrusion A211 and 2nd protrusion A212, the cross-sectional shape of other protrusions, the height dimension of the cross-sectional shape (the standing dimension from the front (surface by the arrow F direction side) of the operation wall part A210) ) And width dimensions (dimensions in the direction perpendicular to the height direction where the cross-section disappears) are arbitrary and can be set as appropriate. Examples of the end surface shape include a rectangular shape, a semicircular shape, a triangular shape, and a combination of these. The relationship between the height dimension and the width dimension of the cross-sectional shape is arbitrary, and either may be a large value.

  In each said embodiment, the height dimension (standing dimension from the front (surface by the side of arrow F) of operation wall part A210) of 1st protrusion A211 and 2nd protrusion A212 follows the extension direction. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be changed along the extending direction.

  In addition, you may comprise so that a height dimension may become low gradually as it leaves | separates from the end connected to coating | coated part A270. In this case, it is possible to efficiently increase the rigidity of the covering portion A270 while reducing the material cost.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the rotation angle of the key A140 (phase difference between the on position and the off position) is set to 90 ° has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other rotation angles (positions) (Phase difference) may be set. That is, the rotation angle of the key A140 may be set to an angle smaller than 90 °, or may be set to an angle larger than 90 °.

  In this case, the shape of the opening A260 (the shape of the edge of the end wall A272) corresponds to the displacement locus of the key A140 when the key A140 is displaced (rotated) between the off position and the on position. It is preferably formed only in (region necessary for allowing displacement). That is, when the rotation angle of the key A140 is θ, the opening A260 is a first fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on one side of the rotation center of the key A140. A second fan-shaped opening having a central angle of approximately θ for allowing displacement of a portion on the other side (one side and the opposite side) of the rotation center of the key A140 is coupled with a phase difference of about 180 degrees. It is formed in a different shape.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the key A140 has a rotation radius (a distance from the rotation center to the end surface (a narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface gripped by the finger)) on one side of the rotation center, and the rotation center. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the rotation radius (from the rotation center to the end surface (gripping with the finger) is not necessarily limited to this. The distance to the narrow surface along the outer edge of the surface) may be substantially the same. That is, the first fan-shaped opening and the second fan-shaped opening of the opening A260 may have substantially the same size (radius).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the front-view shape of the operation wall portion A210 is formed in a substantially horizontally long rectangle (rectangular shape) has been described. good. Examples of the other front view shape include a substantially square shape, a substantially circular shape, a substantially oval shape, a substantially triangular shape, a substantially polygonal shape having five or more pentagons, and a shape obtained by combining these shapes.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is substantially parallel to the longitudinal direction of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (box covers A200, A3200) has been described. It is not limited and may be non-parallel. Alternatively, it may be substantially orthogonal (that is, a configuration in which the longitudinal direction of the operation wall portion A210 is along the directions of arrows U and D).

  In each of the above embodiments, a part of the outer edge of the operation wall A210 (three sides in each of the above embodiments) is a connection wall (the first connection wall A220, the second connection wall A230, and the third connection wall. A240) and the remaining portion of the outer edge (one side in each of the above embodiments) is not surrounded (opened), but is not necessarily limited thereto. The entire outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 may be surrounded by the connection wall portion.

  That is, in the front view of the box covers A200 and A3200, in each of the above embodiments, the operation wall portion A210 is located at a position where a part of the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 coincides with a part of the outer edge of the box cover A200 and A3200. However, the operation wall portion A210 may be disposed (formed) at a position where the outer edge of the operation wall portion A210 does not coincide with the outer edge of the box covers A200, A3200.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the opening AOP1, the opening A250 (guide wall A251), and the opening A260 (covering part A270) are arranged in a substantially series (substantially in a row) is described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Other arrangements are also possible. Examples of other arrangements include a staggered arrangement, an arrangement dispersed in positions having no regularity, and a lattice arrangement (arrangement at intersections of a plurality of straight lines orthogonal to each other). Moreover, when arrange | positioning in substantially series (substantially 1 row), the series direction may be arrangement | positioning non-parallel to the longitudinal direction of operation wall part A210 (box cover A200, A3200), and arrangement | positioning orthogonally crossed. It may be.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the front surfaces (surfaces in the direction of the arrow F) of the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are formed as flat surfaces has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are formed. One or a plurality of protrusions or protrusions (ribs) may be erected from the front surface (surface on the arrow F direction side).

  In this case, the protrusion (rib) (for example, a part formed by extending in a streak shape while maintaining a substantially semicircular or substantially rectangular cross-sectional shape) is an end wall in a front view (viewed in the direction of arrow B). A form extending in a radial straight line from the center of the portions A272 and A2272 (the axial center of the peripheral wall portion A271) outward in the radial direction is preferable. Moreover, it is preferable that a plurality of such ridges (ribs) are arranged at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. Thus, when the key A140 is extracted, the key A140 engages with the edge of the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272, and the end surface wall portions A272 and A2272 are lifted in the extraction direction (arrow F direction) of the key A140. This is because damage to the end face wall portions A272 and A2272 can be suppressed by utilizing the rigidity of the protrusions (ribs).

  Alternatively, the protrusion (rib) may be formed in an annular shape in front view that is continuous in the circumferential direction. A plurality of the protrusions (ribs) may be arranged with different diameters (that is, with a predetermined interval in the radial direction). It may be intermittent (discontinuous) in the circumferential direction.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing wall A209 is retracted from the height position of the standing tip surface of the standing walls A208, A280, A290 (that is, from the printed board A119). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other standing walls A208, A280, A290 may be retracted.

  Further, the retraction amounts of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane may be different from the retraction amounts of the other standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 from the reference plane. Furthermore, in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290, the retraction amount may change.

  In this case, it is preferable that the receding amount of the standing end surface from the reference surface is smaller as the standing wall is farther from the fastening hole A206a. The printed circuit board A119 is farther from the abutting standing wall when the standing wall is brought into contact with the area farther from the fastening hole A206a, because the restriction by the screw ASC is weaker than the closer area. It is easy to be deformed (displaced) in the direction to be done, and the degree of adhesion with the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 is weakened. By reducing the receding amount from the reference surface of the standing tip surface, the standing wall farther from the fastening hole A206a, This is because it is easy to ensure the close contact between the standing end surface of the standing wall and the front surface of the printed circuit board A 119 on all the standing walls.

  For example, in this embodiment, assuming that the standing front end surface of the standing wall A209 closest to the fastening hole A206a is a reference plane, the fastening hole A206a (in the order of the standing wall A280, the standing wall A290, and the standing wall A208) Since the distance from the standing wall A209) is increased, the retreat amount from the reference plane described above is reduced in this order in accordance with the separation distance from the fastening hole A206a (that is, the standing tip surface of the standing wall A208). It is preferable that the amount of retreat from the reference plane is minimized).

  Further, each of the standing walls A208, A209, A280, and A290 may be changed so that the amount of retreat from the reference plane becomes smaller as the distance from the fastening hole A206a becomes longer. That is, it is good also as a structure by which the standing front end surface in one standing wall A208, A209, A280, A290 is respectively inclined with respect to the front wall part A201 of box cover A200, A3200.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the setting value is displayed on at least one of the third symbol display device 81 or the 7-segment display in the setting change mode has been described. Alternatively, in addition to this, the image may be displayed on another display device. Examples of other display devices include a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a second symbol hold lamp 84, and the like.

  Moreover, the structure by which a setting value is not displayed on either the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 and a 7 segment display may be sufficient.

  In this case, when the setting change mode is activated, the setting value is updated to a predetermined initial value (for example, the first value) regardless of the setting value before the activation, and the operation unit A122 of the switch device A120 is pushed in. The configuration may be such that the operator recognizes the set value based on the number of times. It is possible to suppress the unauthorized acquisition of the set value by unauthorized means (for example, means for photographing the display of the third symbol display device 81 with a hidden camera installed in the hall). Further, when the setting is changed during the game, it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the setting value. In this case, the setting confirmation mode may be omitted.

  Although not described in each of the above embodiments, a first detection sensor that detects the relative position of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 (the rotational position with the hinge 18 as the rotation center) is provided. When the first detection sensor detects that the frame 12 is opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is permitted, and the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 has a predetermined angle or more. When the opening (rotation) is not detected by the first detection sensor, the setting change may be prohibited (for example, the input from the switch device A120 or the key device A130 is invalidated). . It is because it can suppress that a setting change is made illegally.

  Further, a second detection sensor for detecting the relative position of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 (rotational position with the rotation axis A410 as the rotation center) is provided, and the substrate box A100 is provided with respect to the inner frame 12. , A2100, A3100, A4100 is detected by the second detection sensor to be opened (rotated) by a predetermined angle or more, the above-described setting change is prohibited (for example, the switch device A120 or the key device). When the input from A130 is invalidated and the opening (rotation) of the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 is not detected by the second detection sensor, the setting change is made. You may comprise so that it may be accept | permitted. It is because it can suppress that a setting change is made illegally.

  Note that both the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided (the other may be omitted). When both are provided, the first detection sensor detects the opening (rotation) of the inner frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11 by a predetermined angle or more, and the substrate boxes A100, A2100, A3100, and A4100 with respect to the inner frame 12 are predetermined. When the second detection sensor does not detect an opening (rotation) that is greater than an angle, the above-described setting change may be allowed. Examples of the first detection sensor and the second detection sensor include a rotary sensor that detects a rotation angle, and a limit switch that displaces the mechanical detection unit in accordance with opening and closing.

  In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120. The operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is allowed (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110). The predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

  For example, the predetermined electrical connection line may be only the electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 to the main controller A110. That is, as long as at least the power supply device 115 is connected to the main control device A110 by an electrical connection line, regardless of the connection state of other electrical connection lines (that is, whether it is connected or released). In this case, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 may be permitted. In this case, the set value associated with the setting change cannot be confirmed on the third symbol display device 81, but can be confirmed on the 7-segment display of the main controller A110.

  In each of the above embodiments, if a predetermined electrical connection line (an electrical connection line that connects the power supply device 115 and the sound lamp control device 113 to the main control device A110) is connected to the main control device A110, the switch device A120. In addition, the case where the operation (setting change) of the key device A130 is allowed (that is, the setting change is prohibited unless a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device A110) has been described. However, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not released from the main controller A110, the connection state of the other electrical connection line is not concerned (that is, even if it is connected, it is released). However, even if connection and release are mixed, the operation (setting change) of the switch device A120 and the key device A130 is not allowed (that is, a predetermined electrical connection line is connected to the main control device). When connected to the A110 may be configured to set change is prohibited). Also in this case, the predetermined electrical connection line can be arbitrarily set (selected).

  For example, the payout control device 111 is exemplified as the predetermined electrical connection line. According to this, since the power supply of the payout control device 111 is turned off, it is possible to prevent the payout control device 111 from operating illegally and paying out game balls.

  In the eighth embodiment, the case where the protrusion A2273 extends in a streak shape has been described as the form of the portion protruding from the back surface (the surface on the arrow B direction side) of the end face wall portion A2272, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a configuration may be employed in which a plurality of protrusions are juxtaposed with a predetermined interval between positions AP1 to AP6 including positions AP2 to AP5. Alternatively, the protrusion A2273 may be formed intermittently between the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the positions AP2 to AP5.

  The range in which the protrusion A2273 or the plurality of protrusions is formed is not limited to the range from the position AP1 to the position AP6 including the position AP2 to AP5, and the range may be reduced or expanded. . Such a range may be the entire outer edge of the annular portion A272a and the rectangular portion A272b.

  In the ninth embodiment, the substrate box A3100 is rotated about the rotation axis A410 as a rotation center, so that the second position (the position where the front surface of the operation wall portion A210 faces the front side of the pachinko machine A3010, FIG. Although the case where it arrange | positions to b) reference) was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this, Of course, it is possible to employ | adopt another displacement form.

  As another displacement form, for example, the substrate box is arranged so as to be slidable in the width direction (arrow L, R direction) with respect to the inner frame 12, and is slid to the opposite side (arrow L direction) from the hinge 18. As a result, the substrate box is arranged in the second position, and the rotation axis A410 is formed as an axis along the front-rear direction (arrow F, B direction) of the pachinko machine A10 (inner frame 12). Examples include a form in which the substrate box is arranged at the second position by being displaced (rotated) with A410 as the rotation center.

  In the tenth embodiment, the case where the rotation axis A4410 is formed in each of the sealing unit A400 and the sub cover A500 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and at least one or both of the rotation axes A4410 are You may form in box cover A200, A3200 or box base A300. In this case, the box covers A200, A3200 and the box base A300 are each formed with a divided body of the rotation axis A4410, and the box covers A200, A3200 are connected to the box base A300, and each of the divided bodies has one rotating shaft. A4410 may be formed.

  The same applies to the seventh to ninth embodiments, and the case where the rotation axis A410 is formed on the sealing unit A400 has been described. However, the rotation axis A410 is formed on the box cover A200, A3200 or the box base A300. May be. Further, as in the case described above, one rotation axis A410 may be formed from the divided bodies formed in each of the box covers A200 and A3200 connected to the box base A300.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the main body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 and the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 are rubbed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an opening may be provided on the covering member B1200 side, and the front side surfaces of the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 may be projected to the front side with dimensions that allow entry into the opening. In this case, the vertical position of the downstream end of the guide members B1310 and B1510 can be stabilized by engagement (fitting) instead of frictional resistance.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where a part of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is assembled from the front side of the thin plate member B1110 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the shape of the penetration forming part B1120 is such that the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be inserted back and forth including the upper extending portions B1312 and B1512, so that the assembly of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be performed on the rear surface of the thin plate member B1110. Can be completed on the side.

  Further, the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 may be configured to be disassembled from the guide members B1310, B1510. As a result, the portion of the thin plate member B1110 that is required to be assembled from the front side is limited to the upwardly extending portions B1312, B1512 that are likely to cause a collision load from the sphere and have a higher possibility of breakage than other portions. can do. Thus, maintainability can be improved by setting only the part with high possibility of being damaged from the front side.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the opening order of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is alternated and the case where the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are unified so that one of them is opened are described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, you may prepare the other variation which changes the ratio of the round area which opens alternately, and the round area which either one opens continuously.

  For example, the first guide plate B1300 may be opened only for the first to eighth rounds and the first guide plate B1300 may be opened for the ninth to the 15th rounds. In this case, it can be set as the operation pattern which has each characteristic of each operation pattern (the number of payout balls, round game time, the number of zero balls, etc.) half each.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the projecting length is changed by setting the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 to have the same horizontal spacing, but the projecting length is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a section in which the arrangement interval is changed may be provided with the same protruding length, or the arrangement interval may be equal while the protruding length is the same. What is necessary is just to design protrusion part B1140, B1211 according to the deceleration aspect to desire.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case in which the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are disposed at a height that does not contact the ball rolling in the lower part of the pre-entrance range is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the height may be such that the vicinity of the upper end of the sphere is grazed. In this case, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are made to function as projecting portions having a large deceleration action on the sphere when inclined on one side (for example, inclined toward the lower right), and inclined on the other side (for example, toward the lower left). Can be made to function as a projecting portion having a small deceleration action on the sphere.

  The deceleration section is configured by the shape of the part that comes into contact with the game ball (addition of a protrusion protruding to the inside of the guide path or change in the inclination of the guide path). In that respect, the projecting portions B1140 and B1211 are not limited to those projecting in the front-rear direction. For example, a mode in which the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 travels upward from the lower end position of the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521 may be employed.

  In addition, the structure of a preferable deceleration area changes with the displacement aspects of the member which guides a ball | bowl. For example, in the case of a member that is linearly displaced, it is easy to add a protruding portion and change the inclination of the rolling surface. In addition, for example, if the member is rotationally displaced so as to project from the width direction of the guide path, it is easy to add the protrusion, but the change in the inclination becomes low in design freedom due to the relationship with the rotation axis. In addition, for example, in the case of a member that is rotationally displaced so as to protrude from the longitudinal direction of the guide path, the addition of the protrusion tends to be low because it is necessary to avoid the displacement locus of the member to be displaced. However, the degree of freedom in designing the change in inclination is high.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where a plurality of detection sensors are arranged in one variable winning device B1000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a part of the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 may be diverted to be configured as a variable winning device that guides a ball to a single detection sensor.

  In the eleventh embodiment, both guide plates B1300 and B1500 have a structure with a gap in the middle, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a gap may be formed only on one side, and a gap may not be formed on the other side, and a single plate may be used.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the first and second guide plates B1300 and B1500 both have the connecting and fixing members B1330 and B1530 formed in a block shape and are spaced apart from each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Not. For example, by removing the portion that overlaps the connection fixing member B1330 in front view from the connection fixing member B1530, and configuring the connection fixing member B1530 as an L-shaped member in front view, the connection fixing member B1530 is configured as the connection fixing member B1330. It is good also as arrangement | positioning right above.

  That is, in the standby state, the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 may be arranged at the same position in the front-rear direction. In this case, the front-rear width required for arranging the guide plates B1300 and B1500 can be shortened.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the gap between the guide members B1310, B1510 and the upstream members B1320, B1520 is filled with the extended support portion B1212. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The formation of the extended support portion B1212 may be omitted. In this case, the gap between the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 becomes a step, and although the flow of the sphere is slightly disturbed, the sphere can be guided to the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 without any problem. Further, by using the space that is freed by omitting the formation of the extended support portion B1212, the end portions of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream side members B1320 and B1520 are extended so as to narrow the gaps. Disturbance of the flow can be minimized.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 have been described in which the relative positions of the guide members B1310 and B1510 and the upstream members B1320 and B1520 do not change and only the back and forth movement occurs, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, the upstream side members B1320 and B1520 may be connected to the connection fixing members B1330 and B1530 so as to be displaceable in the left-right direction. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 can be displaced so as to approach the guide members B1310 and B1510 in accordance with the longitudinal displacement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. Thereby, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 intersect with each other when viewed from the front, and the gap generated at the intersecting position can be closed by the lateral displacement of the upstream members B1320 and B1520, so the formation of the extension support portion B1212 is omitted. be able to.

  In the eleventh embodiment, when the guide plates B1300, B1500 are switched from the open state to the closed state, the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 are arranged on the upstream side of the specific winning ports B1001, B1002, Cut off. In this case, the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 are configured to be displaced from the front side to the back side of the specific winning ports B1001, B1002. Therefore, since the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 is the rear side, the sphere applied with the load from the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 being displaced is first a thin plate of the base member B1100. A ball whose momentum has been reduced by bouncing collides with the body member B1210 of the covering member B1200 that collides with the member B1110 and forms the design surface.

  Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load applied to the main body member B1210 and to easily avoid problems such as cracking of the design surface, but the displacement of the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, when the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 block the entry of a sphere, the upper extension portions B1312, B1512 may be configured to be displaced from the back side to the front side. In this case, when the inner edges of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are configured to be flush with the plate surface of the thin plate member B1110 of the base member B1100, it is possible to cause the ball to be blocked early.

  In addition, the aspect which displaces the member which interrupt | blocks specific winning opening B1001, B1002 from the back side to the front side is not limited at all. For example, the guide plates B1300, B1500 may be configured to be displaced to the front side when switching to the closed state, and the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 are configured separately from the guide plates B1300, B1500. Then, the upper extending portions B1312, B1512 may be displaced to the front side when the guide plates B1300, B1500 are displaced to the back side when switching to the closed state.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the extended support portion B1212 and the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521 are flush with each other has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower end portions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be arranged at a lower position than the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212 forms a step (step) with respect to the sphere rolling on the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521, and the flow velocity of the sphere can be reduced by this step.

  That is, the projecting portions that reduce the flow velocity of the sphere by contacting with the sphere, such as the projecting portions B1140 and B1211, are not limited to the case where the projecting portion is projected from the front-rear direction of the flow path. You may comprise so that it may protrude upwards from a lower surface. In addition, protrusion part B1140, B1211 was described as an example of the aspect protruded downward from the upper side of the flow path of a bulb | ball.

  For example, the lower end portions of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521 may be arranged at a higher position than the upper end portion of the extended support portion B1212. In this case, the upstream members B1320 and B1520 form a step (step) with respect to the extended support portion B1212, and this step causes the sphere to flow backward from the lower end of the rolling surfaces B1321 and B1521. Riding on the rolling surfaces B1321, B1521 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly guide the ball to the first specific winning opening B1001 or the second specific winning opening B1002.

  In this manner, the extended support portion B1212 is not only in the closed state of the first opening / closing plate B1300 and the second opening / closing plate B1500, but is always disposed in the range before entering the ball, so that the rolling of the ball is delayed. Depending on the design of the arrangement with respect to the surfaces B1321 and B1521, it can be used as a means for decelerating the flow of the sphere or as a means for preventing the sphere from flowing backward.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the rolling surface B2531 is configured to be horizontal with respect to the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rolling surface B2531 may be inclined forward and backward. At this time, for example, by descending and tilting toward the back side, the sphere can be dropped smoothly when switching to the closed state, so that the displacement of the opening / closing bar B2500 can be made smooth.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the balls are distributed to the right and left by the sorting apparatus B1800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a mechanism for alternately distributing the balls to the left and right may be provided on the upstream side of the variable prize apparatus B1000, or the balls may be distributed by a movable body that operates in a constant manner after the power is turned on. Further, the distribution mechanism on the upstream side of the variable winning device B1000 may be omitted.

  In addition, although an example has been described in which a ball can enter the ball guide receiving portion B 1260 only when the solenoid is not excited and the sorting device B 1800 is raised, the reverse may be possible. For example, the configuration is such that the sorting device B1800 is raised when any solenoid is excited. In this case, it is possible to prevent winning in the ball guidance receiving portion B1260 during normal times or during a short time.

  The ball guide receiving unit B1260 may be arranged on the upstream side of the sorting device B1800. Further, the ball guidance receiving unit B1260 may be omitted. In this case, the time efficiency of progression of the special game state can be improved. Moreover, it may be comprised so that the path | route of the downstream side may enter into ball guidance receiving part B1260 regardless of which of the distribution apparatus B1800 flows. The sorting device B1800 is not limited to carving the path of a sphere 100%. For example, you may make it give a similar function to a nail, such as dividing by 80%.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the extended support portion B1212 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the extended support portion B1212 may be movable. In this case, you may comprise so that it may operate | move in conjunction (for example, pushed) with guide board B1300 and B1500.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where the pre-entrance range is the front and rear width of the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be long in the front-rear direction (it may be configured to be twice or more the diameter of the sphere). In this case, even if they intersect in front view, they can be separated from each other in front view. Therefore, it does not need to be placed directly above. In other words, by intersecting, both the left and right lengths of the guide flow paths to the entrances arranged on the left and right sides can be increased even in a game area having a front and rear width of 19 mm. On the other hand, if the front and rear width is such that two balls can be arranged on the front and rear, a plurality of specific winning openings can be arranged with a small vertical width without intersecting.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case where both of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 project from the back side to the front side has been described. However, at least one of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 forms an open state by being displaced from the front side to the back side. You may do it.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the case has been described in which the sphere aimed at the upper part of the pre-entry range is decelerated compared to the sphere aimed at the lower part of the pre-entry range. Absent. For example, the formation of the projecting portion B1140 or the like is omitted, the ball launched into the upper part of the pre-entrance range (inclined upstream side) is accelerated, and the ball launched into the lower part of the pre-entry range (inclined downstream side) is accelerated. Alternatively, it may be configured to be slow due to the left-right direction being reversed.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the design based on the assumption that the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 operate independently has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, since the displacement trajectory BE11 and the displacement trajectory BE12 partially overlap, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 contact each other and operate in relation to each other when the interval between rounds is shortened to prevent the falling ball. You may make it design in consideration of the possibility of doing (interlocking).

  For example, when the connecting portion B2530 is displaced toward the open state before the switching from the open state to the closed state of the opening / closing plate B2300 is completed, the connecting portion B2530 is engaged with the lower side portion of the plate portion B2310. Then, there is a risk of causing malfunction of the opening / closing plate B2300.

  On the other hand, the opening / closing plate B2300 is formed with a leading collision portion projecting in a hemispherical shape toward the opening / closing rod B2500 from the left / right central portion on the rotation tip side of the plate portion B2310, and the connecting portion is connected to the opening / closing rod B2500. A preceding collision part that protrudes in a hemispherical shape from the left and right center part of B2530 toward the opening / closing plate B2300 may be formed, and the preceding collision parts may be arranged so as to collide with each other.

  Each preceding collision part is configured as a part that is adjacent to the counterpart member ahead of other constituent members, so that the preceding collision parts collide with each other before the connecting part B2530 is engaged with the lower side part of the plate part B2310. be able to.

  If the load due to the collision between the preceding collision parts is generated in the direction in which the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing rod B2500 are displaced toward the closed state, the opening / closing plate B2300 or the opening / closing rod B2500 is being switched to the closed state. Even if the open / close bar B2500 or the open / close plate B2300 starts to move toward the open state, the open / close bar B2300 or the open / close plate B2300 that is switched toward the open state places a load on the open / close plate B2300 or B2500 that is displaced toward the closed state. By giving, state switching can be promoted.

  Thereby, the interval between rounds becomes too short, and before one member forms a closed state among opening-and-closing plate B2300 and opening-and-closing bar B2500, the other member starts displacement toward an open state, and members are Even if a collision occurs, the load due to the collision only acts to push one member toward the closed state, and it is possible to avoid the malfunction of the open / close plate B2300 and the open / close bar B2500.

  As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility of inconvenience when setting the interval between rounds to be short, and it is possible to easily execute control for setting the interval between rounds to be as short as necessary to avoid the spilling sphere. it can. In addition, the shape and arrangement | positioning of a preceding collision part can be set arbitrarily. For example, the spill prevention unit B2524 may function as a preceding collision unit.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the displacement of the open / close plate B2300 toward the open state is the upward displacement (rising displacement) with the upper side as the axis is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the open state may be changed from a standing closed state to a downward displacement (tilt displacement) about the lower side as an axis, and the upper side surface in the open state may be used as the flow surface (rolling surface) of the sphere.

  In this case, it is preferable that the back side of the opening / closing plate in the closed state is recessed with a size that allows the ball to enter, and the detection sensor is disposed downstream of the recessed portion. When a ball is on the upper side surface of the open / close plate in an open state, when the open / close plate is switched to the closed state, the ball on which the rider has been put can be drawn into the recessed portion without spilling.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the open / close plate B2300 that is displaced to the front side when switching to the open state and the open / close bar B2500 that is displaced to the back side when switching to the open state are used for the spheres in the pre-entry range. Although the case where the flow-down mode is configured to be switchable has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the member displaced to the front side may be configured as a member having the same configuration as the opening / closing bar B2500.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the rolling surfaces B2311 of the opening / closing plate B2300 are formed in the same inclined plane shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the rolling surface may be formed in a mountain shape, and the inclination angle may change midway. In this case, the degree of deceleration of the sphere can be changed depending on the shape of the rolling surface.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the right arm portion B2520 is formed in the same shape as the left arm portion B2510 has been described. However, the shape is not necessarily limited to this, and the shape of the right arm portion B2520 can be arbitrarily set. . For example, the right arm portion B2520 may be formed in a straight bar shape, or may be a J-shape that curves to the opposite side of the curvature of the left arm portion B2510. In this case, the right arm B2520 can be separated from the flow path of the sphere rolling toward the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 in the closed state of the opening / closing bar B2500. Thereby, possibility that the flow of the sphere which flows down along rolling surface B2311 of opening-and-closing plate B2300 will be inhibited can be made low.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the case where the flow path branches right and left with the center frame 86 as a boundary has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a partition that divides the flow path of the sphere may be provided on either the left or right side (for example, the right side) of the center frame 86. In this case, a plurality of sphere flow paths can be formed on either the left or right side of the center frame 86.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the first guide plate B3300 and the first rotating member B3700 are driven by the single first driving device B1400 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a driving device that drives the first guide plate B3300 and a driving device that drives the first rotation member B3700 may be individually arranged so that the displacement timing is adjusted by control.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, in the pre-entry range, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 guide the sphere at the upper part of the pre-entry range, and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 guide the sphere at the lower part of the pre-entry range. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the guide plate and the rotating member are configured with a length extending to the left and right of the pre-entrance range, the guide to the opening of the first detection sensor B 1230 is performed by the guide plate, and the guide to the opening of the second detection sensor B 1250 is You may comprise so that it may carry out with a rotation member.

  In this case, the rotation member may be configured to further tilt by switching to the closed state. In this case, since the turning member is in the displacement direction that rescues the sphere by switching to the open state, the number of falling spheres can be reduced.

  Moreover, you may make it comprise the rotation member arrange | positioned at right and left by the length over the left and right of the range before entrance. In this case, in order to prevent the occurrence of a collision near the intersection position, it is configured to have a recessed portion that is recessed from the rotating front end side toward the rotating base end side (for example, the axial width is And a positional relationship that allows the non-recessed portion of the other rotating member to enter the recessed portion of one rotating member). It is preferable to design as follows. Thereby, even if it comprises so that a rotation member on either side may overlap by a front view during a displacement, it can prevent that the collision between members arises.

  In this case, the rotating member may be further tilted by switching to the closed state. In this case, since the rotation member is in a displacement direction that rescues the ball by switching to the open state, it is possible to easily rescue the ball that has passed the intersection position (the ball arranged in the lower part of the range before entering the ball), The number of spilling spheres can be reduced.

  Moreover, although rolling surface B3721 and B3921 of rotation member B3700 and B3900 were comprised by planar shape, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, it may be constituted by a plurality of planes so that the inclination changes, or may be constituted by a curved surface. Thereby, the flow-down mode of the sphere rolling on the rolling surface can be complicated.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the guide plate B3300, B3500 is configured to be in the open state by sliding and displacing to the front side. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the open state may be configured by sliding the guide plates B3300 and B3500 to the back side.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, with respect to the inclination angle of the rolling surfaces B3321 and B3521 constituting the upper part of the pre-entrance range with respect to the horizontal plane, the inclination angle of the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 constituting the lower part of the pre-entrance range with respect to the horizontal plane is set. Although the case where the direction is larger has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle may be smaller in the lower part of the pre-entrance range. That is, the lower part of the pre-entrance range may be configured such that the degree of deceleration is higher.

  In this case, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a plurality of balls are arranged on the rolling surfaces B3721 and B3921 in the lower part of the range before entering the ball, so that the rotating members B3700 and B3900 rotate when the state changes to the closed state. It is possible to increase the number of spheres pushed into the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 by being pushed by the members B3700 and B3900.

  The change in the degree of deceleration does not necessarily have to be caused by the difference in the inclination of the rolling surface. For example, by setting the formation width, the projection length, and the formation interval (density) of the protrusions that protrude into the pre-entrance range such as the protrusion B1140, a difference in the degree of deceleration may be provided. .

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the rotating members B3700 and B3900 and the guide plates B3300 and B3500 form a sphere guide route. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the guide plates B3300 and B3500 that are slid, the rotating member that performs the same displacement as the opening and closing plate B2300 may be configured with the same left and right width as the guide plates B3300 and B3500.

  In this case, since the rotation direction of the rotation member as an alternative and the rotation members B3700 and B3900 are opposed to each other, the load can be canceled at the time of contact so that the rotation can be stopped early. Furthermore, since it displaces so that it may mutually approach from an up-down direction, it is easy to fill up a clearance gap.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the guide plates B3300, B3500 configured to be displaceable from both and the rotating members B3700, B3900 are displaced closely to close the gap has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a fixing member is interposed between the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900, and the guide plates B3300, B3500 and the rotating members B3700, B3900 are not in direct contact with each other so that a gap is formed. It may be closed.

  Further, when both of the guide plates B3300 and B3500 and the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are displaced and abut against each other to close the gap, one is formed more flexibly than the other, and is configured to bend when abutting. May be. For example, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 may be configured to be more rigid than the rotating members B3700 and B3900. Thereby, it is possible to easily fill the gap by the bending of the rotating members B3700 and B3900.

  Further, for example, when the guide plates B3300 and B3500 are configured more flexibly than the rotating members B3700 and B3900, the guide plates B3300 and B3500 can be prevented from being damaged. The plates B3300 and B3500 can be easily made thin.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the case where the rotating members B3700 and B3900 are arranged about five spheres apart has been described, but the arrangement interval of the rotating members B3700 and B3900 is arbitrary. For example, the rotation members B3700 and B3900 may be arranged apart from the left and right ends of the game area.

  Further, a collar portion may be formed above the rotating members B3700 and B3900 so as to prevent the collision of the balls in the closed state.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the rolling surface B2531 of the opening / closing bar B2500 is not tilted in the front-rear direction has been described. In particular, since it is not intended to decelerate the ball rolling the open / close bar B2500, the ease of contact with the projecting portion B1140 does not matter. For example, by configuring the rolling surface B2531 to be inclined downward toward the front side, it is possible to roll the sphere on a path away from the projecting portion B1140.

  Using the configuration of the sixteenth embodiment, the guide port B4160 may be disposed below the intersection position of the guide route. In this case, since a sufficient space can be provided inside the vertical width of the guide route, the guide port B4160 can be easily arranged inside the vertical width of the guide route.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the open / close bar B2500 extending to the back side is configured by rotational displacement and the guide plate B4300 extending to the front side is configured by slide displacement. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the member projecting to the back side may be configured by slide displacement, and the member projecting to the front side may be configured by rotational displacement.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, when guided by the open / close bar B2500, the configuration in which the collision with the projecting portion B1140 can be avoided, the ball may not be sufficiently decelerated, but this is not necessarily the case. is not. For example, the open / close bar B2500 may be bent at an intermediate position, and the guide path of the sphere may be bent in the open state (the vertical inclination of the guide path is changed halfway). Thereby, the deceleration of the sphere can be caused by the change of the tilt angle.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the ball flowing from the brim B2271 is configured to pass the ball guide receiving unit B4260, so that the frequency of entering the ball guide receiving unit B4260 on the left and right is changed. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion B1140 may be added to an intermediate position of the projecting portion B1140, and the lower edge of the center frame 86 may be projected forward from the projecting tip of the added projecting portion B1140. .

  In this case, the sphere falling from the lower edge of the center frame 86 can be prevented from coming into contact with the projecting portion B1140 and can be configured not to prevent the ball from entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260, while the opening / closing bar B2500 is closed. When switching to the state, a sphere that slides down from the opening / closing bar B2500 (a sphere brought close to the back side) can be brought into contact with the projecting portion B1140, and the trajectory of the sphere can be shifted to the left and right of the sphere guide receiving portion B4260. Thereby, only the frequency of entering the ball guide receiving portion B4260 from the opening / closing bar B2500 can be reduced.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the sphere assembly wall B4020 is configured so that the sphere can easily enter the through gate 67. However, the configuration is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, an alternating distribution device may be provided upstream of the through gate 67 so that the balls pass through the through gate 67 at a ratio of 1 to 2 balls (alternate), or the through gate 67 is provided on the left side. A plurality may be arranged.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where a plurality of guide plates B1300 and B1500 are driven by a single drive motor B7710 based on the configuration of the variable winning device B1000 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, driving by the combined driving device B7700 may be added to the configuration of the variable winning device B2000. In addition, it is necessary to redesign the to-be-entry groove part B7730.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case has been described in which the variable winning device B4000 is provided with the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and is unitized into the variable winning device B4000 similarly to the guide port B4160. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the guide port B4160 may be disposed on the base plate 60, and a concave portion for avoiding interference with the ball guide receiving portion B4260 may be formed on the base member B4100. In this case, nails can be implanted in the base plate 60 in the gap between the ball guide receiving portion B4260 and the recessed portion of the base member B4100. Thereby, when the ball guide receiving portion B4260 is used in place of the first winning port 64, the life nail can be easily implanted.

  Further, the ball guide receiving portion B4260 may function as a substitute for the general winning opening 63 instead of as a substitute for the first winning opening 64. The number of payout balls can be increased. Moreover, since it is below the guide route, it is possible to prevent the special game state from being prolonged compared to the case where it is arranged upstream.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the case where the front projecting portion B4260 is formed integrally with the guide plate B4300 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be fixed to the covering member B4200 as a member independent of the guide plate B4300. According to this, even in the closed state of the guide plate B4300, the front protruding portion B4260 can collide with the sphere. Further, the front projecting portion B4260 may have a block shape or may be formed in a column shape extending to the back side.

  In the nineteenth embodiment, the difference in function of the projecting portion B9140 has been described as a difference in arrangement height, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the projecting length may be changed. Moreover, although the case where the guide route of the sphere is only the lower right inclined route has been described, the route may be configured in both directions as in the above embodiments.

  In addition, the structure which makes a game ball easy to stay is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the game ball is likely to stay by being decelerated by a protrusion projecting toward the inside of the flow path of the game ball, or the game ball can be switched by changing the degree of inclination of the guide route. A mode in which the game ball is likely to stay by decelerating may be used.

  In addition, it is possible to form the game ball so that it can be decelerated by forming an uneven shape (wave shape) on the rolling surface of the path construction means, or it is possible to make it easier for the game ball to stay. A mode in which the game ball is likely to stay by decelerating the game ball by using the kinetic energy of the wind turbine for rotation of the wind turbine may be used.

  For example, in a mode in which the path configuration means is displaced corresponding to a predetermined number of rounds in a special game, a plurality of path configuration means are provided, and the other path configuration means removes a game ball spilled from one path configuration means. When it is configured to be able to be rescued, it is preferable that the second entrance is arranged below the position where the game ball is likely to stay in the route constituting means on the side constituting the guide route in the final round in the special game.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the guide paths of the intersecting spheres have a bilaterally symmetric shape has been described. In each of the above-described embodiments, the description has been made that the spilling from the intersecting route is a loss. However, the spilling may give a player a greater profit.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the protruding portion B1140 that can contact the ball rolling on the guide path is described, but the arrangement of the protruding portion is not limited thereto. For example, a protruding portion may be provided at a position where the sphere falls on the left and right of the intersection position of the guide route. In this case, since the vertical speed of the sphere can be reduced and the falling speed can be lowered, a device for improving the freedom of setting the interval between rounds. That is, it can be set with a numerical value longer than 0.04 seconds.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the configuration is such that the degree of deceleration of the sphere is switched using the left and right intermediate positions of the range before entering the ball as a boundary. For example, the switching of the degree of deceleration may be configured in three or more sections, or the degree of deceleration may be changed with a position that is shifted from the left and right intermediate position to the left and right as a boundary.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the members that project to the opening of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are provided individually for each of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, but are not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, a rotating body having a length in the axial direction that is about the left and right width of the pre-entrance range is disposed on the back side of the pre-entrance range, and the rotating body can guide the ball to both detection sensors B1230 and B1250. You may do it.

  That is, for example, in the case where the rotating body is formed in a rectangular column shape elongated in the left-right direction, the outer surface facing the pre-entrance range is switched from the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface every time the rotation angle differs by 90 degrees. To be configured. A rolling surface capable of guiding the sphere to the first detection sensor B 1230 is formed on the first outer surface so as to protrude radially outward, and a rolling surface capable of guiding the sphere to the second detection sensor B 1250 is formed on the third outer surface. The moving surface is formed so as to protrude outward in the radial direction. In addition, the overhanging portion is not formed on the second outer surface and the fourth outer surface, and when they are arranged opposite to the pre-entrance range, they are arranged outside the pre-entrance range. Furthermore, a drive motor for rotating the rotating body is provided, and the rotating body is configured to be rotatable in both forward and reverse directions.

  In this case, it is possible to guide the sphere to the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 by rotating the rotating body with the drive motor so that any one of the first outer surface to the fourth outer surface faces the pre-entrance range. The state (first outer surface is opposite, first open state), the state where the sphere can be guided to the opening of the second detection sensor B1250 (third outer surface is opposite, second open state), and the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 are The state can be switched between the state in which the sphere is not guided (the second outer surface or the fourth outer surface is opposed and in the closed state). Therefore, the member that guides the sphere to the openings of the pair of detection sensors B1230 and B1250 can be configured by a single member and a single driving device.

  Further, the direction of displacement of the rotating body when switching from the above-mentioned closed state to the open state (first open state or second open state) is possible in both forward and reverse directions. That is, when switching to the open state (the first open state or the second open state), the rolling surface is disposed in the pre-entry range and the rolling surface is lowered in the pre-entry range. The case where it arrange | positions by displacing can be comprised.

  For the purpose of reducing the number of falling balls from the pre-entrance range, it is easier to save the ball when the rolling contact surface is arranged in an upward displacement. Therefore, by configuring the rotation direction of the rotating body to be controllable in different directions, it is possible to configure an open mode that is advantageous for the player and an open mode that is disadvantageous for the player.

  As described above, when a rotating body is employed, it is not necessary to consider interference between members as in the case of using individual members, so that the degree of freedom in design can be improved. For example, the first detection sensor B1230 and the second detection sensor B1250 are arranged on the same side (for example, the right side) with different vertical positions, the guide path is configured with the same direction of inclination, and the upper side of one guide path is upstream. By arranging the other guide route arranged at the lower side of one guide route on the downstream side (for example, by providing a step), a structure that intersects the guide routes can be easily configured.

  In addition, such a structure (structure inclined in the same direction) is used as the guide member (guide plates B1300, B1500, B3300, B3500, B4300, open / close plates B2300, B5500, open / close bar B2500, and rotating member B3700, in the above embodiments. The shape of B3900) may be changed.

  In each of the above embodiments, the case where the variable winning device B1000 or the like is arranged near the lower portion of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the variable winning device B1000 or the like may be disposed above the game area (for example, above the center frame 86 or above the middle position of the center frame 86).

  In each of the above embodiments, the structure that intersects the rolling paths of the balls has been described as the structure of the member that opens and closes the winning opening, but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, as a means for changing the flow path of the ball in one range of the game area, it may be used without a winning opening (separate from the winning opening).

  In each of the above embodiments, the opening of the first detection port B1230 is opened by changing the downstream flow path of the variable winning device B1000 or the like, or by arranging another winning port, and the second Although the case where a difference occurs in the round digestion time between the round in which the opening of the detection port B1250 is opened has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the degree of deceleration is varied so that the flow velocity of the sphere guided toward the opening of the first detection port B1230 is different from the flow velocity of the sphere guided toward the opening of the second detection port B1250. Thus, a difference may be generated in the round digestion time.

  In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 enter the non-drive section B7731 in the special gaming state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in a state other than the special gaming state, the transmission rod B7422 may be controlled to be disposed in the first groove B7741 and the transmission rod B7622 may be controlled to be disposed in the first groove B7751. In this case, the arrangement of the transmission rods B7422 and B7622 can be held on the first plane BS71 in a state other than the special game state. Thereby, for example, an illegal act of forcibly pulling out the guide plates B1300 and B1500 (for example, a thin metal wire is allowed to enter the game area, or the glass unit 16 is partially destroyed and a finger or a small instrument is allowed to enter the game area. From the structural aspect, it is possible to prevent an illegal profit from being generated due to an unauthorized action such as an unauthorized action that applies a load to the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

  In the twentieth embodiment, it has been described that both rotating members B20700 and B20900 may function to bring a sphere closer to the opening of the same detection sensor (for example, the second detection sensor B1250). It is not limited. For example, the rotating members B20700 and B20900 can be configured to be open at the same time so that the sphere does not approach the opening of any of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 (stays above the discharge port B20001). It may be configured. In this case, it is possible to configure a state where the ball is stopped in the pre-entry range.

  In addition, the state in which the rotating members B20700 and B20900 form the open state at the same time can be arbitrarily designed. For example, the tips of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 may be shortened so that a ball can enter the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 at the same time, or the rotating members B20700 and B20900 may be configured to be sufficiently long and the rotating tip side. By closing the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering any of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250.

  Further, when one of the rotating members B20700 and B20900 constitutes an open state, one sphere can be retained between the rotating tip and the other rotating base end side portion of the rotating members B20700 and B20900. You may comprise. In this case, both the rotating members B20700 and B20900 are in a closed state, and after the special game state is finished, the staying ball can be made to enter the discharge port B20001.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the guide plates B22300 and B22500 that slide in the front-rear direction are simultaneously displaced has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 may be configured to operate simultaneously in a configuration in which the displacement directions face each other like the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500. In this case, since the operation trajectory of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the operation trajectory of the opening / closing bar B2500 overlap, the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 come into contact with each other and stop before reaching the end of displacement. That is, since one of the opening / closing plate B2300 and the opening / closing bar B2500 functions to regulate the displacement of the other, it is possible to easily prevent illegal entry into the specific winning holes B1001, B1002.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the detected parts B22350 and B22550 are formed on the guide plates B22300 and B22500, and the positions of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are set according to the arrangement of the detected parts B22350 and B22550. It is not limited. For example, the detected portions may be formed on the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 of the drive devices B1400 and B1600, and the positions of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 may be set according to the arrangement.

  In this case, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are transmitted in a state where the linear motion members B1420 and B1620 are arranged at the operation end in the displacement due to the excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 (the long protruding portions B1433 and B1633 of the rotation members B1430 and B1630 are transmitted). The state where the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are improperly loaded and pulled out to the front side (longitudinal protruding portions B1433 and B1633 of the rotating members B1430 and B1630). May be configured to be detected by distinguishing them from a state in which they are pushed and displaced by the straight portions B1341, B1541 of the transmission holes B1340, B1540 and are still arranged in the straight portions B1341, B1541.

  As a result, whether the displacement of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is displacement due to excitation of the solenoids B1410 and B1610, whether it is an improperly applied load, or displacement due to frictional force between the opposite guide plates B22300 and B22500. The detection results (outputs) of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be determined, and early detection of fraud or abnormality can be achieved.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, when it is determined that either one of the guide plates B22300 or B22500 is illegally opened, the other is driven toward the open state as an emergency process, and the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are connected. Although the case where the control is performed so as to make it impossible to enter the ball has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be controlled to be easily opened.

  In this case, at least a part of the balls launched toward the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 enter the second winning opening 640, so that the balls illegally enter the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002. Can be reduced. If the length of the electric accessory 640a in the radial direction is extended so that all the balls reached in the open state enter the second prize opening 640, illegal entry into the specific prize opening B1001, B1002 Can be prevented.

  In addition, by making the number of prize balls to be paid out due to entering the second prize opening 640 one, it is possible to prevent the number of prize balls from exceeding the number of fired balls. Can be prevented from obtaining an illegal payout prize ball.

  If a store clerk who notices an error notification arrives while earning time by such control, even if a big win occurs in the lottery based on the entrance to the second winning opening 640, the big win is treated as invalid. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a person who performs an illegal act from acquiring an illegal profit.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are arranged behind the game area has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a space may be created in front of the game area by providing a depression in the glass unit 16 and the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 may be disposed there. Even in this case, by forming the detected portions of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 on the protruding tip side so as to be able to enter the detection grooves of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can guide the guide plates B22300, The position of B2500 can be detected.

  In this case, since the thickness of the constituent members that enter between the outside of the pachinko machine 10 and the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 can be reduced, the electromagnetic waves are weak when urging by electromagnetic wave irradiation is performed. Can also be easily detected.

  In the third control example of the twenty-second embodiment, the sixth operation pattern and the seventh operation pattern have been described as examples of the operation pattern in small hitting, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, driving at the small hit A may be either the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500. Further, the small hit A may be divided into the small hit A1 and the small hit A2, and only the first guide plate B22300 is driven in the small hit A1, and only the second guide plate B22500 is driven in the small hit A2. .

  Further, for example, the operation order of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 at the small hit A may be reversed. Further, the small hit A is divided into the small hit A3 and the small hit A4, and the first guide plate B22300 is driven first in the small hit A3, and the second guide plate B22500 is driven first in the small hit A4. Also good.

  Moreover, although the case where the number of times of opening and closing of one set is 2 in the small hit A has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be one time or may be three or more times. Moreover, although the operation | movement of 2nd guide plate B22500 produced after the operation | movement of 1st guide plate B22300 and the small hit operation | movement was complete | finished was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the operation set of the first guide plate B22300 and the operation set of the second guide plate B22500 may be alternately generated a plurality of times.

  For example, the operation order of the first guide plate B22300 and the second guide plate B22500 at the small hit B may be reversed. Further, the small hit B is divided into the small hit B1 and the small hit B2, and the first guide plate B22300 is driven to be retracted first in the small hit B1, and the second guide plate B22500 is retracted first in the small hit B2. You may make it drive so that. In addition, in the small hit B, the case where the number of opening / closing of one set is two has been described, but it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be one time or may be three or more times.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the operation pattern which was demonstrated as these small hits can be performed by MPU221 of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 (refer FIG. 4). In this case, for example, by configuring the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to be displaceable not only by the solenoids B1410 and B1610 but also by the transmission rotating body B7720 (see FIG. 179), it is possible to configure the control without fear of malfunction.

  That is, solenoids B1410 and B1610 are controlled by MPU 201 of main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), while transmission rotor B7720 is controlled by MPU 221 of sound lamp controller 113 (see FIG. 4). What is necessary is just to comprise.

  Moreover, although the case where the opening time of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 is 0.1 seconds in the small hit A and the small hit B has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the opening time may be extended to 0.2 seconds or more so that the ball can enter the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002.

  In the description of the eighth operation pattern and the ninth operation pattern, the confirmation operation is performed during the round, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, control may be performed so that a confirmation operation is performed during the interval.

  In the third control example, the small hit probability is set on the assumption that both of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are driven by the small hit game, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 may function as the first specific winning port B1001, and the second detection sensor B1250 may function as the second winning port 640. That is, whether or not the second guide plate B22500 is driven is determined by the lottery result of the second symbol.

  Thus, by detecting whether or not the variable winning device B22000 is operating normally, not only does there be an abnormality in entering the first specific winning port B1001 used in the jackpot game, It is possible to determine whether or not an abnormality occurs in the ball entering the second winning opening 640 used during the probability change.

  In this case, the first guide plate B22300 is driven by the execution of the small hit game, and if the lottery result of the second symbol is win, the second guide plate B22500 is driven. Therefore, the drive frequency of the guide plates B22300, B2500 is The probability obtained by adding the small hit probability and the winning probability of the second symbol is the reference. Therefore, the small hit probability set to drive the guide plates B22300 and B22500 at the same frequency as in the third control example (when at least one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 is driven by executing the small hit game) It can be made lower than the small hit probability in the three control examples.

  In the third control example described above, only the special symbol 1 jackpot has been described in the case where the round game R is operated in a control mode including a part of the sixth operation pattern and a part of the seventh operation pattern. It is not limited to this. For example, only in the jackpot of the special symbol 2, the round game R may be operated in a control mode including a part of the sixth operation pattern and a part of the seventh operation pattern. In this case, as a spec of the gaming machine, even when the big winnings of the special symbol 2 can occur excessively continuously (for example, when it occurs ten consecutive times on average), the occurrence of a defect occurring in the variable winning device B22000 during the big winning game is overlooked. Can be found without

  In addition, for example, in both the special symbol 1 jackpot and the special symbol 2 jackpot, the round game R is operated in a control mode including a part of the sixth action pattern and a part of the seventh action pattern. May be. In this case, when the special symbol 2 jackpot occurs without going through the special symbol 1 jackpot (for example, in a normal state, the second winning slot 640 is configured to be able to win, or the path downstream of the predetermined winning slot Are branched, and a first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing in the first path can win a prize, and a second winning port 640 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing in the second path can win a prize. Even in the case of installation, it is possible to detect defects of the variable winning device B22000 early.

  In the third control example, the case where the error notification is immediately executed when the detection result of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 is different from the normal detection pattern in the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, even if it is detected that the detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are different from the normal detection pattern (defective), the error notification is not immediately executed, and the detection result is stored for a predetermined period. Error notification may be executed.

  For example, the detection result is stored in the main control unit MPU201, and error notification is not executed while the big hit game is continued or the probability variation state is continued, and the error notification is executed after the game state shifts to the normal state. You may make it control to. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied by avoiding a situation in which the game is stopped during the jackpot game or the probability change in which the player's interest is improved.

  In this case, since it is preferable that the game can be continued for a while after the defect is detected, the threshold for determining that the detection results of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 are different from the normal detection pattern is set to the loose side (error It is preferable to set the value closer to the strict side (the side where the allowable error is small) rather than the side where the allowable value is large.

  In the third control example, in the ninth operation pattern, one guide plate B22300, B22500 is operated to displace the other guide plate B22500, B22300 to the open state immediately after the displacement to the closed state is started. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control may be performed so that the other guide plates B22500 and B22300 are actuated to be displaced to the open state immediately before one of the guide plates B22300 and B22500 starts to be displaced to the closed state.

  In this case, the time during which both guide plates B22300 and B22500 operate simultaneously can be made relatively long. In addition, even if simultaneous operation occurs, if both guide plates B22300 and B22500 are in an open state (a state in which they are disposed in the front), both the special winning openings B1001 and B1002 are closed and carefully. If configured, both guide plates B22300, B2500 are configured to prevent the balls from entering the specific winning holes B1001, B1002 whenever both guide plates B22300, B22500 operate simultaneously. It is possible to prevent a special winning opening B1001, B1002 from being won by mistake.

  In the third control example, the case where both the guide plates B22300 and B22500 are controlled to be opened and closed by the small hit game and the big hit game has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the big hit game, only the first guide plate B22300 may be configured to open and close, and in the small hit game, only the second guide plate B22500 may be configured to open and close.

  In this case, the operation pattern in the small hit game is an operation pattern in which a ball entering the second specific prize opening B1002 is likely to occur (for example, an operation pattern that maintains an open state for 1.8 seconds, or is intermittently repeated). The operation pattern in which the total of the opened state is within 1.8 seconds may be used. According to this, it is possible to configure a case where the second guide plate B22500 is opened due to a ball entering the second winning port 640 during the probability change, and it is possible to enter the second specific winning port B1002. Therefore, it is possible to execute a game that is probably changing in a state in which a payout prize ball can be obtained by entering the second specific prize opening B1002.

  In this case, the setting of the small hit determination value in the lottery of the special symbol 2 is not limited to the above case, and can be arbitrarily set. For example, during probability change (or during normal or short time), most values (for example, 10 to 319) of the first per-random number counter value C3 in the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 may be set as the small hit determination value. . In this case, every time the player enters the second winning opening 640, the second guide plate B22500 can be opened, and the entering into the second specific winning opening B1002 can be frequently generated.

  And according to this embodiment, since the defect which may arise in 1st guide plate B22300 can be aimed at early using the displacement of 2nd guide plate B22500, a big hit game is started and 1st guide plate B22300 is started. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a failure of the first guide plate B22300 is detected only after driving is started.

  The same applies to the first guide plate B22300. That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to detect defects that may occur in the second guide plate B22500 using the displacement of the first guide plate B22300, so that the big hit game is finished and the state is changed to a probable change state. Only when the second guide plate B22500 is started to be driven can a situation in which a failure of the second guide plate B2500 is detected be easily avoided.

  As a result, for example, the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained in the game that is being changed is set to be larger than the number of payout prize balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game, thereby driving the first guide plate B22300. Even for gaming machines in which the driving of the second guide plate B22500 occurs more frequently, it is possible to detect defects in the variable winning device B22000 early.

  That is, at least a configuration in which a defect on the low operation frequency side of the first guide plate B22300 or the second guide plate B22500 can be detected at an early stage by using the drive displacement on the high operation frequency side. By configuring in this way, it is possible to detect defects in the variable winning device B22000 early. As a result, it is possible to detect a defect in the variable winning device B22000 and repair it before the gaming state shifts to an advantageous state where a large amount of payout winning balls can be obtained, so that the player suffers unexpected disadvantages. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the player's interest is reduced.

  In the third control example, the case where both the solenoids B1410 and B1610 can be excited simultaneously has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured such that excitation at the same point is mechanically prevented. That is, the switching means constituted by a switching device such as an existing switch relay (reed relay, non-contact relay) is upstream of the circuit for energizing the first solenoid B 1410 and upstream of the circuit for energizing the second solenoid B 1610. The first relay B1410 and the second solenoid B1610 can be energized, the first solenoid B1410 can be energized, and the second solenoid B1610 can be energized. It is configured to be switchable depending on the state. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation in which both solenoids B1410 and B1610 are energized by the function of the switch relay.

  In the third control example, a case has been described in which the small winning in the special symbol 2 lottery is set to be more likely to occur than the small winning in the special symbol 1 lottery. It is not something that can be done. For example, the occurrence frequency of small hits may be set so that the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2 are equal. Further, it may be set so that the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol 1 is more likely to occur than the small hit in the lottery of the special symbol 2.

  In this case, it is possible to make it easier to provide a comfortable game as compared to the case where the small winnings frequently occur during the probability change and the variable winning device B22000 operates. That is, during the probability change, the player's line of sight tends to gather on the right side of the game area, and if the small winning action of the variable winning device B22000 occurs in this state, the variable winning device B22000 is in contact with the player who is in the field of view. On the other hand, it seems as if an advantageous state has occurred, leading to confusion for the player. If this happens frequently, the dissatisfaction of the player may increase. For this reason, by suppressing the occurrence frequency of the small hits in the special symbol 2, it is possible to reduce the frequency of misleading the player as described above, so that the player can play more comfortably.

  In the third control example, the case has been described in which it is possible to determine whether or not there is a malfunction of the variable prize apparatus B22000 by the operation in the small hit game or the big hit game, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the startup process of the main controller 110, control is performed so that the solenoids B1410 and B1610 of the variable winning device B22000 are excited, and the variable winning device B22000 operates normally from the detection patterns of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222. You may make it determine whether it is. In this case, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable winning device B22000 operates normally every time the power is turned on.

  In this case, the functions of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 may be controlled to be stopped during the start-up process. As a result, for example, when the power is turned on while there is a game ball remaining in the game area, even if the remaining game ball enters the opening of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250 during the start-up process, the prize is awarded. It is possible to prevent the ball from being paid out. Therefore, it is impossible to realize a game mode (for example, a game mode in which the power is restored with a large number of game balls left in the game area) that attempts to obtain an illegal profit (prize ball) using a power failure. be able to.

  In the third control example, since the detection of the detected parts B22350 and B22550 by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 should not always occur during normal operation (the normal detection pattern is always a non-detection pattern), the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 If it is determined that the detected parts B22350 and B22550 have been detected, it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred based on the determination, so it is desirable to perform control so as to deal with them. For example, it may be controlled to execute error notification.

  Further, for example, control may be performed so as to execute driving for returning the guide plates B22300 and B22500 to the rear position (closed position). In this case, if the detection state of the detection sensors BSC 221 and BSC 222 does not change even after the control is executed, it is assumed that the outputs of the detection sensors BSC 221 and BSC 222 are changed due to illegally irradiated electromagnetic waves. It is preferable to immediately execute error notification so that the game cannot be continued.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 of the rotating member B23430 is smoothly displaced along the trajectory of the second curved portion B23343 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a configuration may be employed in which the displacement of the longitudinal protruding portion B23433 is not stable, and a malfunction may occur in which the first guide plate B23300 starts to be displaced due to a frictional force generated with the second curved portion B23343. In this case, an urging spring that urges the first guide plate B23300 to be displaced rearward is provided to generate an urging force that is greater than the frictional force, so that the longitudinal projecting portion B23433 is a straight portion B1341 of the transmission hole B23340. It is possible to prevent the first guide plate B23300 from being displaced in the front-rear direction before reaching the position (before the pushing force is generated).

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the position of the switching device B23800 is changed by the load from the solenoids B1410 and B1610 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, another drive device that changes the position of the switching device B23800 may be prepared. In this case, the configuration in which the engagement is performed in the drive released state and the engagement is released by driving the drive device is engaged in the drive state, and the engagement is released by releasing the drive of the drive device. Compared with the configuration, the energization time can be shortened, and the durability of the drive device can be improved.

  In this case, the driving of the switching device B23800 may be switched at the gaming state switching timing. For example, in a game other than a big hit game or a small hit game (usually during a short period of time, during probability change, etc.), it is switched so as to constitute an engaged state, and the engagement is released at the switching timing to the big hit game or the small hit game Switch to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the guide plates B1300 and B1500 from operating separately in a state other than the big hit game and the small hit game, so even if the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are illegally displaced, The specific winning openings B1001, B1002 can always be kept in a state where it is impossible to enter. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal prize ball from being paid out when the player enters the ball.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the operation order of the guide plates B23300, B23500 and the switching device B23800 is set by changing the shape of the transmission hole B23340. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the transmission hole B23340 may be the same, and the operation order may be set by changing the properties (hardness, repulsive force, etc.) of the material near the transmission hole B23340. In this case, the operation order can be changed between the operation by exciting the solenoids B1410 and B1610 and the operation not by exciting the solenoids B1410 and B1610 by setting the range in which the property is changed.

  For example, when the guide plate B23300, B23500 is illegally drawn forward by configuring only the rear side wall portion of the straight portion B1341 at the end opposite to the curved portion B1342 of the transmission hole B1340, the transmission hole B1340 The soft portion can be deformed first, and the timing at which the rotating member B23430 rotates can be delayed.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are switched according to the slide displacement of the slide main body B23810 is switched or operated independently is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be configured such that switching is performed not by slide displacement but by posture change. In this case, a space for securing the displacement amount of the slide displacement is not required, so that the degree of freedom of arrangement of the switching device B23800 can be improved.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case where the displacement allowed for the slide main body B23810 changes depending on the front-rear arrangement of the slide auxiliary part B23820 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a hook-like part that is bent into a hook shape is formed at the tip of the entrance protrusion B23821, and an engagement part that protrudes to be engageable with the hook-like part is formed inside the receiving recesses B23350 and B23550. In the state where the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are arranged at the closed position (the position retracted rearward), the engaging portion is located outside the displacement locus of the bowl-shaped portion, but the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are in the closed position. After the start of displacement from the front, the engaging portion may be configured to enter the displacement locus of the bowl-shaped portion. In this case, the state of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 can be switched between a state in which the guide plates B23300 and B23500 are interlocked and a state in which the guide plates B23500 can be independently operated, depending on whether or not the hooked portion and the engaging portion are engaged.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the case has been described in which the switching device B23800 is disposed on the back side of the game area, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the switching device B23800 may be arranged in the game area so that a collision with the game ball can occur. Even in this case, the state of the switching device B23800 is changed by driving the solenoids B1410 and B1610 of the variable winning device B23000, so that it is possible to maintain a certain level of gaming.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the slide auxiliary portion B23820 has been described as a rigid body, and the guide plates B23300 and B23500 have been described as being integrally displaced while being engaged with the entry protrusion B23821. It is not something that can be done. For example, the slide assisting part B23820 may be made of a resin material, and the entrance projecting part B23821 may be allowed to bend and deform. In this case, for example, when the first guide plate B23300 is forcedly displaced (for example, illegally) to the front side regardless of the driving force of the first solenoid B1410, the second guide is generated with a slight time delay. The plate B23500 is displaced to the front side. Thereby, the closed state of specific prize-winning openings B1001 and B1002 can be maintained.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, the shape of the portion where the slide auxiliary portion B23820 is connected to the slide main body portion B23810 is illustrated in a simplified manner, but the shape of this portion can be arbitrarily designed. For example, as illustrated, a mode in which a member having a shape corresponding to a rectangular recess is inserted may be used.

  Further, for example, the groove cross section of the long groove is formed in a T shape having a wide deep portion, the connecting portion on the slide auxiliary portion B 23820 side is formed in a T shape, and the connecting portion is inserted from the long direction of the groove. But it ’s okay. In this case, when the wide portion is caught, it is possible to prevent the slide auxiliary portion B23820 from coming off from the slide main body B23810. Further, design contrivances such as providing a taper (inclined surface) at the corner of the T-shape can be arbitrarily performed.

  In the twenty-third embodiment, both of the guide plates B23300 and B23500 have been described as members related to the opening / closing of the specific winning ports B1001 and B1002, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the first guide plate B23300 is configured as a member used for opening and closing the specific winning opening B1001, while the second guide plate B23500 is configured as a member used for opening and closing the start opening (for example, the second winning opening 640). May be. In this case, the entrance that can prevent entry by engagement using the switching device B23800 can be expanded to the start entrance. Further, the present invention is not limited to the member used for opening and closing the start port, and may be configured as a movable member that is controlled so as to operate at a constant level after the power is turned on.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is maintained by the configuration of the transmission rotating body B24720 when the solenoids B1410 and B1610 are in a non-excited state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the transmission rotating body B24720 is omitted, the arrangement of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be maintained by the frictional force between the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

  That is, by configuring so that a frictional force greater than the biasing force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 is generated between the guide plates B1300 and B1500, for example, after exciting both solenoids B1410 and B1610, the first Even if the solenoid B1410 is de-energized, the first guide plate B1300 can be maintained in the forward position by the frictional force generated between the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

  In this case, the frictional force may always be generated, or may be configured to change according to the front and rear positions of the guide plates B1300 and B1500. For example, the gap between the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is widened so that the frictional force when the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are arranged at the rear position is smaller than the urging force of the return springs of the solenoids B1410 and B1610. By eliminating the contact by interposing a member, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the guide plates B1300 and B1500 cannot be independently displaced forward.

  In this case, a further advantage is that the player cannot recognize the operation pattern of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 even when viewing the guide plates B1300 and B1500. In other words, it can be configured such that the operation pattern of the solenoids B1410 and B1610 can be noticed only after the balls reach the guide plates B1300 and B1500, so that the aim is set when the solenoids B1410 and B1610 have a specific operation pattern. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to play a game for launching a ball toward the specific winning openings B1001, B1002.

  Note that this effect is, for example, that the first specific prize opening B1001 has a function as a winning ball opening in the big hit game, and the second specific prize opening B1002 functions as a specific area for acquiring an advantageous state. In a pachinko machine configured to have a game (for example, a pachinko machine configured such that a game state after a big hit game is shifted to a certain change state by entering a specific area by entering a specific area) This is particularly effective when the possibility of entering the second specific winning opening B1002 changes due to the difference in the operation patterns of the guide plates B1300 and B1500.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case where the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are configured to generate a profit difference in the number of paid-out prize balls and the number of counts has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a profit difference may be generated with respect to a probability of entering a specific area, a continuation probability of an advantageous state, and the like.

  In this case, not only the special game being executed but also the other games executed following the special game (the next special game, the special game, etc.) This leads to a difference in profits in a ball game that is performed for the purpose of shifting to a state, so that it is possible to improve attention to the balls that have been launched into the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the production sections B24760 and B24770 have been described as sections constituting a state in which a ball is guided to any one of the specific winning ports B1001 and B1002, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, by adjusting the arrangement relationship of the groove shapes of the production sections B24760 and B24770, in addition to the above state or in place of the above state, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both displaced forward, Both of them are retracted rearward due to the load of the ball, making it impossible to guide the ball to the specific winning holes B1001 and B1002, and by restricting the arrangement while the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are both displaced forward, the specific winning holes You may make it comprise the state which becomes impossible to guide a ball | bowl to B1001 and B1002.

  In this case, compared with the case where it is determined that the ball that has reached the pre-entry range will enter either of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002, the vertical range of the profit difference obtained by the player is increased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the range before entering the ball.

  In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the case has been described in which when the ball reaches the pre-entry range, either of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is pushed backward to be displaced by the load from the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. For example, the ball can be discharged from the intersection of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 through the discharge port B7160, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are moved backward until the predetermined number of balls stays in the guide plates B1300 and B1500. You may comprise so that it cannot be displaced.

  In this case, the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are not pushed and displaced by the load of the balls until the plurality of balls are collected in the pre-entrance range, and thus a sufficient load is generated during the rotation of the transmission rotating body B24720. It is possible to reduce the possibility that any of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is pushed backward and displaced at an inappropriate timing.

  In this case, for example, if the outlet B7160 is an outlet that only discharges the ball from the game area, in order to reduce the useless balls as much as possible, a notification that promptly urges the player to launch the ball to the pre-entry range. Is assumed to be executed.

  Also, for example, if the outlet B7160 is a prize ball mouth, the ball is frequently reached to the pre-entry range, and one of the guide plates B1300, B1500 is displaced rearward, and any of the specific prize mouths B1001, B1002 It is possible to select whether to move to a state where the ball can enter or to maintain the state where the ball can enter the discharge port B7160 depending on the firing frequency or the arrival frequency of the ball to the pre-entry range. In addition, it is assumed that notification that suggests to the player is executed.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, there is a case where a difference occurs between the postures of the left and right rotating arm portions B25641 by configuring the pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 to be relatively rotatable about the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645. Although described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 are connected and fixed by a predetermined connecting portion, if the connecting portion is configured flexibly, the posture difference between the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 is caused by the deformation of the connecting portion. Can be generated.

  Moreover, although the case where a pair of left and right rotating arm portions B25641 are displaced by receiving a load from a single tip member B25111 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a plurality of tip members B25111 may be configured, and may be configured separately as each member that applies a load to the pair of rotating arm portions B25641.

  In this case, a different plunger may be provided corresponding to each tip member B25111. Thereby, since it is possible to easily form a state in which the front and rear positions of the respective front end members B25111 are different, the front end member B25111 can be firmly fixed to the plunger. Even in this case, the position of the tip member B25111 in the excited state can be arbitrarily set depending on the design of the stopper, and therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the posture of each electric accessory B640a in the open state remains. Can do. Further, when a plurality of plungers are provided, the number of solenoids that gives a driving force to each plunger may be one, or a plurality of solenoids may be provided.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when an unexpected load is applied to one of the electric combination B640a, the switching device B25700 interlocks the pair of electric combination B640a and unexpectedly sets both of the electric combination B640a. In the case where a load is applied, the case of suppressing the displacement of the pair of electric accessories B 640a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the switching device B25700 may be configured so as to suppress or restrict the displacement of the electric combination B640a regardless of the mode of the load applied to the electric combination B640a.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the description has been given of the case where the state in which load transmission occurs between the electric charges B640a and the state in which no load is generated can be switched by the presence or absence of excitation of the switching solenoid B25710, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, by devising the configuration of the transmission member B25640, it may be configured to be able to generate a load that moves the eccentric protrusion B640b to the left and right outwards.

  For example, the pair of rotating arm portions B25641 includes cylindrical portions that extend around the non-fixed connecting rod portion B25645 so that they can be circumscribed, and the cylindrical portions are in contact with each other at the extended ends. In this case, the contact surface may be formed as an inclined surface inclined with respect to a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis BJ1. In other words, the shape illustrated in the clutch mechanism configured so as to be able to engage with a triangular claw or a saw blade-shaped claw by forming a contact state and a non-contact state by bringing the cylinders or disks close to and away from each other. It may be adopted.

  In this case, when a difference in posture occurs in the rotating arm portion B25641 with reference to a state in which there is no posture difference in the pair of rotating arm portions B25641, the meshing state between the meshing teeth of the above shape changes, and the cylinder is changed accordingly. The left-right position of the shape part can be changed.

  Then, the second displacement without using the switching solenoid B25710 can be achieved by using the displacement in the left-right direction generated by the difference in posture of the rotating arm B25641 so as to be used for the displacement of the eccentric protrusion B640b. An effect of preventing a ball entering the winning opening 640 can be generated.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the case has been described in which the electric accessory B 640a is displaced so as to prevent the second winning opening 640 from entering the ball, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, in the case where a roof member is formed so that the ball does not fall vertically above the second winning opening 640, when the electric accessory B640a is tilted and displaced by the excitation of the drive solenoid B25110, the roof While the member does not displace, the roof member can be configured to move when the electric accessory B640a is displaced regardless of the excitation of the drive solenoid b25110, or can be expanded to the left and right according to the inclination of the electric accessory B640a. By being comprised, it is good also as a structure which can be displaced so that the clearance gap between the electrically-driven accessory B640a and a roof member may not be expanded. That is, the presence / absence of the interlock between the roof member and the electric accessory B640a may be switched depending on whether or not the control is performed by the solenoid.

  In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the material of the switching member B25720 is not particularly specified, but it may be a hard resin, a soft resin, or a metal. In addition, the direction which made it resin can relieve | moderate the stress which arises in the eccentric protrusion part B640b by deformation | transformation of switching member B25720.

  In each of the above embodiments, the movable member configured to be able to switch the path of the balls included in the variable winning devices B1000 to B24000 is mainly used to switch whether or not the balls can be entered into the specific winning ports B1001 and B1002. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is arranged on the downstream side of a predetermined specific winning opening and is used as a member for switching whether or not to enter a specific area where a player can acquire a predetermined profit by passing a ball. Also good.

  In this case, for example, the opening of the first detection sensor B 1230 and a specific region are provided on the downstream side thereof, while the opening of the second detection sensor B 1250 and the falling region (a big hit by the ball entering the ball) are provided downstream thereof. A region in which the gaming state after the game ends may shift to a low probability state) may be provided. In this case, since the profit obtained by the player varies significantly depending on whether the ball enters the first detection sensor B 1230 or the second detection sensor B 1250, the player's attention to the entering ball is improved. Can be achieved.

  In particular, as described in the variable winning device B24000 of the twenty-fourth embodiment, it is possible to enter the opening of the first detection sensor B1230 until the ball reaches the pre-entry range, or the opening of the second detection sensor B1250. When it is unclear whether or not it is possible to enter the game, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the range before entering the game.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the detection aspect in the case of entering into both 1st detection sensor B1230 and 2nd detection sensor B1250. For example, the player who has a larger number of balls may be valid, or if a ball entering one is detected, the ball entering the other may be invalidated, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, 1 Only the first or last sphere) may be valid.

  In each of the above embodiments, the gap between the guide plates B1300 and B1500 is ensured and the number of portions that rub against each other is reduced as much as possible. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a contact portion that secures an area that contacts each other is configured, and the guide plates B1300 and B1500 are configured to operate integrally in a normal state, and after both guide plates B1300 and B1500 are displaced forward, The solenoids B1410 and B1610 may be controlled so that one side is retracted backward.

  In this case, it is determined by the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222 that the contact portion gradually rubs and stops operating integrally, thereby determining that the number of operations of the variable winning device B1000 has reached a predetermined value (limit value). Can do. Based on this determination, it is possible to make it easier to grasp that the variable winning device B1000 has reached the replacement timing by informing the third symbol display device 81, the acoustic device, or the like.

  In each of the above embodiments, as a result of collating the normal detection pattern with the outputs of the detection sensors BSC221 and BSC222, an error notification is given when there is a mismatch, or during normal operation (the movable members of the variable winning devices B1000 to B24000 are closed) In this state, the error notification is performed when it is determined that the sphere has passed through the openings of the detection sensors B1230 and B1250. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be controlled to execute a predetermined notification when the entry of a launch ball into the game area is detected.

  For example, when it is determined that a ball has been launched into the game area, the 3rd symbol display device 81 indicates the location to be aimed as the arrival position of the launch ball and the preferred launch timing by sound, light, image, etc. You may control to perform the alert | report shown so that a player may understand by display of "aim" etc.).

  In this case, based on the notification, the player can determine whether to adjust the firing strength of the ball or to select whether to continue or stop the firing of the ball. In other words, based on the notification, it is possible to give the player a feeling that he is playing in a more preferable game mode, so that he can remove some of the player's anxiety and improve the player's interests. Can be achieved.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where both of the specific winning openings B1001 and B1002 are arranged on the left and right sides of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, one specific winning opening B1001 may be arranged on the left and right sides of the guide plates B1300 and B1500, and the other specific winning opening B1002 may be arranged below the guide plates B1300 and B1500, or the other An opening / closing plate that opens and closes the specific winning opening B1002 by tilting forward may be provided, and the specific winning opening B1002 may be disposed behind the opening / closing plate. Further, the lower area of the guide plates B1300 and B1500 may be divided, and the specific winning ports B1001 and B1002 may be arranged in the divided areas. Thereby, the freedom degree of arrangement | positioning of variable prize-winning apparatus B1000 can be improved.

  In the twenty-eighth to thirty-third embodiments, the balls roll in series on the bottom surface portions C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140, and the distribution members C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portions C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling members). The case where only one ball flows into the moving parts C173, C2173, C3173) at the same time has been described, but the bottom surface parts C142, C2142 of the first intermediate members C140, C2140 can be rolled in parallel so that two balls can roll in parallel. Two or more balls may flow into the members C170, C2170, C3170 (receiving portions C172, C2172, C3172 or rolling portions C173, C2173, C3173) at the same time.

  In the twenty-eighth to thirty-third embodiments, the sphere flowing down the left side area (left side in FIG. 205) of the game area (the area between the center frame C86 (upper frame C86a) and the rail 61) Although the case where it flows into (enters into) the side frames C86b, C2086b, and C3086b has been described, instead of or in addition to this, it flows down the area on the right side (right side in FIG. 205) in the game area. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the sphere to be flowed (entered) into the lower frames C86b, C2086b, C3086b.

In the twenty-eighth to thirty-third embodiments, the case where one upper frame passage CRt0 communicates with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in has been described. However, a plurality of upper frame passages CRt0 are formed in the upper frame C86b, It may be configured to communicate with the receiving ports COPin and COP2000in.
In the twenty-eighth to thirty-third embodiments, the case has been described in which the sorting members C170, C2170, and C3170 are returned to the first position by their own weights. However, the biasing means is provided, and the biasing force of the biasing means is changed. You may provide as auxiliary | assistant force at the time of the division | segmentation member C170, C2170, C3170 returning to a 1st position. Or you may provide as auxiliary | assistant force at the time of the displacing member C170, C2170, C3170 moving to a 2nd position. Examples of the urging means include a coil spring, a torsion spring, and a leaf spring.

  In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the case where the sorting members C170 and C2170 are directly supported by the shafts C192 and C2174 has been described. However, the sorting members C170 and C2170 may be displaceable by a link mechanism. In this case, the link mechanism may be a parallel link mechanism or an unequal length link mechanism.

  In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the case has been described in which the passage (fourth passage CRt2004) through which the ball rolled on the rolling portion C2173 of the sorting member C2170 passes is formed by the magnetic portion C2400. In addition, the fourth passage CRt2004 may be formed as a passage through which the sphere rolls along the rolling surface and passes (flows down).

  In the thirtieth embodiment, the case where the guide groove C3131c is formed in a straight line has been described. However, the guide groove C3131c may be formed in a curved line. Moreover, the shape which combined the straight line and the curve may be sufficient.

  In the thirty-first embodiment, the arc portion C4122b of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 has been described as having a uniform arc shape in the top view (same curvature), but is not necessarily limited thereto. Arc shapes having different radii may be formed in combination. For example, the curvature of the arc on one end side and the other end side in the front-rear direction (arrow FB direction) of the arc portion C4122b is the arc in the region between the one end side and the other end side (the region including the outflow surface C122a). The curvature may be larger than the curvature, that is, the curvature of the arc in the region including the outflow surface C122a may be decreased. In this case, in the initial stage (the stage in which the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or to the vicinity thereof), the sphere facilitates the reciprocating movement and follows the preceding sphere. The rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is low (the ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a. In a stage in which the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow area including), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state where both balls are connected.

  In the thirty-first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in a plane including the extending direction (arrow FB direction) and the vertical direction (arrow UD direction) of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 is substantially horizontal in the arc portion C4122b. In other words, the upper surface (rolling surface) of the arc portion C4122b is formed as a plane orthogonal to the vertical direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the vertical direction downward (arrow D) It may be formed to be curved in an arc shape that is convex toward the direction. Alternatively, it may be formed as a downward inclined plane similar to the pair of linear portions C4122a, or may be formed as a downward inclined plane different from the pair of linear portions C4122a. Thus, at the initial stage (the stage where the sphere reciprocates to one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or to the vicinity thereof), the sphere is easily reciprocated and the sphere following the preceding sphere. The rolling speed of the reciprocating ball is reduced (the ball does not reach one end side and the other end side in the longitudinal direction of the lower bottom surface portion C4122 or the vicinity thereof, and the outflow surface C122a In a stage in which the sphere reciprocates in a relatively narrow region including), it is possible to easily maintain a state in which the preceding sphere and the following sphere are connected. As a result, it is possible to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3) while maintaining the state where both balls are connected.

  In the thirty-first embodiment, the lower bottom surface portion C4122 (the straight line portion C4122a and the circular arc portion C4122b) may be formed to be inclined downward in the direction away from the notch portion C124a (arrow L direction). As a result, while pressing the sphere against the lower side wall C4124 located on the opposite side (opposite side) to the notch C124a, the sphere rolls (reciprocates) at the lower bottom C4122 (second passage CRt4002). Can be made.

  In the twenty-eighth, twenty-ninth and thirty-first embodiments, a protrusion may be provided around the outflow surface C122a in the vertical direction upward (arrow U direction). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball from rolling from the outflow surface C122a to both ends in the extending direction of the lower bottom surface portions C122, C2122, and C4122, and to easily flow out (flow down) to the bottom surface portion C142 (third passage CRt3). .

  In the thirty-second embodiment, the case where the cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the magnetic part C5400 is linearly formed in the width direction (arrow FB direction) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the magnetic part The cross-sectional shape of the bottom surface of the protrusion of C5400 may be formed to be curved in an arc shape. When the arc shape has a radius substantially the same as the radius of the sphere and is convex upward in the vertical direction (arrow U direction), the contact area between the sphere and the magnetic part C5400 can be increased. It can suppress falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic part C5400. On the other hand, when the arc shape is convex downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction), it is possible to form a sphere that swings when it flows down, and the sphere may drop from the magnetic part C5400 (fifth path) The possibility that CRt2005 cannot be reached can be increased. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the behavior of the ball and enhance the interest of the game.

  In the thirty-third embodiment, the case has been described in which the bottom surface of the protrusion of the magnetic part C6400 is formed as an inclined surface facing the back member C2130 (that is, a surface closer to the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be formed as an inclined surface facing the side opposite to the back member C2130 (that is, a surface that is separated from the back member C2130 as it goes upward in the vertical direction). Thereby, the sphere adsorbed by the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130 can be disposed at a distance from each other, and the contact of the sphere flowing down along the magnetic part C6400 and the back member C2130 can be suppressed. .

  In the twenty-ninth and thirty-third embodiments, the inclined surface (that is, the vertical direction) that approaches the magnetic parts C2400, C6400 side (arrow F direction side) as the main body C2131 of the back member C2130 moves downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction). The lower part may be formed as a surface closer to the magnetic part C2400, C6400 side. Thereby, the spheres flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400 and C6400 can be sandwiched between the magnetic parts C2400 and C6400 and the back member C2130, and the spheres fall before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400 and C6400. Can be suppressed.

In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments, in addition to the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130, a magnet C2300 may be additionally disposed vertically below (in the direction of arrow D). . When the added magnet C2300 is disposed vertically above the center of the sphere attracted by the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 (in the direction of the arrow U), the magnetic force acting on the sphere by the added magnet C2300 is reduced. Since the direction is on the upper side in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the sphere from falling before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. On the other hand, when the added magnet C2300 is disposed vertically downward (in the direction of arrow D) from the center of the sphere attracted by the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400, the added magnet C2300 acts on the sphere. Since the direction of magnetic force is on the lower side in the vertical direction,
The possibility that the sphere is dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 (possibility of not reaching the fifth passage CRt2005) can be increased.

  In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments, the magnet C2300 disposed on the back surface of the back member C2130 may be formed to extend vertically downward (arrow D direction). Thereby, in addition to the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400, the sphere can be attracted by the effect of the magnetic force directly acting from the magnet C2300, and the sphere falls before moving to the downstream end of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. Can be suppressed.

  In the twenty-ninth, thirty-second and thirty-third embodiments, a difference in strength may be provided between the magnetic forces of a plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400. For example, when the magnetic force of the magnet C2300 disposed on the upstream side is stronger than the magnetic force of the other magnet C2300, the sphere that has rolled on the upper surface (rolling surface) of the rolling part C2173 is used as the magnetic part C2400, C5400, C6400. In other words, it can be easily guided to the fourth passage CRt2004. Further, for example, when the magnetic force of one magnet C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 is weaker than the magnetic force of the other magnet C2300, a sphere passing through the one magnet C2300 can be dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. (The possibility that the fifth passage CRt2005 cannot be reached) can be increased. Thereby, the interest of play can be improved.

  In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments, the arrangement direction of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 may be changed. For example, with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnet C2300 arranged on the upstream side, the arrangement direction of the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side is arranged to be inclined downward in the vertical direction (arrow D direction), in other words, the magnet C2300 When arranged in a convex shape, the sphere flowing down along the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400 can be easily directed to the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side, and the sphere falls from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, and C6400. Can be suppressed. On the other hand, with respect to the arrangement direction of the magnet C2300 arranged on the upstream side, the arrangement direction of the magnet C2300 arranged on the downstream side is arranged so as to be inclined upward in the vertical direction (in the direction of arrow U). When arranged in a concave shape, there is a possibility that the sphere may fall from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 at the boundary between the upstream side and the downstream side of the magnet C2300 (the possibility that the fifth passage CRt2005 cannot be reached). Can be high. Further, the arrangement shape of the magnets C2300 may be formed in a straight line shape or an arc shape. Further, instead of the magnet C2300, the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, and C6400 may be arranged in the above-described shape (convex shape or concave shape, linear shape or arc shape).

  In the 29th, 32nd and 33rd embodiments, the adjacent magnets C2300 of the plurality of magnets C2300 arranged along the longitudinal direction of the magnetic portions C2400, C5400, C6400 may be formed apart from each other. In this case, it is possible to create a section where no magnetic force is applied to the sphere in the extending direction of the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400. In this section, the sphere may be dropped from the magnetic parts C2400, C5400, C6400 (fifth passage). The possibility that CRt2005 cannot be reached can be increased.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V-zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.

<Direction incorporating randomness>
A gaming machine comprising: an action means; and a displacement means configured to be displaceable by receiving an action from the action means, and an auxiliary means configured to have a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. A1.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that is disposed displaceably on the front side of a liquid crystal display region and includes a displacement means that is displaced in accordance with driving of a driving device such as a motor (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-153095). See). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that the operation pattern of the displacement means is poor, the effect on the front side of the liquid crystal display area becomes monotonous, and the player's attention gradually decreases.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement of the displacement means can be complicated by the function of the assistance means in which the assistance means has a plurality of displacement modes of the displacement means. This can prevent the player from getting bored and keep the player's attention high.

  In addition, the specific example of an auxiliary | assistant means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a box-shaped space forming means that constitutes a space in which the displacement means can be displaced, or a push that changes the displacement mode of the displacement means by displacing the displacement means by a driving device different from the action means. Means may be used. Further, the driving device for the pushing means may also be used as the driving device for driving the action means.

  In the gaming machine A1, the action means can be configured in a first state in which the first action part can act on the displacement means and in a second state in which the second action part can act on the displacement means. A gaming machine A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine A1, since the portion when the action means acts on the displacement means can be made different, even if the movement of the action means is the same, the displacement The displacement mode of the means can be varied.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, the action means includes a contact means that abuts against the displacement means to give a load, and is configured to be able to generate a load in a plurality of types through the contact means. A gaming machine A3.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, since there are a plurality of types of loads generated through the contact means, the displacement modes of the displacement means can be set to a plurality of types.

  In the gaming machine A3, the contact means is configured to be displaceable, a first contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and configured to be able to contact the displacement means, the first contact. A second contact portion different from the portion, and an angle in a predetermined direction view between the displacement direction of the contact means and the first contact portion (or the tangent line of the first contact portion) is The gaming machine A4 is configured to be different from an angle in the predetermined direction view between a displacement direction of the contact means and the second contact portion (or a tangent line of the second contact portion).

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the direction of the load applied to the displacing means can be varied without changing the displacement direction of the abutting means. Can be generated in the direction of

  In the gaming machine A4, the contact means is a tangent drawn to the first contact portion and the second contact portion, and parallel to each other so that the tangent lines are orthogonal to the displacement direction of the contact means. A gaming machine A5 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, a load can be applied to the displacement means in a direction parallel to the plane along the displacement direction of the contact means, so that the displacement means can be displaced with less energy loss. Can be made. Thereby, a large amount of displacement of the displacement means can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A5, a load generating unit configured to generate a load for displacing the action unit is provided, and the load generating unit is loaded at a position where the disposing unit is arranged more densely. A gaming machine A6 that is configured to generate

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the load can be efficiently transmitted to the displacing means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the action means is supported in a support mode that allows a posture change, and the posture change occurs on a side where it is easy to maintain a balance of arrangement of the displacement means with respect to the action means. A gaming machine A7.

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, it is possible to maintain the balance of the arrangement of the displacement means by the posture change of the action means, so that there is an overload locally on the action means. It can be avoided.

  In addition, the cause which the attitude | position change of an action means produces is not limited at all. For example, it may be caused by balance of loads from the displacement means, or a drive device that changes the posture of the action means may be provided. When the posture change of the action means is caused by the balance of the load from the displacement means, the posture of the action means can be easily changed by providing a plurality of lengths from the facing portion to the displacement means to the support position of the action means. A plurality of types can be generated.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the auxiliary means includes guide means configured to be able to guide the displacement of the displacement means, and the guide means can guide the displacement in one direction of the displacement means. A first guide portion and a second guide portion capable of guiding displacement in the other direction of the displacement means, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion face the displacement means. The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that the formation modes of are different.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be varied in accordance with the displacement direction of the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the action means is configured to be displaceable, and is configured so that the ease of maintaining the balance of the displacement means varies depending on the arrangement, and at a position where it is easy to maintain the balance of the displacement means. A gaming machine A9 configured to be able to act on the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, it is possible to easily maintain the balance of the displacement means with respect to the action means.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the displacing means includes one or more members, and they are configured not to be coupled to each other.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, when the displacement means is composed of a plurality of members, it is possible to prevent the plurality of members from being combined and solidified. Therefore, a configuration in which a plurality of members are scattered can be easily realized.

  In the gaming machine A10, the center of gravity of the one or more members is arranged at a position different from the center of the member.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A10, the attitude of the displacement means when the displacement means is arranged in the action means can be stabilized.

  In addition, the formation method of a gravity center is not limited at all. For example, a method of partially changing the density of the member or a method of partially making a hole in the member may be used.

<Change due to advancing / retreating means that moves forward / backward within the displacement range of the displacement means>
An arrangement unit configured to be displaceable in a predetermined range; and an advance / retreat unit configured to be displaceable in an advance / retreat direction with respect to the range, the advance / retreat unit entering the predetermined part of the range, The gaming machine B1 is configured so that the width of the game machine can be changed, and the change modes of the width are plural types.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a gaming machine comprising a first movable member that is displaced to the left and right and a second movable member that enters a range generated between the first movable members in accordance with the displacement of the first movable member. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is only one displacement mode when the second movable member enters the range, and there is room for improvement in the displacement mode of the second movable member.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, since the advancing / retreating means has a plurality of types of change modes of the width of the range when entering the range, the displacement means of the arranging means can be configured by a plurality of types. The displacement mode can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of an arrangement | positioning means is not limited at all. For example, a granular effect member formed from a resin material, a powder member, a liquid, or a game ball may be used.

  In addition, the method of configuring a plurality of types of changes in the width of the range due to the displacement of the advance / retreat means is not limited. For example, the entry side portion of the advance / retreat means may be formed by an inclined surface, and the range width may be changed by providing a portion having a different width to enter the range, or the range of the advance / retreat means may be changed by changing the displacement width. The width may be variable.

  In the gaming machine B1, the range is formed inside a box-like means configured to prevent the placement means from entering and exiting, and is configured to be changeable, and the advance / retreat means enters the non-change state of the range. The gaming machine B2 is configured to be displaceable in an aspect, and the box-like means includes an opening portion that can be inserted through the advance / retreat means and cannot be inserted through the arrangement means.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1, the advancement / retraction means can be entered into the range through the opening portion, while the arrangement means can be prevented from falling off from the range.

  In addition, the arrangement | positioning of an open part is not limited at all. For example, you may arrange | position in the location which an arrangement | positioning means cannot reach easily. In this case, it is possible to further reduce the possibility that the disposition means will accidentally fall out of the range. Moreover, you may arrange | position an open part in the location (for example, the upper side as the reverse side of a gravitational direction) where the load from an arrangement | positioning means does not produce easily. In this case, it is possible to avoid the load from the disposing means being applied to the advancing / retreating means that is being displaced, and the displacement of the advancing / retreating means being obstructed or the occurrence of a defect in the advancing / retreating means or the disposing means can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the advancing / retreating unit is configured such that the direction in which the arranging unit is guided differs according to the direction in contact with the arranging unit.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B1 or B2, it is possible to show the player that the placement means is guided in different directions by the same advance / retreat means. Thereby, since the kind of effect can be increased, the effect effect of the effect using the arrangement | positioning means and the advance / retreat means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advance / retreat means is configured such that a gap between the advancing surface and the facing surface of the range is shorter than a width of the arrangement means in the state of entering the range. A gaming machine B4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the advancement / retraction means can be used as the arrangement means even when the arrangement means is arranged on the side far from the advance / retreat means. Can act.

  In addition, you may comprise so that there may be no clearance gap between an advancing / retreating means and the opposing surface of a range. Further, it may be configured such that a part has a gap and the other part has no gap.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the advance / retreat means is configured to enter the range by a rotational displacement about a predetermined axis, and a representative tip portion farthest from the shaft is the tip at the approach side. A gaming machine B5, characterized in that the gap between the ranges is the shortest.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the representative tip portion that is likely to have the largest positional deviation from the axis first enters the range, so that It is possible to cope with the misalignment at an early stage, and it is possible to reduce the resistance of the subsequent approach operation.

  In the gaming machine B5, the representative distal end portion is provided with a predetermined overhang portion, and is formed so as to be inclined toward the side away from the range as the distance from the overhang portion in the axial direction increases. A gaming machine B6.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B5, the placement means can be displaced so as to be away from the predetermined overhanging portion in the process of advancement / retraction means.

  In the gaming machine B6, the advance / retreat means is configured to have a shape in which the range side is opened at a position away from the projecting portion in the axial direction.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine B6, the shape of the advance / retreat means is such that the range side is opened at a position away from the overhanging portion, so that the disposing means pushed away by the overhanging portion Can be secured.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a shape by which the range side is open | released. For example, the shape in which the range side is opened before the advance / retreat means enters, or the shape in which the range side is opened in a state where the advance / retreat means has entered may be used.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the game apparatus includes a driving unit capable of generating a driving force, and a transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the advancing / retreating unit. Is configured so that the driving force is transmitted by contact, and the contact area of the contact surface between the transmission means and the advance / retreat means can be changed, and the contact area is the entry of the advance / retreat means into the range. A gaming machine B8 that is configured to maximize initially and then decrease.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the contact area is maximized at the beginning of entry when the advancing / retreating means starts to come into contact with the arranging means and a large load is likely to occur. As a result, the load per unit area of the contact surface can be reduced. Thereby, the durability of the advance / retreat means and the transmission means can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect of an advance / retreat means is not limited at all. For example, a means for displacing outside the game area or a means for displacing within the game area may be used.

<Synchronized operation of two members with transmission cam>
A drive unit; a displacement unit configured to be displaceable and configured by one or a plurality of members; and a transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the drive unit to the displacement unit. A first transmission unit configured to transmit a driving force of the driving unit to a first target unit of the displacement unit in a first mode; and a second mode different from the first mode of the displacement unit. A gaming machine C1 comprising: a second transmission unit configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving unit to the second target unit.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the driving device is used for displacement of the displacement means, and includes a first drive device for moving the displacement means up and down and a second drive device for rotating the displacement means. There is a gaming machine (see, for example, JP-A-2006-202210). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if the first driving device and the second driving device are synchronized to displace the plurality of displacing means in order to execute the operation effect of the displacing means, the driving timing is shifted. There is a problem that the possibility cannot be excluded and the displacement of the displacement means tends to become unstable.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the first transmission unit and the second transmission unit are disposed in the transmission unit so that the driving force is transmitted to the first target unit or the second target unit of the displacement unit, respectively. Since it is comprised, the transmission of the driving force to the 1st object part and the 2nd object part can be automatically synchronized, and the displacement of a displacement means can be stabilized.

  In addition, the time when a driving force is transmitted is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the driving force is transmitted to the first target unit and the second target unit at the same time may be used, the time when the driving force is transmitted may be divided, or a combination thereof (partially transmitted simultaneously) may be used.

  Moreover, when transmitting a driving force simultaneously to a 1st object part and a 2nd object part, it is preferable to arrange | position so that the generation direction of at least one part of a driving force may follow a gravity direction. Thereby, the dead weight can be used for driving force transmission.

  In the gaming machine C1, the driving force transmission to the first target portion and the driving force transmission to the second target portion are configured to occur separately at different times.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C1, the driving force required for the driving means can be suppressed by reducing the maximum value of the driving resistance.

  Here, the driving force transmission may mean a load in the traveling direction in which the transmission means is displaced by the driving force, or as a load transmission generated by a displacement caused by the driving force without considering the traveling direction. Also good.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the displacement means includes a first member having the first target portion and a second member having the second target portion, and the displacement locus of the first member and the second member The displacement trajectory is configured to partially intersect, and the first member is configured to be able to contact the second member in a predetermined arrangement, and in the contacted state, the first member is interposed through the first member. A gaming machine C3 configured to be capable of transmitting a driving force to the second member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, a plurality of types of states in which the driving force is transmitted to the displacement means can be configured. In other words, a case where the driving force is directly transmitted to the second member from the transmitting means and a case where the driving force is indirectly transmitted via the first member can be configured.

  In the gaming machine C3, in a state where the first member is displaced toward the predetermined arrangement, the second member is configured to be retractable to a position where it does not contact the first member. .

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C3, it can be avoided that the first member being displaced comes into contact with the second member. As a result, the contact between the second member and the first member occurs in a state where the first member has arrived at the predetermined position and stopped, so that the mode of driving force transmission to the second member is smoothly switched. Can be made easier.

  In the gaming machine C3 or C4, the state of the first member is associated with the arrangement of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3 or C4, the driving force transmission mode can be switched by changing the arrangement of the transmission means, so that the displacement of the first member and the second member is stabilized. And unintentional collision or contact of each member can be avoided.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C5, an urging unit configured to urge the second member in a predetermined direction is provided, and driving force transmission to the second member is performed in a direction opposite to the urging force. The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that the first member is arranged on the predetermined direction side with respect to the second member in the predetermined arrangement.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C3 to C5, the first member is in a predetermined arrangement in a state where the second member is arranged on the opposite side to the first direction in the predetermined direction. Can do. Thereby, the timing which displaces a 2nd member against an urging | biasing force with the displacement of a transmission means, and the timing which fastens a 2nd member against an urging | biasing force can be formed.

  In the gaming machine C6, the first member is configured to be displaced toward the predetermined arrangement while the first transmission portion of the transmission means is displaced toward the predetermined direction. .

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine C6, a part of the load necessary for the displacement of the first member can be generated by the biasing force of the biasing means. That is, the urging force can be used supplementarily.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the second transmission portion can be formed in a non-contact state that does not contact the second member, and in the non-contact state, the displacement of the second member The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the second member is configured so that the second transmission part does not interfere with the game.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines C3 to C7, the displacement state of the second member as the displacement state of the second member and the displacement state separated from the second transmission portion And can be configured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C3 to C8, a straight line extending in parallel with the predetermined direction from a contact point between the first member and the transmission unit arranged in the predetermined arrangement causes the displacement of the transmission unit to be in a predetermined mode. A gaming machine C9, characterized by passing through a regulating section to regulate.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C3 to C8, the urging force transmitted to the transmission means via the first member is blocked by the restriction unit, thereby reaching the driving means. Can be prevented (the degree can be reduced).

  In addition, the aspect of a control part is not limited at all. For example, a guide part that restricts the displacement mode to a slide displacement by restricting the displacement may be used, or a shaft support part that restricts the rotational displacement.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the first target portion of the displacement means receives a load from the first state where the first target portion is displaced or stopped by the driving force of the drive means, and the second target portion. The gaming machine C10 is configured to be able to change state between a second state where the state is displaced or stopped.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the displacement mode of the first target portion can be complicated.

<Load transmission is cut off by limiting the generation of load when it is away>
A gaming machine comprising a driving means, a displacing means configured to be displaceable, and a transmitting means configured to be able to transmit the driving force of the driving means to the displacing means. A first means configured to be able to change a state between a state and a non-contact state that is not in contact with the displacement means, and a target for transmitting a load applied from the outside to the first means is configured to be switchable. A gaming machine D1 characterized by that.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a displacement means composed of one movable body that is displaced by the driving force of the drive means can abut against another movable body at a displacement end position (upper position) and receive a load. (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-028623). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is a possibility that a load from another movable body may be transmitted to the driving unit via the displacement unit, and the state of the driving unit by control (for example, the rotation angle of the motor), Since there may be a difference in the actual state of the driving means, there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of stabilizing the driving state.

  Further, there is a possibility that the operating resistance of the driving means is unstablely increased or decreased due to the load applied to the driving means, and the deterioration of the driving means is accelerated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, since the load transmission in the contact state can be suppressed, the driving state of the driving unit can be stabilized. In addition, the durability of the driving means can be improved by suppressing an unstable increase or decrease in the operating resistance of the driving means.

  Note that the method of suppressing load transmission in the contact state is not limited in any way. For example, a member capable of absorbing the load may be interposed in the contact portion, and the displacement of the first means that causes the load (for example, the first means receives an external force) You may comprise so that it may generate | occur | produce only in a non-contact state.

  In the gaming machine D1, a gaming machine D2 characterized in that the load received by the displacement means from the first means and the driving force received by the displacement means via the transmission means face the same side.

  According to the gaming machine D2, it is possible to reduce the load received by the displacing means as compared with the case where the load from the first means and the driving force face opposite sides.

  The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes an arrangement means that is arranged so as to be able to collide with the first means, and the collision of the arrangement means is configured so that the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other. A gaming machine D3 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the collision of the arrangement means occurs when the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the load transmission is transmitted between the transmission means and the displacement means. Can be blocked.

  The collision of the arrangement means may occur in the contact state of the first means or may occur in the non-contact state. When the collision of the arrangement means occurs in the non-contact state, the load transmission between the first means and the displacement means can be interrupted, so the arrangement of the transmission means (the presence or absence of contact between the transmission means and the displacement means) ), The load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the transmission means includes a contact portion configured to be able to contact the displacement means, and the contact portion bends in a direction of a load generated by the contact ( The gaming machine D4 is configured to be flexible enough to be deformed).

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, load transmission between the displacement means and the transmission means is suppressed by absorbing the load by the bending (deformation) of the contact portion. can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the first means and the displacement means include a second contact portion configured to be contactable, and the second means of at least one of the first means and the displacement means. The abutting portion is formed of a material capable of absorbing shock, and the gaming machine D5.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the impact can be absorbed by the second contact portion, so that the load transmission to the driving means can be suppressed.

  Any one of the gaming machines D1 to D5 includes an urging means for urging the displacement means, and the standby position of the displacement means is set at an end of the urging direction displacement range of the urging means. A gaming machine D6.

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D5, it is possible to avoid shifting of the standby position of the displacement means (position waiting for load generation from the transmission means). It is easy to place the stop position (high-speed rotation start position) of the transmission means at an appropriate position in the control for operating the transmission means at a high speed to a position where the one means and the displacement means are separated from each other. Thereby, control of a drive means can be performed easily and appropriately.

  Further, by lowering the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first means and the displacement means, it is possible to avoid inadvertent contact between the first means and the displacement means.

  In any one of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the first means is allowed to change its posture accompanying the collision of the arranging means.

  According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D3 to D6, the load from the arranging means can be used for the posture change of the first means, so that the load transmission to the driving means is suppressed. be able to.

  In the gaming machine D6 or D7, the first means and the displacement means are in contact with each other, and the transmission means and the displacement means are not in contact with each other, so that the first means has the urging force of the urging means. The biasing state to be received, the transmission means abuts on the displacement means, displaces the displacement means to the opposite side of the direction of the biasing force of the biasing means, and the first biasing force of the biasing means is the first The gaming machine D8 is configured to be changeable between an invalid contact state in which transmission to the device is disabled and a non-contact state in which the first device and the displacement device are separated from each other.

  According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, it is possible to configure a plurality of types of states of the first means (for example, the degree of ease of posture change with respect to the collision of the placement means).

<Regularly restricting one of the forward and reverse rotations>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable along a path including a predetermined position, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable from the predetermined position to a reference position serving as a reference point whose displacement mode is changed. The gaming machine E1 is configured to be displaceable to the predetermined position in the manner described above.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the same movable accessory to perform different operations with a plurality of effects (for example, see JP-A-2006-73517). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the different operations correspond to the presence / absence of switching of the driving direction of the driving device, so that the type of effect can be determined from the driving sound of the driving device, and the effect to be executed from now on. Since the player can predict the above, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine the effect to be executed from now on by the determination participating means. Thereby, improvement of a player's interest can be aimed at.

  In addition, the displacement aspect of a displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it is good also as a different production | presentation with the displacement of a displacement means by a certain effect production | presentation and a removal production | presentation. In this case, if there is a single displacement mode of the displacement means to the predetermined position, it can be determined whether or not it is correct by causing displacement from the predetermined position (for example, driving sound is generated). On the other hand, by using a plurality of displacement modes, even if displacement occurs (for example, driving sound is generated), it is difficult to determine whether or not this is true.

  Further, the mode of displacement is not limited at all. For example, a path, a displacement speed, or a displacement speed pattern may be used.

  The gaming machine E1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force for displacing the displacing unit, and a regulating unit that regulates the displacement of the displacing unit. The regulating unit includes the driving unit that generates the driving force. A gaming machine E2 that is configured to be capable of restricting displacement of the displacement means in the absence of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1, the driving sound of the driving means can be turned off when the displacement means is restricted. It can be difficult to determine whether the direction is the reverse direction.

  Further, unlike the case where the driving means continues to generate a driving force when a long-time effect (long reach or the like) is executed in a state where the displacement of the displacement means is restricted, it is possible to suppress the driving means from generating heat.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, the restricting means is displaced to a position where it can act on the displacing means by the driving force of the driving means.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, the number of the driving means can be reduced as compared with the case where a driving means for driving the regulating means is provided separately.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine is provided with a discrimination participation means configured to have a section that makes it difficult to discriminate which mode is displaced among the plurality of types of modes. E4.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, it can be configured so that it is difficult to determine the displacement mode of the displacement means in a predetermined section by the determination participating means. As compared with the case where it is difficult to determine the displacement mode only in the case, it is possible to make it easier to continue the displacement of the displacement means until it is difficult to determine the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine E4, the gaming machine E5 is configured to be able to maintain the arrangement of the displacement means in the section.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine E4, it is possible to switch the driving direction of the driving means while maintaining the displacement means. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the type of displacement mode of the displacement means from being detected from the drive sound. Therefore, for example, it is possible to perform drive control such that driving of the driving unit is started before notification of the success / failure.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E5, a detection means capable of detecting the position of the displacement means is provided, and the detection means determines an executable displacement switch among the displacements in the plurality of types of displacement modes. A gaming machine E6 that is also used as a determination means.

  According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the position detecting sensor for the displacement means and the sensor for determining the displacement mode can be used together. The number of arrangements can be reduced.

<Integrity of multiple members>
A gaming machine in which the first member and the second member are configured to be displaceable, and the manner in which the first member and the second member are close to each other is different between the first member and the second member. A gaming machine F1 that is configured as follows.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that controls the first member and the second member configured to be displaceable to move up and down while maintaining a close state (for example, JP-A-2015-231434). See). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the displacement of the first member and the second member occurs on the same straight line. Therefore, depending on the approaching speed, there is a possibility that the first member and the second member will return after contact. Yes, it may look bad. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintaining the production mode regardless of the displacement speed.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, the proximity of the first member and the second member is made different. For example, the displacement mode of the first member and the second member is not close to each other on the same straight line, but is changed to approach each other after approaching on a separate straight line, so that the first member and the second member move closer to each other. Reversal can be avoided and the production mode can be easily maintained.

  In the gaming machine F1, the displacement of the first member and the second member is at least divided into a first section for approaching each other and a second section as a preparation section for contacting each other, and the first member and The gaming machine F2, wherein the second member is configured to have different postures in the first section and the second section.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the postures of the first member and the second member can be changed according to the purpose of displacement.

  In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the gaming machine F3 is provided with a load generating means capable of generating a load that is directed to the side where the first member and the second member are kept in close proximity.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1 or F2, the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be maintained by the load generating means.

  The load generated by the load generating means is not limited to a load in a certain direction or a load having a certain magnitude. For example, when a load (for example, an effect mode that generates an external force) that is likely to be received changes depending on the situation (for example, a gaming state), the direction and magnitude of the load generated by the load generation unit may be changed accordingly.

  Further, the load generated by the load generating means need not always be generated. For example, the generation of a load and the cancellation of the load may be switched in accordance with the change in the situation described above. The load generating means may be external.

  In the gaming machine F3, the gaming machine F3 includes displacement generating means configured to displace at least one of the first member and the second member, and configured to be able to configure a predetermined state by the displacement, and the load generating means includes the displacement A gaming machine F4 that is configured integrally with the generating means.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the relationship between the load generation timing by the load generating means and the arrangement of the first member and the second member can be properly maintained, and the timing shifted It is possible to prevent a load from occurring.

  Further, the action of the load generating means and the action of the displacement generating means can be complemented with each other. For example, the load of the load generating means can be used to assist the displacement of the first member or the second member caused by the displacement generating means.

  In the gaming machine F4, the predetermined state is a contact state in which at least a part of the first member is in contact with the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine F4, it is possible to easily execute the effect of filling the gap between the first member and the second member.

  In the gaming machine F4 or F5, the load generating means is configured to generate a load in the predetermined state.

  According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F4 or F5, it is possible to avoid the load of the load generating means from affecting the first member and the second member even in a state other than the predetermined state.

  In any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means is configured to generate loads at a plurality of locations with respect to the first member or the second member.

  According to the gaming machine F7, in any of the gaming machines F3 to F6, the load generating means generates loads at a plurality of locations with respect to the first member or the second member. Further, it is possible to maintain the state against the posture change of the first member or the second member. Thereby, even if it is a case where the 1st member and the 2nd member are constituted in three dimensions, it can avoid that a shift of arrangement is conspicuous.

  In the gaming machine F7, the first member or the second member includes a plurality of loaded portions that receive a load from the load generating unit, and the plurality of loaded portions include a first loaded portion and a first loaded portion thereof. A second loaded portion having a larger displacement relative to the load generating means than the loaded portion, and the load generating means applies the load to the first loaded portion before the second loaded portion. A gaming machine F8 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the load from the load generating means can be applied stepwise to the first member or the second member. Moreover, the role of the load given to a 1st to-be-loaded part and a 2nd to-be-loaded part can be divided. For example, the first loaded part can be used for the role of arrangement at a predetermined position, and the second loaded part can be used for the role of posture adjustment.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F8, the load generating means is configured such that the portion that applies a load directed to the side facing the gravity to the first member or the second member is the first member as compared to the other portions. Alternatively, the game machine F9 is characterized in that the length of the facing surface facing the second member is long.

  According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F8, it is possible to easily cope with the sagging due to the weight of the first member or the second member. On the other hand, with respect to the other portions, since the facing surface facing the first member or the second member can be formed short, the degree of freedom in designing the load generating means can be improved, or the facing surface can be easily hidden.

  In any one of the gaming machines F3 to F9, the first member and the second member can be assembled in a state where the first member and the second member are separated from each other. .

  According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F3 to F9, it is possible to easily prevent the first member or the second member from being cracked or chipped due to the load generated in the assembling work. That is, it is easier to avoid the occurrence of load transmission between the first member and the second member as compared with the case where the assembly work is performed in the contact state, so that the first member and the second member can be assembled without any defects. it can.

  As a result, the designed contact surfaces can be provided on the first member and the second member, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of misalignment due to the load generated by the load generating means, such as when there is a gap. can do.

<Multiple types of wobbling state of the displacement means>
A gaming machine G0 comprising a displacement means and an action means for displacing the displacement means, the action means being configured to suppress a change in posture of the displacement means in a predetermined direction.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to be able to be displaced by arrangement change and rotation (see, for example, JP-A-2006-116782). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, although the portion that supports the displacement means disposed at the tip of the arm is formed with a large diameter, the position of the displacement means is necessary because a gap is required to ensure the displacement. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of not enough measures against the change and suppressing the posture change of the displacement means.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G0, the posture change of the displacement means can be suppressed by the configuration of the action means. Thereby, even if the space where the displacement of the displacement means is allowed is small, it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the wall member forming the space and the displacement means.

  The direction of the posture change of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, tilting with a straight line along the horizontal direction (such as the horizontal direction) as an axis may be used, or horizontal swing with a straight line along the vertical direction (such as the vertical direction) as the axis may be used.

  In the gaming machine G0, the operating means is configured to be able to increase or decrease an operating force that suppresses a change in the attitude of the displacing means in accordance with an arrangement position of the displacing means.

  According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine G0, the degree of suppression of the posture change of the displacement means can be changed in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. Thereby, the arrangement space of a displacement means can be narrowed, maintaining the freedom degree of the production | presentation of a displacement means high.

  For example, when the displacement means is reciprocally displaced, the position of the displacement means tends to collapse at the displacement end where the displacement direction is switched. By increasing, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

  Also, for example, when the displacement means itself is enlarged / reduced or rotationally displaced by the driving force mounted on the displacement means, the position of the displacement means tends to collapse. By increasing the position where the acting force is generated, it is possible to suppress the collapse of the posture of the displacement means.

  In the gaming machine G0 or G1, the operating means is configured to support the displacement means with a plurality of main support means arranged on a horizontal plane passing through the center of gravity of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0 or G1, the action means supports the displacement means by a plurality of main support means on the horizontal plane at the center of gravity of the displacement means, thereby preventing the displacement means from tilting. Can be made easier.

  In the gaming machine G2, the operating means includes auxiliary support means for supporting the displacement means at a position different from a horizontal plane on which the main support means is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the main support means and the auxiliary support means support the displacement means at three or more support points that are not arranged in a straight line. The posture change can be suppressed in all directions.

  In the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means also functions as guide means for guiding the displacement of the displacement means relative to the action means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G3, the auxiliary support means can be added not only as a support force generation position but also as a position for guiding displacement.

  In the gaming machine G1, the displacement means can be displaced in such a manner that the area when viewed in a predetermined direction is increased or decreased, and the action means is configured such that an action force generation position is maximized at a displacement end position of the displacement means. A gaming machine G5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, it is possible to generate an acting force on the displacement means at a plurality of points at the displacement end position where the area increase effect of the displacement means is most effective. Thus, it is possible to effectively suppress the posture change of the displacement means.

  Furthermore, by relatively reducing the position where the acting force is generated during the displacement of the displacement means, the displacement resistance of the displacement means can be reduced and the displacement can be made smooth. That is, during the displacement of the displacement means, it is easy to maintain the posture due to the inertia accompanying the displacement, so if the acting force generation position is increased unnecessarily, the acting force becomes excessive and the displacement resistance of the displacement means increases frequently. The problem that the drive device becomes large is assumed.

  On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the displacement resistance of the displacing means from becoming excessive and to prevent the drive device from becoming large by reducing the acting force generation position at positions other than the displacement end position.

<Wiring guide for propeller unit>
Displacement means, electrical wiring connected to the displacement means, and electrical wiring displacement means configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electrical wiring, the electrical wiring displacement means, wherein the displacement means is the predetermined portion The gaming machine H1 is configured so that the predetermined portion can be displaced to the side avoiding the displacing means when displacing to the side approaching.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the electrical wiring connected to the displacement means is attached to a long member interlocked with the displacement means to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring (for example, JP 2012-157474 A). See the publication). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, in order to avoid contact between the displacement means and the electrical wiring, it is difficult to configure the displacement means to continue to be displaced beyond the electrical wiring. There is a problem that the space for disposing the electric wiring on the outside is necessary, so that the degree of freedom in disposing the displacement means is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the electric wiring displacing means is configured to be able to displace a predetermined portion of the electric wiring to the side avoiding the displacing means. Therefore, the displacement means can be configured to displace beyond the electrical wiring. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement of the displacement means.

  In addition, when a displacement means approaches a predetermined part, it is not limited at all. For example, if the predetermined portion is stopped, there may be a risk that the displacement means and the predetermined portion come into contact with each other, or the distance between the predetermined portion and the displacement means may be closer than a reference length.

  In the gaming machine H1, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in at least a first direction and a second direction, and the predetermined portion is displaceable in a third direction orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. A gaming machine H2 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to avoid the amount of displacement of the displacing means in the predetermined plane formed by the first direction and the second direction being limited to the electrical wiring.

  In the gaming machine H2, the first direction and the second direction are parallel to a plane orthogonal to a predetermined direction view.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the displacement direction of the predetermined portion can be set to a direction along the predetermined direction view. The effect on the appearance can be reduced.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H3, the game machine includes a stopping means for stopping a second predetermined portion of the electric wiring disposed on the opposite side of the displacement means with respect to the predetermined portion, and the electric wiring displacing means A gaming machine H4, wherein the second predetermined portion is configured to be easily displaced with respect to the stopping means.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H3, it is possible to improve the durability of the second predetermined portion of the electrical wiring arranged in the stopping means.

  In addition, the structure which becomes easy to displace the 2nd predetermined part with respect to a retention means is not limited at all. For example, when the second predetermined portion is disposed in a spiral shape in the stopping means, the second predetermined portion may be pushed along the tangential direction of the outer peripheral portion of the spiral, or the second predetermined portion may be a movable member. When guided, the second predetermined portion or the movable member may be pushed so as to displace the movable member.

  In the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is disposed outside the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H4, the stopping means is arranged outward from the displacement end in the first direction of the displacement means, so that the stopping means is projected to the plane side where the displacement means is displaced. Can be configured. Thereby, since the accommodation amount of the electrical wiring of the stopping means can be increased, the displacement amount of the displacing means that compensates for the distance from the stopping means with the second predetermined portion can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the electric wiring displacement means is configured integrally with the displacement means, and includes correspondence changing means for changing the arrangement of the electric wiring displacement means in accordance with the arrangement of the displacement means. A gaming machine H6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the relative arrangement of the electrical wiring and the displacement means can be appropriately managed by the correspondence changing means.

<Flow path of the ball through the electric Chu>
A game area and a flow-down means for flowing down the game ball discharged from the game area, the flow-down means including a section configured to allow the game ball discharged from the game area to be visually recognized. Game machine I0 to do.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a base plate constituting a gaming area is formed of a plywood board (see, for example, JP-A-2017-80178). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the game ball discharged from the game area flows to the back side of the base plate, it is hidden by the base plate, and the player cannot visually recognize the game ball. Therefore, it is easy for a player to lose sight of the game ball, and if he / she does not pay attention to the discharge timing, he / she may receive an impression as if the game ball suddenly disappears from the game area.

  Even if attention is paid to the discharge timing, in recent pachinko machines, there are many cases where the winning opening and the out opening are arranged close to each other. There is a possibility that it will be mistaken for the one entered. In this case, there is a possibility of feeling distrust with no payout of prize balls. In other words, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the discharge of game balls from the game area.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I0, the flow-down means is configured with a section in which the game ball discharged from the game area can be visually recognized, so that the player visually observes the game ball flowing down the section. Thus, it is possible to confirm how the game balls are arranged from the game area. Thereby, the discharge of the game ball from the game area can be improved.

  It should be noted that the discharge of game balls from the game area means the whole manner in which game balls are discharged from the game area. For example, it may be discharged through a prize ball opening or may be discharged through an out opening without a prize ball.

  In the gaming machine I0, the game ball that has flowed down the game area is disposed so as to be able to pass through, and is provided with a profit granting unit configured to be able to give a predetermined profit to the player based on the game ball passing, The means includes a first component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side closer to the profit granting unit above the profit granting unit, and disposed downstream of the first component. A gaming machine I1 comprising a second component configured to be able to guide a game ball to a side away from the profit granting unit above the granting unit.

  According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I0, the player can grasp how the gaming ball is discharged from the gaming area by visually recognizing the gaming ball flowing down the flow down means, The game ball can be prevented from approaching the lower-side profit granting means. As a result, it is possible to clearly distinguish the game balls that have already been discharged from the game area and the game balls that are still flowing down the game area in the vicinity of the profit granting means, so that the player can comfortably play the game. You can try to do it.

  The predetermined profit is not limited at all. For example, a prize ball may be paid out, a symbol such as the first symbol or the second symbol may be selected, or other benefits may be used.

  The gaming machine I0 or I1 includes attention means formed inside the gaming area, and frame means disposed in a frame shape around the attention means, and the flow-down means is the frame in front view. A gaming machine I2 configured to cause a game ball to flow down to the inner side of the means.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine I0 or I1, the game ball discharged from the gaming area can be caused to enter the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means by the flow-down means. Thereby, even in a situation where the player is paying attention to the attention means, it is possible to grasp that the game ball is discharged from the game area.

  The attention means is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a light guide plate (illumination plate), a liquid crystal display means in which a pattern is variably displayed, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving means such as a motor, or a light emitting means such as an LED. good.

  In the gaming machine I2, the flow down means includes a speed reducing means for decelerating the game ball on the inner side of the attention means.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I2, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the game ball stays in the field of view of the player who is paying attention to the attention means.

<Invention around the panel design and light guide plate>
A predetermined substrate provided with light emitting means, and a placement means arranged on the front side of at least a part of the predetermined substrate in a predetermined direction view, and the predetermined substrate has an area visually recognized in the predetermined direction view, The gaming machine J0 is characterized in that the light emitted from the light emitting means is disposed so as to be smaller than a visible area.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an electric circuit board having a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the back side of a base board having a gaming area on the front surface, and the board surface of the electric circuit board and the board surface of the base board There is a gaming machine in which are arranged almost in parallel (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-333887). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the area of the electric decoration board that is visually recognized in the front view is large, when the LED light is irradiated to the decorative member arranged on the front side of the electric decoration board, the electric field is not displayed in the field of view. There is a possibility that the decorative board enters and the decorative member and the electric decoration board are visually recognized as overlapping in front and back.

  On the surface of the electric decoration board, only a configuration necessary for functions such as a circuit and a resistor is arranged, and usually the design is not high. Therefore, when the decorative member and the electrical decoration board are visually recognized in front and back, the appearance is poor and the player's interest may be reduced. That is, in the conventional gaming machine, there is room for improvement in the presentation effect of the predetermined board.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate is arranged so that the area of the predetermined substrate visually recognized in the predetermined direction view is smaller than the area of the irradiated light. A region where only light can be visually recognized without overlapping with the substrate can be formed. Thereby, the presentation effect of a predetermined board | substrate can be improved.

  The arrangement of the predetermined substrate is not limited at all. For example, an area that is visually recognized may be reduced by being partially hidden, or an aspect that is not visually recognized by being entirely shielded may be used.

  The optical axis of light emitted from the light emitting means arranged on the predetermined substrate can be arbitrarily set. For example, the optical axis may be directed in the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, the optical axis may be directed in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the predetermined substrate, or the optical axis is directed at an angle therebetween. It can be used.

  In addition, the light transmittance of an arrangement | positioning means is not limited at all. For example, the light transmission may be configured well, the light transmission may be configured low, or the degree of light transmission may be changed for each part.

  In the gaming machine J0, the placed means includes a plurality of direction changing means that are arranged on both sides of the predetermined substrate and change a traveling direction of light emitted from the light emitting means, and between the plurality of direction changing means. Further, a low transmission means having a light transmittance lower than that of the direction changing means is disposed, and at least a part of the predetermined substrate is disposed inside the low transmission means when viewed in a predetermined direction. A gaming machine J1.

  According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J0, the predetermined substrate can be hidden by the low transmission means. Thereby, the range where a predetermined board | substrate is visually recognized can be narrowed.

  In addition, as a direction change means, it is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, it may be a light guide plate or an illumination plate, a movable accessory configured to be displaceable by a driving device, a game area or a flow path through which a game ball flows down, a case member or a decorative member fixedly arranged But it ’s okay.

  In the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means is at least a part of a shape part constituting a predetermined pattern or figure shape.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine J1, the low transmission means can be confused with a predetermined pattern or figure shape, so that it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of incongruity.

  The shape of the predetermined pattern or figure is not limited at all. For example, a frame-shaped bone part such as a window frame may be used, or a bone part that connects the axis of a rotating body such as a tire and a rotating outer peripheral part, or a series of semantic contents including arbitrary character strings and patterns. A part of the design to be expressed (for example, a title logo) may be used.

  In any one of the gaming machines J0 to J2, the predetermined board is disposed with the end face of the plate facing the predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine J3, the area of the predetermined substrate in the predetermined direction can be minimized.

  In the gaming machine J3, the game machine J3 includes display means for executing a display effect visible in a predetermined direction, and a game area disposed in front of the display means, and the predetermined board includes the display area of the display means, A gaming machine J4, which is arranged at a boundary in a predetermined direction with a gaming area.

  According to the gaming machine J4, the predetermined substrate is arranged at the boundary, so that light is emitted from the back of the gaming area to the front side and the light effect is generally executed, and only the display area side from the predetermined substrate is executed. It is possible to execute an effect of irradiating light on the screen or an effect of irradiating light only on the game area side.

  In the gaming machine J4, the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on a gaming board that constitutes the gaming area on the front side.

  According to the gaming machine J5, since the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the game board, for example, the arrangement of the light emitting means is compared with the case where the predetermined board is fixedly arranged on the inner side surface of the rear case on which the movable accessory is arranged. The degree of freedom can be improved.

  In addition, since the electric wiring for supplying electricity to the light emitting means can be guided to the outside of the back case along the back of the game board, the back case side can be visually recognized from the window portion of the game board. However, since it is impossible to see the back of the game board without looking at it with a particularly wide field of view, it is possible to easily prevent the player from seeing the electrical wiring.

  Furthermore, when the liquid crystal display device is disposed at the center of the back case, the arrangement space of the predetermined substrate is limited to the outside of the liquid crystal display device, but by the method of disposing the predetermined substrate on the back of the game board. If there is, the predetermined substrate can be arranged at an arbitrary position without being limited by the size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the predetermined substrate.

<Lock member to prevent misalignment of the accessory at the time of shipment>
Displacement means and restriction means configured to be able to restrict displacement of the displacement means, the restriction means including a first state that can act on the displacement means, and a second state that cannot act on the displacement means The gaming machine K1 is configured to be capable of changing states, and is configured to suppress movement of the displacing means in a predetermined direction in the first state.

  Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a movable accessory (displacement means) that moves downward from the standby position to the front of the liquid crystal display area (see, for example, JP-A-2015-231434). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fixing and releasing the displacement means.

  That is, while the gaming machine is configured so as to be able to operate normally after being installed, the movable accessory can be fixed up to a situation where a large vibration or external force can be applied to the gaming machine at the time of shipment or the like. It is not configured to function.

  Therefore, as a countermeasure for fixing the movable accessory at the time of shipment, the buffer is removed in the range where the movable accessory is displaced, for example, to suppress the displacement of the movable accessory, and after the arrival at the game hall, the buffer material is removed. However, in the case where the central opening of the game board is closed, the cushioning material cannot be easily removed, which may increase the burden on the game hall.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the restriction on the displacement of the displacement means can be released by changing the state of the restriction means, the arrangement and fixing of the displacement means can be improved.

  On the other hand, unlike the case where the cushioning material is extracted, the restricting means is not extracted, so that it is difficult to continue the game if the state changes easily due to an external force that may occur during the game. On the other hand, when the limiting means is configured to suppress an unintended state change in the first state, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems during the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the limiting means is configured to be able to change states between the first state and the second state when no power is supplied.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K1, the state change of the limiting means can be caused when the gaming machine is not energized, so that the malfunction of the limiting means can be suppressed. Thereby, it can prevent that a worker's work becomes difficult in a power failure state or recovery work from a power failure state.

  The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes a biasing unit that biases the operation unit of the limitation unit in a predetermined direction, and the limitation unit is configured to displace the operation unit from a reference position to a side opposite to the predetermined direction by a predetermined amount. The operation unit is displaceable away from the reference position in the predetermined direction by the urging force of the urging means, and in the second state from the reference position in the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K3, which is disposed at a separated position.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K1 or K2, in the second state, since the operation unit is arranged at a separated position away from the reference position, it is given to the installed gaming machine such as opening and closing the door. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the change in state of the restricting means due to the external force that can be generated, and it is possible to easily prevent the restricting means from changing from the second state.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operating unit of the limiting means is arranged outside the area constituting means that constitutes an area where the displacing means can be displaced.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K3, the operation unit is arranged outside the area constituting unit, so even if the displacement unit is displaced with the operation of the operation unit, It is possible to avoid the displacement means coming into contact with the operator.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, a biasing unit that biases the operation unit of the limiting unit in a predetermined direction is provided, and the limiting unit has a predetermined amount from the reference position to the opposite side of the predetermined direction. The restricting means includes guide means for guiding the displacement of the operation portion in the predetermined direction, and the guide means is configured to perform the operation in a direction intersecting the predetermined direction. A gaming machine K5 that is configured to ensure a displacement allowable width (posture change width) of the portion.

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the operation means can be displaced in the direction intersecting the predetermined direction. When an unknown load is applied, it can be easily prevented from being displaced in a predetermined direction, and the operation unit can be easily prevented from being displaced by a predetermined amount. As a result, it is possible to avoid a state change of the limiting means due to an unintended external force generated by opening and closing the door.

  In the gaming machine K5, the operation unit includes an engagement unit configured to be engageable with the guide unit, the biasing unit is disposed at a center of the operation unit, and the engagement unit is configured to operate the operation unit. A gaming machine K6, which is arranged at a position away from the center of the section.

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine K5, even when an external force with an unknown direction is applied to the limiting means in the first state of the limiting means, the operation section is displaced with the engaging section as a fulcrum. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a predetermined amount of displacement required for the state change without stopping the (posture change). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the restricting means from changing from the first state to the second state due to an external force such as opening / closing of the door, vibration at the time of shipment, or the like.

  In the gaming machine K6, the restricting means is disposed on the back side of the region constituting means configured to be rotatable by a support shaft on the left and right position side, and the engaging portion is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. A gaming machine K7, which is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine K6, the state of the limiting means can be easily changed by pushing the engaging portion of the limiting means, so that the store clerk in the gaming hall opens the front door Thus, the operation when operating the control means can be facilitated. That is, when the front door is opened, the engaging portion is disposed on the side where the opening width is increased (opposite side of the support shaft), so that the operating position of the restricting means can be made closer to the front side.

  In the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is disposed on a support shaft side of the region constituting means.

  According to the gaming machine K8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K7, the restricting means is disposed on the support shaft side, so that an operator who works by opening the front door is prevented from accidentally touching the restricting means. can do.

  In addition, the load applied to the restricting means when the front door is opened and closed can be reduced as compared with the case where the restricting means is disposed on the opposite side of the support shaft. It is possible to prevent the change.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K8, in the first state, the displacement means is configured to guide the displacement of the restriction means.

  According to the gaming machine K9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines K1 to K8, the displacement guiding accuracy when the limiting means acts on the displacing means in a state where the guiding accuracy of the displacement of the limiting means alone is lowered is Can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K9, when energized in the first state, the gaming machine K10 is provided with a prevention notifying means for informing so as to prevent the energized state from being continued.

  According to the gaming machine K10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines K1 to K9, the prevention notification means can be notified to switch the state of the restriction means from the first state.

  The notification mode is not limited in any way. For example, it may be notified by displaying an error display on a liquid crystal display device, may be notified by outputting a notification sound from a speaker, or illuminates a predetermined illumination means (or keeps it off). This may be notified.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an Example>
A gaming machine including a container that accommodates an object includes operation means disposed on the object and configured to be operable, and the container has an opening formed at a position corresponding to the operation means. A gaming machine L0 characterized by that.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). The board box is sealed to prevent fraud from being applied to the control board.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is provided on the control board, it is necessary to open the board box in order to operate the operation means. Therefore, there is a problem that it takes time and effort.

  According to the gaming machine L0, it is provided with an operating means that is disposed on an object and is configured to be operable, and the container is provided with an opening at a position corresponding to the operating means. Can be operated. That is, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed.

<About the concept of the invention using the substrate boxes A100 and A2100 (covering portions A270 and A2270) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. M1.

  According to the gaming machine M1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine L0, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container includes a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, since the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire from the opening into the container.

  In the gaming machine M1, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing an operating element, and the facing portion is at least in a range excluding a displacement locus of the operating element on the first surface of the operating means. A gaming machine M2 that is arranged to face a part.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, the facing portion is disposed to face at least a part of the range excluding the displacement locus of the operating element on the first surface of the operating element. The foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening to the inside of the container as much as the area of the opening can be reduced by the opposing part while suppressing the insertion of the operation element into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element is inhibited. Insertion can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine M1 or M2, the facing portion is formed in a plate shape whose base end is fixed and one end is free.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opposing portion is formed in a plate shape with the base end fixed and the one end free, thus simplifying the shape and improving the moldability. It can be secured. As a result, the yield can be improved and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine M3, a gaming machine M4, wherein a projecting portion projects from the facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M3, since the protrusion is provided at the opposing portion, the rigidity of the opposing portion can be increased and the breakage thereof can be suppressed.

  In addition, the protrusion may be formed as a protrusion extending in a stripe shape.

  In the gaming machine M4, the protruding portion protrudes from a surface of the facing portion that faces the first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M4, the protrusion protrudes from the surface of the facing portion that faces the first surface of the operating means, and therefore the opposing portion and the first of the operating means. It is possible to reduce the gap between the surface and the foreign matter such as a wire from being inserted into the container through the gap.

  In the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M6, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M5, the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means. It is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the inside of the container by eliminating the gap between them.

  In addition, since the protrusion is in contact with the first surface of the operating means, when the operating element is inserted into the operating means, even if the opposing part is pushed in the inserting direction by the operating element, the opposing part in the inserting direction. Can be prevented from being deformed. Therefore, it can suppress that the base end side of an opposing part is damaged.

  In addition, since the opposing part is formed in a plate shape in which the base end is fixed and one end is free, the elastic part of the opposing part is used to form and maintain the protruding part in contact ( That is, the degree of adhesion can be increased and the insertion of foreign matter such as wire can be suppressed).

  The gaming machine M7 according to any one of the gaming machines M3 to M5, wherein the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape.

  According to the gaming machine M7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M3 to M5, the protrusion is formed as a protrusion extending in a streak shape, so that the rigidity of the facing part can be further increased. At the same time, it is possible to easily prevent foreign objects such as wires from being inserted into the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the opposing portion has an edge abutting against the operation element inserted into the operation means. A gaming machine M8 characterized by being formed.

  Here, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator inadvertently operates the operating element in the lateral direction, or carelessly opens and closes the member provided with the container). When the operating element collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also tilted, and the load on the root of the operating means (the connecting portion with the object) increases. In addition, if the displacement (for example, rotation) of the operation element inserted into the operation means becomes excessive, the operation means is also displaced in the direction of the displacement, and the load on the root of the operation means (the connection portion with the object) is large. Become. In these cases, there is a possibility that the operating means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operating means and the object breaks).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines M1 to M7, the opposing portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operating element inserted into the operating means. By tilting the operating element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operating means is tilted) to the edge of the facing portion, the operating element can be prevented from being tilted or excessively displaced. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be prevented from falling off the object.

  The gaming machine M9 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M8, wherein the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines M1 to M8, the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that a gap between the operating means and the covering portion is provided. Can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  Here, when the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, when the operation element inserted into the operation means is tilted (for example, the operator carelessly arranges the operation element). If the operation member that is collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction by inadvertently opening or closing the member in which the container is disposed and pressing the operation member colliding with another member), the operation means is also tilted and operated. The load on the root of the means (the portion connected to the object) increases. In this case, there is a possibility that the operation means may fall off from the object (for example, a connecting portion that connects the operation means and the object breaks).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M9, since the covering portion covers the one end side of the operating means, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion, and the tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine M9, a gaming machine M10, wherein an outer shape of a base end side opposite to the one end side of the operation means is made larger than an inner shape of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M9, the outer shape on the base end side opposite to the one end side of the operation means is made larger than the inner shape of the covering portion. The gap between the cover and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering portion or the operating means includes a bulging portion formed by bulging, and the other of the covering portion or the operating means has a receiving portion for receiving the bulging portion. A gaming machine M11 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine M11, in addition to the effects produced by either the gaming machine M9 or M10, one of the covering part or the operating means includes a bulging part formed by bulging, and the other of the covering part or the operating means is Since the receiving portion that receives the bulging portion is provided, the gap between the bulging portion and the receiving portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M11, the bulging part and the receiving part are partially formed in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine M12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M11, the bulging portion and the receiving portion are partially formed in the circumferential direction, so that the bulging portion and the receiving portion are brought into contact with each other, Excessive displacement (in particular, circumferential displacement (rotation)) can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  The gaming machine M13 according to any one of the gaming machines M1 to M12, wherein the container includes a standing wall that is erected from an inner surface thereof and a erected tip of which is in contact with the object.

  According to the gaming machine M13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M1 to M12, the container is provided with a standing wall that is erected from the inner surface thereof and the erected tip abuts against the object. It can function as a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine M14, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine M13, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means, so that the path for entering the inside of the container can be blocked. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which an electronic component is mounted, and a surface on which the electronic component is connected to a circuit of the control board by soldering is a side on which the operation means is disposed. Is set on the opposite surface. A gaming machine M15.

  According to the gaming machine M15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M13 or M14, the object is formed as a control board on which electronic components are mounted, and the surface for connecting the electronic parts to the circuit of the control board by soldering is an operating means. Is set on the surface opposite to the side where the object is disposed, so that the standing tip of the standing wall can be easily brought into close contact with the object (control board), and the object (control board) and the standing wall It is possible to suppress the formation of a gap between the two. Therefore, the standing wall can function reliably as a wall against which the tip of a foreign object such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts, and the foreign object such as a wire can be prevented from being inserted into the container.

  In any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M16, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines M13 to M15, the standing wall is formed in a plate shape, and the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced, so that it is brought into contact with the object. By increasing the surface pressure at the standing tip, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from between the object and the standing tip. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the container.

  In the gaming machine M16, the standing tip of the standing wall has a tapered surface formed on the surface on the operation means side so that the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced.

  According to the gaming machine M17, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine M16, the standing tip of the standing wall is formed with a tapered surface on the surface on the operation means side, so that the thickness dimension of the standing tip is reduced. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container, improving a moldability. That is, by using a tapered surface, the change in shape can be moderated and the fluidity of the resin in the mold can be secured. On the other hand, when the standing tip of the standing wall comes into contact with the object, a groove can be formed by the tapered surface and the object. Therefore, the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening can be moved (guided) along the groove described above. That is, it is difficult to pass between the standing wall and the object. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the container.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, A gaming machine M18 characterized in that the covering portion projects from two regions.

  According to the gaming machine M18, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the container is one from the first area and the second area located closer to the object than the first area. Since the outer surface on the side is formed and the covering portion protrudes from the second region, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting and displacement of the operating means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container and to suppress the operating means from dropping from the object.

  In any one of the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion projects from the outer surface of the container, and the opening is formed on the projecting tip side of the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine M19, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines M9 to M12, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, and an opening is formed at the protruding leading end side of the covering portion. It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of the foreign matter to reach the opening.

  For example, when it is difficult to visually recognize the opening due to a shield or the like and it is difficult to directly insert the tip of a foreign object such as a wire into the opening, the tip of a foreign object such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container to reach the opening. The method is done. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M19, when the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire is slid on the outer surface of the container, the tip of the foreign matter such as the wire is abutted against the outer surface of the covering portion, and more Can be stopped. That is, the outer surface of the covering portion can function as a wall that restricts the sliding of a foreign object such as a wire. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire into the container.

<About the concept of the invention taking the substrate box A100 (standing walls A280, A290) as an example>
In the gaming machine L0, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element, and the container is formed so as to be able to contact the outer surface of the operation means or the operation element. A gaming machine N1 to play.

  Here, when the operating element inserted into the operating means is tilted (for example, the operator inadvertently operates the operating element in the lateral direction, or carelessly opens and closes the member provided with the container). When the operating element collided with another member is pressed in the lateral direction), the operating means is also displaced (tilted with respect to the object). In this case, there is a possibility that the operation means that is displaced (tilted) is damaged (for example, the connecting portion that connects the operation means and the object is disconnected or broken).

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine L0, the container is formed so as to be able to contact the outer surface of the operating means or the operating element. The displacement of the operation means can be suppressed. As a result, damage to the operating means can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N1, the container is provided with a standing wall that is erected from an inner surface thereof and a erected tip of which comes into contact with the object.

  Here, if the container is configured to receive the displaced (tilt) operation means, the container may be deformed and damaged.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N1, the container includes a standing wall that is erected from its inner surface and whose erected tip abuts against the object. Becomes a support and can suppress deformation of the container. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  At the same time, since the deformation of the container is suppressed by the support of the standing wall, the tilting of the operation means can be more reliably suppressed. As a result, breakage of the operating means can be easily suppressed.

  In the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the standing wall is formed in a form surrounding the operating means, so that the standing wall can be prevented from tilting in any direction of the operating means. As a support, deformation of the container can be suppressed. Therefore, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  Moreover, the path | route for invading into the inside of a container can be interrupted | blocked by a standing wall. That is, even if a foreign object such as a wire is inserted from the opening, further insertion can be restricted. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the container on which the standing wall is erected.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N3, the standing wall is connected to another inner surface different from the inner surface of the housing body on which the standing wall is erected, so the rigidity of the housing body , The rigidity of the standing wall can be increased, and the rigidity of the entire container can be increased by connecting the inner surfaces. Therefore, the function as a support part (deformation suppression means) of the standing wall that suppresses deformation of the container when the operation means tilts can be enhanced. As a result, damage to the container can be suppressed.

  In any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operation means.

  According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines N1 to N4, the container includes a covering portion that covers one end side of the operating means, so that the operating means is brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion. Thus, tilting of the operating means can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, according to the gaming machine N5, since the covering portion covers the one end side of the operating means, the gap between the operating means and the covering portion can be bent. That is, it is possible to form a wall against which the tip of a foreign substance such as a wire inserted from the opening abuts. Therefore, it can suppress that foreign materials, such as a wire, are inserted in the inside of a container.

  In the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from an outer surface of the container, and the container includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a streak shape, and one end of the protrusion is A gaming machine N6 that is connected to the covering portion.

  According to the gaming machine N6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine N5, the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the housing body, and the housing body includes a protrusion that protrudes from the outer surface and extends in a streak shape. Since one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion, the covering portion can be supported by the protrusion by causing the protrusion to function as a rib. Therefore, the operating means can be brought into contact with the inner surface of the covering portion to suppress the tilting of the operating means, and damage to the covering portion at that time can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the operating means from falling off the object.

  Further, since the covering portion protrudes from the outer surface of the container, the protruding height of the covering portion can be increased accordingly. Therefore, it is possible to increase the area where the covering portion covers the operating means (the area that suppresses the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire, and the area that contacts the operating means and suppresses the tilting and displacement of the operating means). As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign object such as a wire into the inside of the container and to suppress the operating means from dropping from the object.

  In the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display unit that is formed on an outer surface thereof and displays predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end of the ridge.

  According to the gaming machine N7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N6, the container includes a display unit that is formed on the outer surface and displays predetermined information, and the display unit is adjacent to the other end of the ridge. Therefore, the function as an instruction line for pointing to a position corresponding to the predetermined information displayed on the display unit can also be used as a protrusion. Therefore, the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element into the first surface, whereby the storage The body includes a facing portion that faces the first surface of the operation means, and the facing portion is formed so that an edge portion can contact the operation element inserted into the operation means. Machine N8.

  According to the gaming machine N8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N6 or N7, the operation means includes a first surface facing the opening of the container, and the container is a facing portion facing the first surface of the operation means. Therefore, foreign matter such as a wire can be prevented from being inserted from the opening to the inside of the container as much as the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion.

  In addition, since the edge portion is formed so that the edge portion can come into contact with the operation element inserted into the operation means, the operation element (that is, a position farther from the fulcrum when the operation means is tilted) is placed on the edge of the opposite portion. It is possible to prevent the operator from being tilted or excessively displaced by being brought into contact with the portion. As a result, tilting and excessive displacement of the operating means can be suppressed, and the operating means can be prevented from falling off the object.

  In the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is disposed to face at least a part of a range of the first surface of the operating means excluding the displacement locus of the operating element.

  According to the gaming machine N9, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine N8, the facing portion is disposed in at least a part of the range excluding the displacement locus of the operating element on the first surface of the operating element. The foreign material such as a wire is inserted from the opening to the inside of the container as much as the area of the opening can be reduced by the facing portion while suppressing the insertion into the operation means and the displacement of the inserted operation element is inhibited. This can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is possible to increase the area of the facing portion that comes into contact with the displaced operation element, and to easily suppress an excessive displacement (particularly, displacement (rotation) in the circumferential direction) of the operation element. As a result, it is possible to suppress an excessive displacement of the operation means and to prevent the operation means from dropping from the object.

  In the gaming machine N9, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to a first position, and a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is displaced to the first position. A gaming machine N10 characterized in that the child and the opposing portion are in contact with each other.

  In the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operation means is formed so that the operation element can be displaced to a second position different from the first position, and a position where one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion is the first position. The gaming machine N11 is characterized in that the operating element displaced to two positions is in a position where the facing portion comes into contact.

  According to the gaming machine N10 or N11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine N9 or N10, the operating means is formed so that the operating element can be displaced to the first position and the second position, and one end of the protrusion is connected to the covering portion. Since the position where the operation element displaced to the first position or the second position is in contact with the facing part, the position of the operation element displaced to the first position or the second position is applied to the facing part. It can suppress effectively that a facing part and a coating | coated part are damaged when it contacts, using a protrusion.

<Concept of the Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 (Operation Wall A210) as an Example>
In the gaming machine L0, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from a first region and a second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the opening is formed in the second region. A gaming machine O1 characterized in that is formed.

  Here, since the operating means can be operated through the opening, it is not necessary to open the container when operating the operating means. Therefore, labor can be suppressed. However, there is a risk of fraud in which foreign matter such as a wire is inserted from the opening.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O1, the container has an outer surface on one side formed from the first region and the second region located closer to the object than the first region, and the second region Since the opening is formed in the housing, the opening can be disposed at a position deeper from the outer surface of the container, and a step (connection surface) connecting the first region and the second region can be disposed around the opening. Thereby, it is possible to increase the distance to the opening and make it difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening. As a result, it is possible to suppress the insertion of foreign matter such as a wire from the opening into the container. That is, fraud can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine O1, at least a part of a connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. O2.

  Here, in consideration of heat radiation from the object (control board), the container (board box) needs to secure a distance (internal space) between the object (control board) and the inner surface. On the other hand, if the opening is too far from the operation means, the operability is deteriorated. Therefore, by forming the opening in the second region, it is easy to ensure the operability of the operation means, and as described above, it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire from the opening into the container. . However, when operating the operating means, the operator's (operator's) hand interferes with the step (connection surface) between the first area and the second area, which hinders the operation. Therefore, the operability when operating the operating means may be deteriorated.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine O2, at least a part of the connection surface connecting the first area and the second area is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area. In addition to the effect produced by O1, the space connected to the second region can be expanded by the amount of the downward inclination, and the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O2, the second region is formed as a region having a substantially rectangular shape in a front view in which a length dimension along one direction is larger than a length dimension along another direction orthogonal to the one direction, The gaming machine O3 is operated by being inserted and displaced, and the attitude of the operating element when being inserted into the operating means or pulled out from the operating means is set to the attitude along the other direction. .

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine O2, the second region is a substantially rectangular region in front view that has a length dimension along one direction larger than a length dimension along the other direction orthogonal to the one direction. The operation means is operated by inserting and displacing the operation element, and the attitude of the operation element when being inserted into the operation means or pulled out from the operation means is set to the attitude along the other direction. A space can be secured on the side where the gripping surface is opposed, with the surface for gripping the child directed in the longitudinal direction of the second region. Therefore, when the operating element is inserted into the operating means or pulled out from the operating means, it is possible to prevent the fingers holding the operating element from interfering with the container. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region extends from the first region to the second. A gaming machine O4 that is inclined downward toward the area.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O3, the opening is disposed on one side of the center in the longitudinal direction in the second region, and the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is the first. Since it is inclined downward from the first area toward the second area, it is possible to prevent a finger different from the gripped finger from interfering with the container when the operator is gripped and displaced. For example, when the operator is grasped with the index finger and thumb and the operator is displaced (e.g., rotated), the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface, and the space on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, A space for moving the little finger side can be secured, and interference between the little finger side and the container can be suppressed. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine O4, the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine O4, the connecting surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction in the second region, so that the operation is performed by the connecting surface (first region) on the other side in the longitudinal direction. Means can be protected. For example, it is possible to suppress interference with other members at the time of manufacturing, and to suppress breakage of the operation means. Further, it is difficult to visually recognize the position of the opening, and it is possible to suppress the insertion of a foreign substance such as a wire from the opening into the container.

  In addition, since the connection surface is formed on the other side in the longitudinal direction of the second region, the area of the first region can be increased correspondingly, that is, to cope with heat radiation from the object (control board). The volume of the internal space of the container can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines O3 to O5, the connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second region, and the connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second region. A gaming machine O6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine O6, in any of the gaming machines O3 to O5, a connection surface is formed on one side in the short direction in the second region, and a connection surface is not formed on the other side in the short direction in the second region. Therefore, the other side in the short direction in the second region can be opened. Therefore, when the operator is gripped with a finger and operated (inserted into the operating means, pulled out of the operating means, or displaced (for example, rotated)), the gripped fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) The open space described above can be used as a space for placing or displacing fingers different from the above. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, and the other connection surface is the first A gaming machine O7 that is substantially orthogonal to the area and the second area.

  According to the gaming machine O7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines O3 to O6, the connection surface located on one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is inclined downward from the first region toward the second region, Since the connection surface is substantially orthogonal to the first region and the second region, a container for accommodating heat radiation from the object (control board) while ensuring the effect of tilting the connection surface downward The volume of the interior space can be secured. That is, it is possible to minimize a decrease in the volume of the internal space of the container by tilting the connection surface downward.

  The gaming machine O4 or O5 includes a base body on which the housing body is disposed, and a rotation shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and a longitudinal direction in the second region is an axial direction of the rotation shaft. The transverse direction is substantially orthogonal and the transverse direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotating shaft, and one side in the longitudinal direction of the second region is disposed on a side farther from the rotating shaft than the other side in the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine O8.

  According to the gaming machine O8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4 or O5, the gaming machine O8 includes a base body on which the container is disposed, and a rotary shaft that rotatably supports the base body, and is long in the second region. The direction is substantially orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotary shaft, the short side direction is substantially parallel to the axial direction of the rotary shaft, and one side in the longitudinal direction in the second region is disposed on the side farther from the rotary axis than the other side in the longitudinal direction. Therefore, when the operation means is operated in a space formed by rotating the base body around the rotation axis, the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface can be effectively used. That is, a space for allowing the operator's (operator's) hand to access the operation means can be secured by the space formed by the downward inclination of the connection surface. As a result, the operability when operating the operating means can be improved.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an Example>
A gaming machine comprising a container for housing an object, comprising: a display device disposed in a game area; and an operation unit disposed on the object and configured to be operable, and relates to operation of the operation unit A gaming machine P1 characterized in that information can be displayed on the display device.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that it is difficult to grasp the operation state of the operation means when the operation means is arranged on the control board (object).

  According to the gaming machine P1, the display device disposed in the game area and the operation means disposed on the target object and configured to be operable are provided, and information relating to operation of the operation means can be displayed on the display device. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the operation state of the operation means based on the display on the display device. Further, since the display means is arranged in the game area, the display means can be used as a device for displaying information related to the game, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In the gaming machine P1, the container is formed to be displaceable, the gaming machine P2.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so that the container is arranged (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be operated while visually recognizing the display device. be able to. As a result, since the operation can be performed while confirming the display (information), the operability can be improved and an operation error can be suppressed. On the other hand, in a state in which the operation means is not operated, since it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), it is possible to suppress fraud.

  In the gaming machine P2, the game machine is characterized in that the game machine can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the game machine is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be viewed simultaneously. P3.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2, the container can be displaced to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed. Therefore, the operation of operating the operation means can be facilitated while confirming the display on the display device. As a result, improvement in operability and suppression of operation errors can be achieved more reliably.

  In the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on a side farther from the pivotally supported position than the center of the container.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine P3, the container is rotatably supported, and the operating means is disposed on the side farther from the position where the operation is supported than the center of the container. In a state where the container is displaced (rotated) to a position where the surface on which the operation means of the container is disposed and the display surface of the display device can be simultaneously viewed, the operation means is positioned farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Can be placed. Therefore, it can suppress that the finger which operates an operation means interferes with the outer edge of a game machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine P4, the operating means includes a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is located farther from the pivotally supported position than the first operating means. A gaming machine P5, which is arranged in

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P4, the operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means, and the second operating means, which is operated more frequently than the first operating means, is more effective than the first operating means. Since it is arranged on the side far from the pivotally supported position, the operation means (first operation means) having a high operation frequency can be arranged at a position farther from the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, when operating the operation means (first operation means) having a high operation frequency, it is possible to prevent fingers from interfering with the outer edge of the gaming machine main body. As a result, operability can be improved.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 as an Example>
In a gaming machine including a container for accommodating a target object, the game machine includes operation means disposed on the target object and configured to be operable, and the target object is connected with one or more electrical connection lines, The gaming machine Q1 is characterized in that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to a connection state of the electrical connection line with the object.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is provided on the control board (object), there is room for improvement as to whether or not the operation means can be operated. That is, if the operation is allowed regardless of the connection state of the one or more electrical connection lines to the object, the operation means may be easily operated illegally, while the connection of the one or more electrical connection lines is likely to occur. If the operation is prohibited regardless of the state, the workability of the work accompanying the operation of the operation means may be deteriorated.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, it is provided with operation means that is disposed on the object and is configured to be operable, and the object is connected to one or more electrical connection lines, and the electrical connection line is connected to the object. Since whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the state, fraud can be suppressed and workability can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed so as to be displaceable, the gaming machine Q2.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1, the container is formed to be displaceable, so that the container can be disposed (displaced) at a position where the operating means can be easily operated. As a result, operability can be improved. On the other hand, in a state in which the operation means is not operated, since it can be arranged at a predetermined position (for example, a position that is difficult to be visually recognized from the outside), it is possible to suppress fraud. In this case, when displacing the container, at least one electrical connection line is released (unplugged) from the object, so that whether or not the operation means can be operated is changed according to the connection state of the electrical connection line. This configuration is particularly effective in suppressing fraud and improving workability.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines is connected to the object, the operation means is allowed to be operated. Q3.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in the state where at least a predetermined electrical connection line of the electrical connection lines is connected, the operation of the operating means is allowed. It is possible to suppress fraud and improve workability. In other words, if the predetermined electrical connection line is not connected to the object, the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that fraud can be suppressed. On the other hand, if the connection of the predetermined electrical connection line to the object is secured and fraud can be suppressed, even if other electrical connection lines are released (unplugged) from the object, By allowing the operation, it is possible to improve workability (ensure versatility).

  In particular, in a configuration in which the container is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line that is released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to be arranged to be easily operated) In order to allow the operation of the operating means after displacing, for example, another electrical connection line released (removed) by inserting an extension line between the object and the other electrical connection line The trouble of reconnecting to the object can be avoided.

  In the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in the state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object, the operation of the operating means is prohibited. Q4.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, in a state where at least one of the electrical connection lines is released from the object (that is, all electrical connections) If the line is not connected to the object), the operation of the operation means is prohibited, so that the operation means can be prevented from being illegally operated.

  In the configuration in which the container is formed so as to be displaceable, another electrical connection line that is released (unplugged) from the object in order to displace the container (that is, to arrange for easy operation) For example, if an extension line is interposed between the object and another electrical connection line and another electrical connection line that has been released (removed) is reconnected to the object, the operation is performed. Since the operation of the means can be permitted, the operation by the operation of the operation means can be performed.

<Concept of Invention Taking Board Boxes A3100 and A4100 as an Example>
A gaming machine provided with a container for accommodating a target object, comprising an operating means disposed on the target object and configured to be operable, wherein the container is formed to be displaceable and disposed at the time of a game. The gaming machine R1 is characterized in that it can be displaced to a position where the operating means is easier to operate than the position.

  A gaming machine including a board box (housing body) that houses a control board (object) is known (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-205029). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, when the operation means is disposed on the control board (object), there is a problem that the operability of the operation means is insufficient.

  According to the gaming machine R1, it is provided with an operating means that is disposed on an object and configured to be operable, and the container is formed to be displaceable, and the operating means is easier to operate than a position that is disposed at the time of gaming. Since the position can be displaced, the operability of the operating means can be improved.

  In the gaming machine R1, the container is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable, and is displaced by rotation around the pivotally supported portion.

  According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R1, the container is rotatably supported and is displaced by rotation about the pivotally supported portion, so that the container is displaced. The structure can be simplified. As a result, product cost can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine R1 or R2, a gaming machine R3, wherein a separate member faces the operation means at a position where the container is disposed during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine R1 or R2, the container is operated in an unauthorized manner because another member faces the operating means at the position where the container is disposed during the game. This can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine R3, the operation means is operated by inserting and displacing an operation element. In the state where the operation element is inserted, the operation element is brought into contact with the separate member, A gaming machine R4, wherein the container cannot be displaced to a position where it is disposed during the game.

  According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine R3, the operating means is operated by inserting and displacing the operating element, and when the operating element is inserted, the operating element hits another member. By contacting, the container cannot be displaced to the position where it is arranged at the time of the game, so that it is possible to suppress forgetting to remove the operator. Therefore, it can suppress that an operator is used illegally.

<There is a part on one guide route that is located above the other guide route>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, The route constructing means can configure a first guide route and a second guide route different from the first guide route as the guide route, and the first guide route is formed from the second guide route. A gaming machine XA1 including an upper arrangement portion arranged on the upper side.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. A game that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of the balls from passing through the detection port of the detecting means by dropping the balls that were on the guide path on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the ball that has fallen from the guide path is directed to the outlet, with a player that keeps firing the ball and a player that launches or stops firing the ball, There was a problem that a difference in game efficiency may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XA1, even when the game ball falls from the first guide route, when the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion, the game ball is rescued by 2 It can be put on the guide route. Since the rescued game ball is guided to a predetermined entry area, a game according to the game method is compared with a configuration in which many balls that have fallen from the guide route go to the exit as spilling balls. Changes in efficiency can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine XA1, the entry area includes a first entry area and a second entry area that is different from the first entry area, and the first guide route is directed to the first entry area. The second guide route is configured to be capable of guiding the game ball to the second entrance area, and the second guide route is disposed above the first guide route. A gaming machine XA2 comprising an upper arrangement portion.

  According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine XA1, even when the game ball falls from the second guide route, when the game ball falls from the upper arrangement portion of the second guide route, The game ball can be put on the first guide route by rescuing the game ball. That is, an effect of suppressing a change in the game efficiency can be exhibited not only for the fall of the game ball from the first guide route but also for the fall of the game ball from the second guide route.

  In the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the gaming machine XA3 is configured such that the first guidance route and the second guidance route intersect in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine XA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XA1 or XA2, the upper arrangement portion of one guide route can be arranged above (directly above) the other guide route.

  In addition, an intersection position is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, the center of the first guide route may intersect with the center of the second guide route. In this case, the ease of rescue becomes equal on the left and right.

  For example, the lower side of the center of the first guide route may intersect with the lower side of the center of the second guide route. In this case, the distance from the intersection position to the first and second entry areas is shortened, so that the period during which the game ball flows down the opponent's path can be shortened, and it can be arranged above the intersection position. There is an advantage that the number of various game balls can be increased.

  For example, you may cross | intersect above the center of a 1st guide route, and the upper side from the center of a 2nd guide route.

  For example, you may cross | intersect below the center of a 1st guide route, and the upper side from the center of a 2nd guide route. In this case, the game ball can be saved more easily in the case of falling from the first guide route side to the second guide route side than in the opposite case.

  In this case, the movable member constituting the first guide path is configured by a wing member that is pivoted and displaced upward so as to rescue, so that the game ball falling from the second guide path can be easily rescued. Also good.

  In any one of the gaming machines XA1 to XA3, the game machine includes a first route constituting unit that constitutes the first guide route and a second route constituting unit that constitutes the second guide route. A gaming machine XA4, comprising a salvage part that protrudes below the path forming means.

  In addition, the 1st path | route structure means can show | play the same effect, even if it does not go through the lower side rather than the 2nd path | route structure means. For example, even when projecting upward from the second path constituting means, if the difference between the upper and lower sides is less than the radius of the game ball, the first path constituting means is allowed to enter below the center of the game ball. The game ball can be easily placed on the first path forming means.

  Furthermore, in the description of dive below the center of the game ball, at least the point at which contact with the game ball starts to be below the center of the ball is sufficient. That is, for example, even when the portion other than the point where contact with the game ball is started is arranged above the center of the ball, the game ball is pushed up by pushing the game ball upward after contact with the game ball. It can be placed on the first path forming means.

  In gaming machine XA4, gaming machine XA5 is characterized in that the rescue portion constitutes a lower flow path of the first guide path.

  According to the gaming machine XA5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine XA4, it is possible to rescue the game ball that is about to enter the first entrance area.

  In any one of the gaming machines XA3 to XA5, the gaming machine XA6 is characterized in that an inclination of the first guiding path and an inclination of the second guiding path are opposite to each other.

  According to the gaming machine XA6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines XA3 to XA5, the vertical width in which the first guide route and the second guide route are arranged can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines XA3 to XA6, the game machine is arranged on the first guide route or the second guide route on the lower side (disadvantage side) than the intersection position of the first guide route and the second guide route. A gaming machine XA7, characterized in that the number of gaming balls is one.

  According to the gaming machine XA7, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines XA3 to XA6, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a spilling ball.

  In the gaming machine XA7, the gaming machine XA8 is characterized in that a deceleration means for decelerating the gaming ball is provided on the upper side (advantageous side) of the intersecting position than on the lower side of the intersecting position.

  According to the gaming machine XA8, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XA7, the game balls are decelerated by the decelerating means, whereby the interval between the game balls before and after passing through the decelerating means can be adjusted.

  In addition, since the player can be notified of the arrangement position of the game ball by changing the speed of the game ball, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved. That is, it is possible to easily grasp whether the game ball is arranged on the advantageous side or the disadvantageous side with respect to the crossing position by the flow velocity of the game ball.

<Guide route construction means for obtaining a feeling of exiting>
A game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined entrance area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state that constitutes a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entrance area; In a gaming machine comprising: a path configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guide route; and the path constructing means before the game ball that has reached the guide route enters the entrance area. A gaming machine XB1 characterized in that the period can be changed in a plurality of types.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the detection means is arranged so that the detection port of the big prize opening is in the horizontal direction, and the operation member that rolls the ball toward the detection port detects a predetermined number of balls. A game that operates when triggered by passing through the mouth, and prevents a predetermined number or more of the balls from passing through the detection port of the detecting means by dropping the balls that were on the guide path on the operating member during the operation. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-181572).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the flow path to the operation member is almost one, so in the normal launching mode (a mode in which the launching of the game ball continues at a specified interval), the game balls are spaced apart. Since it is easy to reach and the game ball is guided to the detection port so as to travel along the upper surface of the operation member (actuating member 100), the flow velocity of the game ball is easy to be suppressed. It was hard to happen. For this reason, there is a problem that it is easy to make a payout and it is difficult to give the player a feeling of going out.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the path construction unit is configured to be able to change the period until the game ball passes through the entrance area, so that the interval at which the game ball reaches the path construction unit is equal, for example. Even if it is an interval, the interval between the game balls can be changed in the path construction means, so that the game ball continuously passes through the entrance area by reducing the interval between two specific game balls. Can be generated. Thereby, even when the game is played in the above-described normal launch mode, it is possible to cause a state in which the game balls are intentionally paid out at short intervals, so that it is possible to give the player a feeling of exiting.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the means to change a period. For example, an aspect in which the entrance area where the game ball is guided may be switched in the middle, or an aspect in which the game ball can be reached at different positions on the guide route of the entrance area may be used.

  In the gaming machine XB1, a plurality of flow paths to the guide path are configured, and the distance between one flow path and the entrance area and the distance between another flow path and the entrance area are different. This is a gaming machine XB2.

  According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to easily shift the arrival timing of the gaming ball to the entering area even when the gaming ball is launched at equal intervals. Thereby, the space | interval of the game balls which enter a entrance area can be changed.

  In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the entrance area includes a first entrance area and a second entrance area, the gaming machine XB3.

  According to the gaming machine XB3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the gaming balls that enter the entering area by changing or switching the entering area guided by the route construction means The interval can be changed.

  In the gaming machine XB3, the path configuration means can change state between a first guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first entry area and a second guidance state for guiding the game ball to the second entry area. A gaming machine XB4 comprising a state changing means configured as described above.

  According to the gaming machine XB4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XB3, it is possible to easily change the interval between the gaming balls entering the entering area by changing the state of the state changing means.

  In addition, the aspect of a state change means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that is electrically controlled, or one whose state is changed by contact with a ball (pendulum member or seesaw-like member).

  In the gaming machine XB4, the state changing means is electrically controlled, and is configured to be able to shorten a pitching interval of the gaming balls into the pitching area in a predetermined period after the state change.

  According to the gaming machine XB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XB4, it is possible to easily cause continuous entry in a predetermined period after the state change. As a result, the payout of the winning balls due to entering the entering area can be increased and decreased, and over-winning can be suppressed as compared with the case where the entering interval in a predetermined period before the state change is shortened. Can do.

  In any one of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the guide route can guide the game ball to the first entrance route and the first entrance route configured to guide the game ball to the first entrance region. A second guide route configured, and a reduction means for decelerating the game ball in an advantageous range in which the game ball arranged in the first guide route can reach the second guide route. A gaming machine XB6 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine XB6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XB3 to XB5, the game balls are decelerated by the deceleration means on the first guide path, and the interval between the game balls is reduced. When the game ball reaches the guide route, the interval between entering the second entrance area can be reduced.

<Two plates serve as opening and closing plates>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, The path configuration means reduces the gap between the first configuration means and the second configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure the guide path, and the first configuration means and the second configuration means. A gaming machine XC1 comprising: a gap reducing means configured.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a pair of movable members that are rotated and moved by a rotating shaft extending to the front side of the gaming board constitutes a guide path for guiding the game ball toward the same detection port (For example, refer to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-29531).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a gap is provided between the movable members in order to prevent the game ball from being caught. However, because of this gap, the arrangement of the movable member on one side is not possible when the game ball rolls. There is a problem in that there is a possibility of adverse effects such as deviation or game balls getting caught in the gap.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XC1, the gap between the first constituent means and the second constituent means is reduced by the gap reducing means, so that the first constituent means or the second constituent means is used when the game ball rolls. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of the situation that the misplacement of the game balls and the game balls get caught in the gaps.

  In addition, the aspect of a clearance reduction means is not limited at all. For example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, and may be arranged to face each other so as to be able to contact in the displacement direction. In this case, the gap can be filled in the contact state. In addition, for example, the first and second constituent means may be configured to be displaceable, arranged to face each other on the side orthogonal to the displacement direction, and configured to gradually narrow the interval (the interval is lost). After that, you may make it slide.) In this case, the load received by the first and second constituent means can be reduced.

  In addition, the aspect of a clearance reduction means is not limited at all. For example, when the first configuration means and the second configuration means constitute the same straight guide route, the first configuration means may be configured to narrow a gap generated in a part of the straight line. When the guide route is different from the guide route formed by the second constituent means (for example, when the guide route is not on the same straight line), the means configured to narrow the interval between the different guide routes may be used.

  In addition, the displacement direction of a 1st structure means and a 2nd structure means is not limited at all. For example, they may be parallel to each other or non-parallel to each other.

  In the gaming machine XC1, the gap reducing means is disposed on a partition member that partitions the guide route.

  According to the gaming machine XC2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XC1, the clearance reducing means can be easily arranged. In addition, the aspect of a clearance reduction means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a fixed part or a movable part.

  Moreover, when it is the part to which the clearance gap reduction means was fixed, for example, you may arrange | position to the design member arrange | positioned at the near side of a guidance path | route, and arrange | position to the other side (back side) of the design member. It may be disposed on the member.

  In the gaming machine XC1 or XC2, the gap reducing means suppresses the displacement of the first constituent means or the second constituent means in a direction crossing the displacement direction of the first constituent means or the second constituent means. A gaming machine XC3 characterized by being configured as follows.

  According to the gaming machine XC3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XC1 or XC2, the clearance reduction means improves the stability of the arrangement of the first component means or the second component means in the direction intersecting the displacement direction. Can do. In addition, the aspect of the intersection of the displacement direction is not limited at all, and may be a direction that is not parallel to the displacement direction of the first component means or the second component means.

  In any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC3, the gap reducing means is configured to change the first constituent means or the second constituent means at least during a stop or displacement of the first constituent means or the second constituent means. A gaming machine XC4, characterized by being configured to support.

  According to the gaming machine XC4, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC3, the gap reducing means can also be used as a member for supporting the first constituent means or the second constituent means. Functionalization and reduction of the arrangement space of members can be achieved.

  In any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC5, the gap reducing means is configured integrally with the first constituent means or the second constituent means.

  According to the gaming machine XC6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC5, the gap reducing means can be displaced by displacing the first constituent means or the second constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a reduction in the design freedom of the guide route.

  In any one of the gaming machines XC1 to XC6, the displacement direction of the first component means and the displacement direction of the second component means are non-parallel.

  According to the gaming machine XC7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XC1 to XC6, the gap after displacement is made non-parallel in the displacement direction as compared to the gap before displacement of the first component means and the second component means. It can be narrowed using this.

  In addition, although the aspect in which a displacement aspect becomes diagonal means the diagonal direction with respect to the front-back and left-right direction as a displacement direction of a normal path | route structure means, it is not limited at all. For example, the displacement directions of both the first and second constituent means may be configured obliquely, or one of the first constituent means or the second constituent means may be configured obliquely.

  In the former case, the displacement directions of both the first and second constituent means are configured obliquely and the displacement directions are parallel to each other. That is, the displacement direction of the first component means and the displacement direction of the second component means are required to be relatively oblique (non-parallel). The non-parallel means that it is not parallel and the relative angle in the displacement direction may be 90 degrees.

  The direction of the oblique displacement of the route forming means is not limited in any way, but for example, a game ball that rides on the upper surface by being configured to be displaced in a direction against gravity when the guide route is displaced. The effect of scrubbing the game ball can be expected due to the frictional resistance. Thereby, the entrance efficiency of the game ball into the entrance area can be improved.

  Further, in the first component means or the second component means, the displacement directions do not have to be non-parallel to each other during the displacement. That is, for example, it may be configured by both sections of a section in which the displacement direction is parallel and a section in which the displacement direction is non-parallel.

<Auxiliary means for configuring the guide route together with the variable means>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, The gaming machine XD1 is characterized in that the path construction means includes a displaceable variable means and auxiliary means for assisting the guide path.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that a gaming ball is guided along the upper surfaces of the opening and closing members 30a and 31a (variable means) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159997). reference). Originally, the design of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a should be a free shape. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the opening / closing member 30a is required to withstand the weight of the game ball and the load caused by the impact only by its own rigidity. , 31a need to be designed to be thick, and there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the opening and closing members 30a, 31a is reduced.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XD1, since the guide route is constituted by not only the variable means but also the variable means and the auxiliary means, it is possible to eliminate the need to receive the load from the game ball only by the variable means. Thereby, for example, it becomes possible to form the variable means with a thin wall, and the degree of freedom in designing the variable means can be improved.

  Further, as another effect that the variable means is configured to be thin, the variable means can be reduced in weight, so that the displacement speed of the variable means can be improved and the drive means for driving the variable means can be reduced. .

  In the gaming machine XD1, the gaming machine XD2 is provided with collision suppressing means configured to suppress the collision of the game ball with the auxiliary means.

  According to the gaming machine XD2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XD1, it is possible to prevent the auxiliary means from being damaged. In addition, the aspect of a collision suppression means is not limited at all. For example, by forming a pocket-shaped part that can enter the ball above the auxiliary means, a ball falling above the auxiliary means may be discharged from the game area through the pocket-shaped part. You may make it form the roof-like part which prevents fall of.

  In the gaming machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to guide the displacement of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine XD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XD1 or XD2, the auxiliary means can be used not only as a means for configuring the guide path of the game ball, but also as a means for guiding the displacement of the variable means. .

  The variable means and the auxiliary means may be configured separately or may be configured integrally. In the case of a single structure, for example, the variable means may be a rolling surface constituting part, and the auxiliary means may be a forming part that is integrally displaced with the rolling surface constituting part.

  In the gaming machine XD3, the auxiliary means is configured to suppress displacement of the variable means in a direction non-parallel to the displacement direction.

  According to the gaming machine XD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XD3, the disposition of the variable means can be stabilized by the auxiliary means.

  In the gaming machine XD3 or XD4, the auxiliary means is configured to be capable of interlocking with the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine XD5, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XD3 or XD4, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in setting the operation of the auxiliary means as compared to the case where the auxiliary means is fixedly arranged.

  For example, it is possible to reduce the arrangement space in the game area of the route construction means in the closed state of the entrance area by arranging the auxiliary means at a position where the entrance means closes the entrance area while avoiding the variable means. it can. Thereby, the game ball flow down range of the game area in the closed state of the ball area can be expanded, and the design freedom of the game area can be improved.

  In addition, for example, when a fixed protrusion is arranged as an auxiliary means from the width direction of the guide path to cause the game ball to decelerate, a plurality of guide paths are formed, and only the specific guide path is decelerated. Even if it is going to produce an effect | action, it may be difficult when a some guide route is arrange | positioned densely. On the other hand, by configuring the auxiliary means to be interlocked with the variable means, it is possible to easily cause a deceleration action on a specific guide route.

  In any one of the gaming machines XD1 to XD5, the auxiliary means is configured to be able to change the flow direction of the gaming ball.

  According to the gaming machine XD6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XD1 to XD5, it is possible to set the flow path of the game ball in the guide path independently (separately) from the arrangement of the variable means.

  In the gaming machine XD6, the auxiliary means changes in the flow direction of the game ball by changing the arrangement of the variable means.

  According to the gaming machine XD7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine XD6, a plurality of types of changes in the flow-down mode of the gaming ball can be caused by the same auxiliary means. Note that the cause of the change in the action of the auxiliary means on the game ball due to the different arrangement of the variable means is not limited. For example, the difference in the arrangement of the variable means may cause the game ball and the auxiliary means to be blocked, so that the game ball does not reach the auxiliary means, and the arrangement of the variable means may be different. Therefore, it may be caused by the fact that the flowing-down state of the game ball when contacting the auxiliary means differs depending on whether it is in a rolling state or a falling state.

<Guidance from midway along the guide route>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, A predetermined entrance area where game balls deviating from the guide route are arranged to be able to enter is provided, and the enter region is at least a part of the game balls deviating from the guide route from a midway position of the guide route Is configured to be able to enter a game machine XE1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a game in which a first start winning opening and a second starting winning opening are arranged on the upper side of the large winning opening door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 for guiding the game ball to the winning area. (For example, refer to JP-A-2015-231434). In this case, there is an advantage that the game can be easily understood by the player because the target position by launching the game ball can be fixed at the same position. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a plurality of winning holes (ball-entry areas) are arranged above and below, and the lower winning hole is concealed by the upper winning hole. There is a high possibility that a ball that has deviated from the mouth is likely to deviate from the lower prize opening, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the interest of the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XE1, since the game ball deviating from the guide route is configured to easily enter the entrance area, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming area XE2 is characterized in that at least a part of the entrance area is arranged at a height between a lower end position and an upper end position of the route forming means.

  According to the gaming machine XE2, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine XE1, the vertical distance between the path configuration means and the entrance area is determined by arranging the entrance area at a height position inside the vertical width of the path configuration means. Since the game ball can be shortened, the degree to which the game ball deviates to the left and right of the entrance area can be reduced.

  In addition, even when a plurality of entrance areas are arranged so as to overlap each other, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the vertical width increases, and in the game area having a limited area, the placement of the plurality of entrance areas is free. The degree can be improved.

  In the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the route constituting means constitutes a second guide route in which game balls are guided to the entrance area, and game balls deviating from the second guide route enter the second entrance area. A gaming machine XE3, which is configured to be capable of balls.

  According to the gaming machine XE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XE1 or XE2, the path configuration means includes a second guidance path for guiding the game ball to the entrance area and a path for guiding the game ball to the second entrance area. The game ball deviating from one path can be placed on the other path. Thereby, it is possible to improve the attention of the route forming means compared to the case where the route forming means guides the game ball to a single entrance area.

  In the gaming machine XE3, the guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect at a predetermined position, and the downward inclination direction of the guide route and the downward inclination direction of the second guide route are opposite to each other. A gaming machine XE4 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine XE4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XE3, on the side where one guide path is disposed below with a predetermined position as a boundary, the other guide path is disposed on the upper side. The vertical width necessary for the arrangement can be suppressed. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a guidance route, a 2nd guidance route, a (1st) entrance area, and a 2nd entrance area can be improved.

  In the gaming machine XE1, the gaming area XE5 is characterized in that the entrance area is arranged at a position in the vertical direction of the route forming means.

  According to the gaming machine XE5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XE1, it is possible to make it easier for a game ball deviating from the guidance route or the entrance area to reach the entrance area or the guidance route.

  The placement of the entrance area is not limited in any way. For example, the entrance area may be arranged on the upper side or the lower side of the route forming means.

  Moreover, the aspect of the entrance area is not limited at all. For example, the winning area may be configured as a start opening, may be configured as a general winning opening, may be configured as a normal winning opening, may be configured as a special winning opening, It may be configured as a discharge port (out port).

  In any of the gaming machines XE1 to XE5, a control unit is provided, and the route configuration unit can switch a state between a first state constituting the guide route and a second state constituting the second guide route. The gaming machine XE6 is configured so that the control unit is configured to execute control for switching the path configuration unit between the first state and the second state based on a predetermined pattern.

  According to the gaming machine XE6, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines XE1 to XE5, the game ball deviated from the (1) entry area by the selection of a pattern for switching the state of the route construction means is added to the second entry. A case where it is easy to guide to the area and a case where it is difficult to guide the game ball deviating from the (first) entry area to the second entry area can be configured.

<Displacement directions of a plurality of opening and closing plates arranged in the flow path are opposite>
A game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined entrance area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state that constitutes a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entrance area; In a gaming machine provided with a path configuration means that can be switched between a second state that does not constitute the guide route, the entry area comprises a first entry area and a second entry area, and the route The configuration means includes a first path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a first guide path configured to guide a game ball to the first pitch area, and a game ball to the second pitch area. And a second path configuration means configured to be displaceable so as to configure a second guide path configured to be capable of guiding to the vehicle, and a displacement direction of the first path configuration means and a displacement direction of the second path configuration means A gaming machine XF1 characterized in that they are in a direction approaching each other.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that the opening / closing members 30a and 31a (path configuration means) are displaced to the same side (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-159997). . However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the game ball that flows away from one opening / closing member (flowing down the right side of the opening / closing member) is expected to be displaced similarly to other opening members, There was a problem that there was room for improvement in terms of gathering the attention of players.

  That is, if the game ball continues to flow down the game area without being saved by the upstream opening / closing member 31a, if the attention can be paid to whether or not the game ball is saved by the next opening / closing member 30a, the vertical width of the game area By using the whole, it is easy to maintain the player's willingness to show the game balls flowing down to the player. However, in the above gaming machine, if the player deviates from the opening / closing member 31a on the upstream side, the opening / closing member 30a below the opening / closing member 30a. It is difficult to guide the player's line of sight to the downstream side.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XF1, the game ball that has deviated from the upstream path constituent means when the opening displacement direction of the first path constituent means is directed to the opposite side of the open displacement direction of the second path constituent means. Becomes easier to go to the path construction means on the downstream side. Thereby, the game ball deviated from the path configuration means on the upstream side can be easily rescued (easy to pick up) on the downstream side, so that the player can play against the game balls deviated from the path configuration means on the upstream side. It is possible to continue to have a sense of expectation that it may be picked up by other route construction means, and to make it easier to collect the player's attention to the game ball.

  In the gaming machine XF1, the gaming machine XF2 is characterized in that one of the first guiding path and the second guiding path is disposed above the other routing part.

  According to the gaming machine XF2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XF1, it is possible to easily prevent (rescue) the spilling of the gaming ball using the vertical difference.

  In the gaming machine XF1 or XF2, the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means are configured to intersect with each other when viewed in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine XF3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XF1 or XF2, by setting the displacement direction along the predetermined direction, one path configuration means is divided into the other path configuration means at the intersection position. The configuration can be made unnecessary. Accordingly, both path forming means can be formed without being divided.

  In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF3, the first path configuration means is configured to be arranged on the same side with respect to the second path configuration means before and after displacement. .

  According to the gaming machine XF4, in any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF3, since the first path configuration means is not configured to pass through the second path configuration means before and after displacement, both path configuration means are formed in an undivided manner. be able to.

  In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, the first path configuration means is disposed on the same side with respect to the second path configuration means in a predetermined first direction, and has a predetermined first crossing the first direction. A gaming machine XF5, which is arranged on the opposite side to the second path constituting means in two directions.

  According to the gaming machine XF5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF4, in addition to being able to configure each of the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means in an undivided manner, Thus, the first path forming means can be visually recognized as being displaced past the second path forming means. Thereby, the unexpectedness of a displacement can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines XF1 to XF5, the first route forming means or the second route forming means is configured to be displaceable along a width direction of the guide route.

  According to the gaming machine XF6, in addition to the effect exerted by any of the gaming machines XF1 to XF5, the load applied to the game ball by the path forming means at the time of displacement is compared to the case of displacement along the direction perpendicular to the width of the guide path. The degree can be easily reduced, and the influence of the displacement of the path forming means on the game ball can be minimized. For example, when the path forming means is displaced obliquely downward, it is possible to avoid the game ball flowing downward obliquely following the displacement.

<Points regarding the action part affecting the flow of the sphere>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, An action part configured to be able to act by contacting a game ball flowing down the guide path is provided, and the action part increases the degree of action on the game ball corresponding to the displacement of the game ball in the guide path. A gaming machine XG1 configured as described above.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to provide a rib on the gaming area side so as to slow down the falling speed of a ball (see, for example, JP-A-2006-016095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a possibility that the game may be hindered when the ball flowing down the formation range of the rib is similarly decelerated regardless of the situation.

  For example, when the variable winning device is arranged on the downstream side of the rib, and the variable winning device is in a closed state (a disadvantage to the player), the flow of the ball is delayed until the variable winning device is in the open state. I would like to know that if the variable winning device is in an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player), it may be disadvantageous for the player to delay the flow of the ball. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement in the design of the game area because the action of the rib on the game ball may cause a disadvantage to the player.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XG1, the degree of action of the action portion exemplified by the rib is configured to increase corresponding to the displacement of the game ball. Thereby, it is possible to easily connect the behavior of the game ball to the increase / decrease in the profit given to the player, so that it is possible to improve attention to the game ball.

  In the gaming machine XG1, the operating unit is configured to have a different arrangement with respect to the guide route, and the degree thereof increases as the displacement of the gaming ball increases.

  According to the gaming machine XG2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XG1, the action on the game ball can be gradually changed by gradually changing the arrangement of the action portions.

  In the gaming machine XG1 or XG2, the gaming machine XG3 is characterized in that the action exerted on the gaming ball by the action unit is a reduction in the flow-down speed.

  According to the gaming machine XG3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XG1 or XG2, the gaming ball can be easily retained at a predetermined position. Thereby, even in a game mode in which game balls are fired at regular intervals, it is possible to easily improve attention to a predetermined position.

  In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, An action part configured to be able to act by contacting a game ball flowing down the guide path is provided, and the action part is configured so that the action on the game ball differs according to the arrangement of the game balls in the guide path. A gaming machine XG4 that is configured.

  In any one of the gaming machines XG1 to XG4, the working section includes a predetermined entrance area and other entrance areas, and includes opening / closing displacement means configured to be displaceable so as to open and close the predetermined entrance area. Is different from the first action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the opened state of the predetermined entrance area and the second action on the game ball flowing down the guide path in the closed state of the predetermined entrance area. A gaming machine XG5 that is configured.

  According to the gaming machine XG5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines XG1 to XG4, the action part is configured to change in response to the switching of the state of the opening / closing displacement means. Even when the arrangement space is limited, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the flow-down mode of the game ball.

  The relationship between the first action and the second action is not limited at all. For example, when a load is applied to the game ball, the direction of the load may change, or the magnitude of the load may change.

  Moreover, you may specify the relationship between a 1st effect | action and a 2nd effect | action as an effect | action to the flow-down mode of a game ball. For example, it is good also as a conflicting action relation like the 1st effect | action which delays the arrival to the entrance area | region of a game ball, and the 2nd effect | action which speeds up the arrival of a game ball to the entrance area.

  In the gaming machine XG4 or XG5, the change in the action caused by the action part is caused by the difference in the arrangement of the game ball with respect to the path construction means, the gaming machine XG6.

  According to the gaming machine XG6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XG4 or XG5, the action of the action part is configured to be generated by the arrangement relationship with respect to the path configuration means of the game ball. It can be made unnecessary to be movable.

  In addition, specification of the aspect of arrangement | positioning relationship with respect to the path | route structure means of a game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be specified by an arrangement interval of game balls from a predetermined part of the route constituting means, or may be specified by whether the game balls are in contact with the route constituting means or not yet in contact with the fall.

  In any of the gaming machines XG4 to XG6, the guide route includes a first section and a second section that is disposed away from the entrance area with respect to the first section, and the first section and the A gaming machine XG7 that is configured to change the degree of action of the action section on the game ball in the second section.

  According to the gaming machine XG7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XG4 to XG6, even if the gaming balls are fired at a fixed interval, the spacing of the gaming balls can be reduced or released in the guide route. By setting the first section and the second section, it is possible to set a place where game balls easily collect on the guide route.

  The method for changing the degree of deceleration is not limited at all. For example, a projecting portion that protrudes toward the guide route may be configured, and the game ball may be decelerated by being brought into contact with the game ball. In this case, the degree of deceleration can be changed according to the protruding length of the protruding portion and the density of the protruding portions arranged in the predetermined section.

  In this case, the degree of deceleration can be changed depending on which height position of the game ball the projecting portion abuts. For example, when the protruding portion hits the upper side of the center of the game ball, a load in the vertical direction is generated in addition to the load in the protruding direction. In this case, a load in the direction of pressing the rolling game ball is generated, and the deceleration action tends to be large. Accordingly, while the arrangement interval of the projecting portions is the same, a difference in deceleration action can be caused by the projecting portions having different contact points with the game balls.

  In the gaming machine XG7, the action on the game ball in the first section is set to be smaller than the action on the game ball flowing down in the second section.

  According to the gaming machine XG8, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine XG7, by increasing the flow velocity of the gaming ball in the section closer to the entering area, the situation where the gaming balls enter the entering area together. It can be easily avoided.

  In any one of the gaming machines XG5 to XG8, the game apparatus includes the predetermined entrance area and a second entrance area, and the guide path includes a first guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the predetermined entrance area, A second guidance route capable of guiding the game ball to the second entry area, and the first guidance route and the second guidance route are configured to intersect each other in the vicinity of a predetermined position, and can be generated by making a mistake. The flow velocity of the game ball flowing down the downstream section arranged downstream is higher than the game ball flowing down the upstream section arranged upstream with respect to the predetermined position. A gaming machine XG9 characterized by being configured as follows.

  According to the gaming machine XG9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XG5 to XG8, the situation where the game balls accumulate on the downstream side of the intersection position as the predetermined position is avoided, so that the first guidance route and the second guidance It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the game ball falls from the downstream side of the intersection position when switching the generation with the route. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of a zero sphere can be suppressed.

  The boundary between the upstream section and the downstream section is not limited to the intersection position. For example, even when the predetermined position is set upstream of the intersection position, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being accumulated on the downstream side of the intersection position. In addition, for example, even when a predetermined position is set downstream of the intersection position, it is possible to make it difficult for game balls to collect between the predetermined position and the entry area, and thus the predetermined position is not set. Compared to the above, the number of spilled spheres can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine XG9, when the game ball flows down along a predetermined straight line toward the entrance area, the time required for the game ball to pass through the downstream section is determined by the game ball in the upstream section. A gaming machine XG10 characterized in that it is shorter than the time required to flow down the diameter.

  According to the gaming machine XG10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XG9, the gaming ball that flows down first does not enter the downstream section while the gaming ball that flows down first passes through the downstream section. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of game balls from accumulating in the downstream section from setting the time required for flow down.

  In the gaming machine XG9 or XG10, the operating unit is configured such that the degree of action on the gaming ball is maximized at the intersection position.

  According to the gaming machine XG11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XG9 or XG10, the flow velocity of the gaming ball at the point where the gaming ball enters from the upstream section (spill prevention advantageous section) to the downstream section (spill prevention disadvantageous section). Is reduced to the maximum width, the change in the flow-down mode of the game ball can be maximized, and the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

  In any one of the gaming machines XG9 to XG11, the action unit is configured to be able to act on a game ball flowing down on the first guide path, but does not act on or different from a game ball flowing down on the second guide path. A gaming machine XG12 comprising an action selection unit configured to act in an aspect.

  According to the gaming machine XG12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XG9 to XG11, the action part can be designed on the premise of a specific route, so that the action part can be easily designed. In addition, the design of the action part is not limited at all. For example, the action of the action part on the game ball can be arbitrarily set by designing the arrangement of the action part in the direction intersecting the guide path, the formation length, the formation length of the action part on the guide path side, etc. Can do.

  In the gaming machine XG12, the action unit is configured to be able to act on a game ball before reaching the path configuration unit, and configured so that its action is different from an action occurring on the game ball after reaching the path configuration unit. A gaming machine XG13 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine XG13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XG12, the action part can cause some action on the game ball regardless of the state of the path configuration means, so the significance of the placement of the action part Can be increased.

<Relationship between the arrangement interval of the pair of drive devices and the arrangement interval of the pair of opening / closing plates>
A game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined entrance area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state that constitutes a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entrance area; In a gaming machine comprising a path configuration means switchable between a second state that does not constitute the guide route, the path configuration means is a first route configuration means and a second route different from the first route configuration means And a first driving means for driving the first path forming means, and a second driving means for driving the second path forming means, the first path forming means. The gaming machine XH1 is configured such that an arrangement interval between the second path forming unit and the second path forming unit is reduced.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a plurality of opening and closing members 30a and 31a are configured to be opened and closed independently by a plurality of different driving means (corresponding to solenoids) (for example, JP-A-2015-2015). 159997). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a plurality of driving means are arranged in the same manner on the respective opening / closing members 30a, 31a, and the arrangement interval of the plurality of driving means is set to be equal to the arrangement interval of the opening / closing members 30a, 31a. Is done. In this case, there is a problem that the size and arrangement of the opening / closing members 30a and 31a may be limited by the size of the driving means. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the flow path forming means to the entrance area is limited.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XH1, the arrangement interval between the first path configuration unit and the second path configuration unit is configured to be narrower than the arrangement interval between the first drive unit and the second drive unit. As a result, the degree of freedom in design of the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means can be improved.

  In addition, the aspect which narrows an arrangement | positioning space | interval is not limited at all. For example, in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-159997, the size of the opening and closing members 30a and 31a and the degree of design freedom of the opening and closing members 30a and 31a are improved by changing the arrangement of the driving means with respect to the opening and closing members 30a and 31a. Can be made.

  In the gaming machine XH1, at least one of the first path configuration means or the second path configuration means is configured to be displaced in proximity to the other second path configuration means or the first path configuration means by driving. Characteristic gaming machine XH2.

  According to the gaming machine XH2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XH1, the range required for the displacement of the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means can be kept narrow.

  In the gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the first route forming means and the second route forming means are configured to intersect with each other when viewed in a predetermined direction.

  According to the gaming machine XH3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XH1 or XH2, the crossing range can be shared by the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means. Thereby, the range required for arrangement | positioning of a 1st path | route structure means and a 2nd path | route structure means can be narrowed.

  In the gaming machine XH3, the gaming machine XH4 is characterized by comprising suppression means configured to be able to suppress displacement of the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means at the intersecting positions.

  According to the gaming machine XH4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XH3, the first path configuration means and the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means at a position where one of the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means tends to interfere with the displacement of the other. By suppressing the displacement of the second path forming means, it is possible to prevent the displacement of the first path forming means and the second path forming means from being disturbed.

  In the gaming machine XH3 or XH4, the intersecting position is arranged outside the gaming area, the gaming machine XH5.

  According to the gaming machine XH5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine XH3 or XH4, it is possible to narrow the range required for the arrangement of the first path configuration means and the second path configuration means outside the gaming area (for example, on the back side). it can.

  In any one of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, the first drive means is disposed on one side of the path configuration means, and the second drive means is disposed on the other side of the path configuration means. A gaming machine XH6.

  According to the gaming machine XH6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XH1 to XH5, the first driving means can be obtained by reversing the arrangement of the first driving means and the second driving means with reference to the path construction means. And the second driving means can be spaced from each other.

<Points that do not require short opening to prevent false V>
A game area where a game ball flows down, a predetermined entrance area where a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a first state that constitutes a guide path capable of guiding the game ball to the entrance area; In a gaming machine comprising a path configuration means switchable between a second state that does not constitute the guide path, a profit granting means for giving a predetermined profit to the player when the game ball enters, and a profit granting means Profit switching means that can be switched between a first state in which a game ball can be guided and a second state in which the game ball cannot be guided to the profit granting means, and maintaining the route configuration means in the first state, The gaming machine XI1 characterized in that the profit switching means is switched to the first state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the ball that has passed through the big prize opening is distributed to either an advantageous route or an unfavorable route by the distribution unit, and the profit given to the player changes depending on the result of the distribution There is a gaming machine (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538, for example). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the operation mode of the opening / closing plate of the big prize opening during the period in which the distribution unit can distribute the ball to the advantageous route is the operation for the case where the ball flows down to the advantageous route. The mode and the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route are clearly divided. In the operation mode for the case where the ball does not flow down to the advantageous route, in the first place, the ball does not enter the big prize opening. Since the opening / closing plate is operated (closed), it is impossible to maintain attention to the sphere heading to the winning prize opening, and there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of paying attention to the behavior of the sphere.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XI1, switching between the case where the ball can pass through the profit granting means and the case where the ball cannot pass through the profit granting means while the path forming means is maintained in the first state. Therefore, the path construction means does not block the entry of the sphere into the entry area. Thereby, the attention with respect to the sphere which goes to the entrance area can be maintained.

  In the gaming machine XI1, the gaming machine XI2 is configured such that the first state of the route forming means prevents the ball from entering the profit granting means.

  According to the gaming machine XI2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XI1, it is possible to prevent the entrance to the profit granting means by the path construction means.

  In the gaming machine XI1 or XI2, the gaming machine XI3 is configured such that a gaming ball can enter the profit granting means in the second state of the route construction means.

  According to the gaming machine XI3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XI1 or XI2, it is possible to increase the profits that the player can obtain from the gaming balls flowing down during the second state of the route construction means.

  In any one of the gaming machines XI1 to XI3, the profit giving means is configured to be arranged on the upstream side of the entrance area.

  According to the gaming machine XI4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XI1 to XI3, it is possible to make the state of the path configuration means non-corresponding to execution of entering the profit giving means.

  In the gaming machine XI4, in the first state of the route configuring means, the profit switching means is in the first state, and in the first state of the profit switching means, it is possible to prevent the entry into the entrance area. This is a gaming machine XI5.

  According to the gaming machine XI5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XI4, it is possible to configure the entry into the profit giving means while preventing the entry into the entry area. Accordingly, for example, a round game in which a player can acquire a profit associated with entering a profit giving means while the payout of award balls accompanying entering a entering area is extremely small can be configured.

<Configure to detect defects or fraud without waiting for game balls to enter>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, A gaming machine XJ1 provided with detection means capable of detecting the state of the route construction means.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine that determines an illegal winning at the timing of the winning and performs error notification when it is determined that it corresponds to an illegal winning (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-000562, (See paragraph 0333). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, an error notification is not made unless a prize is won, and in an unauthorized preparation stage (for example, a stage in which a member that opens and closes a prize opening (corresponding to a path construction means) is illegally displaced). Since fraud cannot be found, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of keeping the game area normal.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XJ1, since the state of the path configuration means can be detected by the detection means, it is possible to detect fraud without waiting for the game ball to enter the winning opening. Can keep normal.

  In the gaming machine XJ1, a gaming machine XJ2 comprising comparison means configured to be able to compare a detection pattern relating to a gaming area with a predetermined reference pattern.

  According to the gaming machine XJ2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine XJ1, it can be compared with a predetermined reference pattern, and the comparison result can be used for notification. From the difference from the pattern, it is possible to determine what kind of abnormality has occurred.

  Examples of the detection pattern include a detection pattern obtained by detecting a game ball entering the winning opening, a state switching timing pattern of the route forming means, and the like.

  The gaming machine XJ1 or XJ2 includes a predetermined winning port through which the game ball is guided by the path forming unit in the first state, and the detecting unit is unable to enter the gaming ball into the predetermined winning port. The gaming machine XJ3 is configured to be able to detect the state of the route forming means in a state.

  According to the gaming machine XJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XJ1 or XJ2, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from entering the winning opening before the gaming area returns to a normal state. Thereby, it can be made easy to prevent an illegal profit from being generated.

  In any one of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ3, the detecting means is also used as a detecting means for quality confirmation use.

  According to the gaming machine XJ4, in any of the gaming machines XJ1 to XJ3, the number of parts can be reduced by sharing the detection means for other purposes.

<Configuration for prior understanding and early detection of fraud or defects>
In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route, A gaming machine XK1 comprising: a determination unit configured to be able to determine whether or not the path configuration unit can switch a state before shifting to a predetermined advantageous state.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that performs error notification when it is determined that the winning before the operation of the opening / closing plate (corresponding to the path construction means) or the winning after the operation ends corresponds to the illegal winning. (For example, refer to JP 2017-000562 A, paragraph 0333). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if the opening / closing plate itself has a problem (for example, when it is damaged and does not close), the notification is not given unless a prize is received, so there is no bad intention. There is a possibility that the player who won the prize may feel uncomfortable, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of early detection of defects.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XK1, the determination means is configured to be able to cope with the failure of the route configuration means before the predetermined advantageous state is started, so that the failure can be detected early. A comfortable game can be provided to the player.

  In addition, as a predetermined advantageous state, it does not limit at all and various aspects are illustrated. For example, since it is applicable if it is an advantageous state with respect to the normal state, the predetermined advantageous state includes time saving, probability change, jackpot game, and the like.

  In the gaming machine XK1, the gaming machine XK2 is configured to switch the path configuration means between the first state and the second state before shifting to the predetermined advantageous state.

  According to the gaming machine XK2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine XK1, it is possible to easily recognize the malfunction by actually operating the path configuration means before shifting to the predetermined advantageous state.

  In the gaming machine XK1 or XK2, based on the determination by the determination unit, the gaming machine XK3 includes a repair unit configured to be able to repair the state of the route configuration unit.

  According to the gaming machine XK3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XK1 or XK2, the state of the path forming unit can be restored to the normal state at an early stage by the restoring unit.

  In any one of the gaming machines XK1 to XK3, the game machine XK4 is characterized in that, as an operation mode that can be determined by the determination unit, the path configuration unit is set to be operable in a plurality of operation modes.

  According to the gaming machine XK4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK3, since the determination means is configured to be able to determine a plurality of operation modes, it is determined from the determination result that there is a problem occurring in the path configuration means. The cause can be easily investigated.

  In any one of the gaming machines XK1 to XK4, the predetermined advantageous state is configured in a plurality of stages, and the ease of determination by the determination unit is changed corresponding to the stages. A gaming machine XK5.

  According to the gaming machine XK5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK4, the determination means determines at an appropriate frequency in response to the advantageous state for each stage, thereby causing a defect in the path configuration means. Can be found properly.

  In any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK5, the determination means includes a detection means, and the detection means is also used as a detection means for quality confirmation.

  According to the gaming machine XK6, in any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK5, the number of parts can be reduced by sharing the detection means for other purposes.

  Any one of the gaming machines XK1 to XK6 includes a gaming machine XK3, and includes a ball entering area into which a game ball can enter, and the repairing means changes the state of the route construction means to the game ball to the ball entering area. A gaming machine XK7, which is switched to the side that interferes with the entering of the game.

  According to the gaming machine XK7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XK1 to XK6, the state of the route construction means is switched by the repairing means, so that illegal entry into the entering area can be prevented.

  In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of disturbance of a ball entry. For example, it is possible to delay the arrival to the entry area, or to allow at least a part of the game balls to be discharged from the game area on the upstream side so that the game balls do not reach the entry area. Alternatively, the route to the entrance area may be closed to prevent the game ball from reaching the entrance area.

<Configuration involving multiple members in opening and closing a predetermined path through which game balls can pass>
A first state in which a game ball can pass, a first state in which a game ball can pass through a passage route leading to the predetermined region, and a first state in which the game ball cannot pass through the first state. A gaming machine comprising: opening / closing means that can be switched between two states; and prevention means that can constitute a guidance prevention state for preventing guidance of the game ball to the predetermined area. In the gaming machine, the opening / closing means is predetermined When arranged at a position, the prevention means corresponds to a displacement mode of the opening / closing means, either the guidance prevention state or the passage enabling state allowing the game ball to pass through the predetermined area. A gaming machine XL1 characterized by being configured as described above.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a first opening / closing plate (corresponding to an opening / closing means) and a second opening / closing plate (corresponding to a prevention means) open and close a big prize opening (corresponding to a predetermined area) (for example, JP, 2010-220731, A). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, there is no description about switching the open / close state of the second open / close plate corresponding to the displacement mode of the first open / close plate when the first open / close plate is open. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of normalizing the flow of the game ball to a predetermined area because measures for the case where one open / close plate is forcibly opened are not sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XL1, when the opening / closing means is disposed at a predetermined position as the first state, whether the opening prevention state or the passage-permitted state is configured is defined as a displacement mode of the opening / closing means. Since it can be configured correspondingly, it is determined whether the displacement mode is normal or incorrect, and if it is incorrect, the passage prevention state is configured to normalize the passage of the game ball to the predetermined area be able to.

  In addition, the aspect of a predetermined area | region is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening through which one game ball can pass, a route, a range in which a plurality of balls can be arranged simultaneously, or an upper surface of a plate on which game balls can be placed.

  In the gaming machine XL1, the gaming machine XL2 is characterized in that the prevention means is configured to be capable of interlocking with the opening / closing means in a plurality of types of operation modes.

  According to the gaming machine XL2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XL1, the prevention means can be used for a plurality of purposes.

  In the gaming machine XL2, the gaming machine XL3 is provided with switching means configured to be able to switch the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means.

  According to the gaming machine XL3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine XL2, the correspondence between the opening / closing means and the preventing means can be arbitrarily changed by the switching means.

  In addition, the aspect of a switching means is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, a unit that performs switching according to the direction of transmission of the driving force to the switching unit may be used, or a unit that includes a unique driving force generation device and that is switched by a driving force generated from the driving force generation device may be used.

  Further, the operation mode switched by the switching unit is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the opening / closing means and the prevention means may be switched between a mode in which they operate integrally (or a mode in which they follow in a predetermined time delay and eventually catch up) and a mode in which they operate separately. Further, for example, the operation relationship is switched while maintaining the state where the opening / closing means and the prevention means operate separately (for example, switching between the same direction displacement and the reverse direction displacement, or switching the operation speed). Yes).

  In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL3, the game machine includes a driving unit capable of generating a driving force for changing the state of the opening / closing unit, and the preventing unit is in a state of the opening / closing unit regardless of the driving force of the driving unit. The gaming machine XL4 is configured to constitute the flow-down prevention state when the value is changed.

  According to the gaming machine XL4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines XL1 to XL3, a state in which the gaming ball does not reach the predetermined area even if an abnormal situation occurs in which the opening / closing means is opened regardless of the driving means It is possible to prevent the player from obtaining unexpected profits.

  In any one of the gaming machines XL1 to XL4, the prevention means can be arranged on the predetermined area side or on the opposite side of the predetermined area with respect to the opening / closing means.

  According to the gaming machine XL5, in addition to the effect produced by any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL4, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the prevention means. Further, the position at which the game ball can pass in the passage prevention state of the prevention means can be arbitrarily set depending on the position on the passage route, so that the degree of freedom in designing the gameability can be improved. Can do.

  In addition, the prevention means does not need to be fixedly arranged, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it can be arranged upstream of the opening / closing means, can be arranged downstream of the opening / closing means, or can be exchanged between the upstream side and the downstream side of the opening / closing means (for example, from the downstream side of the opening / closing means) It may be configured to prevent the game ball from passing by being displaced upstream). That is, any arrangement may be used as long as the game ball can be prevented from passing through the predetermined area.

  In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL5, drive means capable of generating a driving force for changing the state of the opening / closing means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the opening / closing means. The gaming machine XL6 is configured to be capable of switching the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means by changing the state of the transmission means.

  According to the gaming machine XL6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL5, the change of the state of the transmission means is directly linked to the ease of switching the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means. It is possible to facilitate the design of the transmission means after setting the desired degree of ease of mode switching.

  Thereby, the transmission means for transmitting the driving force necessary for the operation of the path construction means can be used for switching the operation mode between the opening / closing means and the prevention means. In addition, the aspect of the change of the state of a transmission means is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, the presence or absence of deformation may be used, the movement relationship of each component may be changed when the transmission means has a plurality of components, the movement path (relative, absolute) may be changed, or the posture may be changed (relative). Or absolute).

  In any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL6, the prevention means is configured to be able to be interlocked with the opening / closing means in a plurality of types of operation modes, and the interlock is configured to be difficult to be released even when a load from the gaming area occurs. A gaming machine XL7 that is characterized by being played.

  According to the gaming machine XL7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines XL1 to XL6, the load generated in the gaming area where the gaming area flows down is transmitted to the opening / closing means or the preventing means, and the interlock is released. Occurrence can be easily prevented.

In addition, the aspect of the load generated in the game area is not limited at all. For example, it may be a load (for example, an impact force) caused by a collision of game balls, or a load transmitted through a thread or metal thin wire that has entered the game area.
<About the concept of the invention using the sorting members C170 to C3170 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a displacement member that is at least partially disposed in a passage path of a sphere and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the sphere, when the first sphere that passes through the passage path reaches the displacement member, The displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the first sphere is guided to the first passage, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. In a state, a second sphere following the first sphere is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member is arranged at the predetermined position in a state where the weight of the sphere is not applied. A gaming machine CA1 characterized by the above.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a sorting member that operates by the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-described conventional technology, regardless of the state of the game ball that has arrived, only the first passage and the second passage are alternately distributed in the order of arrival, so that the player pays attention to such a distribution operation. There was a problem that the entertainment of the game was insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CA1, when the first sphere passing through the passage route reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, and the first sphere becomes the first sphere. In the state where the displacement member is displaced by the weight of the first sphere, a second sphere following the first sphere is guided to the second passage, and the displacement member has the weight of the sphere. When the second ball is connected to the first ball at a predetermined distance or less, the first ball is guided to the first passage. The second sphere can be guided to the second passage by the displacement member displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, while the second sphere has a predetermined amount in the first sphere. If the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere reaches the first passage, the displacement member is positioned before the second sphere arrives. By being placed into position, it can be second sphere also guided to the first passage. In this way, since the guide path can be changed according to the state of the spheres (the distance between the preceding sphere and the following sphere), the player can focus on the state of the sphere and improve the fun of the game. can do.

  The second sphere that follows the first sphere means a sphere that follows the first sphere at an interval smaller than a predetermined amount. Therefore, the second sphere may roll or flow down while being in contact with the first sphere.

  In the gaming machine CA1, the gaming machine CA2 is characterized in that the displacement member is displaced to the predetermined position by the weight of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine CA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA1, the displacement member is displaced to the predetermined position by the weight of the displacement member. It can be simplified. In addition, since the displacement to the displacement member can be made slower than in the case of using the biasing spring, the displacement member is arranged at a predetermined position before guiding the second ball to the second passage. Can be suppressed. Further, it is possible to give a possibility that a third sphere following the second sphere can be guided to the second passage.

  In the gaming machine CA2, the displacement member functions as a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and displaces the main body to the predetermined position. A gaming machine CA3, comprising: a weight portion, wherein at least a part of the weight portion is visible to a player.

  According to the gaming machine CA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA2, a main body that guides the ball to the first passage or the second passage, and a weight that is connected to the main body and displaces the main body to a predetermined position. A weight portion that functions, and at least a part of the weight portion is visible to the player, so that the player can recognize the direction in which the ball is guided based on the position (state) of the weight portion. it can. Moreover, the role as a weight for displacing the main body part and the role as a part for recognizing the guide direction of the sphere can be shared by the weight part, and the product cost can be reduced correspondingly.

  In the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes a first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls.

  According to the gaming machine CA4, in any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA3, the displacement member includes the first surface on which the first ball guided to the first passage rolls, and therefore the first ball is the first one. While rolling one surface, the weight of the sphere can be applied to the displacement member. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere (that is, the state in which the second sphere can be guided to the second passage).

  The gaming machine CA4 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member rolls the second ball guided to the second passage. A gaming machine CA5, wherein the second surface is disposed at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine CA5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA4, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the second surface is perpendicular to the axis. Since they are disposed at overlapping positions in the direction, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced toward the predetermined position by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second sphere can be stably rolled. Further, it is possible to secure the possibility that the third sphere following the second sphere can be guided to the second passage.

  In the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is longer than the second surface. A gaming machine CA6 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine CA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA4 or CA5, the displacement member includes the second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface is the second. Since it is made longer than the surface, it is possible to easily form a state in which the first sphere rolls on the first surface while the second sphere rolls on the second surface. That is, while the second sphere rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first sphere is applied to the displacement member, so that the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward the predetermined position can be suppressed. Therefore, the second sphere can be stably rolled. Further, it is possible to secure the possibility that the third sphere following the second sphere can be guided to the second passage.

  In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member are provided, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. A gaming machine CA7, comprising: a second surface on which a ball of the ball rolls, wherein the first surface extends in a direction away from the shaft.

  According to the gaming machine CA7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA6, the displacement member includes a second surface on which the second ball guided to the second passage rolls, and the first surface Is extended in a direction away from the shaft, so that the weight of the first sphere can effectively act on the displacement member as the first sphere rolls toward the first passage. . Therefore, it is possible to suppress the displacement member from being displaced toward the predetermined position by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. Therefore, the second sphere can be stably rolled. Further, it is possible to secure the possibility that the third sphere following the second sphere can be guided to the second passage.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member are provided, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. A gaming machine CA8, comprising a second surface on which a ball of the ball rolls, wherein at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is disposed across the shaft.

  According to the gaming machine CA8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the gaming machine CA8 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member. The second sphere guided to the passage has a second surface on which the first ball and the second surface roll, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is arranged with the shaft interposed therebetween. Can be increased.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member are provided, and the displacement member is guided to the second passage. The game machine CA9 is characterized in that the game machine CA9 is provided with a second surface on which the sphere of the ball rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is disposed on the same side with respect to the axis.

  According to the gaming machine CA9, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA7, the gaming machine CA9 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member. The second sphere guided to the passage includes a second surface on which the first sphere rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is arranged on the same side with respect to the axis. Even if discharged from the first surface, the weight of the second sphere can be used to change the posture of the displacement member to a posture for guiding the second sphere to the second passage. As a result, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, an upstream surface on which a ball rolls toward the first surface is provided, and the first surface is a rolling direction of the first ball that is rolled from the upstream surface. A gaming machine CA10 characterized by inverting the above.

  According to the gaming machine CA10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines CA4 to CA9, the gaming machine CA10 includes an upstream surface on which the first ball rolls toward the first surface, and the first surface rolls from the upstream surface. Since the rolling direction of the first sphere is reversed, it is possible to secure the time for the first sphere to stay on the first surface by the time required for the reversal. Therefore, while the second sphere rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first sphere acts on the displacement member, so that the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. Displacement toward the predetermined position can be suppressed. Therefore, the second sphere can be stably rolled. Further, it is possible to secure the possibility that the third sphere following the second sphere can be guided to the second passage. Furthermore, the length of the first surface can be shortened, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the displacement member can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and a ball that is disposed on the base member and rolls toward the first surface. The gaming machine CA11 is characterized in that the gaming machine CA11 includes an upstream surface, and the shaft is disposed on the upstream surface in a posture orthogonal to a direction in which the ball rolls and a vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine CA11, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the shaft is disposed in a posture orthogonal to the direction in which the ball rolls and the vertical direction on the upstream surface, so that the base member It is possible to reduce the size of the unit in which the displacement member is disposed. In particular, by arranging the base member so that the ball rolls along the upstream surface along the width direction of the gaming machine, the space direction of the gaming machine is effectively utilized to secure a space for disposing the displacement member. It can be done easily.

  Any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10 includes a base member, and the displacement member is disposed on the base member so as to be slidable.

  According to the gaming machine CA12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA10, the displacement member is slidably disposed on the base member. For example, the displacement member is rotatably supported on the base member. Compared with the case where it is done, a displacement member can be reduced in size and the arrangement | positioning space of the other member in a base member can be ensured by that much.

  In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, a base member, a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and a ball that is disposed on the base member and rolls toward the first surface. An upstream surface, and the displacement member rolls the second sphere guided to the second passage in a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. When the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the upstream end of the second surface is positioned vertically below the downstream end of the upstream surface. A gaming machine CA13 characterized by that.

  Here, when the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the displacement member may jump up due to the impact at the time of displacement, and the displacement member jumps up from the downstream end of the upstream surface. However, if the upstream end of the second surface is positioned upward, the second sphere may not roll from the upstream surface to the second surface. In particular, when the second sphere collides with the upstream end (upstream end of the second surface) of the displacement member that has jumped up, the impact causes the displacement member to further spring up (the displacement member is pushed up by the second sphere), and the first There is a possibility that the second sphere flows into the passage (first surface) where the first sphere should roll.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CA13, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA12, in a state where the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the gaming machine CA13 is more than the downstream end of the upstream surface. Since the upstream end of the second surface is located below the vertical direction, when the displacement member bounces off due to the impact of being displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the upstream end of the second surface is more Also, the upstream end of the second surface can be prevented from being positioned upward. Therefore, the second sphere can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

  In the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface.

  According to the gaming machine CA14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine CA13, the upstream end of the second surface is inclined downward toward the upstream surface, so that when the first ball is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first ball. When the displacement member bounces (bounces up) due to the impact, and the second sphere collides with the upstream end (upstream end of the second surface) of the displaced displacement member, the force acting on the displacement member from the second sphere is: It can be made to act as a force in the direction of pushing down the displacement member. As a result, the second sphere can be smoothly rolled from the upstream surface to the second surface.

  In any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, an upstream surface on which the ball rolls toward the first surface is provided, and the first ball guided to the first passage rolls on the displacement member. A first surface, wherein the first surface reverses the rolling direction of the first sphere rolled from the upstream surface, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. A position where the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is separated from the upstream surface than the displacement locus on the upstream surface side of the first sphere at the position where the first surface is reversed. A gaming machine CA15 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine CA15, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA14, when the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the first surface is in a position to be reversed. Since the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface side of the displacement member is positioned farther from the upstream surface than the displacement trajectory on the upstream surface side of the first sphere, the second sphere is erroneously introduced into the first surface ( Can be suppressed). That is, the second sphere is brought into contact with the first sphere to separate the second sphere from the first surface, and the upstream side of the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. At the end, the second sphere can be pushed away from the first surface.

  In the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member is positioned at a position where the rolling direction of the first surface is reversed until the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by a predetermined amount or more due to the weight of the first ball. A gaming machine CA16 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine CA16, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CA15, the displacement member reverses the rolling direction of the first surface until the displacement member is displaced by a predetermined amount or more from the predetermined position due to the weight of the first sphere. Since the first sphere is retained at the position, it is possible to more reliably suppress the second sphere from being erroneously introduced (accepted) into the first surface. That is, the second sphere is brought into contact with the first sphere to separate the second sphere from the first surface, and the upstream side of the displacement member that is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. The operation of pushing the second sphere away from the first surface at the end can be executed more reliably.

  In any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, the inflow portion, a reciprocating surface on which a ball flowing from the inflow portion rolls so as to be reciprocally displaceable, and an outflow portion for causing the ball to flow out from the reciprocating surface, The gaming machine CA17 is characterized in that a portion is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage route.

  According to the gaming machine CA17, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA16, the inflow portion, the reciprocating surface on which the ball flowing in from the inflow portion rolls so as to be capable of reciprocating displacement, and the ball from the reciprocating surface And the outflow portion is located upstream of the displacement member in the passage path, and the first sphere and the second sphere are connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less. And the second sphere can be easily made to reach the displacement member in a state where the sphere and the second sphere are connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less. That is, even if the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when flowing in from the inflow portion is larger than a predetermined amount, the first sphere and the first sphere The distance from the second sphere can be reduced (the distance is set to a predetermined amount or less).

  In the gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension through which one ball can pass.

  According to the gaming machine CA18, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CA17, the width dimension of the reciprocating surface is set to a width dimension through which one sphere can pass. It is possible to prevent the displaced first sphere and second sphere from passing each other. Therefore, when the first sphere and the second sphere are reciprocally displaced on the reciprocating surface, the interval between the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily clogged (the interval can be easily set to a predetermined amount or less). .

  In the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward as it goes to one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is arranged at the lowermost part of the reciprocating surface.

  According to the gaming machine CA19, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CA18, the reciprocating surface is inclined upward as it goes to the one side and the other side, and the outflow portion is arranged at the lowermost part of the reciprocating surface. The first sphere and the second sphere can be caused to flow out from the outflow portion in a state where the inertia that is reciprocally displaced on the surface is weakened. In other words, the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily flowed out while maintaining a state where the first sphere and the second sphere are connected at an interval of a predetermined amount or less.

  In the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above, the gaming machine CA20.

  According to the gaming machine CA20, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA19, the reciprocating surface is formed in a straight line when viewed from above, so that when the first ball and the second ball are reciprocally displaced on the reciprocating surface, The distance between the first sphere and the second sphere can be easily clogged (the distance can be easily set to a predetermined amount or less).

  Any one of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, comprising a suction member that is formed so that the magnet's suction force can act on the ball and is disposed in a posture in which at least the lower surface is inclined downward.

  According to the gaming machine CA21, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines CA1 to CA20, an adsorption member is provided that is formed so that the adsorption force of the magnet can act on the sphere and is disposed in a posture in which at least the lower surface is inclined downward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the fun of the game by forming a passage path of the sphere with such an adsorbing member. That is, when the sphere is adsorbed on the lower inclined surface of the adsorption member, the sphere can be slid by its own weight and displaced along the lower surface of the adsorption member. In this case, depending on the state of the sphere (the relationship between the inertial force acting on the sphere and the adsorption force), the sphere may drop from the lower surface of the adsorption member (that is, the sphere reaches the end of the passage path (lower surface of the adsorption member)) It can be in an unstable state with the possibility of being unreachable). As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine CA21, the attraction member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic body, and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the lower surface forming member.

  According to the gaming machine CA22, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA21, the attracting member includes a lower surface forming member formed in a plate shape from a magnetic body, and a magnet that applies a magnetic force to the lower surface forming member. By making the surface on which the sliding surface is formed by the lower surface of the lower surface forming member, the adjustment of the attracting force and the optimization of the frictional force can be facilitated, and the passage path of the sphere can be reliably formed with a simple structure.

  In the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the suction member forms at least a part of the second passage.

  According to the gaming machine CA23, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA21 or CA22, the adsorption member forms at least a part of the second passage, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game. That is, the second sphere can be guided by the displacement member to reach the second passage because the second sphere reaches the displacement member in a state where the second sphere is connected to the first sphere with a predetermined amount or less. Only the case, the possibility is relatively low. Passing safely by displacing instability that may cause the second sphere reached through such a low possibility to fall (possibly unable to reach the end of the lower surface of the adsorption member) It is possible to improve the interest of the game by expecting the player.

  The gaming machine CA23 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the first ball guided to the first passage is rolled on the displacement member. And a second surface on which the second sphere guided to the second passage rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface sandwich the shaft. A gaming machine CA24 characterized by being arranged in

  According to the gaming machine CA24, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA23, the gaming machine CA24 includes a base member and a shaft that rotatably supports the displacement member on the base member, and the displacement member is guided to the first passage. A first surface on which the first sphere rolls and a second surface on which the second sphere guided to the second passage rolls, and at least a part of the first surface and the second surface is Since the shaft is disposed across the shaft, the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere (the position of the first surface is displaced downward), so that the position of the second surface is displaced upward. Can be made. Therefore, the second sphere rolling on the second surface can be easily adsorbed to the lower surface of the adsorption member.

  In the gaming machine CA24, the second surface is disposed at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction.

  According to the gaming machine CA25, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA24, the second surface is disposed at a position overlapping the axis in the vertical direction, and therefore is displaced by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. It can be suppressed that the member is displaced toward the predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second sphere rolling on the second surface can be easily adsorbed to the lower surface of the adsorption member.

  In the gaming machine CA24 or CA25, the gaming machine CA26 is characterized in that the first surface is longer than the second surface.

According to the gaming machine CA26, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CA24 or CA25, the first surface is made longer than the second surface, so that the first ball is simultaneously rolled while the second ball rolls on the second surface. It is easy to form a state in which the sphere rolls on the first surface. That is, while the second sphere rolls on the second surface, the weight of the first sphere is applied to the displacement member, so that the displacement member is moved by the weight of the second sphere rolling on the second surface. It is possible to suppress the displacement toward the predetermined position (the position of the second surface is displaced downward). Therefore, the second sphere rolling on the second surface can be easily adsorbed to the lower surface of the adsorption member.
<About the concept of the invention taking dish members C120, C2120, C4120 as an example>
In the gaming machine provided with a ball path, the path includes a first path that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and a second path that communicates with the first path and passes the ball along the left-right direction. A game machine CB1 characterized by comprising:

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a passage member (stage) that can reciprocate a ball (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-198607). However, the above-described gaming machine has a problem that the interest of the game is not sufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CB1, the passage is in communication with the first passage that allows the ball to reciprocate in the front-rear direction, and the second passage that passes the ball along the left-right direction. Because of this, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game.

  In the gaming machine CB1, when a first ball and a second ball succeeding the first ball pass through the second passage, the distance between the first ball and the second ball is set. Accordingly, the game machine CB2 is characterized in that a passage serving as a guide destination for the first ball and the second ball is changed.

  According to the gaming machine CB2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CB1, when the first ball and the second ball that is a successor of the first ball pass through the second passage, the first ball Depending on the distance between the sphere and the second sphere, the path to which the first sphere and the second sphere are guided is changed, so that the sphere is guided to the predetermined path (that is, the first sphere is guided). The player can expect that the interval between the ball and the second ball is a predetermined interval), and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In this case, when the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere is determined by the reciprocating motion in the first passage, the first sphere and the second sphere pass the sphere along the left-right direction. Since it flows down from the 1st passage to the 2nd passage, it can make it easy for a player to visually recognize the interval of the 1st ball and the 2nd ball. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, the passage guided when the interval exceeds the predetermined amount. At least the second sphere is guided into a more advantageous passageway,
The first passage is formed so that the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere can be reduced by the reciprocating movement of the first sphere and the second sphere. A gaming machine CB3.

  According to the gaming machine CB3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CB2, when the distance between the first ball and the second ball when passing through the second passage is equal to or less than a predetermined amount, the interval is a predetermined amount. At least the second sphere is guided to a path more advantageous than the guided path, and the first path is reciprocated between the first sphere and the second sphere so that the first sphere Since the distance between the second sphere and the second sphere can be reduced, the distance between the first sphere and the second sphere when passing through the second passage can be easily set to a predetermined amount or less. As a result, the player can be expected to be guided to an advantageous passage, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Any one of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3 includes a gaming board having an opening at the center, and the second passage is disposed at an opening of the gaming board.

According to the gaming machine CB4, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in any of the gaming machines CB1 to CB3, the gaming machine includes a gaming board having an opening at the center, and the second passage is disposed at the opening of the gaming board. Therefore, the space in the front-rear direction can be used effectively. Therefore, it is possible to easily ensure the entire length of the second passage.
<About the concept of the invention using the magnetic part C2400, c5400, c6400 (passage part CRt2004) as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising a displacement member that is at least partially disposed in a passage path of a sphere and is formed to be displaceable by the weight of the sphere, when the first sphere that passes through the passage path reaches the displacement member, In a state where the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, and the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the second that follows the first sphere. The game machine CC1 is characterized in that the ball passes through a portion where the ball is lifted above the displacement member and is guided to a different path from the first ball.

  Here, there is known a gaming machine including a sorting member that operates by the weight of a game ball and distributes the game ball into a first passage and a second passage (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-148189). . However, in the above-described conventional technology, the ball only flows downward in the weight direction, so that there is a problem that the interest of the game is insufficient.

  On the other hand, according to the gaming machine CC1, when the first sphere passing through the passage route reaches the displacement member, the displacement member is displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, and the displacement member is the first sphere. In the state displaced from the predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere, the second sphere that follows the first sphere passes through the portion that is lifted upward of the displacement member and is guided to a different path from the first sphere. , Can enhance the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine CC1, a path through which the second sphere is guided through a portion that is lifted upward of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion that can attract the sphere by a magnetic force. CC2.

  According to the gaming machine CC2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CC1, the passage through which the second sphere is guided through the portion lifted upward of the displacement member is formed by a magnetic portion that can attract the sphere by magnetic force. Therefore, it is possible to form an aspect in which the sphere is dropped in the middle of the passage. Therefore, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine CC2, the magnetic unit is located above a portion that is lifted upward of the displacement member.

  According to the gaming machine CC3, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine CC2, the magnetic part is located above the part lifted upward of the displacement member, so that the displacement member is displaced from a predetermined position by the weight of the first sphere. If not, even if the second sphere passes through the portion to be lifted upward, it is possible to reliably form a mode in which the second sphere is not attracted to the magnetic part.

  In the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is rotatably supported, and a portion on which the weight of the first ball is applied and a portion lifted upward are located across the rotation shaft. A gaming machine CC4 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine CC4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine CC2 or CC3, the displacement member is pivotally supported so that the weight of the first sphere acts on the rotation axis, Therefore, when the second sphere passes through the part to be lifted upward, the part through which the second sphere passes can be lifted upward using the weight of the first sphere. Can be easily maintained.

  Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI5, XJ1 to XJ4, XK1 to XK7, XL1 to XL7, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4, and CC1 to CC4, the gaming machine is a slot machine Machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI5, XJ1 to XJ4, XK1 to XK7, XL1 to XL7, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4 and CC1 to CC4, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine Game machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  Gaming machines A1 to A11, B1 to B8, C1 to C10, D1 to D8, E1 to E6, F1 to F10, G0 to G5, H1 to H6, I0 to I3, J0 to J5, K1 to K10, L0, M1 M19, N1 to N11, O1 to O8, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q4, R1 to R4, XA1 to XA8, XB1 to XB6, XC1 to XC7, XD1 to XD7, XE1 to XE6, XF1 to XF6, XG1 to XG13, In any of XH1 to XH6, XI1 to XI5, XJ1 to XJ4, XK1 to XK7, XL1 to XL7, CA1 to CA26, CB1 to CB4 and CC1 to CC4, the gaming machine fuses a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The identification information fluctuates due to the operation, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
13 Game board (part of area composition means)
18 Hinge (part of support shaft)
19 Hinge (part of support shaft)
65a Special prize opening (part of profit granting means)
81 3rd symbol display device (part of attention means, display means)
86 Center frame (frame means)
150 Ball flow unit (part of flow method)
152 1st receiving flow path (1st structure part, 2nd structure part)
153 Second receiving flow path member (second component)
154 Projection (part of deceleration means)
161 Light guide plate (part of attention means)
166 Horizontally mounted substrate unit (predetermined substrate)
170 Decoration means (placement means)
171a Horizontally long groove (low transmission means)
171b Reflecting shape (direction changing means)
180 Displacement restriction device (limitation means)
181 Contact member (part of guide means)
181b Cylindrical holding part (part of guide means)
183 Operation member (operation part)
183f engaging portion 184 coil spring (biasing means)
221 MPU (prevention notification means)
310 partition member (part of auxiliary means, guide means, box-like means)
312 Curved plate (first guide)
314 Lower back section (second guide)
315 Profile penetration (opening)
320 Granular member (part of displacement means, part of arrangement means)
362 Shaft (Regulator)
410 Linear motion member (part of displacement means, second member)
413 Trapezoidal protrusion (second contact part)
414 Projection (second target part)
420 Collision member (part of action means, contact means, first means)
424 Buffer member (second contact part)
430 Contact member (part of displacement means, first member, restriction means)
432 Projection part (first target part)
440 Front transmission member (part of transmission means)
442 Groove forming part (second transmission part, discrimination participating means)
446 transmission protrusion (first transmission portion, contact portion)
470 Transmission arm member (transmission means)
480 Lid member (part of action means, contact means, advance / retreat means)
482 Overhang (representative tip)
489a First contact surface (contact surface)
489b Second contact surface (contact surface)
489c Third contact surface (contact surface)
510 Rear case (part of area construction means)
630 Lower arm member (part of operating means)
633 Support hole (main support means)
634 Arc-shaped hole (auxiliary support means, guide means)
700 Production member (displacement means)
730 Rotating plate (load generating means, displacement generating means)
740 Telescopic displacement member (part of the first member, part of the second member)
743b First guided protrusion (first loaded part)
744b Second guided protrusion (second loaded portion)
760 Shielding design member (part of first member, part of second member)
820 Vertical slide member (part of displacement means)
840 Horizontal slide member (part of displacement means)
870 Long arm member (electrical wiring displacement means)
882a Wall (part of stopping means)
886 Guide recess (corresponding change means)
887 Cylinder protrusion (part of stopping means)
DK2 Electric wiring DK2b Lower winding part (second predetermined part)
LM1 intermediate flow path (part of the flow down means, first component)
MT1 drive motor (drive means)
IE1 internal space (range)
SC4 detection sensor (detection means)
SP1 coil spring (part of load generating means, biasing means)
A10, A3010, A4010 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 Outer frame 12 Inner frame (base body)
18 Hinge (Rotating shaft)
A100, A2100, A3100, A4100 Substrate box (container)
A110 Main controller (object)
A119 Printed circuit board (object, control board)
A120 Switch device (operating means)
A122 Operation part (operator)
A123b Protrusion (first surface)
A130 Key device (operation means)
A133b Protrusion (receiving part)
A133c End (first surface)
A140 Key (operator)
A200, A3200 Box cover (container)
A203 Lower wall (standing wall)
A210 Operation wall (opposite part)
A211 first ridge (projection)
A212 Second ridge (projection)
A220 First connection wall (connection surface)
A230 Second connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A240 Third connection wall (connection surface, other connection surface)
A250 Opening A260 Opening A270, A2270 Covering part A271 Peripheral wall part (covering part)
A271a Base (cover)
A271b Protrusion (bulging part)
A272, A2272 End face wall (covering part, facing part)
A272a Torus (opposite part)
A272b Square part (opposite part)
A2273 ridge (projection)
A280, A290 Standing wall A280a, A290a Tapered surface A281, A291 First standing wall (standing wall)
A282, A292 Second standing wall (standing wall)
A283, A293 Third standing wall (standing wall)
A284 4th standing wall (standing wall)
A300 Box base (container)
A410, A4410 Rotating shaft 110 Main control device (control means)
B1000 Variable winning means (part of route construction means, part of state change means)
B1140 Projection part (deceleration means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1200 Cover member (part of partition member)
B1211 Projection part (deceleration means, part of action part, part of action selection part)
B1212 Extension support (gap reduction means, part of auxiliary means)
B1230 1st detection sensor (a part of entrance area, 1st entrance area)
B1250 Second detection sensor (part of the entrance area, second entrance area)
B1260 Ball guide receiving part (collision suppression means)
B1300 1st guide plate (part of path construction means, part of state change means, first (path) construction means, part of variable means, part of opening / closing displacement means)
B1310 Information Department (Relief Department)
B1311 Rolling surface (part of guide route)
B1313 Sliding part (clearance reducing means)
B1323 sliding part (gap reduction means)
B1500 second guide plate (a part of the path construction means, a part of the state change means, a second (path) construction means, a part of the variable means)
B1510 Information Department (Relief Department)
B1511 Rolling surface (part of guide route)
B1513 Sliding part (clearance reducing means)
B1523 Sliding part (clearance reducing means)
B2300 Opening / closing plate (part of path construction means, first path construction means, part of opening / closing displacement means)
B2500 Opening and closing bar (a part of route constructing means, second route constructing means)
B4260 Ball guidance receiving part (part of the entrance area)
B4360 Front projecting part (part of auxiliary means)
B9140 Projection part (part of action part)
BKL1 Left inclined trajectory (part of guide route, second guide route)
BKL2 right trajectory (part of guide route, first guide route)
BL1 Left flow path (part of flow path)
BL2 Right side down flow route (part of down flow route)
BL21 Left-handed downflow route (part of downflow route)
BL22 Right-handed downflow route (part of downflow route)
B22300 1st guide plate (a part of route construction means)
B2500 2nd guide plate (part of route construction means)
B23300 1st guide plate (part of opening / closing means, part of prevention means)
B23340 Transmission hole (part of transmission means)
B23430 Rotating member (part of transmission means)
B23500 Second guide plate (part of prevention means, part of opening / closing means)
B23800 switching device (part of switching means)
B24720 Transmission rotating body (part of repairing means)
B25110 Drive solenoid (part of drive means)
B25640 transmission member (part of transmission means)
B25700 switching device (part of switching means)
B1001 first specific winning opening (a part of a predetermined winning opening, a part of a pitching area, a part of a predetermined area)
B1002 Second specific prize opening (part of predetermined prize opening, part of pitch area, part of predetermined area)
B1410 1st solenoid (part of repair means, part of drive means)
B1610 2nd solenoid (part of repairing means, part of driving means)
110 Main controller (part of comparison means, part of determination means)
640 2nd prize opening (part of the predetermined area)
B640a Electric accessories (part of opening / closing means, part of prevention means)
BSC221 first detection sensor (part of detection means, part of determination means)
BSC222 second detection sensor (part of detection means, part of determination means)
C13 Game board C60 Base board (game board)
C60a Opening C122, C2122, C4122 Lower bottom surface (reciprocating surface, first passage)
C122a Outflow surface (outflow part)
C123a, C4123a Notch (inflow part)
C130, C2130 Back member (base member)
C140, C2140 First intermediate member (base member)
C142, C2142 bottom surface (upstream surface, second passage)
C144, C2144 passage part (first passage)
C170, C2170, C3170 Distribution member (displacement member, main body)
C172, C2172 receiving part (first side)
C172b, C2172b Bottom portion (first surface)
C173, C2173 Rolling part (2nd surface)
C2174 Shaft C190 Decoration member (weight part)
C192 Axis C2300 Magnet (Adsorption member)
C2400, C5400 Magnetic part (adsorption member, bottom surface forming member)
COPin, COP2000in Inlet (inflow part)
CRt2 second passage (first passage)
CRt3 third passage (second passage)
CRt4 4th passage (first passage)
CRt5 5th passage (second passage)
CRt2001 first passage (first passage)
CRt2002 second passage (second passage)
CRt2003 third passage (first passage)
CRt2004 4th passage (second passage)
CRt2005 fifth passage (second passage)
CB1 sphere (first sphere)
CB2 sphere (second sphere)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising a game area where a game ball flows down, a route configuration means that can be switched between a first state that constitutes a guide route that can guide the game ball, and a second state that does not constitute the guide route,
The route configuration means can configure a first guide route and a second guide route different from the first guide route as the guide route,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the first guide route includes an upper arrangement portion arranged on the upper side of the second guide route. The entrance area includes a first entrance area and a second entrance area different from the first entrance area,
The first guide route is configured to be able to guide a game ball to the first entrance area,
The second guide route is configured to be able to guide a game ball to the second entrance area,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the second guide route includes an upper arrangement portion arranged on the upper side of the first guide route.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route are configured to intersect each other in a predetermined direction.

Images